Today’s News 15th April 2020

  • 65% Of Greek Hotels Face Bankruptcy As Lockdowns Continue
    65% Of Greek Hotels Face Bankruptcy As Lockdowns Continue

    The Greek tourism industry has collapsed in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic and on track to lose at least 50% of its revenues in 2020, said Grigoris Tasios, President of the Greek Hoteliers Association, who spoke with the Greek Reporter last week.

    The Hellenic Chamber of Hotels, a group that oversees the tourism industry in Greece, warned in a new study on Monday that a bankruptcy wave looms.

    Alexandros Vasilikos, the president of the Chamber, told the Greek Reporter this week that a recovery in the tourism industry, reverting to 2019 growth rates, could take a very long time to achieve.

    According to the Chamber’s study, 65% of Greek hotels indicate that the threat of bankruptcy is “likely” or “most likely” — at 46.6% and 18.3%, respectively.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hotel in Greece 

    About 95% of hotels said their business volumes had been halved since the crisis unfolded. The Chamber is estimating that the hotel sector would lose upwards of 4.46 billion Euros in 2020. 

    Tasios told Greek Reporter last week that the tourism industry is facing an unprecedented crisis: 

    “It is very difficult to plan ahead during these times, simply because we do not know how long the coronavirus scare will last. We hope to launch the Greek tourist season on July 1, but this is speculative, since everything will depend on how the virus situation will unfold,” he said.

    Tasios said about 300 hotels are currently operating in the entire country under strict social distancing rules. Thousands remain closed, as nationwide lockdowns from mid-March extend into April. 

    “We really do not know how many will be in a position to reopen when the situation becomes normal again,” he said, noting that hoteliers up and down the country basically have zero income right now.

    “We are monitoring developments in the pandemic on a day-to-day basis, not just in Greece but throughout the world, and in particular, in the countries that are tourist markets for Greece,” Tasios said. He then added that the number of arrivals from Greece’s traditional markets will probably be far lower than that of previous years.

    “I think that the situation in Germany, UK, France, Poland and maybe Russia, countries that are among the top five tourism markets for Greece, does not allow much optimism about a quick rebound in visitors,” he explained.

    The Greek Ministry of Tourism announced last month that it would reopen the industry around April 30. 

    For the remainder of the year, tourism across the Western world will struggle to attract guests, specifically in Europe and the US.

    We noted last month that the Spanish tourism industry plummeted after the country went into lockdown following a massive surge in cases and deaths. The tourism industry across Europe has likely gone bust as well.

    Flight bans across the world have made it almost impossible for people to travel to top tourist destinations. 

    Several weeks ago, we reported how the services sector in the US crashed, especially travel and tourism and other consumer-facing industries.

    With no proven vaccine, people are likely to stay home in 2020 — no matter how much optimism governments create in their attempt to reopen crashed economies. It could be years until the global travel and tourism industry recovers. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 02:45

  • Will Quiet Middle East Last? Or Is It Lull Before Next Storm?
    Will Quiet Middle East Last? Or Is It Lull Before Next Storm?

    Authored by Martin Sieff via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    Across the Middle East, the coronavirus is stirring up both upheavals and more subtle changes from Tel Aviv to Riyadh, little reported and when covered little understood in the Western media.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In Israel, the virus has enabled that master political magician Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to pull off yet another spectacular escape as improbable as any in a James Bond or Star Wars movie to remain in power indefinitely.

    After matching him in three successive national elections, Blue and White opposition leader, former Army Chief of Staff retired Lieutenant General Benny Gantz finally blinked: Because of the coronavirus pandemic crisis, he agreed to enter into a coalition with Netanyahu leading it for the first 18 months.

    This is more than enough time for Netanyahu, a master political infighter and intriguer to splinter Blue and White into fragments. Indeed, Gantz has already done the biggest part of the job for him.

    His own top allies in the new party, former Finance Minister Yair Lapid and former Defense Minister and Army Chief of Staff Moshe Ya’alon both firmly opposed any agreement to compromise with Netanyahu refused to go along with it. Currently, even Gantz and Netanyahu have not yet finalized their agreement, but Netanyahu has seized the initiative from him. His record in power over the past decade suggests he will not release it easily.

    Netanyahu can at least boast that his lockdown has kept Israel relatively isolated from the pandemic. That is not the case in Iran, which boasts close trade and energy ties with China and where the virus has been raging ferociously.

    That of course, is also the case in the United States. Extremist US hawks have been gloating – hopefully – that the crisis in Iran might discredit and topple the government there. That seems very unlikely at the moment.

    What remains possible is that if the virus does significantly “decapitate” the current leadership in Tehran, more extreme and unpredictable rather than more moderate figures may take over more ready to act on provocations from Washington rather than play them down.

    In Saudi Arabia, the virus may also have unpredictable “cushion shot” – surprise ricochet – effects.

    Saudi Arabia’s elite King Feisal Specialist Hospital, which treats members of the kingdom’s royal family, is said to be on “high alert” as senior members of the Al Saud clan become infected with COVID-19. As many as 150 royals in the kingdom are now believed to have contracted the virus, according to a report in the New York Times.

    The highest royal to be infected so far is Prince Faisal bin Bandar bin Abdulaziz al Saud the governor of the capital Riyadh who is in his 70s and therefore at increased risk. Worse yet, at the time of writing, he is said to be in intensive care.

    King Salman bin Abdulaziz, aged 84 is believed to have taken refuge on an island palace near the city of Jeddah on the Red Sea along with Crown Prince Mohamed Bin Salman on the same coast with his ministers. But these moves , if extended, may isolate them dangerously from the national centers of power.

    Bin Salman was already in an uncharacteristic subdued mood before the pandemic hit as his oil price war on Russia and the United States backfired disastrously. Since then, he has been busy mending bridges with Moscow and appears close to completing a deal on reducing oil production with the Kremlin.

    However, the prolonged slump in global oil prices will certainly continue and may intensify. Russia is in a sound position to ride out such a longer-term wave: Saudi Arabia is not.

    If on top of all this, Bin Salman himself should contract the coronavirus, he has made so many enemies across society from royal to business circles with his reckless, warmongering and spendthrift policies that any sign of personal vulnerability could launch an attempt to drive him from power. He has almost certainly survived at least one assassination attempt already.

    Only last month, Bin Salman ordered the arrest of two senior members of the royal family – Prince Ahmed bin Abdulaziz, the younger brother of King Salman, and Mohammed bin Nayef, his first cousin and the king’s nephew.

    Like Netanyahu, Bin Salman has good reason for caution rather than dangerous adventures as both men struggle to maintain their increasingly precarious bases of power. That should point to a quieter, more peaceful region, at least in the short term.

    But as I learned a long time ago in my native North Belfast, no time is more dangerous than when things get too quiet in a dangerous neighborhood.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 02:00

  • US Flexes Military Might Near Russian Forces In Provocative F-35 Flight Over Syria
    US Flexes Military Might Near Russian Forces In Provocative F-35 Flight Over Syria

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    The U.S. military flew their new F-35 stealth jet over Syria’s skies this past week, as they display their strength in front of the Russian Armed Forces who are only a few kilometers away from the American troops in the eastern Euphrates region.

    In a tweet on Monday, the Special Ops Joint Task Force-Operation Inherent Resolve (OIR) in Syria and Iraq released three photos showing the F-35 above Syria, likely in the Al-Hasakah or Deir Ezzor governorates.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “A USAF F-35A Lightning II fighter jet flies near the ATG in Syria, April 10, 2020. Coalition and partner forces continue to strike at extremist organizations in Syria despite COVID-19, reflecting the world-wide unity to see an enduring defeat delivered against Daesh,” the U.S. military account posted. 

    The three photos showed up close and far away shots of the F-35A as it flew over the skies of eastern Syria.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Interesting, the statement invoked the ongoing pandemic which has severely impacted the US military – a situation no doubt closely watched by America’s rivals and enemies.

    The coalition statement indicated that US strikes in Syria would continue “despite COVID-19, reflecting world-wide unity…”.

    While the U.S. conducted this flight, the Russian military was likely watching from afar, as they have headquartered their forces in eastern Syria at the Qamishli Airport in the northern region of the Al-Hasakah Governorate.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 01:00

  • A Brave New Normal, CJ Hopkins Has A Theory
    A Brave New Normal, CJ Hopkins Has A Theory

    Authored (satirically) by CJ Hopkins via ConsentFactory.org,

    So the War on Populism is finally over. Go ahead, take a wild guess who won.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I’ll give you a hint. It wasn’t the Russians, or the white supremacists, or the gilets jaunes, or Jeremy Corbyn’s Nazi Death Cult, or the misogynist Bernie Bros, or the MAGA-hat terrorists, or any of the other real or fictional “populist” forces that global capitalism has been waging war on for the last four years.

    What? You weren’t aware that global capitalism was fighting a War on Populism? That’s OK, most other folks weren’t. It wasn’t officially announced or anything. It was launched in the summer of 2016, just as the War on Terror was ending, as a sequel to the War on Terror, or a variation on the War on Terror, or continuation of the War on Terror, or … whatever, it doesn’t really matter anymore, because now we’re fighting the War on Death, or the War on Minor Cold-like Symptoms, depending on your age and general state of health.

    That’s right, folks, once again, global capitalism (a/k/a “the world”) is under attack by an evil enemy. GloboCap just can’t catch a break. From the moment it defeated communism and became a global ideological hegemon, it has been one evil enemy after another.

    No sooner had it celebrated winning the Cold War and started ruthlessly restructuring and privatizing everything than it was savagely attacked by “Islamic terrorists,” and so was forced to invade Iraq and Afghanistan, and kill and torture a lot of people, and destabilize the entire Middle East, and illegally surveil everybody, and … well, you remember the War on Terror.

    Then, just as the War on Terror seemed to be finally winding down, and the only terrorists left were the “self-radicalized” terrorists (many of whom weren’t even actual terrorists), and it looked like GloboCap was finally going to be able to finish privatizing and debt-enslaving everything and everyone in peace, wouldn’t you know it, we were attacked again, this time by the global conspiracy of Russian-backed, neo-fascist “populists” that caused the Brexit and elected Trump, and tried to elect Corbyn and Bernie Sanders, and loosed the gilets jaunes on France, and who’ve been threatening the “fabric of Western democracy” with dissension-sowing Facebook memes.

    Unfortunately, unlike the War on Terror, the War on Populism didn’t go that well. After four years of fighting, GloboCap (a/k/a the neoliberal Resistance) had … OK, they had snuffed both Corbyn and Sanders, but they had totally blown the Russiagate psyop, and so were looking at four more years of Trump, and Lord knows how many of Johnson in the U.K. (which had actually left the European Union), and the gilets jaunes weren’t going away, and, basically, “populism” was still on the rise (if not in reality, in hearts and minds).

    And so, just as the War on Populism had replaced (or redefined) the War on Terror, the War on Death has been officially launched to replace (or redefine) the War on Populism … which means (you guessed it), once again, it’s time to roll out another “brave new normal.”

    The character of this brave new normal is, at this point, unmistakably clear … so clear that most people cannot see it, because their minds are not prepared to accept it, so they do not recognize it, though they are looking right at it. Like Dolores in the Westworld series, “it doesn’t look like anything” to them. To the rest of us, it looks rather totalitarian.

    In the span of approximately 100 days, the entire global capitalist empire has been transformed into a de facto police state. Constitutional rights have been suspended. Most of us are under house arrest. Police are rounding up anyone not cooperating with the new emergency measures. They are pulling riders off of public transportation, arresting people whose papers aren’t in order, harrassing, beatingintimidating, and arbitrarily detaining anyone they decide is “a danger to public health.”

    Authorities are openly threatening to forcibly pull people out of their homes and quarantine them. Cops are hunting down runaway grandmothers. They’re raiding services in churches and synagogues. Citizens are being forced to wear ankle monitors. Families out for a walk are being menaced by robots and Orwellian drones.

    Counterterrorism troops have been deployed to deal with non-compliant “rule breakers.” Anyone the U.S. authorities deem to have “intentionally spread the coronavirus” can be arrested and charged as a coronavirus terrorist. Artificial intelligence firms are working with governments to implement systems to log and track our contacts and movements. As a recent Foreign Policy article put it:

    “The counterterrorism analogy is useful because it shows the direction of travel of pandemic policy. Imagine a new coronavirus patient is detected. Once he or she tests positive, the government could use cell-phone data to trace everyone he or she has been in close proximity to, perhaps focusing on those people who were in contact for more than a few minutes. Your cell-phone signal could then be used to enforce quarantine decisions. Leave your apartment and the authorities will know. Leave your phone behind and they will call you. Run the battery down and a police car will be at your door in a manner of minutes …”

    I could go on, but I think you get the picture, or … well, you either do or you don’t.

    And that is the really terrifying part of the War on Death and our “brave new normal” … not so much the totalitarianism. (Anyone who’s been paying attention is not terribly shocked by GloboCap’s decision to implement a global police state. The simulation of democracy is all fine and good, until the unwashed masses start to get unruly, and require a reminder of who’s in charge, which is what we are being treated to currently.)

    No, the terrifying part is how millions of people immediately switched off their critical faculties, got into line, and started goose-stepping, and parroting hysterical propaganda, and reporting their neighbors to the police for going outside for a walk or jog (and then sadistically shrieked abuse down at them like the Goodbye Jews Girl in Schindler’s List as they were wrestled to the ground and arrested).

    They are out there, right now, on the Internet, millions of these well-meaning fascists, patrolling for signs of the slightest deviation from the official coronavirus narrative, bombarding everyone with meaningless graphs, decontextualized death statistics, X-rays of fibrotic lungs, photos of refrigerated morgue trucksmass graves, and other sensationalistic horrors intended to short-circuit critical thinking and shut down any and all forms of dissent.

    Although undeniably cowardly and sickening, this kind of behavior is also not shocking. Sadly, when you terrorize people enough, the majority will regress to their animal instincts. It isn’t a question of ethics, or politics. It is purely a question of self-preservation. When you cancel the normal structure of society and place everyone in a “state of emergency” … well, it’s like what happens in a troop of chimpanzees when the alpha chimp dies or is killed by a challenger. The other chimps run around hooting and grimacing until it’s clear who the new dominant primate is, then they bend over to demonstrate their submission.

    Totalitarians understand this. Sadists and cult leaders understand this. When the people you are dominating get unruly, and start questioning your right to dominate them, you need to fabricate a “state of emergency” and make everyone feel very afraid, so that they turn (or return) to you for protection from whatever evil enemy is out there, threatening the cult, or the Fatherland, or whatever. Then, once they’ve returned to the fold, and stopped questioning your right to dominate them, you can introduce a new set of rules that everybody needs to follow to prevent this kind of thing happening again.

    This is obviously what is happening at the moment. But what you probably want to know is … why is it happening? And why is it happening at this precise moment?

    Lucky for you, I have a theory.

    No, it doesn’t involve Bill Gates, Jared Kushner, the WHO, and a global conspiracy of Chinese Jews defiling our precious bodily fluids with their satanic-alien 5G technology. It’s a little less exciting and more abstract than that (although some of those characters are probably part of it … all right, probably not the Chinese Jews, or the Satanic-Alien Illuminati).

    See, I try to focus more on systems (like global capitalism) than on individuals. And on models of power rather than the specific people in power at any given time. Looking at things that way, this global lockdown and our brave new normal makes perfect sense. Stay with me now … this gets kind of heady.

    What we are experiencing is a further evolution of the post-ideological model of power that came into being when global capitalism became a global-hegemonic system after the collapse of the Soviet Union. In such a global-hegemonic system, ideology is rendered obsolete. The system has no external enemies, and thus no ideological adversaries. The enemies of a global-hegemonic system by definition can only be internal. Every war becomes an insurgency, a rebellion breaking out within the system, as there is no longer any outside.

    As there is no longer any outside (and thus no external ideological adversary), the global-hegemonic system dispenses with ideology entirely. Its ideology becomes “normality.” Any challenge to “normality” is henceforth regarded as an “abnormality,” a “deviation from the norm,” and automatically delegitimized. The system does not need to argue with deviations and abnormalities (as it was forced to argue with opposing ideologies in order to legitimize itself). It simply needs to eliminate them. Opposing ideologies become pathologies … existential threats to the health of the system.

    In other words, the global-hegemonic system (i.e., global capitalism) becomes a body, the only body, unopposed from without, but attacked from within by a variety of opponents … terrorists, extremists, populists, whoever. These internal opponents attack the global-hegemonic body much like a disease, like a cancer, an infection, or a virus. And the global-hegemonic body reacts like any other body would.

    Is this model starting to sound familiar?

    I hope so, because that is what is happening right now. The system (i.e., global capitalism, not a bunch of guys in a room hatching a scheme to sell vaccines) is reacting to the last four years of populist revolt in a predictable manner. GloboCap is attacking the virus that has been attacking its hegemonic body. No, not the coronavirus. A much more destructive and multiplicitous virus … resistance to the hegemony of global capitalism and its post-ideological ideology.

    If it isn’t already clear to you yet that this coronavirus in no way warrants the totalitarian emergency measures that have been imposed on most of humanity, it will be become clear in the months ahead. Despite the best efforts of the “health authorities” to count virtually anything as “a Covid-19 death,” the numbers are going to tell the tale.

    The “experts” are already memory-holing, or recalibrating, or contextualizing, their initial apocalyptic projections. The media are toning down the hysteria. The show isn’t totally over yet, but you can feel it gradually coming to an end.

    In any event, whenever it happens, days, weeks, or months from now, GloboCap will dial down the totalitarianism, and let us out, so we can go back to work in whatever remains of the global economy … and won’t we all be so very grateful! There will be massive celebrations in the streets, Italian tenors singing on balconies, chorus lines of dancing nurses! The gilets jaunes will call it quits, the Putin-Nazis will stop with the memes, and Americans will elect Joe Biden president!

    Or, all right, maybe not that last part, but, the point is, it will be a brave new normal! People will forget all that populism nonsense, and just be grateful for whatever McJobs they can get to be able to pay the interest on their debts, because, hey … global capitalism isn’t so bad compared to living under house arrest!

    And, if not, no problem for GloboCap. They’ll just have to lock us down again, and keep locking us down, over and over, indefinitely, until we get our minds right. I mean, it’s not like we’re going to do anything about it … right? Didn’t we just demonstrate that? Sure, we’ll bitch and moan again, but then they’ll whip out those pictures of mass graves and death trucks, and the graphs, and all those scary projections, and the Blockwart-hotlines will start ringing again, and …


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/15/2020 – 00:05

  • 'Rice ATM' Feeds Vietnam's Working Poor In Covid Lockdown
    ‘Rice ATM’ Feeds Vietnam’s Working Poor In Covid Lockdown

    Vietnam’s working-class poor are being fed by a 24/7 automatic dispensing machine providing free rice following a nationwide lockdown to curb the spread of COVID-19, reported Vietnam+.

    Hoang Tuan Anh, the Vietnamese entrepreneur behind the idea, designed the “rice ATM” to help “underprivileged people that have been impacted” by the shutdowns.

    As of Tuesday, there are 265 cases of the virus in the country with zero deaths. The spread has been slowed through strict social distancing measures enforced by the Communist government.

    The first ATM was installed in Ho Chi Minh City, a city in southern Vietnam. It dispenses a 3.3lb bag of rice to workers, many of whom have lost their jobs, as the government has shut down all non-essential businesses to slow the spread of the virus.

    Vietnam+ said the rice ATM would operate until the end of June. Similar ATMs have been set up in other large metro areas across the country.

    “This rice ATM has been helpful. With this one bag of rice, we can have enough for one day,” a 34-year-old mother of three children told Reuters. “Now, we only need other food. Our neighbors sometimes gave us some leftover food, or we have instant noodles.”

    Reuters documents how the rice ATM works in several images: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    24/7 rice ATM in Vietnam. h/t Reuters 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Women filling a bag with rice at ATM. h/t Reuters 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Man filling a bag with rice at ATM. h/t Reuters

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At least three rice ATMs can be seen at the one location. h/t Reuters 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Behind the scenes of rice stockpiled, being prepared to be placed into rice ATM hopper. h/t Reuters 

    Considering the hunger crisis developing in the US since the economy crashed and 17 million people or so have lost their jobs, could rice ATMs, or maybe food ATMs, be next? 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:45

  • An Alchemist Explains To Joe Sixpack: "COVID-19 Alters America's Hidden 'War' Forever"
    An Alchemist Explains To Joe Sixpack: “COVID-19 Alters America’s Hidden ‘War’ Forever”

    Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    A perception ‘gap’, so wide, you could sail a Cruise Liner through it.

    • On the one hand, we have the looming spectre of recession; a major loss of jobs, and of earnings cratered (some 80% of the global workforce has seen their workplaces closed, or partly closed, as a result of the virus crisis),

    • and on the other hand, the shocking non-sequitur of the U.S. Fed reporting that, despite the crisis, ‘the average consumer expectation for higher stock-market prices one year hence has now surged to 47.7%, the highest on record’.

    ZeroHedge wryly comments, “Right … because with his job gone, his $400 dollars of emergency savings just spent on a roll of toilet paper, his bank preparing to foreclose on his home, all while a deadly virus lurks in every corner, all Joe Sixpack can think of – is how to get his ‘money on the sidelines’ into the stock market – since it is about to soar to all-time highs. And so, thanks to the Fed’s now grotesque interventions in all capital markets … as the economy slides into a depression, it is only ‘logical’ – we use the term loosely – that expectations of higher stock prices have never been higher.”

    A freak result, devoid of serious consideration? No. Actually, the paradox rather neatly ties together what is implicit, from that which has been explicit in U.S. policy, both domestically, and in terms of its foreign policy.

    In foreign policy – in the post-Covid era – we see tensions with China ratchetting higher. The U.S. already is engaged in a full-spectrum info-war to blame China for the virus (and to divert criticism from the U.S.’ lack of preparedness). China, recalling the earlier ‘Century of Humiliation’ visited on it by western states, and sensing some inherent racism in the taunts, inevitably is responding unusually assertively.

    In a recent episode of soul-searching by an Obama National Security adviser, Ben Rhodes has written of GW Bush’s speech (in wake of 9/11): “Our War on Terror begins with al-Qaeda, but it does not end there. It will not end until every terrorist group of global reach has been found, stopped, and defeated”. He further defined the nature of the conflict by saying, “Americans are asking, ‘Why do they hate U.S.?’ They hate what we see right here in this chamber – a democratically elected government”. To have this unfathomable event framed in a way that fitted neatly into the American narrative that I’d grown up with in the 1980s and ’90s, was reassuring, Rhodes admits.

    He later (in the article), says that he had been naïve, and swept along by his emotions, at seeing New York’s Twin Towers cascade down into dust – and was roused by Bush’s fiery rhetoric. Mr Sixpack probably feels similarly: He too, had been told that America’s economy was strong and booming, until the virus flew into it, despatching America’s economy into free fall. Shocked and angry, Joe probably hopes that America will ‘Give it to them’ (the Chinese that is, “they”, whom the narrative suggests were responsible for it).

    That is the explicit – in conjunction with Trump’s Trade War, triggered ostensibly by China’s ‘hijacking’ of America’s commercial assets.

    The ‘unsaid’ in this narrative is an old story of warfare. Destroy your enemy’s supply-lines to weaken him. In Britain in 1891, a small circle of the inner élite was formed, in secret, around Cecil Rhodes, the South African diamond millionaire, and Lord Rothschild. Its members aimed to renew the bond between Britain and the U.S., and they believed that ruling-class men of Anglo-Saxon descent, rightly sat at the top of a hierarchy built on predominance in trade, industry, banking and the exploitation of other lands (much as America’s élites do today).

    This élite harbored a deep-rooted fear however, that unless they acted decisively, British power and influence across the world would be eroded, and replaced by that of a burgeoning Germany. In the years immediately after the Boer War, the decision was reached: The danger had to be addressed. And ‘war’ with Germany was planned: initially as a severing of its supply-lines; a propaganda ‘war’ casting Germans as child-eaters, and through diplomatic containment.

    Narratives were harnessed to this objective, and the historian, Paul Vincent, tellingly recreates the atmosphere of jubilation that surrounded the outbreak of the war that was truly the fateful watershed of the twentieth century. H.G. Wells, for instance, gushed: “I find myself enthusiastic for this war against Prussian militarism … Every sword that is drawn against Germany is a sword drawn for peace.” Wells later coined the mendacious slogan “the war to end war”.

    Britain, from the onset of war in 1914, imposed a tight naval blockade on Germany. By preventing food from being imported into the country, the British brought starvation and malnutrition to large masses of the German people. German submarine warfare was a desperate response to the British blockade—a blockade so effective that it threatened to force the Germans out of the war.

    Fast-forward to today: The uprooting, and ‘re-patriating’ of China’s supply-lines back to America (given new fuel now, from the discovery that so many of America’s basic medical needs are ‘made in China’); seizing the commanding heights of technology; building out, militarily, into Space; mobilizing Europe against China; sanctioning China’s external sources of energy, and casting China as the virus-demon – all form today’s toolbox for what threatens the Anglo-élite.

    Perhaps the resident ‘Alchemist’ at ZeroHedge, will take Joe Sixpack aside, and quietly say to him:

    “Look, Joe, Covid-19 is merely a virus – an invisible organism. You can’t see it. You cannot ‘make war’ on it. When the British began imagining Germans as demonic monsters to be destroyed, they ended by not only destroying European culture, but also any commitment to the Ancient World’s notion of Virtù or Homeric heroic conduct.

    In their place, successive generations embraced relativism, nihilism, brooding pessimism and resentment. And from the massive, warring, governments’ intrusions into every facet of civil society, arose the German Kriegssozialismus that was to become the model for the Bolsheviks. Again, as Vincent points out, “the British achieved control over their economy, unequalled by any of the other belligerent states: But everywhere state seizure of social power, was accompanied and fostered by propaganda lies, unparalleled in history, to that time”.

    But why (asks Joe) did you smile so enigmatically when I said that I might buy stock (shares) on credit provided by my broker, to try to recoup my loss of earnings, as a result of the Coronavirus?

    “Well”, says the Alchemist, “I was thinking of the ‘hidden ‘war’, and how a virus ‘out of nowhere’ has changed its course, for good”.

    “What do you mean?”, queries Joe.

    “You recall how you said that the U.S. economy was fundamentally the strongest in the world? Well that’s not quite true. Sometime ago, U.S. growth began to falter, and the Authorities opted for a debt-driven, consumer-led economy. Money was printed (as credit), and – normally – a lot of new money or debt in circulation, would have created inflation (such as we had during the Reagan Administration).

    “How we managed this difficulty (apart from regularly re-jigging the price index), was by the so-called ‘China Trade’. China was then in the midst of its Industrial Revolution: they sent cheap products to Walmart. They effectively subsidised the middle classes, by giving U.S. a standard of living – access to cheap consumer-goods – which otherwise, we could not have afforded. And better still, they recirculated the monetary proceeds back to Wall Street, through buying U.S. Treasury bonds.

    “The point here, was that in so doing (buying our debt), the Chinese allowed U.S. to shrink our created, new-money ‘footprint’, by exporting U.S. dollar debt out of harm’s way – to Emerging Markets. We have lent out $13 trillion in this way, thus repressing the domestic money footprint.

    “These little ‘tricks’ were necessary to avoid inflation. But the inflation threat was mitigated also, in another way. All this new money was used to ‘financialise’ and leverage ‘everything’, from healthcare to education. They blew ‘bubbles’.

    This gave U.S. a simulacrum of ‘growth’ – but money-printing did not make the dollars available to you, I’m afraid, Joe. They got stuck in the financial system and were hoarded. You may have noticed that times were getting less rosy. But that was also a result of the U.S. business model, which has always prioritised capital formation and allowed labour costs to take the strain, or be eased-down by off-shoring labour costs to overseas.

    “Ah, but what of the ‘hidden war’ that you spoke about. How does that fit in?”, asks Joe.

    “You recall what I said earlier about Britain fearing that it could not stay at the pinnacle of international power forever? And seeing Germany somehow coming together, and building-out towards the East, in order in order to rival Britain? Well, China some years ago, stopped re-circulating the proceeds from the China Trade back to Wall Street, and instead started building-out towards Central Asia. It began spending the proceeds of the ‘China Trade’ building the Belt and Road, instead. As Germany had threatened to rival Britain, China was on a path to rival America.

    This posed a problem for the U.S.: firstly, how now to finance that China Trade; and secondly – not least – how to let the middle classes’ down gently, from the loss of their ‘China Trade’ ‘subsidy’, and avoid a ‘revolt’ inside the U.S. The blowing of the housing ‘bubble’ was intended – at least partly – as the offset.

    “Equally problematic for U.S. was that the Chinese-Russian Eurasian project, was intended to channel trade – in a hugely important sphere, including energy and raw materials – not via our channel – the dollar – but rather, away from it. The dollar has been ‘squeezed’ by the de-dollarisation crowd since at least 2007.

    Hence all the ‘tricks’ in the toolbox that I outlined earlier. But it got worse: We have tried to keep all the oil sales in the world going through the dollar (sanctioning non-compliant producers, creating instability of supply etc.), but scattergun of sanctions just brought everybody into our jurisdiction, and made their financial systems subject to arbitrary U.S. Treasury threat. The world doesn’t want to do that anymore. The revolt grew.

    This, in essence, was the ‘hidden war’. And it was not going so well: The U.S. Treasury – simply – was running out of further bubbles to blow. Finally, it had resorted to blowing the ‘everything bubble’ to maintain the appearance of a strong economy; but as this structure became ever bigger, more leveraged, more complex and thus opaque – so it became less stable. The Coronavirus ‘pin’ popped the bubble – forcing Washington to deploy unlimited money-printing, and to bailout simply, ‘everything’ (which is the inevitable ‘logical’ response to an ‘everything bubble’, I would imagine)”, said the Alchemist.

    “Then, what happens now” blurts out Joe, alarmed: “Will it end in war, like in the 19th Century?”

    “Possibly, but probably, not”, responds the Alchemist calmly. “China is too powerful, but its economy inevitably will have been weakened too. More likely, America will continue the struggle against China (and Russia) through proxies, such as in Venezuela, or in the Middle East. (Iran though is a special case, on account of Israel).”

    “At the end of WW1, European economies had been partly shut down by the war – and there were huge dollar debts owing to the U.S. Today, western economies are in partial lockdown due to Covid-19. And national debts today are similarly, more or less, at levels associated with (real) wartimes. And there is the $13 trillion – owed by emerging markets, and for which repayment in full, now must be viewed as problematic.

    “After WWI, there was no debt forgiveness (no debt jubilee), just a pass-the-parcel practiced by the European states, as they tried to off-load their debts onto others. To find an exit, some hoped that austerity could fix the problem. But others did resort to ‘helicopter money’ (much as the U.S. is so doing, in its response to the Covid-19 lockdown). The gold-backed German Reichsmark became the unbacked Papermark. Initially, the Reich financed its war outlays, in large part, through issuing debt. But From May 1923, the quantity of Papermark started spinning out of control. Wholesale prices skyrocketed. By 1918, you could have bought 500 billion eggs for the same money you would have to spend, five years later, for just one egg. The Papermark was scrap value.

    “With the collapse of the currency, unemployment was on the rise. Hyperinflation had impoverished the great majority of the German population, especially the middle class. People suffered from food shortages and cold. And political extremism was on the rise. This is a real risk, since all the earlier Treasury gigs to suppress inflation are no longer available.

    “So what might Washington do – especially about the $13 trillion debt owed by EMs?”, pleaded Joe. “Why don’t they reform the system?”

    “We don’t know what they will do”, sighed the Alchemist, “but the signals suggest that the Central Bankers are toying with a new global, reserve digital crypto-currency – against which EMs (and the U.S.) might devalue their currencies.

    (The former governor of the Bank of England has hinted at something like this).

    It might never happen. The type of ‘crypto’ the Central Bankers have in mind is one giving the authorities complete control: no real money, just a credit at the central bank with ATMs spitting out only what the central banks determine. And no, there will be no real reform – only ‘mumbleswerve’. But that – dirty money, lots and lots of it – is another story. Transparency is not an option.

    “So, you would advise me not to buy stocks?”, asks Joe.

    “No, I wouldn’t Joe. It seems that Trump now wants to bail out the American Middle Class in a different way. I know you, like many others, like to check out daily their 401K (stocks held as a future pension provision). And if it’s up, they are happy; if not they are gloomy. So Trump is trying to blast-up markets, with a wall of freshly printed money – and bailouts unlimited.

    “The President has taken full control of the (nuclear) button that controls the global supply of money, in dollars. He has control of the Treasury which has completed its take-over and merger with the Fed. How things work is that Congress authorises $450 billion in a CARES bailout. The Treasury gives it to the Fed as its stake – and then instructs the Fed to multiply that stake, by a factor of ten (through printing fresh money). The $450 billion becomes $450 trillion and is handed over to a friendly Hedge Fund – Blackrock – to distribute. And the details of the distribution are all tied up in confidentiality clauses and opacity. Trump becomes a secular Croesus: he can ‘print’ as much as he wishes. Nothing to stop him. Will be able to contain himself?

    Joe sighs.

    “So, the question then, Joe, is – is it really feasible for the market to soar when maybe half the economy is semi-furloughed, and inherent value is plunging?

    “As I mentioned earlier, money ‘printing’ does not always make dollars available. Liquidity is being provided to the U.S. banks: yes, but the problem is not so much liquidity; but one of potential default – especially on the $13 trillion owed overseas. So there is a massive scramble by those overseas debtors for dollars, with which to pay interest, and capital repayments, as they become due – and that means the dollar will soar (for now). It is the dollar strength that brings to world to its nadir (just like the 1930s).

    It is the dollar system that is the really big problem. This virus will either prick the dollar bubble and collapse it in an inflationary spiral downwards – or, the CBs will be forced to find some other solution (though God knows what!)

    Joe sighs again.

    “I’m afraid Joe, that I may not have been much help to you – sorry”.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:25

  • China Will Be Hit With Second Coronavirus Wave In November, Top Shanghai Clinical Expert Warns
    China Will Be Hit With Second Coronavirus Wave In November, Top Shanghai Clinical Expert Warns

    Over the past two weeks we have reported on several occasions that hidden behind Beijing’s endless barrage of lies that “all is well”, China – which rushed to reopen the country in March long before the epidemic was eradicated from the mainland – is starting to suffer a second wave of coronavirus despite the government solemn vows that all new cases are imported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Needless to say, the last thing the global economy – which is mostly shut down everywhere but in China – can take is another Chinese lockdown.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And yet, that’s precisely what may be coming. According to Caixin, China could see another surge in coronavirus infections starting in November, one of the country’s highest-profile medical experts has said, as low numbers of new cases prompt governments nationwide to get people back to work.

    While countries may be able to bring the deadly pandemic under adequate control by autumn, the coming winter may bring a “second wave” of infections in China and elsewhere, said Zhang Wenhong, who heads Shanghai’s Covid-19 clinical expert team and directs the infectious disease department at one of the city’s top hospitals.

    Zhang’s comments come as Chinese officials gradually ease quarantine restrictions as part of efforts to revive the country’s economy. The East Asian nation, where the previously unknown virus was first detected last year, has seen numbers of daily new cases fall in recent weeks after recording thousands of Covid-19-related deaths and rolling out unprecedented lockdowns.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Zhang Wenhong, head of Shanghai’s Covid-19 clinical expert team

    Speaking Saturday during an online livestream broadcast by popular short-video platform Kuaishou, Zhang said China’s experience with disease control means any resurgence in infections later this year will be manageable, and not require a repeat of the dramatic measures taken to curb the virus’s initial spread.

    “China won’t implement any shutdowns, and imported cases will certainly still make up the bulk of the outbreak,” Zhang said. In recent weeks, Beijing has been reporting that infected people traveling into China have made up the vast majority of the country’s new confirmed cases. Of course, Beijing has not been reporting that there were several thousand more urns mysteriously appearing in Wuhan than “official” deaths, so frankly when it comes to Chinese data, it’s all a lie.

    Like other public health experts, Zhang expects that in the long term, countries will have to take a flexible approach to recurring outbreaks. “For a long time, epidemic prevention and control will go through periods of relaxation and tightening. It will be possible to live and work normally, but it probably won’t be possible to completely eradicate the outbreaks,” he said.

    That means countries must continue to fight the pandemic together even after their initial domestic outbreaks have peaked, Zhang said, adding: “Only when all nations have properly controlled the disease will we all be able to live well again.”

    It wasn’t clear just how China would fight its next pandemic without shutting down the entire nation, when that’s precisely what China did in February, and the result has been a historic surge in defaults and delinquencies which Beijing has yet to address even as China’s economy fails to reboot.

    Aggressive testing and contact tracing, combined with immediate hospitalization of confirmed cases, is the secret to effective epidemic control, Zhang said, perhaps unaware that China did none of those and instead simply dragged the sick away to some unknown place while putting down whole towns and provinces under complete lockdown.

    But what may be most troubling of all, is that if China indeed suffers its next wave in November, that is right around the time when Morgan Stanley predicted the US will be hit by a second coronavirus wave as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Incidentally, as we reported earlier today, according to BofA’s latest Fund Managers Survey, a second, more powerful and economically crippling wave of infections similar to the one observed during the Spanish Flu…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … is now the biggest “tail risk” facing investors.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In that case, investors are about to be hit with a perfect storm some time in November/December when not just China but also the US are shut down for a second time. We only bring this up for those who – after watching the recent market surge with a dumbfounded expression on their face – are considering what month to pin their calendar put spread on. Well, now you know.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:12

  • Mapping The Wealthiest Person In Every US State In 2020
    Mapping The Wealthiest Person In Every US State In 2020

    There are different degrees of wealth that exist, even among the richest in America.

    For example, a heavy-hitting millionaire might have the most impressive fortune in his or her home state – but, as Visual Capitalist’s Jeff Desjardins shows below, venture a few miles across the state border, and suddenly they become a small fish in a much bigger pond.

    Today’s map comes to us from HowMuch.net, and it shows the incredible variance in the biggest fortunes on a state-by-state basis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Rich List, by State

    Below is the full list containing the wealthiest person in every U.S. state, based on calculations by Forbes in early March 2020.

    Amazon founder Jeff Bezos tops the list with a net worth of $117.1 billion in the state of Washington — meanwhile, the smallest fortune on the list is located in Alaska at just $0.3 billion.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While all of the names above are considered extraordinarily wealthy in their home states, there is still a magnitude of difference involved. The low end of the list ($0.3 billion) would need to multiply their fortune by 390 times to get up to the $117.1 billion Bezos level.

    To put this another way, the same degree of difference exists between the median household wealth in the U.S. (~$100,000) and a multi-millionaire with $39 million to their name.

    Rising and Falling Fortunes

    The above figures were obtained prior to the COVID-19 market crash, which will surely impact the size of some of the fortunes listed here.

    Who will be most and least impacted by the recent stock market turmoil?

    Even though Jeff Bezos has most of his wealth tied up in Amazon stock, so far it has been relatively unaffected by the volatility. With more people staying home because of social distancing, orders on online platforms such as Amazon have exploded.

    Similarly to Amazon, the heirs of the Walmart fortune in the Walton family — including Jim Walton, Alice Walton, and Rob Walton — are also seeing Walmart’s stock price hold relatively steady in the face of volatility. In fact, some analysts consider Walmart to be the ultimate “recession-proof” stock, as consumers flock to discount goods in poor economic times.

    Warren Buffett is also an interesting case. Though the stock market has certainly disrupted the real-time value of his fortune, that’s not the game that Warren Buffett plays. In fact, he is known for waiting for times of crisis to deploy his cash, and has a significant stockpile of money ready for just this kind of situation.

    Billionaires like Sheldon Adelson in Nevada or Philip Anschutz of Colorado might be singing a different tune than some of the other above magnates. Adelson, for example, owns a good chunk of the Las Vegas Strip, as well as casinos and hotels in Singapore and Macao. Unfortunately, tourism-related businesses are some of the hardest hit in the COVID-19 crash.

    Meanwhile, Anschutz owns the Coachella Music Festival and stakes in many professional sports teams (LA Lakers, LA Kings, and multiple MLS teams), which have all been impacted by the cancellation of big events and gatherings throughout the country. Like many others, Anschutz is probably itching for things to get back to normal.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 23:05

  • Social Distancing Efforts Are Now Cemented Into American Life
    Social Distancing Efforts Are Now Cemented Into American Life

    Authored by Justin McCarthy via Gallup.com,

    Avoiding public transportation such as planes, buses, subways or trains (89%) and small gatherings (84%) has become the norm for more than eight in 10 Americans. Nearly as many Americans are avoiding public places such as stores and restaurants (78%) out of concern about COVID-19. A smaller majority of U.S. adults (61%) have stocked up on food, medical or cleaning supplies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Majorities of Americans have reported taking each of these actions since Gallup polling conducted March 20-22, and figures for most measures have remained at about their current levels since then.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest results, from a probability-based Gallup Panel survey conducted online April 6-9, reflect Americans’ reported actions they have taken to socially distance themselves since late March.

    Some notable differences by subgroup include:

    • Adults aged 18 to 44 are a bit more likely than older adults to have taken each of these actions.

    • Solid majorities within all major political party groups report having taken these measures — but Democrats are most likely to report having done so. The biggest differences between Democrats and Republicans are seen in the percentages saying they’ve avoided public places (86% among Democrats and 70% among Republicans) and avoided small gatherings (92% among Democrats and 74% among Republicans).

    • Few differences exist across income groups in terms of actions they have taken — except for the percentages saying they’ve stocked up on food, medical or cleaning supplies. While at least six in 10 higher-income households (66%) and middle-income households (61%) report having stocked up, less than half of lower-income households (49%) say the same.

    A majority of working adults (63%) say they have worked from home as a result of concerns about the pandemic — on par with the 59% to 63% recorded since March 23.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, one in five U.S. workers have stayed home and have been unable to work as a result of the outbreak. This figure has ranged from 19% to 25% since March 16.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 22:45

  • "Black People Not Allowed" – China Denies Reports It Banned African Residents From Guangzhou
    “Black People Not Allowed” – China Denies Reports It Banned African Residents From Guangzhou

    Africans living in the Southern Chinese city of Guangzhou say they have been victims of racism, forced into quarantine, banned from shops, and evicted from rentals, following five Nigerians testing positive for COVID-19, in a district of the city known as “Little Africa.”

    The South China Morning Post (SCMP) reports infections are centered around Kuangquan Street in Yuexiu district, “has raised the alarm in a city that has so far reported only 463 cases of COVID-19.” 

    Guangzhou is a major trading partner with countries in Africa and has a sizeable African population. 

    Local authorities have forced Africans into a 14-day quarantine and submit to random virus testing. There are even reports that some of these folks have been banned from shops and, in extreme cases, evicted from their rental properties. 

    The move by authorities has triggered a backlash by a Nigerian community group in Guangzhou, led by Maximus Ogbonna, who said,

    “People are not happy because they’re being forced out of their apartments and into hotels where they have to pay [$30] a night for 28 days.” 

    Ogbonna is in a 14-day quarantine at his home. Police installed a camera above his front door to detect if he breaches the health order. 

    African diplomats sent a letter to China’s Foreign Minister Wang Yi saying, “The Group of African Ambassadors in Beijing immediately demands the cessation of forceful testing, quarantine and other inhuman treatments meted out to Africans.”

    Beijing rejected allegations of racism in Guangzhou, saying the accusations are nothing more than a Western ploy to undermine its image in this challenging time. 

    Foreign ministry spokesman Zhao Lijian said on Monday that the Chinese government “treats all foreign personnel in China equally, opposes any differential practices targeting specific groups of people, and has zero tolerance for discriminatory words and deeds.”

    He said he stands with its “brothers” in Africa… 

    However, BBC Africa business editor Larry Madowo was upset with China’s response. He tweeted: “Chinese government’s statement on racist treatment of Africans in the country because of coronavirus is objectively terrible. It’s a word salad that says nothing, offers no apologies and provides air cover for racist officials.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Saturday, the US consulate in Guangzhou advised African Americans to halt all travels to the city. It issued a security alert that read “police ordered bars and restaurants not to serve clients who appear to be of African origin,” and police are conducting mandatory testing and self-quarantine for “anyone with ‘African contacts.’

    AP News said local law enforcement in the city recently responded to rumors that “300,000 black people in Guangzhou were setting off a second epidemic,” which caused alarm. Officials later said the rumor was fake news… Or was it? Because as we’ve explained, the second wave of infections could be imminent, and China is likely to blame foreigners this time around instead of bat soup.

    Twitter account Black Livity China posted a video on Saturday that showed a sign at a Guangzhou McDonald’s that read: “We have been informed that from now on black people are not allowed to enter the restaurant”; McDonald’s told Forbes once it heard of the sign, it “immediately removed the communication and temporarily closed the restaurant” as it was “not representative of our inclusive values.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s new virus cases hit a six-week high over the weekend, sparked mainly from travelers arriving from overseas, well that’s at least what Beijing is telling the world. It seems the Communist government is gearing up for the second infection wave and will likely blame foreigners, maybe specifically Africans in Guangzhou. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 22:25

  • JPM Sees Global Profits "Cratering" 70% In Q2, No Recovery Until 2023
    JPM Sees Global Profits “Cratering” 70% In Q2, No Recovery Until 2023

    Late last week, we showed a chart from Credit Suisse which we described simply as “insanity” because it demonstrated that as the US careened into a depression, with GDP crashing and the unemployment rate soaring, between the latest Fed-driven surge in stocks and the collapse in earnings estimates, the PE multiple on the broader market had eclipsed the previous record of 19.0x set during the market’s February all time high, and had now hit a new all-time high of 19.4x. In other words, the market has never been more overvalued than it is right now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Following today’s market surge, this disconnect got even greater because as earnings estimates fell further…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … stocks rose, and the latest PE multiple (on 2021 earnings mind you) is now a dot com bubble-eseque 24x.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That this it taking place as the global economy careens into the biggest contraction in generations is patently absurd, or would be if the Fed had not directly taken over markets to lift risk prices in a move that has gotten even the world’s largest asset manager openly admitting the only strategy left is to buy what the Fed is buying.

    Meanwhile, with asset prices now completely disconnected from underlying earnings, the global economy can go to hell in a hand basket and none of the billionaires in control will mind – after all the value of their stock holdings is once again fast approaching all time high.

    And speaking of hell in a hand basket, that’s precisely where the global economy is headed despite what the market may be signaling, because while global GDP is now expected to slump 14% in the first half of 2020 according to JPM, resulting in the US losing a “stunning and  unprecedented 25 million workers and pushing the unemployment rate to a level last seen in the Great Depression”, a more important question is what happens to corporate profits, and it is here that the real pain – at least for those tasked to find a connection between profits and stock prices – comes because according to JPM, since global profits are levered to GDP and not to the Fed’s balance sheet, the largest US commercial bank (which itself reported the biggest plunge in its profits since the financial crisis) expects global profits to plunge by 70% in Q2 2020.

    How does JPM get this number? As the bank’s economist Joseph Lipton explains, in the 2001 recession, global GDP growth slowed by 3.7%-pts. Over this same period, global corporate profit growth slumped roughly 62%-pts—a huge decline driven in part by the crash of the tech bubble. Next, in the global financial crisis, global GDP growth slumped 9.8%, while corporate profit growth tumbled nearly 68.5%-pts—a profit to GDP “beta” of seven.

    In the current recession, JPM expects global GDP growth to collapse by the same 9.8%-points in the year through Q2 202 relative to the prior year. Despite the differing nature of the shocks and additional significant hit to the service sector now,
    JPM still assumes a beta of seven—on par with the global financial crisis. This implies a plunge in corporate profits of roughly 70% in the year through 2Q20.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While earnings will get support from fiscal and monetary policy, that support will come at a cost to tax payers according to JPM. Government debt will surge well over 10%-pts of GDP this year and rise further in 2021. Most policy actions are aimed at supporting aggregate demand, thereby indirectly cushioning private sector income loses. Still, some actions will directly boost profits through tax and credit policies. Nevertheless, despite the huge policy supports, JPM concludes that “the global profit loss will likely still be material” and from the bank’s top-down macro perspective, “global corporate profits look set to crater 72% in the year through 2Q20.”

    It gets worse: while many expect a V- or even U shaped recovery, JPM admits that even with the projected strong subsequent rebound, global profits are expected to stand more than 20% below their forecasted pre-pandemic level at the end of 2021!

    In other words, profits won’t recover their pre-pandemic baseline until some time in 2022 if not 2023, which is terrible news for Wall Street strategists as it means they will now have to apply forward multiples from 2023 for their optimistic recos to make any sense.

    Overall, lost profits will cumulate to roughly three-fourths of one-year’s earnings by the end of 2021 (50% in 2020 and another 25% in 2021). The reason for JPM’s dour take: “with corporate debt set to balloon and a significant rise in bankruptcies increasingly likely, the overall deterioration of corporate sector balance sheets will likely be an ongoing legacy of the COVID-19 shock.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    JPM then admits that even this catastrophic forecast could prove to be optimistic as the projected path of profits is based on the historical response to nominal GDP growth; and while the relationship is fairly robust (Figure 1), such an exercise is rife with uncertainty given the unique nature of the COVID-19 shock as well as the policy response. As a result, the breadth of the shock to sectors that are usually less impacted by the cycle (namely services) suggests profit losses could be amplified. As such, “it remains likely that the path ahead will incorporate both a significant hit to profits and large rise in corporate debt outstanding.

    JPM saves the worst possible scenario for last: according to the bank’s economists, the breadth of this recession could also amplify the breadth of the hit to profits. Unlike the GFC, which began as a financial market shock in the US, the COVID-19 pandemic has spread globally. Consequently, each country is experiencing both a loss of external demand (typical for a global recession) and a unique hit to domestic demand from containment policies.

    The same argument can be applied to the outlook across sectors. Although profits dropped 50-60% in each of the past two global recessions, the composition varied (aside from earnings in the energy sector, which dropped 42% peak to trough in both). The 2001 recession owed to the bursting of the tech bubble. Both IT and Telecom experienced massive declines in earnings: 64% and 40%, respectively. Tech was hit in the GFC but only about one-half as much as in 2001, while Telecom fared well. Rather, the GFC hit the financial sector hard. In contrast to the 2001 recession, when financial earnings were only down 19%, the GFC exacted a 72% toll on the sector. Materials were hit even more, down 80% compared to 29% in the 2001 recession. This discrepancy owes to the fact that the 2001 recession sparked the beginning of the housing bubble, which ended badly in the GFC.

    Long story short, investment banks which have given up on 2020 as a forward PE anchor – because nobody knows what happens this year yet somehow everyone knows what will happen next year – and are instead using 2021 now, will soon have to go forward even more and within the next several months, we expect to see PE valuations models based on 2022 earnings and eventually 2023. At some point the market will realize that such a “valuation” – which is merely an excuse for not admitting the terminal disconnect between fundamentals and prices – is idiotic and absurd, and when that happens, the S&P will not only take out the March 24 lows but sprint right for the March 2009 “generational bottom.”

    And a quick tangent: there is a possibility, if companies rush to make Q2 a kitchen sink quarter, that Q2 earnings will not even be positive. Which, in keeping with the idiocy of these centrally planned markets where the lower the EPS, the exponentially higher the PE, would mean that there is a distinct probability that – with the Fed’s blessing of course – the S&P500 could hit +∞ in the coming weeks.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 22:01

  • Navy's Mercy Hospital Ship Off L.A. Now Battling Serious COVID-19 Outbreak Among Crew
    Navy’s Mercy Hospital Ship Off L.A. Now Battling Serious COVID-19 Outbreak Among Crew

    It was supposed to help relieve local California hospitals in the fight against coronavirus, but now it may have become a dangerous source of spreading the disease.

    The emergency response ship USNS Mercy, docked since last month in the Port of Los Angeles, has been hit with a significant outbreak on board, with seven total crew members testing positive for COVID-19, the Navy said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The USNS Mercy arrived at the Port of Los Angeles on March 27, 2020. Image via KTLA

    All of the infected have now been removed from the ship and put into isolation in an especially worrisome situation given the ship is geared toward housing and caring for vulnerable non-coronavirus patients to take the strain off of area hospitals. 

    People recently having contact with the newly positive crew members have also been put in isolation off the ship and are being monitored. In total the Mercy has 1,000 military personnel, assisted by a small civilian staff. 

    The Navy says the rise in infections aboard the Mercy will not stop its mission to receive medical patients: “The ship is following protocols and taking every precaution to ensure the health and safety of all crew members and patients on board,” a statement said. “This will not affect the ability for Mercy to receive patients at this time.”

    It must be remembered that an entire nuclear aircraft carrier and its crew of nearly 5,000 was put out of commission off Guam last month amid a growing number of infections. The Theodore Roosevelt now has at least 585 sailors that tested COVID-19 positive, including the death of one sailor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    USNS Mercy previously departing from San Diego, via AP.

    Concerning the Mercy, there’s growing concern as to the source of infections which may trace back to major military hospitals in San Diego.

    The SD Union-Tribute reports

    The sailors came aboard after serving at various Navy medical installations, including Naval Medical Center San Diego. The hospital is one of two military medical facilities in San Diego County seeing service members who seek treatment and testing for COVID-19. The other is Naval Hospital Camp Pendleton.

    Because some medical staff rotated through the COVID-19 screening area at Naval Medical Center San Diego prior to deploying on the Mercy, one sailor told the Union-Tribune, there is concern on board that the crew brought the virus with them when they left San Diego.

    The Navy has actually been the most severely impacted by the pandemic, as numbers showed that were made public prior to the Pentagon clamping down on public Covid-19 military infections reporting.

    A similar floating hospital, the USNS comfort in New York, has also witnessed a handful of crew members catch COVID-19, with the Navy reporting at least three at the start of the week. The Comfort was originally intended to house non-coronavirus patients as NYC facilities dealt with rising cases, however, after local hospitals were overwhelmed the ship switched to taking on coronavirus patients.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 21:45

  • COVID-19 & The War On Cash: What Is Behind The Push For A Cashless Society?
    COVID-19 & The War On Cash: What Is Behind The Push For A Cashless Society?

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    Cash may well become a casualty of the COVID-19 pandemic…

    As these COVID-19 lockdowns drag out, more and more individuals and businesses are going cashless (for convenience and in a so-called effort to avoid spreading coronavirus germs), engaging in online commerce or using digital forms of currency (bank cards, digital wallets, etc.). As a result, physical cash is no longer king.

    Yet there are other, more devious, reasons for this re-engineering of society away from physical cash: a cashless society—easily monitored, controlled, manipulated, weaponized and locked down—would play right into the hands of the government (and its corporate partners).

    To this end, the government and its corporate partners-in-crime have been waging a subtle war on cash for some time now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What is this war on cash?

    It’s a concerted campaign to shift consumers towards a digital mode of commerce that can easily be monitored, tracked, tabulated, mined for data, hacked, hijacked and confiscated when convenient.

    According to economist Steve Forbes,

    “The real reason for this war on cash – start with the big bills and then work your way down – is an ugly power grab by Big Government. People will have less privacy: Electronic commerce makes it easier for Big Brother to see what we’re doing, thereby making it simpler to bar activities it doesn’t like, such as purchasing salt, sugar, big bottles of soda and Big Macs.”

    Much like the war on drugs and the war on terror, this so-called “war on cash” is being sold to the public as a means of fighting terrorists, drug dealers, tax evaders and now COVID-19 germs.

    Digital currency provides the government and its corporate partners with the ultimate method to track, control you and punish you.

    In much the same way that Americans have opted into government surveillance through the convenience of GPS devices and cell phones, digital cash—the means of paying with one’s debit card, credit card or cell phone—is becoming the de facto commerce of the American police state.

    Not too long ago, it was estimated that smart phones would replace cash and credit cards altogether by 2020. Right on schedule, a growing number of businesses are adopting no-cash policies, including certain airlines, hotels, rental car companies, restaurants and retail stores. In Sweden, even the homeless and churches accept digital cash.

    Making the case for “never, ever carrying cash” in lieu of a digital wallet, journalist Lisa Rabasca Roepe argues that cash is inconvenient, ATM access is costly, and it’s now possible to reimburse people using digital apps such as Venmo. Thus, there’s no longer a need for cash.

    “More and more retailers and grocery stores are embracing Apple Pay, Google Wallet, Samsung Pay, and Android Pay,” notes Roepe.

    “PayPal’s app is now accepted at many chain stores including Barnes & Noble, Foot Locker, Home Depot, and Office Depot. Walmart and CVS have both developed their own payment apps while their competitors Target and RiteAid are working on their own apps.”

    So what’s the deal here?

    Despite all of the advantages that go along with living in a digital age—namely, convenience—it’s hard to imagine how a cashless world navigated by way of a digital wallet doesn’t signal the beginning of the end for what little privacy we have left and leave us vulnerable to the likes of government thieves and data hackers.

    • First, when I say privacy, I’m not just referring to the things that you don’t want people to know about, those little things you do behind closed doors that are neither illegal nor harmful but embarrassing or intimate. I am also referring to the things that are deeply personal and which no one need know about, certainly not the government and its constabulary of busybodies, nannies, Peeping Toms, jail wardens and petty bureaucrats.

    • Second, we’re already witnessing how easy it will be for government agents to manipulate digital wallets for their own gain. For example, civil asset forfeiture schemes are becoming even more profitable for police agencies thanks to ERAD (Electronic Recovery and Access to Data) devices supplied by the Department of Homeland Security that allow police to not only determine the balance of any magnetic-stripe card (i.e., debit, credit and gift cards) but also freeze and seize any funds on pre-paid money cards. In fact, the Eighth Circuit Court of Appeals ruled that it does not violate the Fourth Amendment for police to scan or swipe your credit card.

    • Third, the war on cash is about giving the government the ultimate control of the economy and complete access to the citizenry’s pocketbook.

    • Fourth, every technological convenience that has made our lives easier has also become our Achilles’ heel, opening us up to greater vulnerabilities from hackers and government agents alike.

    • Fifth, if there’s one entity that will not stop using cash for its own nefarious purposes, it’s the U.S. government. Cash is the currency used by the government to pay off its foreign “associates.”

    • Sixth, this drive to do away with cash is part of a larger global trend driven by international financial institutions and the United Nations that is transforming nations of all sizes, from the smallest nation to the biggest, most advanced economies.

    • Finally, short of returning to a pre-technological, Luddite age, there’s really no way to pull this horse back now that it’s left the gate. While doing so is near impossible, it would also mean doing without the many conveniences and advantages that are the better angels, if you will, of technology’s totalitarian tendencies: the internet, medical advances, etc.

    To our detriment, we have virtually no control over who accesses our private information, how it is stored, or how it is used. Whether we ever had much control remains up for debate. However, in terms of our bargaining power over digital privacy rights, we have been reduced to a pitiful, unenviable position in which we can only hope and trust that those in power will treat our information with respect.

    Clearly, as I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American Peoplewe have come full circle, back to a pre-revolutionary era of taxation without any real representation.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 21:25

  • Vince McMahon's XFL Has Shuttered And Filed For Bankruptcy…Again
    Vince McMahon’s XFL Has Shuttered And Filed For Bankruptcy…Again

    This time it was supposed to be different.

    But it ended the same: with Vince McMahon signing his name on a bankruptcy declaration for the XFL.

    The league’s “comeback” season has ended in unceremonious fashion as the coronavirus pandemic has forced the league to once again shutter. The Chapter 11 bankruptcy filing was put into process days after the league laid off its employees and revealed that it had no plans for a 2021 season. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    McMahon executed his written consent for bankruptcy as the sole voting member on Sunday, according to Law & Crime. The document, filed for McMahon’s Alpha Entertainment, LLC, reads:

    “The undersigned, being the sole voting Member of Alpha Entertainment LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the ‘Company’), hereby adopts the following resolutions, by written consent, effective as of the date hereof,” the filing began. “WHEREAS, the Company desires and has requested that John Brecker and Vincent K. McMahon each serve as a Liquidating Agent (as defined in the LLC Agreement) of the Company and, in such capacity, to commence a case (the ‘Chapter 11 Case’) under chapter 11 of title 11 of the United States Code (the ‘Bankruptcy Code’) and manage the business and affairs of the Company during the Chapter 11 Case.”

    According to the LA Times, the league’s coaches rounded out the list of its largest creditors. “The creditors include seven of the league’s eight head coaches, led by Bob Stoops of the Dallas Renegades ($1 million) and Marc Trestman of the Tampa Bay Vipers ($777,777). Winston Moss, who served as coach and general manager of the Los Angeles Wildcats, is owed $583,333.”

    “Unfortunately, as a new enterprise, we were not insulated from the harsh economic impacts and uncertainties caused by the COVID-19 crisis,” the XFL said in a statement.

    “It’s done and it’s not coming back,” one person was quoted as saying.

    Here’s a look at the XFL during the fonder days of the 2020 season:


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 21:05

  • Aussie Cops Use Surveillance Helicopter To Track Down Remote Campers
    Aussie Cops Use Surveillance Helicopter To Track Down Remote Campers

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    Police in Tasmania are using a surveillance helicopter to track down people camping in remote locations in violation of coronavirus lockdown laws.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Tasmania Police officers conducting aerial surveillance around the state, including on the North-West Coast located several campsites where people were directed to leave and return home,” reports The Advocate.

    “When u social distance so well that the cops have to find u by helicopter,” tweeted Twitter user @PetiteNicoco.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    17 people across the state were charged with a lockdown offense in a period of just 24 hours over the Easter weekend.

    The Westpac Rescue Helicopter “landed near campsites which were viewed from the air” to interrogate campers in the region. Where the chopper couldn’t land, officers were dispatched to the area on foot.

    Commander Rob Blackwood called the campers “selfish” for endangering other people during the COVID-19 pandemic despite them literally being around no other people.

    “Covert and marked police vehicles, and the Westpac Rescue Helicopter, will continue to undertake patrols around the state, so if you’re away from your primary residence you can expect police to stop and speak to you about your movements,” Tasmania Police said on their Facebook page.

    The practice was denounced by many as absurd overkill given that the campers are hardly posing a threat to anybody.

    “That seems like a waste of resources,” responded one Twitter user.

    “You will do as commanded, even if you’re already doing it in the woods. Compliance is nonoptional. The state knows what is best, citizen,” commented another.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 20:45

  • Second Wave Of Coronavirus Layoffs Claiming Workers Who Thought They Were Safe
    Second Wave Of Coronavirus Layoffs Claiming Workers Who Thought They Were Safe

    When the United States went into a virtual lockdown to slow the spread of the coronavirus pandemic, the effects were devastating. Within a three week period, nearly 17 million people have filed for unemployment, while modern day ‘bread lines’ are getting longer each day across the country.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The initial victims of the lockdown were the most financially vulnerable; restaurant workers, retail employees, and other low-paying jobs in industries which were immediately impacted by a lack of foot traffic.

    Now, a second wave of layoffs is hitting those who thought they were safe, according to the Wall Street Journal. White collar workers working from home are being laid off by companies suffering from dismal sales. Law firms are cutting hours and eliminating positions as court systems and legal actions have ground to a near-standstill. And goverment who assumed their jobs would be safe are being furloughed amid city and state budget shortfalls. Even healthcare workers who aren’t directly fighting the pandemic are finding themselves without work. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And according to the Journal, there’s more pain in the cards.

    The consensus of 57 economists surveyed this month by The Wall Street Journal is that 14.4 million jobs will be lost in the coming months, and the unemployment rate will rise to a record 13% in June, from a 50-year low of 3.5% in February. Already nearly 17 million Americans have sought unemployment benefits in the past three weeks, dwarfing any period of mass layoffs recorded since World War II.

    Gregory Daco, chief U.S. economist of Oxford Economics, projects 27.9 million jobs will be lost, and industries beyond those ordered to close will account for 8 to 10 million, a level of job destruction on a par with the 2007-09 recession.

    Oxford Economics, a U.K.-based forecasting and consulting firm, projects April’s jobs report, which will capture late-March layoffs, will show cuts to 3.4 million business-services workers, including lawyers, architects, consultants and advertising professionals, as well as 1.5 million nonessential health-care workers and 100,000 information workers, including those working in the media and telecommunications.

    The virus shock does not discriminate across sectors as we initially thought,” Mr. Daco said. –WSJ

    And where jobs haven’t been lost, hours have been reduced across many sectors:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tales of economic chaos

    The Journal interviewed a diverse sampling of professionals, who shared what they’re seeing within their industries.

    “Customers who paid like clockwork for 10-plus years are suddenly late,” said Gary Cuozzo – owner of Connecticut-based web host and developer, ISG Software Group, who says he’s received just a few hundred dollars in accounts receivable in recent weeks from customers which include manufacturers, retailers and nonprofits.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gary Cuozzo, owner of ISG Software Group, stopped drawing a salary to keep his business afloat.

    Cuozzo says he stopped drawing a salary several weeks ago and has filed for unemployment – ‘essentially volunteering’ while working from home so his business can remain afloat.

    “We have no software projects,” he said. “Everything is on hold.”

    Those employed in industries where working from home is feasible are facing widespread layoffs, said ZipRecruiter labor economist Julia Pollak. The recruiting site itself laid off more than 400 of its 1,200 full-time employees at the end of March.

    A survey of visitors to the job-search site found 39% employed in business and professional services reported they were laid off, nearly the same rate as respondents in retail and wholesale trade. (Active job seekers are more likely to be laid off than the average American.) Among the respondents who still had jobs, many in white-collar industries said their hours were cut. –WSJ

    “Any company that had been planning to open a second location, that hired an architect, an office designer, and contractor—they’re not opening that location this year and those people now won’t have jobs. Any company planning to go public this year, that hired accountants, consultants, PR professionals—they’re laying off all those teams,” said Pollak, the economist.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hospitals have been cutting elective surgical procedures and routine care across the country in order to free up resources (while many have been filmed virtually empty, and nurses have enough time on their hands to make tiktok videos all day).

    “In a sense we kind of sacrificed that revenue for a public-health interest,” said Manchester, NH cardiologist Daniel Philbin of the New England Heart and Vascular Institute. “The hospital systems really are facing an incredible crunch because of this—the longer the curve gets pushed out, the more they face difficult decisions about employment.”

    Emily Hill thought her job as a dental assistant was safe, being in an in-demand field and employed through the military. She worked as a contractor at a dental clinic on Fort Hood in Texas.

    “I always felt untouchable,” she said. “This really puts you in your place.”WSJ

    Law firms, meanwhile, have been cutting staff and slashing pay due to a stark lack of business, as courts are virtually paused and new deals – which typically require lawyers – just aren’t happening.

    “Law firms are not going to be the top of the priority,” said Timothy Lupinacci – CEO of 700-layer firm Baker Donelson, which has some 20 offices in the Southeast and mid-Atlantic region. They’ve reduced compensation for staff and associates by 20%.

    Meanwhile, New York City-based Cadwalader, Wickersham & Taft LLP, a 400-attorney firm specializing in financial services has slashed salaries by 25% – and partners aren’t currently getting paid at all.

    Economic analysts, meanwhile, are basically all over the place when it comes to predicting when the labor market will bounce back, as it all depends – of course – on when this much-promised vaccine will materialize, and when the economy can ‘open back up’ successfully.

    The biggest wild card in the jobs outlook is how long it will take for jobs to bounce back, which depends heavily on how long the pandemic and social-distancing measures last. The consensus among the economists surveyed by the Journal is for employment to return to its February 2020 level in 27 months, but views varied widely.

    Economist Amy Crews Cutts, of AC Cutts & Associates LLC, expects the labor market to take 5½ years to fully bounce back. The sheer scale of job cuts so far, even if they don’t worsen further, are “an extraordinary number of jobs to reverse and put back into the economy,” she said.

    Still, post-lockdown prospects aren’t great either according to some – as many industries are going to enter their own cyclical recessions (or worse).

    “Industries that are subject to cyclical cycles, like finance, real estate and manufacturing, are likely to have layoffs,” said Moody’s Analytics economis Adam Kamins, who thinks that about half the jobs lost to the pandemic will be regained by the end of the summer.

    “The lockdown may be over, but there’s likely to be a prolonged period of stagnation.”

    Read the rest of the report here.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 20:25

  • NY Fed Head Trader: "The Scale Of Our Asset Purchases Has Been Unparalleled"
    NY Fed Head Trader: “The Scale Of Our Asset Purchases Has Been Unparalleled”

    In remarks delivered before the Foreign Exchange Committee of the NY Fed, Lorie Logan, who is the head of the Fed’s open markets, i.e., the head trader of the world’s biggest hedge fund, commented on the Fed’s unprecedented intervention, and takeover, of capital markets, saying that “the scale of these purchases has been unparalleled, totaling about $1.6 trillion in the past four weeks“, something we showed last week when laid out the hundreds of billions in weekly purchases in the past 4 weeks, eclipsing the intervention during the financial crisis by orders of magnitude, as follows:

    • April 8: $$272BN
    • April 1: $557BN
    • March 25: $586BN
    • March 17:$356BN

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then again, hearing it from the person who made it all possible is so much more fulfilling.

    Logan than explain why the Fed decided it was in America’s best interest to nationalize the capital markets, saying that “supporting smooth market functioning does not mean restoring every aspect of market functioning to its level before the coronavirus crisis. Some aspects of liquidity—especially aspects related to transactions costs and market depth—are importantly affected by fundamental factors such as how the current extraordinary uncertainty about the economic outlook influences trading behavior. These aspects of market functioning may not return all the way to pre-crisis levels for some time, even as our purchases slow.”

    That’s the spin, the reality is that liquidity is collapsing in the Treasury market because of the Fed’s purchases, which is soaking up so many bonds it now owns up to 50% and in some cases more, of any given Cusip, especially those with longer maturities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lorie Logan, Head of Market Operations

    Logan then had some disappointing words for those who are hoping the Fed will push the VIX back to 10: “supporting smooth market functioning” does not “mean eliminating all volatility. In well-functioning markets, prices will respond rapidly and efficiently to new information.” Except, of course, when the information is negative and the Fed has to buy everything that is being sold as it just did in the past 3 weeks. But then again, this is the same Fed which thinks the US population is too dumb to understand what is going on.

    Some words of advice for Ms. Logan: the people are no longer dumb and they understand precisely what the Fed is doing. Perhaps to preempt the populist anger that will soon target the Fed itself, Logan then elaborated by saying that “during the unprecedented disruption caused by the coronavirus pandemic, a great deal of new information arrives every day about the outlook for specific markets, such as housing, and for the economy as a whole. These changes in the outlook should move the Treasury and agency MBS markets irrespective of the Federal Reserve’s purchases.”

    Right, they “should”, which is probably why the Fed had has been the buyer of first, last and only resort, and why even the $7 trillion BlackRock is no longer even shy to admit that the only trade in this farce of a market (as Howard Marks discussed) is to front- or back-run the Fed: “We’ll Just Buy Whatever Central Banks Are Buying“‘

    Finally, in one desperate attempt to deflect the coming shitstorm that will – we hope – finally end the Fed, Logan tried to deflect blame stating that “today’s crisis is different, having originated outside the financial system, in an enormous challenge to public health.” Which is, of course, also a lie, because had companies not spent $4 trillion on buybacks in the past 4 years and instead had allocated the money to a “fat tail” fund, none of the insanity observed in the past month would have happened.

    As if a whole new level of pandering to the unwashed peasants, the NY Fed head trader then went so far as to lie that the Fed had learned some lesson in all of this:

    Yet the lesson of the previous crisis still applies, and the Federal Reserve has taken it to heart in responding to the recent stresses in funding markets, Treasury and MBS markets, and credit markets.

    Translation: last time we bailed out just the banks and people were angry. This time we “learned our lesson”, and in addition to bailing out the banks and the mega corporations that are now swallowing all of America’s small and medium businesses whole, we will pretend to be bailing out main street by handing out taxpayers a check for $1,200 per month. Enough to pay about a third of the rent thanks to the latest massive housing bubble that the Fed has inflated.

    But in the end none of this matters. What does matter? Why getting stocks to new all time highs of course:

    By acting quickly and forcefully to support all of these markets at once, we have been able to stabilize market conditions.

    Well that’s just wonderful, because who cares about a second depression and the total collapse in cash flow if bonds are trading at par in a complete disconnect with fundamentals, and TSLA is up 100% in the past week because the company can no longer pay its rent.

    Lorie’s conclusion:

    Many challenges surely lie ahead for the economy and financial markets. But the past month demonstrates that the Federal Reserve will use its tools aggressively to keep markets working so that credit can flow to households, businesses, and state and local governments throughout our economy.

    Translation: the Fed will buy as many trillions more as it needs to completely disconnect all prices from fundamentals and create a Potemkin Village economy so vast, the USSR will be spinning in its grave.

    One last point: to keep track of just how “well” the Fed is doing in its true endgame mission – to crush the dollar and hyperinflate away the debt – just keep an eye on gold. It will tell you all you need to know.

    Logan’s full speech can be found here.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 20:05

  • New Study Exposes More Evidence That Summer Won't Stop The Coronavirus
    New Study Exposes More Evidence That Summer Won’t Stop The Coronavirus

    One of the public’s last great hopes as the number of confirmed coronavirus cases nears the 2 million mark is that the onset of summer in the northern hemisphere will help defeat the virus as warmer temperatures make life for the virus more hostile, hampering the virus’s ability to spread.

    However, it’s looking increasingly likely that the novel coronavirus is stronger than its predecessor, SARS, when it comes to resisting intense heat. One recent study of additional steps that could be taken to protect lab technicians handling samples of the virus found that samples of the virus can survive when exposed to temperatures as high as 60 degrees Celsius (140 degrees Fahrenheit).

    That would seem to preclude the onset of summer as a potential ‘miracle cure’, while also suggesting that the outbreaks in Africa and South America might be worse than they appear, since the theories that high temperatures slow the virus’s spread don’t appear nearly as convincing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to SCMP, the French scientists who conducted the experiment had to heat samples of the sample, strains of the virus mixed with various animal proteins (to mimic real-world conditions in the test tube), to nearly 90 degrees Celsius (210 degrees Fahrenheit) to completely kill the virus.

    Professor Remi Charrel and colleagues at the Aix-Marseille University in southern France heated the virus that causes Covid-19 to 60 degrees Celsius (140 Fahrenheit) for an hour and found that some strains were still able to replicate.

    The scientists had to bring the temperature to almost boiling point to kill the virus completely, according to their non-peer-reviewed paper released on bioRxiv.org on Saturday. The results have implications for the safety of lab technicians working with the virus.

    The team in France infected African green monkey kidney cells, a standard host material for viral activity tests, with a strain isolated from a patient in Berlin, Germany. The cells were loaded into tubes representing two different types of environments, one “clean” and the other “dirty” with animal proteins to simulate biological contamination in real-life samples, such as an oral swab.

    After the heating, the viral strains in the clean environment were thoroughly deactivated. Some strains in the dirty samples, however, survived.

    The French researchers found that using the higher temperature could help solve the problem, heating the samples to 92 degrees Celsius (~210 degrees Fahrenheit) for 15 minutes could render the virus completely inactive. However, using these high temperatures as part of disinfection protocols for lab technicians could severely fragment the virus’ RNA, potentially scrambling the results of more sensitive tests.

    It’s just the latest curve ball that the coronavirus has thrown at researchers since the outbreak began in Wuhan.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 19:45

  • Gold Miners Now Deemed "Essential" In Canada
    Gold Miners Now Deemed “Essential” In Canada

    Authored by Neils Christensen via Kitco.com,

    Mining companies with operations in Quebec are wasting no time jumping back into action after the provincial government announced Monday night that mining is now considered an essential service and operations can restart Wednesday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While miners in Quebec will be heading back to work, the government has also put in place new work policies. According to the new provincial guidelines, mining companies will have to reduce the number of fly-ins and fly-outs from their mining sites and they are encouraged to use more local workers.

    Under a new work regime, miners will see their time at work sites extended to 28 days instead of 14.

    To maintain social-distancing guidelines, companies will also have to use more chartered planes and shuttle buses to transport their workers

    It has not taken mining companies long to react to the news. On Tuesday, Yamana Gold Inc. announced that it was going to restart operations at the Canadian Malartic mine in Abitibi, Canada’s largest gold mine. Yamana operates Malartic in a 50/50 joint venture with Agnico Eagle Mines Ltd.

    “The resumption of mining activity will occur over a period of several weeks with full attention to the health and safety of returning employees, contractors and suppliers,” Yamana said.

    Along with Malartic, Agnico Eagle said that it is also restarting operations at its LaRonde Complex and Goldex mine.

    Eldorado Gold Corp. also said in a statement Tuesday that it is preparing to restart operations at its Lamaque mine in northern Quebec.

    “We are pleased to resume operations at Lamaque,” said George Burns, president and chief executive officer of Eldorado.

    “With the safety measures we have put in place at all our sites, we are confident that we can adapt our business and continue to create long-term value for our stakeholders.”

    Some of the new safety protocols Quebec companies will implement include temperature checks, mandatory social distancing, enhanced sanitation and disinfecting.

    Meanwhile, Iamgold Corp. said it will restart its Westwood Gold Mine in Quebec on Wednesday.

    “Ramp-up activities will take approximately one week, with employees being trained on new procedures and sanitary measures, including adjusted work schedules and transport, physical distancing and protective equipment,” Iamgold said.

    “Protecting the health and safety of our workforce is critical for the successful resumption of mining activities at Westwood.”

    Quebec mines were shut down March 23 as the Quebec government closed all non-essential services to try to slow the spread of the COVID-19 pandemic. As of April 13, 360 people have died in Quebec as a result of the coronavirus.

    The government’s decision to allow miners to operate again comes at a good time for the sector, according to some analysts. Gold prices have broken through critical resistance and are trading near fresh seven-year highs. June gold futures at last traded at $1,768.60 an ounce, up 0.41% on the day.

    Meanwhile, mining companies are enjoying lower input costs as energy prices have not seen a sustained recovery after falling to an 18-year low last month. May West Texas Intermediate crude oil prices last traded at $21.46 a barrel down more than 4% on the day.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 19:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 14th April 2020

  • Pot Use Reaches All-Time High In March
    Pot Use Reaches All-Time High In March

    We noted on Thursday, Americans have resorted to “watching porn, drinking beer, smoking pot, and or devouring chocolate” to cope with their fears of a pandemic. In the report, we noted how cannabis sales in California, Colorado, Oregon, and Alaska jumped 50% during the March 16-22 period, but it was hard for us to quantify overall national trends. 

    Apparently, ripping bongs and eating edibles hit an all-time high in March as lockdowns across the country were only in the beginning stages, according to Bloomberg, citing a consumer report via Cowen & Co.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The survey, conducted in March of 2,500 consumers, found about 33% had tried smoking pot, a record high, and that 12.8% had used cannabis within the past month compared to the 2019 average of 12.5%

    Sales spiked in mid-March as people rushed to stock up ahead of potential dispensary closures, Cowen said, using data from cannabis analytics firm Headset Inc. Weekly sales growth peaked at 64% in the week ended March 16, the highest rate of increase since at least the beginning of 2019.

    However, sales decelerated during the last two weeks of the month to the mid- to the high-single-digit range. This may be linked to a “more pronounced deterioration in job security for past-month cannabis consumers relative to the general population,” according to analysts led by Vivien Azer.

    The survey found that the percentage of cannabis consumers working full time fell by 290 basis points to 42.4% in March from February, a bigger decline than the general population. They also tended to be less comfortable with their financial situation. – Bloomberg 

    America is getting high, melting in their couches as “Netflix and quarantine” become the hottest trend during the pandemic. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 02:35

  • "We Weren't Prepared" For COVID-19: Macron Admits A French Disaster
    “We Weren’t Prepared” For COVID-19: Macron Admits A French Disaster

    Update (0200ET): France will remain locked down until at least May 11, PM Emmanuel Macron has revealed, calling on citizens to continue to respect the rules his government has imposed to slow the spread of coronavirus.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Admitting the country had not been prepared for the outbreak, the PM nevertheless praised those in front-line occupations for working overtime to save lives and called on the French to continue to stay home and maintain social distancing.

    *  *  *

    Authored by Guy Milliere via The Gatestone Institute,

    On April 9, in France, one of the three European countries most affected by COVID-19 — the others being Spain and Italy, 1,341 people died from the Chinese Communist Party virus. For Italy, the main European country affected so far, the figure on April 9 was 610 deaths; for Spain 446, and for Germany 266. While the pandemic has been stabilizing in Italy and Spain — and in Germany seems contained — in France it seems still expanding.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Extremely bad decisions taken by the authorities created a situation of contagion more destructive than it should have been.

    The first bad decision was that, in contrast to European Union fantasies, borders apparently do matter. France never closed them; instead it allowed large numbers of potential virus-carriers to enter the country. Even when it became clear that in Italy the pandemic was taking on catastrophic proportions, France’s border with Italy remained open. The Italian government, by contrast, on March 10, prohibited French people coming to its territory or Italians going to France, but to date, France has put no controls on its side of the border.

    The situation is the same on France’s border with Spain, despite the terrifying situation there. Since March 17, it has been virtually impossible to go from France to Spain, but coming to France from Spain is easy: you just show a police officer your ID. The same goes for France’s border with Germany. On March 16, Germany closed its border with France, but France declined to do the same for its border with Germany. When, on February 26, a soccer match between a French team and an Italian team took place in Lyon, the third-largest city in France, 3,000 Italian supporters attended, even though patients were already flocking to Italy’s hospitals.

    France never closed its airports; they are still open to “nationals of EEA Member States, Switzerland, passengers with a British passport, and those with residence permits issued by France” and healthcare professionals. Earlier, until the last days of March, people arriving from China were not even subject to health checks. French people in Wuhan, the city where the pandemic originated, were repatriated by a military plane, and, upon their arrival in France, were placed in quarantine. While Air France interrupted its flights to China on January 30, Chinese and other airlines departing from Shanghai and Beijing continue to land in France.

    French President Emmanuel Macron summarized France’s official position on the practice: “Viruses do not have passports,” he said. Members of the French government repeated the same dogma. A few commentators reminded them that viruses travel with infected people, who can be stopped at borders, and that borders are essential to stop or slow the spread of a disease, but the effort was useless. Macron ended up saying that the borders of the Schengen area (26 European states that have officially abolished all passport and border control with one another) could not be shut down and raged at other European leaders for reintroducing border checks between the Schengen area member countries. “What is at stake,” he said, seemingly more concerned with the “European project” than with the lives of millions of people, “is the survival of the European project.”

    Other bad decisions the disastrous management of the means of fighting the pandemic.

    In early March, when people in large numbers started to arrive ill at hospitals, doctors and caregivers warned that they did not have enough masks and said that working without any protective equipment put them at high risk. Journalists quickly discovered that in 2013, France had possessed a reserve of several million masks, but that the government had decided to destroy them to reduce storage costs. In January 2020, a few hundred thousand masks were still available, but on February 19, President Macron decided to send them to Wuhan, as a “gesture of solidarity with the Chinese people”.

    The French government then announced that masks would be available soon, but by the end of March, most doctors and caregivers still had no masks. Several doctors fell ill. As of April 10, eight have died from COVID-19 and several others are in critical condition. On March 20, the government’s spokeswoman, Sibeth N’Diaye, incorrectly said that “masks are essentially useless”.

    At the end of February, France had almost no tests available, and no means of manufacturing them. The government decided to buy tests from China, but by March 19, the number of tests was still insufficient. While Germany performed 500,000 screening tests per week, France was only able to only perform 50,000.

    Rather than admit that tests were unavailable, or that the government had mismanaged situation, the France’s minister of health, Olivier Veran, announced that large-scale screening was useless, and that France had chosen to “proceed differently”.

    Municipal elections, scheduled for March 15, took place despite the virus and despite the fact that many doctors warned that polling stations were places of contagion. Sure enough, in the days that followed, hundreds of people in charge of polling stations flocked to the hospitals. On March 16, President Macron delivered a speech declaring that “France is at war” and that on the following day, March 17, France would be placed on lockdown.

    Lockdown is still in place and the French government has decided to extend it indefinitely. The rules are strict. The French can only leave home, within a radius of one kilometer, for one hour a day, to buy food, and must have written authorization to present to the police who patrol the streets. Anyone who is on a street without authorization is fined 135 euros ($145) the first time, 1,500 euros ($1,630) the second time, and after three offenses, can be subject to a sentence of six months in prison. Any meeting with a person not sharing the same place of lockdown is prohibited.

    Most of the population has complied, except in the no-go zones. The police have been ordered to turn a blind eye to what happens there. The no-go zone in Seine Saint Denis, for instance, has a fatality rate 63% higher than in the rest of the country.

    It was not exactly a secret that before the pandemic that the French economy had also not been doing that well. Growth was barely above zero and unemployment high. Now, the French economy has effectively stopped. It is hard to imagine what the situation will be after the pandemic.

    Now, almost all the French hospitals are full; patients wait on beds in the halls. On March 18, France had only 5,000 ventilators, so “triage” procedures began: some patients survived, others, for lack of treatment, did not.

    A scandal erupted. Agnes Buzyn — who was Minister of Health until February 16, then a candidate for mayor of Paris; then, on March 15, defeated — said on March 18: “I knew a tsunami [presumably meaning a deadly pandemic] was going to hit France”. She added that she had told everything to President Macron in January. Immediately, Marine Le Pen, President of the National Rally, the main opposition party in France, said that “by staying silent about a worrying situation, Agnes Buzyn behaved in an unconscionable manner”. Le Pen added, “if Agnes Buzyn is speaking the truth, the government and President Macron have seriously failed in their duties, and the case will have to be brought before a Court of Justice”.

    Another scandal, however, even more important, had erupted before that. On February 25, a celebrated French epidemiologist, Professor Didier Raoult, President of the Marseille University Hospital Institute for Infectious Diseases (Méditerranée Infection), one of the main European research centers on epidemics and pandemics, published a video, “Coronavirus: Towards a way out of the crisis”. In it, he said that he had found a treatment to infected people quickly: hydroxychloroquine (a drug used against malaria since 1949) and azithromycin (a commonly used antibiotic), that had already cured 24 patients.

    Immediately, Olivier Veran, the new French minister of health, said that Professor Raoult’s statements were “unacceptable”. A harsh medical and political battle began. Many doctors close to President Macron agreed with Veran and denounced Raoult. Some even claimed he was a “charlatan”, apparently forgetting that, until then, Professor Raoult had been considered by many France’s most prestigious epidemiologist. Other doctors said that Dr. Raoult was right and supported his findings.

    In an attempt to quell the controversy, the French government, by decree, authorized Professor Raoult’s treatment in “military hospitals” for “patients reaching the acute phase of the disease” — but prohibited family doctors from prescribing hydroxychloroquine. Professor Raoult replied that the treatment was only effective if administered “before the disease reaches its acute phase“. [Emphasis added]

    A clinical trial was launched by the government but Professor Raoult said that “the trial is not based on the treatment I use and is destined to fail.”

    On April 10, Professor Raoult published data showing that he had treated and cured 2,401 patients. A recent international poll of thousands of doctors rated hydroxychloroquine the “most effective therapy” for combating COVID 19. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has authorized widespread “compassionate use” of hydroxychloroquine, while awaiting the results of scientific tests, projects to be complete in “a year or a year and a half”.

    Philippe Douste Blazy, Professor in Medicine, former French Minister of Health, said that “the obstructive behavior of Emmanuel Macron and the French government ‘was “criminal'”. He added that “the treatment proposed by Professor Raoult has positive results” and that “France will soon be the last country to refuse the use by doctors of hydroxychloroquine.” He then launched a petition calling on the government to stop obstructing the use of the treatment. The text was signed by thousands of doctors, professors of medicine and other former ministers of health.

    The treatment recommended by Professor Raoult still cannot be prescribed by French family doctors. A decree promulgated by President Macron on March 28 authorized doctors to use Rivotril (clonazepam) to “alleviate the suffering of patient in a state of respiratory distress”. Clonazepam slows breathing and can lead to respiratory arrest. Dr. Christian Coulon, a renowned anesthesiologist, tweeted:

    “Euthanasia of our elders suffering from respiratory failure. Yes, they decided [to do] it. As a doctor, I suffer deeply”.

    Dr. Serge Rader explained on radio on April 3 that many senior citizens living in retirement homes and who get Covid-19 are not sent to a hospital because the hospitals are overwhelmed; instead they receive an injection of Rivotril and die alone in their rooms. Many other doctors expressed their horror on social media, but added that they were powerless.

    The result is that anxiety and anger have increased sharply in the population and add to the distress arising from the pandemic and the strict lockdown.

    A French lawyer, Regis de Castelnau, wrote in Marianne, a center-left magazine:

    “The behavior of our leaders has been marked by unpreparedness, casualness, cynicism, and many of their acts imply the enforcement of the criminal law. Deliberate endangerment of the lives of others and failure to provide assistance to people in danger are obvious… In war, generals who are judged incompetent are sometimes shot. The President and other officials are well aware of this and have to know that they will be held accountable.”

    Economists expect the GDP of France in the second quarter of 2020 to be in free fall. One economist, Emmanuel Lechypre, said, “France will experience a very severe recession…. What is happening has never been seen in the past and the country will never be the same.”

    A recent survey shows that 70% of French people think that the government is not telling the truth, and 79% think that the government and the President do not know where they are going.

    Before the pandemic, France was on the edge of chaos. From the moment President Macron was elected, not a single week in France has passed without demonstrations. The uprising of the “yellow vests” lasted 70 weeks and was accompanied by riots. A strike against a reform of the bankrupt French pension system that began in December 2019 lasted until the appearance of the pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On March 27, Macron said in a threatening tone that those who criticized his handling of the pandemic were “irresponsible” and that he would remember “those who did not live up to his expectations”.

    On April 1, the columnist Ivan Rioufol wrote in Le Figaro:

    “The president is not only wrong, but he lied and let others lie. He and his team are guilty. The official speech was unable to assess the seriousness of the situation. It denied, to the point of absurdity, the usefulness of national borders… It is the government that repeated, before claiming the contrary, that masks and tests are useless. It is the State that maintains an incomprehensible confusion around chloroquine… The law of silence that Macron would like to impose is completely untenable.”

    Those who hold power in France seem more clueless today than before the pandemic. Sadly, a debacle in France seems increasingly closer.

    In the French mainstream media, China is treated extremely politely. No journalist will remind the public that that the pandemic began in Wuhan, China. Reporters say that the United States is in a difficult situation and show New York hospitals, as if showing the suffering of Americans would alleviate the suffering of the French.

    France’s mainstream media would do well to fight harder for physicians to be able supply hydroxychloroquine with azithromycin and zinc sulfate. The French media would also do well to be more aware of the dirty game China is playing. On April 5, reports started coming in that in January, before China had let the world know there was a problem, it had begun deliberately lying about it. On January 14, 2020, in a tweet, the World Health Organization repeated China’s lie:

    “Investigations conducted by the Chinese authorities have found no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission of the novel #coronavirus (2019-nCoV) identified in #Wuhan, #China”

    Meanwhile, Maria Bartiromo disclosed on Fox News, that, before alerting the world about the coronavirus crisis, China had begun cornering the market in medical supplies. It bought $2 billion worth of medical masks — China makes half the world’s supply; why would it buy them? — as well as hundreds of millions of dollars’ worth of other medical gear. Now, reports are stating that China is demanding payment from Italy for donated medical equipment that Italy had donated to China and that China now wants Italy to buy back.

    Finally, it would not hurt the French media to show more compassion, to pay more attention to what they say, to watch with more care their own society, and to think about ways to find remedies to the economic and political dysfunction that unleashed such an unimaginable horror.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 02:00

  • Cops Arrest Couple For Breaking Quarantine As Hawaii Embraces Mass Surveillance
    Cops Arrest Couple For Breaking Quarantine As Hawaii Embraces Mass Surveillance

    The exhausting effort required to contain an outbreak of the novel coronavirus – contact tracing, quarantine enforcement etc. – are giving regimes from the US to China to a handful of European nations an unprecedented opportunity to test technologies designed to infringe on human liberty by dramatically increasing law enforcement’s capacity to actively monitor whole communities.

    Once a population is policed by drones in the sky and hazmat-wearing cops armed with automatic weapons patrolling the ground looking for lockdown violators, and encouraging neighbors to snitch on each other,  can it really be free?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Maybe ask mainland Chinese how they feel. While they’ve adjusted to living in a world where facial recognition cameras might catch them violating rules and dock their ‘social credit’ score, Americans are only just getting their first glimpse at the dystopian totalitarian future that awaits, except instead of President Xi monitoring them, it’ll be Mark Zuckerberg.

    While Americans debate the ethics of snitching on quarantine violators, Hawaiians now have their very own quarantine-themed civil liberties fiasco now that the first couple in the state has been arrested for break its 14-day mandatory quarantine.

    Quarantines have been declared in different states at different lengths and with varying levels of enforcement. A few states still haven’t imposed a legally binding lockdown.

    But a couple who apparently arrived on the Hawaiian island of Kaua’i recently after traveling from the island of O’ahu was arrested by local police after they were twice informed of their obligation to self-quarantine for 14 days, but decided to stop for food at a supermarket on the way to their hotel anyway, the Star Advertiser reports.

    The pair were reportedly arrested by Hawaii police just minutes after walking out of the supermarket.

    Both posted bail, but they have an upcoming court date, where they face charges that could lead to a fine of up to $5k and/or up to 1 year in prison.

    While it’s tempting to look at this couple with contempt for traveling during this period and also violating a quarantine, most people have probably violated the orders or guidelines at one point or another. Furthermore, most people don’t expect to be monitored that closely by the police. Perhaps they thought the stop at the grocery store was okay, since they’re an “essential” business that are still open. Who knows? But it definitely seems a bit harsh to arrest them – write them an expensive ticket, maybe.

    But many libertarian or civil liberty defenders probably find this behavior disturbing. And if you’re among them, then keep in mind, this isn’t all that the state of Hawaii is doing to ratchet up the mass surveillance of its citizens. MauiNow reports that a “community-driven” presumably quasi-public “project” has been launched by the state encouraging all Hawaiians to share a massive trove of personal data with the app, so it can use it to help carry out contact tracing. The method reportedly worked well in South Korea. But building a massive database that can trace the movements and interactions of nearly every single individual in the state seems like something that – if it must be done – should be done so with the most extreme oversight possible, with a widely understood agreement to destroy the data after all this is over.

     

     

     

     

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 01:00

  • Whistleblower: COVID-19 Patients Need Oxygen Therapy Not Ventilator
    Whistleblower: COVID-19 Patients Need Oxygen Therapy Not Ventilator

    Via Great Game India,

    Another whistleblower, a doctor treating Coronavirus patients himself has come out with a startling disclosure saying COVID-19 patients need Oxygen therapy not Ventilator and that we may be treating the wrong disease. He says the patients symptoms resemble High Altitude Sickness and not Pneumonia.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Cameron Kyle-Sidell is a doctor treating COVID-19 patients in New York City’s Maimonides Medical Center. Nine days ago Dr. Cameron opened an Intensive Care Unit to care for COVID-19 patients in New York City. Here is what he learned in his own words:

    “I am a physician who has been working at the bedside of COVID+ patients in NYC. I believe we are treating the wrong disease and that we must change what we are doing if we want to save as many lives as possible.”

    “In February, South Korean physicians reported that critical Covid-19 patients responded well to oxygen therapy without a ventilator. Patients are getting multiple organ damage from hypoxia. It’s not the pneumonia that’s the killer, it’s the cellular oxygen deprivation. And we are hurting these patients with ventilators.”

    The past 48 hours or so have seen a huge revelation: COVID-19 causes prolonged and progressive hypoxia (starving your body of oxygen) by binding to the heme groups in hemoglobin in your red blood cells. People are simply desaturating (losing o2 in their blood), and that’s what eventually leads to organ failures that kill them, not any form of ARDS or pneumonia. All the damage to the lungs you see in CT scans are from the release of oxidative iron from the hemes, this overwhelms the natural defenses against pulmonary oxidative stress and causes that nice, always-bilateral ground glass opacity in the lungs.

    Patients returning for re-hospitalization days or weeks after recovery suffering from apparent delayed post-hypoxic leukoencephalopathy strengthen the notion COVID-19 patients are suffering from hypoxia despite no signs of respiratory ‘tire out’ or fatigue.

    Earlier, GreatGameIndia reported, a Montana based physician Dr. Annie Bukacek, MD, blowing the whistle on how the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) is exaggerating the COVID-19 death toll by manipulating Coronavirus death certificates.

    The CDC counts both true COVID-19 cases and speculative guesses of COVID-19 the same. They call it death by COVID-19. They automatically overestimate the real death numbers, by their own admission.  Prior to COVID-19, people were more likely to get an accurate cause of death written on their death certificate if they died in the hospital. Why more accurate when a patient dies in the hospital? Because hospital staff has physical examination findings labs, radiologic studies, et cetera, to make a good educated guess. It is estimated that 60 percent of people die in the hospital. But even [with] those in-hospital deaths, the cause of death is not always clear, especially in someone with multiple health conditions, each of which could cause the death.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Similar claims have also been made by Senator Dr. Scott Jensen from Minnesota who said Hospitals are getting paid more to list patients as COVID-19.

    Right now Medicare is determining that if you have a COVID-19 admission to the hospital you get $13,000. If that COVID-19 patient goes on a ventilator you get $39,000, three times as much. Nobody can tell me after 35 years in the world of medicine that sometimes those kinds of things impact on what we do.”

    Dr. Jensen received a 7-page document coaching him to fill out death certificates with a COVID-19 diagnosis without a lab test confirming the diagnosis.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/14/2020 – 00:05

  • What To Look For In Bank Earnings: All Eyes On Loan Losses
    What To Look For In Bank Earnings: All Eyes On Loan Losses

    Tomorrow JPMorgan and Wells Fargo will usher in a historic earnings cycle, one which will see S&P500 earnings plunge the most since the (first) financial crisis…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which in turn is a walk in the park compared to the -30% EPS crash expected in Q2…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and unlike prior quarters, nobody will care about bank FICC revenues or Net Interest Income. Instead investors will care about only one thing: how much money will U.S. banks lose on loans because of the coronavirus recession.

    JPMorgan will kick it off tomorrow morning ahead of the bell, and investors will closely watch comments from CEO Jamie Dimon, especially after his recent ominous investor letter in which he warned that what is coming will “at a minimum include a bad recession combined with some kind of financial stress similar to the global financial crisis of 2008”, in his first earnings call since suffering a heart attack. Wells Fargo reports right after and then Bank of America, Goldman Sachs and Citigroup all follow on Wednesday.

    And, as noted above, instead of the income statement – where any Q1 gains are expected to be a wash compared to the massive damage suffered across bank balance sheets – investors will seek answers on just how bad the recession will be, include provisions and net charge-offs, the effects of accounting rule shifts known as CECL, or Current Expected Credit Loss, and banks’ capital return plans, particularly regarding dividends as well as when stock buybacks may return.

    To be sure, Wall Street estimates have changed dramatically from a month ago, when analysts called for big bank earnings per share to rise in the first quarter from a year earlier by an average of 2%. Now they see declines ranging from 14% to 42%.

    That, as Reuters notes, is not just because the impact of the global pandemic is changing and hard to quantify, but also because of a new accounting standard that requires banks to estimate losses for the lifetime of loans and set aside money now to cover them. Those estimates have to be justified to regulators and auditors, and be credible to investors. But they ultimately rely on judgment: a pessimistic management team could decide to take much bigger provisions than optimistic peers at a rival bank, even if they have similar loan books.

    To show the difficulty in guessing how that might play out, UBS analysts created a table showing two outcomes for earnings per share: one with usual loss reserves, and another that was about one-third lower, based on their assumptions about the new rule.

    “And, the truth is we’re probably going to be very wrong,” lead analyst Saul Martinez said in an interview. “The risk is that it is higher.”

    “The first quarter is the history, the second quarter the mystery,” said Bloomberg Intelligence analyst Alison Williams.

    Investors may prioritize setting “some kind of level for provisions versus stress-tested losses,” while assessing how much customers have drawn down commercial and industrial loans, and how much of soaring delinquencies may turn into realized losses, she said. Capital markets may be strong, Williams added, but “much of that is fueled by trends through mid-February.” Dimon’s remarks will be important even as his recent annual letter offered a “bit of a preview,” Williams said.

    Last week, Goldman analysts cut their estimates for big banks for all of 2020 by 40% this week, all due to additional loan-loss provisions. Other issues affecting earnings essentially cancel each other out, they said.

    While the uncertainty about bank results also reflects uncertainty about the coronavirus, the new accounting standard add another layer of mystery for banks. Although they have more insight about the financial stress of their borrowers, and therefore more insight about the economy, they do not have a crystal ball about the coronavirus.

    This puts bank executives in a pedestal reserved traditionally for central bankers: they will have to be mindful that they could send shockwaves through markets if investors believe they are predicting a protracted and horrid recession, or alternatively, are being blaze and not taking the risks seriously enough.

    “It is going to be a tricky balancing act,” said Martinez.

    Analysts will also be eager to ask bank executives about assumptions they used for the new accounting standard, known as CECL, for Current Expected Credit Losses, and pronounced like the name Cecil. It has been in the works for a decade but only recently started being implemented.

    Across the board, investors will probably “look through first-quarter earnings and focus on credit quality, the second true-up of the CECL loan loss reserves and net interest margin compression,” RBC analyst Gerard Cassidy said via email. Bank stocks have “certainly discounted the expected decline in earnings in 2020,” Cassidy said. Now, investors want to be reassured that “this downturn for the banks will only be an earnings issue and not a balance sheet issue similar to the 2008-2009 financial crisis.”

    Addressing the CECL issue, Morgan Stanley analyst Betsy Graseck writes that she is baking in a 6-31% increase in reserves from “day 2” CECL estimates in 1Q20. As a reminder, CECL (Current Expected Credit Loss) is the new accounting standard for loan loss reserves which requires life of loan reserving estimates. CECL kicked off January 1, 2020, and will require management teams to estimate life of loan losses for their loan books as of March 31.

    While Day 1 CECL estimates are known, the biggest question from investors going into the 1Q20 print likely is: how big will Day 2 reserve build be? Given the uncertainty of the virus trajectory and length of “stay-at-home” directives, street estimates for day 2 CECL charges are very wide.

    Morgan Stanley bases its CECL Day 2 estimates on a 10% probability of the most severe stress test that the banks have ever done, the 2018 stress test. This drives a 6-31% increase in reserves across the bank’s coverage, takes up reserve / loan ratios by a median 17bps, and takes down 1Q20 EPS by about ~1/3. That said, banks may well opt for a higher charge, especially if they are looking for a slower economic recovery than we are.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the macro level, analysts will want to know how high bankers expect unemployment to go, how that will affect consumer loan delinquencies, and how much exposure they have to oil companies and sectors that have seen business vanish, like airlines, hotels and restaurants. And they will also inquire about how effective government stimulus programs have been, and why so many banks have been leery of participating in the PPP small business rescue program.

    Spending by the Federal Reserve and Treasury Department could keep loan losses from being as high as in prior recessions, said Wells Fargo bank analyst Mike Mayo. He described the first quarter as the most difficult one to predict since the peak of the global financial crisis in late-2008.

    “You have the biggest accounting change to impact loan loss reserving coming in the quarter that needs the biggest change in loan loss reserves,” he said.

    The three most important things to watch for with bank earnings will be “credit, credit and credit,” Mayo told Bloomberg last week in a phone interview. “Investors want to know about impacts to industries,” including credit draw-downs, losses and provisions. They’ll also want to hear about the degree of relief banks are offering borrowers, particularly regarding small business lending and mortgage forbearance, he said.

    “The only line items bank investors will care about this season are the ones pertaining to credit,” with provisions and net charge-offs determining how bank stocks will trade, Vital Knowledge founder Adam Crisafulli wrote in a note. Commentary about capital return will also be key, he said, as “investors assume buybacks will be resumed in the second half (they’ve been voluntarily suspended until the end of June) while dividends continue.”

    Comparing results with expectations will be particularly challenging this quarter, Cassidy said, as analysts and investors alike will be “in the dark” on first-quarter and full-year earnings estimates, due to the difficulties in assessing the collapse in the U.S. economy from containing Covid-19 and the impacts from CECL.

    “Missing first-quarter EPS estimates by 20%-30% is not likely to be a big deal but posting a meaningful bottom line loss due to a significant increase in the loan loss provision would be a cause for concern,” Cassidy said.

    Going back to the banks reporting tomorrow, JPMorgan is likely to “once again weather the storm better than peers given its diversified franchise and risk management prowess,” Barclays analyst Jason Goldberg wrote in a note.

    Relative to the prior quarter, Goldberg expects a larger balance sheet, driven by draw-downs and deposit growth; lower net interest rate margin, or NIM; seasonally higher fee income from trading; greater costs and a higher loan loss provision, along with more mortgage volume. In credit cards, he sees continued year-over-year growth, but also reserve build. Other key factors Goldberg will watch include Dimon’s health, the outlook for trading and expenses, and strategies for consumer branches and credit cards.

    One final point: heading into earnings, JPMorgan quietly announced it would “temporarily” halt the issuance of new loans and would substantially hike its mortgage lending standards – minimum FICO score of 700, minimum down payment to 20% – for one simple reason: to limit exposure to the coming default wave that will cripple small and medium business and devastate household income for quarters to come. Anything that Dimon says to twist that JPM is hunkering down ahead of what Bloomberg called the “Biggest Wave Of Defaults In History” will be nothing more than self-serving spin.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 23:45

  • Wealthy Preppers Are Riding This Out In Multimillion-Dollar Bunkers
    Wealthy Preppers Are Riding This Out In Multimillion-Dollar Bunkers

    Authored by Sarah Begley via Medium.com,

    Cold War backyard bunkers are out. Subterranean communes are in…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a sense, all of us are preppers right now: stocking up on toilet paper and nonperishable goods, hunkering down, and avoiding social contact. But then, of course, there are the actual preppers living in high-tech, remote, expensive bunkers to ride out Covid-19.

    They knew a disaster was coming, even if they didn’t know it would be a viral pandemic. And for the last few years, author Bradley Garrett has been getting to know them while writing his book Bunker: Building for the End Times, coming out this summer.

    “The terrible irony is that all of these preppers have been telling me to get ready, talking to me about disasters, and I’ve been incredulous, taking them to task, trying to tease out fact from fiction in their stories,” says Garrett.

    “And now, here I am, totally underprepared.”

    GEN caught up with Garrett to find out what these bunkers look like, how many people fit inside them (a lot!), and the surprising reason some preppers believe their way of life benefits others.

    GEN: Is there a distinction between bunker people and prepper people? Is that a Venn diagram or a circle within a circle?

    Garrett: I don’t think of it so much as a Venn diagram as a spectrum. On the most basic level, most American households have some sort of emergency kit: a first aid kit, a flashlight, a radio. But the other end of the spectrum are these people who are building these often very elaborate, technically sophisticated, expensive bunker spaces, which are built to weather a long period of time. They might be building for three months, five months, a year. The longest I’ve seen is five years.

    It starts to become not a technical problem of how to build the space, but how do you create the social dynamics within that space to be able to weather that amount of time. There’s always going to be a degree of social friction based on what people need. And the inevitable result of that kind of situation is that someone emerges as the tyrant. Somebody says, “We’re not going out. Screw your prescription, you can do without it,” or whatever.

    How many people are we talking about? Are these bunkers for individuals, families, communities?

    Before doing my research for this book, I imagined prepping being like Cold War preparations, where you’re digging up your backyard and creating a bunker. What I actually found is that that is an old model, because everyone realizes that that’s cramped, it’s uncomfortable, it’s unnecessary, that kind of [family-sized] bunker building.

    What people are thinking about now looks much more like a commune. It’s people with similar worldviews coming together to build an intentional community with complementary skills to get each other through a crisis like this. And those communities are not as homogenous as you might expect.

    The best way to think about them is as second houses. So instead of buying an investment property or a vacation home, you buy the bunker. Because these people don’t have faith that the way that we’re living is sustainable and that it will continue. And so the bunker acts as an insurance policy, but also kind of a vacation home — like, often they would go there for Fourth of July. It’s a gathering space. But then if things go wrong, it’s also the space that you retreat to and you have the added bonus of showing up and meeting all the people you already know and love hanging out with.

    I can’t tell you, it’s been amazing watching it happen. All of this stuff was speculative when I started writing about it in 2016, 2017. I watched each one of these communities that were, essentially, temporary communities, just suddenly wink into life. They all went there and sort of shut up the blast doors, and they’ve got their supplies. And while all of us are stressing out, going around trying to find toilet paper or whatever, they’re all partying out there.

    So when you say “out there,” where is that?

    They’re all over the place. I spent a lot of time in South Dakota in a community called the xPoint. There are 575 semi-subterranean concrete igloos that were built during World War II — it used to be munition storage. They basically put the weapons in there so that the weapons couldn’t be bombed, which is kind of a weird irony: Bunkers that were built to protect weapons later protect people from viruses.

    There was another one in Kansas that’s built in a missile silo that used to have a nuclear weapon in it, and now has a 15-story inverted condominium. I’ve been calling it a geoscraper. I don’t know what else to call it. It’s an inverted skyscraper.

    But I’ve also been in communities that are a bit more back-of-the-land in their outlook towards things. There was one in Tennessee where a group of people that called themselves homestead preppers were learning how to craft things, how to grow things, how to can food. Their community was right on the edge of Great Smoky Mountains National Park and they would sneak into the park and plant secret groves of fruit trees and vegetable plots; they can actually just kind of vanish into the park if things get really bad.

    Communities in different places had very different ways of thinking about how to handle the crisis, but shared visions on the inevitability of the crisis.

    What’s the socioeconomic range of these three communities, for instance? Is it mostly wealthier people?

    No, it’s a huge range. The people in Tennessee were running small retail shops, they were working everyday jobs. They were making it work on the budget they had. The condo in Kansas, people were buying in for $1.5 million to $3.5 million.

    Do they have children in there with them?

    I’m going to say most people are in their forties and fifties because you have to have a disposable income to be able to make the decision to do that. There are younger people who have just sort of checked out of their primary life — their life becomes about prepping. There aren’t many kids there, which speaks to the demographic, but I did have a lot of people tell me that they wanted to hand their bunkers down to their [adult] children. So these aren’t doomsday bunkers, these people don’t think the world is ending. They just see it as a space to retreat to and that’s something that they want to pass onto future generations if they can.

    There was one guy in Thailand who is building this amazing ecofortress, this kind of self-sustained giant concrete block just out of Chiang Mai, in the middle of these orchards. He was growing all of his food inside and he had bulletproof windows on the top of the building — the thing was unassailable, and he was super paranoid about social unrest. But he made all of his money working on offshore oil rigs. And when the pandemic hit, he was in Burma on an oil rig, and he’s stuck out there now. His wife and kid, who he basically built this fortress to protect, are waiting for him to come home, inside the fortress, not knowing if he’s going to come home with the virus. As much as you plan, you cannot plan for everything.

    How conspiracy-minded are these preppers?

    Preppers are listening to [traditional news sources like CNN], but they’re, I think, more willing to incorporate a wider range of ideas about what may be causing it and what the solutions might be.

    That being said, I’ve had a lot of people say really crazy shit to me over the past three or four years, and there’s been many times when I’ve ended up in heated arguments with them or just walking away because I’ve realized that we’re pulling from a completely different pool of information and there’s no possible way that we’re ever going to be able to communicate to discuss these things.

    In the book, you mention some of your sources feared a virus being deliberately unleashed by a rogue nation. Is that what they’re thinking with Covid-19, that it’s a Chinese conspiracy?

    They’re definitely willing to call out its origin, to call it “Chinese virus.” That’s a kind of covert racism. But I haven’t heard anyone suggest that it’s a manufactured virus, in any way, shape, or form.

    Different types of disasters call for different features of bunkers. What would make a bunker good for a viral pandemic?

    So normally, when you put an air filtration system in a bunker, you want to have what’s called positive pressure. If you’ve got positive air pressure within the bunker that’s pushing out of it, then air can’t come in. And everything, all the air that you’re having pumped in, you want to go through an NBC filter, a nuclear biological chemical filter. The biological part is what we care about in this instance. So hypothetically, a month ago, if you were to have locked yourself in your bunker and flipped on the biological air filtering, and you’ve just been sitting in there eating freeze-dried food and watching the news since then, there is essentially zero chance that you would contract the virus.

    I think that’s important for two reasons, one is the confidence that that gives you as an individual, right? You are absolutely not infected, there’s no way. But two, it takes pressure off of state resources. So you don’t have these psychosomatic symptoms, you’re not going to get tested, you’re not going to put a strain on the hospital systems.

    This is what preppers argue: That if we take more responsibility for our situation, if we’re more prepared for these sorts of emergencies, then we alleviate pressure on the systems, which allows that system to then help those in greater need.

    It’s a weird kind of logic, right? Because it sounds socialist. It sounds like, “Oh, this is for the greater good.” But then, of course, it accepts that social safety nets should be cut and will be cut. They often refer to Hurricane Katrina. They say, “Look, those people were out there by themselves for three, four, five days before any semblance of help from FEMA began to roll in.” But if you’re a prepper, not only are you prepared for the situation, potentially you can also help out your neighbor.

    To what extent are preppers afraid of looting or unrest as a result of Covid-19?

    There’s this phrase that preppers use, “72 hours to animal.” If the grocery stores were to close down tomorrow, or the trucks stop doing deliveries, then you can imagine how this phrase makes sense because it doesn’t take very long to start thinking, “Okay, I can’t buy food anymore. I know who has food, my neighbors across the street.” The lives that we live are operating on a very fragile consensus and very fragile infrastructure, and once any of that starts breaking down, it doesn’t take long for people to become incredibly selfish.

    We would hope that people would reach for community and that people would assist each other in times of disaster, and I think that will be the case, and has been the case, in the early days of this disaster. But as time goes on, things get more difficult, the situation changes.

    Those people who are hunkered down in their bunkers right now, how long are they planning to be there?

    The date that most people are talking to me about is early summer. But there might be cycles.

    I’ve been thinking about the bunker in terms of cyclical time. Since the Enlightenment, we’ve become accustomed to thinking about things in linear terms and, certainly, capitalism has this expectation of exponential growth in perpetuity.

    I love the idea that we’re actually going back to something closer to indigenous cosmologies, where we start thinking about the world as a kind of spiral — it just kind of cycles around like a virus. It comes and it goes and we have to start thinking about our lives in terms of renewal and rebirth. We go into hiding for three or four months while it passes through and we do a certain kind of work. And then we emerge and do something else.

    This interview has been edited and condensed for clarity.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 23:25

  • Success During "Hard" Times: Sex Toy Company Sees Sales Rocket 38% Since COVID-19 Lockdown Started
    Success During “Hard” Times: Sex Toy Company Sees Sales Rocket 38% Since COVID-19 Lockdown Started

    Today in “capitalism works” news, a British sex toy company is having its best month since 2017 as a result of the coronavirus lockdown.

    It’s almost as if demand fluctuates for items based on market conditions. Weird. Don’t tell the Central Banks…

    Joe Silver and James Pearson, owners of sex toy company Olivia Ocean, say they’re working harder than ever to deal with increased numbers of deliveries to customers. The company says it continues to keep people safe by social distancing, despite the sales increase, according to The Mirror.

    “Sales went through the roof. I’ve had to say lots of products are out of stock, we just weren’t ready for this,” Silver said. “Everybody is at home and they’ve got a lot of spare time on their hands. We’re only human, everyone is just a bit randy – let’s be honest.”

    In the first week of the lockdown, sales were up 38%. The duo expects sales to rise by 50% by this weekend. Normally, they would be sending out about 1,500 packages a day. That number is now up to about 5,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Silver continued: “Day after day we come in and we’re up on what we were before.”

    Among the most popular items since the lockdown is the “Couples Mystery Box”, which the company describes as a “naughty surprise for intense desire” – whatever the hell that means…

    The company started when Pearson sent Silver a photo of a sex toy with no explanation. Silver said: “I knew him quite well so I knew he was a bit of a joker, but I didn’t know what angle this was.”

    Then, capitalism took over. “When I started looking in to it I realised it was a massive market and there aren’t a lot of people to compete with,” Silver continued. “After some market research, we found people don’t want to spend a lot of cash to buy a sex toy because they might realise it’s not for them, and you can’t return them.”

    Godspeed, lads. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 23:05

  • "The Illusions Are Exhausted" – What Are You Gonna Do About It?
    “The Illusions Are Exhausted” – What Are You Gonna Do About It?

    Authored by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    “Tucked into the recent recovery bill was a provision granting the Federal Reserve the right to set up a $450 billion bailout plan without following key provisions of the federal open meetings law, including announcing its meetings or keeping most records about them, according to a POLITICO review of the legislation.

    The provision further calls into question the transparency and oversight for the biggest bailout law ever passed by Congress. President Donald Trump has indicated he does not plan to comply with another part of the new law intended to boost Congress’ oversight powers of the bailout funds. And earlier this week, Trump dismissed the government official chosen as the chief watchdog for the stimulus package.

    The changes at the central bank – which appear to have been inserted into the 880-page bill by sympathetic senators during the scramble to get it approved — would address a complaint that the Fed faced during the 2008 financial crisis, when board members couldn’t easily hold group conversations to address the fast-moving economic turmoil.

    The provision dispenses with a longstanding accountability rule that the board has to give at least one day’s notice before holding a meeting. Experts say the change could lead to key information about the $450 billion bailout fund, such as which firms might benefit from the program, remaining inaccessible long after the bailout is over.

    The new law would absolve the board of the requirement to keep minutes to closed-door meetings as it deliberates on how to set up the $450 billion loan program. That would severely limit the amount of information potentially available to the public on what influenced the board’s decision-making. The board would only have to keep a record of its votes, though they wouldn’t have to be made public during the coronavirus crisis.

    A Fed spokesperson did not comment on the changes in the law or whether the Fed would continue keeping records of its meetings.

    – PoliticoRecovery Law Allows Fed to Rope off Public as It Spends Billions

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “An era can be said to end when its basic illusions are exhausted.”

    – Arthur Miller

    Before going any further, I want to share a graphic that accurately summarizes my position on the current pandemic affecting the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, it’s quite common for many to latch on to one of these conclusions and singularly obsess about it to the detriment of the others, when we need to be thinking about all three simultaneously.

    It’s absolutely critical we understand governments throughout the world are rapidly mobilizing to use the crisis as an excuse to extract more wealth from society and condition the public to relinquish more precious civil liberties. The response in my own imperial oligarchy masquerading as a country has been particularly grotesque. A government that told us masks don’t work and couldn’t roll out testing for weeks, is now responding with the worst of both post-9/11 and post-financial crisis responses. The idea of representative government or democracy in America is a complete myth. The interests and desires of the people are irrelevant, and our economic system can be best described as financial feudalism.

    We’ve seen this movie before. The U.S. government and Federal Reserve used major crises to consolidate wealth and power twice before this century, and it’s happening again. They got away with it before — and they’re getting away with it now — because the public accepts it. I hate to write that, but it’s true. People will tell me the public has no way to fight back, but that’s not accurate. The public hasn’t even tried historical methods like mass strikes and boycotts, instead they’ve been successfully neutered by phony red/blue team mainstream politics, through bickering about marginal issues like pronouns and bathrooms, and by endless entertainment and debt-based consumption. This is why the oligarchy keeps winning. Americans aren’t a serious people yet.

    Witnessing the massive theft and power consolidation during the financial crisis a decade ago shook me to my core. I learned so much about how the world really works I simply couldn’t go on in the same way, so I quit my finance job and moved out of NYC. I was convinced such in your face theft would lead to effective popular movements and that the people would discover their power and take direct action, but I was wrong. Rather than economic populism transcending other differences to become ascendant and potent, most Americans were successfully shoved back into convenient political boxes easily managed by oligarchy. The rest is history.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Is the above wishful thinking? It might be. I had similar thoughts a decade ago and nothing truly meaningful happened. That said, I’ve learned some valuable life lessons over the past decade and will share some of them today.

    The title of today’s piece is “what are you gonna do about it?”, but let me start by telling you what I’m not going to do. I am not going to vote in the 2020 presidential election. In previous cycles, I went out and voted third party as a protest, but I won’t even do that this time. I refuse to give such a farcical system the satisfaction of even a protest vote. I’m over it. Done.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Choosing to refrain from participation in a clearly rigged and sham presidential election process may feel like giving up, but it’s the exact opposite. It’s actually quite liberating to give up on the fantasy that voting for one of two sociopaths will materially improve your life or the direction of the country. Once you stop believing in the lazy fairytale version of politics you can get down to real action. If you accept that voting is largely a charade, you can either sit back and take it while playing video games, or you can get motivated. I see two avenues for action that can actually change things.

    The first consists of mass organized movements that unite as many disparate factions as possible to focus on a single issue. This can take the form of a workers strike, a targeted boycott or something similar. The key thing that’s prevented this from happening is Americans have been so successfully divided and conquered. “Activist leaders” often demand those who constitute a movement see eye to eye on virtually everything, yet oligarchy knows to unite whenever their core interests are even slightly threatened. A hopelessly splintered public is one reason the people always lose.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Although I’m confident in the success of such a strategy if implemented by enough people, this doesn’t mean it will materialize. I was hopeful it could happen last decade, but it never did. Americans proved to be as divided, conquered and distracted as ever, and it’s possible things will continue along this path in the years ahead. As such, waiting for mass movements that may never occur to materialize is not a sufficient strategy. You need a primary strategy, and that strategy starts with you. 

    The only thing you truly have control over is your mindset and your actions. Think about what angers you most about the system as it stands and turn that anger into something productive. What can you do as an individual to protest or reject that system? What can you do to become more resilient? Can you repurpose your skillset or profession in a way where you become more of a solution than part of the problem? Some of us can do more than others, but virtually everyone can take some action. If you can’t think of anything, think harder.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Reflecting on the past decade, every moment I spent taking control of my life and improving as an individual was worthwhile and rewarding, while every moment I spent hoping others around me would change was a gigantic disappointment.

    This doesn’t mean we should give up on mass movements, it means you cannot rely on other people to get to the point you’re at as quickly as you’d like. Think about what’s actually in your control and go for it. And good luck.

    *  *  *

    Liberty Blitzkrieg is an ad-free website. If you enjoyed this post and my work in general, visit the Support Page where you can donate and contribute to my efforts.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:45

  • 'You'll See Bodies In The Streets Of Africa' Warns Melinda Gates; Says Vaccine Is 'Ultimate Solution' To COVID-19
    ‘You’ll See Bodies In The Streets Of Africa’ Warns Melinda Gates; Says Vaccine Is ‘Ultimate Solution’ To COVID-19

    Melinda Gates says that COVID-19 is going to “be horrible in the developing world,” and that we’re going to see ‘bodies in the streets of Africa’ like what’s happening in Ecuador.

    “Look at Ecuador,” said Gates, adding “They’re putting bodies out on the street. You’re going to see that in countries in Africa.”

    During a Friday interview with CNN‘s Poppy Harlow, Gates said that when she saw how China had to enact mass quarantines in order to combat the virus, “my first thought was Africa,” adding “how in the world are they going to deal with this?

    Earlier in the interview, Gates said that vaccines will be the ‘ultimate solution’ to solving coronavirus – which she and her husband Bill have been heavily invested in for some time.

    Of course, not everyone is excited about the Gates’ endeavors.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:25

  • Coronavirus Socialism: Power To 'Some' People
    Coronavirus Socialism: Power To ‘Some’ People

    Authored by Patrick Watson via MauldinEconomics.com,

    When (hopefully soon) we all get out of coronavirus lockdown and try to resume normal life, we will probably find a different “normal.”

    The best-case outcome: scientists discover a “magic bullet” treatment that quickly restores the most serious cases to health. We could then ease restrictions and get on with business.

    But more likely, any such treatment is months away and a vaccine probably a year away, so many precautions will have to stay in place. We won’t see large gatherings and crowded restaurants anytime soon.

    But we’ll see something else: a radically different economic structure.

    The US has never been truly “capitalist” but at least it had a free market façade. Thanks to the coronavirus, the façade is now crumbling.

    We will come out of this further from capitalism and closer to socialism. We know this because a leading capitalist said so.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Needpix

    Shoved Left

    Back in January, about the time Chinese authorities quarantined Wuhan, the world’s billionaires gathered in Davos, Switzerland, as they do each year.

    CNBC interviewed JPMorgan Chase (JPM) CEO Jamie Dimon on January 22. Asked about the Democratic presidential candidates, Dimon said he preferred a moderate, not a socialist. He went on:

    Capitalism is the greatest thing that ever happened to mankind. I think that people who haven’t read history books about socialism really should… Once you have governments taking control of businesses it ends up in corruption…

    If you’re talking about governments controlling corporations that’s socialism. You can do it in a small way or a big way. The small way is to put a commissar on your board remember the old Russian commissars could sit in the room or do it through regulatory or stuff like that the other way is that they actually own the company. Look at all the other countries and they start to take over the oil companies and the steel companies and utility companies.

    And the banks. The banks start making loans not to good companies not because they are properly allocating capital to its highest and best use but to keep that factory open. The bridge to nowhere to make sure the mayor doesn’t lose jobs in his town and once you do that you will have an eroding society. (full transcript)

    As I wrote at the time (see Socialism Is Coming But Not the Way You Think), Dimon actually loves misallocating capital. His bank routinely makes “bridge to nowhere” loans and does so happily as long as it gets repaid with interest.

    So if those activities define socialism, Jamie Dimon is a very confused billionaire. He professes to love capitalism, but his actions say otherwise.

    My point back then was that the US-China “Phase 1” trade deal was nudging the US toward some kind of socialism. I didn’t expect the coronavirus would soon shove us that same direction. Yet it is.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Flickr

    Collectivized Production

    Two months after Jamie Dimon said socialism doesn’t work because governments can’t properly allocate capital, Congress allocated $2.2 trillion via the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security (CARES) Act.

    Note, left-leaning Democrats didn’t do this alone. The bill was as bipartisan as it gets.

    The CARES Act does some useful things. It will help workers and small businesses who had to close down to stop the virus from spreading.

    But that’s not all. The new law gives the Treasury Department $454 billion to invest in a “special purpose vehicle” jointly with the Federal Reserve. The Fed will then allocate (or perhaps misallocate, to use Dimon’s favorite word) that money in loans to private businesses.

    But in fact, it’s way more than $454 billion. Here’s how two economists described the arrangement in a Wall Street Journal article (my emphasis in bold).

    The expectation is that the central bank will leverage this money 10 to 1, enabling it to lend up to $4.54 trillion to companies.

    That sum is more than all U.S. commercial and industrial loans outstanding at the end of 2019 ($2.35 trillion) plus all the new corporate bonds issued during 2019 ($1.41 trillion).

    Thus, if this capital is all deployed by the Fed, and at rates that will surely crowd out private capital, all capital allocation in the U.S. in 2020 will be done by the Federal Reserve System, not by the capital market. This is the largest step toward a centrally planned economy the U.S. has ever taken.

    Will the Treasury-Fed partnership wisely allocate this money? We don’t know yet, but the plan is exactly what Jamie Dimon says won’t work. Quoting him again:

    …The banks start making loans not to good companies not because they are properly allocating capital to its highest and best use but to keep that factory open. The bridge to nowhere to make sure the mayor doesn’t lose jobs in his town.

    Keeping factories open and avoiding job losses is the CARES Act’s entire point, and government, not private lenders, will decide how to do it.

    Maybe this centrally-planned financing will find the “highest and best use” Dimon thinks it should, but we don’t know that yet. We do know that private companies will get money from taxpayers, and taxpayers will bear the loss if those companies don’t repay it. The government might get equity in those companies, too.

    In other words, we are (for now, at least) collectivizing the means of production. Mao Zedong would be pleased.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Photo: Flickr

    Power to Some People

    If, like Jamie Dimon, you fear socialist misallocation, Bernie Sanders should be the least of your worries. It’s already happening on a massive scale and President Trump, not Sanders, signed the bill.

    We were heading that direction anyway; the coronavirus sped up the process. And where it will lead isn’t clear yet. But it won’t be anything you can plausibly call “capitalism.”

    More likely, we will get even more state-enforced corporatism, with socialized losses and privatized profits.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:16

  • Morgan Stanley: "The Bad Actors Of The Last Cycle Are Getting Bailed Out"
    Morgan Stanley: “The Bad Actors Of The Last Cycle Are Getting Bailed Out”

    There is a certain paradox behind the coronavirus crisis.

    On one hand it is a human, social and economic tragedy of unprecedented proportions, with tens of thousands of people dead around the globe, millions infected, tens of millions unemployed, small and medium businesses decimated, countless companies on the verge of bankruptcy and the global economy in a (hopefully brief) depression. On the other hand, it is precisely what all those who benefited from the last round of Fed bailouts – namely Wall Street banks, zombie companies, and overlevered sovereigns so desperately needed. But don’t take our word for it: here is Morgan Stanley’s chief US equity strategist explaining and admitting what so many can only whisper behind closed doors for fear of being branded conspiracy theorists or being suspended from social networks who are now the self-appointed gatekeepers of the First Amendment.

    Last Thursday the Fed surprised us yet again by providing up to $2.3T in loan support while moving further down the quality curve with their secondary market purchases pushing into high yield and CMBS. The program goes well beyond secondary  market purchases of existing credit and will also help originate new primary issuance both directly and via lending institutions–i.e., the banks–which remain in good shape to assist. While most investors have been expecting more out of the Fed, based on our conversations with many clients on Thursday and over the long weekend, this salvo from the Fed far surpassed  expectations in terms of size and scope.

    The bottom line for us is that this latest move is very much in line with our prior view that investors should not have any doubts about the Fed’s resolve to do whatever it takes to make sure this recession doesn’t turn into a depression. In fact, they now appear to be trying to limit the healthy damage we typically get from a garden variety recession.

    As noted in our prior research, we think the nature of this recession–the unprecedented suddenness and trajectory of the contraction centered on a health crisis–has provided absolute cover for policy makers to go well beyond traditional support. As such, the bad actors of the last cycle are getting bailed out, which could ultimately limit the malaise we typically get in a recession. In short, the worst stocks will likely have the biggest recoveries…

    A much more self-serving and less intellectually honest, if similarly apropos take on what is really taking place behind the scenes comes from JPMorgan’s permabullish quant, Marko Kolanovic:

    When it comes to market developments, we believe that the Fed’s action last Thursday represents a pivotal moment in this crisis. Powell’s statement included that “we will continue to use these powers forcefully, proactively, and aggressively until we are confident that we are solidly on the road to recovery” and probably the most important, historic statement, “We  should make them whole. They did not cause this.” This crisis is different from any other in recent history in that it was not caused in any way by businesses or investors. Unhindered by moral hazard, the response of fiscal and monetary authorities is and will continue to be unprecedented, with the goal of essentially making everyone ‘whole.’  We believe the significance of this development is underestimated by markets, and this reinforces our view of a full asset price recovery, and equity markets reaching all-time highs next year, likely by H1.

    Investors with focus on negative upcoming earnings and economic developments are effectively ‘fighting the Fed,’ which was historically a losing proposition

    Got that? Anyone who bothers with such trivial, anachronistic fundamentals as collapsing earnings, economic developments, the terminal disconnect between security prices and underlying cash flow dynamics now that the Fed is buying junk bonds (and soon stocks), or even bothers to look at the yield curve as if it matters anymore now that the Fed is about to unleash Yield Curve COntrol, is fighting the Fed and destined lose. Thanks Marko for not saying that anyone who still dares to think outside of the brrrrox should be arrested.

    So to loosely paraphrase Rahm Emanuel, “Never let a pandemic go to waste.” For the sake of humanity, we can only hope that it wasn’t a plandemic.

    That said, one does wonder what crisis will spontaneously emerge in 5 years when all the bad actors who were bailed out last cycle, and were just re-bailed out again, will need to be bailed out one more time?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 22:05

  • "It's The Perfect Storm" – SoftBank Reports Staggering $25 Billion Q1 Loss
    “It’s The Perfect Storm” – SoftBank Reports Staggering $25 Billion Q1 Loss

    In an announcement that should surprise absolutely nobody who has been paying attention, SoftBank announced in a corporate filing on Monday that the Japanese telecom conglomerate with a VC arm expected to report the biggest loss in its nearly 40-year history.

    For Q1, SoftBank expects to report a ¥1.8 trillion ($16.7 billion) loss from the company’s stake in its $100 billion ‘Vision Fund’, and another ¥800 billion ($7.4 billion) in losses from its own portfolio of investments. Even considering everything that’s been going on in the world, those are massive numbers.

    As one analyst told Bloomberg, the dire situation the company has found itself in resembles a “perfect storm,” as millions of investors recalibrate the odds of the Japanese corporate titan’s long-term survival. Of course, SoftBank’s collapse would be such a blow to the Japanese economy, that we would expect the Abe government, or even the BoJ, to immediately swoop in and bail it out, since moral hazard (at least for big corporations) no longer seems to apply.

    “This is looking more and more like the perfect storm for SoftBank,” said Justin Tang, head of Asian Research at United First Partners. “The question is whether there is more to come.”

    As WSJ explained in its report, SoftBank’s current predicament is a consequence of Chairman Masayoshi Son’s desire to make a name for himself as a discerning investor in early-stage companies. Without the ‘Vision Fund’ and its own portfolio of investments, SoftBank would still be just a boring old telecoms firm.

    Instead, with his reputation in tatters, Masa Son has now put up more than $40 billion of his personal fortune to guarantee loans to his company, an arrangement that will leave him personally liable if the situation at SoftBank goes south.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since the WeWork blow-up, SoftBank has been regularly mocked over the last six months or so amid regular reports of portfolio companies folding, the latest being last week’s “OneWeb”, a startup that aimed to deploy hundreds of satellites and provide global broadband service. But with the coronavirus outbreak driving the global economy into what looks to be a punishing recession, Masa Son is quickly running out of breathing room.

    SoftBank invests in startups both for its own portfolio, as well as its ‘Vision Fund’ portfolio. While the Saudis are by far the biggest investors in the Vision Fund, with a stake of ~$45 billion, SoftBank owns a $33 billion stake in the $100 billion fund. Other investors include corporations like Foxconn and Apple, as well as Oracle Founder Larry Ellison.

    For the last few years, SoftBank has been a practically price-insensitive investor, dropping billions of dollars in Silicon Valley darlings like Uber (SoftBank has lost money on its Uber investment) as well as dozens of other startups. SoftBank and the Vision Fund have been blamed for almost single-handedly inspiring the massive bubble in startup valuations, a bubble that exploded last year after a string of disappointing IPOs – Uber, Lyft, Peloton Etc. – followed by WeWork, a company in which SoftBank had invested at a valuation of nearly $50 billion, deciding to scrap its IPO after a dramatic drop in valuations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WeWork’s board decided to sue SoftBank earlier this month after the company renegged on a $3 billion payoff to company insiders, including CEO Adam Neumann and several VC funds that backed WeWork citing clauses in an agreement that gave it a legal ‘out’.

    Unfortunately for SoftBank’s workers, the Japanese government might be left up to the task of chastising a major national champion in the middle of an unprecedented pandemic, when everything about the investing environment seems dangerously uncertain. With the pressure from Paul Singer and Elliott Management, plus the downgrade from Moody’s deep into speculative grade for its debt  (though Japanese ratings firms still see SoftBank as a low-risk bet), Masa Son apparently sees only one way forward in the near term: Buy back more stock.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 21:45

  • Caitlin Johnstone Rages "This Absolute Bullshit Would Not Be Possible Without Propaganda"
    Caitlin Johnstone Rages “This Absolute Bullshit Would Not Be Possible Without Propaganda”

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    So as of right now it’s Trump versus Biden. An incompetent plutocrat president selling himself as an anti-establishment people’s champion while simultaneously advancing garden variety Republican sociopathy, versus a warmongering authoritarian who is too demented to string a coherent sentence together and who is looking more and more credibly to be a rapist.

    Needless to say, this is absolute bullshit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How did we get here? How did we get to the point where the electoral contest to run the most powerful government on the planet is between a racist demented right-wing authoritarian warmongering rapist and another racist demented right-wing authoritarian warmongering rapist? How in the hell did this bullshit happen?

    There are a number of factors, including anonymous and unsubstantiated “leaks” from the US intelligence community regarding Russian support for the Bernie Sanders campaign and a shockingly coordinated maneuver by Democratic Party leadership (including former president Obama) to sabotage Sanders in the late hours before Super Tuesday.

    But the primary factor by far was domestic mass media propaganda. Propaganda during the primary season of course, with the billionaire press showing a very clear and undeniable bias against Bernie Sanders from the very beginning of the race. Had the Sanders campaign received a normal quality and quantity of mass media coverage for a candidate of his stature, he would doubtless have received far more support than he did. To deny that biased media messaging has an effect would be the same as denying that advertising, a trillion-dollar industry, has an effect.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But it goes so very much deeper than that. The influence of mass media propaganda upon the Democratic primary race was not limited to the propaganda that was employed during the actual contest; it’s been setting the foundation for it since long before that.

    Without having been raised in a media environment that is saturated with establishment propaganda, it would never occur to anyone in a million years to describe a violent authoritarian extremist like Joe Biden as a “moderate”. It would never occur to anyone to think of this crazy wingnut as “electable”. It would certainly never occur to anyone that he should be running on the platform of what passes for America’s political left wing.

    Joe Biden has been a horrible, evil politician since long before his rape allegations went mainstream and his brain started turning to porridge. If people could gaze with fresh, unmanipulated eyes upon someone who’s dedicated his entire political career to neoliberal exploitation at home and neoconservative mass murder abroad, someone who openly boasts about authoring the foundational documents of the USA PATRIOT Act, someone who promises rich donors that “nothing fundamentally will change” if he’s elected and who they know from experience can be taken at his word, it would never occur to them that this is someone who should be running for any elected office anywhere, let along within spitting distance of the most powerful one in the world.

    It is only by the ability of the mass media to manufacture the illusion of normality that this bullshit has been made possible. The way the plutocratic class controls the mass media has given them the ability to persuade people to believe that freakish extremism is normal and healthy objections to oligarchic malfeasance is freakish extremism.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is the case not just with this bullshit US presidential race, but with all bullshit everywhere. A world where powerful governments attack, destroy, starve and undermine weaker governments which refuse to bow to their interests, a world where the wealthy continue to steal more and more wealth from an increasingly impoverished working class and use the leverage that wealth gets them to steal more, a world where governments demand more and more opacity for themselves and more and more transparency from ordinary people, a world where police are becoming increasingly militarized and speech is becoming increasingly restricted, a world where the response to a global pandemic is not to rally together and overcome but to advance pre-existing authoritarian agendas and manufacture support for new cold war escalations against China.

    None of this bullshit would have been possible without all of us having been raised in an atmosphere of mass-scale obfuscation and manipulation. None of us would ever accept such a world without having been manipulated into it, which is why they have done exactly that.

    We will not collectively use the power of our numbers to force a change to this oppressive status quo until we can find some way to break free of our psychic bondage to the establishment propaganda machine, and we will not find a way to do that until we change something deep within ourselves about our relationship as a species to mental narrative. But as things get increasingly weird and unpredictable, gaps will open up in our preexisting patterns. When patterns degrade to the point of unpredictability, anything becomes possible.

    We are at an adapt-or-die point as a species, and we’ll need to break free of the bullshit to make the jump. Hell, we just might make it.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 21:25

  • Baltimore Streets Flooded With Methadone And Suboxone During Pandemic
    Baltimore Streets Flooded With Methadone And Suboxone During Pandemic

    Methadone clinics across Baltimore City are flooding neighborhoods with “a lot” of addiction-treatment medicines after federal regulators relaxed take-home restrictions amid the COVID-19 pandemic, reported The Baltimore Sun

    In pre-corona times, addiction treatment medicines, such as methadone or Suboxone, were limited by clinics to avoid abuse or resold on the streets. Now because of relaxed federal rules, addicts can receive up to a month’s supply in one visit. 

    The Rev. Milton Emanuel Williams Jr., the pastor of New Life Evangelical Baptist Church, also the operator of Turning Point Clinic, said his facility usually doses out a day’s worth of methadone or Suboxone from his East Baltimore clinic to addicts. Now he’s sending them home with a massive 28-day supply. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rev. Milton Emanuel Williams Jr.

    “We’re putting a lot of methadone and Suboxone on the street right now, which is a huge concern to me,” said Williams. “There are folks who can’t handle all this medication.”

    Williams said a month’s supply of medicine would keep addicts out of the clinic to limit his medical staff’s exposure to a patient that could be a COVID-19 carrier. 

    The Sun notes that the federal government relaxed take-home rules for clinics to decrease the spread of the virus. 

    Williams’ clinic regularly treats 2,000 addicts per day. Now his staff is dressed head to toe in protective gear while “It’s almost impossible, in giving compassionate care, to not get close to people,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Turning Point Clinic Baltimore, Maryland

    Nonprofit Charm City Care Connection, located in East Baltimore and is a clean needle site, said it had reduced hours as well as the city’s health department’s needle-exchange program. 

    “People are having a much harder time getting clean syringes,” said Natanya Robinowitz, director of Charm City Care Connection. “People are just having to reuse multiple times or they’re having to share needles.”

    Robinowitz believes the city limiting hours of specific health programs, such as needle-exchange, could lead to an outbreak of hepatitis C or HIV.

    More than 20,000 opioid addicts live in Baltimore. The virus outbreak has not slowed the drug trade, but with tens of thousands of newly unemployed people in the region, drug usage could surge.  

    Col. Richard Worley, the city’s chief of patrol, told The Sun that drug dealers are now wearing masks and gloves on street corners. 

    Dr. Yngvild Olsen, medical director for the Institutes for Behavior Resources Inc., which runs an addiction treatment center in the city, said heroin pills that generally cost $6 on the streets are going for “$2 to $3 a pill,” she said. “One of the big questions is, what is happening with the drug supply?”

    The main reason for price declines is that subgrade heroin is being pumped into the streets. 

    Olsen said social distancing measures had taken away from group sessions and counseling for addicts. Many drug therapy sessions have now gone online. 

    Williams said a 28-day supply of addiction treatment medicine has a street value of $2,000. Methadone is dangerous and can still cause overdoses. He said some patients are likely to sell their pills. 

    Nora Volkow, the director of the National Institute on Drug Abuse, recently told Politico that the pandemic could derail President Trump’s progress in countering the opioid crisis. 

    “I think we’re going to see deaths climb again,” Volkow said. “We can’t afford to focus solely on Covid. We need to multitask.”

    Since the rule to relax take-home medicine was on a federal level, that now means clinics across the country are flooding methadone or Suboxone into communities at a very high degree. 

    And in California, officials are putting the homeless and addicts in hotels, ignoring social distancing rules. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 21:05

  • Army's Seattle Field Hospital Closed After 3 Days, Without Seeing A Single Patient
    Army’s Seattle Field Hospital Closed After 3 Days, Without Seeing A Single Patient

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    The panic and fear among the people who cannot be bothered to read the actual statistics about this pandemic is what should concern most preppers.  In fact, this virus has been so overhyped that the Army’s field hospital in Seattle, an “epicenter” of the pandemic has closed after three days without seeing one single COVID-19 patient.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The empty field hospital in Seattle.

    According to a report by Military.com, the hastily built field hospital set up by the Army in Seattle’s pro football stadium is shutting down without ever seeing a patient.

    This is being done “so the service can shift resources where they’re more urgently needed”, Washington state Governor Jay Inslee said.

    Medical equipment at the CenturyLink Field Event Center is being returned to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) for use elsewhere, but the governor cautioned against reading too much into the move. Governor Inslee wants people to remain in a panicked state of emergency and dependent on the government’s salvation.

    Don’t let this decision give you the impression that we are out of the woods,” Inslee said in a statement intended to push the official narrative of fear on Wednesday. 

    “We have to keep our guard up and continue to stay home unless conducting essential activities to keep everyone healthy.” 

    Washington state saw the first coronavirus death in the U.S. on February 29. Stay panicked and remain in fear, Inslee says

    “But we haven’t beat this virus yet and, until we do, it has the potential to spread rapidly if we don’t continue the measures we’ve put in place, he said.

    The state asked FEMA and the Army Corps of Engineers to convert the football stadium “before our physical distancing strategies were fully implemented and we had considerable concerns that our hospitals would be overloaded with COVID-19 cases,” Inslee said. 

    Even though the hospitals have the capacity to handle patients getting sick with the virus.

    The decision to close the Seattle field hospital comes amid early signs that the number of new cases could be hitting a plateau in New York, the epicenter of the coronavirus epidemic in the U.S., and other states.

    At a news conference Friday, New York Governor Andrew Cuomo said, “Overall, New York is flattening the curve.”

    We were never dealing with a pandemic in the general sense. We were always dealing with a tyrannical power grab by every governor in this country and at the head of that, was Dr. Anthony Fauci.  Fauci was so wrong about this virus he should be permanently discredited.  Yet Americans continue to fall in line and obey his orders to their own personal economic detriment.

    The unprecedented government response and mass panic will have lasting negative effects for all Americans. Many more will be destroyed financially and all will lose most of what’s left of our basic human rights.

    The good news is that you can find toilet paper on some online retailers again. I’ll continue to do my best to link items that were bought in a panic over the past month to help those who may need them. Toilet paper still seems to be the hottest commodity of 2020.

    *  *  *

    GOOGLE Is Doing Whatever It Can to De-Monetize SHTFplan.com And Shadow-Ban us. During these TOUGH financial times, we ASPIRE to stay completely independent and pay our full staff, so we can continue to deliver VALUE to you. It is possible for you to HELP us, by supporting our COVID-19 expert survival report HERE!  Thank You, ShtfPlan.com Staff


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 20:45

  • Here's What The Reopening Of The US Economy Could Look Like
    Here’s What The Reopening Of The US Economy Could Look Like

    With US health data suggesting that the spread of the coronavirus may be nearing a plateau in the U.S., public officials are under growing pressure to chart a path back to normality, something Morgan Stanley did over the weekend when it laid out a projected timeline and milestones for a return to work in the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The latest data show that conditions are beginning to improve. New York hospitalizations continued to flatten, with total admissions virtually stable at 18,000 and with ICU patients and intubations declining since Sunday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So far, those numbers have been far below the level officials initially braced for, sparking speculation that projection models were tampered with to paint a worst case scenario in pursuit of a total economic shutdown, one which would enable the Fed and Treasury to unleash an unprecedented bailout package targeting mostly Wall Street, America’s corporations and “top 1%”, with a  fraction of the overall fiscal stimulus left over for Main Street America.

    That said, Americans at this point will take any good news, and the NY governor provided some today: “We’ve been talking today about the fact that New York believes we have reached a plateau in the increase in the number of cases,” Cuomo said. “They’re not going down, but they’re not going up at the same rate and we believe it’s a ‘plateau.’ That is relatively good news in a world of bad options. We should start looking to ‘reopening.’”

    The dilemma facing decision-makers is a familiar one: the longer the state-by-state lockdowns last, the more economic hardship there will be. But dropping stay-at-home restrictions too soon might risk a second wave of infections.

    How Will A Reopening Happen?

    There is also a potential political clash emerging, with some of the nation’s most powerful governors saying they would form regional alliances to coordinate reopening schools and businesses after the coronavirus outbreak subsides, setting up a potential showdown with the president, who earlier today that he alone has that authority.

    That tension was on display Monday as two sets of governors – one on each coast – said they would coordinate how and when they might gradually ease their restrictions on travel and business. Shortly before both initiatives were announced, President Donald Trump tweeted that he alone had the authority to decide when states would return to normal.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “We will be driven by facts, we will be driven by evidence, we will be driven by science, we will be driven by our public health advisers, we will be driven by the collaborative spirit that defines the best of us at this important moment,” California Governor Gavin Newsom countered as he announced a partnership with Washington state and Oregon.

    “The optimum is a geographically coordinated plan,” added New York Governor Andrew Cuomo. “This virus doesn’t understand governmental boundaries.” Coordination is critical, Cuomo explained, to avoid unintended consequences – such as having thirsty residents of a state where bars are closed driving to another where they’ve been reopened.

    As Bloomberg reported, the East Coast initiative is in its early stages. Officials from those states – New York, New Jersey, Connecticut,  Pennsylvania, Delaware and Rhode Island – provided few details about what criteria they might use to restart a semblance of normal life. A panel will consist of the governors’ chiefs of staff and health and economic officials from each state. Most residents in those states are nearing the one-month mark of having been told to stay home and keep their distance from others.

    After the announcement, Massachusetts said it would join the alliance.

    For what it’s worth, Cuomo, in his daily briefing, seemed to agree with Trump that the federal government has the authority to overrule the states. But he questioned why Washington would get to direct the reopening after it delegated closures to the states.

    “Let’s see what the federal government’s plan is,” Cuomo said. Trump “left it to the states to close down, and that was a state-by-state decision, without any guidance really,” he said.

    Meanwhile, California’s governor said he would unveil a framework on Tuesday for lifting the state’s stay-home order, including the metrics that would guide that process. Last week, the state’s secretary of Health and Human Services said easing the state’s restrictions would require putting in place a system to test more people for the virus, track new cases as they appear and trace person-to-person contacts that could trigger new outbreaks.

    Further details about how to restart California’s economy will come later in the week, Newsom said, along with preliminary figures about how the virus would affect the state’s budget. Oregon and Washington, he said, will craft their own plans, although the basic principles guiding all three states would similar.

    Asked whether Trump or the nation’s governors have final say on reopening the economy, Newsom would say only that California still had a strong collaborative relationship with the federal government on the virus fight.

    “I have all the confidence in the world, moving forward, that we’ll maintain that collaborative spirit,” he said.

    Trump, for his part, said in a Twitter post Monday that he has the power to overrule governors, “open up” states and relax social-distancing practices. The declaration came after economic advisers pressed concerns within the White House about the economic fallout from the shutdown, and as Trump’s patience appeared to fray after earlier ceding to health advisers’ insistence that his initial target date of Easter was too early.

    He said he would make a decision “soon” on reopening, “in conjunction with the governors and input from others.” But he added that “it is the decision of the president, and for many good reasons.” He didn’t list any.

    What Would A Reopening Look Like?

    On Monday, governor Cuomo was joined on a conference call by the other Northeast governors. The recovery must be careful, incremental and guided by experts rather than politics, Cuomo said, and the pandemic won’t be truly “over” until a vaccine is available, which could take as long as 18 months. Ideally, a plan would also involve widespread testing, he said, to allow those without the virus – and those who have recovered and may now be resistant to it – to return to work first.

    “You only get an economic recovery if it comes on the back of a health recovery,” New Jersey Governor Phil Murphy said. “As painful as the economic reality is right now, it’s not remotely as painful as it would be if we get the sequencing wrong and we get the timing wrong.”

    As Bloomberg adds, the continued spread of the virus, while slowing, raises questions about what kind of infection rate would be considered acceptable under normal conditions — and whether the goal should be to prevent infections entirely or merely contain it enough so that the hospital system can handle the workload.

    Cuomo said the restart has to be carried out slowly while keeping an eye on the virus rates: “You’ll start to open that valve on the economic activity, and you’ll turn that valve very slowly reopening the economy, more essential workers, do it carefully do it slowly and do it intelligently,” he said.

    Meanwhile, financial markets have started to take a more positive view of the outlook. The initial improvement was mostly policy-driven, but the greater optimism of the past week seems to be at least partly related to the virus itself according to Goldman. To be clear,  the health situation remains very bad in absolute terms, especially in the US which is now ahead of Italy and Spain in terms of coronavirus-related fatalities (though still much lower on a per-capita basis). However, the number of new active cases looks to be peaking globally, projections of cumulative fatalities and peak healthcare usage are coming down, and even actual new hospitalizations in hard-hit New York City have fallen sharply.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

     

    In a nutshell, optimists think this will allow us to reopen the economy soon. Pessimists counter that the main reason for the improvement is social distancing, which directly corresponds to reduced economic activity; if so, any economic rebound could result in a large second wave of infections, as well as renewed deterioration in the outlook for the death toll and healthcare overloads. Who is right?

    According to Goldman, much of the improvement is probably a direct consequence of social distancing and the plunge in economic activity, and could reverse quickly if people just went back to work. But even if this means that a return to “business as usual” is off the table until we have a vaccine, it might be possible to bring back at least part of the lost output with a sharp increase in testing as well as more limited changes to business practices that lower the risk of infection. In particular, the manufacturing and construction sectors—which by our estimates account for about half of the total hit to GDP in April—might well be able to increase production from the depressed current levels quite soon. For example, the US auto industry is currently planning to go from production at just 25% of capacity in April to 70% in May, following a thorough cleaning of the plants.

    One key date for global economy watchers is April 17, when China releases Q1 GDP as well as March retail sales and industrial production. Goldman’s economists expect China Q1 GDP to decline 9% year-on-year and 42% annualized. However, they see strong  sequential gains in retail sales and especially industrial production, based on the partial normalization in the high-frequency indicators constructed by our Asia micro and macro teams. Although this would still leave the monthly indicators 8-10% below levels seen a year earlier, it would not only set China up for very strong sequential GDP growth in Q2 but would also increase confidence that the West may start to recover before too long.

    That said, to set the stage for recovery, global economic policymakers still have work to do. At the most basic level, they need to keep the unavoidable “first-round” hit to aggregate supply from triggering a large “second-round” decline in  aggregate demand that could make the ultimate downturn much worse than what’s necessary to control the virus. Some stylized numbers may be useful for illustration. Assume that the direct impact of the virus is to reduce global nominal GDP in 2020 by 5%, or about $5 trillion, because significant parts of the private sector have to be shut down for a few months. Without policy support and abstracting from real-world complications such as automatic stabilizers, this $5trn GDP hit shows up as a $5trn reduction in private-sector income, borne by businesses and workers whose firms have been shuttered. Assuming a marginal propensity to spend out of income of 60%, this $5trn income hit might result in a further $3trn reduction in aggregate demand and therefore GDP, according to Goldman calculations. In turn, this new $3trn GDP hit might show up as another $3trn reduction in private sector income. And so on, until global GDP has contracted by a multiple of the original virus-related impact.

    What should policymakers do to short-circuit this downward spiral? At the broadest level, they will focus on providing all-out support, especially in countries with significant amounts of fiscal and monetary space. Governments need to replace as much as possible of the private-sector income hit, in order to limit the downward pressure on after-tax income and therefore on spending. Meanwhile, central banks will keep credit flowing, on highly attractive terms, so that households and businesses can borrow their way through whatever temporary income hit remains without cutting their spending sharply. (Eventually, concerns about inflation and fiscal deficits will come roaring back.)

    So far, the policy effort has been impressive, and Goldman now estimates that global fiscal policy will deliver a discretionary easing of nearly 5% of GDP in 2020—close to the bank’s stylized estimate of the first-round hit in the example above—plus substantial loan guarantees and automatic stabilizers. Moreover, central banks have been aggressive in countering threats to the flow of credit – and generally bailing out everyone, especially those who took on undue risk and leverage to spend billions on buybacks instead creating a “rainy day” fund – via rate cuts, large amounts of additional QE, and a variety of support programs for the debt of private borrowers or lower levels of government (i.e. state and local governments in the US and periphery member states in the Euro area). That said, the response in Europe needs to be scaled up, via greater fiscal easing. At the same time,  emerging economies will need a lot more help from the rich world—via bilateral loans, IMF and World Bank financing, access to dollar and SDR liquidity, and outright aid—to get through this severe crisis or else suffer catastrophic consequences as Guggenheim’s Scott Minerd wrote today.

    Next steps

    If policymakers can fill in the remaining holes on macro policy and manage to thread the needle between continued virus control and a gradual reopening of the economy, the level of GDP should begin to move higher in May/June, according to Goldman’s chief economist Jan Hatzius. Will the recovery look V-shaped or U-shaped? According to Bank of America, there is no chance of a V-shaped recovery. For Goldman, its forecast for US growth shows -11% in Q2, -8% in Q3, and -5% in Q4, which qualifies as U-shaped. On a quarter-on-quarter annualized basis, however, this same forecast shows -34% in Q2, +19% in Q3, and +12% in Q4, which looks rather V-shaped. Thus, Goldman’s forecast is one in which the economy recovers only gradually from the virus but nevertheless shows sequential growth rates in H2 that are unprecedented in postwar history: this will allow the bank to cover all bases, and to tell its clients it is bearish one day, as it was for much of the past months, and then to U-turn unexpectedly, and declare – as it did today – that it is now bullish and that the bottom of the market is in (even as Goldman itself had a bit of fun at its own absurd report).


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 20:25

  • Veteran CIA Analyst: What if Ignored COVID-19 Warnings Had Been Leaked To WikiLeaks?
    Veteran CIA Analyst: What if Ignored COVID-19 Warnings Had Been Leaked To WikiLeaks?

    Authored by Ray McGovern via ConsortiumNews.com,

    The British court system continues to mock the Magna Carta. Bowing vassal-like to U.S. pressure it persists with Star Chamber proceedings against WikiLeaks publisher Julian Assange until he is either extradited to the US or winds up dead.

    The judicial pantomime under way in London, under the guise of an extradition hearing, would make the English nobles who wrested precious civil rights from King John eight centuries ago sob in anger and shame. But nary a whimper is heard from the heirs to those rights. One searches in vain for English nobles today.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Julian Assange on balcony of Ecuadorian Embassy, file image, Getty.

    Yet the process stumbles along, as awkward as it is inexorable, toward extradition and life in prison for Assange, if he lasts that long.

    The banal barristers bashing Assange now seem to harbor hope that, unlike the case of Henry II and Thomas More, the swords of royal knights will be unneeded to “deliver the Crown from this troublesome priest” – or publisher.

    Those barristers may be spared the embarrassment of losing what residual self-respect they may still claim. In short, they may not need to bow and scrape much longer to surrender Assange to life in a US prison. He may die first.

    Puppeteers

    For the UK and US barristers and their puppeteers in Washington, salivating to seize the Australian publisher, a deus ex machina has descended backstage. It is called Covid-19 and London’s Belmarsh prison is accurately described as a petri dish for such disease. We already know of one prisoner death there from the virus. God knows how many more there already are – or will be.

    In refusing to allow nonviolent prisoner Julian Assange to leave that crowded prison (with his immunocompromised condition, weakened lungs, and clinical depression), presiding Judge Vanessa Baraitser leaves an open door to deliver Kings Boris and Donald this “troublesome” publisher by “natural” means. The swords of royal knights are not needed for this kind of faux-judicial, royal screw. And, happily for Lady Baraitser, she may not have to keep washing blood off her hands as Lady Macbeth was compelled to do.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    King John of England accepts Magna Carta at Runnymede, near Windsor, on 15 June 1215. (Flickr)

    Meanwhile, as all await Assange’s demise – one way or the other – his lawyers have had no contact with him for three weeks. They cannot visit him in prison; nor can they even talk to him by video chat, according to WikiLeaks editor-in-chief Kristinn Hrafnnson.

    Empire Drives Home an Old Lesson

    However Assange is eventually dispatched – dead or alive – from Star Chamber and prison, the Empire remains hell-bent on demonstrating that it will give no quarter to those endangering it by WikiLeaks-type disclosures.

    The lesson is now abundantly clear to all “troublesome” publishers tempted to follow Assange’s example of publishing documentary truth (a function of what used to be called journalism). They will be cut down – whether by “natural” means, or by endless faux-judicial proceedings resulting in lengthy imprisonment, financial ruin, or both.

    On Tuesday Judge Baraitser announced that the Assange extradition hearing will resume on May 18, as previously scheduled and that it may drag on into July — Covid-19 notwithstanding. The big question is whether Assange, if he is kept confined in Belmarsh prison, will live that long. Meanwhile, thousands of other nonviolent prisoners are being released from other UK prisons in a humane step to reduce the chances of infection.

    As I think of my good friend Julian, what comes to mind are the desperate words of Willy Loman’s wife Linda in “Death of a Salesman”:

    “He’s a human being, and a terrible thing is happening to him. So attention must be paid. He’s not to be allowed to fall in his grave like an old dog. Attention, attention must finally be paid to such a person.”

    (On the chance you are wondering, The New York Times, Washington Post, and Wall Street Journal – as well as National Public Radio – have paid zero attention to the extradition hearing in recent weeks – much less to Judge Baraitser’s Queen of Hearts-style, “off-with-his-head” behavior.)

    Aping Caiaphas

    The pitiable Baraitser, of course, is simply a cog in the imperial machinery, a self-impressed, self-interested, rigid functionary aping the role of Caiaphas, the high priest beholden to an earlier Empire. “It’s better that one man die,” he is said to have explained, when another nonviolent truth-teller dared to expose the cruelties of Empire to the downtrodden of his day – including the despicable accessory role played by the high priests.

    Here is how theologian Eugene Peterson’s renders Caiaphas’s words in John 11: “Can’t you see that it’s to our advantage that one man die… rather than the whole nation be destroyed.” (“Nation” in that context meant the system of privilege enjoyed by collaborators with Rome – like the high priests and the lawyers of the time.)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Assange being arrested a year ago on April 11. 2019.

    The lesson meant to be taken away from Assange’s punishment are as clear – if less bloody – as the crucifixion that followed quickly after Caiaphas explained the rationale. The behavior of today’s empire pretends to be more “civilized” as it manufactures stories of rape, leans on ratty satraps in Sweden, England, and Ecuador, and ostentatiously thumbs its nose at official UN condemnations of “arbitrary detention.” And, if that were not enough, it also practices leave-no-marks torture.

    Cutting Off Nose to Spite Face

    Meanwhile, those who in an ideal world should be natural allies of WikiLeaks, the media, are cowed, and are as pitiable as Baraitser. Many loudly betray Assange outright.

    There is no need now, two millennia later, to erect crosses along the roadside as graphic reminders to intimidate those who would expose Empire’s oppression. Civil rights wrested from King John 800 years ago – habeas corpus, for one – have become “quaint” and “obsolete”, adjectives applied by that distinguished American jurist, and George W. Bush “lawyer,” Alberto Gonzales to the Geneva Convention protections against torture. The successors to the English “nobles” of Runnymede seem to have gone the way of Gonzales.

    This is not only a case of “killing the messenger”, lamentable as that is. It amounts to cutting off our collective nose to spite our face.

    Because most Americans are so impoverished on accurate information, and so misled by the corporate media regarding WikiLeaks – and Assange, in particular – they are blissfully unaware of WikiLeaks’ capability to expose crucial information that can head off disaster.

    What If?

    Several Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity (VIPS) have written retrospectives, sharing acute personal frustration at our inability to get important warnings through calcified bureaucracies before calamity struck – real calamities like 9/11 and the unprovoked attack on Iraq that has brought chaos and widespread death.

    We have asked ourselves, “What if?” What if WikiLeaks had been up and running before those catastrophes? Would those of us privy to critical – but unheeded – information have turned to WikiLeaks to get the word out? Could those liminal events have been prevented?

    The answer is consistently Yes, those events could have been exposed and prevented.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Former FBI Special Agent Coleen Rowley, whose 9/11 warnings were ignored. (Flickr)

    “WikiLeaks and 9/11: What If?” is the title The Los Angeles Times gave an Oct. 15, 2010 op-ed by former FBI Special Agent/Minneapolis Division Counsel Coleen Rowley and former Air Marshal Bogdan Dzakovic, who led an elite “Red Team” for the Federal Aviation Administration to probe vulnerabilities of airports and aircraft during the years before 9/11.

    After arresting would-be hijacker Zacarias Moussaoui on August 16, 2001, Rowley’s colleagues in Minneapolis ran into unconscionable foot-dragging by FBI headquarters functionaries, who would not permit a search of Moussaoui’s laptop computer or his personal effects.

    In late August, the same Washington functionaries stonewalled an FBI Minneapolis Division supervisor, who emphasized that he was just “trying to keep someone from taking a plane and crashing it into the World Trade Center.” (Yes, those were his exact words.) Special Agent Harry Samit, who helped arrest Moussaoui, later testified that the actions of his FBI superiors in Washington constituted “criminal negligence.”

    This was before WikiLeaks was up and running. Would Samit’s sense of duty and his frustration have prompted him to contact WikiLeaks, were it to have been available then and as technically easy to approach (via anonymous drop box) as it continues to be now? Someone should find Samit and ask that question. (Thus far, we have had no success contacting him.)

    Hijacking Planes? Child’s Play

    No one has to ask Federal Air Marshal Dzakovic whether he would have gone to WikiLeaks in desperation over the foot-dragging he encountered at senior levels of the FAA. His story is as painful to hear as Special Agent Samit’s, in terms of being ignored and stymied in the period leading up to 9/11.

    Dzakovic’s “Red Team” included two Vietnam veterans: Steve Elson, a retired Navy Seal lieutenant commander, and Brian Sullivan, a retired Army lieutenant colonel with experience in intelligence and law enforcement. They both join Dzakovic in a loud “Hell Yes,” when I asked if they would have gone to WikiLeaks before 9/11, if it were in operation at the time.

    That elite Red Team had found weaknesses in airport and airline security nine out of ten times, vulnerabilities that made it possible to smuggle weapons aboard and seize control of airplanes.

    Starting in 1997-98, the Team worked feverishly through its chain of command, and got nowhere with its urgent warnings. It then went to the FAA inspector general and, later, the Government Accountability Office; and got nowhere.

    Team members then contacted and briefed members of Congress in person; and got nowhere. As a last resort, about a year before the 9/11 attacks, Team members desperately tried to get the media interested in the calamity they could see brewing. This resulted in only two small stories, easily ignored in other mainstream media.

    Testifying before the 9/11 Commission, Dzakovic summed up the Team’s experience:

    “In the simulated attacks, the Red Team was extraordinarily successful in killing large numbers of innocent people … [and yet] we were ordered not to write up our reports and not to retest airports where we found particularly egregious vulnerabilities… Finally, the FAA started providing advance notification of when we would be conducting our ‘undercover’ tests and what we would be checking.”

    Dzakovic has expressed “contempt… for the bureaucrats and politicians who could have prevented 9/11 but didn’t.” Adding further bureaucratic insult to injury, the 9/11 Commission did not see fit to include any of his testimony in its report.

    The Unprovoked US/UK Attack on Iraq

    Many – probably hundreds – of US intelligence analysts knew in 2002-03 that there was no reliable evidence that Iraq had weapons of mass destruction or – still less – had significant ties to al-Qaeda.

    They did not have to wait for the conclusions of the five-year Senate Intelligence Committee’s study. Announcing the committee’s bipartisan findings on June 5, 2008, then Chairman Jay Rockefeller (D-WVA) was unusually direct:

    “In making the case for war, the Administration repeatedly presented intelligence as fact when in reality it was unsubstantiated, contradicted, or even nonexistent. As a result, the American people were led to believe that the threat from Iraq was much greater than actually existed.”

    What does “nonexistent” intelligence look like? And who created it out of nothing? We know the names. No one has been held accountable. One of the miscreants, former Acting CIA Director John McLaughlin, unabashedly regaled a large audience at the National Press Club last October with, “Thank God for the Deep State.”

    The question, again: surely there was at least one intelligence officer with courage enough to go to WikiLeaks – had it been operating at the time – to out the lies and liars, “undeceive” the American people, and, not incidentally, possibly head off the war on Iraq. Lt. Col. Karen Kwiatkowski, USAF (ret.), a VIPS member, says she would probably have done so.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As it was, Kwiatkowski, the 2018 recipient of the Sam Adams Award for Integrity in Intelligence, exhibited unusual courage in doing what she could to get the truth out before the attack on Iraq. In a recent posting Karen explains:

    “Almost two decades ago, I challenged the status quo in my workplace, the politicized Pentagon, for creating urgency when there was none, publicizing lies when the truth did not support the political agenda. I spoke directly to investigative reporters with Knight Ridder (as portrayed in the [Rob Reiner] film Shock and Awe).

    Films and popular media coverage of the truth took a decade to percolate. Had WikiLeaks been available in 2001 and 2002, global awareness of government and corporate lies relating to the Iraq war alone would have saved lives, protected the environment, and slowed or stopped the … wars that still invigorate Western foreign policy. The truth is owned by all of us; those willing to step up and risk careers, reputations, and even their own lives to speak truth to power are a small, and sadly, expendable number. Julian Assange and his vision of simple transparency, for the people, with technical protection for witnesses to evil, has saved lives … and elevated the concept of honesty everywhere. …”

    So you say you have not seen the film (in which an actress plays Karen), and you had been wondering how it was that Knight Ridder journalists Warren Strobel and Jonathan Landay were virtually the only newspapermen to see through and report accurately on the widespread lies before the attack on Iraq? Now you know.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The problem, of course, is that – however enterprising, dogged, and professional the behavior of Strobel and Landay, they were largely marginalized as outliers in the mainstream media and were not given much play before the war. Exposure of the lies through WikiLeaks surely would have been more effective.

    Early Warning on COVID-19

    In terms of fatalities in the U.S., the number of those succumbing to the Covid-19 pandemic already dwarf the total killed on 9/11. True, preparations, going back years, to prevent and/or deal with such a tragedy were inadequate, to say the least. Accountability for that, as usual, is zero, and there is abundant crow for recent administrations to eat. Even though this is not the time for a blame game, one is going full speed ahead. Consequently, it is doubly difficult to separate the fake-news chaff from the wheat.

    On Wednesday, ABC News put out a breathless story titled “Intelligence report warned of coronavirus crisis as early as November; analysts concluded it could be a cataclysmic event.” The alleged report was said to have been prepared by the US military’s National Center for Medical Intelligence (NCMI).

    It was alleged to include information from satellite imagery and intercepts, and to have been briefed “multiple times” at the Pentagon and White House, with detailed warnings about the spread of what has become known as Covid-19.

    Colonel Dr. R. Shane Day, director of the Center, wasted no time pouring ice water on the ABC report later on Wednesday. Col. Day stated:

    “… in the interest of transparency during this current public health crisis, we can confirm that media reporting about the existence/release of a National Center for Medical Intelligence Coronavirus-related product/assessment in November of 2019 is not correct. No such NCMI product exists.”

    A hint as to the probable motivation behind the original ABC report rests in its pointed suggestion that the “government could have ramped up mitigation and containment efforts far earlier to prepare for a crisis poised to come home.” The neuralgic question of how much time it took the Trump administration to take the pandemic seriously is, of course, a legitimate line of inquiry – assuming one stays alert for agenda-laden “breaking news.”

    There have, however, been other accurate reports of studies done about preparation for a pandemic that the Trump administration ignored.

    As for WikiLeaks, even US intelligence officials have begrudgingly acknowledged, in backhanded but unmistakable ways, that WikiLeaks’ enjoys an unusually high reputation for accuracy. Documents, including emails and the like, are its stock in trade and considerable pain is taken to verify their authenticity and then let them speak for themselves. So, were WikiLeaks to be given an authentic document with significant information on the reaction of senior officials’ anywhere to Covid-19, it would almost certainly be posted.

    The name of the game is documents. Daniel Ellsberg’s most insistent advice to leakers is: “Always bring documents.” With the help of clever, committed friends and the courageous stand taken by a highly principled senior lawyer at The New York Times, Ellsberg made it virtually impossible for the Times to turn down The Pentagon Papers. (One often overlooked, key factor was that the Times knew Ellsberg had also given the documents to the Times’ competitors.)

    Chelsea Manning and Edward Snowden followed Ellsberg’s advice on documents and, in their case, did not need to spend countless hours at a Xerox machine. It’s far easier now. Any questions as to why Assange is hated by those who have a lot to hide?

    In the coming weeks and months there will be a high premium on the kind of transparency WikiLeaks can provide in publishing information otherwise hidden from the public.

    This is particularly the case on the Covid-19 issue, inasmuch as government deliberations and decisions are being “classified,” thereby thwarting the transparency an educated populace should be able to expect.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 20:05

  • Wyoming Reports 1st Coronavirus Death As Global COVID-19 Cases Near 2 Million: Live Updates
    Wyoming Reports 1st Coronavirus Death As Global COVID-19 Cases Near 2 Million: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Smithfield foods closes world’s largest pork plant
    • US, Europe see decline in new cases
    • China, Russia report concerning increases in new cases
    • China ends Gilead drug trial hailed as ‘highly successful’ a few days ago
    • Italian death toll passes 20k
    • South America, Africa see acceleration in new cases
    • Cali Gov. says he’ll release plan to reopen economy tomorrow
    • Cuomo sees vaccine in 12-18 months
    • George Stephanopoulos tests positive for COVID-19
    • WHO says it will release new guidelines for countries restarting economies
    • New York deaths pass 10k
    • Cuomo reports another drop in hospitalizations
    • Florida case total passes 20k
    • Macron extends French lockdown until May 11
    • 6 governors detail plan to work together to reopen states
    • Singapore reports record jump in new cases
    • Saudi Arabia reports record jump in daily cases
    • All 9 SCOTUS justices will hear arguments via videolink for first time in history
    • UK’s top scientific advisor warned against lifting lockdown
    • Global cases top 1.9M, deaths near 120k
    • 2 NYPD detectives die from COVID-19
    • Senior Israeli rabbi succumbs to virus
    • EU competition regulator warns about risk of corporate takeovers from China
    • In Ecuador, police move to collect 800 bodies from a hard hit village
    • Trump likely to cut money for WHO
    • Iran reports 1,600+ new cases, 100+ deaths
    • Putin warns outbreak getting worse
    • Australia, New Zealand keep restrictions in place despite drop in new cases

    *     *     *

    Update (2000ET): For anybody else who felt that 2 million number hit just a little too early, BNO News reports that Johns Hopkins is miscounting the total case number for Florida by more than 100k.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *     *     *

    Update (1950ET): Bloomberg just confirmed that by at least one measure, the global total of confirmed coronavirus cases has passed 2 million, more than doubling since April 3.

    What’s more; the state of Wyoming reported its first death linked to COVID-19, making it the 50th state to report a COVID-19-related death. The sparsely populated Wyoming has a population of fewer than 600k people, making it the 2nd most sparsely populated state in the country.

    Meanwhile, Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin promised at tonight’s White House press briefing 80 million taxpayers should receive their “stim checks” by Wednesday, and assured small businesses still waiting for a lifeline that the government is definitely working on it. Meanwhile, President Trump said he hoped to reopen the country “ahead of schedule,” despite that whole back-and-forth with the states.

    *     *     *

    Update (1720ET): In another discouraging sign of just how entrenched the virus has become in the Middle East, Saudi Arabia reported its largest jump in new cases on Monday, confirming 472 new cases in the last 24 hours, bringing its total to 4,934 cases.

    The Supreme Court said on Monday that for the first time in history, all nine judges will hear cases argued via teleconference rather than in the courtroom due to the coronavirus pandemic.

    *     *     *

    Update (1550ET): Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot said Monday afternoon that she expects her city to remain closed past the end of April.

    *     *     *

    Update (1520ET): Not content to let Cuomo and his fellow governors on the East Coast have all the fun, California Gov. Gavin Newsom said he’d release a plan on Tuesday outlining how he’ll reopen his state. He said Oregon, Washington and California have developed a cooperative “framework” to get their local economies back on line. Reporters can expect the plan around lunchtime, he added.

    Governors around country (including Texas Gov. Greg Abbott, who expressed impatience in delaying the reopening much longer over the weekend) have now committed to releasing plans for reopening their economies. If a few days pass, and those plans aren’t out, that’s not going to be great for the market’s confidence.

    *     *     *

    Update (1455ET): Cuomo said that the state has acquired roughly 3k ventilators from private companies, many of them in China, before complaining about FEMA’s refusal to buy ventilators and PPE and masks for the states, forcing them to source the items on their own.

    He also complained about other federal rules, and insisted that if the Feds imposed guidelines on the states insisting on mass testing before reopening, he wouldn’t be able to comply because “I can’t purchase enough diagnostic tests.”

    *     *     *

    Update (1415ET): A hastily organized press conference involving the governors from six northeastern states – NY, NJ, CT, RI, DE, RI, PA – is underway, as the group explain to the public how they will work together to cut costs and pool resources to battle the epidemic, and coordinate the difficult decision of reopening the regional economy.

    Earlier, several governors insisted that they and they alone would decide when to reopen their states, and the briefing was apparently called after President Trump insisted he had the sole power to reopen the states – which many immediately rebuffed.

    At the briefing, the governors’ response was delivered by New Hampshire’s Tom Wolfe.

    “Since we had the responsibility of closing the state down…we have the responsibilioty for opening it up…you’ve got to get people healthy first before reopening the economy, or it’s not going to work…we’re almost ready to start moving on to the next sense which is moving back to some semblance of a new normal,” said New Hampshire Gov. Tom Wolfe. “It was our responsibility to steer our way through these uncharted waters and it’s our responsibility to steer our way back.”

    Watch the briefing live below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    RI Gov. Gina Raimondo said the governors are the ones who have “shown great leadership” in navigating this crisis, while the federal government procrastinated and failed to come up with a consistent, coherent plan.

    All six governors pledged to form a regional task force designed to planning the reopening, each to include a public health official, an economic development official and each governors’ chief of staff.

    As far as when the guidelines would be ready, Gov. Cuomo said it would “have to be within weeks.”

    And, in what sounded like a direct rebuke to Mayor de Blasio, who tried to cancel NYC school until the end of the year, only for Cuomo to push back and reverse the order, Cuomo said re-starting business would be impossible without re-starting schools.

    “We have one state…all areas need to reopen at the same time,” Cuomo said.

    French President Macron, meanwhile, said Monday night that he would extend the country’s lockdown until May 11 as new cases and deaths continue to slide.

    Portugal reported 349 new cases of coronavirus and 31 new deaths, for a total of 16,934 cases and 535 deaths. France reported 574 more coronavirus deaths over past 24 hours, raising its toll to 14,967. In Indonesia, which has already admitted to lying about confirmed cases, officials reported 316 new cases, bringing the total to 4,557.

    Below, we noted comments from a WHO press briefing earlier where Dr. Tedros insisted that the organization remained on good terms with the US, even as President Trump prepares to pull funding.

    The number of confirmed COVID-19 cases around the world has just passed 1.9 million, while the global death toll approaches 120k.

    *     *     *

    Update (1255ET):  According to the New York Post, the head of the NYPD’s detective union described the virus as an “invisible bullet” as two more detectives succumbed to the virus. Roughly one-fifth of NYPD officers have called out sick as many have been exposed to the virus, and many have gone on to develop symptoms and test positive.

    The NYPD has lost 22 total employees so far. As of Sunday evening, 2,344 uniformed officers and 489 civilian members of the department had contracted the disease. Civilian employees have taken it the hardest, with 17 dying.

    *    *    *

    Update (1240ET): In keeping with the theme of East Asia experiencing the ‘second wave’ of the novel coronavirus outbreak already, Singapore’s Health Ministry reported 386 new cases on Monday, the city’s biggest daily jump, taking its total confirmed cases to 2,918. The city-state, which is under a partial lockdown, also reported its 9th death.

    Many of the new cases have been linked to dormitory-style housing where migrant workers often stay, giving Singapore cause to follow China’s lead and blame the rebound on foreigners, despite Singapore tightening travel restrictions 2 weeks ago on non-residents.

    Meanwhile, Sky News reports that the UK’s chief scientific adviser said that although the first signs of “flattening” in the UK, lifting lockdown too early would risk a 2nd wave and would be a “complete waste of everything everyone’s done until now.”

    *     *     *

    Update (1153ET): With much of the country on holiday, Italy’s Civil Protection Service reported 566 new deaths on Monday, bringing its total to 20,465. Additionally, it reported another 3,153 cases, bringing its total to 159,516. Though Italy’s death toll has finally passed 20k, the numbers released on Monday suggest that a slight jump in new deaths over the weekend was, in fact, a blip, and that Italy remains right around the peak.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, on Tuesday, Italy will follow Spain by starting to reopen its economy, as the fact finally sets in that governments simply can’t afford to put off reopening longer than absolutely necessary. It’s been almost a month, infections are slowing – it’s time to get back to work.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But while the economic imperative is an unfortunate reality that, for many, represents a hobbsian choice between risking infection vs. risking everything else, the world will be watching closely as Italy, Spain – and now even Iran – start opening ‘non-essential’ businesses again.

    *     *     *

    Update (1153ET): Gov. Cuomo said later in his press conference that he sees a vaccine arriving for distribution among human patients in 12-18 months, a projection that hasn’t changed in 2 months.

    *     *     *

    Update (1140ET): Following reports that President Trump was planning to yank US funding for the WHO, the organization announced on Monday that it would announce a new list of guidelines for the handful of countries – including China – that are beginning the process of reopening their economies.

    The WHO also proposed that it buy goods in demand to fight against price gouging. One WHO doctor added that he expects things to remain things to stay like this for a while until a cure arrives. Dr. Tedros at one pointed added that he hoped US support for the organization would continue (because otherwise, he will become even more beholden to China, never a comfortable place to be in).

    In an update on global research, the organization said that it is tracking more than 70 vaccines in development, with 3 already progressing to human trials.

    Maenwhile, as Cuomo insisted New York was hitting a ‘plateau’, the situation in Florida has continued to worsen, with 1,045 new cases reported over the last 24 hours, bringing the state’s total to 20,601.

    *     *     *

    Update (1120ET): As Andrew Cuomo begins his Monday briefing, New York State reported another slowdown in hospitalizations linked to COVID-19. As expected, he revealed that coronavirus deaths in the state had passed 10k, the highest in the US, and more deaths than many countries in Europe, including tripling Germany’s just over 3k deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Watch the rest of his press conference here:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Cuomo insisted that the curve continued to flatten over the last 24 hours.

    “Here’s the good news, the curve continues to flatten…it appears that we have a plateau…it’s flattening, the flattening of the curve. The increases slow down, and flatten out, over a period of time. If you look at the number of total admissions, that’s definitely a flattening. Still going up a little bit…”

    He also released new data for new patients, as well as patients moved into the ICU.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cuomo added that the concept of dying on Easter – a “high holy day” for Catholics (and, indeed, Christians of all stripes) – made the number from yesterday, which was lower than the day before, bringing the 3-day average to the lowest since NY started publishing data.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After 585 crewmen aboard the USS Theodore Roosevelt were infected with the virus, one of them died Monday of complications related to the disease, according to a statement from the Navy, released just weeks after the ship’s commander was fired for trying to keep his people safe by begging his superiors to take more definitive action in a letter that eventually leaked.The name and other details about the sailor’s identity haven’t been released. He had tested positive on March 30 and was taken off the ship to “isolation housing” along with four other sailors. On April 9 – Thursday – he was found unresponsive during a medical check, and moved to ICU. He died Monday, per the NYT

    *     *     *

    Update (0940ET): ABC News’ George Stephanopoulos revealed during Monday’s episode of “Good Morning America” that he had tested positive for COVID-19 after his wife, Ali Wentworth, contracted the infection. 

    He said he is asymptomatic.

    “I actually feel great,” he said. “I’ve never had a fever, never had cough, never had shortness of breath, never had chills, any of the classic symptoms you’ve been reading about.”

    Stephanopoulos is an anchor at ABC News, and a former press secretary for the Clinton Administration.

    *     *     *

    Update (0940ET): Britain’s Department of Health and Social Care has just released the latest round of figures, showing a slight drop in deaths after UK for two days in a row reported the most deaths for any country outside the US. 717 new deaths and 88,621 new positive tests emerged.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *     *     *

    Update (0830ET): Iran reported 1,617 new COVID-19 cases and 111 new deaths, for a total of 73,303 cases and 4,585 deaths.

    *     *     *

    After reporting another promising slowdown in the rate of COVID-19-linked deaths yesterday, Spain reported only 517 deaths on Sunday, the lowest number since the country’s lockdown began. Now, with much of Western Europe observing a holiday on Monday, the Spanish government is beginning the process of reopening in the economy, despite still being roughly around the ‘peak of the curve’.

    Spain wasn’t the only embattled European country to report some encouraging progress on Sunday: Italy reported its lowest number of new deaths since March 19, as the number of people in intensive care continues to decline.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yesterday was the first day in weeks that Spaniards were allowed to leave their homes and travel to see family for the Easter holiday. Now, on Monday, construction workers in Spain are returning to work after a two-week pause on their activities, though the government has warned that it could reimpose the lockdown if the spread starts to accelerate once again.

    Globally, the number of confirmed infections rose by 72,523 on Sunday, the lowest number of additional cases in seven days. According to Johns Hopkins, roughly 1,859,011 have been confirmed worldwide as of Monday morning. Additionally, the daily death toll on Sunday also dropped to 5,417, as the rate of growth slowed to just 5%, its slowest rate since March 9. The US also saw a significant slowdown in deaths on Sunday, with just 1,528 Americans losing their lives. This is down sharply from a peak of more than 2,000 just two days earlier, and represents a daily growth rate of just 7%, the slowest since March.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The FT

    But more concerning, as the lockdown drags on in the US, are situations like the closure of the world’s largest pork producing plant, which is owned by Smithfield Foods, and is situation in Sioux Falls, South Dakota. Slaughterhouse shutdowns are disrupting the supply of US food, and harshly undermine governors’ assurances that the food supply is safe and consumers shouldn’t hoard supplies. The plant was closed for a few days last week for a deep clean after several employees tested positive for the virus. But worries about the outbreak have prompted management to close the plant ‘indefinitely’. That one plant supplies roughly 5% of America’s pork.

    Europe and the US weren’t the only places to report slowdowns in new cases and deaths. Australia and New Zealand plan to keep coronavirus-inspired restrictions on movement in place despite the two countries reporting roughly 50 new cases combined over the weekend.

    However, outbreaks in certain regions are only just beginning to accelerate.

    As China abruptly ends a Gilead drug trial that had been hailed as ‘extremely promising’ just days ago, the Indian Council for Medical Research is stepping its own race for a cure after announcing plans for a clinical trial using plasma from recovered coronavirus patients to treat those who are still critically ill, as the country’s caseload continues to rise steadily.

    Last night, we reported that China reported its largest number of new cases in weeks, as Beijing’s claimed that practically all of the 108 new cases involve foreigners or traveling Chinese nationals returning home ring particularly hollow when one considers that China has reduced the number of people crossing its borders by 90% as part of its efforts to contain the virus. According to Al Jazeera, Liu Haitao, an official with the National Immigration Administration, said the number of cases was still on the rise in the countries along China’s borders, per Al Jazeera.

    The world’s wariness of China has continued to intensify, as EU competition regulator Margrethe Vestager urged EU member-states to prevent China from taking advantage of low valuations to launch takeovers of critical companies during an interview with the FT.

    The BBC’s Robin Brant had some more thoughts on China’s ‘imported’ case problem.

    Imported cases have been China’s focus for several weeks now. It believes the main threat now to be people bringing the virus back to the country.

    Most of these people are Chinese returning home. The arc of China’s efforts to tackle, contain and end the outbreak went like this: local officials knew about an emerging outbreak but didn’t act; the national government imposed a draconian lockdown of Wuhan; China imposed domestic travel restrictions but insisted that international travel to and from China should not be cut; the virus spread abroad; China believed it had successfully contained the outbreak then switched its focus to people bringing it back here from abroad.

    Something like a cat and mouse chase has emerged – despite drastically reducing international flights into China, barring any direct arrivals into Beijing and insisting that passengers now undergo strict quarantine, people found a weak point.

    The usually obscure land crossing between Russia and China in the northern province of Heilongjiang has seen a persistent cluster of travellers bringing the virus with them. New ‘imported’ cases there are almost all Chinese coming home. And they appear to be spreading it. The latest official figures reveal 10 new domestic cases, seven of which are in Heilongjiang, home to that land crossing.

    After the total number of confirmed coronavirus cases in Russia doubled last week, Russia reported 2,558 new cases of the novel coronavirus on Monday, representing a 16% acceleration over the previous day, a record daily rise, bringing its overall nationwide tally to 18,328. 18 new deaths brought the death toll to 148. In a rare move, Vladimir Putin warned Monday that the outbreak is getting worse.

    A former chief rabbi of Israel has died of COVID-19 – the highest profile death from the disease in Israel. The rabbi, Eliyahu Bakshi-Doron, 79, was chief rabbi of the Sephardi community, which includes Jews or their descendants from the Iberian Peninsula, North Africa and the Middle East, from 1993 to 2003.

    In Ecuador, one of the worst-hit countries in South America, police removed almost 800 bodies in recent weeks from homes in Guayaquil, the epicenter of the country’s coronavirus outbreak, which has completely overwhelmed its meager health system, per Al Jazeera.

    And finally, the Washington Post reports that President Trump is likely to announce restrictions on US funding for the WHO later this week over its handling of the coronavirus pandemic and its persistent kowtowing to Beijing, which Trump argued has jeopardized global health.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 19:56

  • Everything That Is Wrong With America, In One Chart
    Everything That Is Wrong With America, In One Chart

    Mixing metaphors magnificently, if this ‘picture’ was worth a thousand words, the following chart is worth six trillion dollars as it exposes the ugly reality of America today that CNBC proclaimed so proudly on Thursday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you had any doubt about what (or who) is important to the unelected officials in The Eccles Building (and arguably the elected officials demanding strings be pulled behind the scenes) as they pump asset values ever higher, this chart makes it clear… it’s not you America.

    In a succinct note from Nordea Capital Markets, entitled rather cleverly “The Flipside Of Oprahnomics” Andreas Steno Larsen and Joachim Bernhardsen use the entertainer’s infamous “You get a car, you get a car, everybody gets a car” line as a jumping off point to highlight just how ‘unequal’ The Fed’s “you get a bailout, you get a bailout, everybody gets a bailout” plan really is…

    It looks like the bail-out and QE schemes have provided a better windshield for capital owners than for the hourly paid employees, if we judge it by the most recent trends. Equities are UP again, while initial claims keep skyrocketing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If capital owners grow more comfortable with the outlook, it may also end the job market menace. It is essentially impossible to bail out Main Street without also bailing out Wall Street, even if the Fed’s PR department will keep trying to convince you otherwise.

    The Fed is now both the lender and buyer of last resort… Oprahnomics it is!

    It is a pretty common conclusion that the COVID-19 virus will forever alter the world (Good old Kissinger joined the choir this weekend), why the Fed/US Treasury may risk bail-outing companies or even sectors that are ill-equipped to survive in the post-COVID-19 world.

    For how long can public credit lines remain in place, should a company or a whole sector continuously struggle to restart demand?

    Take the example of the retail sector. If consumption is hypothetically lastingly moved to online platforms, the Fed and the Treasury will probably keep bailing out a sector that will inevitably have to decrease in size.

    It is perhaps politically impossible not to bail out everything, but we simply struggle to fully grasp the potential scope for moral hazard issues growing on the balance sheet of the Fed; that is probably a question for another quarter, though. Right now, capital owners seem happy with the strategy. We have our doubts whether they will be as happy in 2-3 years from now.

    As we previously concluded, it would appear the score is simple: American Middle Class 0 – Federal Reserve 6,083,131,000,000.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/13/2020 – 19:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 13th April 2020

  • COVID-19 Shutdown: The End Of Globalization And Planned Obsolescence – Enter Multipolarity
    COVID-19 Shutdown: The End Of Globalization And Planned Obsolescence – Enter Multipolarity

    Authored by Joaquin Flores via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The coronavirus pandemic has shown that the twin processes of globalization and planned obsolescence are deficient and moribund. Globalization was predicated on a number of assumptions including the perpetuity of consumerism, and the withering away of national boundaries as transnational corporations so required.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What we see instead is not a globalization process, but instead a process of rising multipolarity and a rethinking of consumerism itself.

    Normally a total market crash and unemployment crisis would usher in a period of militant labor activity, strikes, walk-outs and community-labor campaigns. We’ve seen some of this already. But the ‘medical state of emergency’ we are in, has effectively worked like a ‘lock-out’. The elites have effectively flipped-the-script. Instead of workers now demanding a restoration of wages, hours, and work-place rights, they are clamoring for any chance to work at all, under any conditions handed down. Elites can ‘afford’ to do this because they’ve been given trillions of dollars to do so. See how that works?

    All our lives we’ve been misinformed over what a growing economy means, what it looks like, how we identify it. All our lives we’ve been lied to about what technical improvement literally means.

    A growing economy in fact means that all goods and services become less expensive. That cuts against inflation. Rather all prices should be deflating – less money ought to buy the same (or the same money ought to buy more). Technical innovation means that goods should last longer, not be planned for obsolescence with shorter lifespans.

    Unemployment is good if it parallels price deflation. If both reached a zero-point, the problems we believe we have would be solved.

    In a revealing April 2nd article that featured on the BBC’s website, Will coronavirus reverse globalisation? it is proposed that the pandemic exposes the weaknesses and vulnerabilities of a global supply-chain and manufacturing system, and that this in combination with the over-arching US-China trade war would see a general tendency towards ‘re-shoring’ of activities. These are fair points.

    But the article misses the point of the underlying problem facing economics in general: the declining rate of profit necessitated by automation, with the increasingly irrational policies, in all spheres, being pursued to salvage the ultimately unsalvageable.

    The Karmic Wheel of Production-Consumption

    The shut-downs – which seem unnecessary in the numerous widely esteemed experts in virology and epidemiology – appear to be aimed at stopping the production-consumption cycle. When we look at the wanton creation of new ‘money’, to bailout the banks, we are told that this will not cause inflation/debasement so long as the velocity of money is kept to a minimum. In other words – so long as there is not a chain reaction of transactions, and the money ‘stays still’ – this won’t cause inflation. It’s a specious claim, but one which justifies the quarantine/lock-down policy which today destroys thousands of small businesses every day. In the U.S. alone, unemployment claims will pass 30 million by mid April.

    Likewise, this money appears real, it sits digitally as new liquidity on the computer screens of tran-Atlantic banks – but it cannot be spent, or it tanks the system with hyper-inflation. More to the point, the BBC piece erroneously continues to assume the necessity of the production-consumption cycle, spinning wheat into gold forever.

    The elites were not wrong to shut-down the cycle per se. The problem is that they cannot offer the correct hardware in its place – for it puts an end to the very way that they make money. It is this, which in turn is a major source for the maintenance of their dopamine equilibrium and narcissist supply.

    This is not an economic problem faced by ‘the 1%’ (the 0.03%) . It is an existential crisis facing the meaning of their lives, where satisfaction can only be found in ever greater levels of wealth and control, real or imagined – chasing that dragon, in search of that ever-elusive high.

    So naturally, their solutions are population reduction and other such quasi-genocidal neo-Malthusian plans. Destruction of humanity – the number one productive-potential force – resets the hands of time, back to a period where profit levels were higher. The algorithmically favored coronavirus Instagram campaign of seeing city centers without people and declaring these ‘beautiful’ and ‘peaceful’ is an example of this misanthropic principle at play.

    That the elites have chosen to shut-down the western economy is telling of an historic point we have reached. And while we are told that production and consumption will return somewhat ‘after quarantine’, we also hear from the newly-emerged unelected tsars – Bill Gates et al – that things will never return to normal.

    What we need to end is the entire theory and practice of globalization itself, including UN Agenda 21 and the dangerous role of ‘book-talking’ philanthropists like Gates and his grossly unbalanced degree of power over policy formation in the Western sphere.

    In place of waning globalization, we are seeing the reality of rising multipolarity and inter-nationalism. With this, the end of the production-consumption cycle, based upon off-shore production and international assembly, and at the root of it all: planned obsolescence towards long-term profitability.

    The Problem of Globalization Theory

    Without a doubt, globalization theory satisfied aspects of descriptive power. But as time marched forward, its predictive power weakened. Alternate theories began to emerge – chief among these, multipolarity theory.

    The promotion of globalization theory also raises ethical problems. Like a criminologist ‘describing’ a crime-wave while being invested in new prison construction, globalization theory was as much theory as it was a policy forced upon the world by the same institutions behind its popularization in academia and in policy formation. Therefore we should not be surprised with the rise of solutions like those of Gates. These involve patentable ‘vaccines’ by for-profit firms at the expense of buttressing natural human immunities, or using drugs which other countries are using with effectiveness.

    The truth? Globalization is really just a rebrand of the Washington Consensus – neo-liberal think-tanks and the presumed eternal dominance of institutions like the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund, which in turn are thinly disguised conglomerates of the largest trans-Atlantic banking institutions.

    So while globalization was often given a humanist veneer that promised global development, modernization, the end of ‘nation-states’ which presumably are the source of war; in reality globalization was premised on continuing and increasing concentration of capital towards the 19th century zones – New York, London, Berlin, and Paris.

    ‘Internationalism’ was once rooted in the existence of nations which in turn are only possible with the existence of culture and peoples, but was hi-jacked by the trans-Atlanticist project. Before long, the new-left ‘internationalists’ became champions of the very same process of imperialism that their forbearers had vehemently opposed. Call it ‘globalization’ and show how it’s destroying ‘toxic nationalism’ and creating ‘microfinance solutions for women and girls’ – trot out Malala – and it was bought; hook, line and sinker.

    This was not the new era of ‘globalization’, but rather the usual suspects going back to the 19th century; a ‘feel-good’ rebranding of the very same 19th century imperialism as described in J.A Hobson’s seminal work from 1902, Imperialism. Its touted ‘inevitability’ rested not on the impossibility of alternate models, but on the authority that flows forth from gunboat diplomacy. But sea power has given way to land power.

    In many ways it aligned with the era of de-colonialization and post-colonialism. New nations could wave their own flags and make their own laws, so long as the traditionally imperialist western banking institutions controlled the money supply.

    But what is emerging is not Washington Consensus ‘globalization’, but a multipolar model based in civilizational sovereignty and difference, building products to last – for their usefulness and not their repeatable retail potential. This cuts against the claims that global homogenization in all spheres (moral, cultural, economic, political, etc.) was inevitable, as a consequence of mercantile specialization.

    Therefore, inter-nationalism hyphenated as such, reminds us that nations – civilizations, sovereignty, and their differences – make us stronger as a human species. Like against viruses, some have stronger natural immunity than others. If people were identical, one virus could wipe-out all of humanity.

    Likewise, an overly-integrated global economy leads to global melt-down and depression when one node collapses. Rather than independent pillars that could aid each other, the interdependence is its greatest weakness.

    Multipolarity is Reality

    This new reality – multipolarity – involves processes which aspects of globalization theory also suggest and predict for, so there are some honest reasons why experts could misdiagnose multipolarity as globalization. Overlooked was that the concentration of capital nodes in various and globally diverse regions by continent, were not exclusively trans-Atlantic regions as in the standard globalization model of Alpha ++ or Alpha+ cities. This capital concentration along continental lines was occurring alongside regional economic development and rising living standards which tended to promote the efficiency of local transportation as opposed to ocean-travel in the production process. As regional nodes by continent had increasingly diversified their own domestic production, a general tendency for transportation costs to increase as individual per capita usage increased, worked against the viability of an over-reliance on global transit lines.

    But among many problems in globalization theory was that the US would always be the primary consumer of the world’s goods, and with it, the trans-Atlantic financial sector. It was also contingent on the idea that mercantilist conceptions of specialization (by nation or by region) would always trump autarkic models and ISI (income substitution industrialization). Again, if middle-class consumer bases are rising in all the world’s inhabited continents as multipolarity explains and predicts, then a global production regimen rationalized towards a trans-Atlantic consumer base as globalization theory predicts isn’t quite as apt.

    Because the present system is premised on a production-consumption and financial model, the solutions to crises are presented as population reduction and what even appears, at least in the case of Europe, as population replacement. As cliché as this may seem, this also appeared to be the policy of the Third Reich when capitalism faced its last major crises culminating in WWII.

    Breaking the Wheel

    The shutdown reveals the karmic wheel of production-consumption is in truth already broken. We have already passed the zenith point of what the old paradigm had to offer, and it has long since entered into a period of decay, economic and moral destruction.

    Like the Christ who brings forth a new covenant or the Buddha who emerges to break the wheel of karma, the new world to be built on the ruins of modernity is a world that liberates the productive forces, realizing their full potential, and with it the liberation of man from the machine of the production-consumption cycle.

    Planned obsolescence and consumerism (marketing) are the twin evils that have worked towards the simultaneous time-wasting enslavement of ‘living to work’, and have built globalization based on global assembly and global mono-culture.

    What is important for people and their quality of life is the time to live life, not be stuck in the grind. We hear politicians and economists talking about ‘everyone having a job’, as if what people want is to be away from their families, friends, passions, or hobbies. What’s more – people cannot invent, innovate, or address the greater questions of life and death – if their nose is to the grindstone.

    Now that we are living under an overt system of control, a ‘medical state of emergency’ with a frozen economy, we can see that another world is possible. The truth is that most things which are produced are intentionally made to break at a specific time, so that a re-purchase is predictable and profits are guaranteed. This compels global supply chains and justifies artificially induced crashes aimed at upward redistribution and mass expropriations.

    Instead of allowing Bill Gates to tour the world to tout a police-state cum population reduction scheme right after a global virus pandemic struck, one which many believe he owns the patent for, we can instead address the issues of multipolarity, civilizational sovereignty, and ending planned obsolescence and the global supply chain, as well as the off-shoring it necessitates – which the BBC rightly notes, is in question anyhow.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 23:50

  • JPMorgan Scrambles To Raise Mortgage Borrowing Standards Ahead Of "Biggest Wave Of Defaults In History"
    JPMorgan Scrambles To Raise Mortgage Borrowing Standards Ahead Of "Biggest Wave Of Defaults In History"

    Earlier this week when we reported that JPMorgan has quietly halted all non-Paycheck Protection Program based loan issuance for the foreseeable future, we said that we didn’t buy the stated reason namely – the bank was drowning in (government-backstopped) applications and would be willing to forego millions in easy, recurring net interest income and that instead the real reason why JPMorgan would “temporarily suspend” all non-government backstopped loans such as PPP, is if the bank expects a default tsunami to hit, coupled with a full-blown depression that wipes out the value of assets pledged to collateralize the loans. We went on:

    Furthermore, why issue loans that will default in months if not weeks, just as bankruptcy courts fill up with millions of cases (assuming the coronavirus clears out by then, as the alternative is simply unthinkable – a default tsunami without any functioning Chapter 11 or Chapter 7 process) when JPM can simply stick to the 100% risk-free issuance of government-guaranteed small-business loans which pay a handsome 1% interest, especially if it makes JPM look patriotic by doing its duty to bail out America.

    Over the weekend our skepticism was confirmed when Reuters reported that JPMorgan, the country’s largest lender by assets and which will kick off earnings season tomorrow, will raise borrowing standards this week for most new home loans as the bank “moves to mitigate lending risk stemming from the novel coronavirus disruption.”

    Starting Tuesday, customers applying for a new mortgage will need a credit score of at least 700, and will be required to make a down payment equal to 20% of the home’s value (something which we thought was the norm after the last financial crisis, but apparently lending conditions had eased quite a bit in the past decade).

    “Due to the economic uncertainty, we are making temporary changes that will allow us to more closely focus on serving our existing customers,” Amy Bonitatibus, chief marketing officer for JPMorgan Chase’s home lending business, told Reuters.

    According to Reuters, “the change highlights how banks are quickly shifting gears to respond to the darkening U.S. economic outlook and stress in the housing market, after measures to contain the virus put 16 million people out of work and plunged the country into recession.”

    What the change really highlights is that after halting its exposure to plain vanilla, non-government guaranteed loans, JPMorgan is now quietly pulling out of that other market where it makes the bulk of its revenues – mortgages – ahead of a tsunami of mortgage defaults, which last week we dubbed  “The Next Crisis” as “Up To 30% Of All Mortgages Will Default In “Biggest Wave Of Delinquencies In History.”

    Sure enough, JPMorgan – the fourth largest U.S. mortgage lender in 2019 – not only agrees with this dour assessment, but is taking proactive measures to mitigate its exposure to this wave of defaults but minimizing its exposure as soon as it can. And with JPM setting the stage, it is only a matter of days before all other banks follow and lock out tens of million of even credit-worthy Americans with less than prime credit scores, out of the housing market for years.

    Of course, just like in the PPP case, the bank did not dwell on the true cause for this action, but instead said the change will “free up staff to handle a surge in mortgage refinance requests, which are taking longer to process due to staff working from home and non-essential businesses being closed.”  While that is certainly a factor, the biggest reason behind these changes is to help JPMorgan reduce its exposure to borrowers who unexpectedly lose their job, suffer a decline in wages, or whose homes lose value.

    In short, JPMorgan wants no part of the shitstorm that is about to be unleashed on middle America.

    While JPMorgan would not disclose the current minimum requirements for its various mortgage products, the average down payment across the housing market is around 10%, according to the MBA. Furthermore, the new credit standards do not apply to JPMorgan’s roughly four million existing mortgage customers, or to low and moderate income borrowers who qualify for its “DreaMaker” product, which requires a minimum 3% down payment and 620 credit score.

    The U.S. housing market had been on a steady footing earlier this year, but all hell broke loose as a result of the economic paralysis and deepening depression resulting from the Coronavirus pandemic. And with would-be home buyers unable to view properties or close purchases due to social distancing measures, the health crisis now threatens to derail the sector, especially as banks are going to make it next to impossible to get a new mortgage.

    To be sure, as we reported last week the residential mortgage market is already freefalling after borrower requests to delay mortgage payments exploded by 1,896% in the second half of March. And unfortunately, this is just the beginning: last week, Moody’s Analytics predicted that as much as 30% of homeowners – about 15 million households – could stop paying their mortgages if the U.S. economy remains closed through the summer or beyond. Bloomberg called this the “biggest wave of delinquencies in history.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This would result in a housing market depression and would lead to tens of billions in losses for mortgage servicers and originators such as JPMorgan.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 23:25

  • Robert F Kennedy Jr. Exposes Bill Gates' Vaccine Agenda In Scathing Report
    Robert F Kennedy Jr. Exposes Bill Gates' Vaccine Agenda In Scathing Report

    Authored by Robert F. Kennedy Jr., Chairman, Children’s Health Defense,

    Vaccines, for Bill Gates, are a strategic philanthropy that feed his many vaccine-related businesses (including Microsoft’s ambition to control a global vaccination ID enterprise) and give him dictatorial control of global health policy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gates’ obsession with vaccines seems to be fueled by a conviction to save the world with technology.

    Promising his share of $450 million of $1.2 billion to eradicate Polio, Gates took control of India’s National Technical Advisory Group on Immunization (NTAGI) which mandated up to 50 doses (Table 1) of polio vaccines through overlapping immunization programs to children before the age of five. Indian doctors blame the Gates campaign for a devastating non-polio acute flaccid paralysis (NPAFP) epidemic that paralyzed 490,000 children beyond expected rates between 2000 and 2017. In 2017, the Indian government dialed back Gates’ vaccine regimen and asked Gates and his vaccine policies to leave India. NPAFP rates dropped precipitously.

    In 2017, the World Health Organization (WHO) reluctantly admitted that the global explosion in polio is predominantly vaccine strain. The most frightening epidemics in Congo, Afghanistan, and the Philippines, are all linked to vaccines. In fact, by 2018, 70% of global polio cases were vaccine strain.

    [ZH: The CDC has a large financial interest in pushing untested vaccines on the public and WHO is even more under the control of Big Pharma. The organization is corrupt beyond the meaning of the word. “The WHO is a sock puppet for the pharmaceutical industry.” — Robert F. Kennedy Jr.]

    During Gates’ 2002 MenAfriVac campaign in Sub-Saharan Africa, Gates’ operatives forcibly vaccinated thousands of African children against meningitis. Approximately 50 of the 500 children vaccinated developed paralysis.

    South African newspapers complained, “We are guinea pigs for the drug makers.” Nelson Mandela’s former Senior Economist, Professor Patrick Bond, describes Gates’ philanthropic practices as “ruthless and immoral.”

    In 2010, the Gates Foundation funded a phase 3 trial of GSK’s experimental malaria vaccine, killing 151 African infants and causing serious adverse effects including paralysis, seizure, and febrile convulsions to 1,048 of the 5,949 children.

    In 2010, Gates committed $10 billion to the WHO saying, “We must make this the decade of vaccines.”

    A month later, Gates said in a Ted Talk that new vaccines “could reduce population”.

    In 2014, Kenya’s Catholic Doctors Association accused the WHO of chemically sterilizing millions of unwilling Kenyan women with a  “tetanus” vaccine campaign. Independent labs found a sterility formula in every vaccine tested. After denying the charges, WHO finally admitted it had been developing the sterility vaccines for over a decade.  Similar accusations came from Tanzania, Nicaragua, Mexico, and the Philippines.

    In 2014, the Gates Foundation funded tests of experimental HPV vaccines, developed by Glaxo Smith Kline (GSK) and Merck, on 23,000 young girls in remote Indian provinces. Approximately 1,200 suffered severe side effects, including autoimmune and fertility disorders. Seven died. Indian government investigations charged that Gates-funded researchers committed pervasive ethical violations: pressuring vulnerable village girls into the trial, bullying parents, forging consent forms, and refusing medical care to the injured girls. The case is now in the country’s Supreme Court.

    A 2017 study (Morgenson et. al. 2017) showed that WHO’s popular DTP vaccine is killing more African children than the diseases it prevents. DTP-vaccinated girls suffered 10x the death rate of children who had not yet received the vaccine. WHO has refused to recall the lethal vaccine which it forces upon tens of millions of African children annually.

    Global public health advocates around the world accuse Gates of steering WHO’s agenda away from the projects that are proven to curb infectious diseases: clean water, hygiene, nutrition, and economic development.

    The Gates Foundation only spends about $650 million of its $5 billion dollar budget on these areas. 

    They say he has diverted agency resources to serve his personal philosophy that good health only comes in a syringe.

    In addition to using his philanthropy to control WHO, UNICEF, GAVI, and PATH, Gates funds a private pharmaceutical company that manufactures vaccines, and additionally is donating $50 million to 12 pharmaceutical companies to speed up development of a coronavirus vaccine.

    In his recent media appearances, Gates appears confident that the Covid-19 crisis will now give him the opportunity to force his dictatorial vaccine programs on American children.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 23:00

  • Worker Visas For Hydroxychloroquine: India Demands Quid Pro Quo To Export Tump's 'Miracle' Drug
    Worker Visas For Hydroxychloroquine: India Demands Quid Pro Quo To Export Tump's 'Miracle' Drug

    One of India’s leading newspapers has reported that President Trump’s much-touted ‘miracle’ coronavirus drug cocktail hydroxychloroquine, which is produced in large amounts in India, is being used by Prime Minister Narendra Modi to negotiate Indian workers’ continued ability to access employment in the United States. 

    It seems it’s a classic and perhaps foreseeable clash of Modi’s “India First” vs. Trump’s “America First” after New Delhi previously placed an export ban on the pill, given India is trying to contain its own COVID-19 outbreak now threatening 1.3 billion people. The popular popular Hindustan Times reported late last week of the developing quid pro quo situation

    The Indian government has asked the US to extend the validity of visas, including H-1B and other types of visas, held by Indian nationals who have been hit by the Covid-19-related economic slump, people familiar with developments said on Friday.

    Foreign secretary Harsh Shringla took up the matter during his telephone conversation with US deputy secretary of state Stephen Biegun on Wednesday, when the two sides also discussed ways to enhance cooperation to counter the pandemic and ensure the availability of essential medicines [hydroxychloroquine] and equipment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The timing is extremely sensitive, given India relies heavily on wealth earned by “Non-Resident Indians” in the US – yet at a moment tens of thousands are being forced back home amid the broader coronavirus employment crush and companies furloughing employees. 

    Trump in an April 4th phone call with Modi made clear America’s needs in the escalating virus lockdown emergency: “They make large amounts of hydroxychloroquine — very large amounts, frankly,” Trump told reporters of the call. 

    “They had a hold [on exports], because, you know, they have 1.5. billion people, and they think a lot of it. And I said I’d appreciate it if they would release the amounts that we ordered,” Trump described. 

    Modi was swayed, apparently, as days later he approved the export of many hydroxychloroquine pills, temporarily lifting the ban.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Getty Images/Vox

    Thus naturally New Delhi expects Washington to play ball now, as India’s Economic Times voiced late last week:

    Congress chief spokesperson Randeep Surjewala said after compromising the “India First” policy in the HCQ drug climb-down, the government is again failing to secure the safety and livelihood of Indians in the US.

    “Time for the prime minister to ensure that our soft power of ‘Namaste Trump’ converts into fair treatment of H-1B visa holders in the US,” Surjewala said, noting that the US has put Americans on a temporary paid leave or allowed them to work for reduced hours in the wake of the pandemic.

    But “the sword of H-1B visa job terminations” looms large over an estimated 75,000 Indians, with the United States giving them only a 60-day period to find a new job in case of a lay off, he said.

    It’s unclear the degree to which Modi himself made the appeal directly to the administration, but it remains that “India’s Congress is demanding that India’s Narendra Modi use his control over the hydroxychloroquine supply to protect the nation’s huge population of well-paid visa workers in the United States.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So it appears Trump’s long-term ‘America First’ principles – seen regarding India in his prior March 2016 vow to end many American Fortune 500 companies’ reliance on the H-1B visa and the cheap labor it often provides – may have to be compromised to keep the more immediately vital hydroxychloroquine supply going.

    It’ll be interesting to see if Modi pivots to playing hardball. Possibly, New Delhi’s parliament demands have already been articulated forcefully as linked directly to the vital potentially life-saving medicine behind the scenes. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 22:35

  • One Bank Explains Why No V-Shaped Recovery Is Coming, And Why The Fed Will Nationalize Everything
    One Bank Explains Why No V-Shaped Recovery Is Coming, And Why The Fed Will Nationalize Everything

    In the past three weeks stocks have staged a substantial rebound from their March 24 lows, in big part thanks to an unprecedented barrage of Fed-driven bailouts, backstops, and asset purchases which at last count amount to over $5 trillion in committed capital in just the past month, and also due to the growing conviction that a V-shaped recovery is imminent one the coronacrisis pandemic fades away. Setting aside concerns about a second, even more powerful infection wave, the reality is that a V-shaped recovery – the underlying narrative catalyst for the powerful bear market rally – from the current quarter’s GDP plunge which according to JPM will be as big as 40% simply will not happen, and here is Bank of America with a clear and succinct explanation why:

    There is a growing narrative in the markets that the end of the crisis is in sight. By some accounts, countries are bending the COVID-19 cases curve, allowing a relatively quick reversal of social distancing policies and a V-shaped recovery in the global economy. In sum, it is time to look through the dark hours ahead and focus on the approaching dawn.

    We agree with part of this narrative, but disagree with the bottom line. It does appear that a number of countries and regions are starting to bend the curve. The growth in cases has slowed significantly in most of the Euro area and the biggest hotspot in the US, New York, is showing hints of slowing. Areas that shut down early, like Austria, are now debating what a reopening should look like. Of course, the number of deaths will lag and that ugly reality will be with us longer.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, we are also getting more information on what a reopening looks like and the dangers of premature reengagement. China, with its authoritarian controls on population movement, has opened up significantly in the past six weeks or so and now is roughly at 80% of capacity by some metrics. However, a number of other countries have found it hard to completely reopen their economy even with a much better pandemic health system than in Europe and the US.

    In addition, in our view, V-shaped optimists have forgotten a basic lesson of the business cycle. Recessions can be triggered by a variety of shocks-surging oil prices, central bank inflation fighting popping bubbles and now a health crisis-but the recession continues well after the initial shock fades. This is because the drop in activity triggers a nasty feedback loop in the economy that overwhelms the policy easing.

    A two- or three-month shutdown will leave lasting scars on confidence. Economies will re-open to a greatly diminished demand environment, with high saving rates and very low discretionary spending. This argues for a U-shaped recovery and a persistent, large output gap, in our view.

    If this view is correct, and if the world is indeed stuck in the mire of economic contraction not for a quarter or two, but years, it means that what the Fed has done so far will be insufficient and the next step before Powell & Co., will be to expand its nationalization of capital markets by taking full control of the yield curve – to avoid the crossover point beyond which yields on the long-end of the curve soar – a in the form of Yield Curve Control, something the BOJ has been experimenting with for the past 4 years, and a version of which was used by the Fed in the 1940s, as the NY Fed was kind enough to remind its readers last week (perhaps in a hint of what is coming next). Here is BofA on this very topic:

    Global central banks have rolled out an impressive array of stimulus measures. However, as the depth of the downturn becomes clear, it will be hard for them to rest on their laurels. Easing thus far was likely predicated on a nasty recession, but not the worst recession in the post-war period. What do they do next? Negative policy rates look like the very last resort for many central banks given the hot debate over whether they do more harm than good. Therefore the obvious next potential step in our view is to take a page out of the BoJ playbook and implement yield curve control.

    Will it be effective and is it worth trying? Yield curve control did not succeed in getting Japan out of its low-rates-low-inflation trap. In our view, this is not because the policy is a waste of time, but because the BoJ only implemented it after deflation psychology was deeply embedded in the economy. It did not help matters that the Japanese government has repeatedly shocked the economy with tax hikes, over the objections of many economists.

    Yield curve control has many advantages, in our view. First and foremost, it makes it much easier to control the long end of the curve. Japan was able to keep bond yields low even as it slowed its bond purchases. Second, and related, it makes a replay of the 2013 taper tantrum much less likely. Third, it enhances fiscal stimulus as it prevents the normal rise in interest rates and the “crowding out” of private spending. Fourth, it ensures that as the economy crawls out of the deep hole it has fallen into, rising bond yields do not slow the rebound. Fifth, it would be particularly useful in Europe if the ECB can overcome political hurdles and direct the policy at specific bond markets.

    What BofA did not mention, on purpose, is that any form of Yield Curve Control would terminally crush any forward-looking function the bond market, which is the earliest warning indicator of inflationary (or deflationary) forces across the economy, has. That means that with the yield curve frozen, inflationary imbalances will build up beneath the surface and there will be no way to either observe them or respond to them… besides asset price hyperinflation and soaring gold prices of course.

    Effectively, yield curve control in a depressionary world would eliminate one of the two core market-moving drivers of risk prices – market-driven inflation/interest rates – and only leave corporate profits as an indicator of how the economy is doing. However, since the Fed has with its alphabet soup of measures disconnected risk asset prices from corporate fundamentals, i.e., profits and cash flow, by directly purchasing corporate bonds and soon stocks, it is only a matter of time before US capital markets get to a point where no economic or fundemental signals are reflected in risk assets, resulting in a “market” that is if not nationalized, then centrally-planned by the whims of a small group of Fed career economists, most of whom have never held a private sector job and have zero real world experience.

    How does such ubiquItious central planning end? Look no further than the USSR for the answer.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 22:14

  • Observations Of An Anonymous UPS Driver: "Customers I've Seen Since The 'Rona'…"
    Observations Of An Anonymous UPS Driver: "Customers I've Seen Since The 'Rona'…"

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    The other day, I shared something funny on social media. A little bit of humor is good for us, even (and especially) in times like this. If anyone knows who originally wrote this, please let me know so I can give proper credit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you think about it, a UPS driver with a regular route gets to know a little bit about nearly everyone who frequently places orders. I hope this brings you a giggle. (Remember, fun is not the F-Word.) I also hope it reminds you to pay strict attention to OPSEC.

    Here are some observations.

    From an anonymous UPS delivery driver…

    5 types of customers since the “rona”:

    1) Steve: He has been waiting for this moment his whole life. He has been drinking boilermakers since 10:00 am in his recliner and his AR is within arms reach. He has 6 months provisions in the basement and a bug out bag due west buried in the woods. Steve demands a handshake as I give him his package. He’s sizing me up as I deliver his ammo. Steve will survive this, and he will kill you if he needs to.

    2) Brad: He is standing at his window wearing skinny jeans and a Patagonia t-shirt. He is mad because there were no organic tomatoes at Whole Foods today. He points at the ground where he has taped a 6 ft no go zone line from his porch. I leave his case of Fuji water, organic granola bites, and his new “Bernie Bro” hat at the tape. Brad will not survive. Steve will probably eat him.

    3) Nancy: She has sprayed everything with Thieves oil. Bought all the Clorox wipes, hand sanitizer, toilet paper, meat, and bread from the local grocery chain. She has quarantined her kids and sprays them with a mixture of thieves, lavender, & mint essential oils daily. She has posted every link known to man about “The Rona” on her social media. She will spray you if you break the 6 ft rule. I will leave her yet another case of toilet paper. She will last longer than Brad, but not Steve.

    4) Karen: She has called everybody and read them the latest news on “The Rona”. She asked for the manager at Food Lion, Walmart, Publix, McDonald’s, Chi-Fil-A, and Vons all before noon demanding more toilet paper. Karen’s kids are currently faking “The Rona” to avoid her. I’m delivering “Hello Kitchen” to her. Karen will not survive longer than Brad.

    5) Mary: Is sitting in the swing watching her kids have a water balloon fight in the front yard as she is on her fourth glass of wine. She went to the store and bought 2 cases of pop tarts, 6 boxes of cereal, 8 bags of pizza rolls, And a 6 roll pack of toilet paper. There is a playlist of Bob Marley, Pink Floyd, and Post Malone playing in the background. I’m bringing her second shipment of 15 bottles of wine in 3 days. Mary will survive and marry Steve. Together they will repopulate the earth.

    Got any other types to add to this?

    And boy did people have other types to add to this. The responses were pretty apt and I think we all know someone who fits the bill of these characters. I also sent it to my friend, 1stMarineJarHead, who had a few characters of his own to add.

    The observations of our imaginary UPS driver are continued below.

    6) Aelfie: It takes me four trips to deliver all her seeds and gardening supplies. Two trips for all her sewing supplies. Her grocery order is smaller than you’d expect being mostly bulk items and alcohol.

    She hands me a handmade mask after showing how to fit in the N95 filter paper. It has the UPS logo neatly embroidered on the side. She hands over 5 boxes, prepaid and with printed labels all addressed to different hospitals. They’re full of masks, she tells me cheerfully. Just doing my small bit to help.

    The mail carrier walks up with a package for her from a pharmacy, seed catalogs, and a handful of assorted magazines. They’re wearing a mask with the USPS logo embroidered on it and they nod in passing. She limps back inside to get her hand truck, whistling “Good Ship Venus” as she starts to haul things to the back yard.

    Aelfie will survive and Steve and Mary will barter with her for groceries. She’ll accept bribes of wine to NOT teach their offspring the lyrics to all the songs she knows.

    7) Todd:  He pretends to be a partner at a prestigious hedge fund firm in the city, when in reality he is a mid-level analyst.  He answers the door to his East Hampton seaside 3,000sqft “cottage,” in his casual attire of slacks, Italian shoes (Corinthian leather, of course), polo shirt and a designer sweater tied around his neck.  All of which costs more than I make in three months.  As Todd signs for the delivery of a case of Russian caviar, his wife, Buffy, is complaining in the background of how the “help” has not shown up and how dreadful it will be to have to look at all those “townies” for the next few weeks. Faced with a possible mandatory quarantine with Todd and Buffy, the “help” all ran back to their third world Central, South American countries, and New Jersey. 

    The “townies” know that Todd and Buffy came from the city and storm the “cottage” with pitchforks and torches. Todd and Buffy meet a terrible fate, all the while the “townies” enjoy the well-stocked wine cellar and use the caviar as fishing bait. 

    8) Brenda: She follows social distancing to her own tailored interpretation. She doesn’t leave but has all walks of life come over every day for bbq’s, extended family games, birthday parties, and jigsaw puzzle nights. Brenda starts a major cluster of illness among her visitors and dies of COVID-19.

    9) Shooter: He hunts people like Steve for fun, avoids everyone anyway especially people like Brad and wasn’t aware there was a social distancing issue until they started putting tape on the ground. He wasn’t specifically trained for this but he’s happy to wipe out anyone near him in his pursuit of taking care of his family or just because he’s tired of looking at them. Shooter and his family eventually relocate someplace so remote that no one ever sees them again, but rumor has it there’s a very nice, handbuilt homestead out in the boondocks somewhere that is surrounded by tripwires and homemade claymore mines.

    10) Scott:  He is a former Special Ops guy, currently contracted as chief of security for a CEO of a major global corporation, his wife and kids, and their grandkids in a former missile silo converted into a bunker at an undisclosed location.  After only three weeks, Scott and his team are already growing tired of being referred to as the “help,” and as one teammate commented, “She orders me to make her a chocolate martini one more time and I am going to ghost her!  The paycheck is not worth it!”

    Within a week, the CEO and his entire family meet a most unfortunate end, and are converted into compost.  Scott and his team take up with the locals, integrate, and after a few years, become a nomadic tribe, traveling throughout the wasteland of what was once the greatest nation of the 21st century.  

    11) Susan: Susan is Karen’s sister. She’s the one who keeps tabs on her neighbors who are out for a walk or anyone she thinks is not social distancing properly. She posts every incident on social media and can sometimes be found at Wal-Mart screaming at people who don’t have masks on. She secretly wants to call the police several times a day.

    When there’s no apocalypse going on, Susan heads the locals HOA and makes some HOA kickbacks from threatening to report dead lawns.

    Susan will be the first one Steve or Shooter takes out…from 100 yards

    12) Kyle: Kyle is like Steve but makes his kids in camo do boot camp in the back yard, and then play Pokémon with him at night, pounds Monster in the morning and whiskey at night, cringes when his former medic wife kicks his butt for using too much TP after eating MRE’s for 2 weeks straight. Kyle likes to hide in the bushes in his ghillie suit to freak out the UPS guy. I just sigh and throw the package into the bushes.

    Kyle will survive although his wife strongly considers killing him for being aggravating.

    13) Dan: As I pull up the long dirt drive, Dan and his dog, Jake, step off the front porch to greet me.  Dan was a high power lobbyist on K Street in Washington DC but retired early after his heart attack at the age of 42.  He sold everything and moved to this remote woodland off-grid cabin, where he gardens, fishes, hunts and grows pot. When I hand over his new wheeled hand row tiller, I ask him what is he doing about the pandemic. “Pandemic?  What pandemic?” I cannot help but envy him.

    Dan will survive and have no idea that the death toll is as high as it is.

    14)  John: John lives in a small mobile home, off a county road. Half a dozen different antennas of various shapes and sizes fill his small back yard.  Just beyond the back yard is the state park, all 5,000 acres of it. After I knock, the door opens a crack, and Bob looks me over and then opens the door a bit more.  He looks around nervously. He is tight-lipped as he signs for the insured package of radio equipment. He mutters his thanks and closes the door. Not only was he wearing a N95 mask, as nearly everyone is nowadays, but a tinfoil hat. Once the pandemic broke out, John never appeared in public again.

    John will be found years later, dead of starvation in his mobile home, with just one Twinkie left and surrounded by at least 100 empty boxes Twinkies and empty Spam cans.

    13)  Rachel:  She is a nurse at a local hospital ER, but sells homemade candles not as a second source of income, but as something she enjoys on the side.  I deliver the wicks in large spools about once an] month. She gets the wax from a local apiary. The additional income would be a bonus, but her husband insists on spending the money on firearms, ammo, and MREs.  He has stockpiled enough MREs to feed him, her, and their teen daughter for a year. He has 20k rounds of ammo for each firearm. After the pandemic and the collapse of the food distribution system, I see her at the town square market place.  She looks almost bewildered, even nervous as she and her daughter walk among the people who are bustling about, trading things and food. As I approach, she recognizes me, despite my beard and smiles, even giving me a half hug, as she is carrying a case of MREs.  I ask her what is it she is looking to trade for, and she seems to be at a loss. I ask her what has happened to her.

    She says in the name of OPSEC, her husband demanded they make their home look like it was looted, breaking some of the windows, and putting the body of a dead animal just in front to deter would-be looters/scavengers.  He also ordered they dig a pit in the back of their fenced in yard and do their “business” there. After three months of nothing but MREs, OPSEC, and pooping in a hole they had to squat over, Rachel’s hubby has succumbed to an “unfortunate accident” and was disposed of in one of the poop holes.

    I tell her the community has set up a daily farmers market like square where people trade for things, socialize as the pandemic has subsided for now.  I help her trade MREs for two dozen fresh eggs, cabbage, carrots, apples, and two freshly slaughtered chickens. That night, they eat the best they have in three months.  

    Being a nurse, I help Rachel find employment as an assistant to the house call doctor that has sprung up in the community.  They are paid in various things, from food to home knit wool hats. Rachel still trades her candles for other things. A few years go by, and Rachel’s daughter marries one of the doctors.  Rachel later becomes a member of the community council leaders and eventually chairperson.  At the age of fifty, Rachel marries a blacksmith.  She allowed me the honor of giving her away. She has never been happier.

    14) Me, the anonymous UPS delivery driver:  Having delivered ammo, Fiji water, toilet paper, pre-made foodstuff, wine, Russian caviar, and a package of unknown origin to an undisclosed former missile silo, I had to call the ball. The food supply distribution system was collapsing.  I sat in my brown truck, leaned over the steering wheel, looking at the road in front of me.  Do my job or save myself and my family? 

    I chose the latter and took the truck back home.  Had the wife and kids follow me with the dogs to family farm out in the sticks.  I figured a UPS truckload of ammo, wine, water, toilet paper, and whatever else was back there would be additions at the farm.  I would learn to like Russian caviar.  With a good chianti, it cannot be that bad, right?


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 22:10

  • Timing The "Crossover Point": The Fed Will Soon Monetize The Entire Fiscal Stimulus Package… What Happens Then
    Timing The "Crossover Point": The Fed Will Soon Monetize The Entire Fiscal Stimulus Package… What Happens Then

    As we noted late last week, the Fed’s money printer has been going brrrr in overtime, and in the past month alone, Powell & Co. has purchased nearly $2 trillion in Treasury and MBS securities, far more than during any of the previous QE episodes (either in the first month or their entirety)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which together with the Fed’s POMO schedule which sees the Fed purchasing another $225BN in securities this week…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … will push the Fed’s balance sheet (currently at $6.1 trillion) to $6.4 trillion by next Friday, up more than 50% in the span of just weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s just the beginning, because as we showed two weeks ago, BofA strategist and former Fed guru, Mark Cabana expects the Fed’s balance sheet to double to $9 trillion by the end of the year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What does this mean for Treasury issuance? Well, for one thing it means that the Fed will monetize not only all the debt issuance for 2020 that was scheduled before the coronavirus pandemic broke out, but also the entire fiscal stimulus package (currently $2.2 trillion, soon $3+ trillion). Which is hardly a surprise: last week the Bank of England became the first bank to officially announce it would openly monetize the UK’s deficit. In other words, the central bank and the Treasury are now one and the same, which also means that helicopter money has arrived, first in the UK and soon everywhere else.

    It also means that, as DB’s Stuart Sparks puts it “these are administered markets” (or perhaps “administerrrrrred” markets).

    Yet while the Fed has unleashed an unprecedented buying spree across the curve, traders are starting to ask when and how will markets price in a “crossover point” when there is more supply than demand (if such a thing is possible), potentially resulting in a violent bear steepening in the yield curve and a spike in long-term yields as the Fed loses control over long-term inflation expectations.

    Commenting on this, DB’s rates strategists write that the narrative for bearish curve steepening is rooted in the idea of a crossover point at which the duration impact of additional Treasury supply exceeds that of demand stemming from Fed QE purchases. This is particularly true in the long end, where the Treasury is still expected to begin 20y issuance in the May refunding.  The “crossover” argument is illustrated on the chart below: coupon supply net of Fed purchases is likely to turn positive during Q3, even if the Fed monetizes the entire fiscal stimulus package as it currently stands.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That said, the crossover argument is inherently a flow argument, rather than a stock argument. To mitigate fears that the deluge of Treasurys – now that helicopter money has been unleashed – will lead to a chaotic spike in long-rates, Deutsche Bank writes that an immediate issue with the flow argument that increasing Treasury supply will push yields higher and the term premium steeper “is that it ignores the flows between the present and the time at which this crossover occurs.” That is, large purchase volumes at higher than market WAM should flatten the term premium and push yields lower until the crossover point. Yields might rise and the term premium steepen, but from lower and flatter levels.

    At the same time, the Fed’s thought process around QE is inherently more stock-based (an argument that the Fed lost long ago when it was demonstrated conclusively by the like of Goldman and others that only the flow matters): QE “permanently” reduces the stock of risk free government debt, which should cause that government debt to richen. In order to enhance returns, private investors are then obliged to extend duration, flattening the term premium. When the term premium is flat, investors must move out the risk spectrum to enhance returns. This is the Fed’s portfolio balance channel.

    Deutsche take a middle ground, and notes that pragmatically, one would expect the effects of large asset purchases to be cumulative, and to occur at a lag. For this reason QE is  something of a hybrid between stock and flow. Intuitively, Fed purchases of, say, $100 billion/month should have a different impact on the market if they were preceded by a period in which the Fed bought $2 trillion in total than they would had the Fed bought nothing previously. Here DB is quick to note that, at its projection of QE demand, the Fed will have fully monetized the first three phases of fiscal stimulus totaling
    around $2.2 trillion.
    Likewise the bank expects Fed purchases to increase to absorb any “phase 4” stimulus as is currently being debated in the US Congress.

    In short, without the Fed actively monetizing US debt, the long end would have disconnected long ago.

    A second issue is that there is still a reasonable amount of uncertainty about the magnitude of flows on both the supply and demand sides. Let’s start with the supply side.

    While a fourth installment of fiscal stimulus of $1 trillion or more would clearly add to potential supply, it is somewhat less clear where on the curve it might come. Specifically, there is a possibility that the Treasury might elect to delay its inaugural 20y issue due to poor liquidity and stretched dealer balance sheets. According to DB, the entire 2040 maturity sector is trading extremely cheap to the fitted curve (chart below).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bank’s view is that the Treasury will proceed, but the “long end supply thesis” is subject to both the risk that the issue will be delayed for better market conditions, and to the risk that if the issue comes, a smaller issue size could reduce long end supply pressures.

    Perhaps the key issue in the “crossover thesis” is what is the true goal of the Fed’s QE program. One argument is that the immense initial size of Fed Treasury purchases was intended as a powerful short term market stabilizer, but a “V”-shaped recovery could obviate the need for an extended program to stimulate the economy (not that one is coming as we will discuss in a subsequent post). This argument is perhaps the most consistent with Treasury cheapening as it could be consistent with a rapid taper of QE purchases in the relatively near term. That said, the probability of this scenario is low as the Fed will not do anything to send rate volatility (MOVE) soaring again.

    As a result, DB’s central expectation is that while QE purchase volumes are indeed likely to be tapered further, they will remain sufficiently large to exert further downward pressure on the level of real yields and the term premium. In short: once helicopter money start, it can never again stop.

    The fundamental reason the Fed will target these variables is that rising real yields and real term premium run contrary to their policy goals. First, the level of r* has likely fallen due to the acute demand shock caused by virus mitigation. As DB strategists argue, the equity/bond correlation suggests that r* could be as low as -1% (chart below).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And with short rates already at the effective lower bound (at least until we get NIRP), the Fed must ease further by growing its balance sheet (i.e., targeting longer maturities).  Suppressing the term premium crowds return-seeking investors first out the curve, and ultimately out of Treasuries into riskier assets, which means the Fed is now back to blowing the biggest asset bubble ever. The chart below illustrates that the ACM term premium has been reasonably well correlated with a proxy for the equity risk premium. When the term premium is low, all else equal, equities look cheaper, and price appreciation tightens the equity risk premium.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Second, high real yields keep the dollar strong, which keeps downward pressure on commodity prices and hence headline inflation. Note that the spike in real yields as BEI declined coincided with the sharp dollar appreciation during March. Moreover, we think it is important that the broad dollar is stronger than before the Fed began to ease, and remains higher than end-2019 levels in spite of the fact that 10y real yields have fallen 50 bp. The implication is that real yields likely need to fall further to stabilize the dollar and improve the prospects for persistent increases in headline and core inflation, the Fed’s true stated mission.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which brings us to the key question: what happens once we reach the Treasury supply/demand crossover point, and the answer is most that either the Fed doubles down voluntarily, or the Fed loses control and doubles down because it is forced to keep on monetizing all US debt issuance, which is now in its exponential phase (a lot of exponential curves in recent weeks)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … as the alternative is that everything that the Fed has been working on for the past decade (and really, 107 years) can be thrown out, and the US – and global – economy implodes.

    How long can this can-kicking last? Simple: as long as the world has faith in the dollar as a reserve currency (as discussed earlier) – while that particular fiction persists, the now co-joined Fed and Treasury will be able to pick the US economy up by its bootstarps while giving everyone the impression that printing money somehow makes people richer, when in reality it just devalues purchasing power, cripples labor and makes the “top 0.1%” holders of assets wealthier beyond their wildest dreams.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 21:45

  • Westward No! A Bitter Land-Office Business In Taming Federal Bureaucrats
    Westward No! A Bitter Land-Office Business In Taming Federal Bureaucrats

    Submitted by Vince Bielski, of RealClearInvestigations

    The Trump administration’s big strike against the federal bureaucracy is quietly unfolding at the Bureau of Land Management, where its senior managers and scientific staff have been told to pack up their desks in Washington, D.C., and move to its new headquarters in Grand Junction, Colo. and other western offices. Most employees aren’t climbing aboard the wagon train.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Environmental protesters in Vail, Colo., 2019, greet Interior Secretary David L. Bernhardt at a Western Governors Association meeting.
    Dean Krakel/The Colorado Sun via AP, File

    The shake-up, meant to make the bureaucracy more accountable to the drillers, cattle ranchers, hunters and hikers who use America’s public lands, is part of the sweeping deregulation that has fueled a boom in U.S. energy production through last year. In its earliest days, the administration declared energy independence a top priority and two years later oil production on federal and tribal lands and offshore hit record highs — a surge that will likely slow as the coronavirus pandemic cuts demand and rocks the industry.

    “It’s more efficient now,” says Kathleen Sgamma, president of Western Energy Alliance, a trade group representing 300 oil and gas companies that pushed for the BLM move. “You can be productive without fighting for years to get a permit. They are processed more efficiently in less time.”

    The gusher that has been feeding the coffers of states like Wyoming and New Mexico, however, is also raising concerns about the impact on some of the country’s spectacular landscapes and wildlife. Noting that only 80 of 174 employees have agreed to move west, environmental groups and some former BLM managers warn that relocating the agency’s headquarters reflects a broader shift of authority to political appointees, from career bureaucrats with years of expertise.

    “The relocation will have a substantial impact on the management of our public lands,’’ says Ray Brady, a retired senior manager and minerals specialist who worked in the Washington headquarters for 23 years. “We view it as a dismantling of the organization and turning major decisions on public lands over to political people who have agendas.” The department and bureau didn’t respond to requests for comment.

    The move began in November 2019 with a target completion date of July 1, and the pandemic, which may provide an unexpected rationale for getting out of a major population center, is not expected to significantly slow it down. But nonessential BLM travel is on hold for now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    William Perry Pendley: “Sagebrush Rebel” and Bureau of Land Management acting director.

    It represents tests both of the power of the administrative state and of striking a balance between the competing forces of development and conservation on public lands. It also promises to be a key regional issue in the 2020 election. At a campaign rally in Colorado in February, a state Donald Trump lost in 2016, the president touted the BLM relocation as part of his effort to end “the tyranny of Washington bureaucrats.” Joe Biden, the likely Democratic nominee, would have the bureau flex its regulatory muscles like never before. He would ban new oil and gas permitting on public lands and waters to reduce the threat of climate change. Carbon emissions from energy produced on federal lands amount to one quarter of the U.S. total. 

    Americans have a lot riding on the outcome. BLM manages 245 million acres of public lands – 10% of the U.S. land mass — primarily in 12 Western states. The iconic sagebrush deserts, grasslands and rugged mountains hold rich oil and gas deposits, robust elk and antelope herds, desert monuments and tribal cultural sites. Federal and tribal property produce about 10% of U.S. oil and gas sales. BLM also cares for 28 national monuments and other conservation areas encompassing red-rock deserts, jagged coastline and remote tundra.

    The bureau was founded in 1946, and in its first three decades quietly served cattle ranchers and coal miners who needed permits to use public lands. The rise of environmentalism and increased pressure on the lands changed the game by the 1970s: The National Environmental Policy Act forced federal agencies to examine ecological and health impacts — and take public input — before making decisions. A few years later the Federal Land Policy and Management Act gave BLM new and broader marching orders to manage public lands under a multiple-use principle. It now had to balance the interests of many competing groups – conservationists, drillers, hunters, miners and ranchers – in carving up lands for grazing, historical preservation, recreation, resource extraction and wildlife protection.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Herding wild horses in Idaho: BLM manages 245 million acres – 10% of the U.S. land mass — primarily in 12 Western states.
    Darin Oswald/Idaho Statesman via AP

    The “Sagebrush Rebellion” sprung up in the West in the 1970s to challenge the government’s tightening grip on public lands and the movement still reverberates today. William Perry Pendley, who was appointed BLM’s acting chief by Interior Secretary David L. Bernhardt, calls himself a “Sagebrush Rebel.” The firebrand property-rights attorney rose to prominence by suing BLM and other federal agencies on behalf of ranchers and drillers who depend on public lands.

    BLM has wiggle room in striking that balance between development and conservation, making its job tricky. Its offices spread throughout the West in cities like Boise, Billings and Carson City solicit input from groups with opposing land-use agendas. Staffers then apply scientific expertise to assess the best use of the resources and impact on the environment, and try to reach a consensus. But the hardest part of the balancing act can be navigating Washington politics, as Democratic and Republican administrations zealously push their priorities onto BLM decision-making. The radical swing from Barack Obama to Donald Trump is the latest example
    “The Obama administration was laser focused on conservation and I wasn’t a fan of that. It was too far left and not enough in the middle,” says Mary Jo Rugwell, who retired as BLM Wyoming state director in August after 46 years of federal service. “The Trump administration is all about removing barriers and restrictions to development.”

    Soon after Trump took office, then-Interior Secretary Ryan Zinke announced a shift in the balance. While Zinke’s strategic plan  includes fishing, hunting and recreation, it stresses drilling above all else: “An American-First energy policy is one that maximizes the use of American resources in freeing us from dependence on foreign oil,” wrote Zinke, who resigned in late 2018 amid investigations into his conduct and was succeeded by Bernhardt, his like-minded deputy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    David L. Bernhardt, right, Trump Interior Secretary: Put political appointees in charge of major land-use decisions. Photo: doi.gov

    To speed up energy production, the department significantly streamlined BLM regulations. In January 2018 officials ended the requirement for public input during environmental review of potential leases and cut the days for protests of lease offerings by more than half to 10. The number of new acres leased shot up by 117% in fiscal 2018 compared with two years earlier. And the time it takes to get a drilling permit on leased land was slashed by almost three months in that period. In 2019, oil production on federal and tribal lands and offshore hit a record of more than 1 billion barrels, almost a 30% jump.

    The BLM move shifts more than 200 filled and unfilled career positions in Washington to Grand Junction and other Western outposts — primarily the bureau’s top leaders and staffers with training in biology, geology, forestry, rangelands and archeology.  As the experts leave Washington, major decisions will be made by political appointees who lack scientific training, say current and former BLM managers.

    Retiree Brady said the agency’s renewable-energy program, which he helped create and oversaw, requires scientific expertise and collaboration that may be lost in the relocation. The large wind and solar energy developments on public lands can disturb the ecology and cultural sites, threaten endangered species like the desert tortoise and bald eagle and impinge on military installations and parklands. Brady said a technical staff is needed in Washington to collaborate with the National Park Service, Fish & Wildlife Service and the Defense and Energy departments to reduce possible harm from the renewable-energy projects.

    Bernhardt has already put political appointees in charge of major BLM land-use decisions. In 2018, he said a team of six political appointees and one career professional must review all actions that involve an environmental impact statement. This includes pivotal resource management plans created by field and state offices that divide up public lands for conservation, drilling, recreation and other uses for 20-year periods. The appointees on the team are lawyers and former Capitol Hill and department staffers with little or no scientific training. Before the order, BLM experts in Washington had played the leading role in reviewing plans, with occasional input from political appointees on major decisions, says Steve Ellis, who retired in 2016 as BLM deputy director, the top career post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Bureau of Land Management is moving a long way from D.C.;blm.gov

    “The review has been taken over by political people who are not scientists and have never worked in the field,” says Ellis, a forester by training.

    State offices that have submitted plans to headquarters for review have been told to open more land to oil and gas leasing. In Wyoming, the biggest energy exporting-state in the country, the Rock Springs field office developed a draft plan that fenced off a limited number of acres from leasing in its region while allowing drilling in other areas. The restrictions, which were requested by local officials and groups, were meant to protect the city’s aquifer and some sensitive big-game habitat. When the plan was presented to headquarters in 2018, the then-BLM director shot it down. He told Wyoming staffers to go back to the drawing board and make a plan that was less restrictive to drilling, says Rugwell, who was in the meeting. 

    “He said, ‘Are you trying to turn BLM into the National Park Service?’” Rugwell said. “That insulted me. I take pride in trying to be balanced. When I tried to explain that we had listened to the people of Wyoming, that didn’t make a difference.” The field office is now revising its plan.

    In Montana, the Lewistown field office’s draft plan called for setting aside about 100,000 acres because of its wilderness characteristics. The land is next to the Charles M. Russell National Wildlife Refuge, some of Montana’s wildest habitat with robust herds of bugling elk and mule deer. While this land surface would be off-limits to development, the plan sought to strike a balance by permitting oil and gas drilling on more than 1 million acres in the district.

    The political team in Washington asked for changes in the plan that eliminated the wilderness characteristics’ protections. The final 2020 plan allows for drilling and road building under controlled conditions in the wilderness area.

    The tradeoff between energy production and wildlife conservation is evident in New Mexico, an epicenter of the U.S. surge in energy production. The state’s San Juan Basin is one of the country’s most prolific oil and gas regions. But the drilling infrastructure in the area has disrupted mule deer migration from Colorado to winter feeding grounds in New Mexico. That prompted Sen. Tom Udall, Democrat of New Mexico, to introduce a bill last year with bipartisan backing giving federal agencies authority to create national wildlife corridors to protect the state’s big game and other animals around the country hurt by the loss of habitat.

    Chaco Culture National Historical Park is another flashpoint in New Mexico. Navajo Nation leaders oppose drilling close to Chaco Canyon where ancient ruins have been preserved. After Bernhardt visited the park last year, he said, he “walked away with a greater sense of appreciation of the magnificent site” and announced a one-year moratorium on leasing within a 10-mile radius of Chaco while BLM revised its resource management plan for the area.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Greater sage grouse: The thing with feathers, and lawyers.
    Pacific Southwest Region U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service /Wikimedia

    The stakes are also high for the greater sage grouse. A 2015 plan from the Obama administration covering 10 states established restrictions on development to keep the bird from being listed as an endangered species. Last year, BLM revised the plan to permit more drilling and other development by reducing restrictions on millions of acres of sensitive habitat. But a federal judge in Idaho blocked the revisions from going into effect, citing a wildlife biologist who found that the bureau ignored analyzing how its changes would impact sage grouse habitat in a way that’s “inconsistent with standard practices and the best available science.” The bureau responded in February with supplemental environmental analysis to justify its revisions.

    Amid a string of legal challenges, BLM’s Pendley points to the benefits of the U.S. becoming the world’s largest producer of crude oil.

    People in states that depend heavily on energy production — such as Wyoming, New Mexico and North Dakota — are the winners. An astonishing 50% of Wyoming’s revenue comes from energy industry taxes and royalties. Job growth in oil and gas extraction has been robust until a recent slowdown, made worse by the pandemic that has caused oil prices to plunge.

    “Barack Obama says you cannot drill your way out of energy dependence. And the president came in and said, ‘We are going to do it,’ and we have done it,” Pendley said in mid-February on a Colorado radio show. “It’s an unprecedented accomplishment.”

    BLM employees in Washington appear to be the losers. Brady, the retired minerals expert, says far fewer employees, only about 20%, will end up making the move, based on a survey he has done will most of the leadership and staff. Many of them are disillusioned over their diminished role at BLM and are either retiring or finding positions at other agencies.

    “A lot of good people are fleeing the agency,” a BLM senior manager with extensive experience in Washington wrote in an email before retiring in February. “This administration does not respect career employees.”

    Colorado Sen. Cory Gardner, who spearheaded the effort to move the agency to his state, isn’t concerned about the experts the bureau is losing. The Republican lawmaker said BLM is hiring to fill those spots and that it is more important to have career employees living in the West where they’ll learn about the local issues and take a more common-sense approach to regulation.

    “If people don’t want to live and work in the West, on the land that they’re regulating, that’s probably a good decision” to leave the BLM, he says. “I find it offensive and elitist that somebody would refuse to live on the land they regulate.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 21:20

  • Global 'Jubilee' Looms As G20 Finalizes Debt Relief Program For World's Poorest Countries
    Global 'Jubilee' Looms As G20 Finalizes Debt Relief Program For World's Poorest Countries

    Hours after Pope Francis on Easter Sunday morning said the debt burden on the most impoverished countries should be forgiven (aka debt jubilee), the Financial Times is now reporting that the G20 group is nearing a critical “action plan” to freeze debt servicing payments for poor countries to stave off an emerging-market meltdown.

    The new relief program could be finalized on April 15 on a videoconference of finance ministers and central bank governors. The plan would “freeze on sovereign debt repayments for six or nine months, or possibly through to 2021,” the official told the Times.

    The official said developed countries and multilateral institutions would use this period to write up “very clear criteria, country-by-country of what exactly is going to happen. Is it debt relief totally? Is it just a deferment, a rescheduling?”

    “For debt relief to happen, it would take time for it to be co-ordinated,” the official said.

     “But what is immediately needed is to give these people space so they don’t need to worry about the cash flow and debt servicing going to other countries, and they can use that money for their immediate needs,” the official said, who did not want to be named due to the sensitivity of the discussions. 

    Last week, the British-based Jubilee Debt Campaign called for a worldwide debt jubilee to avoid some of the world’s poorest countries from collapsing into chaos amid the COVID-19 crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sarah-Jayne Clifton, director of the Jubilee Debt Campaign, said: “The suspension on debt payments called for by the IMF and World Bank saves money now, but kicks the can down the road and avoids actually dealing with the problem of spiraling debts.”

    Clifton is urging for the immediate cancellation of 69 of the world’s poorest countries’ debt payments this year, which would free up at least $25 billion for the countries in 2020, and up to $50 billion if the jubilee was extended to the end of 2021.

    “This is the fastest way to keep money in countries to use in responding to Covid-19, and to ensure public money is not wasted bailing out the profits of rich private speculators,” added Clifton.

    Much of the debt crisis concern is situated around the poorest countries that line China’s Belt and Road Initiative.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The official said there is “very clear recognition that a global co-ordinated approach is a must” to avoid an emerging market debt crisis.

    Odile Renaud Basso, chair of the Paris Club, a group of the 22 largest creditor nations, told the Times that all creditor nations and China should work closely with G20 negotiations to resolve emerging market woes. 

     “There must be a level playing field so that all creditors agree to the same key parameters,” she said. “But with that in place there is always a need for bilateral discussions between each creditor and debtor nation, and China could work within that framework. They are very much involved and I think they will be part of an agreement.”

    The IIF has also been vocal in calls “to forbear payment default for the poorest and most vulnerable countries significantly affected by Covid-19 and related economic turbulence for a specified time period, without waiving the payment obligation”.

    The official also said that governments would not make it mandatory for private creditors to offer relief programs for the poorest countries.

    “You cannot force individual investors to waive their rights. That could distort the markets, and could have the negative consequences of liquidity problems. They would not lend if they see any sign that they can be forced to let go of their assets.”

    And it appears the world is at the end of a decade’s long monetary experiment, where ushering in more quantitative easing to fix below-trend growth or instabilities in the financial casino will not work this time.

    Daniel Lacalle, CIO at fund manager Tressis Gestión, recently said: “QE will not fix this. Swap lines will not fix this. A debt jubilee would fix this or multiple trillions of dollars in write-downs and defaults.”

    Internet search term for “debt jubilee” has surged to the highest level not seen since late 2012. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Increasing calls for a debt jubilee suggests the 100-year debt-super cycle’s “kick the can down the road” plan may have finally hit a wall


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 20:55

  • "Down The Rabbit Hole" – The Eurodollar Market Is The Matrix Behind It All
    "Down The Rabbit Hole" – The Eurodollar Market Is The Matrix Behind It All

    Submitted by Michael Every of Rabobank

    Summary

    • The Eurodollar system is a critical but often misunderstood driver of global financial markets: its importance cannot be understated.
    • Its origins are shrouded in mystery and intrigue; its operations are invisible to most; and yet it controls us in many ways. We will attempt to enlighten readers on what it is and what it means.
    • However, it is also a system under huge structural pressures – and as such we may be about to experience a profound paradigm shift with key implications for markets, economies, and geopolitics.
    • Recent Fed actions on swap lines and repo facilities only underline this fact rather than reducing its likelihood

    What is The Matrix?

    A new world-class golf course in an Asian country financed with a USD bank loan. A Mexican property developer buying a hotel in USD. A European pension company wanting to hold USD assets and swapping borrowed EUR to do so. An African retailer importing Chinese-made toys for sale, paying its invoice in USD.

    All of these are small examples of the multi-faceted global Eurodollar market. Like The Matrix, it is all around us, and connects us. Also just like The Matrix, most are unaware of its existence even as it defines the parameters we operate within. As we shall explore in this special report, it is additionally a Matrix that encompasses an implicit power struggle that only those who grasp its true nature are cognizant of.

    Moreover, at present this Matrix and its Architect face a huge, perhaps existential, challenge.

    Yes, it has overcome similar crises before…but it might be that the Novel (or should we say ‘Neo’?) Coronavirus is The One.

    So, here is the key question to start with: What is the Eurodollar system?

    For Neo-phytes

    The Eurodollar system is a critical but often misunderstood driver of global financial markets: its importance cannot be understated. While most market participants are aware of its presence to some degree, not many grasp the extent to which it impacts on markets, economies,…and geopolitics – indeed, the latter is particularly underestimated.

    Yet before we go down that particular rabbit hole, let’s start with the basics. In its simplest form, a Eurodollar is an unsecured USD deposit held outside of the US. They are not under the US’ legal jurisdiction, nor are they subject to US rules and regulations.

    To avoid any potential confusion, the term Eurodollar came into being long before the Euro currency, and the “euro” has nothing to do with Europe. In this context it is used in the same vein as Eurobonds, which are also not EUR denominated bonds, but rather debt issued in a different currency to the company of that issuing. For example, a Samurai bond–that is to say a bond issued in JPY by a nonJapanese issuer–is also a type of Eurobond.

    As with Eurobonds, eurocurrencies can reflect many different underlying real currencies. In fact, one could talk about a Euroyen, for JPY, or even a Euroeuro, for EUR. Yet the Eurodollar dwarfs them: we shall show the scale shortly.

    More(pheous) background

    So how did the Eurodollar system come to be, and how has it grown into the behemoth it is today? Like all global systems, there are many conspiracy theories and fantastical claims that surround the birth of the Eurodollar market. While some of these stories may have a grain of truth, we will try and stick to the known facts.

    A number of parallel events occurred in the late 1950s that led to the Eurodollar’s creation – and the likely suspects sound like the cast of a spy novel. The Eurodollar market began to emerge after WW2, when US Dollars held outside of the US began to increase as the US consumed more and more goods from overseas. Some also cite the role of the Marshall Plan, where the US transferred over USD12bn (USD132bn equivalent now) to Western Europe to help them rebuild and fight the appeal of Soviet communism.

    Of course, these were just USD outside of the US and not Eurodollars. Where the plot thickens is that, increasingly, the foreign recipients of USD became concerned that the US might use its own currency as a power play. As the Cold War bit, Communist countries became particularly concerned about the safety of their USD held with US banks. After all, the US had used its financial power for geopolitical gains when in 1956, in response to the British invading Egypt during the Suez Crisis, it had threatened to intensify the pressure on GBP’s peg to USD under Bretton Woods: this had forced the British into a humiliating withdrawal and an acceptance that their status of Great Power was not compatible with their reduced economic and financial circumstances.

    With rising fears that the US might freeze the Soviet Union’s USD holdings, action was taken: in 1957, the USSR moved their USD holdings to a bank in London, creating the first Eurodollar deposit and seeding our current UScentric global financial system – by a country opposed to the US in particular and capitalism in general.

    There are also alternative origin stories. Some claim the first Eurodollar deposit was made during the Korean War with China moving USD to a Parisian bank.

    Meanwhile, the Eurodollar market spawned a widely-known financial instrument, the London Inter Bank Offer Rate, or LIBOR. Indeed, LIBOR is an offshore USD interest rate which emerged in the 1960s as those that borrowed Eurodollars needed a reference rate for larger loans that might need to be syndicated. Unlike today, however, LIBOR was an average of offered lending rates, hence the name, and was not based on actual transactions as the first tier of the LIBOR submission waterfall is today.

    Dozer and Tank

    So how large is the Eurodollar market today? Like the Matrix – vast. As with the origins of the Eurodollar system, itself nothing is transparent. However, we have tried to estimate an indicative total using Bank for International Settlements (BIS) data for:

    • On-balance sheet USD liabilities held by non-US banks;
    • USD Credit commitments, guarantees extended, and derivatives contracts of non-US banks (C, G, D);
    • USD debt liabilities of non-US non-financial corporations;
    • Over-the-Counter (OTC) USD derivative claims of non-US non-financial corporations; and
    • Global goods imports in USD excluding those of the US and intra-Eurozone trade.

    The results are as shown below as of end-2018: USD57 trillion, nearly three times the size of the US economy before it was hit by the COVID-19 virus. Even if this measure is not complete, it underlines the scale of the market.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It also shows its vast power in that this is an equally large structural global demand for USD.  Every import, bond, loan, credit guarantee, or derivate needs to be settled in USD.

    Indeed, fractional reserve banking means that an initial Eurodollar can be multiplied up (e.g., Eurodollar 100m can be used as the base for a larger Eurodollar loan, and leverage increased further). Yet non-US entities are NOT able to conjure up USD on demand when needed because they don’t have a central bank behind them which can produce USD by fiat, which only the Federal Reserve can.

    This power to create the USD that everyone else transacts and trades in is an essential point to grasp on the Eurodollar – which is ironically also why it was created in the first place!

    Tri-ffi-nity

    Given the colourful history, ubiquitous nature, and critical importance of the Eurodollar market, a second question then arises: Why don’t people know about The Matrix?

    The answer is easy: because once one is aware of it, one immediately wishes to have taken the Blue Pill instead.

    Consider what the logic of the Eurodollar system implies. Global financial markets and the global economy rely on the common standard of the USD for pricing, accounting, trading, and deal making. Imagine a world with a hundred different currencies – or even a dozen: it would be hugely problematic to manage, and would not allow anywhere near the level of integration we currently enjoy.

    However, at root the Eurodollar system is based on using the national currency of just one country, the US, as the global reserve currency. This means the world is beholden to a currency that it cannot create as needed.

    When a crisis hits, as at present, everyone in the Eurodollar system suddenly realizes they have no ability to create fiat USD and must rely on national USD FX reserves and/or Fed swap lines that allow them to swap local currency for USD for a period. This obviously grants the US enormous power and privilege.

    The world is also beholden to US monetary policy cycles rather than local ones: higher US rates and/or a stronger USD are ruinous for countries that have few direct economic or financial links with the US. Yet the US Federal Reserve generally shows very little interest in global economic conditions – though that is starting to change, as we will show shortly.

    A second problem is that the flow of USD from the US to the rest of the world needs to be sufficient to meet the inbuilt demand for trade and other transactions. Yet the US is a relatively smaller slice of the global economy with each passing year. Even so, it must keep USD flowing out or else a global Eurodollar liquidity crisis will inevitably occur.

    That means that either the US must run large capital account deficits, lending to the rest of the world; or large current account deficits, spending instead.

    Obviously, the US has been running the latter for many decades, and in many ways benefits from it. It pays for goods and services from the rest of the world in USD debt that it can just create. As such it can also run huge publicor private-sector deficits – arguably even with the multitrillion USD fiscal deficits we are about to see.

    However, there is a cost involved for the US. Running a persistent current-account deficit implies a net outflow of industry, manufacturing and related jobs. The US has obviously experienced this for a generation, and it has led to both structural inequality and, more recently, a backlash of political populism wanting to Make America Great Again.

    Indeed, if one understands the structure of the Eurodollar system one can see that it faces the Triffin Paradox. This was an argument first made by Robert Triffin in 1959 when he correctly predicted that any country forced to adopt the role of global reserve currency would also be forced to run ever-larger currency outflows to fuel foreign appetite – eventually leading to the breakdown of the system as the cost became too much to bear.

    Moreover, there is another systemic weakness at play: realpolitik. Atrophying of industry undermines the supply chains needed for the defence sector, with critical national security implications. The US is already close to losing the ability to manufacture the wide range of products its powerful armed forces require on scale and at speed: yet without military supremacy the US cannot long maintain its multi-dimensional global power, which also stands behind the USD and the Eurodollar system.

    This implies the US needs to adopt (military-) industrial policy and a more protectionist stance to maintain its physical power – but that could limit the flow of USD into the global economy via trade. Again, the Eurodollar system, like the early utopian version of the Matrix, seems to contain the seeds of its own destruction.

    Indeed, look at the Eurodollar logically over the long term and there are only three ways such a system can ultimately resolve itself:

    1. The US walks away from the USD reserve currency burden, as Triffin said, or others lose faith in it to stand behind the deficits it needs to run to keep USD flowing appropriately;
    2. The US Federal Reserve takes over the global financial system little by little and/or in bursts; or
    3. The global financial system fragments as the US asserts primacy over parts of it, leaving the rest to make their own arrangements.

    See the Eurodollar system like this, and it was always when and not if a systemic crisis occurs – which is why people prefer not focus on it all even when it matters so much. Yet arguably this underlying geopolitical dynamic is playing out during our present virus-prompted global financial instability.

    Down the rabbit hole

    But back to the rabbit hole that is our present situation. While the Eurodollar market is enormous one also needs to look at how many USD are circulating around the world outside the US that can service it if needed. In this regard we will look specifically at global USD FX reserves.

    It’s true we could also include US cash holdings in the offshore private sector. Given that US banknotes cannot be tracked no firm data are available, but estimates range from 40% – 72% of total USD cash actually circulates outside the country. This potentially totals hundreds of billions of USD that de facto operate as Eurodollars. However, given it is an unknown total, and also largely sequestered in questionable cash-based activities, and hence are hopefully outside the banking system, we prefer to stick with centralbank FX reserves.

    Looking at the ratio of Eurodollar liabilities to global USD FX reserve assets, the picture today is actually healthier than it was a few years ago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, while the Eurodollar market size has remained relatively constant in recent years, largely as banks have been slow to expand their balance sheets, the level of global USD FX reserves has risen from USD1.9 trillion to over USD6.5 trillion. As such, the ratio of structural global USD demand to that of USD supply has actually declined from near 22 during the global financial crisis to around 9.

    Yet the current market is clearly seeing major Eurodollar stresses – verging on panic.

    Fundamentally, the Eurodollar system is always short USD, and any loss of confidence sees everyone scramble to access them at once – in effect causing an invisible international bank run. Indeed, the Eurodollar market only works when it is a constant case of “You-Roll-Over Dollar”.

    Unfortunately, COVID-19 and its huge economic damage and uncertainty mean that global confidence has been smashed, and our Eurodollar Matrix risks buckling as a result.

    The wild gyrations recently experienced in even major global FX crosses speak to that point, to say nothing of the swings seen in more volatile currencies such as AUD, and in EM bellwethers such as MXN and ZAR. FX basis swaps and LIBOR vs. Fed Funds (so offshore vs. onshore USD borrowing rates) say the same thing. Unsurprisingly, the IMF are seeing a wide range of countries turning to them for emergency USD loans.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Fed has, of course, stepped up. It has reduced the cost of accessing existing USD swap lines–where USD are exchanged for other currencies for a period of time–for the Bank of Canada, Bank of England, European Central Bank, and Swiss National Bank; and another nine countries were given access to Fed swap lines with Australia, Brazil, South Korea, Mexico, Singapore, and Sweden all able to tap up to USD60bn, and USD30bn available to Denmark, Norway, and New Zealand. This alleviates some pressure for some markets – but is a drop in the ocean compared to the level of Eurodollar liabilities.

    The Fed has also introduced a new FIMA repo facility. Essentially this allows any central bank, including emerging markets, to swap their US Treasury holdings for USD, which can then be made available to local financial institutions. To put it bluntly, this repo facility is like a swap line but with a country whose currency you don’t trust.

    Allowing a country to swap its Treasuries for USD can alleviate some of the immediate stress on Eurodollars, but when the swap needs to be reversed the drain on reserves will still be there. Moreover, Eurodollar market participants will now not be able to see if FX reserves are declining in a potential crisis country. Ironically, that is likely to see less, not more, willingness to extend Eurodollar credit as a result.

    You have two choices, Neo

    Yet despite all the Fed’s actions so far, USD keeps going up vs. EM FX. Again, this is as clear an example as one could ask for of structural underlying Eurodollar demand.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Indeed, we arguably need to see even more steps taken by the Fed – and soon. To underline the scale of the crisis we currently face in the Eurodollar system, the BIS concluded at the end of a recent publication on the matter:

    “…today’s crisis differs from the 2008 GFC, and requires policies that reach beyond the banking sector to final users. These businesses, particularly those enmeshed in global supply chains, are in constant need of working capital, much of it in dollars. Preserving the flow of payments along these chains is essential if we are to avoid further economic meltdown.

    Channeling dollars to non-banks is not straightforward. Allowing non-banks to transact with the central bank is one option, but there are attendant difficulties, both in principle and in practice. Other options include policies that encourage banks to fill the void left by market based finance, for example funding for lending schemes that extend dollars to non-banks indirectly via banks.”

    In other words, the BIS is making clear that somebody (i.e., the Fed) must ensure that Eurodollars are made available on massive scale, not just to foreign central banks, but right down global USD supply chains. As they note, there are many practical issues associated with doing that – and huge downsides if we do not do so. Yet they overlook that there are huge geopolitical problems linked to this step too.

    Notably, if the Fed does so then we move rapidly towards logical end-game #2 of the three possible Eurodollar outcomes we have listed previously, where the Fed de facto takes over the global financial system. Yet if the Fed does not do so then we move towards end-game #3, a partial Eurodollar collapse.

    Of course, the easy thing to assume is that the Fed will step up as it has always shown a belated willingness before, and a more proactive stance of late. Indeed, as the BIS shows in other research, the Fed stepped up not just during the Global Financial Crisis, but all the way back to the Eurodollar market of the 1960s, where swap lines were readily made available on large scale in order to try to reduce periodic volatility.

    However, the scale of what we are talking about here is an entirely new dimension: potentially tens of trillions of USD, and not just to other central banks, or to banks, but to a panoply of real economy firms all around the Eurodollar universe.

    As importantly, this assumes that the Fed, which is based in the US, wants to save all these foreign firms. Yet does the Fed want to help Chinese firms, for example? It may traditionally be focused narrowly on smoothly-functioning financial markets, but is that true of a White House that openly sees China as a “strategic rival”, which wishes to onshore industry from it, and which has more interest in having a politically-compliant, not independent Fed? Please think back to the origins of Eurodollars – or look at how the US squeezed its WW2 ally UK during the 1956 Suez Crisis, or how it is using the USD financial system vs. Iran today.

    Equally, this assumes that all foreign governments and central banks will want to see the US and USD/Eurodollar cement their global financial primacy further. Yes, Fed support will help alleviate this current economic and brewing financial crisis – but the shift of real power afterwards would be a Rubicon that we have crossed.

    Specifically, would China really be happy to see its hopes of CNY gaining a larger global role washed away in a flood of fresh, addictive Eurodollar liquidity, meaning that it is more deeply beholden to the US central bank? Again, please think back to the origins of Eurodollars, to Suez, and to how Iran is being treated – because Beijing will. China would be fully aware that a Fed bailout could easily come with political strings attached, if not immediately and directly, then eventually and indirectly. But they would be there all the same.

    One cannot ignore or underplay this power struggle that lies within the heart of the Eurodollar Matrix.

    I know you’re out there

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>So, considering those systemic pressures, let’s look at where Eurodollar pressures are building most now. We will use World Bank projections for short-term USD financing plus concomitant USD current-account deficit requirements vs. specifically USD FX reserves, not general FX reserves accounted in USD, as calculated by looking at national USD reserves and adjusting for the USD’s share of the total global FX reserves basket (57% in 2018, for example). In some cases this will bias national results up or down, but these are in any case only indicative.

    How to read these data about where the Eurodollar stresses lie in Table 1? Firstly, in terms of scale, Eurodollar problems lie with China, the UK, Japan, Hong Kong, the Cayman Islands, Singapore, Canada, and South Korea, Germany and France. Total short-term USD demand in the economies listed is USD28 trillion – around 130% of USD GDP. The size of liabilities the Fed would potentially have to cover in China is enormous at over USD3.4 trillion – should that prove politically acceptable to either side.

    Outside of China, and most so in the Cayman Islands and the UK, Eurodollar claims are largely in the financial sector and fall on banks and shadow banks such as insurance companies and pension funds. This is obviously a clearer line of attack/defence for the Fed. Yet it still makes these economies vulnerable to swings in Eurodollar confidence – and reliant on the Fed.

    Second, most developed countries apart from Switzerland have opted to hold almost no USD reserves at all. Their approach is that they are also reserve currencies, long-standing US allies, and so assume the Fed will always be willing to treat them as such with swap lines when needed. That assumption may be correct – but it comes with a geopolitical power-hierarchy price tag. (Think yet again of how Eurodollars started and the 1956 Suez Crisis ended.)

    Third, most developing countries still do not hold enough USD for periods of Eurodollar liquidity stress, despite the painful lessons learned in 1997-98 and 2008-09. The only exception is Saudi Arabia, whose currency is pegged to the USD, although Taiwan, and Russia hold USD close to what would be required in an emergency. Despite years of FX reserve accumulation, at the cost of domestic consumption and a huge US trade deficit, Indonesia, Mexico, Malaysia, and Turkey are all still vulnerable to Eurodollar funding pressures. In short, there is an argument to save yet more USD – which will increase Eurodollar demand further.

    We all become Agent Smith?

    In short, the extent of demand for USD outside of the US is clear – and so far the Fed is responding. It has continued to expand its balance sheet to provide liquidity to the markets, and it has never done so at this pace before (Figure 5). In fact, in just a month the Fed has expanded its balance sheet by nearly 50% of the previous expansion observed during all three rounds of QE implemented after the Global Financial Crisis. Essentially we have seen nearly five years of QE1-3 in five weeks! And yet it isn’t enough.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moreover, things are getting worse, not better. The global economic impact of COVID-19 is only beginning but one thing is abundantly clear – global trade in goods and services is going to be hit very, very hard, and that US imports are going to tumble. This threatens one of the main USD liquidity channels into the Eurodollar system.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Table 2 above also underlines looming EM Eurodollar stress-points in terms of import cover, which will fall sharply as USD earnings collapse, and external debt service. The further to the left we see the latest point for import cover, and the further to the right we see it for external debt, the greater the potential problems ahead.

    As such, the Fed is likely to find it needs to cover trillions more in Eurodollar liabilities (of what underlying quality?) coming due in the real global, not financial economy – which is exactly what the BIS are warning about. Yes, we are seeing such radical steps being taken by central banks in some Western countries, including in the US – but internationally too? Are we all to become ‘Agent Smith’?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If the Fed is to step up to this challenge and expand its balance sheet even further/faster, then the US economy will massively expand its external deficit to mirror it.

    That is already happening. What was a USD1 trillion fiscal deficit before COVID-19, to the dismay of some, has expanded to USD3.2 trillion via a virus-fighting package: and when tax revenues collapse, it will be far larger. Add a further USD600bn phase three stimulus, and talk of a USD2 trillion phase four infrastructure program to try to jumpstart growth rather than just fight virus fires, and potentially we are talking about a fiscal deficit in the range of 20-25% of GDP. As we argued recently, that is a peak-WW2 level as this is also a world war of sorts.

    On one hand, the Eurodollar market will happily snap up those trillions US Treasuries/USD – at least those they can access, because the Fed will be buying them too via QE. Indeed, for now bond yields are not rising and USD still is.

    However, such fiscal action will prompt questions on how much the USD can be ‘debased’ before, like Agent Smith, it over-reaches and then implodes or explodes – the first of the logical endpoints for the Eurodollar system, if you recall. (Of course, other currencies are doing it too.)

    Is Neo The One?

    In conclusion, the origins of the Eurodollar Matrix are shrouded in mystery and intrigue – and yet are worth knowing. Its operations are invisible to most but control us in many ways – so are worth understanding. Moreover, it is a system under huge structural pressure – which we must now recognise.

    It’s easy to ignore all these issues and just hope the Eurodollar Matrix remains the “You-Roll-Dollar” market – but can that be true indefinitely based just on one’s belief?

    Is the Neo Coronavirus ‘The One’ that breaks it?

    _______________________________________________________________

    ORACLE: “Well now, ain’t this a surprise?”

    ARCHITECT: “You’ve played a very dangerous game.”

    ORACLE: “Change always is.”

    ARCHITECT: “And how long do you think this peace is going to last?”

    ORACLE: “As long as it can….What about the others?”

    ARCHITECT: “What others?”

    ORACLE: “The ones that want out.”

    ARCHITECT: “Obviously they will be freed.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 20:45

  • Confirmed COVID-19 Cases In NYC Pass 100k, Deaths Pass 6k; UK Reports Most Deaths Outside US For 2nd Day: Live Updates
    Confirmed COVID-19 Cases In NYC Pass 100k, Deaths Pass 6k; UK Reports Most Deaths Outside US For 2nd Day: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • UK death toll passes 10,000
    • Boris Johnson released from hospital, says “I owe my life to the NHS”
    • Pope delivers Easter blessing at an empty St. Peter’s Basilica
    • US deaths cross 21k
    • France, Italy report drop in cases
    • France reports
    • Pope says debts of poor nations should be ‘forgiven’
    • Japanese report record single-day jump in cases for 5th day running
    • Jordan extends lockdown until end of April
    • China says new imported cases linked to flight from Russia
    • NY deaths, hospitalizations continue to fall.
    • FDA’s Hahn, Dr. Fauci say US will begin reopening on May 1
    • Germany reported the smallest increase in cases in more than a month
    • Spain deaths accelerate, snapping 3-day streak of declines
    • Canada deaths rose by 74
    • China announced 99 new cases, most in a month
    • Asian nations worry about Indonesia being “weak link”
    • Bill Gates warns we’re in “uncharted territory”
    • Spain leads rebound in European deaths, cases, snapping streak of declines

    *      *      *

    Update (2000ET): While the Christian world was focused on celebrating a confusing and isolated Easter holiday, and with much of Continental Europe ‘off’ on Monday, most of the coronavirus-related headlines to hit in the past couple of hours have been mostly negative.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we noted in our latest curve update, lockdown’s imposed worldwide might finally have brought the outbreak in Europe and the US to – or at least close to – a plateau. They’ve certainly come a long way in 2 weeks.

    But updates are still uneven, with large daily spikes in deaths in cases still occasionally being reported. On one hand, Germany reported 2,715 new cases and 200 deaths, the smallest daily increase in cases since March. It brought Germany’s total to 127,631 cases and 3,015 deaths. Earlier, Italy’s Civil Protection Agency reported the lowest number of coronavirus deaths in the country since March 19

    Spanish fatalities rose by 619 on Sunday, up from a nearly three-week low of 510 on Saturday. That snapped a three-day streak of daily declines in deaths, and brought Spain’s death toll to 16,972.

    Jordan extended its lockdown until the end of April, as schools, some government agencies and nonessential businesses remain closed. And, in the latest sign that the outbreak is probably being distressingly undercounted in Africa, the justice minister of Somalia’s autonomous Hirshabelle state, Khalif Mumin Tohow, has reportedly died after contracting the novel coronavirus. He’s only the second recorded death from the virus in the country.

    In Canada, the number of deaths rose by 74 to 674 in a day, official data posted by the public health agency showed on Sunday.

    As we mentioned earlier, in mainland China, health officials reported 99 new coronavirus infections, more than doubling from the previous day to reach a one-month high. Though, to be sure, all but once case was ‘imported’.

    For the second day in a row on Sunday, the UK has reported the most virus-linked deaths outside the US.

    The number of confirmed cases in NYC passed 100k on Sunday, while the number of confirmed deaths passed 6k. New cases slowed, bringing the total to 104,410, and deaths climbed to 6,182.

    *      *      *

    Update (1300ET):  Italy reported 4,092 new cases of coronavirus and 431 new deaths, as the pace of both slowed, even as the number of new cases remained above 4k. That brought the total to 156,363 cases, and 19,899 deaths, across Italy. The number recovered climbed to 34,211, while active cases hit 102,253. Of the currently infected, only ~3% were in serious condition. The mortality rate hit 12.7%.

    In Singapore, the number of new cases confirmed Sunday hit 233, a surprising jump in a city-state that recently imposed a strict lockdown to prevent a resurgence of cases.

    Meanwhile in France, the number of new cases climbed by the lowest level in a week. Total deaths jumped 561 to 14,393.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Despite the drop, French health authorities said the country must continue to abide by the lockdown, which appears to be working, the government said.

    “This data confirms that the epidemic keeps going on in our country in a dynamic way and it continues to hit us hard,” the health authority said in a statement.

    “Confinement measures, the application of barrier gestures, physical distancing for a minimum of 1 meter, social distance and a drastic reduction in contacts produce their first effects,” it added.

    In the US, coronavirus deaths passed 21k, while the worldwide total of confirmed COVID-19 cases topped 1.8 million as the virus marches on.

    In recent days, we’ve reported on the disturbing acceleration in new cases in Russia, where President Vladimir Putin extended a lockdown until the end of April. Moscow remains the epicenter, with 2/3rds of all cases.

    Now, Chinese health officials in Shanghai reported that 51 of 52 imported cases confirmed on Sunday were linked to a recent flight from Russia. The travelers accounts for more than half of the 97 ‘imported’ cases confirmed by national health authorities.

    Per BBG:

    More than half of the coronavirus infections reported by China on Sunday stemmed from a Russian flight to Shanghai on April 10, underscoring the possible severity of the outbreak in Russia. Shanghai’s Municipal Health Commission said 51 of 52 imported cases on Saturday were of Chinese nationals who were diagnosed to have Covid-19 after they landed in the city. The travelers accounted for more than half of 97 imported infections China disclosed on Sunday morning. No other information was provided about the flight. Ninety-two people linked to the Russian flight have been tracked and quarantined, Shanghai authorities said. It’s not clear why the Chinese nationals were in Russia.

    That certainly doesn’t look good.

    *      *      *

    Update (1140ET): Andrew Cuomo kicked off a special Easter Sunday edition of his daily press briefing with some more good news: both deaths and hospitalizations have continued to fall across New York State. According to health officials, deaths over the last 24 hours declined to 758, bringing the statewide death toll to 9,385.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cuomo said he would sign an executive order mandating that essential businesses supply employees with gloves and masks. He also complained that NY was only getting $12k per patient from the trio of federal coronavirus bills passed since the outbreak began. He complained that less densely populated states are getting up to $300k per patient, amount received by Republican-controlled Montana.

    Watch Cuomo live below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, the UK Department of Health released figures for the rest of the UK, confirming that the rate is accelerating across the country. The UK reported 5,288 new cases and 737 new deaths, for a total of 84,279 cases and 10,612 deaths.

    But before we go, a little Easter-themed coronavirus humor:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *      *      *

    As millions of Christians wake up to an Easter Sunday largely devoid of cherished holiday traditions (Easter Egg hunts, baskets filled with candy, gathering to celebrate with family), the UK Health Department reported some more grim news: As expected, the COVID-19 death toll in the country passed 10k over the last 24 hours, according to numbers released Sunday morning.

    The UK Department of Health and Social Care revealed that the death toll rose in England by 657 to 9,594 on Sunday, bringing the total across the UK to more than 10,500. Unfortunately, the daily deaths have become part of the world’s grim routine in the coronavirus era. But at least the British people received some good news: PM Boris Johnson has left the hospital in London where he was briefly moved to the ICU about a week ago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After Italy reported a sudden jump in deaths yesterday, ending a promising streak of declines, Spain on Sunday reported a daily death toll of 16,972, up 619 on Sunday, compared with a jump of 510 yesterday. The Saturday number was a nearly three-week low, and marked the third day in a streak of declines.

    So much for that trend of leveling off that experts hailed as signs of a possible peak. On Saturday, both the Spanish and Italian governments celebrated what looked like progress in combating the virus, and assured the population that the transition back to “normalcy” would begin soon.

    In the Vatican, Pope Francis spoke before an empty St. Peter’s Basilica for the annual Easter Vigil. This year, he urged Catholics celebrating the holiday weekend in lockdown to “not yield to fear”. More controversially, the pope called on the debts of poor nations to be ‘forgiven’ to help them deal with the virus. 

    For the fifth day in a row, health authorities in Japan confirmed yet another daily record of new cases. Japan is roughly one week into a state of emergency that can’t be enforced by law, but appears to be setting in nonetheless, as non-essential businesses close and Japan’s students reckon they won’t return to a classroom until the fall, at the earliest. Like Trump, Japanese PM Shinzo Abe has been criticized for not ramping up testing, and for getting complacent after the “Diamond Princess” fiasco.

    In the US, FDA Commissioner Stephen Hahn said the White House had targeted May 1 as the date to start relaxing stay-at-home restrictions. “We see light at the end of the tunnel,” he told ABC’s “This Week.”

    Hahn, however, warned that there were many factors to take into account in finally determining when it would be safe to lift restrictions, he said

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Dr. Fauci said something similar during an appearance on CNN’s “State of the Union”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, more attention is being paid to several other European countries, including the Netherlands, where the number of confirmed coronavirus cases has topped 25,000, health authorities said on Sunday, with the number of deaths rising by 94 to 2,737. Belgium reported 1,629 new cases and 268 new deaths on Sunday, for a total of 29,647 cases and 3,600 deaths.  Portugal reported 598 new cases of coronavirus and 34 new deaths, for a total of 16,585 cases and 504 deaths.

    Yesterday, Sweden reported 77 new deaths and 544 new cases, bringing the country’s case total north of 10k to 10,151. Its death toll, meanwhile, is about to cross 1k. As time goes on, how things play out in Sweden offers an interesting contrast to the US and the rest of Europe.

    While Japan deals with its resurgence, across Asia, media reports and governments are looking at Indonesia, which engaged in some short-lived denialism before finally acknowledging that the virus had arrived, as the weak link in the neighborhood. A riot in a prison in Indonesia’s North Sulawesi province where at least one guard is reportedly exhibiting COVID-19-like symptoms has highlighted the risk as prisoners in overcrowded jails take matters into their own hands to avoid being infected – a phenomenon that has also played out in Italy and China.

    Finally, in an interview with the BBC, Microsoft founder Bill Gates said “we find ourselves in uncharted territories” after the international community failed to properly prepare for a pandemic. Gates has emerged as a major critic of government responses, saying very few countries warrant “an A” grade for their coronavirus responses.

    Gates has also advocated a mandatory 10-week strict lockdown to eradicate the virus that would likely cause immense suffering among the poorest and most vulnerable among us.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 20:44

  • Lessons From the 1980 "Inflation" Virus: Transmission Chain Has To Be Broken For Successive Outcome
    Lessons From the 1980 "Inflation" Virus: Transmission Chain Has To Be Broken For Successive Outcome

    Submitted by Joseph Carson, former Chief Economist at Alliance Bernstein

    As difficult it was to decide to shut down large segments of the economy in order to contain coronavirus it will be even trickier to decide when to end the lockdown. News that the coronavirus curve (i.e., the number of cases) may be flattening will only intensify the pressure on government leaders to relax restrictions on work-life and travel, as well as social and recreational gatherings.

    There is a risk in removing government restrictions too early in a war against a virus. History shows it is essential that the “the chain of transmission” of the virus is severed as a second wave could prove to be even more damaging.

    In 1980, government-imposed credit restrictions to kill the “inflation” virus. At that time, “inflation” was labeled as public enemy number one much like coronavirus is viewed today.

    The decision to impose credit controls to attack the “inflation” virus literally “scared people away from the stores” (The Wall Street Journal, May 5, 1980) triggering the sharpest one-quarter decline in consumer spending in the post-war period.

    The National Bureau of Economic Research (NBER), the official arbiter of dating economic cycles peaks and trough, viewed the sudden drop in business activity to be so severe it announced that the economy was in recession even before the official GDP data showed an actual contraction. That surprising announcement by NBER compelled the federal government and the Federal Reserve to abruptly end the credit-control program, only 90 days after it was first implemented.

    Investors will be pleased to learn the removal of government restrictions on credit sparked a quick and powerful rebound in the economy. Real GDP posted back-to-back quarterly gains of nearly 8% annualized in Q4 1980 and Q1 1981. The entire decline in consumer spending and output loss of the short 6-month recession was recaptured.

    However, investors should be alarmed to learn the chain of transmission of the “inflation” virus was not severed. Instead it was alive and well, ready to resurface once the economy rebounded.

    The second wave of the “inflation” virus proved to be more damaging as it forced the Federal Reserve to implement broader and more stringent monetary constraints. A deeper and more protracted recession followed, lasting 18 months from the middle of 1981 to the end of 1982.

    Looking back on the 1980 experience economic and policy experts voiced concern that not enough was done early on to break the chain of transmission for the “inflation” virus.

    Federal Reserve Board Vice Chairman Frederick Schultz in testimony before Congress in late 1980 stated, “Now, with the benefit of 20/20 hindsight… I think there is a considerable risk that the underlying problems of the economy will be found to be even more intense once the period of credit controls has been ended…the quick-fix or the band-aid policy always looks attractive, but that is a cruel deception”. Mr. Schultz was right.

    2020 recession like that of the 1980 recession is similar in that both are government-made, linked to a “contagious” virus, and involve a sudden stop in the economy. The difference is that the 1980 recession involved an economic virus versus today’s medical one.

    As such, investors must realize the timing, scale and sustainability of any business rebound are not forecastable. Recovery depends on the coronavirus curve that has no economic properties and the success of medical science.

    At this point, it would be best for the government officials to follow science and let the data determine the timing of the “on” switch for the economy. The last thing anyone wants if to have a medical expert testify before Congress in 6 months (like that of Mr. Schultz in 1980) and say “wish we’d done something more in the spring” to break the transmission chain.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 20:30

  • NYT Deletes Tweet, Stealth-Edits Article After Excusing Biden Sexual Misconduct
    NYT Deletes Tweet, Stealth-Edits Article After Excusing Biden Sexual Misconduct

    The New York Times, which tried to sabotage Supreme Court Justice Brett Kavanaugh’s career with months of baseless #MeToo allegations – not only downplayed Joe Biden’s well-documented history of unwanted physical contact with women on Sunday, they cast extreme doubt on a detailed sexual assault allegation by former Biden staffer Tara Reade.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The original article, which can be seen in the Wayback Machine reads: “No other allegation about sexual assault surfaced in the course of reporting, nor did any former Biden staff members corroborate any details of Ms. Reade’s allegation. The Times found no pattern of sexual misconduct by Mr. Biden, beyond the hugs, kisses and touching that women previously said made them uncomfortable.

    Which they also tweeted, and have since deleted:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The current, stealth-edited version now reads: “No other allegation about sexual assault surfaced in the course of reporting, nor did any former Biden staff members corroborate any details of Ms. Reade’s allegation. The Times found no pattern of sexual misconduct by Mr. Biden.

    Reade filed a police report against Biden with the Washington D.C. police alleging that the former Vice President (and then Senator) forcibly penetrated her without consent in 1993. She does not reference Biden by name in the complaint, which the Biden campaign has strongly denied. 

    The Times, meanwhile, had the audacity to write: “Filing a false police report may be punishable by a fine and imprisonment.

    Look at how the Times framed Kavanaugh and his accuser, Christine Blasey Ford – whose allegations that Kavanaugh sexually assaulted her at a gathering in the mid 1980s were refuted by every single person at the party

    In short, “believe all women” unless they’re accusing a Democratic presidential candidate of sexual assault. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 20:05

  • For First Time Ever, All 50 US States Now Under Major Disaster Declaration At Same Time
    For First Time Ever, All 50 US States Now Under Major Disaster Declaration At Same Time

    Authored by Jack Phillips via The Epoch Times,

    President Donald Trump on Saturday approved a disaster declaration for Wyoming, meaning that all 50 states are under a major disaster declaration amid the CCP virus pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The declaration for the state comes about three weeks after the first disaster order in New York, the epicenter of the virus.

    Non-state territories including the U.S. Virgin Islands, the Northern Mariana Islands, Washington, Guam, and Puerto Rico are all under disaster declarations. The only one that isn’t under such a declaration is American Samoa.

    “Public Assistance Federal funding is available to the state, tribal and eligible local governments and certain private nonprofit organizations on a cost-sharing basis for emergency protective measures, including direct federal assistance under Public Assistance, for all areas in the state of Wyoming affected by COVID-19 at a federal cost share of 75 percent,” Trump’s declaration on Wyoming read.

    It’s the first time a president has ever declared a major disaster in all 50 states at the same time, said deputy press secretary Judd Deere.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “The President continues to respond to the needs of every Governor to protect the health of all Americans,” Deere wrote on Twitter on Saturday.

    Wyoming Gov. Mark Gordon sought the declaration last week in a letter to Trump.

    “Though Wyoming has not reached the dire situations of some states, this declaration will help us to prepare and mobilize resources when we need them,” Gordon said, according to news reports.

    The United States, meanwhile, has surpassed Italy on Saturday as the country with the most deaths related to the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus pandemic, according to a running tally from Johns Hopkins University.

    Despite the data, there have been indicators that the social distancing guidelines are working, said Trump on Friday.

    “Nationwide, the number of new cases per day is flattening substantially, suggesting that we are near the peak and our comprehensive strategy is working,” he said during a White House briefing.

    Trump added that he is now looking to create a taskforce that is comprised of doctors and business leaders aimed at reopening the U.S. economy.

    Health authorities have urged Americans to avoid close contact with one another, use good hand-washing hygiene, and not leave their homes as much as possible. Symptoms of the potentially fatal disease include fever, cough, and shortness of breath, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

    *  *  *

    Support The Epoch Times’ independent journalism and donate a ‘Coffee’ now.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 19:40

  • Turkey's Interior Minister Resigns Over Coronavirus Curfew Chaos, Erdogan Rejects Resignation
    Turkey's Interior Minister Resigns Over Coronavirus Curfew Chaos, Erdogan Rejects Resignation

    After cynically urging Syrian refugees toward coronavirus-hit Europe, Turkey’s Interior Minister Suleyman Soylu announced on Twitter on Sunday that he was resigning from his post over the chaotic implementation of a two-day curfew in major Turkish cities to tackle the coronavirus outbreak.

    The resignation followed Turkey’s announcement, late on Friday, of a weekend lockdown but in the brief time before it went into effect many people rushed out to buy food and drink in the country’s commercial hub Istanbul, a city of 16 million people, and other cities.

    “Although in a limited period of time, the incidents that occurred ahead of the implementation of the curfew was not befitting with the perfect management of the outbreak process,” Soylu said in his statement.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Soylu, who has held the post since August 2016, shortly after the failed staged coup against Erdogan, said the scenes that took place just following the declaration of the curfew on Friday night did not reflect a smooth implementation of policy. Soylu added that he had been proud to serve as interior minister and would remain loyal to Erdogan.

    The lockdown decision was taken with good intention and aimed at slowing the spread of coronavirus, he said. The lockdown ended at 2100 GMT on Sunday, prompting questions why it was started in the first place, as a 48 hour lock down achieves absolutely nothing.

    However, Soylu’s resignation was even shorter than Turkey’s curfew as just hours after the interior minister’s resignation announcement, President Erdogan rejected the resignation, sparking celebration among Turkey’s nationalists.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If his resignation had been accepted by President Erdogan, Soylu would have been the second Turkish minister to leave his post since the coronavirus pandemic was declared. Transport Minister Mehmet Cahit Turhan was removed two weeks ago after the ministry drew criticism for holding a tender amid the outbreak to prepare to build a huge canal on the edge of Istanbul.

    On Sunday, Turkey reported 97 more deaths related to the novel coronavirus, bringing the death toll to 1,198. The country also has nearly 57,000 confirmed cases since the first patient was diagnosed a little more than a month ago.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 19:30

  • When The World Stopped – Stunning Scenes From A Global Lockdown
    When The World Stopped – Stunning Scenes From A Global Lockdown

    Deaths breached the 100,000 mark on Friday, another grim milestone for the world engulfed in a pandemic. 

    More than a billion people across the world remain in quarantine as the global economy crashes into a depression in the second quarter. The OECD and WTO on Wednesday published two separate reports that both outline global economic activity has collapsed.

    The OECD Leading Indicators show the global economy experienced a sharp decline in the last month. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The WTO shows world trade has plunged well below 2008 levels. One word: unprecedented

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As a result of quarantines, unemployment claims have rocketed higher in nearly every major developed and emerging market economy. Tens of millions of people have been laid off as streets, highways, shopping districts, and manufacturing hubs have become lifeless. 

    While words can only describe so much of a world in lockdown, Bloomberg has published a handful of pictures illustrating what the world looks like after a month of pandemic: 

    New York City 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A lone pedestrian walks inside the Oculus, a transportation and shopping hub in Manhattan’s financial district on March 30. H/T Photographer Gabby Jones/Bloomberg

    Los Angeles

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The usually busy 110 freeway on April 1. H/T Photographer Patrick T. Fallon/Bloomberg

    Paris

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Arc de Triomphe looms over an empty Champs Elysees and its shuttered luxury retailers on April 4. H/T Photographer Cyril Marcilhacy/Bloomberg

    Milan

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Umbrellas outside closed cafes line a street leading to the Navigli canal system on April 8. Photographer H/T Francesca Volpi/Bloomberg

    Sao Paulo

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Municipal Market on April 8. H/T Photographer: Rodrigo Capote/Bloomberg

    Moscow

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Police patrol a deserted Red Square on April 2. H/T Photographer: Andrey Rudakov/Bloomberg

    Jerusalem

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Old City on March 29. H/T Photographer: Kobi Wolf/Bloomberg

    Istanbul

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An empty walkway inside the Grand Bazaar on March 25. H/T Photographer: Kerem Uzel/Bloomberg

    London

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Banners fly outside closed luxury boutiques on New Bond Street on April 9. H/T Photographer: Simon Dawson/Bloomberg

    Toronto

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Security guards are among the few people inside the Toronto Eaton Centre on March 25. H/T Photographer: Cole Burston/Bloomberg

    Madrid

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shuttered bars and tapas restaurants line a deserted street on March 16. H/T Photographer: Angel Navarrete/Bloomberg

    Mumbai

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Men sit inside the closed Crawford Market on March 25. H/T Photographer: Dhiraj Singh/Bloomberg

    Lisbon

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A pedestrian crosses a deserted street of usually crowded shops and cafes on March 22. H/T Photographer: Jose Sarmento Matos/Bloomberg

    It becomes evident that the world has ground to a halt in one of the fastest economic crashes ever. It remains to be seen if the recovery phase is V-shaped, U-shaped, or L-shaped. 

    More or less, we’re leaning towards an L-shaped recovery… 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 19:15

  • Weimar America, Here We Come! Virus Hysteria Adds $10 Trillion To The National Debt
    Weimar America, Here We Come! Virus Hysteria Adds $10 Trillion To The National Debt

    Authored by Mike Whitney via The Unz Review,

    There’s no doubt that the Coronavirus is a serious infection that can lead to severe illness or death. There’s also no doubt that ‘virus hysteria’ has been used for other purposes. Wall Street, for example, has used virus-panic to advance its own agenda and get another round of trillion dollar bailouts. In fact, it took less than a week to get the pushover congress to ram through a massive $2.2 trillion boondoggle without even one lousy congressman offering a peep of protest. That’s got to be some kind of record.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In 2008, at the peak of the financial crisis, Congress voted “No” to the $700 billion TARP bill. Some readers might recall how a number of GOP congressmen bravely banded together and flipped Wall Street “the bird”. That didn’t happen this time around. Even though the bill is three times bigger than the TARP ( $2.2 trillion), no one lifted a finger to stop it. Why?

    Fear, that’s why. Everyone in congress was scared to death that if they didn’t rush this debt-turd through the House pronto, the economy would collapse while tens of thousands of corpses would be stacking up in cities across the country. Of course the reason they believed this nonsense was because the goofy infectious disease experts confidently assured everyone that the body-count would be “in the hundreds of thousands if not millions.” Remember that fiction? The most recent estimate is somewhere in the neighborhood of 60,000 total. I don’t need to tell you that the difference between 60,000 and “millions” is a little more than a rounding-error.

    So we’ve had the wool pulled over our eyes, right? Not as bad as congress, but, all the same, we’ve been hoodwinked and we’ve been fleeced. And the people who have axes to grind have been very successful in taking advantage of the hysteria and promoting their own agendas. Maybe you’ve noticed the reemergence of creepy Bill Gates and the Vaccine Gestapo or NWO Henry Kissinger warning us that, “the world will never be the same after the coronavirus”.

    What do these people know that we don’t know? Doesn’t it all make you a bit suspicious? And when you see nonstop commercials on TV telling you to “wash your hands”or “keep your distance” or “stay inside” and, oh yeah, “We’re all in this together”, doesn’t it leave you scratching your head and wondering who the hell is orchestrating this virus-charade and what do they really have in mind for us unwashed masses??

    At least in the case of Wall Street, we know what they want. They want money and lots of it.

    Have you looked over the $2.2 trillion CARES bill that Trump just signed into law a couple weeks ago? It’s pretty grim reading, so I’ll save you the effort. Here’s a rough breakdown:

    $250 billion will go for the $1,200 checks that most of us will receive in a couple weeks.

    And $250 billion will be provided for extended unemployment insurance benefits.

    That’s $500 billion.

    Working people will get $500 billion while Wall Street and Corporate America will get 3 times that amount. ($1.7 trillion)

    And even that’s a mere fraction of the total sum because– hidden in the small print– is a section that allows the Fed to lever-up the base-capital by 10-to-1 ($450 billion to $4.5 trillion) which means the Fed can buy as many “toxic” bonds and garbage assets as it chooses.

    The Fed is turning itself into a hedge fund in order to buy the sludge that has accumulated on the balance sheets of corporations and financial institutions for the last decade.

    It’s another gigantic ripoff that’s being cleverly concealed behind the ridiculous coronavirus hype. It’s infuriating.

    So here’s the question:

    Do you think Congress knew that working people would only get a pittance while the bulk of the dough would go to Wall Street?

    It’s hard to say, but they certainly knew that the economy was cratering and that $500 billion wasn’t going to put much of a dent in a $20 trillion economy. In other words, even if everyone goes out and blows their measly $1,200 checks on Day 1, we’re still going to experience the sharpest economic contraction on record, a second Great Depression.

    Maybe they should have talked about that in congress before they voted for this trillion-dollar turkey? Maybe they should have thought a little more about how the money should be distributed: Should it go to the people who actually buy things, generate activity and produce growth, or to the parasite class that blows up the system every decade and drags the economy down a black hole? That seems like something you might want to know before you pass a multi-trillion dollar bill that’s supposed to fix the economy.

    It’s also worth noting that the $5.8 trillion is not nearly the total amount that Wall Street will eventually get. The Fed has already spent $2 trillion via its QE program (to shore up the dysfunctional repo market) and Fed chair Jay Powell announced on Thursday that another $2.3 trillion in loans and purchases would be used to buy municipal bonds, corporate bonds and loans to small businesses. The allocation for small businesses, which falls under the, Main Street Lending Program, has been widely touted as a sign of how much the Fed really cares about struggling Mom and Pop businesses that employ the majority of working Americans. But, once again, it’s a sham and a boondoggle. The program is on-track to get $600 billion funding of which the US Treasury will provide the base-capital of $75 billion. The rest will be levered-up by 9-to-1 by the Fed, which means it’s just more smoke and mirrors.

    What readers need to realize is that the Treasury has accepted the credit risk for all of the loans that default. In other words, the American people are now on the hook for 100% of all of the loans that go south, and there’s going to be alot of them because the banks have no reason to find creditworthy borrowers. They get a 5% cut off-the-top whether the loans blow up or not. And, that, my friend, is how you incentivize fraud which, as Bernie Sanders noted, “is Wall Street’s business model.”

    It also helps to explain why Trump has repeatedly rejected congressional oversight of the various bailout programs. He’s smart enough to know a good swindle when he sees one, and this one is a corker. The government is essentially waving trillions of dollars right under the noses of the world’s most ravenous hyenas expecting them not to act in character. But of course they will act in character and hundreds of billions of dollars will be siphoned off by scheming sharpies who figure out how game the system and turn the whole fiasco into another Wall Street looting operation. You can bet on it.

    So, what is the final tally?

    Well, according to Trump’s chief economic advisor, Larry Kudlow, the first bailout installment is $6.2 trillion (after the Fed ramps up the Treasury’s contribution of $450 billion.). Then there’s the $2.3 trillion in additional programs the Fed announced on Thursday. Finally, the Fed’s QE program adds another $2 trillion in bond purchases since September 17, when the repo market went haywire.

    Altogether, the total sum amounts to $10.5 trillion.

    You know what they say, “A trillion here, a trillion there, pretty soon you’re talking real money.”

    Of course, no one on Capitol Hill worries about trivialities like money because, “We’re the United States of America, and our dollar will always be King.” But there’s a fundamental flaw to this type of thinking. Yes, the dollar is the world’s reserve currency, but that’s a privilege that the US has greatly abused over the years, and it’s certainly not going to survive this latest wacky helicopter drop. No, I am not suggesting the US would ever default on its debt, that’s not going to happen. But, yes, I am suggesting that the US will have to repay its debts in a currency that has lost a significant amount of its value. You don’t have to be Einstein to figure out that you can’t willy-nilly print-up $10 or $20 trillion dollars without eroding the value of the currency. That’s a no-brainer. Central bankers around the world are now looking at their piles of USDs thinking, “Hmmm, maybe it’s time I traded some of these greenbacks in for a few yen, euros or even Swiss francs?”

    So how does this end? Can the Fed continue to write trillion dollar checks on an account that is already $23 trillion overdrawn? Will Central banks around the world continue to stockpile dollars when the Fed is printing them up faster than anyone can count? And what about China? How long before China realizes that US Treasuries are grossly overvalued, that US equities markets are unreformable, that the dollar is backed by nothing but red ink, and that Wall Street is the biggest and most corrupt cesspit on earth?

    Not long, I’d wager. So, how does this end? It ends in a flash of monetary debasement preceded by a violent and destabilizing currency crisis. It’s plain as the nose on your face. The Fed knows that when a nation’s sovereign debt exceeds 100% of GDP, “there’s almost no mathematical way to service that debt in real terms.” Well, the US passed that milestone way-back in 2019 before this latest drunken spending-spree even began. It’s safe to say, we’ve now entered the financial Twilight Zone, the Land of No Return. If we add the Fed’s bulging balance sheet to the final estimate, (after all, it’s just another shady Enron-type Special Purpose Vehicle) the national debt will be somewhere north of $33 trillion by year-end, which means that Uncle Sam will be the greatest credit risk on Planet Earth. Imagine how jaws will drop on the day that Moodys and Fitch slash the ratings on US Treasuries to Triple B “junk” status. That should turn a few heads.

    So what can we expect in the months to come?

    First, the economy is going to slip into a deflationary period as people get back to work and slowly resume their spending.

    But once demand picks up and the Fed’s liquidity starts to kick in, the economy will rebound sharply followed by steadily rising prices.

    That’s the red flag that will signal a weakening dollar.

    Similar to 1933, when Roosevelt took the U.S. off the gold standard and printed money like crazy, economic activity picked up but the value of the dollar dropped by 40%.

    A similar scenario seems likely here as well.

    Economist Lyn Alden Schwartzer summed it up like this in an article at Seeking Alpha:

    “One of the common debates is whether all of this debt, counteracted by a tremendous monetary expansion by the Federal Reserve in response, will cause a deflationary bust or an inflationary problem…..Fundamentally, evidence points to a period of deflation due to this global shutdown and demand destruction shock, likely followed in the coming years by rising inflation….

    In the coming years, the United States will be effectively printing money to fund large fiscal deficits, while also having a large current account deficit and negative net international investment position. This is one of the main variables for my view that the dollar will likely decrease in value relative to a basket of foreign currencies in the coming years….” (“Why This Is Unlike The Great Depression”, Seeking Alpha)

    So, after decades of lethal low interest rates, relentless meddling and gross regulatory malpractice, the Fed has led us to this final, fatal crossroads: Inflate or default.

    From the looks of things, the choice has already been made. Wiemar America, here we come!


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 18:50

  • "The Cut Is Just 4.3MMbpd"- Goldman Throws Up Over OPEC+ Deal, Sees Oil Dropping Back To $20
    "The Cut Is Just 4.3MMbpd"- Goldman Throws Up Over OPEC+ Deal, Sees Oil Dropping Back To $20

    Earlier today, when summarizing the terms of the “historic” OPEC+ cut, which was presented theatrically as a 10MMb/d 9.7MMb/d by OPEC+ and all the oil bulls (including Citi’s Ed Morse who may have been acting in his capacity as OPEC advisor instead of Citi commodity analyst, when he immediately raised his oil price target) we said “OPEC Reaches “Historic” Deal To Cut Oil Production As Mexico Wins “Mexican Standoff” With Saudis… But It’s Not Enough” because “in a world where there is now up to 36MMb/d less oil demand, the world’s oil producers have agreed to cut production by…  9.7MMb/d” and added that “the real cuts when ignoring accounting gimmicks, amount to just over 7mmb/d, still a record amount, but hardly enough to put an even modest dent in today’s massively oversupplied market.”

    As a reminder, this is what OPEC+ agreed on, with Mexico an outlier after winning the “Mexican standoff” with Saudi Arabia which would grant the country an exemption from the deal, in cutting just 6% of production, or 100Kb/d, instead of the 23% agreed by everyone else (whether they actually do cut production by 23% is an entirely different matter, now that everyone will feel slighted by the Mexican special treatment and look to cheat by maximizing their output, especially if the price of oil does not rebound).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With that in mind, moments ago Goldman’s commodity analyst Damien Couravalin published his latest OPEC+ deal post-mortem, in which he agreed with our take (and even title) and in a report titled “A historic yet insufficient cut”, he writes that “taking into account updated core-OPEC production guidance from April, this 9.7 mb/d “headline” deal represents a 12.4 mb/d cut from claimed  April OPEC+ production (given the Saudi, UAE, Kuwait ongoing surge) but an only 7.2 mb/d cut from 1Q20 average production levels.

    Precisely as we said 4 hours earlier.

    Doing the math, the Goldman analyst calculates that “the OPEC+ voluntary cut would only lead to an actual 4.3 mb/d reduction in production from 1Q20 levels” adding that “based on our updated oil balances, such OPEC+ voluntary cuts would still require an additional 4.1 mb/d cut in May  production at the binding storage capacity constraint” which means that “at the 35% compliance level outside of core-OPEC, the necessary production cuts need would need to be 0.5 mb/d larger.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, having been skeptical about the deal all along, Couravlin adds that “today’s agreement leaves the voluntary cuts as still too little and too late to avoid breaching storage capacity, ensuring that low oil prices force all producers to contribute to the market rebalancing” which prompts the Goldman analyst to reiterate his view that “inland crude prices will decline further in coming weeks as storage capacity becomes saturated and expect further weakness in WTI timespreads and crude prices in coming weeks, as already presaged on Friday, with downside risks to our short-term $20/bbl forecast.

    Judging by the swift and violent drop in oil once the market reopened at 600pm ET, following a very brief kneejerk move higher the market agrees.

    His full note is below:

    A historic yet insufficient cut

    OPEC+ members have agreed to cut production by a record large 9.7 mb/d from May 1. The agreement came after settling over a smaller contribution from Mexico of only 0.1 mb/d instead of the 0.4 mb/d initially planned. Taking into account updated core-OPEC production guidance from April, this 9.7 mb/d “headline” deal represents a 12.4 mb/d cut from claimed  April OPEC+ production (given the Saudi, UAE, Kuwait ongoing surge) but an only 7.2 mb/d cut from 1Q20 average production levels.

    G20 ministers appear to have also committed to output reductions, with headlines today of potentially 3.7 mb/d output cuts by the US, Brazil and Canada or even 5 mb/d mentioned on Friday. These are very unlikely to be voluntary cuts but instead set to occur over time and due to market forces (ie. low prices) given the significant geological and regulatory hurdles in reducing production (well illustrated by Mexico’s refusal to cut by a reported 0.4 mb/d following its 50% increase in upstream capex since 2018), with the Iranian minister adding that they could take a year. We therefore do not count these as voluntary cuts in our oil balance.

    Optimistically, assuming full compliance from core-OPEC and 50% compliance by all other participants already in May (vs. 35% achieved in Jan/Feb-19 despite the new cut being 8x larger), the OPEC+ voluntary cut would only lead to an actual 4.3 mb/d reduction in production from 1Q20 levels. Based on our updated oil balances, such OPEC+ voluntary cuts would still require an additional 4.1 mb/d cut in May production at the binding storage capacity constraint. At the 35% compliance level outside of core-OPEC, the necessary production cuts need would need to be 0.5 mb/d larger.

    Given the difficulty for most producers outside of core-OPEC to implement large cuts, today’s agreement leaves the voluntary cuts as still too little and too late to avoid breaching storage capacity, ensuring that low oil prices force all producers to contribute to the market rebalancing. Ultimately, this simply reflects that no voluntary cuts could be large enough to offset the 19 mb/d average April-May demand loss due to the coronavirus. We therefore reiterate our view that inland crude prices will decline further in coming weeks as storage capacity becomes saturated and expect further weakness in WTI timespreads and crude prices in coming weeks, as already presaged on Friday, with downside risks to our short-term $20/bbl forecast.

    The reduction in seaborne exports from OPEC+ producers will however likely lead Brent prices to outperform as the cut in seaborne exports (especially from the record April Saudi/UAE export program) will ease the pull on the global VLCC fleet, freeing vessels to be used for floating storage and capping freight rates. We therefore expect Brent prices to outperform WTI prices in coming weeks. The announcement of today’s cuts may also provide some support to long-dated prices as the expected price support later this year creates a disincentive for producers to add new hedges and instead likely incentivize them to monetize existing ones (a buying flow of forwards)

    Finally, Reuters reported that the IEA is set to announce this week oil purchases into SPR that would contribute towards effective oil output cuts. For example, a 2.5 mb/d SPR purchase announcement would help square the “20 mb/d cut” stated in the OPEC+ draft statement (pegging OPEC+ at 12.5 mb/d cut and G20 at 5 mb/d). Importantly, we do not view such SPR purchases as changing our supply-demand balance since we estimate that combined commercial and government storage capacity would be reached by late April, with 4 mb/d of production shut-ins required even before the OPEC+ deal starts. Such a high SPR purchase pace would further likely be logistically difficult as strategic reserves are designed for fast drawdowns not fills, and typically operate at high utilization levels with low spare capacity.

    For once, Goldman was right:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 18:46

  • Drone View Of Manhattan Under Lockdown, Now A Ghost Town
    Drone View Of Manhattan Under Lockdown, Now A Ghost Town

    The latest aerial view of Manhattan in lockdown is riveting. YouTube account Mingomatic flew a drone over the island on Sunday morning (April 12) and found a city straight out of I Am Legend. 

    The video starts with a broad view of Manhattan from the sky, then cuts to ground level scenes. The drone flies around some of the highest-trafficked areas, such as the Financial District, Grand Central Terminal, Rockefeller Center, Times Square, Radio City, and Chinatown, to only find just a couple of cars and less than a dozen people in the entire 5-minute video. The video ends with an impressive tilt shot of the New York Stock Exchange with no one on the street. 

    Lifeless Manhattan illustrated in ten images:

    Charging Bull: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    NYSE Exchange:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    West 50th Street: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    West 48th Street: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Grand Central Terminal:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chinatown: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Globe Sculpture at Columbus Circle: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rockefeller Center:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rainbow Room NBC Studios:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Empire State Building: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here are Mingomatic’s other impressive drone shots detailing how NYC and Jersey have transformed into ghost towns: 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 18:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 12th April 2020

  • What 'The Expanse' Tells Us About The COVID-19 Pandemic And Gain-Of-Function Research
    What ‘The Expanse’ Tells Us About The COVID-19 Pandemic And Gain-Of-Function Research

    Submitted by Harvard to the Big House

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An accessible YouTube summary of much of the report below below by a Professor of Neurobiology at the University of Pittsburgh’s Medical School is available here.

    “You can tell you’ve found a really interesting question when no one wants you to answer it.” 

    Over the past several months thousands of humans have lost their lives since COVID-19 kicked-off its killing spree in Wuhan, and barring an absolute miracle millions more all across the planet will join them in the months to come. Comparisons to the pandemic caused by the Spanish Flu earlier in the twentieth century abound, however one thing is clear: Whether due to globalization or to internal differences between the viruses, while the Spanish Flu was a slow-moving miasma that took years to unfurl across the globe, the Wuhan strain of coronavirus, COVID-19, has blanketed the entire planet in just a few months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Factories all across the planet have ground to a halt, stores are shuttered, tens of millions are quarantined across multiple continents, and supply chains are disintegrating.

    And oddly, even though there is nothing even beginning to approach conclusive evidence that COVID-19 was a naturally emergent strain that made its way out of an intermediate animal host and into humans, the general consensus in the media and the public seems to be that exploring its origins is something only done by people who’ve yet to buy that the Earth is in fact round and that we actually did land on the moon. And everyone seems to be okay with the fact that the scientists crowing the loudest about a natural origin, are the ones directly involved with the type of research that likely spawned this virus: Gain-of-function, or “dual-use” research that meant to push Nature past her limits, so that humans can harness her to create monsters that would never occur naturally.

    Why the concentrated push to marginalize anyone asking for conclusive proof about where COVID-19 came from? Who benefits?

    “We modified our science team to remove ethical restraints.”

    Back in 1977 a very peculiar disease began to sweep across Russia, and once scientists had isolated it they discovered it was a rather unique strain of the H1N1 Swine Flu. In the years that followed genetic analysis looking to determine where it might’ve come from found something rather odd: It was very similar to strains of H1N1 that hadn’t been in circulation for decades, and seemed to be the product of “sequential passage in an animal reservoir” which was determined by its vast genetic distance from any other present strain of flu, just like COVID-19 which also appears so distant from any related coronavirus that it’s been placed in its own clade, an isolated branch way out on its own in the viral family tree – meaning it’s the lone example of its kind, and doesn’t clump together with all the other known coronaviruses.

    At the time, the Soviet Union was employing tens of thousands of scientists designing every possible flavor of biological weapon, a rabidly immoral weapons program with a spotty safety record – pathogens were known to leak out of Soviet labs almost regularly. Which has happened at plenty of biological weapons labs since, but especially China’s, which have leaked the SARS virus four times just in recent years. And Soviet scientists were reported to bring dead research animals home for dinner, meat wasn’t exactly readily available in the USSR at that time, which parallels the reports of scientists in Wuhan smuggling dead lab animals out to sell for a few extra bucks on the street.

    Earlier in the 70’s prior to the leak, “the swine flu scare… [had] prompted the international community to reexamine their stocks of the latest previously circulating H1N1 strains to attempt to develop a vaccine,” which was seen to have increased the odds that someone, somewhere would make a mistake and leak an altered strain of the flu out of their lab. This increased pace of research mirrors recent times, when scientists have been investigating and trying to understand the supposedly impending threat posed by coronaviruses for years, capturing as many unique strains from the wild as they could, and mixing and matching their genomes in the lab.

    And so increased research into the H1N1 Swine Flu back in the 70’s eventually increased the odds that a mistake would happen enough that one did, and a leak occurred. Just as our current pandemic was preceded not only by years of research into coronaviruses everywhere from UNC to the Wuhan Institute of Virology’s Disease Engineering Technical Research Center, and have been accelerated by a massive international conference meant to study a potential pandemic caused by a hyper-virulent strain of coronavirus, Johns Hopkins’ Event 201. This was funded primarily by the World Economic Forum as well as the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, and notably occurred in October 2019, just weeks before the start of this outbreak of COVID-19.

    If leading up to 1977, the fact that increased research into strains of the flu were seen to increase the odds that an accidental leak would occur, why isn’t the same logic being applied to our pandemic today? Why is almost everyone today assuming that the increased pace of research means scientists in fact anticipated this outbreak instead of causing it?

    Wouldn’t an increased pace of research also increase the odds that a leak of a lab-modified coronavirus would occur just like an increased pace of research precipitated the leak of the H1N1 Swine Flu back then?

    “You give a monkey a stick, inevitably he’ll beat another monkey to death with it”

    Scientists have been directly altering and modifying viral genomes for at least the past twenty years, doing everything from building complete viruses from scratch, to tweaking them and then passing them through series of animal hosts to artificially speed selection and evolution along so that they’re able have as many different strains of virus with as many novel features as possible to tinker with.

    However most of this work didn’t really raise too many eyebrows, until about ten years ago when scientists in Stony Brook, NY – not coincidentally also the first place to build a DNA-virus from scratch – took the H5N1 Bird Flu, tweaked its genome in two places, and then passed it through a series of ferret hosts in the lab until it became airborne. This sort of research, a minor alteration and then passage through ferrets, did two things: Resulted in a virus that would look natural and wouldn’t appear to have been directly genetically altered, and also created a virus that was way out on its own branch of the viral family tree since those sequential passages added generations far faster than they’d naturally occur in the wild. If that sounds familiar, maybe that’s because those traits are also exactly what’s found with COVID-19.

    And as far back as 2015, Chinese labs were reported to have been involved with dual-use gain-of-function research, swapping around viral genomes in the lab to try to create the most virulent strain possible. Additionally, studies examining COVID-19’s infectivity in ferrets found that it spreads readily among them, and also appears airborne in that animal model, lending support to the idea that ferrets were used for serial passage. Further support for possibility that serial passage through lab animals played a role in the creation of COVID-19 comes from an April 2020 pre-print, which found that it binds with ferrets cells more tightly than any other species except the tree shrew, which only scored about 2% higher. Tree shrews have also been used for serial viral passage, and were promoted in a 2018 paper out of China as a preferable host for laboratory serial passage since they’re cheaper, smaller, easier to handle, and closer to humans evolutionarily and physiologically than ferrets.  Pangolins however, formed a much weaker bond than either, and were clustered way down on the list along with a handful of other much more unlikely intermediate animal hosts.

    Quite curiously, one of the scientists supporting this troubling research in an article that noted the virus “could change history if it was ever set free” appeared on Joe Rogan’s podcast in 2020 a few weeks into the current pandemic, claiming that COVID-19 was definitely natural and making no mention of this animal-based dual-use gain-of-function research at all. Odd, right? It’s almost like Michael Osterholm, whose entire career rests on advancing gain-of-function of research, might want to whitewash what’s really going on? Did that sunshine tickle when it was being blown up your ass, Joe?

    Osterholm failed to tell the story of this genetically modified H5N1 Bird Flu, which was turned into a virus that “could make the deadly 1918 pandemic look like a pesky cold.” This result was so troubling that the NIH, which had funded the research, tried to make sure that the it would only be published after enough details were taken out to make replication of the experiment tough to perform. However one of the virologists involved in the research thought these restrictions were a bit silly, since the gist of the experiment was enough to allow anyone with enough money to replicate them without a problem. Especially researchers who were already familiar with manipulating bat coronaviruses, two of whom learned how to do exactly that at UNC in 2015 before returning to Wuhan to continue their work.

    A few years later the NIH would ban this dual-use “gain-of-function” research, a ban that would remain in place from 2014 until 2017, when it was lifted. And what was the reasoning behind lifting the ban? To allow for research on flu viruses, as well as SARS and MERS – coronaviruses just like our new friend, COVID-19. And so hundreds of millions of dollars of funding poured into research on these viruses, supposedly with oversight meant to reduce “the potential to create, transfer, or use an enhanced potential pandemic pathogen.”

    Turns out, that oversight might not have worked out too well, witnessed by the thousands who have already died from COVID-19.

    “But it is only a machine. It doesn’t think. It follows instructions. If we learn how to alter that programming, then we become the architects of that change.”

    And so since 2017 the floodgates have been opened, and money has poured in to fund gain-of-function research on coronaviruses, and they’ve been seen as everything as as potential base to create an HIV-vaccine from, to being able to help scientists in their mission to create a universal vaccine against the flu and common cold. Unsurprisingly, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, which helped bankroll Event 201, has also poured millions and millions of dollars into the search for a vaccine against HIV, much of which is centered around harnessing coronaviruses.

    Gate’s previous forays into vaccination programs haven’t always gone so well, in 2009 a Gates-sponsored HPV vaccine from Merck caused severe side effects among hundreds of the girls it was administered to, ultimately killing seven of them. In addition to the faulty science behind this vaccine program, was evidence that the majority of patients had no idea what they were signing up for, but were pushed through into treatment anyways. More unethical behavior was reported in the Gates-funded MenAfriVac campaign in Chad, which between 50 and 500 children vaccinated for meningitis were reported to develop paralysis, leading a South African newspaper to announce that “we are guinea pigs for the drug-makers.” And there are a scattershot of other accounts covering possible malfeasance by Gates-funded vaccination programs all across the globe. So not that Bill Gates is personally punching little kids in the face, but that his well-meaning funding may end up in a lot of the wrong places in the blind pursuit for results, providing financing for very shady and entirely unethical practices.

    Pointing out the funding from their foundation isn’t meant to demonize the Gates family, only to begin to build the idea that accountability does’t lie with the scientists in Wuhan alone, or the Chinese Communist Party for trying to cover-up the beginning of the pandemic. And to point out that nothing about being a computer scientist or a businessman has anything to do with public health policy, or the scientific and social implications around gain-of-function research. Why the NIH allowed this really obvious Pandora’s Box to be reopened in the first place deserves to be answered, and the organizations funding this research should carry much of the blame as well.

    Bill Gates might want to be an effective philanthropist really bad, and he may have been amazing at designing computer software and undercutting his competition – however that doesn’t a philanthropist make. After all, beyond the questionable tactics practiced by many of the vaccination programs he’s funded, his very well-intentioned attempt to save lives by providing  insecticidal mosquito-nets was ultimately destructive: many of the villagers provided with the mosquito-nets decided they were better used as fishing-nets, resulting in food shortages due to over-fishing from the fact the nets smaller weave caught far too many juvenile fish, undercutting population growth.

    Seemed like a good idea at the time, right?

    “Distributed responsibility is the problem. One person gives the order, another carries it out. One can say they didn’t pull the trigger, the other that they were just doing what they were told, and everyone lets themselves off the hook.”

    Far more sinister than the Gates Foundation funding dual-use gain-of-function research is the involvement of scientists hoping exclusively to bankroll their own companies through this kind of work. 

    While The Expanse had Jules-Pierre Mao, a scientist-CEO who used his private company to hybridize the protomolecule – a mysterious apparently alien substance that seems to have a mind of its own – with humans to create unstoppable biological weapons, today we have Peter Daszak.  His company, EcoHealth Alliance, which is a non-profit that depends largely on multi-million dollar government grants to function, has been partnering with Chinese researcher for years in an attempt to secure funding for more and more research into coronaviruses. At least they’re not really even pretending to be philanthropic.

    And in one of the more transparent attempts at blatant PR-spin, Daszak was featured alongside one of the researchers who learned how to create hyper-virulent bat coronaviruses at UNC back in 2015, Zhengli Shi. Their article insists we should take Zhengli at her word when she claims to have not found a match after she checked COVID-19’s genome against everything in her lab. As if someone responsible for releasing the most virulent pathogen to hit humanity in modern history, one that’s already killed thousands and is projected to kill millions and millions more all across the globe, would simply fess-up to it, torpedoing her career and the years of research performed by her and her colleagues? And possibly opening all of them up to legal and other repercussions?

    If you still aren’t sure whether the scientists involved with kind of research are being forthright, there’s Dr. Ralph Baric. It was in his lab at UNC that a hyper-virulent bat Franken-virus was created by splicing a new protein-spike on an existing coronavirus, creating a monster so vicious that a virologist with the Louis Pasteur Institute of Paris warned: If the [new] virus escaped, nobody could predict the trajectory.” It should also be noted that several years prior to tinkering directly with bat coronavirus spike-proteins, Baric orchestrated research that involved isolating a coronavirus from civets and then passing it through mammalian ACE2 receptor cells that were grown in the lab from kidney and brain samples – serial passage through host cell lines instead of entire hosts, which imparted a strong affinity for ACE2, and presumably created an airborne strain of coronavirus. And if cells derived from kidneys and brains were used for the serial passage development of COVID-19, that might help explain its affinity for attacking the kidneys and brains of its human hosts.

    So if he was being honest, you might expect him to warn the public about the lethal potential coronaviruses pose during our current outbreak. However, when he was asked if the public should be worried about COVID-19 he said that people should be more worried about the seasonal flu. Pretty bizarre statement from a scientist who knew full well how dangerous coronaviruses could be, especially given the fact that not only was Zhengli Shi working in his lab on that project in 2015, but Xing-Yi Ge was too. Both of whom returned to Wuhan where they’ve continued their work for years.

    Xing-Yi Ge is especially notable since in 2013 he became the very first scientist to isolate a bat coronavirus from nature that uses the ACE2 receptor, which is found in human, tree shrew, and ferret lungs and allows coronaviruses to become airborne. And as you might have learned by now, that’s the exact receptor used by COVID-19 to enter human cells – if anyone would know how to finagle that part of the coronavirus genome, it’d be him. So both Xing-Yi Ge and Zhengli Shi were part of the research team that created this hybridized hyper-virulent bat coronavirus under Baric, who’s actively downplayed the risk posed by COVID-19, and then returned to work in Wuhan, where funding provided in part by Daszak’s company allowed them to continue their work on coronaviruses with plenty of research to cut-and-paste into their work at the Wuhan Institute of Virology’s Disease Engineering Technical Research Center.

    And as Dr. Ian Malcolm puts it in Jurassic Park, it is never a good idea to futz around with science and research when you don’t fully understand it, nor its possible implications.

    However it wasn’t just Daszak funding their work, Zhengli also secured millions of dollars in grant money from various American institutions including our Department of Defense as well as the U.S. Biological Defense Research Directorate, and millions more from other foreign governments.

    So although the Chinese Communist Party deserves its share of the blame for attempting to cover the outbreak up, arresting the heroic scientists trying to warn us and issuing gag-orders and the destruction of evidence, this research likely wouldn’t have occurred at all if the NIH hadn’t lifted the ban on gain-of-function research in the first place. And it was funded directly by American tax dollars, by government officials willing to let others play god at their behest.

    But now that the virus is out of the lab, are the private entities responsible for its creation going to bear any of the blame at all? Or will America and China continue to point fingers at each other until the worst happens?

    “Mars will accuse Earth of using a bio-weapon. Earth will claim it was Mars. The Belt will blame the other two. It’s a good way to start a war and cover it up.”

    One last spoiler warning… okay, so in The Expanse the central plot device pushing things forward is the discovery of a mysterious substance dubbed the protomolecule, which seems to have a mind of its own and seek out radiation as sustenance before then beginning “the Work,” a mysterious intergalactic goal that isn’t revealed until later seasons.

    And its not individual nations who first attempt to harness the protomolecule, but their Peter Daszak, the aforementioned scientist and CEO named Jules-Pierre Mao, who attempts to weave it into the genomes of immuno-compromised children to create hybridized super-soldiers. Not for his own private army, but as a game-changing bio-weapon he’ll sell to whichever government is willing to pay the most for it. So in The Expanse, it takes amoral scientists as well as the collusion of officials affiliated with both governments for this research to happen and be hidden, and when these Hybrids are eventually dropped between both armies the carnage is immense.

    Luckily, we haven’t gotten that far on earth yet, but the rhetoric between America and China has been heading in that direction – it’s been growing increasingly hostile as each blames the other for starting the pandemic and covering it up, with China even going so far as to threaten to cut off our supply of antibiotics and other life-saving medical goods.  Meanwhile Daszak, Baric, Zhengli, and others sit back counting their lucky stars and their money, since both governments and the public at large seem to have bought their story that there’s no way this virus leaked out of one of their labs, and every government on earth now wants to harness their research to help create vaccines and treatments.

    And these researchers have been assisted by scientifically spurious and journalistically vacuous articles which mindlessly regurgitate claims from the Chinese government, and its scientific propaganda arm, the WHO, about how bad the outbreak was in the past and how contained it is now. As the Chinese government arrested whistle-blowers and sent agents out into the street in bio-hazard gear while carrying automatic weapons to detain anyone suspected of breaking quarantine, while literally welding apartments buildings shut, the American media fawned over China’s “decisive and heroic” actions.

    Please take a moment to consider the fact that almost everyone reading the news to you on television was selected due to their connections or how photogenic they are, not because of any actual journalistic chops or ability to think critically.

    So as two superpowers are pushed closer and closer to conflict, the research that’s almost certainly the source of COVID-19 not only continues unabated, but if anything talk of more funding to stop this sort of supposedly natural pandemic from happening again is pouring into the pockets of the people who, if they weren’t directly responsible, should certainly have been at the forefront of warning the world about the risks posed by lab-altered coronaviruses, and been disclosing the existence of this sort of research in the first place.

    Oddly, each and everyone one of them is pretending that viral dual-use gain-of-function research has never occurred at all. Or not so oddly, when you stop and think about how much they have to lose if their role in this pandemic is revealed.

    “The hardest part of this game is figuring out who the enemy really is.”

    Other than the fact it doesn’t bear the direct marks of genetic tampering, just like the engineered hyper-virulent H5N1 Bird Flu, there’s literally nothing natural about COVID-19’s behavior or clinical presentation. And hauntingly, peer-reviewed research has noted that a crucial region of its genome “may provide a gain-of-function… for efficient spreading in the human population.”

    Not only is it so distant from any other coronavirus that it forms its own clade, but there isn’t even a natural path for it to have emerged through – assertions about pangolins have always been dubious at best, but were even further debunked when analysis of COVID-19’s genome at the regions that most accurately show heritage made it “very unlikely” that pangolins had ever been involved at all.

    Beyond that is the fact that its affinity for the ACE2 receptor is somewhere between 10 and 20 times higher than SARS, and it also creates viral loads thousands of times higher than SARS. These two characteristics point towards COVID-19 using antibody-dependent enhancement, or ADE, to enter human cells. This is when the virus is able to hijack white blood cells to more easily enter into the rest of our body’s cells, allowing it to seep deep into its hosts’ nervous systems, creating permanent neurological damage in the hosts it doesn’t kill outright. ADE could also explain why between 5% and 10% of once “recovered” patients in Wuhan have been showing up with fresh infections, since that phenomenon allows a virus to hijack the antibodies created by a previous infection to re-attack an old host. And curiously Zhengli Shi, of UNC and Wuhan fame, co-authored a 2019 paper which used inert viral shells to figure out exactly how SARS, with its affinity to the ACE2 receptor just like COVID-19, was able to harness ADE to hijack white blood cells for enhanced cell entry. A gain-of-function extension of this research would be exactly the kind of experiment that could’ve given birth to COVID-19, especially considering that 2019 paper managed to fine-tune the exact concentration of antibodies that would best facilitate ADE.

    Both HIV and Dengue Fever use antibody-dependent enhancement to boost their virulence, however its generally a phenomenon that takes a long time to occur when it happens in nature. However COVID-19 looks like it may have had its ADE jacked into hyper-drive as it was passed between a series of animal hosts, since it has the aforementioned much stronger ability to bind to host cells and creates viral loads orders of magnitude higher, and also appears to immediately to be able to enter its hosts nervous systems, killing many of its victims by attacking the region of the brain that controls breathing, drastically lowering white blood cell counts early on in infections, and apparently re-infecting individuals who had already appeared to clear their infection.

    Further increasing the possibility that COVID-19’s unique clinical presentation may be due to its ADE being juiced by laboratory engineering are the observations from an ER doctor who’s stated that I have seen things that I have never seen before… I have witnessed medical phenomenon that just don’t make sense in the context of treating a disease that is supposed to be viral pneumonia. In an interview with Medscape, Dr. Cameron Kyle-Sidell went on to say that the closest thing to the symptoms he was witnessing in his emergency room.

    Nothing about COVID-19’s clinical presentation is typical, including the fact that in many patients the first sign of infection seems to be losing your senses of smell and taste without any other symptoms, something no other virus on earth is known to do to otherwise asymptomatic patients – but which could possibly be due to artificially enhanced ADE immediately gaining entry into those nerve cells and frying them. Further increasing the possibility that COVID-19’s unique clinical presentation may be due to its ADE being juiced by laboratory engineering, are the observations from an ER doctor who’s stated that “I have seen things that I have never seen before… I have witnessed medical phenomenon that just don’t make sense in the context of treating a disease that is supposed to be viral pneumonia.” In an interview with Medscape, Dr. Cameron Kyle-Sidell went on to say that the closest thing to the symptoms he was witnessing in his emergency room were those created by altitude sickness.

    This condition occurs when the organs that sense the level of oxygen concentration in the air you breathe notice that level decreasing, and begin a cascade of physiological changes that, as the COVID-19 patients horrifically showcase, can quickly turn deadly when they throw your body’s balance out of wack. And since these organs are found in your neck right next to your carotid arteries, it is well within the realm of possibility that after frying the nerve cells that control smell and taste, that if the viral load is large enough, that the infection may eventually move into these organs and fry them too – tricking your nervous system into miscommunicating the concentration of oxygen in the environment, and scrambling the same system that’s used when your body is subjected to the lowered oxygen levels that occur at high altitude to possibly trick your body into producing fewer red blood cells.

    Additionally, an unnaturally juiced-up ability to use ADE would also explain what other front-line medical workers are observing in their patients: “I’m seeing people who look relatively healthy with a minimal health history, and they are completely wiped out, like they’ve been hit by a truck. This is knocking out what should be perfectly fit, healthy people. Patients will be on minimal support, on a little bit of oxygen, and then all of a sudden, they go into complete respiratory arrest, shut down and can’t breathe at all… That seems to be what happens to a lot of these patients: They suddenly become unresponsive or go into respiratory failure.” This sort of sudden precipitous decline is exactly what would be expected if COVID-19’s ability to use ADE had been accentuated in the lab, and would also explain the clinical observations that “this severity of [acute respiratory distress] is usually more typical of someone who has a near drowning experience — they have a bunch of dirty water in their lungs — or people who inhale caustic gas. Especially for it to have such an acute onset like that. I’ve never seen a microorganism or an infectious process cause such acute damage to the lungs so rapidly. That was what really shocked me.”

    And also the following horrific account: “Holy shit, this is not the flu. Watching this relatively young guy, gasping for air, pink frothy secretions coming out of his tube and out of his mouth. The ventilator should have been doing the work of breathing but he was still gasping for air, moving his mouth, moving his body, struggling. We had to restrain him. With all the coronavirus patients, we’ve had to restrain them. They really hyperventilate, really struggle to breathe. When you’re in that mindstate of struggling to breathe and delirious with fever, you don’t know when someone is trying to help you, so you’ll try to rip the breathing tube out because you feel it is choking you, but you are drowning.”

    No one knows exactly how many people have died in Wuhan, where in January and February crematoriums were running 24/7 when they’d typically only be operational for four hours a day and five days a week, but one apparent pattern is that the longer the virus was allowed to circulate and spit off new variants, the more lethal it became. Further evidence that far more lives were lost in Wuhan than the Chinese government is disclosing is provided by the fact that some 21 million cell phone users have somehow fallen of the map in China, as well as the long lines witnessed to collect loved ones’ ashes in Wuhan, which alone is reported to have had some 45,000 cremations. So this high lethality may be due in part to the multiple variants that had time to circulate in Wuhan, a hallmark of ADE since each subsequent variant is able to escape detection by our immune systems while still hijacking our white blood cells to increase its virulence.

    And unsurprisingly, neither ADE nor the possibility that COVID-19 could be a product of dual-use gain-of-function serial animal passage has been mentioned on television by the virologists most likely to be able to identify these phenomena, meaning our front-line medical responders are being blindsided by a virus that’s not behaving like anything natural, like anything they’ve ever seen.

    Even more indicative of an unnatural origin is the fact that the process of a virus transferring from one species to another, called a zoonotic jump, follows a well-established pattern in the literature. For a virus to fully jump into a new species, several months if not years are required for the process to complete. First a variant of the virus infects one new host, an infection that will fizzle out the first time it happens since there’s no way for a virus to be immediately adapted to a novel host species. But with continued exposure, more individual infections occur, some of which produce slightly mutated variants more adapted to the biology of the new host species, until eventually a variant wins the selective virulent lottery and is able to spread easily among its new host population, killing and reproducing as it goes.

    And yet research published in 2018 found that only two-point-seven percent of villagers living about a kilometer from local bat-caves carried any evidence of past bat coronavirus infections. That study happened to examine people living in Wuhan as well, and found absolutely zero evidence of previous bat coronavirus infection at all there, making it all-but-impossible that zoonotic jumping occurred since earlier less-lethal variants of the virus would have left a wide signature in its new host population. Instead, COVID-19 emerged out of nowhere, or more likely just out of a local lab, and was immediately extraordinarily well-adapted to humans – spreading through the air with ease, killing as it went. Plus there’s the fact that all the initial victims were infected with the same variant, if a natural zoonotic jump had occurred, multiple different variants would inevitably have been found at the start of an outbreak.

    And so as our titular quote alludes to, although its certainly possible to train a monkey to warm up a frozen burrito in a microwave, it’s pretty damn unlikely that a wild monkey that’d never been in contact with humans before could be presented with a frozen burrito and a microwave, and figure out to heat up a snack.

    In the same way, everything about the way COVID-19 interacts with its human hosts and spreads among them indicates that it’s been artificially trained to be familiar with human biology – bizarrely blocking our senses of smell and taste before doing anything else, spreading readily among asymptomatic patients and then infecting and killing us with far more efficiency than any natural emergent virus at the start of its outbreak, and first emerging without taking any of the steps necessary to naturally perform a zoonotic jump into humans.

    At some point in the next few weeks, Americans will literally be dropping dead in the streets, collapsing curbside as they already have in China, Italy, and Iran.

    And while the people on your television will be parroting whatever their corporate parents tell them to, and while the scientists intimately involved in this kind of research preen as “having told you so” about the threat coronaviruses pose instead of informing the public about how truly grave the threat we face is – millions will die, and the work that caused this pandemic will continue at an accelerating pace as funding for gain-of-function research pours in.

    “Nothing ever killed more people than being afraid to look like a sissy.”

    As we’re quite fond of saying, America is a free country. And without sensible federal guidance, and with our pandemic response team being undermined by economic advisers and relatives with only the vaguest grasp of how science works,let alone epidemiology, we are very quickly approaching what might be our last inflection point.

    While the Olympics have been postponed for the first time in modern history and other nations from New Zealand to France lock-down entirely for at least the coming several weeks, Americans haven’t been convinced not to crowd into public places and public transportation. Supposedly, prayer, toughness, and the American Spirit are going to work as effective anti-viral treatments.

    So by the time the public and our officials collectively realize that COVID-19 has no intention of behaving anything close to like the flu does, or like any natural virus ever has, and that our front-line healthcare workers have been effectively battling a biological weapon for weeks, the deaths of millions more Americans will already be inevitable.

    The current push to get the economy back on track leads only to human carnage, rushing back into the virus’s maws can’t possibly lead anywhere good. Slowing down to get the full picture of what’s going on is apparently off the table, as is any sort of reasoned discussion about how to save the most lives while still being able to keep the economy in stasis until the pandemic is under control. And so America will be forever changed by this pandemic, as our once-trusted institutions lead us directly to slaughter.

    Rushing into danger has never ended well. After all, it’s always the doors and corners where they get you.

    “Sometimes it takes a few monsters to get back on track.”

    Sign the petition to end gain-of-function research here.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/12/2020 – 00:00

  • Rich Chileans Scolded For Easter Bugouts To Coastal Compounds
    Rich Chileans Scolded For Easter Bugouts To Coastal Compounds

    While Chilean Interior Minister Gonzalo Blumel told citizens on Thursday of their “moral duty” to stay home during the Easter holiday, wealthy residents of Santiago reportedly traveled via private plane and helicopter to their costal enclaves, according to SCMP.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A view of Robinson Crusoe Island, off the coast of Chile, one of the remote locations that have been quarantined to curb the spread of COVID-19.

    The country currently has over 6,500 confirmed cases of coronavirus – one of the highest in Latin America. Some of the hardest-hit regions in the country are in high-end neighborhoods in the capital of Santiago – a city of 6 million at the foot of the Andes Mountains, according to the report.

    Quarantine measures in many of those normally bustling communities require residents to shelter in place.

    Chilean health officials said earlier this week they planned to cordon off the city, setting up road checkpoints manned by police and military, to prevent city dwellers from fleeing to second homes in rural areas at the risk of spreading the virus. –SCMP

    Despite the lockdown, Santiago Mayor Felipe Guevara told state television “that people are using their own or leased helicopter or aircraft to leave the metropolitan region for their second home.”

    He added that aviation officials would now ask ‘tough questions’ of any pilot trying to leave the city.

    “What is going to be tested this weekend is how responsible, how supportive, we are as Chileans,” said Interior Minister Blumel in a televised statement ahead of the holiday.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 23:35

  • Welcome To India's Hunger Games
    Welcome To India’s Hunger Games

    Authored by Jayant Bhandari via LewRockwell./com,

    While the world over people have grown myopic worrying about the real or imagined problem to do with corona-virus in their immediate surroundings, the world’s biggest prison has been erected.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    1.38 billion people are in a complete house-arrest, with no possibility of leaving home. In scale, this is by far the first in human history.

    I am not talking about China. When faced with the first wave of corona-virus, China focused mostly on Wuhan and other hotspots. It didn’t see a need to lockdown the whole country. Moreover, it didn’t think it could get away with that.

    Any regime that contemplated locking down the whole country would have realized that not only would it create massive disruption, joblessness, poverty, and dislocation, but also that restarting the economy would be a gargantuan job. Farmers would have found themselves with no money to buy seeds and banks with no cash to lend out, and everyone in a vicious economic cycle.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    India’s Prime Minister, Narendra Modi, however, thought that he could enforce a draconian curfew without any legal backing in what is one of the world’s most undisciplined, chaotic, poverty-stricken and backward societies.

    Modi’s confidence comes from an extraordinary cult following he has developed, very ironically, centered on the educated Middle-Class Indians, who are well-stocked with beer, chips, and Netflix connections.

    On 24th March 2020, the Indian Prime Minister came on the Television to declare that starting four hours thereon would be a complete and total lockdown everywhere in the country for the next 21 days. He instructed that people were not to leave the door of their homes, go out for walks or walk their dogs, and that all offices, factories, shops, etc. had to be shut entirely. All the highways and roads were to be blocked. One of the biggest train networks came to a sudden standstill for the first time in its history of 167 years. Trains stopped wherever they were when the lockdown started, leaving passengers stranded. Every single flight, domestic as well as international, was canceled.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The whole of India went into a curfew.

    The only part of the economy that was to be still open were medicine shops and grocery stores. Of course, Modi’s advisers and speechwriters, all of who are yes-men, had forgotten to consider how people would buy food if they could not leave home. Those who went to buy groceries were ruthlessly beaten by the police, who knew well that despite the constitution, courts would ignore the brutalities. A couple of days later when the government realized their mistake, a window to let people go out to buy groceries was opened up. The police had by then already put itself in the image of an invading army, which gives itself the right to rape and pillage the enemy without any restrictions or accountability—people who went shopping kept on getting beaten up.

    Alas, Indians accept beatings without any resistance, videos of which are now all over the social media, the reason why I am sure that India never fought with the British for independence. The British left in moral disgust.

    This curfew announcement was becoming a replay of the demonetization that happened in 2016 when after the initial announcement, the government realized that they had forgotten to think through simple issues, something a school project-group would have taken care of. Every single day since the lockdown, a new directive has been coming, increasing oppression and tightening the curfew.

    A few days later, grocery shops were asked to reduce their opening hours. Thereafter, they were asked to close down completely. In my area, vegetables were to be supplied only by government vans, which conveniently came for a day or two and then disappeared. Realizing that the government was too incompetent, they allowed private grocers to start opening again. But there wasn’t much food. They had killed the supply chain by stopping road traffic. In rural places, prices of food prices have fallen precipitously. In the urban areas, it has gone up by as much as 500%, if you can find it.

    That night of Modi’s announcement, everyone was stranded wherever they were. The country came to a screeching standstill.

    Tens of millions of daily-wage migrant workers got stuck in cities. Their landlords knowing fully well that the workers were no longer earning threw them out. Modi should have known that “empathy” and “compassion” are foreign words for Indians.

    Hungry and homeless, the migrant workers and those stuck at wrong places, despite getting beaten up by the police, decided not to care, got into a full fatalistic mode, and started their long march to their rural places, in many cases walking a thousand kilometers. Scores of people died. On the way, the police took out their sadism on them. The policeman is from the same lower-class bracket and enjoys his domination over them, a feeling of satisfaction he derives from looking down at those he thinks he has left behind.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If corona-virus is indeed a problem, Modi had spread it from cities to rural places.

    Modi has taken very simplistically very badly thought-through decisions. Moreover, there are layers and layers of known, unknown, seen, and unseen issues of entangled complexity in such a large country, issues which no one could have thought of. The only solution to dealing with any problem that emerge will be more oppression.

    Indian GDP per capita per year is US$2,338. Except for a tiny minority of people, say, less than 10% of the population, Indians are forever at the edge of starvation. Depending on how you look at it, between 500 million to over a billion people live from hand to mouth.

    I thought the lockdown would fail in a couple of days. It has now lasted for almost two weeks.

    The police, political parties, etc. are releasing a stream of photos and videos of the “charity” work they are doing, advertising their fake compassion on the back of humiliating those who accept the food. The food is only going to the local voters in urban areas, a minority of the distressed population.

    There is no mechanism or food available with the government to feed all these people, even if the bureaucrats didn’t siphon off everything. Hundreds of millions of Indians are currently starving.

    What interests Modi and the Indian Middle Class is not starvation deaths, but as low a count of corona-virus deaths as possible. He wants to be seen as a world leader. And the Middle Class desperately seeking an identity in the world wants India to be recognized.

    Given the lockdown, the media, which is servile anyway, lacks access to information. And Modi has passed an order that anyone reporting “misinformation”, which of course is dependent on the interpretation of the bureaucracy, will face long prison sentences.

    Even by the most pessimistic scenario to do with corona-virus, had no lockdown been imposed, the harm could not have been worse. So why did the government concoct an idea that was going to end up with horrible consequences?

    There is a method to this madness. Evil is banal. Modi operates on two simple principles. He wants to cater to the emotional demands of the Middle Class, who want to feel vicariously virtuous and safe on the back of the vast poverty-stricken population of India.

    In a very twisted caste-based thinking, while those in the Middle Class claim not to know of or believe in the caste system, they haven’t the slightest care or interest in the well-being of their chauffeurs, maids, and servants. They certainly have no comprehension of the existence of the migrant workers and the majority of the Indian population that lives in rural areas. They drive past them without seeing them.

    Those among the poor people who find a slight way out of poverty, as is the case with the police, are more vicious towards the poor.

    When the lockdown is over or falls apart, hundreds of millions of hungry, sick, tired, jobless people will emerge out of their over-crowded, claustrophobic slum houses. Indian economy will find it impossible to kickstart. Crime, human trafficking, abuses, and exploitation will sky-rocket. The virtue-signaling Middle Class, who will have enjoyed their salaries while being at home during the lockdown, will soon realize that their companies are bankrupt. In a country where no one thinks deeply, they will fail to connect the dots.

    India will be a volatile country, economically and politically. As the situation matures over the next few weeks and months, India will increasingly become a police state, doing more wrongs to correct prior wrongs. Every emergent problem will be dealt with more oppression. Because Indians cannot be disciplined, India will not look like North Korea, but perhaps like one of the hellholes in central Africa, although on most human development metrics, India, despite the hype, is already worse.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 23:10

  • China Begins Mass Deletion Of Online Research On Coronavirus Origins
    China Begins Mass Deletion Of Online Research On Coronavirus Origins

    From perfectly-natural Chinese bat-soup to American bio-engineered depopulation bombs, the origins of COVID-19 (Kung Flu, the Chinese Virus, CCPandemic, or whatever name is no politically-correct) remain a riddle, wrapped in a propagandized mystery, inside an increasingly opaque enigma of facts and fallacies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, one thing seems clear, as The Epoch Times specifically notedthe rumors aren’t by accident and are a one-way street from Chinese officials mouths to western media’s ears: The CCP has been actively engaging in a disinformation campaign, and media outlets around the world have parroted the propaganda. As a result, entire nations have been operating under false information as they try to battle the pandemic within their borders.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Many countries have accepted China’s narrative and “they’re getting duped,” Joshua Philipp said.

    “And, of course, this is because they don’t understand the Chinese Communist Party, they don’t understand how [the CCP] works, and, even as we speak right now, the Chinese Communist Party is claiming it’s over in China when it’s not.” 

    And just in case you were in any doubt about China’s efforts to hide the truth – whatever that truth may be – none other than the western establishment’s most righteous mouthpiece, The Guardian, is reporting that mass deletions of online research related to the origins of the coronavirus suggest China’s efforts to control the narrative are escalating wildly:

    China is cracking down on publication of academic research about the origins of the novel coronavirus, in what is likely to be part of a wider attempt to control the narrative surrounding the pandemic, documents published online by Chinese universities appear to show.

    Two websites for leading Chinese universities appear to have recently published and then removed pages that reference a new policy requiring academic papers dealing with Covid-19 to undergo extra vetting before they are submitted for publication.

    Research on the origins of the virus is particularly sensitive and subject to checks by government officials, the notices posted on the websites of Fudan University and the China University of Geosciences (Wuhan) said. Both the deleted pages were accessed from online caches.

    From the beginning, the CCP has not been forthcoming:

    “We don’t know what’s there, but the fact that the Communist Party is covering this up should trouble us deeply,” China affairs columnist Gordon Chang said.

    Additionally, Prof Steve Tsang, director of the SOAS China Institute in London, said the Chinese government had had a heavy focus on how the evolution and management of the virus is perceived since the early days of the outbreak.

    “In terms of priority, controlling the narrative is more important than the public health or the economic fallout,” he said. “It doesn’t mean the economy and public health aren’t important. But the narrative is paramount.”

    “If these documents are authentic it would suggest the government really wants to control the narrative about the origins of Covid-19 very tightly,” said Tsang of the reports of new regulations.

    It goes deeper, however, as  a separate document obtained by the Guardian, which could not be independently verified, appears to be from the Renmin Hospital of Wuhan University and also said publication of research into the origins of Covid-19 would need approval from the science and technology ministry.

    Another notice, which appears to have been published on 9 April by the school of information science and technology at Fudan University in Shanghai, called for “strict and serious” management of papers investigating the source of the outbreak.

    A source who alerted the Guardian to cached versions of the websites, and who spoke on the condition of anonymity, said they were concerned by what appeared to be an attempt by Chinese authorities to intervene in the independence of the scientific process. The person said researchers submitting academic papers on other medical topics did not have to vet their work with government ministries before seeking publication.

    A technical analysis of the cached websites indicated that the posts were published on verified university websites before they were removed.

    As The Guardian’s Beijing bureau chief Lily Kuo tweeted:

    “Where the coronavirus originated is becoming more and more political…”

    Finally, this escalation is notable in the context of comments from now outspoken China critic Kyle Bass, who tweeted:

    Secretary Xi is in trouble within China. According to my sources within, the party elite want Xi gone. The Guangdong elite (Uncle Deng’s family) are beginning to rattle the cages of change against the supposed ’emperor for life’. #XiJinping #china #ChinaLiedAndPeopleDied”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And, to be brutally frank, if China is now anxiously deleting (or banning before issuance) any research on the origins of the deadly pandemic, it appears to be pretty clear what those origins are likely to have been… no matter how many people get permanently banned from social media for mentioning such a blasphemy.

    Kevin Carrico, a senior research fellow of Chinese studies at Monash University, said:

    “There is a desire to a degree to deny realities that are staring at us in the face… that this is a massive pandemic that originated in a place that the Chinese government really should have cleaned up after SARS.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 22:45

  • Welcome To The Greater Depression
    Welcome To The Greater Depression

    Authored by Doug Casey via InternationalMan.com,

    There are a lot of questions people are asking themselves today. Among them: How serious is this economic downturn likely to be? How long will it last? How can it be ended? Whose fault is it?

    The answers to these questions being given by pundits, economists, money honeys, and politicians are, almost without exception, totally incorrect. This is most unfortunate because it means the actions taken by the US (and, it appears, every other government in the world) are not only going to be ineffective but counterproductive.

    For years, I’ve predicted something I’ve called the Greater Depression. I’ve seen its arrival as being completely inevitable. Only its exact timing was in doubt.

    So let me be as clear as I can be about what’s going on in the world right now.

    I believe this is it.

    We’ve entered a downturn that is going to be longer, deeper, and different than the unpleasantness of 1929-1946.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I sincerely hate to stick my neck out by saying that. Clearly, the longest trend in existence is the Ascent of Man, and it’s usually a mistake to buck any trend; the trend is your friend. But no trend rises like a straight line. That said, it seems to me this is going to be a really, really serious correction – I suspect, the worst since the start of the Industrial Revolution.

    You’re going to be bombarded by a barrage of misinformation, misinterpretations, wishful thinking, and snake-oil economics over the next few years. It’s critical that you rationally decide exactly what is happening and why.

    My answer, in brief, is that the Greater Depression is almost entirely due to the intervention of government into the economy. The current hysteria over CoronaVirus is simply the pin that broke the bubble. In any event, State intervention takes three forms – taxation, regulation, and currency inflation – all of which are disastrous.

    But of these, inflation is likely the worst, since it’s not only an indirect form of taxation, but it causes the business cycle, and that results in huge distortions in the ways people produce and consume, and causes huge misallocations of capital.

    The best general definition of depression is: a period of time when most people’s standard of living drops significantly.

    What you’re looking at is the Greater Depression. This isn’t a drill or an academic exercise woven out of airy fabrics.

    Why the Depression is Happening

    The physical world is unlikely to be changed much by the Greater Depression, but the way people relate to the world will change a great deal.

    A real-estate collapse doesn’t mean buildings will tumble – but their prices will, and their owners may change.

    A corporation’s bankruptcy doesn’t mean that the factories or technology it owned will vanish; they will become the property of a different corporation.

    A government default on its bonds doesn’t mean the country (which is not at all the same thing as the government) is bankrupt. It just means that those who held the bonds are poorer and those who otherwise would have been taxed to pay the bonds are richer.

    In other words, all the real wealth will still be there, but its ownership will change. And some commodities will become more (or less) valuable relative to other commodities.

    The people who wind up wealthy as the Greater Depression unfolds will, predictably, be those who understand what’s going on. A grasp of the business cycle is essential to that understanding.

    The business cycle is the phenomenon of boom and bust caused by inflation. It has been labeled as one of capitalism’s “internal contradictions” since the time of Karl Marx, but it is in fact the work of government. In a pure laissez-faire economy, the business cycle would not exist because there could be no politically driven inflation.

    How does inflation cause the business cycle and, in turn, a depression? Let’s perform an autopsy.

    Stage One: Inflation and Boom

    Suppose that the city of Santa Monica, California, is an independent nation.

    People are producing and trading to get what they want and need out of life. With no welfare, everyone is forced to work to support himself. The government concerns itself with maintaining the police and the courts and pretending that its little army keeps the rest of the world at bay.

    Life is mellow, and the weather is good.

    Let’s further suppose that the re-election campaign strategist for some local politician persuades some of the government’s economic advisors that Santa Monica is not as prosperous as it ought to be.

    The economists opine that because there is a pool of “unemployed” (recent graduates, bored retirees, fire-ees, and recent job quitters), the economy suffers from a lack of consumer demand.

    Creating demand seems like a good idea, so the government credits the bank account of every Santa Monican with $10,000.

    The picture changes rapidly. Although there is no more wealth, there is a lot more money, say 20 percent more.

    Everyone feels, and starts acting, much richer. They spend more. The economy is “stimulated.”

    We’ll follow the fortunes of the swimming-pool industry, although every business in Santa Monica would have a similar tale.

    The first business to prosper because of the government’s new monetary policy might be the telephone company, because all the phone lines are jammed with citizens trying to call the local swimming-pool company to place an order.

    Believing that their ancient “reach out and touch someone” marketing campaign is finally catching on, phone company executives make plans to put in more lines and hire more operators.

    But the telephone company’s expansion isn’t nearly as dramatic as that of the swimming-pool company, which is soon swamped with orders. Its owner is gratified that the market is finally rewarding his skills. It never occurs to him that the government’s actions might be causing a temporary upsurge in demand.

    In any event, he raises prices to take advantage of the increased demand and then runs down to his bank to borrow some money for expansion.

    The suppliers of swimming-pool materials, such as concrete, copper pipe, and earthmoving equipment, also go out and borrow money to expand.

    Because the banks have just taken in billions of dollars, courtesy of the government, they have plenty of money to lend, and at very low rates.

    “Interest” is the rental price of money, and with money in such ample supply, the price drops. Like any other businessmen with excess inventory, the bankers have a “special” on money.

    All the expanded companies need new workers but have trouble getting them, since everyone willing to be is already employed.

    To induce workers to change jobs, the pool suppliers offer higher wages. Late-night television is filled with ads for schools who will train people to drive heavy equipment, pour cement, and lay pipe to take advantage of those great new jobs.

    Meanwhile, all this activity hasn’t escaped the notice of budding entrepreneurs. Soon the family leisure vans and custom surfboards are put up as collateral for loans to start new swimming pool companies.

    Bankers are eager to oblige, since they now have so much money on deposit and can only make profits by lending it out.

    Stockbrokers, seeing a new growth industry, raise millions from eager investors with an unexpected $10,000, and float new issues.

    Business is excellent, and many millionaires are made overnight.

    A new class of swimming-pool construction millionaires emerges. They and their highly paid employees drive Ferraris and wear Armani suits, gold chains, and silk shirts.

    Merchants draw down their cash reserves to stock up on inventory to cater to them.

    Many people liquidate their savings to move into bigger houses (the banks have loads of money for mortgages), and the real-estate market moves up. So does the stock market, since companies everywhere are expanding.

    With wages and profits up and stocks and real estate adding value daily, most people tend to work less and play more.

    A “new era” appears to have arrived, with universal prosperity and a higher standard of living for all. It looks like the economists were right, and a little inflation is a good thing.

    So far, it’s a pretty picture.

    But this is a game, like the “What’s wrong with this picture?” puzzles we used to have in grade school. This is where it pays to have the skills of an economist. The immediate and direct effects of the government’s inflation certainly seem good, but what are the delayed and indirect effects?

    The folks in the government have little concern for delayed effects, even assuming some spoilsport points them out. The problems are in the future – after the next election. And since long-term effects are indirect, they are easy to blame on something or someone else.

    The perceived benefits of inflation, however, are not only very clear, they’re in the here and now. Moreover, the “economists” say “fine tuning” may extend the boom indefinitely.

    So the government will probably fail the “What’s wrong with this picture?” test that a six-year-old would pass. But let’s find out.

    Stage Two: A Slowdown

    After a while, everyone who wants a swimming pool has placed an order, and sales taper off.

    Furthermore, people have started to notice a disturbing trend: prices around town have been moving up. The “economists” have neglected to mention that prices always rise when the supply of money increases without a corresponding increase in the supply of goods and services.

    But what about all the new pools and other items? Aren’t they the goods and services that the inflation made possible?

    Yes, but no new wealth has been created, just different – and more visible – types of wealth.

    Everyone who got into the swimming-pool business was doing something else before, something that he’s not doing now. Even though everyone’s standard of living has gone up in some obvious ways, it’s already started dropping in other ways. All those new heavy-equipment drivers used to be parking cars, pumping gas, and washing dishes. Their ex-employers have found out that no one wants to work at menial jobs. Good help has become hard to find. Perhaps they can import a lot of Mexican labor.

    If the government’s inflationary gift to the people has increased the money supply by 20 percent, then prices in general have increased by 20 percent.

    The price inflation will be uneven, however; not all prices will increase by the same amount. The prices of some particularly desirable goods – like swimming pools, the water to fill them, and the big houses new millionaires can suddenly afford – now cost much more.

    A few things may actually drop in price, like the rice and beans that only poor people eat. The demand for them has decreased, since poor people are trading up to chicken and beef, which hit new highs.

    It is impossible to get a plumber to fix a leak in a home, perhaps because his time is much more valuable subcontracting to a pool-piping entrepreneur.

    The rare doctor who once made house calls no longer will; he has made millions investing in newly floated swimming-pool company stock.

    Babysitters now start at $25 an hour, for a minimum of four hours. And interest rates are starting to head up, since people have exhausted their savings and will not save more unless they get an “inflation premium” – higher interest rates to compensate for the debasement of the currency – on their capital.

    In fact, lots of subtle distortions are filtering through the economy.

    Some people who spent their $10,000 to buy a swimming pool are finding that demand has driven the price of water way up and they cannot afford to fill their pools; nor can they afford to maintain them with higher-priced labor.

    And since most people are consuming more and producing less, as people do when they feel wealthier, there is less wealth than there was before the magic of monetary policy transformed the way their world worked.

    Santa Monicans acted in ways they wouldn’t have if the government had not created all the new money. Inflation has encouraged them to produce things they would not have (like swimming pools) and not to consume things they would have before (like rice and beans).

    The inflation also has encouraged an over-allocation of capital to inventories of luxury goods. Even though a lot of people have fine new pools, the standard of living has gone down in subtle ways.

    Stage Three: Full Recession

    Soon there is a rapid decline in new orders to the many pool companies now in business.

    Bankers and brokers had not realized that an economy that could support only one pool company before the boom might have trouble supporting twenty a short time later.

    In fact, less demand exists now than before, when only one company operated, since many sales have been stolen from the future.

    The companies have to start laying off employees; many have trouble repaying their bank loans.

    The telephone, copper, and cement companies feel the ripple effect, as do the Ferrari and gold-chain dealers, and the stock market collapses. Doctors fret as their swimming-pool stocks plummet.

    The Santa Monica economy is experiencing a recession. A recession follows an inflationary boom when the market tries to readjust to normal patterns of supply and demand.

    It’s a painful period when the free market corrects the misallocation of resources encouraged by government inflation.

    People have more of some consumer products than ever, and there is more plant capacity to produce those products, but few people are as well off as they were before the inflation. They’re actually less well off than if the government had only taxed them.

    Taxes alone would not have led people to think they were richer than they really were; there would be much less need for bankruptcy lawyers.

    It is a paradox that even though the artificial boom caused many problems (however much fun it was at the time), the recession actually has many positive aspects.

    Consumers cut back on spending, so they are again building up savings.

    Businesses lower prices to induce consumers to buy.

    Workers, afraid of losing their jobs, work harder (that is, increase productivity).

    Companies (and workers) that cannot give consumers what they want at prices they can afford are forced to improve the way they do business.

    And citizens who were prudent during the boom have numerous bargains to choose among.

    Whether the recession becomes a depression is largely up to the government, which should admit that its effort to stimulate the economy was a stupid idea; the government hasn’t raised the general standard of living, just changed people’s patterns of production and consumption. It actually reduced the overall level of prosperity.

    At this point the government should exit the scene, let the swimming-pool companies go bankrupt, allow the banks’ shareholders to eat their loan losses, and permit the would-be tycoons to go back to parking cars and pumping gas.

    But doing this would make politicians immensely unpopular, and they would have to find a new line of work after the next election.

    Besides, if they play it right, the crisis can be turned into an opportunity to increase their power and prestige. And of course, their economic advisors have plenty of “new ideas” for “change.”

    Stage Four: Recovery

    No politician wants to be blamed for a recession.

    Moreover, strong vested interests are at work to keep the swimming-pool boom going. In private, businessmen make it clear that any incumbent failing to support the industry can forget about campaign contributions.

    The Association of Swimming Pool Contractors declares that it would be “economically disastrous and a criminal disregard of their sacred public trust” for government officials to let the industry collapse.

    The Santa Monica Water Authority suggests it would be in the public interest for the government to subsidize water so people can afford to fill their pools, and children can get daily exercise by swimming in them.

    It is clear that not just the economy but the nation’s health and youth are at stake. The Silk Shirt and Gold Chain Retailers Association proclaims: “The city can never recover from the blow if the pool industry is allowed to fail.”

    The bankers point to losses their depositors may have to take, and the Santa Monica Pool Supplies Association recommends tax credits for pool equipment as a cost-effective way to get the economy moving again. All the workers agree; they have no interest in pay cuts or unemployment.

    A deflation could easily happen. Many borrowers could default on millions in bank loans, and much of the money supply could be wiped out.

    The stocks and bonds of failing companies would become worthless.

    As people scramble for money to keep the doors open, interest rates move up sharply. Even with the millions of new dollars in circulation, there’s a shortage of cash.

    Everyone is screaming at their elected representatives to bring back prosperity and the good old days.

    The screaming isn’t about “theoretical” issues, like whether the government should have had the ability to manipulate the money supply, or how a gold standard (that would have prevented the boom and bust in the first place) might best be established; those issues are considered irrelevant because they won’t solve the immediate problem.

    What economic pundits suggest, instead, is more stimulation.

    Since the currency has lost 20 percent of its value, it will take $12,000 of “stimulus” per person to achieve the same effect that $10,000 achieved in the first cycle.

    The injection of new money drives down interest rates, reliquifies the markets, and heads off a deflation.

    Seeing how close they came to the precipice, the pundits suggest a “safety net” so it won’t happen again. This would include unemployment insurance, so workers won’t have to worry about quickly getting new jobs at wages lower than they would like; bank deposit insurance, so no one has to worry whether his bank is prudently managed; some government agencies to help business, and some others to ensure business does not abuse that aid.

    Perhaps an industrial policy to coordinate the economy and make sure business and labor do not make the same mistakes they made in the last boom. All this can be financed by borrowing, which is much less painful than taxes. It will all suck a tremendous amount of wealth out of productive sectors of the economy, but no one really cares because investors can pad their portfolios with government bonds.

    A full business cycle has been completed: stability, followed by inflationary expansion, slowdown, and deflationary contraction. The contraction will be called a recession if the government acts quickly and reinflates the money supply in time to prevent complete collapse.

    It will be called a depression if the government decides not to act, acts too late, or acts with too little reinflation.

    In other words, it will be a depression if the government allows the economy to cleanse itself of the distortions that have occurred due to earlier government intervention and inflation; it will be a recession if the government steps in before the liquidation is complete.

    Subsequent Cycles

    Even if the government does act, it cannot undo the past.

    People have experienced inflation. They are therefore much less willing to save money and far more eager to borrow to take advantage of its loss in value. Interest rates go up, as both savers and borrowers allow for the risk of future price inflation.

    Businessmen and consumers start planning for higher prices. Some businesses hire economists to second-guess the gyrations of the economy and retain lobbyists to argue for their “fair share” of further government spending.

    Everyone saw the fortunes made during the inflationary boom and also saw that the government had the power to prevent a collapse, so many people are willing to speculate on the inflationary trend continuing. Some take courses on buying real estate with “no money down.”

    People feel richer than ever, consumer confidence hits new highs, and most investment is directed to cater to these different, and higher, levels of consumption. There are more construction companies, more big houses, more long lunches to celebrate.

    The longer this goes on and the more business cycles the economy goes through, the more convinced people will become that the government not only can but should “manage” prosperity.

    The distortions in the economy harden and set. More and more capital is allocated to activities that would be deemed silly were it not for government policy. Where once it was inconsequential, the government eventually becomes the major force in the economy. People plan their lives around what it will or won’t do.

    But the economy becomes more heavily burdened with each business cycle, as more debt is accumulated. When later recessions hit, business finds itself stuck with more spare inventory and plant capacity and has to lay off even more workers.

    Later recessions find both businesses and consumers deeply in debt, with no savings to rely on during hard times.

    If the government had ended the game the first time around, the economy would have had only a sharp, but brief depression, like those that occurred before World War I.

    The longer the process continues, the more severe the eventual outcome.

    After a while, people start to see both inflation and recession at the same time.

    Despite the presence of more luxury cars, houses, and restaurants than ever, the quality of life for middle and lower income classes is fading, as are hopes for the future.

    The government has put itself in the position of driving a fast car with a sticky throttle. If it stamps on the brakes to slow it down, the car will spin; if it doesn’t, the car will run off the road.

    Of course, the driver wants neither to happen, so he attempts to use moderation, stepping on the brakes but releasing them before the car spins. The ride inevitably gets wilder and crazier.

    First to 10 mph, then back to 5 mph. Then to 20 mph, and back to 10 mph. To 40 mph, with a disinflationary bust back to 30 mph.

    In the early ‘70s, the inflationary gas took the roadster up to 100 mph, and the 1974-1975 recession dropped it back down to 75 mph.

    Re-stimulation took it up to 120 mph by 1980, and it has been careening about the road to the alternating exhilaration and terror of the passengers. Now the roadster (the economy) is approaching a spin on the edge of a cliff. If it survives, the next escalation will be to 160 mph, on a mountain road.

    Beyond Santa Monica

    If the problem were limited to the People’s Republic of Santa Monica, a small place, residents could easily move to surrounding areas to rebuild their lives, and there would be lots of outside capital available.

    But the United States is the largest economy in the world, so the solution will not be that simple.

    Worse, the US dollar is the world’s reserve currency; it constitutes most of the foreign exchange reserves of the majority of other countries. What happens to the dollar has direct bearing on what happens to other currencies. And what happens to the US economy is critical to what happens to every other economy in the world.

    If US citizens were unable to buy Japanese cars and electronics, the Japanese would have massive unemployment, along with a real collapse of their economy. They would then be unable to buy goods they now buy from the United States, leading to even bigger problems. The situation could, and probably would, move out of control.

    The situation is really much worse than the example presented in the story about Santa Monica. It would be bad enough if the government inflated only by crediting everyone’s account. That would propel a business cycle, but there would not be any special beneficiaries.

    Instead, the government raises money by borrowing. It sells bonds to the public. The Federal Reserve honors the government’s checks, used to repay the bonds, by increasing the depositors’ reserve balance – like handing out poker chips.

    The government borrows dollars and repays the debt with poker chips, trading them for real wealth at face value.

    This process drains resources from the private sector, to the benefit of well-connected special-interest groups. The government doesn’t distribute the money it borrowed equally, or even randomly.

    Its beneficiaries receive federal grants, loans, and purchase orders. They can spend dollars at close to their old value, before the money starts filtering down through society, raising prices.

    They are the groups close to the government: Big Business, Big Labor, and the establishment in general. They differ on details of personality and policy, but ardently support the system as it is, with money, rhetoric, and influence.

    Politics is the critical driving mechanism of this process. Considering that the US groups in control of the political process have a vested interest in the status quo, it is problematical to look to politics for change.

    The change we’re likely to see will depend on whether the forces of inflation or deflation win out. Hence, it is a choice not between prosperity and depression, but between an inflationary and a deflationary depression.

    *  *  *

    The biggest financial bubble in human history has popped… and the coming financial volatility will be unlike anything we’ve ever seen before. It will be an increasingly dangerous time for retirees, savers, and investors. That’s precisely why NY Times best-selling author Doug Casey and his team just released a pressing new report, Surviving and Thriving During an Economic Collapse. Click here to download the free PDF now.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 22:20

  • Here Is The "Secret Weapon" That Allowed Tiny Oil Producer Mexico To Defy Giant Saudi Arabia
    Here Is The “Secret Weapon” That Allowed Tiny Oil Producer Mexico To Defy Giant Saudi Arabia

    It wasn’t meant to be like this.

    After the Saudis and Russia cobbled a historic OPEC+ oil production cut which at 10 million b/d was the biggest ever, and one which received the blessing – if not the participation – of Donald Trump, the rest of OPEC+ was supposed to applaud the two oil exporting giants who agreed to cut 23% of their, and everyone else’s output, and fall in line agreeing to the terms that were imposed upon them in hopes of sending the price of oil slightly higher, because as a reminder even the agreed upon 10 million cut would do nothing to balance an oil market crushed by what Trafigura calculates was a record 36 million b/d drop in oil demand.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, that did not happen because one country dared to stand up to not just Saudi Arabia, but also Russia and the rest of the OPEC cartel, and even forced Trump to bend to its will with the US president – desperate to get the price of WTI higher in hopes of avoiding mass defaults for the US shale industry – saying he would be responsible for Mexico’s production cut balance.

    That country is the southern US neighbor, Mexico, which pumps a relatively tiny 1.75 million b/d and which would have been forced to cap its output some 400,000 barrels lower to comply with the deal, however the most Mexico would agree to was a a minuscule 100kb/d cut – a number that is completely meaningless in the grand scheme of the oil market – yet one which openly defies Saudi Arabia which staked its reputation as OPEC’s most powerful nation by guaranteeing that every OPEC member would agree to the 23% production cut.

    What followed has been the most surreal “Mexican standoff”, one which started during the OPEC teleconference on Thursday, continued on Friday when the G-20 was supposed to also join the production cut yet failed to do so over the confusion over Mexico’s ongoing intransigence, and has not yet been resolved as of late on Saturday, with Mexico’s Energy Minister Rocio Nahle refusing to budge from her insistence that the country could only cut output by 100,000 barrels a day, 300,000 less than its fair share of 23% reductions by everyone in the OPEC+ group. On Friday morning, Mexican President Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador said he had resolved the matter in a phone call with Trump. The U.S. would make an additional 250,000 barrels a day of cuts on Mexico’s behalf. But such a theatrical sleight of hand was not enough for the Saudis who would appear weak, and unable to reign in the cartel’s members, would risk cheating and excess production by virtually every smaller OPEC member who would feel, rightfully so, that it is unfair for Mexico to get preferential treatment.

    As a result, two days after oil surged on hopes of (at least) a 10mmb/d cut, the deal that was supposedly finalized on Thursday has yet to emerge, with the that come Sunday evening when trading reopens, Brent could plunge as the production cut ends in disarray.

    But why is Mexico risking the collapse of OPEC, and another sharp plunge in oil prices, by refusing to comply with the deal –  after all if Mexico cuts just another 250K barrels in output from its adjusted total it will unlock if not higher prices, then at least avoid an even sharper plunge in the price of oil. Sure, it may not balance the market, and $50 Brent won’t come back for a long time, but avoiding another dramatic plunge in oil would be worth the cut, right?

    Well, no because while that would be the reasonable economic equation for all other OPEC members, Mexico has always had what Bloomberg dubbed a “sector weapon” up its sleeve, one which incentivizes Mexico’s president to either get his way, or watch as oil craters… and get paid billions.

    We are talking of course about Mexico’s famous annual oil hedge, which in recent years has manifested itself mostly in the form of billions of dollars spent on oil puts, which we profiled extensively back in 2016 and 2017.

    As Bloomberg’s Javier Blas, who has closely followed Mexico’s oil hedgers in the recent past writes, for the last two decades, Mexico has bought “Asian” style put options from some of the most prominent US investment banks and oil companies, in what’s considered Wall Street’s largest – and most closely guarded – annual oil deal. The options give Mexico the right to sell its oil at a predetermined price. They are the equivalent of an insurance policy: the country banks all gains from higher prices but enjoys the security of a minimum floor. So – unlike all of its OPEC peers – if oil prices remain weak or plunge even further, Mexico will still book higher prices.

    In 2016, Mexico spent $1.03 billion to protect itself from a downturn in prices, according to data released in the quarterly budget balance. In recent years, Mexico has spent an average $1 billion buying the hedges. The hedge first appeared in 2001, when Mexico made a tentative showing, spending just $217.3 million on put options, a fraction of the approximately $1 billion a year it would spend later. In 2003 and 2004, with oil prices rising, the country opted not to hedge at all.  The strategy came into its own in 2005: Mexico has hedged every year since without interruption, giving it a unique peace of mind that should a worst case scenario happen, it would be able to sleep soundly a t night. Agustín Carstens, who later became head of the central bank, was finance minister when a massive $5.1 billion payout came in 2009; some government officials also refer to the annual oil bet as “the Agustínian hedge”; then in 2015, after the OPEC Thanksgiving massacre of 2015, the hedge made $6.4 billion and another $2.7 billion in 2016 after Saudi Arabia waged another failed price war aimed to crushing US shale producers.

    Mexico’s annual spending on its hedge with Wall Street banks is shown in the chart below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately for the rest of the world’s oil producers, only Mexico had the foresight to hedge an outcome such as the one we are seeing now, and that is giving Mexico unprecedented leverage to demand… pretty much anything, even preferential treatment from its OPEC peers.

    To be sure, the hedge isn’t the only reason Mexico is holding out, but it strengthens the country’s hand and makes it less desperate for a deal than countries whose budgets have been ravaged by the collapse in oil prices since the start of the year. As we reported on Thursday, the biggest reason driving leftwing populist President Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador to resist the deal, was his pledge to revive oil production via state-owned Pemex. Slashing 400,000 barrels a day to comply with the OPEC+ deal, rather than the 100,000 barrels a day that Mexico has counter-offered to Saudi Arabia, would put on hold his ambitious plan to return Pemex to its former glory.

    But a token 100,000 cut – one which flaunts the Saudi demands for equal sacrifice by all the cartel members – is unacceptable to Crown Price MbS, hence the Mexican standoff continues.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The insurance policy isn’t cheap,” Mexican Finance Minister Arturo Herrera told broadcaster Televisa on March 10. “But it’s insurance for times like now. Our fiscal budget isn’t going to be hit.” Pemex, the state-owned company, has its own separate, smaller oil hedge.

    As Bloomberg reports, Mexico has disclosed very few details about its insurance for 2020 after it declared the sovereign hedge a state secret. However, based on limited public information, alongside historical data about previous years, it’s possible to make a rough estimate of the potential payout if prices remain low. The government told lawmakers it has guaranteed revenues to support the assumptions for oil prices made in the country’s budget – of $49 a barrel for the Mexican oil export basket, equivalent to about $60-$65 a barrel for Brent crude.

    Mexico locks in that revenue via two elements: the hedge, and the country’s oil stabilization fund. The fund historically has only provided $2-$5 a barrel, so one can assume that Mexico hedged at $45 a barrel at least for its crude. In the past, Mexico has hedged around 250 million barrels, equal to nearly all its net oil exports in an operation that runs from Dec. 1 to Nov. 30.

    Putting these calculations together suggests that if the Mexican oil export basket were to remain at current levels, the country would receive a multi-billion dollar payout. Since December, the Mexican oil basket has averaged $42 a barrel.
    In other words, if current low prices for Mexican oil continue until the end of November, the average would drop to just above $20 a barrel, and the hedge would pay out close to $6 billion, according to Bloomberg News calculations.

    In short, Mexico may be far more incentivized to see oil prices stay low, or drop lower, than rebound modestly while also losing out on an additional 250kb/d in potential output.

    It is this math that is threatening to collapse not only the production cut deal, but OPEC itself because if the Saudis are seen as too weak to get even tiny oil exporters Mexico to heel – and absent MbS paying AMLO billions they won’t be able to – then all bets are off as Riyadh loses what little respect it had before the deal. and the “cartel” becomes an every oil producer for himself free for all.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 22:03

  • Farmers Battered By Food Glut As COVID-19 Shifts How America Eats
    Farmers Battered By Food Glut As COVID-19 Shifts How America Eats

    The trade war has battered US farmers over the last several years only now to be sucker-punched by COVID-19, which has transformed how Americans eat, resulting in massive food gluts across the country, reports The Wall Street Journal.

    With at least 95% of Americans under government-enforced stay-at-home public safety orders, restaurants have been forced to close. Only a few are providing curbside pickup, but even then, many Americans do not trust other people preparing their food. 

    We’ve been documenting the state of the restaurant industry, on a state by state basis, now showing traffic is down 100% in nearly every state for the first seven days of April. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    OpenTable restaurant traffic per state

    Quarantines have forced Americans out of restaurants and into supermarkets over the last month, resulting in a massive food glut for farmers and food companies. Now the agricultural industry must reduce output as sales to restaurants collapse: 

    “Farmers and food companies across the country are throttling back production as the virus creates chaos in the agricultural supply chain, erasing sales to restaurants, hotels and cafeterias despite grocery stores rushing to restock shelves. American producers stuck with vast quantities of food they cannot sell are dumping milk, throwing out chicken-hatching eggs and rendering pork bellies into lard instead of bacon,” The Journal notes. 

    Many of these companies have been supplying the restaurant industry, will have difficulty reworking supply chains towards supermarkets. This has already forced many farmers to reduce the acreage of planted vegetables and trim their flock of chickens this month as gluts continue to materialize and weigh on spot prices. 

    Mississippi-based Sanderson Farms Inc. told The Journal that restaurant demand for its agricultural products had been halved since the virus outbreak. 

    “When you have panic in the marketplace, weird things happen,” said Tanner Ehmke, who studies agricultural markets for farm lender CoBank.

    Dennis Rodenbaugh, executive vice president at Dairy Farmers of America, said consumers had changed their eating habits during the pandemic, “and it’s rippling back right to the farm gate.” 

    As much as 7% of all US milk produced last week was dumped, said Rodenbaugh, as he warned with restaurants shuttered, the glut will get even worse. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    With dairy supplies quickly increasing, the industry might have to cut production across farms to avoid oversupply conditions that would crush spot prices. 

    Nancy Mueller’s Wisconsin dairy farm of 1,000 cows had to pour 6,000 gallons of milk into a manure pit last week as demand collapsed with area restaurants closed. 

    “It was heart-wrenching” to see all the destruction the pandemic has created, Mueller said. 

    Bob Wills, the founder of Milwaukee-based Clock Shadow Creamery, said with Milwaukee area restaurants closed, sales of his ricotta cheeses crashed 95%. He’s stopped all production and laid off most of his staff to weather the economic downturn. 

    Howard Bohl, who milks 450 cows in east-central Wisconsin, has had to send 20 of his cows to the slaughterhouse and dump ten tanker loads, or about 60,000 gallons of milk into his manure pits as demand for his dairy products collapses. 

    Dairy Farmers of America said it would be providing aid to farmers who have dumped milk. Currently, a “milk crisis plan” is being formulated by the Department of Agriculture to save the industry from collapse. There’s the possibility that excess dairy products could be rerouted to America’s new breadlines that are exponentially growing.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 21:55

  • The Most (And Least) Gun-Friendly States
    The Most (And Least) Gun-Friendly States

    Submitted by Kathy Morris via Zippia,

    For many in America, guns are a way of life and part of their cultural and national identity. However, the gun industry also creates a lot of jobs and is an economic powerhouse in the US. How many job exactly? 149,146 jobs in 20019, that paid over $6,227,108,200 in wages, and over 21 billion in economic impact. Yes, that’s billion with a B.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, not all states are experiencing the same economic impact from guns. In fact, many states and cities within them have strong gun restrictions.

    It made us wonder, which states are the most gun friendly and have the strongest gun industry? Where should someone looking for a job in the fire arms industry look? We hit the numbers to answer all of these questions.

    Most 2nd Amendment Friendly States

    1. Arizona

    2. Idaho

    3. Texas

    4. Arkansas

    5. New Hampshire

    6. Georgia

    7. Alabama

    8. Mississippi

    9. Missouri

    10. South Carolina

    Notice anything these have in common?

    Yup, the south and Midwest dominate the list– thanks to a combination of gun friendly laws, high gun ownership, and strong economic activity surrounding the firearm industry. Keep reading to see how these states earned their spot– and which states are the least gun friendly.

    HOW WE DETERMINED THESE RESULTS

    • We ranked each state on:

    • Number of firearm jobs

    • Average Wage of firearm jobs

    • Guns per Capita

    • Gun laws/restrictions

    First we examined the economic output of guns in each state, using the most recent data from The Firearms Industry And Trade Report. From here we ranked each state on the number of firearms jobs directly created by the gun industry (think manufacturers of firearms, ammunition, and supplies, and companies that distribute or sell these products). After that we found the average firearm job wage. Since higher wage is typically correlated with higher positions, this helps identify both which states offer the best opportunities in the industry, as well as which states have more administrative/higher-up positions.

    Guns per capita came from the World Population Review. The more guns owned, the more gun friendly the state.

    Arizona

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 25.61
    Gun Friendly Laws: #6
    Gun Jobs: 3,476
    Average Wage: $51,985

    Arizona is the most pro-gun state in the nation. While Arizona only has 3,476 people employed from the gun industry, they pull in a solid average salary of $51,985. Arizona also has the 6th loosest fun laws in the nation.

    Idaho

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 28.86

    Gun Friendly Laws: 2

    Gun Jobs: 3610

    Average Wage: $40,937.92

    Idaho has some of the least restrictive gun laws in the nation, nabbing it the #2 spot. Idaho is a fairly sparsely populated state, with lots of outdoor area to enjoy hunting and the other gun sports.

    Texas

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 20.79

    Gun Friendly Laws: 14

    Gun Jobs: 11467

    Average Wage: $36,018.78

    Surprised to see Texas in the top 10 list? Then you don’t know Texas. Texans love their guns and their freedom to choose how they arm themselves with them. Texas also has the highest number of gun jobs in the nation.

    Arkansas

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 26.57

    Gun Friendly Laws: 10

    Gun Jobs: 3101

    Average Wage: $40,979.36

    Arkansas is fourth most pro-gun state in the country. This Southern state has a high level of gun ownership, no doubt helped by lax gun restrictions.

    New Hampshire

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 46.76

    Gun Friendly Laws: 21

    Gun Jobs: 2551

    Average Wage: $77,343.67

    New Hampshire is the only Northeastern state to make the top 10. What earned New Hampshire their unexpected spot on the list? They have the second highest gun ownership in the nation! While they may have more restrictions than the rest of the top 10 on ownership, compared to their neighboring states, they are far less stringent.

    Georgia

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 18.22

    Gun Friendly Laws: 18

    Gun Jobs: 4519

    Average Wage: $36,251.47

    Georgia is the 6th most pro-gun state in the country. No one area pushed the Peach state to the top- rather a general gun positive atmosphere and solid ranking in each category.

    Alabama

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 33.15

    Gun Friendly Laws: 13

    Gun Jobs: 3105

    Average Wage: $35,309.57

    Down in the deep south is Alabama, the 7th most pro-gun state in the nation. Alabama is a state that is proud to be country, with all the trappings that come with it, including gun ownership.

    Mississippi

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 11.89

    Gun Friendly Laws: 1

    Gun Jobs: 2324

    Average Wage: $41,558.43

    Mississippi is the 9th most pro-state in the nation and has the friendliest gun laws in the nation. Workers in the firearms industry pull in an annual salary of $41,558 a year.

    Missouri

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 11.94

    Gun Friendly Laws: 4

    Gun Jobs: 5513

    Average Wage: $29,516.38

    Missouri is either a southern or Midwestern state depending on who you ask. Since both regions are known for their love of guns and gun ownership, it should be no surprise to see Missouri is the 9th most pro-gun state. Missouri has the 6th highest number of gun jobs in the country and permitless carry.

    South Carolina

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Guns Per Capita: 21.01

    Gun Friendly Laws: 20

    Gun Jobs: 2957

    Average Wage: $42,023.47

    South Carolina is the 10th most gun friendly state in the US. South Carolina has less gun restrictions than most states and a decent bit of economic activity from the gun industry.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 21:30

  • Watch Dozens Of Ambulances Line Up Outside Moscow Hospital As Russian COVID-19 Cases Soar
    Watch Dozens Of Ambulances Line Up Outside Moscow Hospital As Russian COVID-19 Cases Soar

    Russian President Vladimir Putin has imposed a national lockdown across Russia until the end of the month to try and fight the coronavirus, after Russia’s bold attempt to block transmission including border closures and severe travel restrictions that were at the time some of the most aggressive in the world, it seems the country’s effort either fell apart, or the virus managed to sneak inside anyway.

    Now, Russia has roughly 13,584 cases, and 106 confirmed deaths on its hands, many of them in Moscow.

    Yesterday, the New York Times published a story about the increasingly dire situation in the country. Hospitalizations related to COVID-19 in Moscow alone have doubled in the past week to 3,000, and that number continues to rapidly rise.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moscow’s mayor, Sergei Sobyanin, sounded a further alarm, saying that the virus “is gaining momentum” and that “the situation is becoming increasingly problematic.”

    The latest numbers show a troubling spike in new cases that is making some local officials fear Russia might be heading down the same path as Italy and Spain.

    The capital city’s ambulance service and hospitals have been “stretched to the limit,” according to one Moscow health official. And if the world had any doubts about just how bad things are getting, they need only watch this clip of the line of ambulances waiting to drop patients (presumably mostly COVID-19 related) off at a hospital in Moscow.

    The line appears to include dozens of ambulances potentially the majority running inside the city.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Moscow alone reported 1,124 new cases of confirmed coronavirus infections on Friday, bringing the city-wide total to 7,822, Moscow accounts for 2/3rds of Russia’s cases.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 21:05

  • Snowden: Governments Using Pandemic To Build "Architecture Of Oppression" Surveillance
    Snowden: Governments Using Pandemic To Build “Architecture Of Oppression” Surveillance

    Authored by John Vibes via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    In addition to quarantines and lockdowns, some governments like those in China, Taiwan, and South Korea have been using a surveillance strategy called “contact tracing” to reduce the spread of the novel coronavirus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While each country’s contract tracing program has slight variations, all of them are essentially cell phone apps that keep a running record of the user’s heath and the health records of all the people they come into contact with.

    If a cell phone comes in close contact with someone who might have the virus, the user receives a text message informing them and then instructing them to self-quarantine for 14 days.

    However, the quarantine is not necessarily voluntary, depending on where you live. In some countries, phones have been used as a sort of house arrest ankle-bracelet that will notify authorities if the person being monitored leave the house for any reason.

    These apps are being touted as the way to end the shut down in both Italy and the UK and it appears that officials are going to be taking things in that direction.

    At face value, it may appear that this could be a useful strategy in preventing the spread of disease, but privacy advocates and tech experts are concerned that this information could be misused and that the unprecedented surveillance capabilities could be kept and held by corrupt governments long after the pandemic is over.

    In a recent interview with Vice, NSA whistleblower Edward Snowden expressed his concerns about the coming surveillance program, calling it the “architecture of oppression.”

    “Do you truly believe that when the first wave, this second wave, the 16th wave of the coronavirus is a long-forgotten memory, that these capabilities will not be kept? That these datasets will not be kept? No matter how it is being used, what’ is being built is the architecture of oppression,” Snowden said.

    Snowden recognized that the virus was a serious threat and said that the intelligence community was well aware that it was only a matter of time before a massive pandemic crippled the country, even back when he was working in the NSA.

    “There is nothing more foreseeable as a public health crisis in a world where we are just living on top of each other in crowded and polluted cities, than a pandemic. And every academic, every researcher who’s looked at this knew this was coming. And in fact, even intelligence agencies, I can tell you firsthand, because they used to read the reports had been planning for pandemics,” he said.

    Snowden questioned the positive numbers that have come out of China in recent weeks and pointed out that the Chinese government has been credited with reducing the spread of the illness because they took such draconian measures during the lockdown.

    Perhaps their extreme strategy is not working as well as they say it is, but since the government maintained tight control of any information coming out of the country, it is impossible to say for sure.

    “If you’re looking at countries like China, where cases seem to have leveled off, how much can we trust that those numbers are actually true? I don’t think we can. Particularly, we see the Chinese government recently working to expel Western journalists at precisely this moment where we need credible independent warnings in this region,” Snowden said.

    In a statement published on Friday, Apple and Google announced that they were teaming up in a rare partnership to develop compatible contact tracing apps, which they claim will work on an “opt-in” basis.

    However, according to Bloomberg, the companies are planning to eventually build the contact tracing into the device’s updates.

    Apple and Google insist that you will still be able to opt-out of the program if you don’t want to participate, but it is possible that rankings on these apps could be used to gain entry into grocery stores or larger businesses and events once the economy opens up again.

    “As authoritarianism spreads, as emergency laws proliferate, as we sacrifice our rights, we also sacrifice our capability to arrest the slide into a less liberal and less free world,” Snowden warned.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 20:40

  • Bolsonaro Says Trump 'Wonder Drug' Will "Save 1000s Of Lives" In Brazil
    Bolsonaro Says Trump ‘Wonder Drug’ Will “Save 1000s Of Lives” In Brazil

    Brazilian President Jair Bolsonaro thanked Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi this week for allowing raw materials to continue to flow into Brazil so they could maintain production of Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ), an anti-malaria drug, to treat patients of COVID-19, reported The Economic Times.

    “We have more good news. As an outcome of my direct conversation with Prime Minister of India, we will receive, by Saturday, raw materials to continue our production of HCQ so that we can treat patients of COVID-19 as well as of Lupus, Malaria, and Arthritis. I thank Prime Minister Narendra Modi and the people of India for such timely help to the people of Brazil,” Bolsonaro stated. 

    “An honorable gesture that can help save the lives of many Brazilians, and which we will never forget,” Bolsonaro added.

    HCQ is an anti-malarial drug that has been commonly used to treat lupus, arthritis, and other disorders which has been touted by President Trump. While clinical studies of the drug are still pending, there is compelling anecdotal evidence of the drug’s efficacy when combined with azithromycin (Z-Pac) and zinc sulfate has caused several countries to place them on their recommended treatment regimen for the virus.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Brazilian president said the drug’s effectiveness against the virus “could go down in history as having saved thousands of lives in Brazil.” This comes at a time when the South American country has recorded 18,176 confirmed cases and 957 deaths (as of Friday morning, April 10). 

    Bolsonaro said, “doctors, researchers, and heads of state from other countries” have told him that the drug had been used to treat “dozens of patients” and “all of them were saved.”

    Bolsonaro wrote a letter to Modi last weekend, indicating that Hindu and Christian religious officials are comparing HCQ to “holy medicine” that must be shared with South America:

     “Just as Lord Hanuman brought the holy medicine from the Himalayas to save the life of Lord Rama’s brother Lakshmana, and Jesus healed those who were sick and restored the sight to Bartimeu, India and Brazil will overcome this global crisis by joining forces and sharing blessings for the sake of all peoples.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Indian government released a statement that said Modi would “support” Brazil “in this difficult hour.” Both countries “agreed that their officials would remain in regular touch with respect to the COVID-19 situation and its emerging challenges.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 20:15

  • Trump: Decision To Reopen Country 'Biggest Of My Life'
    Trump: Decision To Reopen Country ‘Biggest Of My Life’

    President Trump on Friday said that when and how to reopen the economy is the most difficult decision he’s ever had to make.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I don’t know that I’ve had a bigger decision. But I’m going to surround myself with the greatest minds. Not only the greatest minds, but the greatest minds in numerous different businesses, including the business of politics and reason,” Trump told reporters.

    “And we’re going to make a decision, and hopefully it’s going to be the right decision,” he added. “I will say this. I want to get it open as soon as we can.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, as much of the nation continues to ‘shelter in place’ and socially distance, Trump has come under pressure from those who argue that the virus isn’t as terrible as originally advertised, and that the death toll and societal costs of a second great depression would far outweigh the impact of reopening the economy and letting the virus – which mostly kills older people (yet leaves many survivors in bad condition) – run its course.

    On the other hand, Trump is being advised by a cadre of establishment experts (“the greatest minds”) that reopening the economy would have devastating effects; overwhelming hospitals and placing the nation in an unprecedented health crisis.

    Suspiciously, the same advisers (and the MSM) are telling us not to trust the ‘anecdotal’ efficacy of hydroxychloroquine and zinc – a treatment which has overwhelming evidence of success in coronavirus patients.

    Thus, the virus has become a an ideological tug-of-war between those who want to keep the economy shuttered until a vaccine is found, and those who believe that the inevitable economic ruin will be a far worse fate. Going one step further are some who believe that the virus is a hoax – or a US creation from Fort Detrick/USAMRIID, that the lockdown is the beginning of a tyrannical NWO scheme, and that forced vaccinations will coincide with a transdermal vax-tracking digital certificates that will mean the difference between freedom and subjugation (and may be the ‘mark of the beast’). Maybe they’re right?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If we see more scenes like the following play out across America, people are going to be grabbing more than just their pitchforks:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 19:50

  • The Fed's Balance Sheet: The Other Exponential Curve
    The Fed’s Balance Sheet: The Other Exponential Curve

    As the threat of COVID-19 keeps millions of Americans locked down at home, businesses and financial markets are suffering.

    For example, a survey of small-business owners found that 51% did not believe they could survive the pandemic for longer than three months. At the same time, the S&P 500 posted its worst first-quarter on record.

    In response to this havoc, the U.S. Federal Reserve (the Fed) is taking unprecedented steps to try and stabilize the economy. This includes, as Visual Capitalist’s Marcu Lu details below, a return to quantitative easing (QE), a controversial policy which involves adding more money into the banking system. To help us understand the implications of these actions, today’s chart illustrates the swelling balance sheet of the Fed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How Does Quantitative Easing Work?

    Expansionary monetary policies are used by central banks to foster economic growth by increasing the money supply and lowering interest rates. These mechanisms will, in theory, stimulate business investment as well as consumer spending.

    However, in the current low interest-rate environment, the effectiveness of such policies is diminished. When short-term rates are already so close to zero, reducing them further will have little impact. To overcome this dilemma in 2008, central banks began experimenting with the unconventional monetary policy of QE to inject new money into the system by purchasing massive quantities of longer-term assets such as Treasury bonds.

    These purchases are intended to increase the money supply while decreasing the supply of the longer-term assets. In theory, this should put upward pressure on these assets’ prices (due to less supply) and decrease their yield (interest rates have an inverse relationship with bond prices).

    Navigating Uncharted Waters

    QE falls under intense scrutiny due to a lack of empirical evidence so far.

    Japan, known for its willingness to try unconventional monetary policies, was the first to try QE. Used to combat deflation in the early 2000s, Japan’s QE program was relatively small in scale, and saw mediocre results.

    Fast forward to today, and QE is quickly becoming a cornerstone of the Fed’s policy toolkit. Over a span of just 12 years, QE programs have led to a Fed balance sheet of over $6 trillion, leaving some people with more questions than answers.

    This is a big experiment. It’s something that’s never been done before.

    – Kevin Logan, Chief Economist at HSBC

    Critics of QE cite several dangers associated with “printing” trillions of dollars. Increasing the money supply can drive high inflation (though this has yet to be seen), while exceedingly low interest rates can encourage abnormal levels of consumer and business debt.

    On the other hand, proponents will maintain that QE1 was successful in mitigating the fallout of the 2008 financial crisis. Some studies have also concluded that QE programs have reduced the 10-year yield in the U.S. by roughly 1.2 percentage points, thus serving their intended purpose.

    Central banks … have little doubt that QE does operate in many ways like conventional monetary policy.

    – Joseph E. Gagnon, Senior Fellow at the Peterson Institute for International Economics

    Regardless of which side one takes, it’s clear there’s much more to learn about QE, especially in times of economic stress.

    The Other Exponential Curve

    When conducting QE, the securities the Fed buys make their way onto its balance sheet. Below we’ll look at how the Fed’s balance sheet has grown cumulatively with each iteration of QE:

    • QE1: $2.3 Trillion in Assets
      The Fed’s first QE program ran from January 2009 to August 2010. The cornerstone of this program was the purchase of $1.25 trillion in mortgage-backed securities (MBS).

    • QE2: $2.9 Trillion in Assets
      The second QE program ran from November 2010 to June 2011, and included purchases of $600B in longer-term Treasury securities.

    • Operation Twist (Maturity Extension Program)
      To further decrease long-term rates, the Fed used the proceeds from its maturing short-term Treasury bills to purchase longer-term assets. These purchases, known as Operation Twist, did not expand the Fed’s balance sheet, and were concluded in December 2012.

    • QE3: $4.5 Trillion in Assets
      Beginning in September 2012, the Fed began purchasing MBS at a rate of $40B/month. In January 2013, this was supplemented with the purchase of long-term Treasury securities at a rate of $45B/month. Both programs were concluded in October 2014.

    • Balance Sheet Normalization Program: $3.7 Trillion in Assets
      The Fed began to wind-down its balance sheet in October 2017. Starting at an initial rate of $10B/month, the program called for a $10B/month increase every quarter, until a final reduction rate of $50B/month was reached.

    • QE4: $6 Trillion and Counting
      In October 2019, the Fed began purchasing Treasury bills at a rate of $60B/month to ease liquidity issues in overnight lending markets. While not officially a QE program, these purchases still affect the Fed’s balance sheet.

    After the COVID-19 pandemic hit U.S. shores, however, the Fed pulled out all the stops. It cut its target interest rate to zero for the first time ever, injected $1.5 trillion into the economy (with more stimulus to come), and reduced the overnight reserve requirement to zero.

    Despite receiving little attention in the media, this third measure may be the most significant. For protection against bank runs, U.S. banks have historically been required to hold 10% of their liabilities in cash reserves. Under QE4, this requirement no longer stands.

    No End in Sight

    Now that the Fed is undertaking its most aggressive QE program yet, it’s a tough guess as to when equilibrium will return, if ever.

    After nearly two years of draw-downs, Fed assets fell by just $0.7 trillion—in a matter of weeks, however, this progress was completely retraced.

    QE4 is showing that what goes up, may not necessarily come down.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 19:25

  • "Do It For Your Big Momma" – US Surgeon General Slammed For Telling Black Americans To Stop Drinking, Doing Drugs
    “Do It For Your Big Momma” – US Surgeon General Slammed For Telling Black Americans To Stop Drinking, Doing Drugs

    Surgeon General Jerome Adams, who is African American, is under serious fire from all sides today after he appeared to single-out communities of color for not following President Trump’s coronavirus guidelines (after widespread liberal media coverage of the inequities of the virus’ impact on low income black and brown families).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Specifically, Adams told Americans of color that they need to “step up” to stop the spread of COVID-19, warning that “social ills” were likely a major factor in why the outbreak has killed twice as many black and Latino people than white Americans.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The nation’s top doctor said on Friday, during the daily coronavirus taskforce briefing, that:

    “We need you to do this if not for yourself than for your abuela. Do it for your granddaddy, do it for your big momma, do it for your poppop,” while suggesting that black and Latino families “avoid alcohol, tobacco and drugs.

    As The Daily Mail details, Adams added the “chronic burden of medical ills” among Americans of color is making those communities less resilient to the “ravages” of COVID-19.

    However, it seems while Adams message may have been both factual and heart-felt, members of the black community are calling out the Surgeon General for “pandering” to them with his use of slang and also for his “offensive” instruction that those specific communities to stop drinking and smoking during this pandemic.

    “The surgeon general telling black folks not to drink and smoke and do it for ya “paa paa and big momma”. Where they get this guy from? How dumb do they think we are with this? How bout suggesting that EVERYONE cut back? Let’s not do that ok?” TV host and actress Claudia Jordan said.

    One man on Twitter, David DeLoatch, said:

    “Let me tell a lot of you something, we don’t talk the way movies, songs, and the media portrays us. The Surgeon General is trying to relate to a life he never lived, listen to his voice and they way he speaks. He has never called anyone “big momma,” and neither have I.”

    Other questioned Adams’ word choice, writing:

    ‘As if people wouldn’t understand him if he said, “Do it for your grandparents”?’

    Some bashed him for using ‘stereotypical ethnic names for our relative’. And activist Blaine Hardaway used the opportunity to take a shot at the president:

    “I really would like to say I’m surprised but of course I’m not. Trump sent the only black guy on his team out to chastise black and Latino people for smoking and drinking, as if that’s the reason our communities are predisposed to this virus. Just disgusting.”

    Adams later tried to explain his comments after PBS NewsHour’s Yamiche Alcindor pressed him later in the briefing:

    “That was not meant to be offensive,” Adams said.

    “That’s the language that we use and I use and we need to continue to target our outreach to those communities.”

    Adams concluded with the uncomfortable fact-bomb that “people of color experience both more likely exposure to COVID-19 and increased complications from it.”  


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 19:00

  • Bloomberg Praises "Uninterpretable" Gilead Study While Bashing Trump "Miracle Drug" Hydroxychloroquine
    Bloomberg Praises “Uninterpretable” Gilead Study While Bashing Trump “Miracle Drug” Hydroxychloroquine

    With a vaccine still a year to 18 months away, and various treatments for COVID-19 in early-stage testing (in New York City, some patients are being given Trump-approved hydroxycloroquine, a medication typically used to treat lupus and malaria), it’s still unclear when exactly the world can expect a broadly effective treatment to liberate humanity from its fear of potentially lethal infection.

    Much, including the virus’s exact mortality rate on a global scale, remains undetermined when it comes to the coronavirus. Most research comes with an asterisk next to it noting that it is ‘preliminary’ or has not been ‘peer-reviewed’. We are all learning about this new virus as we go, and yet, as deaths continue to accelerate in the US and the UK, some readers are desperate for good news about the treatment options, even if there isn’t really any good news to share.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But doesn’t mean the press can’t utilize certain tricks of the trade to try and amplify the apparent importance of what are, in reality, relatively minor developments.

    That’s what Bloomberg did on Saturday in a story about the race for a vaccine, and another quoting findings from a ‘preliminary’ study that has little to no actual merit.

    The lead scientist on a team working to develop a vaccine in the UK told the British press that her team might have a vaccine ready by September, roughly a 6 months to a year faster than initially believed.

    Professor of Vaccinology at Oxford University Sarah Gilbert said Saturday that she is “80% confident” the vaccine would work, and could be ready by September, even as many other experts have warned the process could take 18 months.

    In the case of the Oxford team, however, “it’s not just a hunch, and as every week goes by we have more data to look at,” Gilbert told the London newspaper.

    Oh, it’s not just a hunch? Well then, that’s great. We’ll just take your word for it.

    In a different report, Bloomberg heralded that a Gilead preliminary study carried out in North America had shown promise for its remdesivir antiviral, a broad-spectrum anti-viral shown to be effective against other coronaviruses, and has been heralded by the press as one of the most highly anticipated treatments for coronavirus.

    A study involving 56 patients (minus 7 whose data were excluded from the results for one reason or another) found that 68% saw their condition improve on the drug.

    The report published in the New England Journal of Medicine tracked 53 people in the U.S., Europe and Canada who needed respiratory support, with about half receiving mechanical ventilation and four on a heart-lung by-pass machine. Eight additional patients were left out of the analysis: one due to a dosing error and seven because no information was available on how they fared.

    All received remdesivir for up to 10 days on a compassionate use basis, a program that allows people to use unapproved medicines when no other treatment options are available. Over 18 days, 68% of the patients improved, with 17 of the 30 patients on mechanical ventilation being able to get off the breathing device. Almost half of the patients studied were ultimately discharged, while 13% died. Mortality was highest among those who were on a ventilator, with 18% of them dying.

    But how promising is this study, really? Is it that far removed from the small studies of hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine carried out in France and China, which showed that drug to be modestly effective with little harm to the patient (unless they drink the fish-tank cleaner). One researcher even admits that the study isn’t enough to draw any kind of definitive conclusion, and BBG even let it slip that Gilead even helped interpret the study’s results.

    “We cannot draw definitive conclusions from these data, but the observations from this group of hospitalized patients who received remdesivir are hopeful,” said lead author Jonathan Grein, director of hospital epidemiology at Cedars-Sinai Medical Center in Los Angeles, in a statement from Gilead. The Foster City, California-based company provided the medication and also helped analyze the results.

    And in the very next paragraph, BBG criticizes hydroxychloroquine and the “tiny French study” whose methodology “has been heavily criticized” by many experts.

    As one “skeptic” who read the study reportedly said, the data from the paper are “almost uninterpretable.”

    “The data from this paper are almost uninterpretable,” Stephen Evans, a professor of pharmacoepidemiology at the London School of Hygiene & Tropical Medicine, said in an emailed statement. “There is some evidence suggesting efficacy, but we simply do not know what would have happened to these patients had they not been given the drug.”

    Aside from simply determining whether the medication “works” or not, these comprehensive studies are supposed to shed some light on how to use the medication in the most safe and effective way, like when is the best time to start the course – in terms of the disease’s progression.

    “In studying remdesivir, the question is not just whether it is safe and effective against Covid-19, but in which patients it shows activity, how long should they receive treatment and at what stage of their disease would treatment be most beneficial,” said Daniel O’Day, Gilead’s chairman and chief executive officer. “Many answers are needed, which is why we need multiple types of studies involving many types of patients.”

    Some of these answers will emerge in the coming weeks with the release of initial data from the various clinical trials, O’Day said Friday in an open letter sent via email.

    This might be a typo or a mistake, but after reporting that researchers were able to ramp up research on remdesivir so quickly because it had recently been studied for efficacy against ebola (it was determined to be safe but ineffective). However, BBG claims that 1 in 4 patients suffered serious side effects like organ malfunction or acute kidney damage.

    About one in four patients on the medicine experienced severe side effects, including multiple-organ dysfunction syndrome, septic shock, acute kidney injury and low blood pressure. Another 23% showed signs of liver damage on laboratory tests. Four patients had to stop receiving infusions of the drug entirely.

    Remdesivir was considered to be the most promising therapeutic candidate based on its broad antiviral spectrum, and existing data based on human and animal studies, a World Health Organization panel said in January. The medication was developed initially for Ebola and studied in patients in Eastern Congo.

    If it works well, one issue will be whether there is enough of a supply of the drug, especially if the epidemic is still raging. Gilead has been working all-out to bolster supply of the hard-to-make medicine. It said earlier this month that it hopes to to have 500,000 treatment courses by October, and more than 1 million by year-end. Production time has also been accelerated to six months from one year.

    In what world is that a “safe” standard?


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 18:35

  • Is It Time For A New Direction?
    Is It Time For A New Direction?

    Authored by Jacob Hornberger via The Future of Freedom Foundation,

    If Americans are not doing some serious soul-searching in the midst of this crisis, they need to start. Where America goes from here is not some sort of esoteric debate. What we do at this point has life or death consequences. Get it wrong, and suffer more death, suffering, and impoverishment. Get it right, and America moves toward life, health, liberty, peace, prosperity, and harmony.

    What everyone needs to recognize is that they are facing a choice of systems, not a choice of people. Either stick with the same systems or switch over to new systems. That’s the choice now facing the American people.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Let’s examine four systems under which we currently live and have lived for decades.

    America’s economic system

    This is a centrally planned and centrally managed system run by the federal government. Its central aim is to “wage war on poverty” by forcibly taking money from everyone and redistributing it to people in need, such as the elderly and the poor. It is based on massive confiscation of income and wealth by the Internal Revenue Service, in the form of income taxes and payroll taxes.

    America’s healthcare system

    This too is a centrally planned and centrally managed system run by the federal government. It is based on big, powerful central planning agencies like as the Centers for Disease Control and the FDA, as well as massive socialist programs like Medicare and Medicaid, both of which are responsible for foisting a never-ending healthcare crisis onto the American people consisting of ever-increasing healthcare costs that have bankrupted people or sent them into deep debt.

    America’s monetary system

    This too is a centrally planned and centrally managed system run by the federal government, specifically the Federal Reserve. From its beginning in 1913, its job has been to print up ever-increasing quantities of paper money to enable the federal government to fund the ever-increasing expenditures of the welfare-warfare state way of life.

    America’s system of empire and foreign intervention

    This too is a centrally planned and centrally managed system by the national-security branch of the federal government. Its job is to wreak death and destruction among foreigners and, in the process, bring ever-increasing amounts of taxpayer-funded largess to its army of well-heeled “defense” contractors, which are composed of former members of the national-security establishment.

    Consequences of central planning

    How are all these systems working out? Most, if not all, people would agree that they are not working out well at all. Together, they have either bankrupted people through taxes or debts or left millions of people without even enough savings to get them through a couple of months of unemployment.

    And guess who is now paying the biggest price for the coronavirus crisis — seniors and the poor. That’s because the FDA, in all its central planning wisdom, prohibited the private sector from producing test kits that would have, without any doubt, significantly reduced the coronavirus infection rate.

    How can they lower the infection rate if they don’t know who has the virus, especially since people who have the virus are infecting people for about a week before they show any symptoms? A massive number of cheap testing kits would have enabled people to ferret out quickly and early who was infected, enabling everyone else to continue working.

    Given that their dysfunctional healthcare system has totally failed to stem the crisis, they have resorted to tyranny and oppression through a mandatory shutdown of the economy, sending millions of people into unemployment and even bankruptcy.

    To relieve the financial distress from their destruction of people’s livelihoods, they are resorting to their dysfunctional monetary system. The Federal Reserve is now printing money like it was going out of style. Does anyone really believe that printing trillions of dollars is a way to relieve economic distress? It’s just another form of taxation, one that plunders and loots people, specially the elderly and the poor, through the massive devaluation of their money.

    Meanwhile, their fourth dysfunctional system is ensuring that the national-security establishment will suffer no budget cuts whatsoever in order to enable to maintain its oversees machinery of empire and intervention.

    Isn’t that ironic? Their four systems of central planning and management are responsible for massive death, suffering, and impoverishment not only here at home but also abroad.

    A different direction

    If you like how all these dysfunctional systems have worked out, are working out, and will continue to work out into the future, just continue supporting their existence.

    But make no mistake: There is a choice to be made here because there are four systems that are opposite to the four systems under which we are are suffering. These four systems are as follows:

    A free-market economic system

    Under this system, everyone keeps everything he earns — 100 percent, which enables everyone to save lots of money. No income taxation and no IRS. It’s a system based on 100 percent voluntary charity. This was America’s founding economic system for more than 100 years. It produced the wealthiest and most charitable society in history.

    A free-market healthcare system

    Under this system, the private sector and the free market are entirely responsive for healthcare. No more having to get permission from federal bureaucrats to produce test kits or anything else because the federal government will play no role whatsoever in healthcare. A total separation of healthcare and the state, just as our ancestors had the wisdom to separate church and state. This was America’s founding healthcare system and last for more than 100 years. It produced the finest healthcare system in history, one in which healthcare costs were cheap and affordable and in which doctors and hospitals treated the poor for free on a purely voluntary basis.

    A free-market monetary system

    Under this system, the free market determines the currency that is going to be used. No more Federal Reserve and no more legal-tender laws. For more than 100 years, America had the finest monetary system in history, one based on gold coins and silver coins. A free-market monetary system would improve upon that concept.

    A limited-government republic with a small, basic military force.

    No more national-security state and no more foreign military bases and foreign interventionism. No more sanctions, embargoes, invasions, occupations, wars of aggression, torture, state-sponsored assassinations, secret mass surveillance, and other destruction of civil liberties. America was founded as a limited-government republic, which lasted for more than 100 years.

    The same old direction versus a new direction

    So there you have it: Four completely different systems from which to choose. Americans should choose wisely. Your lives, health, and financial well-being and those of your loved ones, friends, and neighbors depend on it.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 18:10

  • "Papers, Please!" Fauci Agrees Gates' "COVID Immunity Card" Idea "Has Merit"
    “Papers, Please!” Fauci Agrees Gates’ “COVID Immunity Card” Idea “Has Merit”

    Talks of COVID immunity cards have certainly been a hot subject in the last several weeks from high-ranking Western officials. It could be the means to reopen crashed economies seen across Europe and the US.

    Dr. Anthony Fauci, America’s top infectious disease expert, told CNN “New Day” host Alisyn Camerota that people could soon carry ‘cards’ proving their immunity to COVID-19. 

    “Can you imagine a time where Americans carry certificates of immunity?” Camerota asked Fauci during an interview Friday.

    “You know, that’s possible,” Fauci responded. 

    “It’s one of those things that we talk about when we want to make sure that we know who the vulnerable people are and not.”

    He continued, “This is something that’s being discussed. I think it might actually have some merit, under certain circumstances.”

    The rollout of immunity cards would be dependent on the success of antibody testing, which could be unveiled in April: 

    “If their antibody test is positive, one can formulate strategies about whether or not they would be at risk or vulnerable to getting re-infected,” Fauci said.

    We noted the proposal of immunity cards first appeared in Europe, with Germany, Italy, and the UK all calling for some form of documentation that would allow people who were immune to the disease to travel freely. Imagine stepping into an airport, and an official says, “papers please!” – while referring to a passport, you might also need your COVID immunity card. 

    Talk of these specialized health passports surfaced in American politics several weeks ago when House Democratic Caucus Chairman Mike Stewart called on Tennessee Gov. Bill Lee to implement an “Immunity Certificate” for first responders and healthcare professionals. Last week, Senator Bill Cassidy pitched the creation of an online registry that would help to identify who tested positive and negative. 

    And for more confirmation that immunity passports are going to be the next big thing in the Western world, or maybe across the globe. Here is Bill Gates on March 24, giving a 50-minute interview to Chris Anderson, the Curator of TED, the non-profit that runs the TED Talks.

    Right at 34:14, Gates discussed how the future in a post-corona world would be. He said:

    Eventually what we’ll have to have is certificates of who’s a recovered person, who’s a vaccinated person

    …Because you don’t want people moving around the world where you’ll have some countries that won’t have it under control, sadly.

    We’ve noted, immunity passes and “intermittent lockdowns” could become a reality in the months or quarters ahead and last for some time -– as the virologists at JPMorgan believe the virus could unfold in several waves, similar to 1918 Spanish flu pandemic

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Here, JPM believes that next waves could be at a smaller amplitude with lower mortality rate potential compared to the current first wave. This is due to (1) strong risk awareness among stakeholders; (2) faster government response potential at the infection tipping point; and (3) enhanced risk manual at the containment stage. However, even a substantially reduced amplitude of wave 2 (and 3 and 4), suggest that ongoing economic shutdowns will be a recurring feature of life for quarters if not years!” we said last week. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as Gates said: “So eventually there will be this digital immunity proof that will help facilitate the global reopening up.” It appears Fauci and Gates are on the same page.

    In a post-corona world, the surveillance state will thrive as your freedoms erode. Big Brother is watching you, and the new means of control is through immunity cards. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 17:45

  • "Everything That Is Wrong With America, In One Image"
    “Everything That Is Wrong With America, In One Image”

    At the end of January, just as China was admitting the full extent of the Wu Flu pandemic it had kept under wraps for weeks in hopes it could get away with not shutting its economy even if it meant tens of thousands dead (in the end, it failed) we reported that since 1990 the top 1% has bought $1.2 trillion of equities and mutual funds while the rest, or 99% of the population, had sold $1 trillion. And, confirming what we discussed in “The Rich Have Assets, The Poor Have Debt“, based on the Federal Reserve’s Distributional Financial Accounts (DFAs), the concentration of household equity ownership among the wealthiest households is at an all-time high.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But then an unexpected thing happened: stocks crashed, with the S&P briefly losing as much as 35% as traders freaked out that the global coronavirus pandemic would result in a world that is shut down for months, if not quarters, resulting in profit devastation. That’s when the Fed stepped in, and after first unleashing a bazooka, then a “nuclear bomb” meant to crush bond shorts, and finally a super nuke where the Fed would go so far as bailout all those companies that had purchased trillions in stocks while issuing BBB-rated grade which are now being downgraded in record amounts, i.e., the Fed would buy “fallen angel” junk bonds, Jerome Powell ensured that the 1% is well on its way to being made whole – in other words the superrrich are now benefiting from the biggest bailout in history, a topic which sparked an unprecedented debate on CNBC when sparks flew between VC investor Chamath Palihapitiya (himself a billionaire) and anchor Scott Wapner, with the former saying billionaires and companies should be allowed to fail (he is absolutely right – after all that’s what the Chapter 11 process is for as we have been saying for months), while the latter sparking outrage for inexplicably claiming that billionaires are just as desperately in need of rescuing by the money printer (watch the full clash here).

    In short, it was a momentuous week, one in which we learned that the Fed will do anything – even if it means destroy the dollar completely (just watch the price of gold for Powell’s progress in this regard) – to rescue the super rich, while everyone else was getting destroyed. And nothing capture the zeitgeist better than the following screen grab courtesy of Justin Horwitz who aptly titled the following tweet Everything that is wrong with America, in one image.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To this all we can add is: American Middle Class 0 – Federal Reserve 6,083,131,000,000.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 17:20

  • Tesla Furloughs Half Of Its Entire US Sales And Delivery Staff
    Tesla Furloughs Half Of Its Entire US Sales And Delivery Staff

    The impacts of Tesla’s previously announced furloughs are finally starting rear their heads – in a big way. The company announced on Friday that about half of the company’s entire U.S. sales and delivery staff would be affected, according to CNBC

    Workers in sales and deliveries were furloughed by their rank and their tenure, not on the basis of their performance. Anyone with entry-level roles or lower sales quotas each quarter have all been furloughed, according to sources at Tesla. Employees in senior sales and delivery roles who have been with the company for less than two years have also been furloughed.

    One furloughed employee worried that permanent layoffs could be next as a way for Tesla to continue cost cutting that began in 2019. As a reminder, Tesla said in early 2019 it was going to shift to “online only sales” before walking back those comments just weeks later. 

    Recall, we first reported about 3 days ago that Tesla announced it was going to be furloughing all non-essential workers and implementing salary cuts due to the very same coronavirus outbreak that CEO Elon Musk once publicly labeled as “dumb”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In true “carrot on a string” fashion, the company also disclosed at the same time that it expected to resume normal operations on May 4, “barring any significant changes”

    Recall, Tesla had suspended production at Fremont and in New York on March 24. The Fremont suspension came after a spat with the Alameda County Sheriff’s department about whether or not Tesla was an “essential” business. It also came 8 days after Musk told his workers they were “more likely to die in a car crash” than from coronavirus. 

    Two days after Tesla’s delayed close, on March 26, it was reported that two Tesla employees had tested positive for coronavirus.

    According to an email sent to U.S. employees by in-house counsel Valerie Capers Workman, workers pay is going to be cut 10%, directors will have their salaries cut by 20% and VP salaries will be cut by 30%, the company said.

    Tesla said that pay for salaried employees would be reduced on April 13 and that cuts would remain in place until the end of the second quarter, despite the company’s plans to re-open in early May.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 04/11/2020 – 16:55

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 11th April 2020

  • Singapore Oil Trading Giant On Verge Of Collapse After Banks Freeze Credit Lines
    Singapore Oil Trading Giant On Verge Of Collapse After Banks Freeze Credit Lines

    Back in the second half of 2015, shortly after Saudi Arabia unleashed the (first) OPEC disintegration by flooding the market with oil in hopes of killing US shale (so deja vu… only back then it took it about two years for it to realize its low production costs are no match for the US junk bond market) and when China’s economy briefly collapsed forcing Beijing to devalue its currency and trigger a violent plunge in commodity prices around the globe (so deja vu… only back then the Shanghai Accord of Jan 2016 restored order to the world), traders were looking for ways to short the chaos and one of the favorite trades was to bet on the collapse of commodity merchants such as Glencore, Vitol, Trafigura and Mercuria, whose fates were closely interwoven with the prices of the commodities they traded. As a result, Glencore’s stock price plunged and its CDS soared amid fears the commodity crash cascade would lead to a default wave among anyone with commodity exposure.

    Fast forward 5 years when the biggest commodity crash in generations, one which has sent the price of oil tumbling to levels not seen since George H.W. Bush was invading Middle Eastern nations, and… nothing: while the Glencores of the world have indeed dropped, their valuations are nowhere near the late 2015 lows even as the prices of several key commodities have rarely been lower.

    That might be changing, however, because the longer global economic activity fails to rebound and the longer commodity prices remain at their current depressed levels, the more the global liquidity crisis will transform into a solvency crisis, hitting some of the most prominent commodity traders in the world… such as Singapore’s iconic oil trader Hin Leong Trading, which according to Bloomberg has appointed advisers to help in talks with banks as some of them freeze credit lines to the firm.

    Yesterday, Bloomberg first reported that at least two lenders won’t issue new letters of credit to Hin Leong amid concerns over its ability to repay debt; as a result, the firm appointed advisers this week to help negotiate with banks for more time to resolve its finances. Letters of credit are a critical financial backstop for commodity traders, used as way of financing critical short-term trade. A bank issues the so-called L/C on behalf of the buyer as a guarantee of payment to the seller. Once the goods have exchanged hands, the buyer repays the lender.

    Hin Leong suddenly finds itself without providers of L/Cs – for reasons still not exactly known – without which it is effectively paralyzed as it needs to front cash for any transactions, something no modern commodity merchant can afford to do.

    While it’s note exactly Trafigura, the privately-held company founded by legendary self-made Chinese tycoon Lim Oon Kuin could be the latest casualty of the crash in oil prices. Meanwhile, speculation over Hin Leong’s potentiall collapse has ricocheted around the tight-knit oil trading community in Singapore, one of the world’s most important oil markets and the biggest ship fueling hub. Think of Hin Leong as Singapore’s oil “Lehman”, because as Bloomberg notes, before crude’s spectacular crash, it would have been almost unthinkable that such a major player in the market could be in such a position.

    Now, not so much.

    Billionaire Lim Oon Kuin, 76, founded Hin Leong Trading in 1963 at age 20 with a single truck delivering diesel to fishermen and small rural power producers. Since then OK Lim, as the founder is known, has grown the company into one of Asia’s largest suppliers of ship fuel, or bunkers, and one of Singapore largest independent oil traders. OK Lim built the company from a one-man-one-truck oil dealer to a regional powerhouse with assets including 130 vessels, with businesses across oil trading, terminal and storage, bunker supply and lubricants manufacturing, according to its website.

    Products traded by Hin Leong Group include: crude oil, feedstock, middle distillates, petrochemicals, biofuel, mogas, naphtha, fuel oil, LPG, asphalt, base oil and lubricants. Company’s trading revenue surpassed USD 14 billion in 2012.

    Larges shipments of oil are sourced through well-established network of partners including oil majors and national oil companies generating significant economies in freight and resulting in cost savings for our buyers.

    Integrated oil trading services comprising of trading, shipping, blending, storage and an extensive fleet of oil tankers add value and complement our trading activities. This integrated approach enhances our trading flexibility and efficiency in responding to a dynamic oil trading market.

    The group’s shipping arm, Ocean Tankers, owns a fleet of more than 130 tankers and is run by son Evan. Lim also co-owns oil storage unit Universal Terminal with PetroChina. The company’s bunkering arm, Ocean Bunkering Services (Pte.) Ltd., was ranked the third-largest shipping fuel supplier in Singapore last year, according to the city-state’s Maritime and Port Authority.

    Hin Leong’s situation arises amid a torrid period for the Asian commodity trading industry, including multi-million dollar losses by some high profile Chinese and Japanese traders, and the collapse of Noble Group, one of the biggest names in the industry.

    According to Bloomberg, Hin Leong’s financial accounts couldn’t be found on the website of Singapore’s accounting regulator; its (slightly outdated) website said that the company’s revenue surpassed $14 billion… in 2012.

    In a rare interview in 2018, OK Lim’s son said Ocean Bunkering Services aimed to raise its monthly bunker fuel sales to as much as 1 million tons from 650,000 tons in January that year. Singapore’s monthly bunkering sales averaged around 4 million tons in the past five years.

    It is unclear what will happen to the Singapore commodity trading giant if it is unable to find banks that will backstop its operations. Should the firm become insolvent, the downstream cascade for companies in the Pacific Rim could be devastating.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 23:50

  • Is This America's Turning Point?
    Is This America's Turning Point?

    Authored by Robert Wright via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    The phrase “to jump the shark” at first referenced the point at which a television program started to lose its moorings, and its audience.

    Specifically, it referred to the episode of Happy Days (1974-84, ABC) when “the Fonz” (played by Henry Winkler, now better known for his role as an acting teacher on HBO’s Barry) jumped over a shark tank on water skis. Ratings for the show did stay up after the episode because there were only 3 or 4 channels available back then. Many fans, including this then eight-year-old, however, became mere viewers after that episode.

    Today, though, the phrase has expanded to include any turning point eventually ending in disaster. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Lots of folks, from politicians to used car salesmen, are trying to calm fears associated with the COVID-19 pandemic by harkening back to America’s glorious past.

    “We” can get through this, they say, because “we” successfully traversed worse travails. The problem with that analysis is the “we” has changed. Yes, America suffered invasion and the destruction of the national capital in 1814, a long, bloody Civil War, and so forth. But the Americans who preserved or prevailed then are all long gone, as are many of the nation’s most important institutions.

    Yes, some people who lived through the Great Depression and World War II are still alive but they are hardly the same people they once were. And right now they should all be indoors wearing gloves and N95s, or those gas masks that we all bought after 9-11, a terrorist attack that most of those alive today survived. But did we really do a good job responding to 9-11? We lost a lot of civil liberties and treasure fighting unnecessary wars and still suffer through ridiculous rituals at airports that protect no one

    America’s currency and debt are in a similar position to post-shark Happy DaysNobody really likes it anymore but decent alternatives hardly abound. Solid currencies like the Swiss franc are too small, leaving only the currencies of a deeply divided Europe or authoritarian China as serious competitors. 

    The level of the national debt in absolute, per capita, and percentage of GDP terms, which can be tracked here, frightens many. In round figures, the national debt is $24 trillion, or $72,000 per person (man, woman, child) or $192,000 per taxpayer. That is 110 percent of GDP, the highest since the World War II era. And that is just the money borrowed to fund operations. Other liabilities, like Social Security and Medicare, are estimated at $77 trillion.

    But the real problem is the loss of what Bill White called America’s Fiscal Constitution, a set of borrowing and budget rules first developed by Alexander Hamilton, America’s first Treasury Secretary. The idea was that the federal government should keep a lot of “dry powder” so that it could borrow to fight wars, purchase territory, and respond to shocks. To do that, it had to run budget surpluses when peace, easy taxes, and a tolerable administration of justice, and hence prosperity, prevailed. But basically since World War II, America has remained at war, some shooting, some cold, some necessary, but many, like the “wars” on drugs and poverty, concocted and counterproductive. Chronic deficits resulted.

    Instead of imbibing the lessons of Richard Salsman’s The Political Economy of Public Debt, America’s policymakers and pundits ignore the national debt, or dismiss it with facile, and long since exploded, myths like “we owe it to ourselves” or “we can’t default on it because we can always print money to pay it.”

    Before the COVID-19 pandemic, many held that America might muddle along for decades more, unloved but the only serious TV show left on air. But the only thing more disappointing than the irrational response of many American governments to the pandemic has been the way that Americans have acquiesced to the suspension of their civil and economic liberties on very flimsy grounds.

    At 40:30 of this videoleading epidemiologist Knut Wittkowski puts it clearly:

    “I think, people in the United States … are more docile than they should be. People should talk with their politicians and ask them to explain” the rationale for business shutdowns, shelter-in-place orders, and other medieval responses to what he, and many other epidemiologists not on the government payroll, believe is just another annual “pandemic” that kills those with weak immune systems.

    The government’s response is actually making matters worse by slowing herd immunity.

    As I recently argued elsewhere, America’s educational system has not prepared us for the government power grab because it does not create enough Emersonian independent thinkers or, frankly, even adult thinkers. Due to the extreme Left bias of higher education, many of America’s college graduates remain intellectually infantilized to the point that they can do little more than Tweet ignorant hate at any idea that does not accord with Progressive mantras. 

    While some older Democrats, like the aforementioned Bill White, and Peter Schuck, author of Why Government Fails So Often, are rational beings worthy of the attention and respect of all thinking beings, many young progressives appear completely rigid between the ears.

    They want less economic activity to “save the planet” but cannot cheer death or the pain that lockdowns inflict upon the poor. While fewer miles traveled by automobile must warm their hearts by presumably cooling the planet, the thought of all the extra hot water needed to wash hands a dozen times a day must sting a bit, along with the fact that plastic straws and grocery bags are far safer during pandemics than purportedly “green” alternatives.

    Strangest of all have been progressive calls for their archenemy, President Trump, to behave in a more authoritarian manner!

    The statist assumption that “only government can save us” is so deeply ingrained on the Left and Right that rational calls to vitiate the economic crisis with voluntarism have not gained traction.

    And don’t even get me started on the Right’s economic nationalism. Pure lunacy, like calls for AUTARKY (no international flows, like pre-Perry Japan!), now attracts serious attention. And why not? Didn’t we all “learn” in college that some French and German philosophers were right about there being no truth, just power and rhetoric? Strangely, though, the descendants of the apostles of postmodernism have no trouble seeing the truth in destroying the economic lives of most Americans because some unrealistic models claimed between 10,000 and 100 million people would otherwise die.

    Is America about to jump the shark? Maybe it already has.

    Or maybe, unlike the Fonz, it won’t even clear the tank, the victim of the weight of its own inane policies. All that is clear is that somebody is going to have to pay for this fiasco, and that somebody is “us.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 23:45

  • Confessions Of A Sado-Maso Sex Worker In A Time Of Coronavirus
    Confessions Of A Sado-Maso Sex Worker In A Time Of Coronavirus

    When we say the coronavirus impact to the economy is hitting everyone – we mean everyone. And we mean hitting.

    It’s not just your local small business that has been crippled by everybody “staying the f*ck home” over the last month, but also your local sex worker. 

    One dominatrix, who has worked in New York for more than six years, recently shared her story with the New York Post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Aviva Diamond, as she’s called, specializes in slave training, humiliation and foot fetishes. She’s learning that a pivot to online sessions as a result of the coronavirus lockdown is turning out to not quite be the same as in-person work. 

    She said that her clients started to get concerned in mid-March, questioning whether it would be safe to meet and whether their pre-planned business trips to New York were going to happen. 

    Since then, she has suffered from “thousands of dollars of cancellations” and has no physical sessions scheduled for the foreseeable future. This represents a large delta from the eight to 15 hours of in-person sessions she was taking in a week prior to the virus outbreak. Those in-person sessions made up 90% of her income, she told the Post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Diamond confessed:

    “It’s been a challenge for me to make this shift from mostly in-person sex work to exclusively operating online. I am producing more femdom videos, adding content to my online subscription platforms like Onlyfans, promoting and expanding on social media, and offering phone and Skype sessions.”

    But she bemoans the fact that online sessions are sold at a fraction of the rate of her physical sessions, so she has to “hustle harder” to make less than she was making prior. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And then there’s the obvious: there’s no real substitute for physical contact when it comes to being a dominatrix. 

    “I’m concerned about the long-term economic effects this will have on me. Luxury experiences are one of the first things people stop paying for during a recession, so my work is likely to be jeopardized for many months,” Diamond concluded.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 23:20

  • "This Should Trouble Us Deeply" – Chilling Documentary Maps Out Likely Origin Of COVID-19
    "This Should Trouble Us Deeply" – Chilling Documentary Maps Out Likely Origin Of COVID-19

    Authored by Catherine Yang via The Epoch Times,

    While The Epoch Times began publishing reports of the CCP (Chinese Communist Party) virus on Jan. 2, most outlets had yet to pick up on the story because of the CCP’s lockdown on information. Three months later, over 200 countries and territories have been infected and the CCP virus has caused over 85,000 deaths infecting at least 1.4 million, but information is murkier than ever.

    “We’ve pretty much heard every rumor under the sun. We’ve heard every theory, every crazy rumor, we’ve heard all these different narratives,” said Joshua Philipp, award-winning investigative reporter and host of the show “Crossroads.”

    The rumors aren’t by accident: The CCP has been actively engaging in a disinformation campaign, and media outlets around the world have parroted the propaganda. As a result, entire nations have been operating under false information as they try to battle the pandemic within their borders.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Screenshot of the documentary “Tracking Down the Origin of Wuhan Coronavirus.” (Courtesy Epoch Times)

    Philipp and his colleages at The Epoch Times and NTD Television thought it their responsibility to sift through all the information available, verify it, and put it into one place. The result is the just-premiered documentary “Tracking Down the Origin of the Wuhan Coronavirus,” which is available to watch online. Less than two days after its premiere, the documentary has around 1.6 million views across different platforms.

    The film “really tries to sift through all of the rumors, all of the truths, all of the falsehoods, and show people as accurate a picture as possible of what really happened and where this virus actually came from,” Philipp said.

    In it, Philipp pieces together the development of the virus and includes interviews that shed light on the Chinese regime’s actions and intentions.

    Lives at Stake

    It should be very telling that the nine-person panel the CCP created to address the pandemic, once it finally acknowledged the virus in January, is filled with propaganda officials, said China affairs columnist Gordon Chang in the documentary.

    Many countries have accepted or bought faulty equipment from China, for example, and “they’re getting duped,” Philipp said.

    “And, of course, this is because they don’t understand the Chinese Communist Party, they don’t understand how [the CCP] works, and, even as we speak right now, the Chinese Communist Party is claiming it’s over in China when it’s not.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China affairs columnist Gordon Chang. (Courtesy of Epoch Times)

    “And what that means is, as they open things up and reopen flights, there’s a major risk to other countries,” Philipp said.

    “If [these countries] don’t have accurate information, then what can they base their information on?”

    As the documentary shows, the CCP’s delay in sharing information about the virus with other countries was not mere oversight. And beyond covering up the epidemic, China’s current actions and disinformation continues to endanger lives around the globe. The CCP has gone from denying the existence of the virus to spreading as many lies as it can to obscure the truth.

    “This is an issue of human life,” Philipp said.

    Why Would the CCP Lie?

    From the beginning, the CCP has not been forthcoming.

    “We don’t know what’s there, but the fact that the Communist Party is covering this up should trouble us deeply,” Chang said.

    Those unfamiliar with the CCP will likely be shocked to discover the regime’s motives.

    Philipp’s investigation of the CCP virus in this documentary goes back to the outbreak of SARS nearly two decades ago. The CCP tried to cover up the SARS outbreak as well, and The Epoch Times was one of the few media to expose this. There is precedent of the regime being untrustworthy in the event of an epidemic.

    Philipp has been researching the CCP since 2008, and gave an example of its military approach to shed light on how the CCP can profit off this pandemic most consider a tragedy.

    “One important thing to understand is they talk about war without morals. They talk about ‘unrestricted warfare’: war that does not take into account any concept of human rights, human dignity, human life. It is victory by any means. There is nothing they will not do, and we see the same thing in many parts of their system, including the medical system where altering the human genome is not a big deal to them,” Philipp said.

    The documentary’s experts remind us: this is a nation that currently holds at least 1 million of its own people in concentration camps.

    “They don’t care about human life when it comes to this regime—we’ve seen that in their human rights abuses,” Philipp said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Epoch Times investigative journalist Joshua Philipp. (Courtesy of Epoch Times)

    The documentary shows another link to SARS, and how one of China’s top virus experts’ study of SARS at the Wuhan Institute of Virology led to breakthroughs in creating a coronavirus to infect humans. But to what end? 

    “The Chinese Communist Party has been very open about its biological warfare ambitions, they don’t even try to hide it. And it’s been a huge injustice that people have not held them to stronger account than they should have, because the Chinese Communist Party is able to act with impunity and nobody criticizes what they do,” Philipp said.

    The documentary is a comprehensive look at what the virus is and what has happened, and Philipp hopes it can allow nations to make better-informed decisions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dr. Sean Lin, former lab director of the viral disease branch at Walter Reed Army Institute of Research. (Courtesy of Epoch Times)

    At the very least, we can provide this as a package of information that will inform the entire world exactly where this virus came from, and exactly what needs to be done going forward,” he said.

    “And at the very least, they will be more cautious when dealing with the Chinese Communist Party, especially at this time.”

    “People’s lives are at stake and we find it very necessary to do this kind of work,” he said.

    Talking Points

    The information is perhaps more vital than ever, because while countries are turning to the World Health Organization for information, WHO is turning to the CCP.

    General Robert Spalding, senior fellow at the Hudson Institute and former National Security Council senior strategy director, was in China when SARS broke out; he was evacuated, but he knows what a cover-up looks like. How the CCP handled the SARS cover-up is exactly how they have handled this one. He is among several experts who say the CCP clearly has no intention of ending the epidemic or curing the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Senior investigative Epoch Times reporter Joshua Philipp in New York City. (Courtesy of Epoch Times)

    “You can see that the WHO is essentially following the Chinese Communist Party’s guidelines,” Spalding said.

    The WHO isn’t the only organization doing so; international organizations to individual academic institutions around the world are afraid to say something that may anger the CCP. In recent weeks, Philipp had reached out many well-known scientists who once suggested the virus causing this mysterious COVID-19 disease was created in a lab, but they no longer wanted to talk.

    From the beginning, the CCP prevented organizations like the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention from studying the origin of COVID-19, Gordon Chang said.

    The CCP’s actions speak to a problem deeper than the virus. 

    “Every country has diseases, but in China they become national emergencies and global emergencies, because the real disease here is communism,” Chang said.

    *  *  *
    Watch the complete documentary below:


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 22:55

  • Mike Huckabee Sues Florida Sheriff For Threatening 'Social Distancing' Arrest On Private Beach
    Mike Huckabee Sues Florida Sheriff For Threatening 'Social Distancing' Arrest On Private Beach

    Former Arkansas Governor Mike Huckabee has filed a federal lawsuit challenging a county government ordinance which has temporarily shut down beaches where his multi-million dollar Florida home is located.

    Huckabee filed it with his breachfront property neighbors against Walton County and its sheriff, saying the ordinance is unlawfully preventing them from “being able to use or even set foot in their own backyards”.

    The lawsuit is stating violation of the community’s Fifth Amendment rights, specifically the “Takings Clause”, which states, “[N]or shall private property be taken for public use, without just compensation.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mike Huckabee’s beachfront home (in foreground) in the Florida panhandle. Image source: Arkansas Times

    It was filed Monday in the US District Court for the Northern District of Florida and says that local government is denying basic constitutional rights in taking ‘social distancing’ measures too far — to the point that police are infringing on property rights.

    The complaint says that law enforcement officers “have been and are currently patrolling and occupying the private beachfront properties” without permission while threatening “arrest or fine Plaintiffs, their family members, or invitees on their private properties,” according to Lawandcrime.com.

    “The Amended Ordinance is arbitrary and capricious. The Amended Ordinance purports to be designed to ‘prevent the spread of COVID-19’ yet it has the opposite effect,” Plaintiffs wrote. 

    “The Amended Ordinance prevents the Plaintiffs, many of whom own residences along the beach, from utilizing their own backyards to quarantine or stay safe at home,” the filing states further. “The chances of a family or landowner catching or spreading COVID-19 is far less in his or her own private backyard (where no one else should be less they be trespassing) than traveling to the grocery store or hardware store or other essential business.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mother Jones illustration; John Taggart/dpa/AP; Getty

    Previously described as the Republican former governor’s “dream house”, it’s a three-story, 10,000-square-foot mansion, with six bedrooms and even more bathrooms, a pool, and direct beach access. 

    Perhaps complicating matters is also the fact that Huckabee has for years been in a public legal dispute to claim the beachfront on which his house sits fully ‘private’ – for which he’s previously requested law enforcement help. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image via NWF Daily News

    Mother Jones summarizes of that prior controversy and lengthy legal saga:

    In 2012, Huckabee hired a lawyer and asked a judge to grant him ownership of the land stretching from the dune at the foot of his house down to the mean high-water line — essentially the wet sand and the Gulf of Mexico itself. No one appears to have protested the request, and the judge agreed, giving Huckabee the beach for a mere $400. Nearly two dozen of his neighbors have also quietly annexed the beach while escaping any additional taxes.

    The result is a checkerboard of public and private space along the water’s edge for miles of Walton beachfront.

    So it appears also at stake here is the complicated matter of whether the county itself is actually interpreting the stretch of beach as actually ‘private’ or ‘public’ property.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 22:30

  • Total Confirmed COVID-19 Cases Pass 500k As US Sees Biggest Single-Day Jump In Deaths Yet: Live Updates
    Total Confirmed COVID-19 Cases Pass 500k As US Sees Biggest Single-Day Jump In Deaths Yet: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Global new cases stabilize as deaths in US, UK continue to climb
    • White House readying plan to start reopening the economy by May 1
    • Global coronavirus deaths have topped 100k
    • Feud between Taiwan and WHO intensifies as Dr. Tedros accuses Taiwanese gov’t of smear campaign
    • Javits Center, UNSN Comfort mostly empty of patients as hospitalization rate drops
    • England’s death toll tops 8k
    • Iran accelerates sale of gov’t assets as pressure on regime intensifies
    • Malaysia extends lockdown as cases in Southeastern Asia spike
    • New York sees negative ICU admissions for first time
    • Turkey death toll tops 1k
    • Deaths in Spain continue to decline
    • UK deaths see another record jump
    • Italy reports drop in hospitalizations, ICU admissions, as new cases, deaths continue to decline
    • Chicago mayor breaks up “underage drinking party” while personally enforcing social distancing
    • Israel confirmed case total passes 10k
    • LA launches task force to test deputies at home

    *    *    *

    Update (1015ET): “Good Friday” was actually pretty grim for front-line health-care workers battling the virus in the US.

    As the case total in the country passed half a million, the daily death toll at last count had passed 2,000, leaving Friday’s count on track to be the largest single-day jump in deaths yet.

    Here are a few other tidbits from the last couple of hours:

    New York City reported 6,684 new cases of the virus and 651 new deaths, bringing the city-wide totals to 94,409 cases and 5,429 deaths.

    Brazil becomes the first country in the southern hemisphere to report more than 1,000 deaths from coronavirus as the country reported 99 deaths and 1,462 new cases on Friday. Earlier in the week, a 15-year-old from the Yamomami Tribe, a people who live deep in the Amazon and are almost untouched by civilization, died of the virus.

    As outbreaks in dozens of prisons managed by the federal BoP worsen, the new total for confirmed cases was 318 federal inmates and 163 employees have tested positive for coronavirus.

    As the battle over oil production cuts continues, Mexico reportsed 403 new cases of the virus and 39 new deaths, for a total of 3,844 cases and 233 deaths.

    *    *    *

    Update (1320ET): The number of confirmed COVID-19-linked deaths around the world has surpassed 100k, according to Johns Hopkins University.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The milestone as reached shortly after JHU reported the number of confirmed cured cases had topped 300k.

    While a spike in confirmed deaths in the US and UK have contributed significantly to the total in recent days, it looks like deaths reported in Italy, France and Ecuador (which reported 25 new deaths and 2,196 new cases, bringing its total to 7,161) Friday afternoon put the total over the top. France reported 987 new deaths, bringing its total to 13,197.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *    *    *

    Update (1220ET): Angelo Borelli, the head of Italy’s Civil Protection Service, had some more good news to share with Italians during Friday’s press conference.

    The trend of new cases and deaths continued to decline, he said, though the government was still moving ahead with extending the nationwide lockdown until May 3.

    That total infections climbed by 3,951 over the last 24 hours, while deaths climbed by 570 to 18,849 as new fatalities continued to slow.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Across Italy, 30,455 patients have recovered from the virus, with nearly 2k of those having left the hospital over the last 24 hours.  In Lombardy, ANSA reports, the number of deaths and ICU admissions have been dropping tandem, a sign that more patients leaving the ICU have recovered, instead of dying. As of Friday morning, the Civil Protection Agency said that there were only 98,273 sick patients hospitalized across Italy: the rest of the 147,577 confirmed cases have either recovered, or died.

    While hospitalizations and ICU admissions fell, Italy’s rate of testing continued to climb.

    In the UK, meanwhile, as Boris Johnson remains in “good spirits”, though still hospitalized, the UK reported the largest one-day jump in deaths yet, with fatalities recorded in the last 24 hours climbing by 980 to eclipse 8,958, according to Health Secretary Matt Hancock. The vast majority of those (roughly 8k) were recorded in England, as we noted earlier. The UK has seen its death toll continue to climb all week, while the number of new cases reported each day has plateaued. That means, for the second day in a row, deaths in the UK have exceeded deaths in Italy and Spain.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Given the holiday, the rest of the UK’s figures on new cases, hospitalizations, etc. won’t be published until later in the day, according to the Ministry of Health.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, Turkey’s confirmed deaths topped 1k on Friday as the country reported another 90+ deaths, and 5k+ new cases, bringing its national total yo 47,029.

    *    *    *

    Update (1150ET): New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo said Friday that New York hospital’s recorded a decrease in the overall number of COVID-19 patients in the ICU over the last 24 hours for the first time.

    This comes after the rate of new admissions dropped sharply over the past week.

    Still, the drop in ICU patients isn’t so much a victory in health-care as a silver-lining as the state has recorded by far the largest death toll in the country. As deaths accelerate, more beds are going to open up – that’s only natural. The change in admissions for ICUs around the state was -17 yesterday, Cuomo  said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fortunately, Cuomo is doing an expert job of painting this turd gold.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But, why is this happening? Did those patients get better?

    777 people died in New York yesterday, more than died in Italy and Spain. It’s not a record jump, but it’s still pretty big compared to the numbers we’ve seen over the last couple of weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Watch the rest of his press briefing live:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And as millions of New Yorkers wait for those beefed up unemployment checks they’ve been promised, Cuomo said Friday that the state will provide $200 million in emergency food assistance to more than 700K low-income households enrolled in SNAP.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He also said he was working with NY’s Congressional delegation to lobby Congress to create a “COVID-19 Heroes Compensation Fund” to support frontline workers and their families.

    After all, more people have died from COVID-19 in NYC than died during the collapse of the World Trade Center.

    *    *    *

    Update (1055ET): Passover has come and gone, but Israeli PM Benjamin Netanyahu is showing no signs of letting up on what has become one of the most restrictive lockdowns in the developed world. And not without reason: Despite the government’s best efforts, first undertaken at a relatively early date, to contain the virus, the number of confirmed cases in Israel has passed 10k as of Friday morning Eastern Time.

    Meanwhile, Beijing continues to take umbrage at every suggestion that China should pay for the negligence that unleashed the novel coronavirus on the world.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In LA, as worries about front-line responders like cops and firefighters catching the virus grow thanks to the surge in cases among NYPD officers, the Sheriffs Office has launched a task force to deliver at-home testing kits to deputies who fear they might be infected, and are experiencing at least some of the symptoms, according to LA’s KTVU.

    Finally, in the UK, the NHS England just confirmed another 866 deaths on Friday, taking the total death toll in England’s hospitals north of 8k to 8,114.

    So far, the largest number of deaths has been recorded in London, where 249 people have died. The Midlands have recorded 229 deaths. The patients were all aged between 27 and 100 years old, and 56 of them had no underlying health conditions. As of Wednesday evening, the UK-wide death toll stood at 7,978. The figures for Thursday (typically, updates are released with a 24-hour lag) haven’t been released yet, but we know now that this number is out-dated after the latest jump in deaths.

    *    *    *

    The number of new coronavirus cases confirmed worldwide climbed at a rate of roughly 85k overnight yesterday, a rate that was roughly consistent with the prior two days. That would lead scientists to believe that the global outbreak might finally have “plateaued” – word that’s been thrown a lot lately.

    Unfortunately, while the number of new cases remained stable, deaths in the US and UK continued to climb. But while thousands of families bid a distant farewell to their loved ones, the Fed’s latest intervention – couched as a lifeline for small business – has sent badly beaten junk bonds on their strongest daily rally since 2009 as spreads collapsed.

    Now that the Fed has apparently extinguished credit risk from the market, ensuring that thousands of “zombie” firms will continue to borrow at extremely attractive rates, allowing them to lumber on through another day as ‘moral hazard’ is extinguished. What’s worse, almost, is that no one seems to care.

    With markets around the world closed for Good Friday, and millions of Christians around the world observing the holiday while stuck inside their homes, the biggest story of the day is the fact that the global death toll will likely top 100k before midnight on the East Coast of the US. Roughly 17k – about 20% – of those deaths are from the US.

    Then again, it’s extremely likely that the true number of deaths has already passed that number, as more reports are finding that Americans are almost certainly being left out of the counted dead, just like many Italians and Chinese probably were.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With Easter just two days away, the notion of reopening the American economy before the holiday now seems laughable. But with millions of Americans struggling to hang on without their jobs or the unemployment promised by states, Congress and the president, the administration appears to still be working diligently on its plan to start reopening the economy by the beginning of next month.

    The news was met with the same hysterical warnings by health experts and anxious liberals insisting that a “premature” reopening would be disastrous because restrictions have barely had time to work. Of course, these sample people spent Thursday celebrating the wisdom of Dr. Anthony Fauci after he lowered his expectations for American fatalities by 75% from 240k to just 60k.

    We’re not trying to criticize the good doctor, or assign blame; we’re merely trying to make the point that starting to plan out the eventual reopening of the economy is probably prudent, and by May 1, most of the US will have been shut down for almost 6 weeks. Even with money from the government, the $1,200 stimulus checks plus ramped up unemployment benefits still won’t be enough to save millions of Americans from the worst effects of the coming depression.

    In New York, deaths have soared over the past week, but the unfortunate upside of that is that space in the city’s hospitals has opened up pretty rapidly. The Javits Center, which has been converted to a COVID-19 hospital, is almost empty, as is the USNS Comfort, the Navy ship docked at Manhattan’s Pier 90. While contract workers have been brought on the bury the dead victims on Hart Island, Cuomo says that the curve may already be starting to flatten – but, of course, that doesn’t mean we should let up on the social distancing measures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Elsewhere, the feud between Taiwan and the WHO is getting so bitter as the NGO continues to ignore the amazing success Taiwan has had containing the outbreak. President Trump’s harsh words for the WHO have prompted many Taiwanese to praise Trump, even as American liberals – the same ones who purportedly supported the Hong Kong protesters – cringe. WHO Director General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus has accused the Taiwanese government of trying to smear him.

    Meanwhile, in the latest sign that the Trump administration’s heavy-handed approach to handling Iran is working, the regime said it plans to accelerate the privatization of certain state-run assets as the Trump administration moves to block $5 billion of IMF aid that it has asked for.

    As Japan confronts a surprising resurgence in new cases, it’s looking like it’s not the only East Asian nation having trouble containing the outbreak as a ‘second wave’ looms over the Continent. Even as Abe struggles against the strictures of the Japanese Constitution, which protects individual liberty to an extremely high degree, a big data analysis shared by WaPo shows Tokyo’s state of emergency (a state of emergency has been declared by Abe in 7 prefectures, but most of the restrictions are voluntary) is having an impact on life in one of the world’s busiest cities. But it’s still far from having the kind of effect needed to curb the spread of the novel coronavirus.

    Malaysia has once again extended its national lockdown for two weeks as the country tries to slow the rate of coronavirus infection. As a result of this second extension, the restrictions on daily life and business will run until April 28. At 4,346, Malaysia has the highest number of confirmed cases in southeast. Asia and counts 70 deaths. Indonesia, meanwhile, reported 219 new cases of coronavirus and 26 new deaths, bringing its confirmed-case total to 3,512 and 306 deaths. The Indonesian government has already publicly acknowledged lying about the outbreak, and it’s extremely likely that the virus is far more widepsread in the country of more than 200 million.

    In Spain, figures released on Friday showed that 15,843 people have died so far after contracting coronavirus in the country, with 605 of them in the last 24 hours. That compares with a peak of 950 daily deaths just over a week ago and is the lowest death toll for over two weeks. But such figures are likely to undercount the number of mortalities, since they include only proven rather than probable cases of Covid-19, the illness caused by coronavirus.

    Before we end, as Chicago’s Mayor Lori Lightfoot tries to convince residents of her hard-hit city to follow the ‘social distancing’ directives, she shared a story with one interviewer about personally breaking up what she described as “an underage drinking party” on the North Side of the city.

    “We pulled by and I told the driver, ‘Back up,’ [and] rolled down the window,” she said, before telling the group: “Hey, you’re too close. Separate yourself. Social distancing!'”

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 22:23

  • Whistleblower: How CDC Is Manipulating The COVID-19 Death-Toll
    Whistleblower: How CDC Is Manipulating The COVID-19 Death-Toll

    Via GreatGameIndia.com,

    A Montana based physician has blown the whistle on how the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) is exaggerating the COVID-19 death toll by manipulating Coronavirus death certificates. Dr. Annie Bukacek, MD, is a longtime Montana physician with over 30 years of experience practicing medicine. Signing death certificates is a routine part of her job.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Whistleblower (Dr. Annie Bukacek)

    In a brief video presentation, Dr. Bukacek blows the whistle on the way the CDC is instructing physicians to exaggerate COVID 19 deaths on death certificates:

    Few people know how much individual power and leeway is given to the physician, coroner, or medical examiner, signing the death certificate. How do I know this?  I’ve been filling out death certificates for over 30 years.

    More often than we want to admit, we don’t know with certainty the cause of death when we fill out death certificates. That is just life. We are doctors, not God. Autopsies are rarely performed and even when an autopsy is done the actual cause of death is not always clear. Physicians make their best guesstimate and fill out the form. Then that listed cause of death… is entered into a vital records data bank to use for statistical analysis, which then gives out inaccurate numbers, as you can imagine. Those inaccurate numbers then become accepted as factual information even though much of it is false.

    So even before we heard of COVID-19, death certificates were based on assumptions and educated guesses that go unquestioned.  When it comes to COVID-19 there is the additional data skewer, that is –get this— there is no universal definition of COVID-19 death.  The Centers for Disease Control, updated from yesterday, April 4th, still states that mortality, quote unquote, data includes both confirmed and presumptive positive cases of COVID-19.  That’s from their website.

    Translation? The CDC counts both true COVID-19 cases and speculative guesses of COVID-19 the same. They call it death by COVID-19. They automatically overestimate the real death numbers, by their own admission.  Prior to COVID-19, people were more likely to get an accurate cause of death written on their death certificate if they died in the hospital. Why more accurate when a patient dies in the hospital? Because hospital staff has physical examination findings labs, radiologic studies, et cetera, to make a good educated guess. It is estimated that 60 percent of people die in the hospital. But even [with] those in-hospital deaths, the cause of death is not always clear, especially in someone with multiple health conditions, each of which could cause the death.

    Bukacek refers to a March 24 CDC memo from Steven Schwartz, director of the Division of Vital Statistics for the National Center for Health Statistics, titled “COVID-19 Alert No. 2.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “The assumption of COVID-19 death,” she says, “can be made even without testing. Based on assumption alone the death can be reported to the public as another COVID-19 casualty.”

    There is a question-and-answer section on the memo.

    One question is, “Will COVID-19 be the underlying cause?

    The answer is:

    “The underlying cause depends upon what and where conditions are reported on the death certificate. However, the rules for coding and selection of the underlying cause of death are expected to result in COVID-19 being the underlying cause more often than not.”

    Another question is, “Should ‘COVID-19’ be reported on the death certificate only with a confirmed test?

    The answer is:

     “COVID-19 should be reported on the death certificate for all decedents where the disease caused or is assumed to have caused or contributed to death.”

    “You could see how these statistics have been made to look really scary when it is so easy to add false numbers to the official database,” Bukacek says. “Those false numbers are sanctioned by the CDC.”

    “The real number of COVID-19 deaths are not what most people are told and what they then think,” she says.

    How many people have actually died from COVID-19 is anyone’s guess… but based on how death certificates are being filled out, you can be certain the number is substantially lower than what we are being told. Based on inaccurate, incomplete data people are being terrorized by fear-mongers into relinquishing cherished freedoms.”

    The CDC’s role in the way it is handling the Coronavirus crisis has come under a lot of suspicion. Earlier the CDC was caught covering-up a contamination of its lab when Health officials who paid a flying visit were blocked entry into the lab. The matter is now under investigation.

    Watch the full presentation below:

    As GreatGameIndia reported earlier, currently the world finds itself in the state of a deadlock. Entire nations have been brought under lockdown with no exit strategy. Constant fear-mongering by the media and vested organisations ensure the lockdowns are extended as long as possible. This serves the interest of the vaccine lobby who want the lockdowns to continue until their vaccines have been developed.

    Although, an emerging body of evidence suggest shutting down an entire nation may not be a good idea after all to combat such a virus. As Ariel Pablos-Mendez, M.D., MPH a professor of Medicine at Columbia University Medical Center, New York and former head of global health at the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID) explains:

    At the end of the day, super-spreader COVID-19 is likely to infect a majority of the population, no matter how far apart we stay from one another in the coming weeks. The good news is that once immune, most people can go back to work. Our containment efforts must focus on the most vulnerable: the elderly and patients with underlying cardiopulmonary diseases.

    We need to flatten the curve for the elderly but accelerate herd immunity for the healthy so that we don’t kill the economy trying to outrun the pandemic in lockdown. While home isolation for one month might stop an outbreak, it merely sets the clock back as the virus may return if it is not globally defeated.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 22:05

  • Tokyo Olympics CEO Suggests 2021 Games Might Not Happen Either
    Tokyo Olympics CEO Suggests 2021 Games Might Not Happen Either

    The CEO of Tokyo’s Olympic Games said on Friday that he can’t guarantee that even the postponed Olympics will happen next year, even after the delay.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Toshiro Muto

    I don’t think anyone would be able to say if it is going to be possible to get it under control by next July or not,” said Tokyo organizing committee CEO Toshiro Muto said via an interpreter at a remotely conducted news conference, adding “We’re certainly are not in a position to give you a clear answer.”

    The games were postponed until July 23, 2021, with the Paralympics on August 24, according to AP.

    Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe has come under fire for being slow to act on coronavirus, with opposition leaders suggesting that he has downplayed its severity in order to prolong any decision on when the Olympics would be held. This week, however, he issued an emergency declaration to combat the virus – committing 20% of the country’s GDP towards an economic stimulus program and vowing to take “all steps” necessary to battle the economic fallout from the virus.

    “We have made the decision to postpone the games by one year,” Muto added on Friday. “So this means that all we can do is work hard to prepare for the games. We sincerely hope that come next year mankind will manage to overcome the coronavirus crisis.”

    When asked if there were alternative plans to 2021, he said “Rather than think about alternatives plans, we should put in all of our effort,” adding “Mankind should bring together all of its technology and wisdom to work hard so they can development treatments, medicines and vaccines.

    Japan has reported about 5,000 cases and 100 deaths. The country has the world’s oldest population, and COVID-19 can be especially serious for the elderly.

    Muto was asked several times about the added costs of postponing, which has been estimated by Japanese media at between $2 billion-$6 billion. He said it was too soon to know the price tag and who would pay.

    He also acknowledged that Tokyo Olympic organizers had taken out insurance.

    Tokyo 2020 has taken out several insurance policies,” he said. “But whether the postponement of the games qualifies as an event that is covered is not clear yet.”

    He was also asked about the Olympic flame, which was taken off public display this week in Fukushima prefecture. Muto had an away-from-the-microphone talk with Tokyo spokesman Masa Takaya before talking about the flame. –AP

    “After the Olympic torch relay was canceled, the Olympic flame was put under the management of Tokyo 2020,” said Muto. “Obviously in the future there is a possibility it might be put on display somewhere. However, for now it is under the management of Tokyo 2020 and I’m not going to make any further comment on the issue.”

    Some within the International Olympic Committee (IOC) have suggested turning the Olympic flame into an international symbol of hope in the battle against the virus, though this would be impossible with current travel restrictions in place.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 21:40

  • FBI Admits "Central Evidence" To Spy On Trump For Russia Collusion… Was Russian Disinformation
    FBI Admits "Central Evidence" To Spy On Trump For Russia Collusion… Was Russian Disinformation

    Authored by Sara Carter via SaraACarter.com,

    Partially declassified footnotes from Department of Justice Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s FBI report reveal that the most ‘central and essential’ evidence to justify surveillance of short term Trump campaign volunteer Carter Page was based on Russian disinformation, according to newly declassified footnotes.

    In January, U.S. Sens. Ron Johnson, R-Wis., and Chuck Grassley, R-Iowa, sent a classified letter questioning the contradiction between the footnotes and what was made public by Horowitz’s team regarding the bureau’s Crossfire Hurricane investigation. The letter was first reported by SaraACarter.com. In January, the senator’s did not disclose what section of the December FISA report contradicts the footnotes in their findings.

    The declassification came at the request Grassely and Johnson, whose committees have been dedicated to uncovering the truth regarding the FBI’s malfeasance during the bureau’s probe into President Donald Trump’s campaign and its now debunked theory that campaign officials colluded with Russia. Those footnotes deal directly with the evidence collected by the FBI from former MI6 agent Christopher Steele, whose salacious and debunked dossier was the bulk of information used to seek a warrant from the secretive Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Court (FISC) to spy on Page.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Johnson, who spoke to this reporter Friday said that the American people deserve the whole truth and that revelations in the partially declassified footnotes reveals that some members of the FBI’s top echelon “were total and complete snakes.” Johnson told this reporter Friday that he expects further declassification of the footnotes by early next week.

    Johnson, chairman of the Senate Committee on Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs,  credits his committee staffers with the extraordinary find after long hours of combing through every detail of Horowitz’s report. The Senator also published Opinion Editorial on Friday with the Wall Street Journal stating that “Chuck Grassley and I began pressing Attorney General William Barr, and eventually acting Director of National Intelligence Richard Grenell, for full declassification of these footnotes. That’s why they’re now public.”

    Page, who filed a lawsuit in January against the Democratic National Committee (DNC) and law firm Perkins Coie over the unsubstantiated Steele dossier, questioned Friday why the details have never been disclosed before. The DNC and the Hillary Clinton campaign paid the now embattled research firm Fusion GPS to investigate Trump and any ties to Russia. The entities did so through the law firm as a cut-out.

    “Why have all these details remained unnecessarily secret for so long? In our dual system of Justice, the Mueller Witch Hunt crew falsely misrepresented my own “historical contact with persons and entities suspected of being linked to RIS, when I was actually serving my country in support of the U.S. Intelligence Community,” Page told this reporter.

    “The time has finally come for the Office of the Director of National Intelligence and related agencies to release the full facts about the Obama-Biden Administration’s election interference campaign against candidate Trump and the illicit coup attempt against our President.”

    In the Fall of 2016 the FBI obtained a secret warrant to spy on Page, the warrant was renewed  in April and in June of 2017, “raising questions about when exactly the FBI received and reviewed these new intelligence reports, and what it did with them,” stated a press release from Johnson and Grassley.

    Citing the IG report, the FISA court ordered the FBI to explain how it will take corrective action on the FISA process.  A subsequent IG audit of the FBI procedures to ensure accuracy of FISA applications found errors in 29 unrelated applications, prompting the court to order more information from the FBI.

    According to Grassley and Johnson the footnotes, “reveal that, beginning early on and continuing throughout the FBI’s Russia investigation, FBI officials learned critical information streams that flowed to the dossier were likely tainted with Russian Intelligence disinformation.”

    Despite the evidence showing Moscow’s spy network played a role in spreading deceptive and false information, the FBI none-the-less “aggressively advanced the probe anyway, ignoring internal oversight mechanisms and neglecting to flag the material credibility concerns for a secret court.” Moreover, the FBI officials involved in the probe against Trump continued to use the Russian disinformation to target Trump’s campaign and his administration after discovering it was based on patently false information and lies.

    “It would eventually spill over into the years-long special counsel operation, costing taxpayers more than $30 million and increasing partisan divisions – all based on faulty evidence,” said Grassley and Johnson in a statement released Friday. “In the end, the special counsel concluded that the Trump campaign did not collude with Russia.”

    The Senator’s added that “had FBI leadership heeded the numerous warnings of Russian disinformation, paid attention to the glaring contradictions in the pool of evidence and followed long-standing procedures to ensure accuracy, everyone would have been better off. Carter Page’s civil liberties wouldn’t have been shredded, taxpayer dollars wouldn’t have been wasted, the country wouldn’t be as divided and the FBI’s reputation wouldn’t be in shambles.”

    “It’s ironic that the Russian collusion narrative was fatally flawed because of Russian disinformation,” the Senators stated.

    “These footnotes confirm that there was a direct Russian disinformation campaign in 2016, and there were ties between Russian intelligence and a presidential campaign – the Clinton campaign, not Trump’s.

    From Grassley and Johnson’s Press Release Friday 

    The IG report detailed how the FBI’s application for a Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) warrant to spy on Page relied heavily on an unverified dossier compiled by former British spy Christopher Steele on behalf of Fusion GPS, which was conducting opposition research for the Clinton campaign and Democratic National Committee.

    • According to Footnote 302, in October 2016, FBI investigators learned that one of Steele’s main sources was linked to the Russian Intelligence Service (RIS), and was rumored to be a former KGB/SVR officer.  However, the FBI neglected to include this information in its application, which the FISA court approved that same month. Two months later, investigators learned that Glenn Simpson, the head of Fusion GPS, told a Justice Department attorney that he assessed the same source “was a RIS officer who was central in connecting Trump to Russia.” In January, the FISA warrant was renewed.

    • Footnote 350 states that, in 2017, the FBI learned that intelligence reports “assessed that the referenced subset [of Steele’s reporting about the activities of Michael Cohen] was part of a Russian disinformation campaign to denigrate U.S. foreign relations.”

    • That same footnote (footnote 350) states that a separate report, dated 2017, “contained information … that the public reporting about the details of Trump’s [REDACTED] activities in Moscow during a trip in 2013 were false, and that they were the product of RIS ‘infiltra[ing] a source into the network’ of a [REDACTED] who compiled a dossier of information on Trump’s activities.”

    The surveillance warrant against Page was renewed two more times – in April and in June of 2017 – raising questions about when exactly the FBI received and reviewed these new intelligence reports, and what it did with them. Grassley and Johnson expect the footnotes to be further declassified in the coming days.

    Citing the IG report, the FISA court ordered the FBI to explain how it will take corrective action on the FISA process.  A subsequent IG audit of the FBI procedures to ensure accuracy of FISA applications found errors in 29 unrelated applications, prompting the court to order more information from the FBI.

    The declassified footnotes were contained in an April 2, 2020, letter from the Justice Department responding to Grassley and Johnson’s January 28, 2020, inquiry.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 21:15

  • "Let Them Fail" – Billionaire Explains To Gobsmacked CNBC Host How Capitalism Is Supposed To Work
    "Let Them Fail" – Billionaire Explains To Gobsmacked CNBC Host How Capitalism Is Supposed To Work

    With millions of Americans sitting at home working on their laptops, the passive viewership of cable news channels like CNBC must be waaaay up this month, as finance nerds welcome normies to the strange and often hilarious world of live markets news.

    In terms of drama, CNBC is usually pretty staid. But every once in a while, there’s a fight, or a contentious interview, that really grabs people’s attention. On Thursday, such a confrontation occurred during “the Halftime Report” as Scott “The Judge” Wapner interviewed early Facebook investor and uber-wealthy VC investor Chamath Palihapitiya.

    Wapner brought up the question of the bailouts for main street and corporate America that the Trump Administration has packaged as part of its $2.2 trillion plan. Palihapitiya raised an issue with the program, arguing that the administration would be using taxpayer money to prop up “zombie companies.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then Wapner asked: “Are you arguing to let airlines fail?

    Palihapitiya, who was speaking on the phone, responded with a very assertive “Yes.”

    Wapner seemed blown away by this. Struggling to process the answer he had just been given, he followed-up, incredulously: “But how does that make sense in the broader scheme of the economy.”

    Then Palihapitiya went off.

    “This is a lie that’s been propagated by Wall Street. When a company fails, it does not fire its employees…it goes through a packaged bankruptcy…if anything, what happens is the employees end up owning more of the company. The people who get wiped out are the people who own the unsecured debt and the equity…but the employees don’t get wiped out and the pensions don’t get wiped out.”

    […]

    “And if a bunch of hedge funds get wiped out – what’s the big deal? Let them fail. So they don’t get the summer in the Hamptons – who cares.”

    Out in the real world, people say mean things about the rich all the time. But it doesn’t happen quite as often on CNBC. In fact, sometimes CNBC’s hosts seem downright confused when people don’t seem to care about asset prices above all else – like that time Rick Santelli said we should all just go get infected and let grandma die to save the stock market. What’s more, Wapner seemed almost personally insulted by Palihapitiya’s response.

    As to why, well, we can’t be certain.

    Because after all, airlines as an industry are especially prone to bankruptcy (the president once owned an airline that went bankrupt), even under completely normal circumstances.

    Hell, even if such a vitally important company as the aerospace and defense giant Boeing went bankrupt, its factories in Washington State wouldn’t stop running.

    Remember when the CEO of Boeing demanded a taxpayer-funded bailout, but said he wouldn’t accept the money if the federal government demanded a stake in Boeing in return (note: exchange money for equity is standard practice for…literally every investor in the world)?

    How is Boeing able to so blithely bite the hand that feeds? Because it has alternatives should the bailout not come through. If Boeing really needs the money, it’s free to sell stock and raise cash – the opposite of what it did for decades when it bought up shares, shrinking its float and helping maintain a buoyant valuation.

    Say this isn’t enough, and Boeing fails: The company could file a prepackaged Chapter 11 where the creditors take over all the equity and the company emerges from bankruptcy debt-free in one day.  Without a dollar of debt, Boeing should be able to weather any disruption no matter how long, and once the economy normalizes it should be able to rehire all the workers that had been laid off. In reality, the company could probably manage to get through it without firing so many employees…or offering “voluntary buyouts”.

    Which brings us to our next point. After Palihapitiya explained the bankruptcy process, Wapner responded with a question that’s probably asked on his channel at least half a dozen times a day: “What about the 401(k)s?”

    “But you don’t think the employees of these companies own stocks, own the company’s stocks?”

    To which Palihapitiya had another point ready.

    “These things are owned by these huge amorphous organizations…ultimately downstream the employees own a few hundred dollars or a few thousand dollars of shares.”

    That’s right: After the world saw what happened to Enron employees who invested their entire retirement savings in Enron stock, there probably isn’t a single American who keeps literally all of their money in the shares of their employer. Even employee pension plans are typically managed by third parties and don’t consist of a larger percentage of the company’s stock.

    As Palihapitiya explained, while people absolutely need jobs to come back to, not every business will fail during this shut down. Many small businesses, like a small cafe or a restaurant, if they can’t pay the rent, it’s over. There really is not “business”, it’s just a lease and the restaurant setup. You can have partial owners, but if that restaurant goes under, it’ll likely shut down immediately, firing all of its staff. If a company like, say a large chain of newspapers that’s publicly traded, goes bankrupt, it will continue to operate.

    While the rich certainly didn’t cause the coronavirus, they typically aren’t also responsible for the many unanticipated risks that can make an investment or a business go south.

    But on Main Street, it’s a different story. There’s not as much nuance: People are panicking and scrambling to apply for government benefits because they don’t know how they’re going to keep a roof over their heads.

    “On main street today, people are getting wiped out, and right now rich CEOs are not, boards that had horrible governance are not, hedge funds are not…6 million people just this week along said ‘holy mackerel, I don’t know how I’m going to pay my rent.'”

    “And what we’ve done is protect CEOs and boards…when you have to wash these people out.”

    Just last year, millions of investors were forced to face up to the fact that not every new enterprise, including companies who grow to the point that they can raise money in an IPO, is profitable. In fact, thanks to various levels of government intervention in the free market, many of these ‘zombie’ companies exist in countries around the world, to varying degrees.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More recently, many more persistently loss-making companies have managed to struggle on for years, even when it’s become clear the enterprise is essentially doomed, because of all the investment capital bouncing around places like Silicon Valley.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We also found this handy guide from Investopedia offering a moderately detailed explainer on how corporate bankruptcies work, the various chapters, etc.

    But right at the top of that post, the writers make clear that even the investors don’t always get wiped out:

    If a company you’ve invested in files for bankruptcy, good luck getting any money back, the pessimists say – or if you do, chances are, you’ll get back pennies on the dollar. But is that true?

    Alas, there’s no one-size-fits-all answer.

    So maybe Wapner’s plan to simply fork over billion-dollar bailouts to every company or airline who asks needs a rethink.

    And it’s fitting that this heated exchange, which attracted so much attention that the producers over at CNBC made room during “the Closing Bell” lineup to have one of their reporters interview Wapner…about his interview with Chamath, happened today.

    Because earlier, the Fed unveiled a lending program aimed at saving ‘small businesses’ that is, in reality, just the latest assertion of dominance over a market where genuine price discovery has been suppressed for more than a decade now.

    To quote Bob Rodriguez, as we did during Thursday’s market wrap:

    With the initiation of the Fed’s complete takeover and control of the US financial economy, there is now absolutely no accurate pricing discovery in the capital markets and we have entered a period of total manipulation. In light of this, the only markets I have an interest in are those where the heavy hand of government is not involved or only minimally involved. This leads me to rare commodities and collectibles. The public equity and debt markets are now nothing more than greater fool markets that are led by the greatest fools of all, the Fed and the Congress. US capital markets, RIP!

    When all market risk is essentially socialized, a return vs risk evaluation is essentially meaningless.

    Over a period of time which I cannot estimate yet, I will continue my preparation for a far different economic and financial environment.

    Capital deployment strategies will likely have to change from what has been the norm in the post WW2 environment. We are in a New World Order.

    *  *  *
    Simply put, the global business environment is being transformed: Like AOC and George W Bush, we are all socialists now.

    And Wapner’s incredulity at being confronted by an investor who doesn’t accept bailouts as nothing short of a moral imperative just shows how badly the public has been brainwashed to simply accept this dynamic, where the wealthiest business owners are always given priority.

    Watch a clip from the interview below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 20:55

  • World Faces "Devastating Health Consequences" As Global Condom Shortage Strikes
    World Faces "Devastating Health Consequences" As Global Condom Shortage Strikes

    With the global economy crashed, international borders closed, air travel restricted, and major cities under government-enforced public health lockdowns, a new warning from the United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) specifies a global condom shortage is looming. 

    UNFPA says the disruption of complex supply chains and factory shutdowns have produced “devastating” consequences for manufacturers of contraceptives. 

    “The closure of borders and other restrictive measures have upset production and transport in a number of regions and countries,” a UNFPA spokesperson said. 

    The fund also warned of “disastrous consequences” for the health of women who could be faced with an unwanted pregnancy. 

    “A shortage of condoms and other contraceptives could lead to an increase in unwanted pregnancies, with disastrous consequences for the health and well-being of adolescents, women and their partners and families,” the spokesperson continued. 

    One region that has seen significant disruption is Malaysia, a top rubber producer and source of condoms, has been under lockdown for over a month as COVID-19 cases top 4,200 with 67 deaths on Thursday morning.

    Malaysian contraceptive giant Karex, which produces 20% of all condoms in the world, recently reported that production is down by 200 million units for the mid-March to mid-April period. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Karex CEO Goh Miah Kiat said other condom producers are feeling the pinch as well, as sourcing and transportation networks have become significant bottlenecks to increase output. 

    “The world will surely be facing a shortage of condoms,” said Kiat. “This is a major problem since condoms are a first-line health product.”

    “It’s challenging, but we are trying our best right now to do whatever we can. It is definitely a major concern — condom is an essential medical device.” 

    “While we are fighting the COVID-19 pandemic, there are also other serious issues that we need to look at,” he said, adding he was particularly worried about supplies of condoms to developing countries.

    We noted last month that a condom shortage was developing in the world, and now with more than a billion people in lockdown with “safe sex” becoming a distant thing of the past, could this result in a surge in births in 2021?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 20:50

  • Daily Briefing – April 10, 2020
    Daily Briefing – April 10, 2020

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 20:45

  • Some People's Haircuts Are "Essential"
    Some People's Haircuts Are "Essential"

    Authored by Adam Dick via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

    Politicians and the people charged with enforcing politicians’ directives really can be like the pigs in George Orwell’s book Animal Farm.

    The pigs’ express commandment for governing became, over time, “all animals are equal but some animals are more equal to others.” The “more equal” animals were the pigs in charge for whom the rules they imposed on other animals did not necessarily apply.

    For examples of this commandment in practice, we can consider haircuts during the government-mandated closing of “nonessential” businesses, including salons and barber shops, in the name of fighting coronavirus. No professional haircut is allowed for the regular person in many parts of America.

    But, for politicians and cops, the rules may not apply.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A photograph of a hair stylist with Chicago Mayor Lori Lightfoot alerted people to the fact that the mayor had received a haircut from the stylist — something the state government is prohibiting for people in the sate. On top of that, Lightfoot had even publicly promoted the prohibition. Still, when confronted about the apparent hypocrisy, Lightfoot defended her haircut. Gregory Pratt reported Monday at the Chicago Tribune:

    Asked about photos on social media showing her with a stylist, Lightfoot acknowledged getting a haircut, then said the public cares more about other issues.

    A reporter asked the mayor about one of her “stay home, save lives” public service announcements where Lightfoot admonishes an off-screen person by saying, ‘Getting your roots done is not essential.’

    Asked about that, a visibly annoyed Lightfoot said, ‘I’m the public face of this city. I’m on national media and I’m out in the public eye.’

    ‘I’m a person who, I take my personal hygiene very seriously. As I said, I felt like I needed to have a haircut,’ Lightfoot said. ‘I’m not able to do that myself, so I got a haircut. You want to talk more about that?’

    Yeah, we get it: Some animals are more equal than others.

    In at least one instance, the lower-level enforcers of government policy can also take part in the elitist haircuts exception to the coronavirus crackdown.

    Robby Soave wrote Thursday at Reason that, while the Florida state government has required barber shops across the state to be closed because they are “nonessential” businesses, Police Chief Sergio Velazquez in Hialeah, Florida, has “arranged for one barber to continue to cut cops’ hair.”

    The police chief’s justification? It sounds much like the one offered by the mayor of Chicago. Soave quotes this explanation from Velazquez:

    “Particularly in these unprecedented times of a global health pandemic which has caused tension and anxiety and disruption in our community, it is imperative that our law enforcement Officers project an image of command and authority.”

    So the argument is that it is OK for the law enforcers to break the law so they can “project an image of command and authority” while enforcing the law. Are you persuaded?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 20:25

  • 'Breadlines' Erupt Across America As Lockdowns Crush America's "Working Poor"
    'Breadlines' Erupt Across America As Lockdowns Crush America's "Working Poor"

    The economy has crashed into a depression, 16.78 million Americans have applied for unemployment benefits, and consumer sentiment crashed the most on record. This American horror story has taken only three weeks to play out, the fastest and most severe economic crash in the country’s history, and still, we don’t know the true extent of the damage until the second half of the year. 

    However, the one thing we do know is that food bank networks across the country have reported unprecedented demand as a hunger crisis unfolds. Here’s our reporting on the evolution of the virus pandemic, has morphed into a financial crash, and now social crisis: 

    And how do we know food bank networks are becoming “overwhelmed” across the country? Well, citizen journalists have launched their Chinese DJI drones overhead food banks to figure out why there are miles-long traffic jams of hangry people. And it appears that these lines are America’s new breadlines, similar to what was seen nine decades ago in the Great Depression. 

    “Hundreds of cars” waiting in line at a food bank in Duquesne, Pennsylvania, on March 30. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here’s footage from April 2, documenting long lines of cars trying to get into the Feeding South Florida food bank, located in Broward County.

    On Thursday, the San Antonio Food Bank, located in San Antonio, Texas, aided about 10,000 households with food. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “It was a rough one today,” said Food Bank president and CEO Eric Cooper after the largest distribution day in the nonprofit’s 40-year history. “We have never executed on as large of demand as we are now.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Helicopter footage, courtesy of KENS 5 San Antonio News, shows the shocking aerial view of thousands of cars lined up at the food bank, waiting to receive a care pack.  

    Also, on Thursday, the Los Angeles Regional Food Bank saw a “line of cars waiting for free groceries stretched about a mile,” reported Reuters. Hundreds of other people, many the working-class poor, lined the streets waiting for food: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Organizers of the food bank said 2,500 families were given a 36-pound box of rice, lentils, frozen chicken, oranges, and other food. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “I have six kids and it’s difficult to eat. My husband was working in construction but now we can’t pay the rent,” said Juana Gomez, 50, of North Hollywood, as she waited in line.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

     

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “This food saves me money because my little income goes to my rent,” said Daniel Jimenez, 40, an independent contractor for golf tournaments. 

    “I haven’t been working for three weeks. I have a little money saved but I’m paying rent, gas, and cellphone bills. I don’t even know when we’re going back to work,” Jimenez said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “For a lot of people, they are new to the situation of needing help and not knowing where to turn,” said Michael Flood, president of LA Regional Food Bank, noting that many of these people had just been laid off and are waiting for government assistance. 

    “But that may take some time for them to get those benefits. We want to do what we can to get food in the hands of families, just so they can eat,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s another long line of cars at a food bank in Pittsburgh from earlier in the week. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Friday, a long line was developing at the San Diego Food Bank. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And another one in NYC… 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    These are America’s new breadlines. As food banks become inundated with hangry Americans, what happens when these nonprofits run out of food to feed people? Could a hunger crisis lead to social unrest


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 20:00

  • Bailouts Destabilize The Economy And Over-Inflate Asset Prices
    Bailouts Destabilize The Economy And Over-Inflate Asset Prices

    President Trump recently signed a $2 trillion stimulus bill, ostensibly to support the economy through the coronavirus crisis. Pundits hailed it as a great bipartisan accomplishment that will help ease the pain of this economic slowdown. Of course, there will still be pain. And the government stimulus may actually cause more pain than it eases in the long run.

    As with all politically motivated policies, Peter Schiff reminds readers that everybody will focus on what is seen – the immediate impacts of the stimulus. Airlines will be “saved.” Workers will get checks. But nobody will pay any attention to the unseen, and that’s where the pain comes in.

    In an article originally published at the Mises Wire, economist William Anderson explains how bailouts destabilize the economy and create artificial asset bubbles – the exact problems that set the stage for the current economic meltdown. Keep in mind, it isn’t about the coronavirus. COVID-19 was just the pin that pricked the bubble.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The following article by William Anderson was originally published at the Mises Wire.

    In the end, after all of the political posturing and all of the speeches and exhortations for Congress to “do something,” a $2 trillion “coronavirus stimulus” bill landed on the president’s desk for The Donald to sign. And sign he did, uttering all of the platitudes and everything else that comes with “historic” spending legislation that never should have seen the light of day. Although COVID-19 has helped expose vast weaknesses in public health systems in the USA, it also has shown that with much of corporate America, the emperor has no clothes.

    Although tracking where the money goes is not an easy thing, we do know that the airlines will receive about $50 billion in cash and loans, while Boeing will receive a share of $17 billion earmarked for industries favored by Congress. Another $500 billion will go to cruise lines, hotels, and other firms that have lost business because of travel restrictions and the economic shutdowns.

    Politicians of both parties heaped praise upon themselves for their “bipartisan” efforts, which in real life only can mean that Congress cleaned out what was left of the IOUs in the till. Rep. Thomas Massie, a Republican from Kentucky, drew attacks from all sides as he tried to force a roll call vote (as opposed to the voice vote that the members wanted) and announced his opposition to the bailout. President Trump called for his expulsion from the Republican Party while Democrats declared him to be an unsavory ideologue.

    There is not much to do but to wait for the results, and they will unfold over time. However, much of this bill’s harm is invisible, the way that termites quietly but surely destroy a house when homeowners fail to detect them. The politicians and the pundits, along with corporate executives, are hailing this infusion of public funds to business as a lifeline to the economic system itself, when, in reality, it will weaken these firms in the long run.

    This commentary deals mostly with the airlines, but what we say here applies to any firm receiving rescue funds and loan guarantees. While some of these essentially bankrupt firms gain some relief as taxpayers and consumers pony up to pay the companies’ bills, the temporary cash infusion allows them to kick the financial can down the road and not deal with the underlying problems that they are facing, at least for now.

    In a recent New York Times op-ed piece, Tim Wu of Columbia University asks the following: “Are taxpayers rewarding a decade of bad behavior?” If he is asking specifically about US airline firms, the answer is a resounding yes. Wu notes that in recent years the airlines have been very profitable but that instead of building defenses against possible downturns that are not easily predicted (such as the coronavirus crisis), they have used much of their profitability to buy back their own stock.

    Obviously, stock buybacks are controversial, and as long as stock prices rise, company officials look like financial geniuses. However, if the markets crash or if bears loom on the horizon, all of that value vanishes very quickly and the companies are left in worse shape than when they began. As a financial strategy, stock buybacks are inherently risky and tie up cash that could go toward capital development or even the “rainy day” fund for the inevitable market downturn. Writes Wu:

    During the past decade, flush with cash, most of the companies in line to get taxpayer money did not prepare for a downturn. Instead, they spent enormous sums on stock buybacks, which reward shareholders and increase executive pay. For example, the airline industry, which is prone to booms and busts, collectively spent more than $45 billion on stock buybacks over the past eight years. As recently as March 3 of this year, with the crisis already beginning, the Hilton hotel chain put $2 billion into a stock buyback.

    Such behavior is especially galling given that the airlines received a major bailout in the immediate wake of the 2001 September 11 attacks that severely damaged that industry. Likewise, Congress spread out the rescue money in 2008 and 2009 to deal with the infamous housing bubble that the government and the Federal Reserve System created. Yet here are the Usual Suspects once again gathering around Washington, collective hats in hand.

    Airlines this time are promising (or at least say they are promising) not to use the newest amount of rescue money to engage in stock buybacks, but that hardly is reassuring. There is a larger problem, and it is not limited just to overvaluing their stock or their inability to learn any lessons from past disasters.

    The greater problem of which we speak the Federal Reserve’s ongoing policy of pumping up the system the way that nineteenth-century cattle ranchers would “water” their herds shortly before sales by feeding them salt. The overly thirsty cattle would drink more water than usual, and when they would be weighed during a sale, would seem heavier—and fatter—than they really were.

    While Fed pumping (and simultaneous suppression of interest rates) inflates the value of stock—providing a façade of an economy performing better than it really is—it also inflates the capital assets of companies, and airlines are no exception. Because of past bailouts, glorified money printing by the Fed, and corporate practices such as stock buybacks, the nominal values of these firms are substantially higher than they would be in a more free market.

    It is not difficult to see the vast network of market misrepresentations that has come with these policies. Wu notes:

    The past decade was also an “easy money” decade, thanks to federal monetary policy that favored liquidity and low interest rates. Many of the firms now asking for bailouts took advantage of low interest rates to borrow heavily. For their part, many creditors lent money at rates that did not fully reflect the risks to these industries. The debt loads have created their own fragilities during the economic downturn.

    In other words, one set of policies to get around natural market constraints has led to one distortion after another. We now are at the point where airlines—and the banks that have been underwriting them—are hooked on cheap money, inflated stock prices, and overvalued capital assets. If Congress, Trump, and the Fed actually were to step back and let market forces work, the short-term results would be devastating—to current airline management. Yes, the airlines would be bankrupt, but in real terms, they have been bankrupt for a long time and the COVID-19 crisis now has exposed this industry for the financial fraud that it has been.

    Given that the various players previously mentioned have decided to keep the fraudulence afloat, what does that mean for the future of the airline industry? One cannot necessarily predict future events and when they will happen, but one can say with utmost certainty that the airlines soon enough will bring a new generation of management to Washington bearing the same tin cups that their forebears carried.

    There is no doubt that airlines, along with Boeing and almost certainly Airbus, will find themselves in a future crisis that keeps them at least partially grounded. It could be another pandemic, a terrorist attack, or just awful political leadership, but one can be sure that something will occur to significantly reduce airline ridership. Reduced ridership means reduced funds, and a similar scenario to what we see currently playing out is sure to follow. At some point, however, the financial damage will be so great that not even the Fed will be able to “water” airline stock anymore and the cold water of massive bankruptcies will follow, imperiling the entire financial system.

    These bailouts don’t just reward irresponsible business behavior, but they also impose restrictions that will create future problems. Airline firms receiving federal funding are not permitted to cut worker pay or lay off workers until at least September 30, which means that the aid is a glorified welfare check to labor unions representing airline workers. (The bailout rules also forbid stock buybacks and freeze executive pay at 2019 levels.) Bloated union contracts also are part of the problem with airline financial policies, so, in the end, Congress and Trump have managed to reward most, if not all, of the bad actors in this sorry saga.

    What is done is done, but at least we can take a look at what would have happened had Congress just said no to the airlines this time. Unlike the current situation, in which we will see the “good” effects first and the “bad” effects down the road, a “solve your own problems” approach to the airlines would result in immediate layoffs, bankruptcies, and at least some airlines would completely go out of business.

    Although most politicians and airline executives want us to believe that airlines are an “essential” industry that is the equivalent of the “thin blue line” between prosperity and a depressed economy, the markets see things differently. First, and most important, with the current situation there is no way that airlines can meet their loan payments, issue stock dividends, or even pay all of their employees at current rates (including their executives). Faced with that situation, the healthier companies would most likely come to terms with their creditors and restructure their finances.

    The unlucky firms, however, would go into Chapter 7 bankruptcy, with all assets sold to pay off their creditors. That means massive layoffs, fewer flights—and realistic valuation of their assets. If the economic need for airlines really were as great as airline executives and political pundits claim, then whoever has purchased those assets at bargain prices would be able to put them to use in no time. The industry will have had its necessary cold-water bath, and asset values, along with prices of airline tickets, would settle at true market values, not the bloated numbers that pollute current airline balance sheets.

    Because the “bad effects” of allowing airlines to go under would result at first in massive layoffs, bankruptcies, and fewer passengers in the air, the media and political classes would be condemning those who voted down the federal largess. “Bad effects,” not surprisingly, are quite visible and the plight of the newly unemployed and of stranded travelers plays well on the news.

    The “good effects,” however, are less visible. By the time airline assets were sold at bankruptcy auctions and new companies hit the airport runways with market-priced capital and market-paid employees, the media would be on another crusade and the resurrection of airlines would not receive the coverage it deserved.

    By shoveling out cash to the airlines and more promises to the banks whose unsteady solvency always lurks in the background, Congress and Trump have perpetrated a financial fraud greater than much of the mess we saw on Wall Street more than a decade ago. Yes, they will receive praise in the media and votes from those grateful to have taxpayers pay their wages and salaries, but they have solved no problems and have created a generation of new ones.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 19:35

  • Car Sales In China Crash 40.8% YoY In March
    Car Sales In China Crash 40.8% YoY In March

    While China continues to fake its economic recovery, pretending to reopen businesses, only to figure out it’s facing a second coronavirus wave, new stats from China Passenger Car Association (CPCA) detailed some disturbing realities the country continues to face: crashing car sales in March. 

    CPCA data showed car sales in March plunged 40.8% from a year earlier to 1.08 million units as quarantines, limited travel, and business shutdowns still plague the second largest economy in the world.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China is the world’s biggest car market and has seen crashing sales in the last three months. However, CPCA notes during an online briefing on Thursday that sales could rebound in April.

    China is hoping for a speedy recovery, but as we’ve noted over the last month, it’s happening at a much slower rate than anyone has anticipated. Leaving some to believe, any recovery is not the widely expected V-shaped or U-shaped, but rather a possible L-shaped recovery.

    Tesla car sales in the country went against the grain last month, considering after several months of quarantine, the first thing a person does is buy a Model 3? 

    CPCA data showed the US-based electric car company recorded the highest ever monthly sales in China, coming in at 10,160 units in March, reported Reuters. The company sold around 3,900 units in February, up from 2,620 units in January. 

    With overall Chinese car sales continuing to print lower, recovery hopes for the second-largest economy, nevertheless, the world, are dim at this point. As per the latest reports from WTO and OECD on Wednesday, the global economy might already be in recession. 

     


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 19:10

  • This Curve Will Never Flatten Again: Fed Balance Sheet Hits $6.1 Trillion, Up $2 Trillion In 1 Month
    This Curve Will Never Flatten Again: Fed Balance Sheet Hits $6.1 Trillion, Up $2 Trillion In 1 Month

    Here is an example of a curve that everyone wants to flatten.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And here is an example of a curve that while some  – namely the bears – also wants to see collapse, it will never do so  as that would mean the end of western civilization – which is now entirely contingent on the level of the S&P500 – as we know it. We are talking of course, about the Fed balance sheet which is now well above $6 trillion to make sure stocks and bonds don’t crash.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With that in mind here is all you need to know about this particular “curve”:

    Total Fed assets grew by $293Bn to $6.08 trillion as of close, April 8, with the increase primarily driven by $294bn of Treasury securities added to the SOMA portfolio. Through its credit facilities, the Fed also extended $680bn in temporary liquidity to various counterparties, a decline of $61bn from last week.

    In the past month, the Fed balance sheet has increased by $2 trillion, more than all of QE3, when the balance sheet increased by $1.7 trillion over the span of a year. The balance sheet increase has also been faster on a weekly basis than anything observed during the financial crisis, increasing as follows:

    • April 8: $$272BN
    • April 1: $557BN
    • March 25: $586BN
    • March 17:$356BN

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since the Fed needs to monetize all debt issuance this year, and probably every other year now that the Treasury and Fed have merged and helicopter money has arrived, the pace of the current QE is like nothing ever observed before:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And since we know what the Fed’s POMO schedule is for next week: an increase of $225BN in TSYs and MBS…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    .. we can calculate that by next Friday, April 17, the Fed’s assets will rise to at least $6.4 trillion, almost double where the balance sheet was in early September 2019, just before hedge funds needed to be bailed out and the Fed pretended like it was saving the repo market.

    Some more details:

    • The highest utilization among the Fed’s credit facilities was the central bank liquidity swap lines, which saw its balances increase by $10bn to $358bn.
    • Temporary repo operations with primary dealers fell by $70bn to $193bn. The newly introduced repo facility for foreign central banks had a balance of only $1mm.
    • Balances in the Money Market Mutual Fund Liquidity Facility (MMLF) and the Fed discount window were relatively unchanged from last week with $53bn and $43bn, respectively.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, to make sure the balance sheet goes even more exponential soon, on Thursday, the Fed announced a new facility for municipal bonds and details for a number of other programs, including the Main Street Business Lending Program (MSBLP) and the corporate facilities. The two corporate credit facilities will receive a combined $75bn, allowing for a market footprint up to $750bn. Fed purchases will also include “fallen angels” and portions of syndicated loans. In addition, a portion of its ETF purchases in the Secondary Market Corporate Credit Facility will be allocated to high-yield ETFs.

    In terms of the other facilities, the MSBLP will receive $75 billion of equity, allowing for Fed purchases of up to $600bn in  loans.

    Meanwhile, the newly established Municipal Liquidity Facility will offer up to $500bn of lending to states and municipalities backed by $35bn in funding from the Treasury.

    Here is a recap of all the Fed’s various credit and liquiidty programs:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And finally, a comparison of how much the various liquidity programs are being used now vs 2008/9.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    * * *

    TL/DR? Here is the summary:


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 18:55

  • Why Mexico Fears Shutting Down Its Economy To Combat COVID-19
    Why Mexico Fears Shutting Down Its Economy To Combat COVID-19

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    Mexico’s president Andrés Manuel López Obrador has been reluctant to impose mandatory “social distancing” orders on the Mexican population. According to USNews, López Obrador “has maintained a relaxed public attitude” toward COVID-19, and the Mexican government did not impose a ban on “nonessential” work until March 30, long after health officials in other countries insisted Mexico must do so.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to Dr. Miguel Betancourt, president of the Mexican Society of Public Health, those measures are “too late” and “should have come weeks earlier.” But, even with legal measures in place, it’s hard to say how many Mexicans can afford to follow them. The Financial Times has described what is likely a common attitude in Mexico:

    Salvador Almonte has been doing a roaring trade in antiviral citrus cocktails at his stall in Iztapalapa, a sprawling working-class district of Mexico City. He makes about $9 to $13 a day selling juices and sandwiches and—like his customers—cannot contemplate staying at home to slow the spread of Covid-19. “We live day to day,” he said. “If we don’t work, we don’t eat.”…

    Cuauhtémoc Rivera, head of the Association of Small Businesses, warned that a quarter of a million corner shops could close, with the loss of 500,000 jobs….If this goes on for a long time, I don’t know how we’ll all survive,” said Enrique Rosas, who has a fleet of 20 taxis.

    The Mexican government is right to be hesitant to shut down Mexican businesses. The distance between a “normal” economy and grinding poverty is a lot smaller in Mexico than in a wealthy country like the United States or Germany. While mandatory lockdowns in rich countries will cause mass impoverishment—complete with all the usual mental and physical health problems that accompany it—the stakes are even higher in a middle-income country like Mexico.

    Moreover, many Mexicans are already suffering from the mandatory shutdowns in the US. In 2019, for example, Mexicans working in the United States sent more than $39 billion back to Mexico. This is a vital lifeline for many Mexicans, and these remittances are likely to be decimated by the government-forced shutdown.

    The Financial Times continues:

    Balancing the competing needs to keep citizens healthy without devastating the economy is particularly tricky in Mexico….almost 50 per cent of Mexicans live below the poverty line, another 30 per cent are vulnerable to sinking into poverty and 30m work in the informal sector, where they receive no social benefits.

    What Mexico Learned from the H1N1 Panic

    This isn’t the first time Mexicans have been commanded to lock down their economy to battle a disease.

    During the H1N1 pandemic of 2009, Mexican officials closed schools for a week, locked down various businesses, canceled movies, concerts, soccer games, and “virtually forced the entire population to wear ineffective face masks.” Mexico experienced 390 deaths out of a population of 120 million.

    This had devastating effects for Mexico’s economy, especially its tourist industry. According to the Atlantic Council:

    The cost of the pandemic was estimated at 1 percent of Mexico’s GDP in 2008….The A(H1N1) outbreak particularly impacted tourism—an important component of the Mexican economy due to its magnitude and its importance as a source of foreign currency; the tourism industry lost an average of 80 percent of its sales. After the first weeks of the quarantine, 90 percent of the country’s hotel and transportation reservations were canceled, along with 290 cruise ship arrivals. It was estimated that in 2009, Mexico lost $3.4 billion from touristic activities due to the pandemic.

    In the immediate aftermath, the Mexican government was praised and congratulated for its actions, but many later admitted the Mexican government had overreacted. According to Jorge Castañeda Gutman, former Mexican Secretary of Foreign Affairs,

    One year later the WHO acknowledged it had exaggerated, and the Mexican government was moderately criticized for the type of measures it took….The government didn’t know, or didn’t acknowledge, that this response would prove to be undoubtedly more onerous for the country than the epidemic itself.

    This disastrous impact on the Mexican economy informs the debate today in Mexico. According to Physician’s Weekly,

    The lesson is not lost on the officials running Mexico’s response in 2020, many of whom were also involved in fighting the influenza epidemic. Mexico’s economy last year suffered its first recession since 2009. [Deputy Health Minister Hugo] Lopez-Gatell said on [March 17] countries around the world were repeating Mexico’s mistake in 2009, making decisions based on anxiety and social pressure rather than science….The lesson from the flu epidemic is that acting too soon is counterproductive, he said. “Acting responsibly, we can’t and should not take measures that exhaust our society. Let’s not use up all the interventions too soon. Let’s keep our calm.”

    With the implementation of last week’s order, the business shutdowns have now begun. Unemployment will soon follow, but it’s unclear how many Mexicans can sit at home and wait things out. Many will be forced in the the informal economy to bring in at least a little income. Since far fewer Mexicans than Americans have jobs that lend themselves to “working at home,” keeping food on the table will require flouting demands that Mexicans practice “social distancing.”

    This isn’t the say things are proceeding as normal. At least one study claims ridership on public transport in Mexico has fallen by 50 percent, and traffic congestion has fallen by even more. But even big declines in usually traffic-choked Mexico City hardly signal a situation in which streets are deserted.

    How many will studiously avoid human contact outside the home? Mexican business and political culture suggests many will not. The number of annual hours worked per worker is higher in Mexico than any other country.  Moreover, according to Castañeda, Mexicans react with “skepticism with regard to anything derived from government,” and this “individualistic, incredulous attitude” applies to public health orders as well.

    It may be that many Mexicans will fear COVID-19 more than they feared H1N1. But in Mexico, many are also familiar with the hardships poverty brings, and fear of being destitute may trump fears about the disease. Although wealthy Americans with secure employment and luxurious lifestyles like Anthony Fauci continue to insist mass unemployment is merely “inconvenient,” few Mexicans have the luxury of such blasé thinking.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 18:45

  • NYC Resorts To Burying Dozens Of Coronavirus Victims In "Mass Grave" On Hart Island
    NYC Resorts To Burying Dozens Of Coronavirus Victims In "Mass Grave" On Hart Island

    Four and a half years ago, the New York Times published a feature about a man named George Bell, a Queens resident who died anonymously in his apartment, and whose body, after going unclaimed for several months, was eventually interred at the potter’s field on Hart Island, in the Bronx, where all of NYC’s unclaimed bodies are eventually buried.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    They say more than 1 million bodies have been buried on the island since shortly before the Civil War, when the city started using it as a burial ground. And now, dozens of patients who succumbed to COVID-19 will likely be buried there too as the city accelerates its potter’s field burials as morgues and funeral homes fill up.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    By now, Americans have probably seen photos of the makeshift morgues set up in ice trucks, and the hospital tents set up around the city as it battles the virus. The city has already buried some coronavirus victims on the island, and is planning more burials in the coming days. Though to be sure not all of those expected to be buried died of COVID-19.

    “It is likely that people who have passed away from (coronavirus)…will be buried on the island in the coming days,” New York City Mayor Press Secretary Freddi Goldstein told CNN.

    Instead of waiting two months to transfer an unclaimed body to the island, the city has sped up the amount of time it will hold a body to 2 weeks.

    Usually, about 25 people are buried on the island every week. But since the virus landed, that pace has accelerated to 25 a day, the city said. NYC has also said it plans to bury some victims in local city parks, a plan that was widely mocked for its ghoulishness by New Yorkers.

    Deaths across the state – but in the city especially – have been piling up in recent days, as Gov. Cuomo showed earlier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A city spokesperson added that as long as contact with a family member has been made, a body will be kept, even if it’s just a verbal claim.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 18:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 10th April 2020

  • The Project For A New American Century & The Age Of Bioweapons: 20 Years Of Psychological Terror
    The Project For A New American Century & The Age Of Bioweapons: 20 Years Of Psychological Terror

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    A little over 20 years ago, North American Aerospace Defense Command (NORAD) conducted a military exercise that involved a “hypothetical scenario” of hijacked planes flying into both the Pentagon and the World Trade Center.

    One year later, on October 24-26, 2000, another “hypothetical” military exercise was played out featuring an airline crashing into the Pentagon killing 341 people followed by yet another May 2001 Department of Defense “hypothetical scenario” which saw hundreds of medical personnel training for a “guided missile in the form of a hijacked 757 airliner” crashing into the Pentagon.

    What arose from the smoke and debris of September 11, 2001 was unlike anything the sleeping masses or international community expected.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The shock effect so traumatized the masses that quite suddenly, citizens found themselves willing to give up their liberties at home while acquiescing to any retaliatory action desired by their government abroad.

    The scale of horror was so great that the international community banded together and showed their love and solidarity towards America in the wake of the tragedy with candlelight vigils across Asia, the Middle East, Africa, Russia and South America. Humanity’s natural tendency to embrace and aid our fellow man in times of crisis expressed itself like a bright light in a world of confused darkness and a hope for a durable peace awoke in the hearts of many.

    Alas, as the world came soon to discover, that hope was short lived.

    The Neocon Takeover of America

    Police State measures grew swiftly with the Patriot Act and mass internal surveillance under the “crisis management” run by the neocon cabal in the White House. While a new type of regime change war was created abroad, Dangerous protocols for Cheney’s “Continuity of Government” were set into motion and with these procedures, new mandates for Martial Law were created amplifying the powers, financing and deployment of U.S. Military capabilities both within the USA “under crisis conditions” and around the world.

    Governments that had no connection to 9/11 were swiftly targeted for destruction using false evidence of “yellowcake” produced in the bowels of MI6, and a broader unipolar military encirclement of both Russia and China was set into motion which President Putin called out brilliantly in his famous 2007 Munich Security Conference Speech.

    Of course this should not have been a surprise for anyone who took the time to read the Project for a New American Century manifesto published in October 2000 entitled Rebuilding America’s Defenses’ (RAD).

    Under the Chairmanship of William Kristol (a neocon agent today leading the charge to impeach President Trump) and co-authored by John Bolton, Richard Perle, Dick Cheney, Paul Wolfowitz, Elliot Abrams, and Donald Rumsfeld, RAD stated that to “further the process of transformation, even if it brings revolutionary change, is likely to be a long one-absent some catastrophic and catalyzing event- like a new Pearl Harbor”. Going further to describe its Hobbesian agenda, the cabal stated that “the Cold War was a bipolar world; the 21st century world is- for the moment at least- decidedly unipolar with America as the world’s sole superpower”.

    While much has been said about the “inside job” of 9/11, a lesser appreciated terrorist act occurred over several weeks beginning on September 18, 2001 killing five and infective 17 in the form of envelopes laced with bio-weaponized anthrax.

    The Age of Bioweapons and PNAC

    This anthrax attack led quickly into the 2004 Bioshield Act with a $5 billion budget and mandate to “pre-empt and defend further bioweapon attacks”. This new chapter of the revolution in military affairs was to be coordinated from leading bioweapons facility at the Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases at Fort Detrick. Since 2002, over $50 billion has been spent on Bioweapons research and defense to date.

    The earlier October 2000 RAD document emphasized the importance which the neocon cabal placed on bioweapons (and other next generation war tech) stating:

    Combat will likely take place in new dimensions: In space, cyber-space and perhaps the world of microbes… advanced forms of biological warfare that can “target” specific genotypes may transform biological warfare from the realm of terror to a politically useful tool”.

    Lawyer and bioweapons expert Francis Boyle stated in 2007 that Fort Detrick’s mandate includes “acquiring, growing, modifying, storing, packing, and dispersing classical, emerging and genetically engineered pathogens for offensive weapon programs.” These new post-9/11 practices fully trashed the 1975 UN Convention Against Biological Weapons ratified by the USA by establishing a vast international network of bioweapons labs coordinated from Fort Detrick which would be assigned the role of doing much of the dirty work that the U.S. was “officially” prevented from doing on its own soil.

    Where Hitler used the burning of the Reichstag to justify his enabling Acts, the neocons had their 9/11. The difference in the case of America was that Cheney failed to achieve the same level of absolute control over his nation as Hitler captured by 1934 (evidenced by pushback from patriotic American military intelligence circles against Cheney’s Iran war agenda). With this neocon failure, the republic lurched on.

    The Rot Continues Under Obama

    Obama’s rise was seen as a hopeful light to many naïve Democrats who still had not realized how a “false left” vs “false right” clash had been slowly constructed over the post WWII years. Either camp increasingly found itself converging towards the same world government agenda through using somewhat dissimilar paths and flavors.

    It didn’t take long for many of Obama’s more critically-minded supporters to realize that the mass surveillance/police state measures, regime change wars, and military confrontation of Russia and China begun under Cheney not only failed to stop, but even expanded at faster rates than ever.

    In the months before Obama left office in July 2016, the classified Directive 40: National Continuity Policy was enacted creating a line of “Devolution authority” for all branches of the government to a “duplicate chain of individuals secreted outside Washington available in a catastrophic emergency”. Days prior to Trump’s inauguration, Federal Continuity Directive 1 was issued to transfer authority to military forces who could be used to suppress “insurrection, domestic violence, unlawful combination or conspiracy.”

    The Importance of Knowing This History

    There are very clearly two diametrically opposing methods of analyzing, and solving the existential crisis threatening our world currently: Multipolar or Unipolar.

    While Russia and China represent a multipolar/pro-nation state vision driven by large scale development projects that benefit all- rich and poor alike exemplified by the New Silk Road, Polar Silk Road, Space Silk Road and now Health Silk Road, something much darker is being promoted by the same financial oligarchy that owns both right and left sides of the deep state coin. These later forces have provably positioned themselves to take control of western governments under crisis conditions and are not afraid to use every weapon in their arsenal to destroy their perceived enemies… including bioweaponry. This latter uncomfortable reality was asserted quite candidly by leading officials of Iran and even the Chinese Foreign Ministry just weeks ago.

    Admittedly, whether or not the current coronavirus pandemic is a bioweapon is not yet fully proven (although growing body of evidence asserts that it is, as seen here and here and here and here). What we know for certain are the following facts:

    Numbers are being systematically misrepresented to convey much greater rates of death vs infections as dozens of leading medical experts have proven.

    Contaminated test kits have started showing up in the UK on March 30 and countless false results are showing up since covid test kits are often not differentiating between covid-19 and the typical coronavirus strains of the flu that average between 7-14% of flu cases every year. This doesn’t mean that COVID-19 should not be taken seriously, but only that the reported numbers are being artificially falsified to generate heightened panic.

    The COVID-19 Task Force at London’s Imperial College has been found to be the singular source of the false “left” vs “right” debate poisoning the west’s response to the pandemic. Teams working out of this British Intelligence nexus have generated BOTH the “do-nothing-and-wait-until-natural-resistance-evolves” herd immunity theory while simultaneously creating the “shut everything down one-size-fits-all” doomsday models being used by the WHO, UN, and leading Deep State assets like Michael Bloomberg, Steve Bannon, Bill Gates and George Soros. In case you doubt the influence of the Imperial College on world policy, a March 17 New York Times article described them in the following terms: “With ties to the World Health Organization and a team of 50 scientists, led by a prominent epidemiologist, Neil Ferguson, Imperial is treated as a sort of gold standard, its mathematical models feeding directly into government policies.”

    Investigative Journalist Whitney Webb’s February 2020 research demonstrated conclusively that DARPA had received funding in tandem with Fort Detrick since 2017 on genetic modification of novel coronaviruses (with a focus on bats) as well as the development of never before used DNA and mRNA vaccines which change the structure of DNA both for an individual and potentially for a whole race.

    Lastly, and most importantly, the pre-9/11 military exercises were not merely hypothetical scenarios but exercises which led directly into a new “Pearl Harbor” that modified the behaviour of Americans under terror, panic and misinformation like nothing ever seen before.

    The parallels to today’s coronavirus outbreak cannot be missed for anyone who has taken a serious look at the strange case of the Event 201 Global Pandemic Exercise on October 19, 2019 in New York.

    Event 201 was sponsored by the Michael Bloomberg School of Public Health at Johns Hopkins, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, U.S. Central Intelligence Agency, and World Economic Forum which ran simulations under the “hypothetical” scenario of a novel coronavirus pandemic killing 60 million people. Reviewing just one of Event 201’s many recordings openly available on their official site features some very disturbing parallels to the events unfolding today:

    Unipolar Martial Law or Multipolar Marshall Plan?

    As I outlined in my previous paper, the mass-panic generated by COVID-19 has created a 9/11-situation with the expected police state laws being passed under the radar of many people who would normally be paying attention to such things. One of the most dangerous measures enacted involved a classified bill in February which formally mandates the head of NORTHCOM (who is also the head of NORAD) to become acting President of the United States under conditions of Martial Law, un-governability of the executive branch or general chaos in America. This later scenario is not terribly unlikely considering the danger of a financial blowout of the banking system combined with economic lockdowns of the west.

    China and Russia both understand the nature of the game and both nations have acted responsibly in dealing with the outbreak of Coronavirus with China’s successful containment having won seven consecutive days of no new cases. It is important that unlike the remedies promoted by London’s Imperial College, neither Russia or China have totally shut down their nations, but have rather kept their economies alive which selecting methods for selective quarantines and lockdowns (China only locked down 15 nations plus Wuhan while the remaining 95% of their economy continued to produces and support the recovering component).

    We know that President Trump has resisted the pressure by Deep State Experts to shut down America and has stated so repeatedly, but up until his recent conversations with Xi Jinping and Putin, there were very few options available to him beyond those proposed by Dr. Fauci, the Green New Dealing Dems or “bailout everything” monetarists around Mnuchin and Kudlow.

    Now that China and Russia have begun sending cargo ships of vital medical equipment to America as part of the Health Silk Road (over the screams of neocons and neoliberal technocrats like), a new possibility for a cure has presented itself.

    • If Trump acts decisively with courage and intelligence, there is still a chance that sovereign nation states may yet stay in the drivers’ seat and use this crisis as an opportunity to force through a debt jubilee, banking reform and new Bretton Woods emergency conference to establish a foundation for a new just economic system.

    • If Trump is unsuccessful in this task, it is more than a little scary to think about what hell will beset the world in the coming months and years.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 04/10/2020 – 00:00

  • San Francisco City Officials Don't Want People Buying Guns During Pandemic
    San Francisco City Officials Don’t Want People Buying Guns During Pandemic

    San Francisco supervisors have filed a resolution urging health officials from six Bay Area counties to assess the ‘public health threat’ of ‘panic buying weapons’ during the a time of crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other words, if you feel that the country is about to fall into a crime-ridden depression where thugs might kick down your door for what’s in your fridge, you shouldn’t be able to defend yourself or your family.

    The resolution calls on the counties of Alameda, Contra Costa, Marin, San Francisco, San Mateo and Santa Clara to conduct surveys on the health threat posed by the surge in weapons purchases – using completely unsupported claims in the text, according to Breitbart.

    For example:

    WHEREAS, The NRA has induced such panic buying by engaging in reckless fear-mongering, using this national crisis as an excuse to grow corporate profits and scare more people into buying guns.

    WHEREAS, More guns do not keep Americans safe because in reality, nearly 400 million civilian-owned guns in America have not stopped 40,000 annual gun deaths and thousands of gun injuries.

    WHEREAS, Multiple studies have concluded that where there are more guns, there are more gun deaths and more guns do not stop crimes

    (Funny, Wyoming has the most guns per capita in the country and one of the lowest murder rates, while Illinois 38th in the nation in per capita ownership, yet has a sky-high murder rate).

    WHEREAS, More guns in homes during these precarious times compounds the risks of death and serious injury likely to further increase our hospital loads.

    You can read the rest here

    The NRA-ILA responded to the resolution with the following statement:

    As the old saying goes, never let a crisis go to waste, and that’s exactly how this resolution begins.  By citing the COVID-19 crisis as creating the rush to purchase firearms and ammunition, and then blaming the NRA for inducing panic buying to increase corporate profits, the resolution denies the basic truth the current crisis illustrates: Americans believe in their right to defend themselves and will seek the available means to do so.  The resolution shows how incredibly out of touch the San Francisco Board of Supervisors remain in a city that has been grossly mismanaged for decades.

    “Instead of focusing on real issues, [San Francisco supervisors] would rather waste taxpayer time and money to once again blame guns for their problems,” the NRA added.

    In short, San Francisco only wants bad guys to own guns during a crisis – while law-abiding citizens shouldn’t be able to match force and defend themselves.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 23:40

  • 9/11 Truth: Under Lockdown For Nearly Two Decades
    9/11 Truth: Under Lockdown For Nearly Two Decades

    Authored by Max Parry via The Unz Review,

    “The whole aim of practical politics is to keep the populace alarmed (and hence clamorous to be led to safety) by an endless series of hobgoblins, most of them imaginary” 

    – H.L. Mencken

    As the global pandemic grips world attention, completely unnoticed by mainstream media was the release of a final report of an academic study pertaining to another previously calamitous event of international significance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On March 25th, the conclusion of a four year investigation by researchers at the University of Alaska Fairbanks was published which determined that the collapse of World Trade Center Building 7 on September 11th, 2001 was not caused by fire. The peer-reviewed inquiry was funded by Architects & Engineers for 9/11 Truth, a nonprofit organization composed of more than 3,000 building architects and engineers who are a signatory to the group’s formal appeal calling for a new investigation into the three — not two — WTC skyscrapers destroyed on 9/11. The researchers infer that the collapse of Building 7 was actually the result of a controlled demolition:

    “The principal conclusion of our study is that fire did not cause the collapse of WTC 7 on 9/11, contrary to the conclusions of NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) and private engineering firms that studied the collapse. The secondary conclusion of our study is that the collapse of WTC 7 was a global failure involving the near-simultaneous failure of every column in the building.”

    With or without a pandemic, it is likely corporate media would have ignored the study anyway, just as they have anything that contradicts the official story of 9/11. However, it is notable that many have drawn parallels between the COVID-19 outbreak and the 9/11 attacks based on the widespread changes to daily life as a result of the crisis going forward. Already there is talk of nationwide lockdowns as a “new normal” with many rightly expressing concerns over civil liberties, press freedoms, the surveillance state, and other issues just as there were following 9/11. By the same measure, a false dichotomy is being established by political gatekeepers in order to silence those who dare challenge the official account as to how the coronavirus began. It is a stigmatization that is all too familiar to those who have never believed the conventional narrative that 19 Arab hijackers loyal to Osama bin Laden armed only with box-cutters were solely responsible for the attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon on that fateful day.

    There is a common misconception that to believe in so-called “conspiracy theories” is to somehow lose sight of the bigger picture or systemic problems. Behind this phenomenon is a mistakenly presumed conflict between understanding the broader, overarching system versus the sinister motives of those in power who administer it — when they are inextricably linked. Political scientist Michael Parenti, who drew the ire of many of his fellow left-wing colleagues for his work on the Kennedy assassination, refers to it in his lecture “Understanding Deep Politics” as a perceived incompatibility between “the structural and the functional.” The anti-conspiracists wrongly assume that the more impersonal or wider the lens, the more profound an analysis. By this logic, the elite are absolved of conscious intent and deliberate pursuit of nefarious self-interest, as if everything is done by incidental chance or out of incompetence. Not to say efficacy applies without exception, but it has become a required gesture to disassociate oneself from “conspiracies” to maintain credibility — ironically even by those who are often the target of such smears themselves.

    This applies not only to mainstream media and academics, but even leading progressive figures who have a mechanical, unthinking resistance to assigning intent or recognizing the existence of hidden agendas. As a result, it disappears the class interests of the ruling elite and ultimately assists them in providing cover for their crimes. With the exception of the Kennedy assassination — coincidentally the subject of a new epic chart-topping song by Bob Dylan — nowhere has there been more hostility to ‘conspiracism’ than regarding the events of 9/11. Just as they assailed Parenti, David Talbot and others for challenging the Warren Commission’s ‘lone gunman’ theory, leading figures on the left such as Noam Chomsky and the late Alexander Cockburn railed against the 9/11 Truth movement and today it is often wrongly equated with right-wing politics, an unlikely trajectory given it occurred under an arch-conservative administration but an inevitable result of the pseudo-left’s aversion to “conspiracies.” If polls are any indication, the average American certainly disagrees with such elitist misleaders as to the believability of the sham 9/11 Commission findings, yet another example of how out-of-touch the faux-left is with ordinary people.

    A more recent example was an article by left-wing journalist Ben Norton proclaiming that to call 9/11 a false flag or an “inside job” is “fundamentally a right-wing conspiracy”, in complete disregard of the many dedicated truther activists on the left since its inception. Norton insists the 9/11 attacks were simply “blowback”, or an unintended consequence of previous U.S. foreign policy support for the mujahideen in Afghanistan against the Soviets during the 1980s which later gave birth to Al-Qaeda and the Taliban. Norton argues “Al-Qaeda’s unofficial strategic alliance with the US eventually broke down” resulting in 9/11 as retaliation, completely overlooking that Washington was still supporting jihadist factions during the 1990s in Bosnia (two of which would be alleged 9/11 hijackers) and Kosovo in the Yugoslav wars against Serbia, even while the U.S. was ostensibly pursuing bin Laden for the bombings of two U.S. embassies in Africa in 1998 and the USS Cole in 2000.

    A 1997 Congressional document by the Republican Policy Committee (RPC) throws light on how Washington never discontinued its practice in Afghanistan of using jihadist proxies to achieve its foreign policy goals in the Balkans. Although it was a partisan GOP attack meant to discredit then-U.S. President Bill Clinton, nevertheless the memo accurately presents how the U.S. had “turned Bosnia into a Militant Islamic Base”:

    “In short, the Clinton administration’s policy of facilitating the delivery of arms to the Bosnian Muslims made it the de facto partner of an international network of governments and organizations pursuing their own agenda in Bosnia: the promotion of Islamic revolution in Europe. That network not only involves Iran but Brunei, Malaysia, Pakistan, Saudi Arabia, Sudan (a key ally of Iran), and Turkey, together with front groups supposedly pursuing humanitarian and cultural activities. For example, one such group about which details have come to light is the Third World Relief Agency (TWRA), a Sudan-based, phoney humanitarian organization which has been a major link in the arms pipeline to Bosnia. TWRA is believed to be connected with such fixtures of the Islamic terror network as Sheik Omar Abdel Rahman (the convicted mastermind behind the 1993 World Trade Center bombing) and Osama Bin Laden , a wealthy Saudi émigré believed to bankroll numerous militant groups…”

    It was also in Bosnia where a raid was conducted in 2002 by local police at the Sarajevo branch of a Saudi-based purported charitable organization, Benevolence International Foundation, which was discovered to be a front for Al-Qaeda. Seized on the premises was a document, dubbed the “Golden Chain”, which listed the major financial sponsors of the terrorist organization to be numerous Saudi business and government figures, including some of Osama bin Laden’s own brothers. By the 9/11 Commission Report’s own admission, this same fake Islamic charity “supported the Bosnian Muslims in their conflict with Serbia” at the same time as the CIA.

    It cannot go without mentioning that the common link between Al-Qaeda and subsequent extremist groups like ISIS/Daesh and Boko Haram is the doctrine of Wahhabism, the puritanical sect of Sunni Islam practiced in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and founded in the 18th century by Muhammad ibn Abd al-Wahhab, the religious leader who formed an alliance with the founder of the first Saudi state, Muhammad bin Saud, whose descendants make up the House of Saud royal family. The ultra-orthodox teachings of Wahhabism were initially rejected in the Middle East but reestablished by British colonialism which aligned with the Saud family in order to use their intolerant strain of Islam to undermine the Ottoman empire in a divide-and-conquer strategy. In a speech to the House of Commons in 1921, Winston Churchill admitted the Saudis to be “intolerant, well-armed and bloodthirsty.”

    This did not stop the British from supporting the House of Saud so long as it was in the interest of Western imperialism, an unholy alliance which continues to this day. However, U.S.-Saudi relations did come under scrutiny when the infamous 28 redacted pages of the December 2002 report of the “Joint Inquiry into Intelligence Community Activities before and after the Terrorist Attacks of September 11, 2001” conducted by the Senate and House Select Committees on Intelligence were finally disclosed in 2016. The section revealed not only the numerous U.S. intelligence failures in the lead-up to the attacks but the long suspected culpability of Saudi Arabia, whose nationals were not the focus of counterterrorism because of Riyadh’s status as a U.S. ally. The declassified pages show that some of the hijackers, 15 of them Saudi citizens, received financial and logistical support from individuals linked to the Saudi government, which FBI sources believed at least two of which to be Saudi intelligence officers. One of those Saudi agents received large payments from Princess Haifa, the wife of Saudi Prince Bandar bin Sultan, a stipend from the latter’s bank account which inevitably went from the go-betweens to the sleeper cell.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    President George W. Bush and Prince Bandar bin Sultan at Bush’s ranch in Crawford, Texas in 2002

    A key member of the House of Saud and then-Saudi Ambassador to the U.S., Prince Bandar has such a long and close relationship to the Bush family he was given the nickname “Bandar Bush.” For obvious reasons, when the congressional joint inquiry report was first published in 2003, the 28-page portion on the Saudi ties to the attacks was completely censored at the insistence of the Bush administration. Yet the Bush family’s connection to the Gulf state kingdom is not limited to the ruling monarchy but includes one of the petrodollar theocracy’s other wealthiest families— the bin Laden family itself. While Michael Moore’s film Fahrenheit 9/11 mostly whitewashed the real conspiracy of 9/11 it did reveal that numerous unquestioned members of the bin Laden family were given special treatment and suspiciously evacuated on secret flights out of the U.S. shortly after the attacks in coordination with the Saudi government.

    The Bush-bin Laden connection goes all the way back to the beginning of George W. Bush’s business career prior to his political involvement in 1976 with the founding of an oil drilling company, Arbusto Energy, whose earliest investors included a Texas businessman and fellow reservist in the Texas Air National Guard, James R. Bath, who oddly enough was the American liaison for Salem bin Laden, Osama’s half brother. To put it differently, the bin Laden family and its construction fortune helped finance Bush’s start in the oil industry, a relationship that would continue through the 1990s with Harken Energy, later the recipient of an offshore oil contract in Iraq’s reconstruction alongside Dick Cheney’s Halliburton. The Bush dynasty’s financial ties to both the Saudi royals and bin Laden family went on as co-investors in the Carlyle Group private equity firm where the elder Bush’s previous government service contacts were exploited for financial gain. In fact, on the morning of 9/11, Bush Sr. just happened to be attending a Carlyle business conference where another bin Laden sibling was the guest of honor in what we are supposed to believe is another astounding coincidence. Just days later, Shafiq bin Laden would be spirited off on a chartered flight back to Saudi Arabia in an exodus overseen by Prince Bandar himself.

    Osama bin Laden himself also got an evacuation of sorts when the U.S. invaded Afghanistan in 2001. It was legendary Pulitzer Prize-winning journalist Seymour Hersh who first reported that bin Laden and thousands of other Al-Qaeda and Taliban fighters were suspiciously allowed to escape to Pakistan in an evacuation dubbed the ‘airlift of evil.’ This was corroborated in a leaked 2009 Hillary Clinton State Department email published by WikiLeaks regarding a Senate report on the Battle of Tora Bora and bin Laden’s escape where Clinton advisor Sidney Blumenthal is shown discussing the controversial airlift as having been requested by Pakistani President Pervez Musharraf and approved by Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld and Vice President Dick Cheney — but don’t dare call it a conspiracy:

    “Gary Berntsen, the head of the CIA armed operation in eastern Afghanistan, is a major source for the report. I am in contact with him and have heard his entire story at length, key parts of which are not in his book, Jawbreaker, or in the Senate report. In particular , the story of the Kunduz airlift of the bulk of key AQ and Taliban leaders, at the request of Musharaff and per order Cheney/Rumsfeld, is absent.”

    Could it have anything to do with just a few years earlier the Taliban visiting Texaswhen Bush was Governor to discuss with the Unocal Corporation the construction of a gas pipeline through Afghanistan into Pakistan? It is also well known that the Pakistani government and its Inter-Services Intelligence Agency (ISI) had supported the Taliban for decades and during the 1980s had been the CIA’s main conduit for supplying arms to the Afghan mujahideen, including bin Laden and Ayman al-Zawahiri’s Maktab al-Khidamat, the organizational precursor to Al-Qaeda. As shown in the documentary 9/11: Press for Truth, little in their relations changed in the years between the Afghan-Soviet war and 9/11, as ISI director Mahmud Ahmed was reportedly busted wiring $100,000 to alleged hijacker ringleader Mohamed Atta not long before the WTC attacks. Throughout 2001 both before and after 9/11, General Ahmed had repeatedly visited the U.S. and met with top Pentagon and Bush administration officials, including CIA Director George Tenet, making Prince Bandar not the only figure to have been caught financing the operation and where a direct line can be drawn between the White House and the hijackers.

    While Bandar has thus far eluded justice, one year after the release of the 28 pages a lawsuit was filed on behalf of the families of the victims against the government of Saudi Arabia which presented new evidence that two years prior to the attacks in 1999, the Saudi Embassy paid for the flights of two Saudi agents living undercover in the U.S. to fly from Phoenix to Washington “in a dry run for the 9/11 attacks” where they attempted to breach the cockpit and test flight security. This means the Saudi government was likely involved in planning the attacks from the very beginning, in addition to providing the subsidies and patsy hijacker personnel for the smokescreen of blaming Al-Qaeda and making bin Laden the fall guy, whose links to 9/11 are tenuous at best. After all, the “confession” from supposed planner Khalid Sheikh Mohammed was extracted only after his being water-boarded 183 times while bin Laden himself initially denied any role in the attacks before questionable videos were released of his admittance.

    The Saudi nationals who participated in the hijacking rehearsal were posing as students. However, the Sunni dictatorship was not the only country conducting a mass espionage operation in the U.S. prior to 9/11 under such a front. In the first half of 2001, several U.S. federal law enforcement agencies documented more than 130 different instances of young Israelis impersonating “art students” while aggressively trying to penetrate the security of various government and military facilities as part of a Mossad spy ring. Several of the Israelis were found to be living in locations within the near vicinity of the hijackers as if they were eavesdropping on them. The discovery of the Israeli operation raised many questions, namely whether Mossad had advanced knowledge or involvement in 9/11. Ironically, Fox News of all places was one of the few outlets to cover the story in a four-part series which never re-aired and was eventually scrubbed from the network website.

    The Israeli “art student” mystery never gained traction in the rest of the media, much like another suspicious case in the “Dancing Israelis”, a smaller group of Mossad spies posing as furnishing movers who were arrested in New Jersey on the morning of 9/11 taking celebratory pictures with the twin towers burning in the background of the Manhattan skyline. The five men were not only physically present at the waterfront prior to the first plane impact but found with thousands of dollars in cash, box-cutters, fake passports, and Arab clothing after they were reported for suspicious behavior and intercepted at the Lincoln tunnel heading into Manhattan. Initially misreported as Arabs by the media, the men were connected to Mossad by an FBI database and held for five months before their deportation to Israel while the owner of the front moving company fled to Jerusalem before further questioning. It should be noted that if Israel were to have participated in a ‘false flag’ attack on the U.S., it would not have been the first time. During the Six-Day War in 1967, the Israeli Air Force and Navy launched an unprovoked attack on the USS Liberty, a U.S. Navy spy ship that was surveilling the Arab-Israeli conflict from international waters in the Mediterranean, an “accidental” assault which killed 34 Americans in an attempt to blame Egypt and provoke U.S. intervention.

    If Israel turned out to be co-conspirators with the Saudis, it too is not as unlikely a scenario as it may seem. Wrongly assumed to be sworn enemies, it is an open secret that the two British-created states have maintained a historical covert alliance since the end of World War I when the first monarch of the modern Saudi state, King Abdulaziz Ibn Saud, defeated his rival the Sharif of Mecca who opposed the Balfour Declaration. Authored by British Foreign Secretary Lord Balfour and presented to Zionist leader Baron Rothschild, the 1917 letter guaranteed a Jewish homeland in Palestine by colonization with European Jews. Once Sharif was out the way, the Zionist movement had the green light to move forward with its colonial project. Although Ibn Saud publicly opposed Zionism, behind the scenes he negotiated with them through an intermediary in his advisor, British agent St. John Philby, who proposed a £20 million compensation to the Saudi king for delivering Palestine to the Jews.

    Ibn Saud communicated his willingness to compromise in a 1940 letter from Philby to Chaim Weizmann, the president of the World Zionist Organization and later the first Israeli president. However, Philby himself was an anti-Zionist and sabotaged the plan by leaking it to other Arab leaders who voiced their vehement opposition and it was only after this exposure that the Saudi king claimed to have turned down the bribe, something the Zionists would only solicit if they thought he would accept. Ever since, the ideologies of Saudi Wahhabism and Israeli Zionism have been center to the West’s destabilization of the Middle East which contrary to misperceptions was not uniquely plagued by conflict historically more than the Occident until the West nurtured Salafism and Zionism. Predictably, discussing either the Saudi or Israeli role in 9/11 has been strictly forbidden in corporate media, since both are among Washington’s geo-strategic allies and each hold immense lobbying power over large media institutions.

    Less than five months after 9/11, Bush notoriously declared the nations of Iran, Iraq and North Korea as comprising an “axis of evil” in his 2002 state of the union address. In reality, the phrase is better suited to describe the tripartite of Saudi Arabia, Israel, and the U.S. government itself who are likely the real trio of conspirators behind 9/11. The infamous choice of words were attributed to neoconservative pundit and Bush speechwriter, David Frum, who claimed to have taken inspiration from Franklin D. Roosevelt’s “a date that will live infamy” speech given the day after the Japanese bombing of Pearl Harbor in 1941. It was a continuation of a theme present in the manifesto of the neoconservative cabal authored one year prior to 9/11 — “Rebuilding America’s Defenses” by the Project for the New American Century (PNAC) think tank, whose members included Dick Cheney, Donald Rumsfeld, Paul Wolfowitz and Jeb Bush. The strategic military blueprint called for a massive increase in U.S. defense spending in order to “fight and decisively win multiple, simultaneous major theatre wars”before ominously predicting:

    “The process of transformation, even if it brings revolutionary change, is likely to be a long one, absent some catastrophic and catalyzing event — like a new Pearl Harbor.

    Ten members of PNAC would be subsequently appointed to positions in the Bush White House where their vision of a “new Pearl Harbor” conveniently materialized. Then again, there is plenty of evidence that Pearl Harbor itself was a ‘false flag’, or that U.S. intelligence and President Franklin D. Roosevelt had foreknowledge of an impending Japanese attack on the naval base in Oahu, Hawaii, on December 7th, 1941. As pointed out by the film Loose Change, it is probable that Roosevelt allowed it to happen on purpose in order to win public support for a U.S. entry into the European theatre of World War II, a move opposed by a majority of Americans prior to the ‘surprise’ Japanese attack. Given what is known about Pearl Harbor and the abandoned Operation Northwoods, which proposed both fabricating and committing terrorist attacks on civilian aircraft to be pinned on Fidel Castro in order to justify a U.S. invasion of Cuba in 1962, there are no grounds to assume that such false flag operations were ever phased out of military procedure before 9/11 or since.

    Loose Change also made a useful historical analogy between 9/11 and the Reichstag fire, the 1933 arson attack on the German parliament building that occurred a month after Adolf Hitler was inaugurated as Chancellor and pinned on a 24-year old half-blind Dutch communist named Marinus van der Lubbe. While there is no denying the incident was used a pretext by the Nazi regime to consolidate power and suspend law and order, there is still a heated debate between historians as to whether van der Lubbe was the real culprit. However, it was coincidentally in 2001 when a group of historians uncovered evidence that a Nazi stormtrooper who died under mysterious circumstances in 1933 had previously confessed to prosecutors that members of Hitler’s Storm Detachment had set fire to the edifice under orders from paramilitary leader Karl Ernst, lending credence to the widely held suspicion that it was a Nazi-engineered ‘false flag’ all along.

    Most Americans are unaware that a similar coup d’etat nearly took place during the same year in the United States in an attempt to remove President Franklin D. Roosevelt and install an authoritarian government modeled on Fascist Italy and Nazi Germany as part of a scheme hatched by an inner circle of right-wing bankers otherwise known as the the ‘Business Plot.’ It was a conspiracy that only became public after it was heroically thwarted by a whistleblower in decorated Marine Corps veteran turned anti-imperialist, Major General Smedley Butler, after he was recruited to form the junta. Incredibly, one of the prominent business figures implicated in the putsch was none other than future Connecticut Senator Prescott Bush, George H.W. Bush’s father and George W. Bush’s grandfather, who at the time was the director and shareholder of a bank owned by German industrialist and prominent Nazi financier Fritz Thyssen seized by the U.S. government under the Trading with the Enemy Act.

    After his transformation, in 1935 Smedley Butler famously penned War is a Racketand there is perhaps no better phrase that would sum up the so-called ‘War on Terror’ today. Not only did the American Reichstag fire of 9/11 trigger a domestic police state transformation that overrode the U.S. constitution in an American equivalent of the 1933 Enabling Act and the Heimatschutz (“homeland protection”) defense forces with the passing of the USA-Patriot Act and founding of the Department of Homeland Security, but it fulfilled the prophecy of political scientist Samuel Huntington’s The Clash of Civilizations in a face-off between Islam and Christianity abroad. The prediction that religion and culture would be the primary source of geopolitical conflict in the post-Cold War world was an apocalyptic paradigm envisioned by right-wing orientalist philosophers like Huntington and Bernard Lewis which the PNAC neocon ideologues put into practice. Today, the ongoing COVID-19 crisis appears likely to have similar broad and long-term political, social and economic consequences and those who have doubts about the official explanation for the pandemic can hardly be blamed for their distrust given this history unless the lessons of 9/11 have gone unlearned.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 23:20

  • Vice, Vice, Baby! Americans (Ab)Use Porn, Booze, & Chocolate To Cope With Lockdown
    Vice, Vice, Baby! Americans (Ab)Use Porn, Booze, & Chocolate To Cope With Lockdown

    To cope with lockdown stress, job loss, and or just being housebound and bored over the last month, millions of Americans have resorted to watching porn, drinking beer, smoking pot, and or devouring chocolate amid coronavirus lockdowns that covers at least 90% of the country, reported Reuters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From February 24 to March 17, Pornhub recorded a 12% increase in global traffic. We noted in mid-March, the porn site offered free premium accounts to anyone in Italy as the virus crisis intensified. By the end of March, Americans were given free access to Pornhub Premium as a way to “Help Flatten the Curve.” During the month, a huge influx of coronavirus themed porn videos hit the site, as it appears amateur porn stars in quarantine had nothing else better to do. 

    The love lockdown, as some are calling it, also saw people panic buying sex toys. Lingerie chain Ann Summers reported that dildos sales surged 27% in the last week of March over the same period the previous year.

    For the four weeks ending March 22, dollar sales for top beer companies jumped over last year’s figures. With restaurants and bars closed, Americans panic hoarded beer, according to Brewbound. Over the period, beer sales from top brands erupted: Anheuser-Busch InBev recorded +11.6%, Molson Coors +10.6%, Constellation Brands +24%, Mark Anthony Brands +124%, Heineken USA +7.5%, Boston Beer +55.1%, Diageo +13.3, and Pabst +11.1%. 

    Top hard seltzer brands, Mark Anthony’s White Claw and Boston Beer’s Truly saw triple-digit growth trends, up 363.5% and 226.1%, respectively, over the period.

    If porn watching and boozing weren’t enough, Americans were self-medicating with marijuana, melting in their couches as they “Netflix and quarantined.” Flowhub said California, Colorado, Oregon, and Alaska reported a 50% increase in pot sales from Mach 16-22.

    As a result of the pandemic, many Americans have resorted to comfort food, such as chocolate and pizza:

    “I think as you look across all of the categories, we are seeing really big increases,” Nestle USA Chairman and CEO Steve Presley recently told Yahoo Finance’s The First Trade.

    Nestle not only makes chocolate products. “We have such a broad portfolio in the U.S. we see spikes across all of our businesses really with the exception being the out of home business obviously,” Presley said.

    The risk many Americans have in quarantine is that they’re not exercising and living healthy lifestyles. Instead, they’re resorting to life’s vices to numb the pain of a pandemic.

    And the question everyone is asking, how much longer are Americans going to be confined to their homes.

    Well, the so-called Wall Street virologists at JPMorgan believe the US could be in the late accumulation phase with a possible inflection point in the coming weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But as Harvard’s T.H. Chan School of Public Health recently noted in a study titled “Social distancing strategies for curbing the COVID-19 epidemic,” some form of social distancing could remain in place through 2022, which would suggest American better get used to extended lockdowns while enjoying life’s vices… 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 23:00

  • In Late Thriller, OPEC Production Cut Deal Collapses After Mexico Gives Crown Prince The Finger
    In Late Thriller, OPEC Production Cut Deal Collapses After Mexico Gives Crown Prince The Finger

    Earlier today we reported that following a dramatic objection to the OPEC+ production cut which was agreed upon by Russia and Saudi Arabia (but few other OPEC members), Mexico had initially threatened to quit OPEC as it refused to comply with the imposed 23% cut forced on all members, but less than an hour later the southern US neighbor reportedly had changed its mind as Reuters reported that Mexico had in fact agreed to the OPEC+ production cut deal after all.

    Well, scratch all that because it appears the Reuters “news” was fake, sourced from some conflicted Saudi minister who wanted to put Mexico in a position where it had no choice but to accept the reality that had been imposed upon it. Unfortunately for the Saudis, this “plan” was laughable and late on Thursday, Mexico logged off the OPEC+ alliance’s videoconference emergency meeting after nine hours of talks Thursday, without agreeing to the landmark 10 million b/d production cut accord that members were hoping could stem a bruising rout in oil prices caused by the coronavirus pandemic and send the price of oil surging, S&P Global Platts reported, whose sources we can now confirm are far more credible than those of Reuters.

    The rest of the coalition, led by Saudi Arabia and Russia, were in discussions over how to proceed, with many ministers angry over the potential blow-up of the deal.  The coalition will likely try to convince Mexico again Friday at a G20 energy ministerial that was originally scheduled to seek the participation of the US, Canada, Brazil and other key producers outside of OPEC+ to join its efforts.

    But while the participation of G-20 non-OPEC members in the production cut deal is optional, Mexico’s isn’t and in fact has veto power, with Bloomberg reporting that unless Mexico agrees to be bound by the deal (something about a cartel and what not), the rest of OPEC+ wont’ cut oil production, threatening to send the price of oil crashing on Friday if oil exporters fail to agree on removing 10MM b/d from the market, an outcome that would result in storage spaces running out as soon as May and sending landlocked oil prices negative.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what does Mexico want?

    Well, it wants to have its cake, and eat almost all of it too: Mexico proposed an oil production cut of just 100k b/d over the next 2 months to help stabilize oil prices, Energy Secretary Rocio Nahle Garcia said in a statement on Twitter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is a problem because it means that while all OPEC+ members are equal – all those who are cutting production by roughly 23% – some are more equal than others, namely Mexico, whose production would have dropped to 1.681m b/d from 1.781m b/d in March, while under the OPEC plan, Mexico was required to cut production by 400,000 barrels a day, from a starting point of 1,753 million barrels a day to 1,353m barrels a day.

    And if Mexico is granted a loophole, then all other OPEC members – at least the non-Saudi ones – would demand similar treatment, forcing Saudi Arabia to should all of the production cuts, which would then nearly double from 4MMb/d to 8MMb/d. Needless to say that is a nonstarter, and explains why OPEC was quick to balk and warn that unless Mexico also agrees to cut by 23%, then the entire deal is off, and Brent, which was last trading at $32 would plunge 30%, maybe 40% overnight as the massive oversupply into a world which has 35MMb/d less oil demand, would continue indefinitely.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we reported earlier, under the proposed deal, the 10 million b/d OPEC+ cuts would cover the months of May and June, and then be rolled back to 8 million b/d for the rest of 2020, and then down to 6 million b/d for all of 2021 through April 22.

    Each member would lower its output 23% from its October 2018 levels, except for Saudi Arabia and Russia, who would make their cuts from a baseline of 11 million b/d. That means both countries would limit their production to 8.5 million b/d for the initial two months of the deal.

    Saudi Arabia, the world’s largest crude exporter, said it had ramped up its crude output to a record 12 million b/d this month. Russia, meanwhile, pumped 10.5 million b/d of crude in March, according to S&P Global Platts Analytics.

    But Mexico balked at its new quota of 1.353 million b/d, as the country plans to unveil a $13.5 billion energy investment package to help state oil company Pemex raise its production to 2 million b/d by the end of the year, according to Platts. In other words, the country’s entire budget depends on pumping as much oil as possible. Furthermore, with Mexico’s industrial production now imploding even as domestic coronavirus cases rise exponentially, the last thing AMLO will do is accept a world in which the country’s much needed dollar-denominated revenues are cut by almost a quarter.

    In the end it was AMLO who killed the deal: Mexico initially agreed to the cut and the coalition was on the verge of finalizing the deal, before its delegation asked for time to consult with President Andres Manuel Lopez Obrador, sources said. Those consultations and continued haggling over its cut went on for almost four hours, but Mexico stayed firm.

    As the impasse lingered, US President Donald Trump, who had convinced Saudi Arabia and Russia to set aside their oil price war and come to the negotiating table, made a phone call with Saudi King Salman and Russian President Vladimir Putin, according to Dan Scavino Jr., a White House aide.

    After speaking with the leaders for 90 minutes, he told reporters that he believed the OPEC+ coalition was close to a deal but did not reveal any details.

    “We had a really good talk, but we’ll see what happens,” Trump said. “As you know, OPEC met today and I would say they are getting close to a deal and we will soon find out.”

    Little did he know that his southern neighbor president had different plans, and now the entire deal is on the verge of collapse.

    Today’s OPEC webcast came after a week of furious petrodiplomacy and back channel pressure by Trump for a deal that could rescue ailing US shale producers, even as Trump is reluctant to commit US companies to participating in any OPEC+ pact, despite urging by Saudi Arabia and Russia, and antitrust laws make any collective action legally impossible.

    Instead, US Energy Secretary Dan Brouillette is expected to tell the G20 ministerial meeting Friday that some 2 million b/d of US production is forecast to be shut in over the next year, according to a person briefed on his plans; this was a non-starter for Russia and the Saudis until yesterday, but then the two nations quietly conceded to the US position.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And then, Mexico’s unexpected objection could make it all moot.

    Meanwhile, the price of oil is one flashing red headline from cratering. The OPEC secretariat has forecast a 6.8 million b/d contraction in global oil demand for the whole of 2020, including close to 12 million b/d “and expanding” for the second quarter, Barkindo told the ministers who earlier toldthe group that the market outlook was “horrifying” and explained that at current rates of supply and demand, global crude oil storage capacity will fill up in the month of May, he said.

    “These are staggering numbers,” he said, adding that the coronavirus outbreak had “upended market supply and demand fundamentals.”

    Sources said Saudi Arabia had sought an even bigger OPEC+ cut of 15 million b/d but could not get Russia to agree. The two countries had feuded at the last OPEC+ meeting on March 6, when the impact of the coronavirus was already forcing analysts to downgrade their demand forecasts, with Russia balking at a Saudi-led proposal for cuts totaling 3.2 million b/d.

    Back at the table again this time, they first agreed a deal between themselves, then spent most of Thursday’s meeting trying to convince smaller producers and tweaking the numbers.

    Mexico was the last holdout, and with the deal requiring unanimous agreement, the relatively small oil producer suddenly had infinite leverage to demand its own deal. The problem is that unless AMLO concedes to the terms of the deal, it is about to get exponentially worse for Mexico and the rest of the cartel.

    One last point: even a 10mmb/d production cut – the best the world can expect at this point – is nothing considering the 35mmb/d plunge in oil demand. According to Goldman, even with a 10mmb/d cut – the biggest in history – shut ins will still be required until June to balance the market. We doubt anyone will volunteer…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which means it all depends on tomorrow’s Friday’s G20 meeting which will be chaired by Saudi energy minister Prince Abdulaziz bin Salman and is scheduled to begin at 1400 GMT: either Mexico agrees to the cut, or oil is about to crater (even more), while the Mexican peso will plunge to new all time lows. Finally, as Platts reports, with Mexico not the only country needing convincing, the G20 summit promises to be another test of geopolitical wills.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 22:55

  • Escobar: Who Profits From The Pandemic?
    Escobar: Who Profits From The Pandemic?

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    You don’t need to read Michel Foucault’s work on biopolitics to understand that neoliberalism – in deep crisis since at least 2008 – is a control/governing technique in which surveillance capitalism is deeply embedded.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But now, with the world-system collapsing at breathtaking speed, neoliberalism is at a loss to deal with the next stage of dystopia, ever present in our hyper-connected angst: global mass unemployment.

    Henry Kissinger, anointed oracle/gatekeeper of the ruling class, is predictably scared. He claims that, “sustaining the public trust is crucial to social solidarity.” He’s convinced the Hegemon should “safeguard the principles of the liberal world order.” Otherwise, “failure could set the world on fire.”

    That’s so quaint. Public trust is dead across the spectrum. The liberal world “order” is now social Darwinist chaos. Just wait for the fire to rage.

    The numbers are staggering. The Japan-based Asian Development Bank (ADB), in its annual economic report, may not have been exactly original. But it did note that the impact of the “worst pandemic in a century” will be as high as $4.1 trillion, or 4.8 percent of global GDP.

    This an underestimation, as “supply disruptions, interrupted remittances, possible social and financial crises, and long-term effects on health care and education are excluded from the analysis.”

    We cannot even start to imagine the cataclysmic social consequences of the crash. Entire sub-sectors of the global economy may not be recomposed at all.

    The International Labor Organization (ILO) forecasts global unemployment at a conservative, additonal 24.7 million people – especially in aviation, tourism and hospitality.

    The global aviation industry is a humongous $2.7 trillion business. That’s 3.6 percent of global GDP. It employs 2.7 million people. When you add air transport and tourism —everything from hotels and restaurants to theme parks and museums — it accounts for a minimum of 65.5 million jobs around the world.

    According to the ILO, income losses for workers may range from $860 billion to an astonishing $3.4 trillion. “Working poverty” will be the new normal – especially across the Global South.

    “Working poor,” in ILO terminology, means employed people living in households with a per capita income below the poverty line of $2 a day. As many as an additional 35 million people worldwide will become working poor in 2020.

    Switching to feasible perspectives for global trade, it’s enlightening to examine that this report about how the economy may rebound is centered on the notorious hyperactive merchants and traders of Yiwu in eastern China – the world’s busiest small-commodity, business hub.

    Their experience spells out a long and difficult recovery. As the rest of the world is in a coma, Lu Ting, chief China economist at Nomura in Hong Kong stresses that China faces a 30 percent decline in external demand at least until next Fall.

    Neoliberalism in Reverse?

    In the next stage, the strategic competition between the U.S. and China will be no-holds-barred, as emerging narratives of China’s new, multifaceted global role – on trade, technology, cyberspace, climate change – will set in, even more far-reaching than the New Silk Roads. That will also be the case in global public health policies. Get ready for an accelerated Hybrid War between the “Chinese virus” narrative and the Health Silk Road.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    San Miguel, Bulacan, Philippines, 2016. (Judgefloro, CC0, Wikimedia Commons)

    The latest report by the China Institute of International Studies would be quite helpful for the West — hubris permitting — to understand how Beijing adopted key measures putting the health and safety of the general population first.

    Now, as the Chinese economy slowly picks up, hordes of fund managers from across Asia are tracking everything from trips on the metro to noodle consumption to preview what kind of economy may emerge post-lockdown.

    In contrast, across the West, the prevailing doom and gloom elicited a priceless editorial from The Financial Times. Like James Brown in the 1980s Blues Brothers pop epic, the City of London seems to have seen the light, or at least giving the impression it really means it. Neoliberalism in reverse. New social contract. “Secure” labor markets. Redistribution.

    Cynics won’t be fooled. The cryogenic state of the global economy spells out a vicious Great Depression 2.0 and an unemployment tsunami. The plebs eventually reaching for the pitchforks and the AR-15s en masse is now a distinct possibility. Might as well start throwing a few breadcrumbs to the beggars’ banquet.

    That may apply to European latitudes. But the American story is in a class by itself.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mural, Seattle, February 2017. (Mitchell Haindfield, Flickr)

    For decades, we were led to believe that the world-system put in place after WWII provided the U.S. with unrivalled structural power. Now, all that’s left is structural fragility, grotesque inequalities, unpayable Himalayas of debt, and a rolling crisis.

    No one is fooled anymore by the Fed’s magic quantitative easing powers, or the acronym salad – TALF, ESF, SPV – built into the Fed/U.S. Treasury exclusive obsession with big banks, corporations and the Goddess of the Market, to the detriment of the average American.

    It was only a few months ago that a serious discussion evolved around the $2.5 quadrillion derivatives market imploding and collapsing the global economy, based on the price of oil skyrocketing, in case the Strait of Hormuz – for whatever reason – was shut down.

    Now it’s about Great Depression 2.0: the whole system crashing as a result of the shutdown of the global economy. The questions are absolutely legitimate: is the political and social cataclysm of the global economic crisis arguably a larger catastrophe than Covid-19 itself?  And will it provide an opportunity to end neoliberalism and usher in a more equitable system, or something even worse?

     ‘Transparent’ BlackRock

    Wall Street, of course, lives in an alternative universe. In a nutshell, Wall Street turned the Fed into a hedge fund. The Fed is going to own at least two thirds of all U.S. Treasury bills in the market before the end of 2020.

    The U.S. Treasury will be buying every security and loan in sight while the Fed will be the banker – financing the whole scheme.

    So essentially this is a Fed/Treasury merger. A behemoth dispensing loads of helicopter money.

    And the winner is BlackRock—the biggest money manager on the planet, with tentacles everywhere, managing the assets of over 170 pension funds, banks, foundations, insurance companies, in fact a great deal of the money in private equity and hedge funds. BlackRock — promising to be fully  “transparent” — will buy these securities and manage those dodgy SPVs on behalf of the Treasury.

    BlackRock, founded in 1988 by Larry Fink, may not be as big as Vanguard, but it’s the top investor in Goldman Sachs, along with Vanguard and State Street, and with $6.5 trillion in assets, bigger than Goldman Sachs, JP Morgan and Deutsche Bank combined.

    Now, BlackRock is the new operating system (OS) of the Fed and the Treasury. The world’s biggest shadow bank – and no, it’s not Chinese.

    Compared to this high-stakes game, mini-scandals such as the one around Georgia Senator Kelly Loffler are peanuts. Loffler allegedly profited from inside information on Covid-19 by the CDC to make a stock market killing. Loffler is married to Jeffrey Sprecher – who happens to be the chairman of the NYSE, installed by Goldman Sachs.

    While corporate media followed this story like headless chickens, post-Covid-19 plans, in Pentagon parlance, “move forward” by stealth.

    The price? A meager $1,200 check per person for a month. Anyone knows that, based on median salary income, a typical American family would need $12,000 to survive for two months. Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin, in an act of supreme effrontry, allows them a mere 10 percent of that. So American taxpayers will be left with a tsunami of debt while selected Wall Street players grab the whole loot, part of an unparalleled transfer of wealth upwards, complete with bankruptcies en masse of small and medium businesses.

    Fink’s letter to his shareholders almost gives the game away: “I believe we are on the edge of a fundamental reshaping of finance.”

    And right on cue, he forecasted that, “in the near future – and sooner than most anticipate – there will be a significant reallocation of capital.”

    He was referring, then, to climate change. Now that refers to Covid-19.

    Implant Our Nanochip, Or Else?

    The game ahead for the elites, taking advantage of the crisis, might well contain these four elements:

    1. a social credit system,

    2. mandatory vaccination,

    3. a digital currency,

    4. and a Universal Basic Income (UBI).

    This is what used to be called, according to the decades-old, time-tested CIA playbook, a “conspiracy theory.” Well, it might actually happen.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    West Virginia National Guard members reporting to a Charleston nursing home to assist with Covid-19 testing. April 6, 2020. (U.S. Army National Guard, Edwin L. Wriston)

    A social credit system is something that China set up already in 2014. Before the end of 2020, every Chinese citizen will be assigned his/her own credit score – a de facto “dynamic profile”, elaborated with extensive use of AI and the internet of things (IoT), including ubiquitous facial recognition technology. This implies, of course, 24/7 surveillance, complete with Blade Runner-style roving robotic birds.

    The U.S., the U.K., France, Germany, Canada, Russia and India may not be far behind. Germany, for instance, is tweaking its universal credit rating system, SCHUFA. France has an ID app very similar to the Chinese model, verified by facial recognition.

    Mandatory vaccination is Bill Gates’s dream, working in conjunction with the WHO, the World Economic Forum (WEF) and Big Pharma. He wants “billions of doses” to be enforced over the Global South. And it could be a cover to everyone getting a digital implant.

    Here it is, in his own words. At 34:15:

    “Eventually what we’ll have to have is certificates of who’s a recovered person, who’s a vaccinated person…Because you don’t want people moving around the world where you’ll have some countries that won’t have it under control, sadly. You don’t want to completely block off the ability for people to go there and come back and move around.”

    Then comes the last sentence which was erased from the official TED video. This was noted by Rosemary Frei, who has a master on molecular biology and is an independent investigative journalist in Canada. Gates says: “So eventually there will be this digital immunity proof that will help facilitate the global reopening up.”

    This “digital immunity proof” is crucial to keep in mind, something that could be misused by the state for nefarious purposes.

    The three top candidates to produce a coronavirus vaccine are American biotech firm Moderna, as well as Germans CureVac and BioNTech.

    Digital cash might then become an offspring of blockchain. Not only the U.S., but China and Russia are also interested in a national crypto-currency. A global currency – of course controlled by central bankers – may soon be adopted in the form of a basket of currencies, and would circulate virtually. Endless permutations of the toxic cocktail of IoT, blockchain technology and the social credit system could loom ahead.

    Already Spain has announced that it is introducing UBI, and wants it to be permanent. It’s a form insurance for the elite against social uprisings, especially if millions of jobs never come back.

    So the key working hypothesis is that Covid-19 could be used as cover for the usual suspects to bring in a new digital financial system and a mandatory vaccine with a “digital identity” nanochip with dissent not tolerated: what Slavoj Zizek calls the “erotic dream” of every totalitarian government.

    Yet underneath it all, amid so much anxiety, a pent-up rage seems to be gathering strength, to eventually explode in unforeseeable ways. As much as the system may be changing at breakneck speed, there’s no guarantee even the 0.1 percent will be safe.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 22:40

  • Sailor From Virus-Stricken Carrier Found Unresponsive As Over 400 Crew Infected
    Sailor From Virus-Stricken Carrier Found Unresponsive As Over 400 Crew Infected

    The nuclear carrier USS Theodore Roosevelt coronavirus disaster has gotten worse, as on Thursday more than 400 sailors tested positive for COVID-19. Alarmingly, one sailor was found unresponsive as the ship was docked at a naval base in Guam and immediately transported to a military intensive care unit at the base.

    The sailor tested positive for coronavirus on March 30 and was found unconscious Thursday, he has been admitted to the intensive care unit of the US Navy Hospital on Guam,” a Navy statement said, according to CNN.

    It’s being described as the first hospitalization after the crisis aboard the ship caused the USS Roosevelt to divert its mission from the Western Pacific two weeks ago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    USS Theodore Roosevelt in Guam. Image via US Navy

    The Navy says at this point 97% of the ship’s some 4,000+ crew members have been tested. “We’ve tested almost the whole crew now. We still have about 1,000 tests to report out,” the Vice Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Gen. John Hyten said during a Pentagon briefing Thursday. “But 3,170 tested negative, 416 tested positive, 187 of those were symptomatic, 229 were asymptomatic. We still have 1,164 pending results.”

    This means nearly ten percent of the crew is infected with COVID-19. “Sadly this morning we had our first hospitalization of the one sailor,” Hyten added. “We’re hoping that that sailor recovers, we are praying for him and his family and his shipmates.”

    “I think it’s not a good idea to think the Teddy Roosevelt is a one-of-a-kind issue. We have too many ships at sea, we have too many deployed capabilities. There’s 5,000 sailors on a nuclear-powered aircraft carrier. To think it will never happen again is not a good way to plan. What we have to do is figure out how to plan in these kind of Covid environments,” Hyten said of the unprecedented crisis aboard the vessel, which has taken the multi-billion dollar nuclear carrier essentially out of commission for the time being.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via AP: Navy Secretary Thomas Modly, right, said the ship’s commander, Capt. Brett Crozier, left, “demonstrated extremely poor judgement” in the middle of a crisis.

    The crisis led to an embarrassing public controversy over the Navy’s handling the outbreak. After the ship’s captain penned a fiery letter demanding greater action from top brass, subsequently leaked to the media, the captain was relieved of command of the ship. 

    Capt. Brett Crozier, wrote an impassioned memo emailed to superiors on March 30 – which leaked to the press – describing an “accelerating” crisis as coronavirus swept through the ship. Crozier – who himself has contracted the virus – received a round of applause from crewmembers as he departed the ship.

    Acting Navy Secretary Thomas Modly later resigned early this week over comments he made the ship’s crew calling Crozier’s actions “too stupid”. 

    But here’s the kicker: “Modly’s trip to Guam cost the Defense Department an estimated $243,000, according to a Navy official,” reports CNN.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 22:20

  • Israel Continues Building Massive Wall Along Lebanese Border Despite COVID-19 Lockdown
    Israel Continues Building Massive Wall Along Lebanese Border Despite COVID-19 Lockdown

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    The Hebrew-language Channel 12 reported that despite the coronavirus outbreak, work is continuing and ongoing these days to complete the cement barrier on the Israeli-Lebanese border to prevent any infiltration or attacks by Hezbollah.

    Channel 12 reported that the Israeli move is related to building a cement wall with a fence, and it has advanced monitoring methods, as Israel has completed the construction of a section of the wall – 15 km long – along the border of Israel and Lebanon, which reaches about 140 km.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Border wall progressing along southern Lebanon. Times of Israel via AFP

    The channel noted on its website that the Secretary-General of the Lebanese Hezbollah, Sayyed Hassan Nasrallah, had previously threatened Israel to penetrate the borders and take over parts of the Upper Galilee region.

    The Israeli Defense Ministry has been concentrating their efforts on the Lebanese border for over a year now, following an operation to destroy a number of tunnels stretching between the two countries.

    Work on the security barrier began at the start of last year [in 2018], with the joint IDF-Defense Ministry Borders and Security Fence Directorate having been cleared and received funding to build 13 kilometers (8 miles) of concrete walling along the approximately 130-kilometer (80-mile) border in order to protect the 22 adjacent Israeli villages.

    Eventually the plan is to construct a barrier along the entire border — a project that would cost NIS 1.7 billion ($470 million).

    The concrete barrier is designed to serve two main functions: protect Israeli civilians and soldiers from sniper attacks, and prevent infiltration into Israel by Hezbollah operatives— The Times of Israel

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In turn, Lebanon has issued a letter to the United Nations about Israel’s repeated airspace violations over the last few months.

    The Lebanese Prime Minister Hassan Diab said in a statement released on the National News Agency (NNA) that Lebanon will not allow Israel to continue to violate their airspace.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 22:00

  • Japan To Spend Billions Relocating Production Out Of China
    Japan To Spend Billions Relocating Production Out Of China

    Japan has allocated $2.2 billion (US) of its $993 billion emergency stimulus package to help manufacturers relocate production out of China amid the COVID-19 pandemic which began in the communist nation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to SCMP, $2 billion (US) will be set aside for companies shifting production back to Japan, while roughly $223.5 million will be spent on helping companies move production to other countries, according to SCMP.

    Under normal circumstances, China is Japan’s largest trading partner – however imports from China plummeted nearly 50% in February as the coronavirus pandemic resulted in closed factories and unfilled orders. Meanwhile, a planned visit by Chinese President Xi Jinping to Japan early this month – the first such trip in a decade – was postponed with no date rescheduled.

    It remains to be seen how the policy will affect Prime Minister Shinzo Abe’s years-long effort to restore relations with China.

    We are doing our best to resume economic development,” Foreign Ministry spokesman Zhao Lijian told a briefing Wednesday in Beijing, when asked about the move. “In this process, we hope other countries will act like China and take proper measures to ensure the world economy will be impacted as little as possible and to ensure that supply chains are impacted as little as possible.” –SCMP

    China’s production trainwreck has revived discussion among Japanese firms over reducing their reliance on China as a manufacturing base – while the government’s panel on future investment recommended last month that manufacturing of high-value products should shift back to Japan – while other goods should be diversified across Southeast Asia.

    “There will be something of a shift,” according to Japan Research Institute economist Shinichi Seki, who noted that Japanese companies were already considering moving out of China. “Having this in the budget will definitely provide an impetus.” That said, certain industries such as automotive will likely stay put.

    Japan exports a far larger share of parts and partially finished goods to China than other major industrial nations, according to data compiled for the panel. A February survey by Tokyo Shoko Research found 37 per cent of the more than 2,600 companies that responded were diversifying procurement to places other than China amid the coronavirus crisis. –SCMP

    In an early sign of mended fences, Japan provided masks and protective gear to China at the beginning of the outbreak – with one shipment even accompanied by a fragment of ancient Chinese poetry. Beijing praised the gesture, and later declared an antiviral produced by Japan’s Fujufilm Holdings to be an effective treatment against the coronavirus despite its lack of approval by Japanese authorities.

    Still, Japanese citizens have largely blamed China for fumbling the ball during the early stages of the outbreak, while Prime Minister Abe has been blamed for not restricting inbound travel from hina sooner.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 21:40

  • How To Protect Yourself From Long Term Pandemic Lockdown
    How To Protect Yourself From Long Term Pandemic Lockdown

    Authored by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    It has been only two weeks since widespread pandemic lockdowns were implemented in the US and as expected the public is not handling the idea very well. Within one week there were already frantic demands for the economy to reopen by Easter (spurred on by Donald Trump), and mass delusions have developed that this is still going to happen despite the fact that lockdown guidelines have been extended to at least April 30th. People desperately want to believe that this will all be over in a matter of weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Many governments continue to perpetuate this fantasy by using very carefully worded terminology. For example, the phrase “two weeks of hell” is being consistently repeated by the media after Trump uttered the notion a few days ago. In Italy, a Milan official sees lockdowns now continuing for 2-3 more weeks. In Spain, the public was left with the impression that two solid weeks of quarantine and lockdowns would help stave off infections, yet the government extended the restrictions for…yes, you guessed it…another two weeks.

    Why are these announcements always in two week intervals? I suspect it is because this the maximum amount of days before the average person begins to register the passage of time in their minds in a new situation. After two to three weeks of going without certain comforts and habits, people tend to adapt and find different ways of doing things. And, after two to three weeks of crisis, they might wake up and recognize the situation is not going to get better.

    Governments and establishment elites are seeking to keep the public as passive and docile as possible by continually feeding them the notion that the worst of the pandemic will be over in a matter of weeks. And, every two weeks they will reassure us that we are “only two weeks away” from salvation.

    Of course, with lockdowns in place the spread of infections is bound to decrease eventually, but I think the average person has no concept of how long the economic collapse will last even after the virus is “under control”. Understand that there is NO coming back from this event in terms of the economy. Our 70% service based system has been destroyed already, most people just don’t realize it yet. The majority of small businesses in the service sector will be wiped out in the next two months if they are not wiped out already.

    As during the Great Depression, major corporations (most of them) will be allowed to survive while small businesses are bankrupted and absorbed, further centralizing management of economic activity into the hands of a select few. In the meantime, a majority of people will be completely dependent on government aid in one form or another just to survive.

    The pandemic threat will continue for many months to come, perhaps with intermittent periods of loosened restrictions and lifted lockdowns. The public is being conditioned with a “wave model” of crisis and release, as I outlined with evidence in my last article ‘Waves Of Mutilation: Medical Tyranny And The Cashless Society’. This means that the economy is never coming back as it was, and tens of millions of people will remain jobless for a prolonged period of time.

    I predict that the establishment will support the populace with a form of Universal Basic Income (UBI) for a little while (2-3 months), and then, as the economy continues to crash, they will start cutting off these benefits to some people while adding requirements restrictions to receive benefits for others.

    When government becomes your sugar daddy, there are always strings attached. In some states they are already telling the public what they are allowed to spend their money on. In Vermont, for example, the state has declared numerous items in stores “non-essential”, which means you are not allowed to buy them. The claim is that you are allowed to buy them online, but in many cases people are blocked from doing this as well. Even garden seeds have been labeled “non-essential”.

    Proponents of these restrictions offer two reasons:

    One, it will supposedly reduce the amount of people going to stores thereby reducing the risk of infection.

    And two, our spending needs to be controlled so that we do not waste money on “frivolous things” during the economic downturn.

    Neither of these explanations is logical or acceptable. People generally go to stores to buy essentials along with “non-essentials” and so they will be “risking infection” regardless. Isn’t the whole point of social distancing and precautions like gloves and face masks supposed to allow the public to function while avoiding infection? Yet, the state is telling us this is not enough. We also have to be told when and how we can spend our money.

    And what about the government enforcing responsible spending? Since when has the government EVER been an expert on spending money responsibly? It is massive government debt along with massive corporate debt that has debased our economy from the very beginning. They are the reason we are in an economic crisis, not the coronavirus. Yet, they now think they should be allowed to give us orders on being frugal? They can go to hell.

    Imagine how numerous the rules and restrictions on the people will be once we are trapped into dependence on UBI and government aid. How much freedom will we have to give up just to get that monthly check? It is one thing to take the pandemic situation seriously and self-isolate for a while; it is another to sit back and allow the establishment to erase all our civil liberties in a matter of months in the name of “the greater good of the greater number”.

    Beyond that, the pandemic crisis concerns me much less than an economic collapse, which was an inevitability even before the coronavirus went mainstream.  How do we reconcile the government’s extreme response to the pandemic with the public’s need to function economically?  Are we just supposed to sit back and become slaves, dependent and clamoring for a meager UBI check every month?  I think not.

    So, the question is, what can we do about it? As I have been saying for well over a decade, the solution is to decouple from the system and build our own. But what does this mean specifically?

    Step 1: Start Providing Your Own Essentials

    Essentials include water, food, shelter and security. Without these four things no human can live for very long. If a person can provide these things for himself, then he will never be beholden to anyone, including a domineering government.

    I suggest starting small and expanding. Build a water collection source, or drill a well if you own property. Turn your yard into a garden, even if you live in the suburbs. In fact, your entire neighborhood should be growing gardens right now, and anyone who tries to tell you otherwise should be dissuaded from their attempts to control what you do on your own property. This means establishing neighborhood security and no longer relying on local law enforcement.

    It’s one thing to store essentials in case of emergency, it’s another to become a producer and ensure your survival for the long term.

    Step 2: Organize For Mutual Aid And Defense

    Each neighborhood or town should be working together for security as the system continues to collapse, which means establishing radio communications and small patrols to ward off looters. In New York alone, major crimes are up 12% as the lockdowns ramped up.  In many municipalities in the US, law enforcement is not responding to most calls involving assaults, break-ins and robberies.  Organization at this time is paramount; the more organized you are the more of a deterrent you represent to people who would seek to take what you have. Most predators are cowards; when given the choice between a strong target and a weak target, they will invariably choose the weak target.

    The common argument against organization is that the “nail that sticks up will be hammered down”. I would remind people that the nails that are willingly hammered down will be stepped on forever. Nobody wants to step on a nail that sticks up. That hurts.

    Predators, including predatory and totalitarian governments are, at bottom, weaklings. And their weakness will become apparent the moment they face an opponent that actually refuses to back down due to fear.

    Step 3: Establish Barter Markets And Black Markets

    As noted in previous articles, the primary goal behind this pandemic is to use it as a rationale for controlling all commerce. If you do not have the proper “green code” from the government indicating you are “free from infection”, then you are not allowed to participate in the economy. No job, no grocery stores, no public gatherings, etc. This is happening right now in places like China and South Korea and according to elitists like Bill Gates and others it is coming to the US soon, make no mistake.

    The only way to counter such control is to not need the mainstream system at all. Localized barter markets need to be established, and if they outlaw those, then you need to set up black markets. Trade and production must continue or humanity as we know it will die. It will be replaced with a centralized socialist hive system that will crush all liberty, and this is unacceptable. Localization is the key to our survival.

    This means that the public must make and active effort to save themselves through their own innovation instead of waiting around for government to save the day.

    Step 4:  Accept The Reality That Political Leaders Are Not Going to Save You – They Are Only Going To Make Things Worse

    It’s funny, but if any of these lockdown measures were being implemented under a Democrat in the White House, conservatives would be enraged.  But, since Trump is president, a large number of conservatives have gone limp and docile; proclaiming that he is going to save the day and “cure the virus”.  It’s not going to happen, folks.  This is the same guy that was telling us in January that he trusted the data out of China and that everything was under control. Trump is not your savior, he is a long time puppet of the banking elites, as I have outlined and evidenced on numerous occasions.

    Trump’s job is to oversee the collapse of the US while playing the role of a bumbling “nationalist” and “conservative” villain.  To be sure, he’s not the only politician in office that is part of this agenda, and the UN and WHO are just as guilty of misleading people about the extent of the pandemic threat, but Trump is the one that conservatives blindly trust the most, and this is a problem.  If violations of the constitution continue to escalate, a war is coming, and Trump will NOT be on the side of liberty.  Conservatives will eventually have to decide which side of the fight they stand as the lockdowns drag on with only minor periods of relaxed restrictions.

    Ultimately, you cannot support economic socialization and big government tyranny just because Trump is president and still call yourself a conservative.

    Step 5: Be Ready To Fight And Die For What You Believe In

    People always talk about fighting for freedom, but the question is will they actually do it when faced with overwhelming odds? I can only speak for myself, and I will fight, but I do believe that many others out there are ready and willing to do the same.  That said, it really does not matter. It’s not for us to defend ourselves only if we think we have backup. Be ready to fight alone if you have to; be ready to take risks, otherwise, you have no chance of winning, and thus the people collectively have no chance of winning. If others follow your lead, then so be it, but don’t rely on it.

    There are many transgressions about to be foisted on the American people well beyond what we have already witnessed. You will know when the line in the sand has been crossed. Do not be surprised if in the next 3-6 months you hear the words “shots fired”. It is not enough to be prepped for the future. It is not enough to simply survive. The world as we know it is being sabotaged for the sake of power. Not money, but POWER. The elites will not be satisfied with anything less than total control. We cannot let them have it.

    *  *  *

    If you would like to support the work that Alt-Market does while also receiving content on advanced tactics for defeating the globalist agenda, subscribe to our exclusive newsletter The Wild Bunch Dispatch.  Learn more about it HERE.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 21:20

  • "We Can't Give Our Product Away" – Farmers Toss Thousands Of Acres Of Fruits, Veggies As Sales Plummet
    “We Can’t Give Our Product Away” – Farmers Toss Thousands Of Acres Of Fruits, Veggies As Sales Plummet

    As some misguided liberals complain about fruits “left rotting on the trees” because Trump’s immigration crackdown has left no undocumented migrants to pick the vegetables (a demonstrably false assumption), the Associated Press has offered an explanation for this phenomenon that also illustrates how disruptions in the businesses like the hospitality and food-service industry work their way through the supply chain, ultimately sticking farmers in the American Farm Belt with fields of vegetables that they can’t sell, or even donate as local food pantries are now full-up with donations from restaurants.

    The AP started its story in Palmetto, Fla. a city in Manatee County on the Gulf Coast, where a farmer had dumped piles of zucchini and other fresh vegetables to rot.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the AP reported, thousands of acres of fruits and vegetables grown in Florida are being plowed over or left to rot because farmers who had grown the crops to sell to restaurants or other hospitality-industry buyers like theme parks and schools have been left on the hook for the crops.

    As the economy shuts down across the country, injecting what the Fed described as massive levels of uncertainty, farmers in the state are now begging Ag Secretary Sonny Purdue to get some of that farm bailout money. Without some kind of industry-specific bailout, these farmers might go out of business.

    The problem – in a nutshell – is that these farmers have longstanding sales relationships, but suddenly, those customers have disappeared. And many other companies in the US that are still buying produce already have contracts with foreign suppliers.

    It would be great if Trump could come in with agricultural tariffs that would effectively cut off foreign competition, but such a move would likely be widely panned by the establishment, who would sooner watch every small farmer commit hari-kari than see continued pullback in globalization and more limits on free trade.

    “We gave 400,000 pounds of tomatoes to our local food banks,” DiMare said. “A million more pounds will have to be donated if we can get the food banks to take it.”

    Farmers are scrambling to sell to grocery stores, but it’s not easy. Large chains already have contracts with farmers who grow for retail — many from outside the U.S.

    “We can’t even give our product away, and we’re allowing imports to come in here,” DiMare said.

    He said 80 percent of the tomatoes grown in Florida are meant for now-shuttered restaurants and theme parks.

    And the problem isn’t unique to farmers in Florida. Other states are having similar issues. Agricultural officials said leafy greens grown in California have no buyers, and dairy farmers in states like Vermont have been hit especially hard. Dairy farmers in VT and Wisconsin told the AP they’ve had to dump surplus loads of milk.

    An association for farmers in Florida asked the administration if their veggies could be donated to food-stamp or other federal welfare programs, but reportedly, they never heard back.

    Among states that harvest in the winter, California has a lot of leafy green veggies that are about to come out of the ground.

    “The tail end of the winter vegetable season in Yuma, Arizona, was devastating for farmers who rely on food service buyers,” said Cory Lunde, spokesman for Western Growers, a group representing family farmers in California, Arizona, Colorado and New Mexico. “And now, as the production shifts back to Salinas, California, there are many farmers who have crops in the ground that will be left unharvested,” particularly leafy greens.

    He said a spike in demand for produce at the beginning of the outbreak has now subsided.

    “People are staying home and not visiting the grocery stores as often,”  Lunde said. “So the dominoes are continuing to fall.”

    Some farmers have experimented with selling crops directly to customers, with one Florida farmer in Palmetto selling boxes of roma tomatoes for just $5 a box, an amazing bargain in a time of tremendous need. But the sales are well short of what he needs and likely won’t do more than put a dent in his losses. But at least it’s something.

    “This is a catastrophe,” said tomato grower Tony DiMare, who owns farms in south Florida and the Tampa Bay area. “We haven’t even started to calculate it. It’s going to be in the millions of dollars. Losses mount every day.”

    Florida leads the US in harvesting tomatoes, green beans and cabbage. Can you imagine what life would be like if tomatoes and tomato sauce prices soared because all of these medium-sized and small farmers around the country have gone out of business? Or if you walked into the grocery store a year from now and there simply weren’t any tomatoes.

    It could happen much more easily than you might believe – that is, if not enough is done.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 21:00

  • Consider The Possibility That Trump Is Right About China
    Consider The Possibility That Trump Is Right About China

    Authored by Nadia Schadlow via The Atlantic,

    Critics are letting their disdain for the president blind them to geopolitical realities…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When a new coronavirus emerged in China and began spreading around the world, including in the United States, President Donald Trump’s many critics in the American foreign-policy establishment were quick to identify him as part of the problem. Trump had campaigned on an “America first” foreign policy, which after his victory was enshrined in the official National Security Strategy that his administration published in 2017. At the time, I served in the administration and orchestrated the writing of that document. In the years since, Trump has been criticized for supposedly overturning the post–World War II order and rejecting the role the United States has long played in the world. Amid a global pandemic, he’s being accused—on this site and elsewhere—of alienating allies, undercutting multinational cooperation, and causing America to fight the coronavirus alone.

    And yet even as the current emergency has proved him right in fundamental ways—about China specifically and foreign policy more generally—many respectable people in the United States are letting their disdain for the president blind them to what is really going on in the world.

    Far from discrediting Trump’s point of view, the COVID-19 crisis reveals what his strategy asserted: that the world is a competitive arena in which great power rivals like China seek advantage, that the state remains the irreplaceable agent of international power and effective action, that international institutions have limited capacity to transform the behavior and preferences of states.

    China, America’s most powerful rival, has played a particularly harmful role in the current crisis, which began on its soil. Initially, that country’s lack of transparency prevented prompt action that might have contained the virus. In Wuhan, the epicenter of the outbreak, Chinese officials initially punished citizens for “spreading rumors” about the disease. The lab in Shanghai that first published the genome of the virus on open platforms was shut down the next day for “rectification,” as the Hong Kong-based South China Morning Post reported in February.

    Apparently at the behest of officials at the Wuhan health commission, news reports indicate, visiting teams of experts from elsewhere in China were prevented from speaking freely to doctors in the infectious-disease wards.

    Some experts had suspected human-to-human transmission, but their inquiries were rebuffed.

    “They didn’t tell us the truth,” one team member said of the local authorities, “and from what we now know of the real situation then, they were lying” to us.   

    Now China’s propagandists are competing to create a narrative that obscures the origins of the crisis and that blames the United States for the virus. This irresponsible behavior and lack of transparency revealed what Trump’s National Security Strategy had identified early on: that “contrary to our hopes, China expanded its power at the expense of others.” Instead of becoming a “responsible stakeholder”—a term George W. Bush’s administration used to describe the role it hoped Beijing would play following China’s entry into the World Trade Organization in 2001—the Chinese Communist Party used the advantages of WTO membership to advance a political and economic system at odds with America’s free and open society. Previous National Security Strategy documents had tiptoed around China’s adversarial conduct, as if calling out that country as a competitor—as the 2017 document unequivocally did—was somehow impolite.

    But at some point, an American administration needed to shift the conversation away from hopes for an imagined future China to the realities of the Communist Party’s conduct—which is hardly a secret. For the decade and a half prior to 2017, Republican and Democratic leaders publicly worried about China’s unwillingness to play by the rules, but were reluctant to deal head on with China’s authoritarian government and statist economy. The bipartisan U.S.-China Economic Security Commission has consistently called out China’s unfair practices. In 2010, President Barack Obama lambasted China before the G-20 for its currency manipulation. The need to compete effectively with the policies of the Chinese Communist Party is one of the few points of agreement between Trump and House Speaker Nancy Pelosi. Even as he seeks to find ways to conclude reciprocal trade agreements, his administration has not lost sight of China’s aggressive rise.

    At least as controversial as Trump’s critique of China is his emphasis on the importance of sovereignty and his insistence that strong sovereign states are the main agents of change. But states are the foundation of democratic governance and, fundamentally, of security. It is the citizens of states who vote and hold leaders accountable. And it is states that are the foundation of military, political, and economic power in alliances such as NATO, or organizations like the United Nations.

    Trump’s emphasis on protecting U.S. sovereignty brought to a boil a simmering national debate about the overlooked costs of globalization. A blind adherence to what the economist Dani Rodrik has called “hyper-globalization”the idea that the interests of big corporations and the principle of market integration took precedence over widely shared prosperity and economic security—had come at the expense of domestic industries. For years, people who complained about these consequences were dismissed as isolationists or as being on “the wrong side of history.”

    The coronavirus experience demonstrates that economic interaction does not occur in a vacuum of geopolitical competition. Dependence on China for crucial medical equipment throughout the pandemic has illuminated the dangers of a hyper-globalized economy. Experts had warned of American dependence on key drug ingredients from China. The Wall Street Journal has reported that China is the only maker of key ingredients for certain classes of drugs, including established antibiotics that treat a range of bacterial infections such as pneumonia. American reliance on Chinese suppliers for other pharmaceuticals and medical supplies is also worrisome. Americans should not depend on an authoritarian rival state for its citizens’ health—any more than the United States and other free and open societies should give Chinese companies, and by extension the Chinese Communist Party, control over communications infrastructure and sensitive personal data.

    Many of President Trump’s critics in the foreign-policy community put great stock in the ability of multilateral and international organizations to constrain the misbehavior of China and other states. These organizations, at their best, promote concerted action against commonly recognized problems. But Trump’s critics tend to view them mainly in their idealized form and as the central instruments to solve global problems and advance values shared by all. In practice, though, how international organizations perform is profoundly influenced by power relationships among member states.

    China’s leaders have become quite skillful at using these bodies to pursue their own interests. President Xi Jinping has made it a priority—as he put it in a 2018 speech—to “reform” and lead in the “global governance system,” viewing such efforts as integral to “building a modern, strong socialist country.” Despite its record of stealing patented technologies, China tried to lead the World Intellectual Property Organization, an effort thwarted by Washington. Chinese tech companies have also sought to induce the United Nations to adopt their facial-recognition and surveillance standards, to clear the way for the deployment of their technologies around the world.

    The Trump administration’s National Security Strategy challenged the assumption that international organizations are always driven by a common global good. China’s undue influence in key international organizations was evident most recently, when the World Health Organization hesitated to declare COVID-19 a public-health emergency of international concern.

    WHO officials amplified Chinese officials’ early claims that the virus posed no danger of human-to-human transmission. The head of the organization even congratulated China’s top leadership for its “openness to sharing information.” Apparently seeking to avoid Beijing’s wrath, the WHO refused to respond to Taiwan’s early concerns about human-to-human transmission of the virus outbreak in Wuhan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The COVID-19 experience, although far from over, has generated strong evidence that, while the WHO and other international organizations are of course important for information sharing and coordination, nations continue to do the heavy lifting. The United States remains the largest contributor to the WHO, paying about 15 percent of the organization’s budget—compared with China’s 0.21 percent. In early March, Trump signed a supplemental appropriations act that included $1.3 billion in additional U.S. foreign assistance for pandemic response. Most recently, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo announced an additional $274 million in emergency funding for at-risk countries. This aid does not come with the strings that China attaches to its aid.

    Contrary to what critics argue, “America first” does not mean “America alone.” That Trump might be introducing needed correctives to the hyper-globalization pursued by earlier administrations is generating serious cognitive dissonance in some quarters. And the reality is that only one organization in the entire world has as its sole responsibility the American people’s safety. That institution is the U.S. government. Whether led by Republicans or Democrats—or by Donald Trump or anyone else—it should always put the American people first.

    *  *  *

    Nadia Schadlow, a former deputy national security adviser for strategy, is a senior fellow at the Hudson Institute.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 20:40

  • CDC Extends Cruise Ship "No Sail" Order, Trump Approves Disaster Declarations In Idaho, Alaska: Live Updates
    CDC Extends Cruise Ship “No Sail” Order, Trump Approves Disaster Declarations In Idaho, Alaska: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Italian PM says “EU could fail” if bailout package isn’t handled
    • Russia, Tokyo report record jumps
    • Russian case total passes 10k
    • Over the past 24 hours, the US reported 32,176 new cases
    • US moves to try and stop the IMF from approving Iran’s request for a $5 billion bailout
    • Some Americans could see stimulus checks as soon as Thursday
    • Italy reports sudden jump in deaths, cases overnight
    • South Korea warns risk of virus “reactivating” in cured patients
    • Trump approves disaster declarations for Idaho, Alaska
    • Penn., Mo. join growing list of states to cancel school for the rest of the academic year
    • Sweden reports jump in deaths for second day in a row
    • France reports more than 1,300 deaths in a single day
    • Germany weighing plan to financially reward doctors and nurses for work during outbreak
    • NJ deaths near 2k as total cases top 50k
    • NY reports another record jump in deaths
    • 332,000 people have recovered globally so far
    • Number of patients who have recovered from the virus passes 350k
    • India reports 809 new cases, 46 new deaths
    • Dr. Fauci says US deaths might be “closer to 60k”
    • South Africa extends lockdown as State Department prepares to evacuate Americans
    • Oxfam warns outbreak could push 500M ppl into poverty
    • UK-US trade talks suspended indefinitely
    • Boris Johnson released from ICU
    • Merkel opposes coronabonds
    • White House floats dubious rumor about “second” coronavirus task force to focus on the economy
    • 19 Syrians have tested positive as health orgs alarmed by outbreak
    • President Trump says US could reopen in phases “ahead of schedule”
    • Spain has confirmed 153,222 cases of the virus
    • EU pressures Netherlands to drop opposition to bailout plan
    • Support for ‘Unity Government’ surges in the UK
    • Italian PM says lockdown might start to lift at end of April
    • Spain government celebrates lockdown achievements as opposition suspects cases are undercounted

    *     *     *

    Update (1945ET): Now that a handful of passengers have died aboard – or died after being infected aboard – cruises amid outbreaks of COVID-19, the CDC has extended a “no sail” order that will stop cruises from departing in the US.

    The order will stay in place until either the CDC rescinds it or HHS Secretary Alex Azar drops one of his public health warnings regarding COVID-19.

    *     *     *

    Update (1930ET): Pennsylvania and Missouri announced on Thursday that they would cancel school for the rest of the academic year, joining a growing list of states who have decided to keep students out of school despite a growing body of research showing school cancellations don’t help suppress the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pennsylvania’s Democratic Gov. Tom Wolf said closing schools was vital to fighting the coronavirus.

    “We must continue our efforts to mitigate the spread of the virus during this national crisis,” Wolf said.

    “This was not an easy decision but closing schools until the end of the academic year is in the best interest of our students, school employees and families.”

    Closing schools saddles parents who are still working outside of the home (ie all ‘essential’ workers) with the added burden of arranging child care.

    Still, Oregon, Alabama, Arizona, Arkansas, Georgia, Indiana, Kansas, Michigan, Nebraska, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Vermont, Virginia and Washington State have all ordered schools closed already, and most expect few students will return to classrooms before the end of the school year, not just in the US, but in Europe as well.

    In other news, Trump has also approved national disaster orders for Alaska and Idaho, bringing the total who have seen their orders approved to 49 states.

    *     *     *

    Update (1620ET): On Thursday, Indian health officials reported 809 new cases of the virus and 46 new deaths, bringing the total confirmed cases to 6,725, and deaths to 227, as the country continues a strictly enforced lockdown.

    Meanwhile, the number of patients who have recovered worldwide just surpassed 350k.

    *     *     *

    Update (1520ET): Top Trump economic adviser Larry Kudlow said during an interview on Fox Business Thursday afternoon that the economy will be reopened on a “rolling basis,” with the beginning coming in the next month or two.

    “What we’re looking at here, I hope, will be a two month gap interference, if you will. March, end of April. The next month or two, we should be able to restart, at least on a rolling basis.”

    But Kudlow added: “Everybody who wants one is going to be able to get one. That is our goal. That’s the essential message: we want to keep you in business, we know just how difficult this is. We know the hardships are enormous.”

    *     *     *

    Update (1440ET): The UK just confirmed the numbers shared by Dominic Raab an hour ago: With 4,344 new cases and 881 new deaths, the UK reached a total of 65,077 cases and 7,978 deaths.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Both deaths and new cases declined slightly from yesterday, but not by much. And as deaths decelerate more slowly than cases, the mortality rate hit a new record high of 12.3%.

    Back in New Jersey, Gov. Murphy said the state expects to reach its peak for the outbreak in 2 or 3 days. Notably, at its high point, the state expected 14,400 residents to be hospitalized and as many as 1,880 patients in the ICU, said Health Commissioner Judy Persichilli at a press briefing. NJ has about 7,363 residents hospitalized, and 1,523 in the ICU right now, Governor Phil Murphy reported. Last week, the number of new cases and deaths were doubling every 2-3 days in the state: fortunately, they’ve slowed from that pace.

    As the US embassy in South Africa prepares to start evacuating 900 Americans, the South African government has extended its lockdown until the end of Germany. SA Reported 96 new cases and five new deaths on Thursday, bringing the country’s total to 1,845, along with 18 deaths. As we mentioned earlier, Spain has officially extended its lockdown until April 26.

    *     *     *

    Update (1440ET): UK PM Boris Johnson has been released from the ICU, though he still has a long road to recovery. His team said he’s in “good spirits”. Meamwhile, UK-US trade talks have reportedly been suspended indefinitely.

    *     *     *

    Update (1335ET): Rounding out what has been a mostly disappointing day for Europe and its new numbers of cases and deaths, France and the UK also reported accelerations in the pace of new cases and deaths.

    France reported 1,341 new deaths over the last day, including deaths not only in hospitals but also in nursing homes and other group settings where the virus is known to spread like wildfire.

    In the UK, Dominic Raab announced 881 new deaths, bringing the death toll to 7,978. Meanwhile, the total number of confirmed coronavirus cases has reached 65,077, an increase of 4,344.

    Over the past three weeks Washington DC, 8 members of the United States Capitol Police have told superiors that they have tested positive, meanwhile in New York, nearly 20% of the NYPD is still out sick, many because of the virus. On Thursday, more than 7,000 officers were out sick.

    Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orban, who recently was given untrammeled power to direct the government during the response, which some have complained elevated him to the status of ‘dictator’, Orban announced that current restrictions on movement will be extended “indefinitely” a Hungary battles the virus.

    “We will reconsider the restrictions on a weekly basis,” Orban said on Thursday.

    In the US, 416 sailors aboard the aircraft carrier USS Theodore Roosevelt, roughly 10% of the ship’s crew, have ave now tested positive for COVID-19, and the numbers are rising daily.

    Detroit health officials reported 249 new Covid-19 cases in the city Thursday, a slight decline from days prior, according to the city’s health website. There were 525 cases reported in the city on April 4, the highest for a single day there so far. Since then, daily reported cases have showed a steady but slow decline, Detroit’s health department curve shows.

    Sweden has reported a rise in the daily death rate for the second day in a row, with the virus now killing at least 100 people for two days in a row, the country said, raising the total number of dead to 792. The total number of cases across the country has increased to 9,141 with 719 in intensive care. Stockholm, the capital, is the epicenter of the outbreak.

    Circling back to the US, health officials in Detroit reported 249 new cases of the virus in the city Thursday, a slight decline from the last few days. Daily reported cases in the city have been declining since April 4, when it reported 525 cases in the city.

    *     *     *

    Update (1315ET): New Jersey just released another pretty dire report that suggests little deceleration in the spread of the virus, or the rate at which its killing the state’s residents.

    Gov. Phil Murphy announced Thursday afternoon that the state reported 198 new deaths, bringing the state’s total to 1700, while the total number of new cases crossed over 50k. He added that social distancing measures appear to be slowing the rate of spread.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Nearby PA also reported numbers of Thursday, with more than 2,000 more PA residents testing positive as of Thursday afternoon, bringing the statewide total past 18,000, the state Department of Health announced. Pennsylvania has counted 338 deaths and 18,228 cases statewide, while more than 87,000 patients have tested negative. PA also extended school closing for the rest of the academic year, one of the only states to have declared it already, though few believe students will be returning to classrooms any time soon.

    And the latest indication over how flawed the rollout of the ‘PPP’ program for small businesses has been, the first lawsuit over the program was filed in federal court Wednesday by Strip Club in Michigan. It’s the first of what could end up being  a series of protracted legal battles over which businesses qualify for the hastily-conceived $349 billion relief effort, according to NBC News.

    The CDC on Wednesday published new guidelines detailing how essential employees can go back to work even if they have been exposed to people infected by the coronavirus, provided they do not feel sick and follow certain precautions.

    In Germany, lawmakers are weighing a plan to financially reward doctors and nurses for their hard work during the crisis.

    Across Europe, states from Poland to Portugal have institute strict prohibitions on movement as the Christian world prepares to celebrate Easter, the religion’s second-most important holiday, in isolation.

    *     *     *

    Update (1240ET):  Italy’s Civil Protection Agency just announced that new cases and deaths jumped over the last day across Italy. The country reported 4,204 new cases of coronavirus and 610 new deaths over the last day, bringing countrywide totals to 143,626 cases and 18,279 deaths. Among the 18k+ dead, Italian officials said, includes 100 doctors, who have succumbed to the virus while fighting it on the front lines.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Interestingly enough, after blaming the US for inventing the coronavirus, Beijing is now seeding conspiracy theories that Italy may be responsible.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While those numbers out of Italy were lower than totals reported a week ago, they were up modestly from yesterday’s numbers. Yet, US investors don’t seem to care, and everybody in Europe is already bracing for what’s likely to be a lonely holiday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, a senior trade unionist source has reportedly told Italian newspapers that the government is planning on extending the lockdown on May 3.

    Outside of Italy, Morgan Stanley CEO James Gorman has recovered from COVID-19 after falling ill, and news about Boris Johnson sitting up in bed and feeling modestly better appears to have swamped headlines in the UK.

    Earlier, the New York Times reported that it was mostly European travelers who brought COVID-19 to New York, not travelers from China and Asia, according to a study awaiting peer review.

    “The majority is clearly European,” said Harm van Bakel, a geneticist at Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, who co-wrote a study awaiting peer review.

    More importantly, the study found that the virus was likely circulating in New York by mid-February, weeks before the first case was confirmed. Another team of researchers at NYU Grossman School of Medicine across town arrived at similar conclusions, despite studying a different batch of patients.

    In other words: Trump really should have barred flights from Europe when he barred flights from China.

    *     *     *

    Update (1150ET): Moving into the back-end of his daily briefing, Governor Cuomo said that the jump in deaths seen in recent days is to be expected, and that the key figure to focus on is the drop in ICU capacity, as the state remains moderately shy of its limits on hospital beds, ICU beds and ventilators. If this indeed is the worst of it as far as deaths and hospitalizations go, the state won’t need any more assistance or outside equipment.

    Meanwhile, data shared by Cuomo on Thursday exposed what may have been the reason for failing to report ICU admissions yesterday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With deaths soaring in NYC, Cuomo said he had to bring in outside funeral directors into the city to help families plan COVID-19 related burials. As the bodies pile up, Cuomo said that the outbreak is almost worse than 9/11 in certain ways. He added that 9/11 was supposed to be the city’s greatest challenge for a generation – but the outbreak is also a problem.

    Looking ahead, as discussion about how to reopen the economy continues, Cuomo said that “rapid testing” would be critical to determine who can and can’t go back to work.

    He also warned that even once this first wave is over, there could be more successive waves in the future, noting that the Spanish Flu of 1918 came in three waves.

    “Remember, the 1918 Spanish flu came in three waves. Well [with Covid] we’re on the first wave,” Cuomo said.

    *     *     *

    Update (1110ET): New York State just reported a record number of deaths in a 24 hour period for the second day in a row, after reporting about 790 deaths state-wide yesterday, it reported more than 800 deaths on Thursday.

    • NYC REPORTS RECORD 824 DEATHS FROM VIRUS IN LAST 24 HOURS
    • NYC CONFIRMED VIRUS CASES RISE BY MORE THAN 6,400, TO 84,373

    Gov. Andrew Cuomo has heralded the flat-ish growth in new cases in the state as a sign of a “plateau” in the state, while also touting the spike in hospital vacancies that has occurred as deaths have jumped (an unintended consequence).

    *     *     *

    Update (1100ET): As economists in the US warn that Thursday’s unemployment claims numbers suggest that the US unemployment rate is already around 13%, its highest level since the Great Depression, and worse than the depths of the financial crisis, the Nairobi-based charity Oxfam published a report on Thursday claiming 500 million people around the world would be pushed into poverty because of the virus, per Reuters.

    This would cause global poverty rates to fall for the first time since the early 1990s, when the collapse of Communism and ensuing privatizations sowed chaos in formerly Communist society.

    *    *    *

    Update (1040ET): After returning to the Chancellory from isolation, German Chancellor Angela Merkel is being celebrated by the public for her government’s decisive steps to contain the outbreak. Germany is testing more than 50k a day, and its robust testing program has been said to be responsible for the country’s strikingly low mortality rate (under 1%).

    But while her actions have helped unite Germans during this crisis, her decision to oppose the controversial “coronabonds” proposal has frustrated some of her European partners. Reuters reported Thursday that Merkel would oppose the bonds.

    “I spoke today with Italian Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte for a long time and we agree that there is an urgent need for solidarity in Europe, which is going through one of its most difficult hours, if not the most difficult,” Merkel said.

    “And Germany is ready for this solidarity and committed to it. Germany’s wellbeing depends on Europe being well. Now, which instruments are fit for this purpose, here there are different views. You know that I don’t believe we should have common debt because of the situation of our political union and that’s why we reject this,” she added during a news conference.

    “But there are so many ways to show solidarity and I believe we will find a good solution.”

    Merkel has already uncorked ‘limitless’ credit within Germany as part of Berlin’s $1 trillion-plus rescue package. Rome is going to need to figure this one out in a way that won’t force the Germans to dip their hands into their wallets again.

    With markets set to clock one of their best weekly rallies since 2009, the White House is whipping the horse again with dubious BBG headlines, this time claiming that it will create a second task force focused on the economy with…the half of people on the main task force who are focusing on the economy. Core members would include Mnuchin and Kudlow. Of course, this isnt’ the first time we’ve seen this rumor.

    *    *    *

    Update (0800ET): Offering some more surprisingly optimistic comments, Dr. Fauci said in what have become routine morning comments in the press that he now expects US fatalities due to the virus to be “closer to 60k” than the 100k-200k previously anticipated. Trump once said that as many as 240k might die.

    “The real data are telling us it is highly likely we are having a definite positive effect by the mitigation things that we’re doing, this physical separation,” said Dr. Fauci during a Thursday morning interview with NBC.

    “I believe we are going to see a downturn in that, and it looks more like the 60,000, than the 100,000 to 200,000” projected fatalities, he said.

    Futs have been somewhat volatile this morning, but as it stands, it looks like the Dow will open lower by less than 1%.

    However, the trickle of optimistic headlines garners a lot of attention, even more concerning signs that recovered patients might still be vulnerable to the virus have emerged. The coronavirus may be “reactivating” in people who had appeared to be cured of the illness, according to Korea’s Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

    Adding to the optimism, as of Thursday, more than 332,000 people have recovered from coronavirus, according to data from Johns Hopkins.

    *    *    *

    As Holy Week draws to a close and the long Holiday Weekend begins, the optimism that helped inspire the biggest bounce since the ‘rona rout appears to have faded, and Dow futs are back to being three figures in the red Thursday morning, pointing to a lower open as traders realize the ‘plateaus’ supposedly reached in Italy, Spain and New York didn’t really mean anything. And while the Germans truly do seem to be on top of things, other hotspots in Europe are already cropping up, as China tightens its borders as experts warn about a ‘second wave’.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the past 24 hours, the US reported 32,176 new cases of coronavirus and 1,901 new deaths, raising its totals to 432,727 cases and 14,768 dead, with the most widely followed projections suggesting that the US will pass half a million confirmed cases before Easter Sunday. Yesterday, NY reported its biggest one-day jump in deaths yet, and the pace of spread appeared to accelerate across Europe.

    Now, we wake of Thursday morning to find that officials in Tokyo and Moscow have reported record numbers of new cases (that, and Russia recorded its biggest daily jump in deaths).

    Meanwhile, as the US moves to try and stop the IMF from approving Iran’s request for a $5 billion bailout, the Ayatollah has once again chosen to retaliate in the only venue Trump truly understands: Twitter.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Experts in Europe insist that the lockdowns, social distancing and other measures taken to combat the spread of the virus, and that may be true, but what about places like Iran, Afghanistan or other battered, broken countries that simply don’t have the resources to combat the virus. To be fair, Iran, despite the sanctions, still has money and resources, relative to places like Syria, which is struggling with an outbreak that has alarmed international aid agencies.

    Despite the continuing civil war, a war seemingly without end as it nears the 10-year mark, enough tests have been run on Syrian citizens that 19 have been confirmed, and two deaths have been confirmed. Testing, however, is “virtually non-existent” throughout the country, and many fear that the camps of impoverished, displaced peoples in the country will be rapid breeding grounds for the virus.

    However, since the west and Iran have their hands full, Syrian President Bashar al-Assad is going to need to rely on whatever he receives from Russia to combat the virus. And  on Thursday, Russia reported 1,459 new cases of coronavirus and 13 new deaths, the biggest daily increase to date, bringing its total case load past 10k. In total, 76 Russians have died.

    As the race for treatments continues, Pfizer reportedly expects to be able to test a new antiviral medication for coronavirus in humans by August or September, accelerating the clinical trial timeline as the US drug giant expands its work in the battle against the virus. On the political front, Oliver Dowden, the UK culture secretary, has suggested the public should prepare for an extension of the current three-week coronavirus lockdown that ends on Monday. Foreign secretary Dominic Raab, who is deputizing for Mr Johnson while the prime minister is in intensive care, will chair a virtual meeting of the government’s emergency planning committee (Cobra) on Thursday afternoon. Meanwhile, polls show support for a national unity government – as it gradually becomes clear that, after spending his third night in the ICU, the PM might need another week or two to recover.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As the numbers of new cases continue to fall, Spain’s government is hailing “encouraging” progress, a sign that the strict lockdown imposed by PM Pedro Sanchez last month, is working. However, members of the opposition have accused the government of deliberately undercounting cases, and since testing is uneven across the country, it’s extremely likely that the true number of cases is at least modestly higher than the total recorded.

    According to official figures published on Thursday, so far 15,447 people with coronavirus have died, 655 of them in the last 24 hours, compared with 757 the previous day and a peak of 950 a week ago. Overall, Spain has now confirmed 153,222 cases of the virus as of Thursday morning, an increase of 4% over Wednesday’s count. This is roughly the same rate of increase that has been observed throughout this week, and is below the 25%-30% growth rates seen in the very recent past.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And apparently, even an unprecedented pandemic isn’t enough to inspire comity among the member states of the fractious EU. As we noted last night, the ECB’s Christine Lagarde urged them in a letter published in several European dailies to set their differences aside and agree on a multilateral plan that will be strong enough to help revive Europe’s recession-bound economy. EU governments ratcheted up the pressure on the Netherlands on Thursday to unblock half-a-trillion euros of economic support ahead of a meeting of finance ministers, as the country has emerged as a key antagonist to Italy in the negotiations to help support Europe’s most damaged economies. The Scandinavian countries like Netherlands have seen the virus spread, but mortality rates have remained low. 

    Still, the optimistic numbers seen this week are apparently inspiring the Italian government toward some dangerous thinking: Italy may start lifting some restrictions by the end of April provided that the slowing trend continues, PM Giuseppe Conte said during an interview with the BBC. That doesn’t seem like responsible talk for a country with roughly 20k deaths and a health-care system that was completely overwhelmed just weeks ago. Conte also warned that the “EU could fail” if members don’t step up and do what’s right. Using language that has been employed by Angela Merkel and others, Conte warned that the outbreak is the biggest challenge facing Europe since WWII. The BBC noted it was Conte’s first interview with the English-language press since the outbreak exploded in Italy 7 weeks ago.

    As the first European countries start to plan their course back to normal, President Trump is doing the same in the US, critics be damned. He said last night that he had a plan to reopen the country in phases that might help get the economy back up and humming “ahead of schedule.”

    Conte added that if member states don’t agree to an “adequate” fiscal package for the states hurt the worst by the outbreak (a group that includes Italy) the project could collapse.

    But even as the outbreak finally appears to be heading down the back slope in Italy and Spain, other European nations, the Netherlands, Belgium, the UK, etc., are rising up to take their place.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 20:30

  • "Let Them Fail" – Billionaire Explains To Gobsmacked CNBC Host How Capitalism Is Supposed To Work
    “Let Them Fail” – Billionaire Explains To Gobsmacked CNBC Host How Capitalism Is Supposed To Work

    With millions of Americans sitting at home working on their laptops, the passive viewership of cable news channels like CNBC must be waaaay up this month, as finance nerds welcome normies to the strange and often hilarious world of live markets news.

    In terms of drama, CNBC is usually pretty staid. But every once in a while, there’s a fight, or a contentious interview, that really grabs people’s attention. On Thursday, such a confrontation occurred during “the Halftime Report” as Scott “The Judge” Wapner interviewed early Facebook investor and uber-wealthy VC investor Chamath Palihapitiya.

    Wapner brought up the question of the bailouts for main street and corporate America that the Trump Administration has packaged as part of its $2.2 trillion plan. Palihapitiya raised an issue with the program, arguing that the administration would be using taxpayer money to prop up “zombie companies.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then Wapner asked: “Are you arguing to let airlines fail?

    Palihapitiya, who was speaking on the phone, responded with a very assertive “Yes.”

    Wapner seemed blown away by this. Struggling to process the answer he had just been given, he followed-up, incredulously: “But how does that make sense in the broader scheme of the economy.”

    Then Palihapitiya went off.

    “This is a lie that’s been propagated by Wall Street. When a company fails, it does not fire its employees…it goes through a packaged bankruptcy…if anything, what happens is the employees end up owning more of the company. The people who get wiped out are the people who own the unsecured debt and the equity…but the employees don’t get wiped out and the pensions don’t get wiped out.”

    […]

    “And if a bunch of hedge funds get wiped out – what’s the big deal? Let them fail. So they don’t get the summer in the Hamptons – who cares.”

    Out in the real world, people say mean things about the rich all the time. But it doesn’t happen quite as often on CNBC. In fact, sometimes CNBC’s hosts seem downright confused when people don’t seem to care about asset prices above all else – like that time Rick Santelli said we should all just go get infected and let grandma die to save the stock market. What’s more, Wapner seemed almost personally insulted by Palihapitiya’s response.

    As to why, well, we can’t be certain.

    Because after all, airlines as an industry are especially prone to bankruptcy (the president once owned an airline that went bankrupt), even under completely normal circumstances.

    Hell, even if such a vitally important company as the aerospace and defense giant Boeing went bankrupt, its factories in Washington State wouldn’t stop running.

    Remember when the CEO of Boeing demanded a taxpayer-funded bailout, but said he wouldn’t accept the money if the federal government demanded a stake in Boeing in return (note: exchange money for equity is standard practice for…literally every investor in the world)?

    How is Boeing able to so blithely bite the hand that feeds? Because it has alternatives should the bailout not come through. If Boeing really needs the money, it’s free to sell stock and raise cash – the opposite of what it did for decades when it bought up shares, shrinking its float and helping maintain a buoyant valuation.

    Say this isn’t enough, and Boeing fails: The company could file a prepackaged Chapter 11 where the creditors take over all the equity and the company emerges from bankruptcy debt-free in one day.  Without a dollar of debt, Boeing should be able to weather any disruption no matter how long, and once the economy normalizes it should be able to rehire all the workers that had been laid off. In reality, the company could probably manage to get through it without firing so many employees…or offering “voluntary buyouts”.

    Which brings us to our next point. After Palihapitiya explained the bankruptcy process, Wapner responded with a question that’s probably asked on his channel at least half a dozen times a day: “What about the 401(k)s?”

    “But you don’t think the employees of these companies own stocks, own the company’s stocks?”

    To which Palihapitiya had another point ready.

    “These things are owned by these huge amorphous organizations…ultimately downstream the employees own a few hundred dollars or a few thousand dollars of shares.”

    That’s right: After the world saw what happened to Enron employees who invested their entire retirement savings in Enron stock, there probably isn’t a single American who keeps literally all of their money in the shares of their employer. Even employee pension plans are typically managed by third parties and don’t consist of a larger percentage of the company’s stock.

    As Palihapitiya explained, while people absolutely need jobs to come back to, not every business will fail during this shut down. Many small businesses, like a small cafe or a restaurant, if they can’t pay the rent, it’s over. There really is not “business”, it’s just a lease and the restaurant setup. You can have partial owners, but if that restaurant goes under, it’ll likely shut down immediately, firing all of its staff. If a company like, say a large chain of newspapers that’s publicly traded, goes bankrupt, it will continue to operate.

    While the rich certainly didn’t cause the coronavirus, they typically aren’t also responsible for the many unanticipated risks that can make an investment or a business go south.

    But on Main Street, it’s a different story. There’s not as much nuance: People are panicking and scrambling to apply for government benefits because they don’t know how they’re going to keep a roof over their heads.

    “On main street today, people are getting wiped out, and right now rich CEOs are not, boards that had horrible governance are not, hedge funds are not…6 million people just this week along said ‘holy mackerel, I don’t know how I’m going to pay my rent.'”

    “And what we’ve done is protect CEOs and boards…when you have to wash these people out.”

    Just last year, millions of investors were forced to face up to the fact that not every new enterprise, including companies who grow to the point that they can raise money in an IPO, is profitable. In fact, thanks to various levels of government intervention in the free market, many of these ‘zombie’ companies exist in countries around the world, to varying degrees.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More recently, many more persistently loss-making companies have managed to struggle on for years, even when it’s become clear the enterprise is essentially doomed, because of all the investment capital bouncing around places like Silicon Valley.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We also found this handy guide from Investopedia offering a moderately detailed explainer on how corporate bankruptcies work, the various chapters, etc.

    But right at the top of that post, the writers make clear that even the investors don’t always get wiped out:

    If a company you’ve invested in files for bankruptcy, good luck getting any money back, the pessimists say – or if you do, chances are, you’ll get back pennies on the dollar. But is that true?

    Alas, there’s no one-size-fits-all answer.

    So maybe Wapner’s plan to simply fork over billion-dollar bailouts to every company or airline who asks needs a rethink.

    And it’s fitting that this heated exchange, which attracted so much attention that the producers over at CNBC made room during “the Closing Bell” lineup to have one of their reporters interview Wapner…about his interview with Chamath, happened today.

    Because earlier, the Fed unveiled a lending program aimed at saving ‘small businesses’ that is, in reality, just the latest assertion of dominance over a market where genuine price discovery has been suppressed for more than a decade now.

    To quote Bob Rodriguez, as we did during Thursday’s market wrap:

    With the initiation of the Fed’s complete takeover and control of the US financial economy, there is now absolutely no accurate pricing discovery in the capital markets and we have entered a period of total manipulation. In light of this, the only markets I have an interest in are those where the heavy hand of government is not involved or only minimally involved. This leads me to rare commodities and collectibles. The public equity and debt markets are now nothing more than greater fool markets that are led by the greatest fools of all, the Fed and the Congress. US capital markets, RIP!

    When all market risk is essentially socialized, a return vs risk evaluation is essentially meaningless.

    Over a period of time which I cannot estimate yet, I will continue my preparation for a far different economic and financial environment.

    Capital deployment strategies will likely have to change from what has been the norm in the post WW2 environment. We are in a New World Order.

    *  *  *
    Simply put, the global business environment is being transformed: Like AOC and George W Bush, we are all socialists now.

    And Wapner’s incredulity at being confronted by an investor who doesn’t accept bailouts as nothing short of a moral imperative just shows how badly the public has been brainwashed to simply accept this dynamic, where the wealthiest business owners are always given priority.

    Watch a clip from the interview below:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 20:20

  • Why The Political Class Freaked Out
    Why The Political Class Freaked Out

    Authored by Robert Wright via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    It’s unsurprising that governments around the world have reacted so strongly to COVID-19. I think the game-theoretic model below explains the first round nicely. It also provides insight into what round two might look like.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For game theory aficionados out there, I am not saying that this is the best way to model the world. I think, though, it is the way most politicians and their advisors think.

    Round one is a game against nature with uncertainty (no known or even knowable probabilities) so it basically pits some outcome, “good” (few deaths) or “bad” (many deaths), against government “action” (doing something) or “inaction” (doing nothing). The dominant strategy for politicians is clearly “action” because the outcomes for them (yes, I’m assuming a public choice framework) are better than “inaction” in either state of the world, “good” or “bad.”

    Specifically, if politicians do not act and the novel coronavirus burns out, like some epidemiologists argue it would anyway, the world is pretty much unchanged and a “serious crisis” is left unexploited.

    If politicians remain inactive and the stench from the crematoria make the living long for death themselves, well, then, there will be hell to pay at the polls, or the poles.

    If politicians act and the outcome is good, they can take credit and campaign on it for re-election, as many former military officers on both sides did by “waving the bloody shirt” of the Civil War for decades afterwards. A big win in other words. 

    If they act and the outcome is bad (i.e. if lots of people die) and again this is round one of the way politicians think, they can always portray it as a (comparatively) good come out with the refrain that “it’s a good thing we did something or this would have been much worse.” Some people will accept, while others reject, the validity of the statement—probably along party lines, so the expected outcome is better than in either of the two inaction squares.

    Our political system selects for cunning sorts, so politicians, including the President, try to adjust expectations about what a “good” or “bad” outcome would look like. They had incentives to jump on the worst-case scenarios in those now infamous early epi models, which The Atlantic has kindly recently told us were never meant to be correct.

    Thus ends round one, with most of the world in the lower left hand quadrant, under house arrest minus the ankle bracelets. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But now round two has started and it is confusing politicians because the actions taken in round one have created a new kind of bad outcome, output collapse so severe it itself will cause death.

    The rather daft assumption that throwing bailout money at the economy would minimize the impact of widespread lockdowns was shattered immediately by overwhelming empirical evidence (see coverage by AIER’s own Robert Hughes). So shrewder politicians, like Andrew Cuomo began to backpedal, as have the more astute progressive news outlets like The New York Times

    Politicians will be hesitant, though, to sound the full retreat bugle because that sets them up to be blamed for the potential bad economic times ahead and for “doing nothing” about COVID-19. Look for rational politicians, instead, to retreat to places like South Dakota and Sweden that implemented sensible policies short of lockdown early on and that, so far, are working. Politicians in both places will be able to credibly blame any local economic problems on “the other guys” while basking in the warm glow of below-projected deaths and relatively well-protected civil liberties. 

    Look, also, for some “cover” to justify the move. Epidemiologists say that blood tests will soon be available to estimate “the denominator”: the number of people who have already been infected. That will quickly give them a much better idea of how deadly the novel coronavirus actually is and where America is along the curve towards herd immunity. With an effective antibody test in hand, we won’t have to solicit volunteers to return to work, we will know who can return to life as usual without fear of contracting COVID-19, or of spreading it to others. We can also potentially treat those who get sick with the blood of those who naturally fought off the virus. And with production of ventilators and PPE gearing up, this crisis will eventually abate.

    At that point, the game will get really interesting because most voters will still see America in the bottom left quadrant with quite a few deaths but also a struggling economy. And in an election year no less! Oh, the spin machines will remain in high gear, noting that in per capita terms things were not that bad, that the death toll was due to the usual suspects of capitalism, socialism, Obamacare, stripped down Obamacare, etc.

    But, to borrow a phrase James Carville made infamous in 1992, the 2020 election will be about the stupid economy, Stupid. If it rebounds strongly, incumbents may have a chance. If it doesn’t, well, look at the model again but in a new light. Now inaction on the economy means hell to pay if the economy doesn’t bounce back and the status quo if it does. Action could lead to a lifetime of victories because “Remember when I saved the economy after the COVID-19 catastrophe” while action that leads to a bad economy will lead to a better outcome for the politician than inaction because of the “Imagine how bad things would have gotten if I didn’t take action” copout.

    There is a crucial difference, though, between the round one coronavirus game and the round two economic game. Nobody knew much of anything about the former but like a sunbeam history and comparative economics lights the way forward on the latter. With stimulus spent and people none-too-happy with government economic controls in practice, there is a chance that enough politicians will try to save their careers by pushing economic liberalization knowing that a “check mark” recovery (down but then sharply up, past the previous level) could result.

    Will politicians give up tariffs, occupational licensing, CONs and all the other regulatory detritus that weighs on the economy? My model says they will, if they know what is good for them. If they don’t, maybe voters will give us a fresh start this fall. This is the sort of stuff that leads to new parties, or massive realignments of old ones.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 20:00

  • House GOP Demand Answers From WHO Over Relationship With China
    House GOP Demand Answers From WHO Over Relationship With China

    Republican members of the House Oversight Committee have demanded answers from the World Health Organization (WHO) over their relationship with China.

    In a Thursday letter  addressed to WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, lawmakers expressed concerns over recent intelligence and media reports that the WHO has served China’s interests by helping the regime spread dangerous propaganda as the coronavirus pandemic unfolded.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus shakes hands with Chinese President Xi Jinping

    The letter to Ghebreyesus reads in part:

    Throughout the crisis, the WHO has shied away from placing any blame on the Chinese government, which is in essence the Communist Party of China. You, as leader of the WHO, even went so far as to praise the Chinese government’s “transparency” during the crisis, when, in fact, the regime has consistently lied to the world by underreporting their actual infection and death statistics.

    The letter continues: “On January 14, 2020, the WHO tweeted that “[p]reliminary investigations conducted by Chinese authorities have found no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission of the novel coronavirus.” These preliminary investigations included China jailing any doctor that disseminated any information about COVID-19 not first cleared through state-run media.”

    House Republicans also note that the WHO received “17% of its total funding, or $513 million, from the United States” in 2017, adding that “It is essential that American taxpayers’ money is allocated to organizations that uniformly serve the interests of nations across the globe, not merely the interests of China’s authoritarian, communist regime.”

    “The World Health Organization has become party to China’s coronavirus misinformation and propaganda campaign. Whether it’s deliberate or not, we don’t yet know,” said Rep. Jody Hice (R-GA), one of the co-signers of the letter, adding “This ‘apolitical’ organization praised the communist regime’s ‘transparency,’ spent weeks pushing the claim that there was no evidence of human-to-human transmission of the virus, and even resisted President Trump’s early travel restrictions on China. The United States is the largest contributor of WHO funding, and as such, we have a responsibility to provide oversight and demand reforms when necessary – as it has now.”

    Here’s what other cosigners had to say:

    Rep. James Comer (R-KY): “In January, the World Health Organization publicly repeated the Chinese government’s lie that there was “no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission” of COVID-19. This WHO-China cover-up, which included arresting doctors seeking to warn the world of the coronavirus, created a global outbreak that has frozen our economy and taken American lives. Without accountability for this crisis at the WHO, American taxpayers should no longer subsidize an organization that has acted as Communist China’s propaganda outlet at every turn.”

    Rep. Glenn Grothman (R-WI): “I think there is a global consensus that the wet markets of China, the genesis of this virus, are now causing a worldwide recession. The World Health Organization, perhaps because of the left-leaning proclivities found in many international organizations, has shown an inability to address sub-standard practices in China that they probably would have been addressing in other parts of the world.”

    Rep. Paul Gosar (R-AZ): “From the outset of the Wuhan coronavirus pandemic the World Health Organization has carried water for Communist China, resulting in faulty data, incorrect health recommendations, and ultimately the death of many Americans. It’s time for the WHO to answer for why they continue to support China’s propaganda campaign.”

    Rep. Mark Green (R-TN): “Why does the United States fund an organization that serves the interests of the Chinese Communist Party? From the get-go, the World Health Organization delayed declaring a health emergency, downplayed the danger of restricting travel to China, and disseminated Chinese propaganda despite China’s nefarious coverup of a virus that has unleashed untold suffering on the world. If the WHO wants to keep getting America’s money, it shouldn’t be carrying water for an authoritarian communist regime. We won’t get fooled again.”

    Rep. Kelly Armstrong (R-ND): “As we continue to address the COVID-19 pandemic in the United States, we must also understand the extent of China’s propaganda campaign regarding this virus. American taxpayers provide hundreds of millions of dollars for the World Health Organization and deserve answers on why the WHO chose to validate China’s propaganda.”

    Rep. Greg Steube (R-FL): “The WHO has let our country down every step of the way. We must clean house and  investigate their corruption so that we can protect our country from their ignorant mishandling of future pandemics. We cannot continue to fund this crooked organization with American Taxpayer money!”

    Rep. Ralph Norman (R-SC): “The conduct of the WHO during this pandemic is a disaster onto itself. In 2003, when the contagious coronavirus known as “SARS” spread from China, the WHO had the courage and the moral authority to criticize the regime’s cover-up. We need to know what has happened in the intervening years that transformed this organization from global health guardian, to the leading mouthpiece for Beijing.”

    Rep. Fred Keller (R-PA): “With the American taxpayer being the single largest contributor to the World Health Organizations’ annual budget, it is imperative the House Oversight and Reform Committee exercise its critical role in finding out why the WHO used that money to further China’s propaganda campaign of disinformation that has caused a global pandemic, upended the world economy, and cost tens of thousands of American lives. The Chinese government must be held accountable for its role in exacerbating this virus. To that end, the WHO must end its silence and work with the international community to investigate Chinese disinformation and strive for accountability during this global emergency.

    Read the letter below:

    FINAL Letter to WHO Re China Pressure by Zerohedge Janitor on Scribd


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 19:40

  • Gold Knows "There Are No Temporary Measures, Just Permanent Lies"
    Gold Knows “There Are No Temporary Measures, Just Permanent Lies”

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk,

    The Fed announced today that it will buy junk bonds. This exceeds its legal authority. Supposedly, it’s temporary

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Under guise of virus support, the Fed Will Buy Junk Bonds, Lend to States to the tune of an additional $2.3 trillion in additional aid.

    Dear Jerome Powell, please tell the truth. This is not virus support, it’s stock market support.

    “We will continue to use these powers forcefully, pro-actively, and aggressively until we are confident that we are solidly on the road to recovery,” said powell in a speech 90 minutes after the details of the measures were announced.

    The key missing word is “legally“.

    Hussman Blasts the Fed

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Pushing the Boundaries

    Please consider Powell Pushed to Edge of Fed’s Boundaries in Fight for Economy

    By pushing the Federal Reserve into corners of financial markets it has mostly shunned in its 106-year history, Chairman Jerome Powell is running into some thorny questions.

    Like, for instance, how to maintain independence from the U.S. Treasury when the economic-support package Congress passed says they should work together? Or whether the same guidelines for companies receiving federal aid, which range from compensation limits to off-shoring restrictions, apply to the Fed if it gets more money from Treasury? And how about which companies — and perhaps eventually, municipalities and states — are invited to borrow and at what cost?

    “This is going to lead to a complete re-examination of the role of central banking and the Fed’s independence,” warns Karen Shaw Petrou, a managing partner at Federal Financial Analytics, a Washington research firm. The Fed’s steps into credit allocation are tantamount to “a complete redesign of central banking on the fly.”

    Pole Vaulting the Boundaries

    When you take illegal actions and enter numerous uncharted territories on balance sheet expansion, junk bonds, and bond ETFs you are not “pushing” the boundaries, you are pole vaulting over them.

    Temporary Measures

    Powell says these are temporary facilities.

    Yeah, right. Just like the Fed’s announcement that its previous balance sheet expansion was “temporary”.

    The Fed had 10 years to unwind its balance sheet after the last crisis, but never did. Now we have new balance sheet records every week.

    And today the Fed upped the ante by another $2.3 trillion.

    There is no reason to expect it will stop there.

    Gold Soars

    In response to the announcement stocks and junk bonds rose.

    Gold jumped as high as $1752. As of 12:50 Central it’s up $55 to $1739.

    Gold vs Faith in Central Banks

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold’s New Breakout is Very Bullish: Here’s Why

    On April 6, I wrote Gold’s New Breakout is Very Bullish: Here’s Why

    If you believe as I do that the price of gold is reflective of faith in central banks, there is every reason to be bullish rather than pay heed to alleged 5-year cycles.

    COT action is icing on the bullish case.

    Moral Fraud and Panic

    In case you missed it, please note the Small Business Guarantees Are a Bucket of Moral Fraud

    The Fed is in panic mode as Unemployment Claims Jump by 16.78 Million in Last 3 Weeks.

    Today’s Fed actions compound the moral fraud.

    Panic and fraud inevitably run on the same track.

    Today’s Message from Gold

    There are no temporary measures, just permanent lies.

    No matter what the closing price of gold today, that’s the key message.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 19:20

  • 'Piracy' Or America First? US Customs To Seize All Exports Of Masks & Gloves 
    ‘Piracy’ Or America First? US Customs To Seize All Exports Of Masks & Gloves 

    A policy that US allies in Europe have recently slammed as ‘piracy’ is set to continue, as Washington unabashedly and unapologetically continues blocking shipments from US soil of personal protective equipment (PPE) such as gowns, gloves, and N95 face masks — which hospitals and health workers desperately need in the fight against COVID-19.

    The Hill reports that “The federal government will begin seizing exports of personal protective equipment, or PPE, until it decides if the tools should be kept in the country to fight the coronavirus.”

    The announcement was made Wednesday by US Customs and Border Protection (CBP), formalizing an existing controversial practice under Defense Production Act (DPA) which has recently blocked millions of masks from being exported from Minnesota-based 3M to Canada. US customs will block all respirators, surgical masks and surgical gloves from going abroad.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image source: Reuters

    Canadian leaders blasted the move as putting lives in danger, while Germany and France described the US policy, which has seen recent interventions against shipments from China bound for Europe, as ‘piracy’. 

    “FEMA and CBP are working together to prevent domestic brokers, distributors, and other intermediaries from diverting these critical medical resources overseas,” a joint statement indicated.

    “Today’s order is another step in our ongoing fight to prevent hoarding, price gouging, and profiteering by preventing the harmful export of critically needed PPE,” the White House also said in a statement. “It will help ensure that needed PPE is kept in our country and gets to where it is needed to defeat the virus.” 

    It appears Trump’s ‘America First’ policy in action at a crucial time of crisis, as the US is the global epicenter for COVID-19, now with over 430,000 confirmed cases – most in New York state – which has witnessed hospitals running desperately low on supplies, including ventilators. 

    However, foreign governments have of late essentially warned ‘what goes around comes around’. Berlin Interior Minister Andreas Geisel at the start of the week stated bluntly of Washington’s brazen policy that it constitutes a Wild West tactic – essentially warning Europe can play dirty too.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 19:00

  • The COVID-19 "Lockdowns" Are What Twenty-First-Century Mob Rule Looks Like
    The COVID-19 “Lockdowns” Are What Twenty-First-Century Mob Rule Looks Like

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    As of April 6, forty-one states have statewide “stay-at-home” decrees in place. These orders vary widely from place to place. In some states, there are long lists of exempted industries including marijuana dispensaries, liquor stores, hardware stores, and of course, grocery stores. In some states with these edicts, public lands, state parks, and beaches remain open. In some states, city parks are more crowded than ever as local residents, with little else to do, attempt to recreate. In other places – such as California – one can be arrested for paddleboarding all alone in the ocean.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yet in all of these places, the current regime of rule by decree will have—and already has had—a devastating effect on many small and medium-sized businesses and their employees. As governments have created new arbitrary definitions of what constitutes an “essential” business, some businesses find themselves forced to close. Employees have lost these jobs. The owners of these enterprises will likely lose far more as debts mount and business investments are destroyed. As unemployment and poverty increase, the usual pathologies will arise as well: suicides, child abuse, and stress-induced death.

    Yet the politicians—mostly state governors, mayors, and unelected bureaucrats—remain popular. In New York State, where the lockdown orders are among the most draconian in the nation, it is now claimed that 87 percent of those polled approve of Governor Andrew Cuomo’s handling of the situation. As Donald Trump’s administration has recommended ever harsher government limits on the freedom of Americans, his poll numbers have only improved.

    Meanwhile, among critics there appears to be a misconception of these lockdowns (which are very often only partially imposed or enforced) as being imposed over the howls of the local population, which is being silenced and cowed by jackbooted local police.

    If only that were true. In most places, it appears clear that a great many residents approve of the lockdowns. We see this support in the form of all the local scolds who complain on Nextdoor.com about neighborhood children who don’t properly engage in “social distancing.” We see it in the people who call the police to report violators of stay-at-home orders. We see it in those who report local businesses for allowing too many people inside.

    Viewed in this way, it may be more likely that state governors and other politicians are afraid of being seen as doing too little, rather than as overstepping their authority to impose public safety measures.

    After all, given that the COVID-19 virus is far more deadly for the elderly than for younger groups, one might reasonably suppose that the elderly are most likely to become hysterical over the virus. For politicians, that’s one group you don’t want to cross. As the AARP notes:

    For nearly 40 years, the turnout of voters over age 45 has significantly outpaced that of younger Americans. In the 2016 presidential election, for example, 71 percent of Americans over 65 voted, compared with 46 percent among 18- to 29-year-olds, according to U.S. Census Bureau data. While analysts point to increased energy among younger voters over the past couple of elections, people over 65 continue to show up at the polls far more than any other age group. At the same time, the number of voters who fall into the category of “older” keeps rising.

    If a governor is receiving calls from local voters about the need to “do something”—especially if they’re in a demographic that’s more likely to vote—then it’s no surprise if that governor soon discovers that there is a “need” to impose a stay-at-home order post-haste.

    Meanwhile, governors and other officials receive daily pressure from unelected bureaucrats who look to harness the benefits of public acquiescence. US News reports on a likely typical case in Iowa:

    One of the most outspoken critics of Iowa’s approach to fighting the outbreak has been Eli Percenevich, an epidemiologist and physician who oversees a group of researchers studying infection prevention at the University of Iowa and Iowa City’s VA Hospital.

    He has called on [Iowa governor Kim] Reynolds to issue a shelter-in-place order, saying many Iowans aren’t getting the message that they need to stay home.

    The “solution” favored by these government employees is clear: more lockdowns, more business closures, harsher punishments for violators. Yes, some governors push back on these demands, but as time goes on they “waver,” “soften,” and eventually change their minds as panicky residents and government-employed “experts” demand action.

    Of course, none of the politicians or bureaucrats who want to deprive people of their property and their employment will lose their jobs. Their taxpayer-funded salaries are quite safe. (At least until state and local tax revenues collapse.) But so far, I’ve heard of no governor willing to forego his own salary while millions are put out of work by government decrees.

    At this point, many elected officials likely see being “asleep at the switch” as a more politically damaging charge than “being a tyrant.” It’s possible that this may change as the realities of mass unemployment and bankruptcy sink in. But for now most politicians, like the people who vote for them, are clinging to the idea that if the federal government prints enough money and bails out enough industries everything will soon return to normal.

    The fact that business owners and entrepreneurs are being sacrificed is of little political import to elected officials or most voters. After all, only 10 percent of Americans actually make a full-time living from businesses they own. Only a small minority of the population understands firsthand how jobs are created and how payrolls are met. Much of the rest of the population thinks wages and wealth magically appear from the ether. If there is unemployment and low wages, it’s because business owners are “greedy” or unwilling to share the wealth. Thus, if businesses are temporarily shut down “for our own good,” then surely those business owners will just use their secret hidden wealth to start up those businesses again when the panic is over.

    Thus, we’re not witnessing a usurper regime imposing unpopular measures on a resistant but helpless citizenry. We’re more likely witnessing widespread mob rule, the central characteristic of which is rule by the majority with no regard for the rights of dissenting minorities. The government may now be ruling by decree, but it is in many places doing so with the hearty approval of the majority. Politicians have calculated that they’re likely to remain popular so long as they cultivate an image of “decisive leadership” through strong decrees and demands for compliance in the name of safety. As Cuomo’s surging popularity suggests, this may be a safe political move.

    Certainly there are those who resist. There are those for whom the rule of law, the Bill of Rights, and basic freedoms actually matter. But for others, principles such as these are quickly forgotten once fear and anxiety enter the picture. The rights of minority groups (such as business owners or old-fashioned Bill of Rights enthusiasts) mean little or nothing once the majority—conditioned by years of public schooling to demand a government solution to nearly everything—decides that such rights are an inconvenient obstacle to “doing something.”

    The public demands action. Politicians are more than happy to oblige.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 18:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 9th April 2020

  • France's Lone Aircraft Carrier Cuts Mission Short Due To 40 Likely COVID-19 Cases
    France’s Lone Aircraft Carrier Cuts Mission Short Due To 40 Likely COVID-19 Cases

    After the American nuclear carrier USS Theodore Roosevelt was forced to dock in Guam while in the Western Pacific, unleashing a storm of controversy over what to do with its crew under urgent need of immediate quarantine — and now with at least 230 sailors confirmed for COVID-19 — another carrier’s mission has been cut short, this time belonging to a close US ally.

    France’s lone nuclear-powered aircraft carrier, the Charles de Gaulle, will return home early from deployment in the Atlantic after some 40 sailors have been put under medical observation for coronavirus, the defense ministry said Wednesday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    French aircraft carrier Charles de Gaulle. AFP via Getty

    The Charles de Gaulle has also put the suspected cases in isolation, believing them likely sick with COVID-19, the French defense ministry statement continued. However, serious or critical illness aboard the ship has yet to be reported. 

    The first cases showed symptoms recently,” the ministry said. “There are no signs of aggravated cases among the patients.”

    “As of today, a screening team with test means will be sent aboard the aircraft carrier to investigate the cases that have arisen and to hinder the spread of the virus on board the ship,” the statement said.

    “It was decided to bring forward its return to Toulon, initially scheduled for 23 April,” the ministry said. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via French Navy/US Naval Institute 

    The ship has a crew of almost 1,800 sailors and recently participated in NATO exercises, after which it was slated to return to the Mediterranean. 

    Specifically it was to continue France’s Operation Chammal in support of anti-ISIL missions in the Middle East, which has now been cut short. 

    No doubt enemies of the United States and Europe are taking note of the ease with which this virus took out multi-billion dollar state-of-the-art aircraft carriers, which up to now appeared unbeatable and unable to be thwarted from their missions.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 02:35

  • Himalayas Visible For First Time In 30 Years As India Lockdown Sparks Stunning Drop In Pollution
    Himalayas Visible For First Time In 30 Years As India Lockdown Sparks Stunning Drop In Pollution

    Authored by Elias Marat via TheMindUnleashed.com,

    For many residents, the sight is something which they have never witnessed in their entire lives…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For the first time in 30 years, India’s snow-covered Dhauladhar mountain range has become visible to locals as a result of plunging pollution levels resulting from measures taken to check the spread of the novel coronavirus.

    For many residents, the sight of the Dhauladhar Range—which translates to “White Range” and forms part of the Himalayas—is something which they have never witnessed in their entire lives, reports SBS.

    Many have been eager to share their feelings about it on social media, including former Indian cricket player Harbhajan Singh, who wrote:

    “Never seen Dhauladar range from my home rooftop in Jalandhar. Never could imagine that’s possible. A clear indication of the impact the pollution has done by us to mother earth.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While anti-pollution activist Sant Balbir Singh Seeechewal told SBS:

    “We can see the snow-covered mountains clearly from our roofs. And not just that, stars are visible at night. I have never seen anything like this in recent times.” 

    India, a country with upwards of 1.3 billion residents, has been placed under a strict nationwide lockdown from March 22 until at least April 14. The draconian move limits the movement of the entire population, and has been criticized by rights groups as well as figures from private industry who claim that the measure is arbitrary and damages the country and its economy.

    On Tuesday, the Economic Times published an opinion piece by auto company executive Rajiv Bajaj arguing that “virtually no country has imposed such a sweeping lockdown as India has; I continue to believe this makes India weak rather than stronger in combating the epidemic.”

    However, the lockdown—which shut down factories, marketplaces, small shops, places of worship, most public transportation and construction projects—has also provided a temporary respite from the suffocating pollution levels India is known for. No less than 21 of the world’s 30 most polluted cities are in the South Asian giant.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Seechewal explained:

    “Not just normal traffic is off the roads, but most industry is also shut down. This has helped bring the pollution level to unbelievably low levels.”

    According to CNN, government data has shown that India’s capital New Delhi has seen a 71 percent plunge of the harmful microscopic particulate matter known as PM 2.5. The particulate matter, which lodges deep into the lungs and passes into vital organs and the bloodstream, causes a number of serious risks to people’s health.

    In the meantime, nitrogen dioxide spewed into the air by motor traffic and power plants has also fallen by 71 percent from 52 per cubic meter to 15 in the same period.

    Similar drops in air pollutants have been registered in major cities like Bangalore, Chennai, Kolkata, and Mumbai.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Jyoti Pande Lavakare, the co-founder of Indian environmental organization Care for Air, told the network:

    “I have not seen such blue skies in Delhi for the past 10 years …It is a silver lining in terms of this awful crisis that we can step outside and breathe.”

    India is hardly alone in experiencing a vast improvement of air quality in association with government clampdowns meant to curb the spread of the pandemic.

    From China to Europe and even the notoriously smoggy Los Angeles, business shutdowns and restrictions on movement have seen similar falls in nitrogen dioxide concentrations.

    Seechewal is floored by the sharp drop in air pollution. He said:

    “I had never imagined I would experience such a clean world around me. The unimaginable has happened. It shows nothing is impossible. We must work together to keep it like that.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 02:00

  • Russia Accuses Trump Of Trying To Conquer The Galaxy
    Russia Accuses Trump Of Trying To Conquer The Galaxy

    President Trump took a giant leap for America this week by signing an executive order outlining US policy on commercial mining in space. 

    Upon Trump signing the order, entitled “Encouraging International Support for the Recovery and Use of Space Resources,” which gives Americans the “the right to engage in the commercial exploration, recovery, and use of resources in outer space,” the Russian space agency, Roscosmos, accused the US of attempting to conquer the galaxy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Roscosmos said in a statement Tuesday that “Attempts to expropriate outer space and aggressive plans to de facto seize the territories of other planets will hardly encourage other nations to participate in fruitful cooperation.”

    Sergey Savelyev, Roscosmos deputy director responsible for international cooperation, insisted President Trump’s space ambitions were tantamount to space colonialism: 

    “There have already been examples in history when one country decided to start seizing territories in its own interests and everyone remembers how that turned out,” Savelyev said.

    The Kremlin said colonization of space would be “unacceptable.”

    This is not the first time Washington has outlined the need to harvest resources from space. In 2015, Congress signed a law permitting companies to extract resources from asteroids and the moon.

    After 50 years, NASA has recently released plans of returning to the moon by 2024. On the other hand, Roscosmos has said it will land Russians on Earth’s only natural satellite by 2030. As it appears, both space agencies are locked in a moon race for this decade.

    It becomes quite apparent at this point why President Trump signed the National Defense Authorization Act in late 2019 to usher in the Space Force — the newest and sixth branch of the military — the first since the last branch, the US Air Force was established in 1947. That is because resource wars on other planets or the moon could be the next domain in warfare. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 01:00

  • Paul Craig Roberts: A New World Is Being Born, What Will It Be?
    Paul Craig Roberts: A New World Is Being Born, What Will It Be?

    Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

    We are hearing from many that the world after Covid-19 will be different.  

    The question is:  Different in what way?  Will it be better or worse?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Elites are working to make it better for them, and worse for the rest of us.  About that the evidence is clear.  The Big Boys are being bailed out and their debts covered.  Everyone else, except those already marginalized and without a recent work record and fixed address, got a month’s rent and extended unemployment benefits.  

    Big Pharma sees massive profits in the virus, Government sees more power to control

    But the disparity in economic benefits is only a part of it.  Powerful vested interests, such as Bill Gates and Big Pharma, are determined to vaccinate us all, and to control our movements with an internal passport called “vaccinated, health cleared” or other words to that effect.  New tracking procedures and technologies are to be put in operation reminiscent of the “mark of the beast” to police the access of varous categories of people to various areas and benefits.  

    Experts point out that just as we cannot be vaccinated against the common cold, except perhaps for the past year’s version we cannot be vaccinated against Covid-19 and other mutating viruses, but the experts are already being shouted down. No expert opinion is to be permitted to stand in the way of vaccination profits.  

    Neither will nutrition and vitamin advocates be allowed to get in the way.  Bill Sardi predicts that orchestrated scares generated by mandatory recalls of “toxic” vitamins await us. Big Pharma is determined to acquire control over vitamins and homeopathic remedies, and the FDA is Big Pharma’s likely pawn.

    Vaccination has been elevated above cure, as Big Pharma and its shills such as CNN shout down the positive experience doctors report of successful treatments with Hydroxychloroquine and Azithromycin, and the effectiveness of Vitamin C, Vitamin D3, and Zinc in strengthening the ability of immune systems to fight off the virus.  Big Pharma-influenced medical orthodoxy cannot get out of the box it has been put into.  When new thinking and experimentation are needed, those capable of thought are hasseled and even blocked by FDA regulations and dogmatism.

    The permanent government and its security agencies see in the population’s fear and confusion opportunities to put into place more tyrannical measures, more set-asides of Constitutional Rights, more impairments on free speech.  The ability of freedom to resist oppression is ever diminished.

    Various descriptions of the expected dystopia are offered on the Internet.  But it does not have to turn out this way.  It is up to us. Demoralized and fearful, we can accept more government power as we did after 9/11.  Instead, we can collectively recognize the massive failure everywhere of Western leadership and construct a more liveable and sustainable society. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The failure of leadership is an opportunity for real change

    CNN, the New York Times, and the rest of the controlled media tell us every day that President Trump represents the failure of leadership.  But the failure of leadership goes beyond all the leaders of the last 30 years and resides in the system itself.  Global, “self-regulating,” greed-driven, financialized, soulless capitalism cannot unite people into a sustainable community. 

    The failure of leadership resides in the long-term failure of leadership that made Western societies vulnerable by moving high-productivity, high-valued jobs offshore in order to raise corporate profits at the expense of domestic consumer incomes.  It means the movement offshore of the ability to produce medicines, N95 masks, and other needed resources for national survival.  It means dependency on foreign powers.  It means the inability to function without massive imports.  However you look at it, globalism is a death sentence.  Its only advantage is to the rich, and the advantage comes to them in the form of cheap labor that swells their profits while it shrinks domestic incomes and the purchasing power of the population.

    Without incomes to drive the economy, the elites provided loans and expanded credit in order to provide spending power based in personal debt to absorb the offshored production brought home to sell in American markets. The cost of college education soared as its quality declined.  Education subsidies were cut and student debt substituted in its place.  Inflation was understated in order to deny Social Security pensioners cost-of-living increases. Medicare payments to health care providers were squeezed down.  The social safety net was ripped again and again. More and more people fell out, and homeless populations grew providing fertile breeding grounds for Covid-19.

    The income and wealth distribution in the US went from fair to extremely unequal in a short time as the rich profited from the Federal Reserve pumping trillions of dollars into the prices of financial assets and from corporations buying back their own stock, thus decapitalizing the corporation while taking the company into debt, all for the temporary benefit of higher bonuses for executives and more capital gains for shareholders.  The elites killed the economy for short-run benefits to themselves.

    These destructive polices were the work of greed-driven short-term thinkers—people whose only vision was “I want even more.”  And it is these unworthy people, not their victims, that Uncle Sam is now rescuing.  The massive unpayable debt bubble that already overhung the economy is being blown larger.  The Federal Reserve and the US Treasury are in the process of destroying the US dollar in futile efforts to save the super-rich from their own greed-driven misbehavior.

    In place of this insane approach to the economic crisis, there is a sane approach.  The bailed out corporations and banks are in effect being purchased by the government.  Therefore, they should be treated as the nationalized corporations that they are.  Once nationalized, the government, unlike the corporations, can create the money to pay the salaries and health premiums. The predicted 30 or 40 percent unemployment can be avoided.  It is better to pay salaries than to pay unemployment benefits.  The psychological difference alone is worth a vast amount.

    The inability of the high-cost American private health care system to cope with the present medical crisis is apparent.  A profit-driven health care system is the highest cost system to have. 

    Profit is built in at every level, which raises costs to levels that private insurance and Medicare refuse to reimburse.  The result is shrinkage, not expansion of the system.  Just look, for example, at the number of hospitals, especially in rural areas, that have recently closed.  

    Moreover, the coverage of a private system—and Medicare itself—has massive gaps.  The resistance to a nationalized health service is ridiculous, especially as a nationalized service can coexist with a privatized one.  Two are clearly better than one.

    Nationalization has numerous benefits.  It permits the large unwieldly enterprises, created, for example, by the mergers of giant banks like Chase Manhattan and J.P. Morgan, to be broken up and to reestablish the separation of commercial from investment banking.  The repeal of the Glass-Steagall Act and the suspension of enforcement of the anti-trust laws were ignorant policymaking at its worse. Nationalization permits the government to bring home the offshored production of global US corporations and to put the US workforce back to work in middle class jobs.  It is win-win for the American people.

    Once the giant monopoly corporations are broken up, they can be privatized and returned to private ownership on a fair value basis, not on the giveaway basis of a pennies on the dollar sale. The money the government receives from their sale can be used to retire government debt.  

    For individuals, the life- and economy-suffocating heavy debts should be written down to levels that can be serviced by their incomes.  Michael Hudson and I proposed a “debt jubilee” as a solution. Others have taken up our call.

    Currently the Federal Reserve is socializing debt without writing it down.  This is nonsensical as it bails out debt by expanding it.  

    In the US there is so much dogmatic prejudice against anything that has a tint of socialism, even as a temporary expedient measure, that thought and sensible action face strong barriers.  If we cannot overcome these barriers, we are destined for far more difficult times.

    Can community be restored or will nationality degenerate into the clans and tribalism of Identity Politics?

    The greatest challenge we face is to restore the concept of community.  There was a time when  the United States was a community, a unique one as it consisted of a multitude of ethnicities. As each wave of ethnic immigrants arrived, they passed a test on the Constitution, learned the national language, and became assimilated into the American community.  

    This community has been destroyed by a variety of forces, the latest being Identity Politics.  Identity Politics prohibits community by breaking down the population into mutually hostile groups by gender, sexual preference, race, and whatever classification can be invented or imagined.  The result is a Tower of Babel.  A Tower of Babel is not a community.  

    Instead of community, the US is a place where hatreds are cultivated with those claiming the status of victims doing the most hating and those assigned the status of victimizer being most hated.  Initially, white hetereosexual males were the primary hate objects, but lately we have the transgendered hating the feminists who say that a woman is a woman, not a man who claims to be a woman.  The transgendered attacks on well-known feminist leaders are violent in their language and are likely to progress into violent deeds.  Various unassimilated immigrant groups battle each other over who controls disputed territory.  Israel’s inhumane treatment of Palestinians has enraged Muslim immigrants against Jews.  Violent racial attacks on white people are becoming more common.  

    For decades Women’s Studies have taught hatred of men, and Black Studies have taught hatred of Whites.  This taught hatred is now supplemented by the New York Times 1619 Project.  In place of assimilation, we now have mutual hatreds.  How do we escape from this?

    Perhaps the challenge from Covid-19 will force us to come together again in order to prevail over the virus, which in mutated versions might be with us forever.  A coming together would be helped by an economic bailout perceived as fair rather than as the one-sided approach that has been taken. A debt jubilee provides the necessary fairness.  

    The elites by thinking only of their interests are in the way of the opportunity that crisis provides to bring people together.  If we can’t be brought back together, we can forget about unity beyond the boundaries of our own victim or identity group.  In place of community, we will be organized in clans of separate identities.  The absence of unity at home will make us a sitting duck for enemies abroad.  

    We know what the Dystopian Wish List is.  Can we come together with an anti-dystopian wish list as a mutually supportive community or have the elites succeeded in atomizing us into disparate tribal hate groups?  


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 04/09/2020 – 00:00

  • NBA Wants Players To Cut Salaries In Half To Offset $1.2BN In Lost Revenue
    NBA Wants Players To Cut Salaries In Half To Offset $1.2BN In Lost Revenue

    Following the March 11 decision by Commissioner Adam Silver to suspend the NBA season, among the first professional sports leagues to take the drastic action after Utah Jazz players began contracting COVID-19, analysts predicted an immediately felt $1.2 billion loss in NBA revenue.

    As Bleacher Report broke it down days ago, this translates to a $600 million hit to the players.

    League leadership has been under pressure to compensate for the massive losses, first by the controversial question of obtaining returned pay from players, ahead of player contract expiration (or also roll over to the 2020-21 season).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    NBA players Andrea Bargnani and Luis Scola file image, Getty.

    Amid ongoing negotiations with agents, the NBA is reportedly pushing for a 50% player pay cut to offset losses based on suspending all games this season, The Athletic reports.

    The NBA Players Association (NBAP) meanwhile has countered with a 25% pay cut plan, to take effect by mid-May.

    Like other sectors across the US, the league quickly felt the severe impact of coronavirus devastation

    The Philadelphia 76ers were one of the first organizations to enforce a 20 percent pay cut across the organization, but the team backtracked after criticism from fans, media, and people within the franchise.

    On Friday, the Utah Jazz announced layoffs to non-basketball staff due to the coronavirus. Other employees agreed to reduce their compensation just so they could keep their employment with the team.

    This after three weeks of games have been canceled thus far, with Commissioner Silver planning to decide on a season restart by the beginning of May, which could witness games played in strict isolation, only televised.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    NBA Commissioner Adam Silver, via NBA.com

    Starting two weeks ago it was announced top NBA executives, including Adam Silver, would take a 20% pay cut.

    This also as teams began furloughing much of their staff, especially non-basketball personnel, such as logistics and marketing employees.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 23:40

  • Expect (At Least) Another 6.5 Million In Jobless Claims
    Expect (At Least) Another 6.5 Million In Jobless Claims

    Two weeks ago it was a record 3.3 million initial claims;  last week it was an  additional 6.6 million in initial claims for a two-week total of 10 million Americans having just lost their jobs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tomorrow, Wall Street consensus expects another 5.5 million in initial claims to have been filed although the truth is that nobody has any idea how to quantify and estimate what is essentially the US economy sliding into an economic depression (supposedly a short one, but again, who knows). For the second week in a row, Pictet analyst Thomas Costerg remains the most bearish with a 7.5 million forecast, which if accurate would mean that approximately 18 million Americans – 11% of the labor force – have filed for unemployment benefits in the past three weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Drilling down into the number we use BofA’s forecast which is inbetween the median and the high at 6.5 million. According to the bank, “local news covering developments in various states point to national claims remaining near record levels” although as the bank notes, “risks are tilted to the upside given Google Trends data and the CARES Act. Seasonal adjustment will be a negative offset.”

    Some more details:

    After reviewing data from local news reports to gather an assessment by state, BofA thinks that 6.5 million claims is a reasonable forecast. For 16 states, the bank found either specific information or enough to back out an implied number, calculating a total of 2.3mn for the upcoming report which matches the week ending March 28 for these 16 states.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Assuming the other states come in similar to the week prior, we are on track for close to 6.5 million jobless claims.

    That said, the risks are clearly tilted to the upside (i.e., a much higher claims print). There were broad signs that state governments were increasing hiring or shifting resources to better process filings for unemployment benefits given the deluge in recent weeks. Some states believed the worst was yet to come. Picking up on our analysis from last week, BofA notes that data from Google Trends reveals further pickup in searches for “unemployment benefits” and “filing for unemployment,” which could argue for upside.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is one potential negative offset: seasonal adjustment. The Bureau of Labor Statistics releases seasonal factors in advance and for the week ending April 4 there is a 6.5% positive adjustment to non-seasonally adjusted claims, which is 7.7pp lower than the +14.2% seasonal adjustment in the last report.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To put this in context, combining last week’s non-seasonally adjusted figure of 5.8mn with this week’s lower seasonal factor would result in seasonally adjusted claims of 6.2mn instead of 6.6mn that was actually reported.

    That said, the actualy number will likely be even higher due to the bailout itself: as a reminder, the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security (CARES) Act, passed on March 27, could contribute to new records being reached in coming weeks as it increases eligibility for jobless claims to self-employed and gig workers, extends the maximum number of weeks that one can receive benefits, and provides an additional $600 per week until July 31. A recent WSJ article noted that this has created incentives for some businesses to temporarily furlough their employees, knowing that they will be covered financially as the economy is shutdown. Meanwhile, those making below $50k will generally be made whole and possibly be better off on unemployment benefits.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 23:20

  • Americans Not Making Their Mortgage Payments Soar By 1064% In One Month
    Americans Not Making Their Mortgage Payments Soar By 1064% In One Month

    Earlier today we reported that the “The Liquidity Crisis Is Quickly Becoming A Solvency Crisis“, and nowhere is this more true than for US homeowners (their servicers, and their lenders).

    According to the latest Mortgage Bankers Association Forbearance and Call Volume Survey which highlights the “unprecedented, widespread mortgage forbearance already requested by borrowers affected by the spread of the coronavirus”, the total number of loans in forbearance grew to 2.66% as of April 1; just one month ago, on March 2, the rate was 0.25%, or a 1,064% increase in just one month.

    For loans backed by Ginnie Mae, which serves low- and moderate-income borrowers, the surge was much  greater, with total loans in forbearance soaring to 4.25% from 0.19% one month ago.

    Overall, the MBA reports that total forbearance requests grew by 1,270% between the week of March 2 and the week of March 16, and another 1,896% between the week of March 16 and the week of March 30.

    According to Bloomberg, borrowers with relatively low credit scores, many of whom live paycheck to paycheck, are most likely to seek relief. Over the past two years, Ginnie Mae has guaranteed $583 billion of 30-year mortgages with FICO scores below 715, according to data compiled by Bloomberg. However, the longer the coronavirus shutdown lasts, the higher the FICO cutoff for those borrowers unable (or unwilling) to make mortgage payments.

    “MBA’s survey highlights the immediate relief consumers are seeking as they navigate the economic hardships brought forth by the mitigation efforts to stop the spread of COVID-19,” said Mike Fratantoni, MBA’s Senior Vice President and Chief Economist. “The mortgage industry is committed to providing this much-needed forbearance as mandated by law under the CARES Act. It is expected that requests will continue to skyrocket at an unsustainable pace in the coming weeks, putting insurmountable cash flow constraints on many servicers – especially IMBs.”

    The surge in nonpayments comes as the U.S. economy has largely shut down to stem the spread of the coronavirus. The government is requiring lenders handling payments on federally backed loans to give borrowers grace periods of as much as six months at a time with no penalties. Predictably, loan servicers have been flooded with borrowers requesting help.

    As the tide of requests to stop mortgage payments come in, the MBS reported that according to mortgage servicer call centers, the wait times increased to 17.5 minutes from under two minutes three weeks prior, and the abandonment rates grew to 25% from 5%. It could get worse: as Americans lose jobs by the millions, mortgage companies say they’ll soon get overwhelmed.

    Of course, the problem with a solvency crisis is that it creeps up along the financial chain and loan servicers, which are required to pay bondholders whether or not borrowers pay, are themselves facing a liquidity shortfall that could be devastating for some independent mortgage companies. The MBA said that 3.45% of loans held by nonbanks have gone into forbearance. What’s worse is that while it is easy for people to stop paying their mortgage, it will take months if not years to get all those who stopped paying to restart again.

    * * *

    Unfortunately, this is just the beginning. As we reported last week, according to Moody’s Analytics, as much as 30% of homeowners – about 15 million households – could stop paying their mortgages if the U.S. economy remains closed through the summer or beyond.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “This is an unprecedented event,” said Susan Wachter, professor of real estate and finance at the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania. She also points out another way the current crisis is different from the 2008 GFC: “The great financial crisis happened over a number of years. This is happening in a matter of months – a matter of weeks.”

    Meanwhile lenders – like everyone else – are operating in the dark, with no way of predicting the scope or duration of the pandemic or the damage it will wreak on the economy. If the virus recedes soon and the economy roars back to life, then the plan will help borrowers get back on track quickly. But the greater the fallout, the harder and more expensive it will be

    Meanwhile lenders – like everyone else – are operating in the dark, with no way of predicting the scope or duration of the pandemic or the damage it will wreak on the economy. If the virus recedes soon and the economy roars back to life, then the plan will help borrowers get back on track quickly. But the greater the fallout, the harder and more expensive it will be to stave off repossessions.

    “Nobody has any sense of how long this might last,” said Andrew Jakabovics, a former Department of Housing and Urban Development senior policy adviser who is now at Enterprise Community Partners, a nonprofit affordable housing group. “The forbearance program allows everybody to press pause on their current circumstances and take a deep breath. Then we can look at what the world might look like in six or 12 months from now and plan for that.”

    But if the economic turmoil is long-lasting, the government will have to find a way to prevent foreclosures – which could mean forgiving some debt, said Tendayi Kapfidze, Chief Economist at LendingTree. And with the government now stuck in “bailout everyone mode”, the risk of allowing foreclosures to spiral is just too great because it would damage financial markets and that could reinfect the economy, he explained.

    “I expect policy makers to do whatever they can to hold the line on a financial crisis,” Kapfidze said hinting at just a trace of a conflict of interest as his firm may well be next to fold if its borrowers declare a payment moratorium. “And that means preventing foreclosures by any means necessary.”

    Take for example Laura Habberstad, a bar manager in Washington, D.C., who got a reprieve from her lender but needs time to catch up. The coronavirus snatched away her income, as it has for millions, and replaced it with uncertainty. The restaurant and beer garden where she works was forced to temporarily shut down. Laura has no idea when she’ll get her job back, nor does she have any idea how to look for a new job. After all, how do you search for another hospitality job during a global pandemic? Now she’s living in Oregon with her mother, whose travel agency was also forced to close.

    “I don’t know how I’m going to pay my mortgage and my condo dues and still be able to feed myself,” Habberstad said. “I just hope that, once things open up again, we who are impacted by Covid-19 are given consideration and sufficient time to bring all payments current without penalty and in a manner that does not bring us even more financial hardship.”

    Borrowers must contact their lenders to get help and avoid black marks on their credit reports, according to provisions in the stimulus package passed by Congress last week. Bank of America said it has so far allowed 50,000 mortgage customers to defer payments. That includes loans that are not federally backed, so they aren’t covered by the government’s program.

    Meanwhile, Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin has convened a task force to deal with the potential liquidity shortfall faced by mortgage servicers, which collect payments and are required to compensate bondholders even if homeowners miss them. The group was supposed to make recommendations by March 30.

    “If a large percentage of the servicing book – let’s say 20-30% of clients you take care of – don’t have the ability to make a payment for six months, most servicers will not have the capital needed to cover those payments,” QuickenChief Executive Officer Jay Farner said in an interview. But not Quicken, of course.

    Quicken, which serves 1.8 million borrowers, and in 2018 surpassed Wells Fargo as the #1 mortgage lender in the US, has a strong enough balance sheet to serve its borrowers while paying holders of bonds backed by its mortgages, Farner said,  although something tells us that in 6-8 weeks his view will change dramatically. Until then, the company plans to almost triple its call center workers by May to field the expected onslaught of borrowers seeking support, he said.

    Ironically, as Bloomberg concludes, “if the pandemic has taught us anything, it’s how quickly everything can change. Just weeks ago, mortgage lenders were predicting the biggest spring in years for home sales and mortgage refinances.” Instead, just a few weeks later the US housing market has fallen into an abyss that could be far worse than the Great Depression.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 23:05

  • Symbol Of The Times: Tokyo Olympic Flame 'Hidden' Indefinitely To Prevent Crowds
    Symbol Of The Times: Tokyo Olympic Flame ‘Hidden’ Indefinitely To Prevent Crowds

    Last month’s news that the Tokyo Olympics has been postponed until 2021 was a big enough blow to athletes, fans and organizers — but this is just as heavy on symbolism in terms of the state of the world, much of it on ‘lockdown’, after months of the coronavirus pandemic:

    “The Tokyo Olympic flame has been taken off public display in Japan. And it’s not clear when it will reappear again or where — or under what conditions,” AP reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via AP

    The torch had been on display in Fukushima since arriving from Greece late last month. Though it was supposed to remain on display through April, Prime Minister Shinzo Abe on Tuesday issued a state of emergency for the whole country, banning large gatherings and crowds, after COVID-19 cases soared past 4,000 – and approaching 100 deaths.

    This prompted officials to essentially hide the flame “in an undisclosed location” to ensure crowds don’t gather in front of it.

    “Tokyo 2020 will now keep the flame in an undisclosed location to prevent people from gathering,” Tokyo Olympic organizers told the AP.

    Later the International Olympic Committee (IOC) plans to use it as a public symbol of world hope amid the pandemic. “The idea will be to keep this flame burning and showing it to the world,” an IOC official said. “The Olympic flame burning will provide a very powerful inspiration, a bright light as the world goes through these difficult times.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image of 2018 torch lighting ceremony in Olympia, Greece. Via Reuters

    But the flame could remain ‘hidden’ through much of this year, as it’s not expected to resume it’s originally planned torch relay schedule until 2021, just ahead of the now delayed Tokyo Olympics. 

    The torch ceremony ahead of each modern olympics begins in Olympia, Greece – where the ancient games were held. The practice was revived in modern times for the 1936 Olympics held in Berlin, Germany.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 23:00

  • Bill Gates Crosses The Digital Rubicon, Says "Mass Gatherings" May Not Return Without Global Vaccine
    Bill Gates Crosses The Digital Rubicon, Says “Mass Gatherings” May Not Return Without Global Vaccine

    Authored by Robert Bridge via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    A recurring theme among conspiracy theorists is that the elite are just waiting for the right moment to roll out their ‘mark of the beast’ technology to remotely identify and control every single human being on the planet, thus sealing their plans for a one world government. And with many people willing to do just about anything to get back to some sense of normalcy, those fears appear more justified with each passing day.

    In the Book of Revelation [13:16-17], there is a passage that has attracted the imagination of believers and disbelievers throughout the ages, and perhaps never more so than right now: “And he causeth all, both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads: And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark…”

    Was John of Patmos history’s first conspiracy theorist, or are we merely indulging ourselves today with a case of self-fulfilling prophecy? Whatever the case may be, many people would probably have serious reservations about being branded with an ID code even if it had never been mentioned in Holy Scripture. But that certainly has not stopped Microsoft founder Bill Gates, who has been warning about a global pandemic for years, from pushing such controversial technologies on all of us.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In September 2019, just three months before the coronavirus first appeared in China, ID2020, a San Francisco-based biometric company that counts Microsoft as one of its founding members, quietly announced it was undertaking a new project that involves the “exploration of multiple biometric identification technologies for infants” that is based on “infant immunization” and only uses the “most successful approaches”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    For anyone who may be wondering what one of those “most successful approaches” might look like, consider the following top contender for the contract. Researchers at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) have developed what is essentially a hi-tech ‘tattoo’ that stores data in invisible dye under the skin. The ‘mark’ would be delivered together with a vaccine, most likely administered by Gavi, the global vaccine agency that also falls under the umbrella of the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation.

    “The researchers showed that their new dye, which consists of nanocrystals called quantum dots… emits near-infrared light that can be detected by a specially equipped smartphone,” MIT News reported.

    And if the reader scrolls to the very bottom of the article, he will find that this study was funded first and foremost by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.

    Today, with the global service economy shut down to prevent large groups of infectious humans from assembling, it is easier to imagine a day when people are required to have their infrared ID ‘tattoo’ scanned in order to be granted access to any number of public venues. And from there, it requires little stretch of the imagination to see this same tracking nanotechnology being applied broadly across the global economy, where it could be used to eliminate the use of dirty money. After all, if reusable bags are being outlawed over the coronavirus panic-demic, why should reusable cash get special treatment?

    Writing earlier this month in these pages, geopolitical analyst Pepe Escobar provided a compelling argument that the coronavirus, which is driving the world towards a New Great Depression, is “being used as cover for the advent of a new, digital financial system, complete with a forced vaccine cum nanochip creating a full, individual, digital identity.

    As one possible future scenario, Escobar imagined “clusters of smart cities linked by AI, with people monitored full time and duly micro-chipped doing what they need with a unified digital currency…”

    Those fears took on greater significance when Bill Gates sat down over the weekend for a breathtaking interview with CBS This Morning. Gates told host Anthony Mason that mass gatherings might have to be prohibited in the age of coronavirus unless and until a wide scale vaccination program is enacted.

    “What does ‘opening up’ look like,” Gates asked rhetorically before essentially changing the entire social and cultural makeup of the United States in one fell swoop.

    “Which activities, like schools, have such benefit and can be done in a way that the risk of transmission is very low, and which activities, like mass gatherings, maybe, in a certain sense more optional. And so until you’re widely vaccinated those [activities] may not come back at all

    [The interview can be watched in its entirety here].

    According to Gates, anything that could be defined as a “mass gathering” – from spectators packed into a stadium for a sporting event, to protesters out on the street in demonstration – would be considered an act of civil disobedience without a vaccine. Little surprise that Gates chose the concept of “mass gathering” to snag all of us, for what is modern democratic society if not one big mass event after another? Indeed, since nobody will want to miss the next big happening, like the Super Bowl, or Comic-Con, or, heaven forbid, Eurovision, millions of people would predictably line up for miles to get their Microsoft-supported inoculation, even if it contains tracking technologies.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    All of this seems like sheer madness when it is remembered that there are other options for defeating the coronavirus than a mandatory global vaccine regime.

    Just last month, Dr. Anthony Fauci, the Allergy and Infectious Diseases Director, told a Senate Subcommittee that over 80 percent of the people who get infected by the coronavirus “spontaneously recover” without any medical intervention. This makes one wonder why the global lockdown was designed for everyone instead of just the sick and elderly. Meanwhile, the drug hydroxychloroquine, which has been downplayed in the media despite being named as the most effective coronavirus treatment among physicians in a major survey, is starting to get a fresh look.

    Just this week, following Nevada’s lead, Michigan just reversed course and is now the second democratic state to request the anti-malarial drug from the Trump administration.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    So now it looks as though we are off to the races to see what will become the approved method of fighting the global pandemic – a hastily developed vaccine that may actually worsen the effects of the disease in those who contract it, or the already proven inexpensive drug hydroxychloroquine.

    If the winner turns out to be a global vaccine, possibly one that carries ID nanotechnology, don’t expect the wealthy to be lining up with their kids to be the first to get it. In 2015, The American Journal of Public Heath surveyed some 6,200 schools in California – the epicenter of biometric ID research – and found vaccine exemptions were twice as common among kindergartners enrolled in private institutions.

    It seems that the elite are betting heavily on the development of an ID-tracking vaccine that would bring all races and institutions together under one big happy roof, but clearly they will continue living in their own fenced-off neighborhood in this one world government. Whether or not they will get a ‘special pass’ from receiving the new-age mark is another question.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 22:40

  • Over 30% Of US Renters Didn't Pay April Apartment Rent
    Over 30% Of US Renters Didn’t Pay April Apartment Rent

    Landlords across the country have been left in the lurch after nearly one-third of apartment renters in the US didn’t pay any of their April rent during the first week of the month, according to new data from the National Multifamily Housing Council to be released Wednesday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The shocking figure comes as 10 million new unemployment claims were filed in the past three weeks due to the COVID-19 pandemic.

    According to the report cited by the Wall Street Journal, just 69% of tenants paid any rent between April 1 and 5 vs. 81% the same week in March and 82% in April 2019.

    The count includes renters who only made partial payments. Many renters who haven’t yet paid may still pay later this month, NMHC said, and an uptick in paperless payments over the weekend may not be reflected in this initial count.

    The data come from 13.4 million rental apartments analyzed by several real-estate data firms, including RealPage, Yardi and Entrata. The properties included are considered investment grade with a tenant base that may skew higher-income than the median renter. The data don’t include single-family homes, and the apartments counted exclude public housing and other subsidized affordable housing. –Wall Street Journal

    The Journal also notes that some tenants will receive temporary protection from evictions “by a patchwork of federal and local laws,” but the reality is that as unpaid rents pile up, so will mortgage defaults as landlords struggle to satisfy their obligations – which will in turn affect fixed-income investments backed by said mortgages.

    Standing in the way of this cascade is a promise by the federal government which will allow apartment building owners to defer their government-backed mortgage payments, while the Federal Reserve has also vowed to buy bonds tied to certain multifamily loans, according to the report.

    That said, the measures don’t address loans held by banks without a government guarantee – leaving over 2/3 of financed rental units subject to foreclosure.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 22:20

  • New Projections Show Virus Spreading Twice As Fast As Expected
    New Projections Show Virus Spreading Twice As Fast As Expected

    Trying to project the path and velocity of an outbreak is difficult, even when it’s being done on a relatively small scale like, say, within one country, or a handful of countries, like the last few major outbreaks (for example, ebola). Trying to project the arc of an unprecedented pandemic is educated guesswork, at best.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Projections, and the differences in their outcomes depending on the variance in inputs, have become something of an obsession for traders and politicians alike. Since the US government doesn’t produce its own projections, the most popular data cited in the US are projections produced by an institute at the University of Washington. The IMHE projections have been cited by Cuomo, de Blasio and Trump alike.

    Any traders who weren’t familiar with the projections before Tuesday or Wednesday probably are now: a revision published last night produced a moderate swing downward in expected deaths across the US, to just 60,400 by August. Previously, the model projected around 90k before.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, around the world, there are probably dozens of sets of projections, all produced by “credible” researchers, all saying slightly different things. And now, one of those researchers has caught the attention of Bloomberg by announcing that it may have underestimated the virus’s velocity by half, meaning it’s been spreading twice as quickly through China – and will therefore likely follow (or has followed) a similar pattern in the US.

    This set of projections was produced by researchers at Los Alamos, BBG said.

    As the CPC lifts travel restrictions on “healthy” residents of Wuhan – sending tens of thousands scrambling to escape the city – the team of researchers has determined that the virus likely spread through the country twice as quickly as initially believed.

    New assumptions produced by the team including the average number of people infected in the early days of the epidemic in Wuhan: they have been revised to 5.7, more than twice the number the WHO has projected.

    Of course, the team’s results are specific to the Chinese outbreak. But although Beijing hesitated during the early days of the outbreak, it’s heavy handed response likely won’t be mimicked by the West, meaning if the virus spread more quickly in China, it’s reasonable to expect that it could travel through the US at around the same speed.

    At any rate, with this new rate of spread, researchers determined that some 82% of the population would need to be immune, either via a vaccine or because they’d already had the disease, in order to stop the virus from spreading. Without such protection, high levels of social distancing would be needed, since as many as 1/5 people infected present as asymptomatic, a factor that has terribly complicated the response to the virus.

    While some parts of China begin instating restrictions over fears of the second wave (which we’ve noted is likely coming now that Beijing has unleashed a flood of Wuhan residents on the country), Germany and Austria are trying to figure out how to start reopening the economy, as is the White House.

    Notably, the Los Alamos report, which was initially published in Emerging Infectious Diseases, relied on anonymized mobile phone travel data and case reports of coronavirus outside the early epicenter in China’s Hubei province to calculate the spread, all things considered, that should be some pretty accurate data, if the authorities haven’t tampered with it. Then again, if they had, the numbers would probably look a lot better than they do.

    Unless…


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 22:00

  • Global Coronavirus Cases Top 1.5 Million, Deaths Approach 90k: Live Updates
    Global Coronavirus Cases Top 1.5 Million, Deaths Approach 90k: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Confirmed cases across Africa pass 10k
    • China reopens Wuhan
    • Global case total passes 1.4 million
    • Russia reports another record daily jump in new cases
    • UK reports another record jump in deaths
    • France extends lockdown after April 15
    • Global case total tops 1.5 million while deaths near 90k
    • Mnuchin reportedly tells Dems $98 billion loans approved
    • Germany, Spain, France report latest numbers
    • Christine Lagarde urges Eurogroup to work together
    • EU extends border closure until May 15
    • Italy reports slight acceleration in cases as deaths, ICU patients fall
    • Sunak says Johnson “improving”
    • NJ Gov’s chief counsel tests positive
    • NYC reportedly has enough ventilators to get through this week
    • Scientists find evidence some recovered don’t have antibodies
    • Swss gov’t sees GDP contracting as much as 10.4 % in 2020
    • LA mayor orders businesses to enforce social distancing
    • WHO’s Dr. Tedros responds to Trump
    • WHO again insists lockdowns must stay in effect
    • Iraq extends border closure with Iran
    • Indonesia outbreak continues to accelerate
    • Ethiopia joins growing list of African states by declaring state of emergency

    *    *    *

    Update (1900ET): France, Spain and Germany have all reported new numbers over the past couple of hours.

    Spain reported 6,278 new cases and 747 new deaths for a total of 148,220 cases and 14,792 deaths.

    Germany 5,118 new cases and, 230 new deaths for a total of 112,781 cases and 2,246 deaths. And in France, the health ministry reported 3,881 new cases, and 541 new deaths, for a total of 112,950 new cases and 10,869 deaths.

    The data mostly confirm the recent trend,  that the outbreak in Continental Europe is ‘peaking’.

    Meanwhile, as Christine Lagarde at the ECB called on the Eurogroup to get it together and agree on a sufficiently forceful fiscal response to this crisis, while the European Commission, which just a month ago opposed border closures, announced Wednesday evening that it would extend its closure of the EU outer border until May 15.

    In Germany, health officials have reached a new testing milestone: 1.3 million tests have been conducted since the beginning of the outbreak. The country is now testing more than 50k a day, while it’s unclear what the comparable number is in the US (though at the rate new cases are being confirmed, it appears the administration has come a long way in ramping up testing after their initial fumbles).

    Meanwhile, the big news out of Wednesday night’s press conference is that pharmacists are now allowed to order coronavirus tests, said DHHS Secretary Alex Azar.

    “Giving pharmacists the authorization to order and administer Covid-19 tests to their patients means easier access to testing for Americans who need it,” he said.

    In other news, passenger traffic at Europe’s airports fell a staggering 97% at the end of March thanks to the outbreak.

    *     *     *

    Update (1730ET): NJ Gov. Phil Murphy’s chief counsel, Matt Platkin, recently tested positive for the virus. He remains asymptomatic, but is isolating at home, according to a statement from the governor’s office.

    *    *    *

    Update (1530ET): BNO News reports that the global number of confirmed coronavirus cases has surpassed 1.5 million, while the death toll approaches 90k. BNO’s numbers are slightly higher than Johns Hopkins University, another chronicler of news and information concerning the outbreak. Of the global total, the US, with roughly 419k cases, makes up about 25%.

    And with China opening the floodgates in Wuhan, we suspect that number is about to start growing a lot more quickly.

    Looking at the global curve, the pace of the acceleration in recent weeks is staggering, and has been driven in large part by the US, which has the largest share of confirmed cases. WHO Director-General Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, responding to Trump’s criticism,  insisted that now isn’t the time to talk about money.

    “For God’s sake,” he said, noting the more than 80,000 confirmed deaths so far. “Even one person is precious.” He added, “if you don’t want more body bags, don’t politicize this,” he said.

    “If you don’t want many more body bags than you refrain from politicizing it.”

    In other words, don’t criticize the obvious conflict of interest involving China, or the price will be bodies.

    *    *    *

    Update (1515ET): Johns Hopkins just reported that the number of confirmed cases of the virus is 1,475,976…drawing ever closer to the 1.5 million milestone.

    Meanwhile, here’s a clip from Cuomo’s press conference earlier this afternoon.

    *    *    *

    Update (1450ET): American companies including Ford and GE have worked together to rearrange their supply chains to start producing ventilators, the first of which likely won’t be ready until months after they’re needed. Now, GM has joined them.

    The $490 million deal will provide the Department of Health and Human Services with another 30k in ventilators, at a price of $17,000 apiece.

    Meanwhile, Cali Gov Gavin Newsom’s news briefing for Wednesday is about to begin.

    *    *    *

    Update (1440ET): The Presidential Palace has just confirmed that President Emmanuel Macron will extend France’s lockdown past April 15.

    In other news, the Mnuchin PPP loan-approval ticker continues: A leak that just hit the wires claims Mnuchin told Dems that $98 billion in loans have already been approved, more than a quarter of the total amount allotted by Congress.

    We’ll believe it when we see it.

    *    *    *

    Update (1245ET): Cuomo on Wednesday reported 779 new COVID-19-linked deaths across the state, another single-day record jump in what has been a mostly rocky few days for the state in terms of new deaths (while reports about potentially temporarily burying bodies in city parks sent a shiver through America’s collective spine).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During the briefing, Cuomo said the state would extend unemployment benefits for workers, and added that the state seems to be well equipped with enough ventilators and even some BPAP machines (which can be modified to work like ventilators). He said that he it appears that cases have continued to plateau, continuing a trend that supposedly began this weekend (though some have raised issues about the way the data is collected, while others have warned about undercounting of deaths).

    Though some might consider Cuomo’s interpretation a tad too rosy, the governor insisted that “we’re not out of this yet” and warned people to stay vigilent.

    All voters will be allowed to vote by absentee ballot during New York’s June primary, Cuomo said, while ordering flags in the state to be flown at half-staff, following in the footsteps of NJ Gov. Phil Murphy. Cuomo added that objections to this practice are “total nonsense,” despite the fact that voter fraud is more prevalent than many suspect. Finally, Cuomo told viewers that we might see more days with high death tolls like today’s – perhaps even higher – as deaths peak.

    Cuomo started his presser with a soliloquy about how “the poorest always pay the highest price” in a crisis, and promised to do everything possible to combat this, including getting money in their pockets faster by giving workers an extra $600 for everyone filing for unemployment. When questioned by a reporter if he was considering closing any more front-line businesses to help protect minorities, Cuomo said it was an issue that he had given some thought to (though if anything, NYC probably should thinking about opening more essential businesses as the government whiffs the bailout and shortages of consumer products like TP persist).

    Here’s a breakdown of NY deaths, which shows that older Americans have been dying in the largest numbers, but still 20% of those who died were part of age groups who might be considered ‘still young’.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Later, Cuomo warned that while NYC and Westchester are on the downward slope, he warned that we would “almost certainly” see a jump in cases on Long Island.  New York State reported 149,316 total cases statewide, including 10.480 new addigiotns, equivalent to a 7.5% increase, indicating a slight acceleration compared to yesterday. While the state reported 6,268 dead, including 779 deaths (its highest one-day jump yet), that’s larger than the ‘peak’ death number that is supposed to come Wednesday, according to the IMHE model. Then again, these models merely projections, intended to hopefully be close, but likely not exact.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, as WaPo pointed out earlier, various models have differed dramatically as the unprecedented scale of this outbreak has forced epidemiologists to try and customize their typical coronavirus outbreak model playbook. And especially when it comes to medical equipment, the IMHE (part of the University of Washington) models tend to be significantly rosier than state models, leaving some governors and Washington DC to essentially pray that intubations hem closer to IMHE.

    Most importantly, following reports that thousands of ‘home deaths’ have gone uncounted in official statistics, Cuomo said he’s looking at “other models” to help more accurately “adjust” figures to account for those home deaths.

    Before we go, it’s worth pointing out: New York reached another important milestone today: It has surpassed Italy in terms of total cases, meaning New York State now has more cases than any single country ex-US.

    *    *    *

    Update (1225ET): New York Gov. Andrew Cuomo’s Wednesday press briefing is slated to start at 12:30.

    *    *    *

    Update (1208ET): The market is running away with its optimistic view as Dr. Fauci claims new cases being reported in the US will likely start to fall next week and NYC Mayor de Blasio claims the city has enough ventilators on hand to ensure no unnecessary deaths, but more disturbing data has been reported out of the UK that would appear to undermine the narrative of a Europe-wide deceleration.

    Once again, the UK reported its largest death toll yet, with 938 new deaths, bringing the total to 7,097. It also reported nearly 8k new cases, bringing the national total to 60,733.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other news, in the latest update on PM Johnson, Chancellor Rishi Sunak said the PM is “improving”. The jump in UK deaths brought the mortality rate to a new high of 11.7%.

    Meanwhile, after a 3-day streak of declining new cases, Italy reported a jump on Wednesday, with 3,836 new cases, bringing the country’s total to 139,422. Of these, 53,414 cases were reported in Lombardy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Though new cases saw a slight acceleration, Italy reported another encouraging drop in deaths, and a drop in ICU patients. Deaths reported were 542, bringing the total to 17,662. Of these, 9,772 were in Lombardy.

    *    *    *

    Update (1045ET): Russia reported another record number of new cases on Wednesday, with 1,175 confirmations, bringing its total to 8,672 cases.

    Meanwhile, as more cases are reported across East Asia, Hong Kong has extended social distancing measures to April 23 from April 11, while ordering the closure of beauty parlors and massage parlors.

    *    *    *

    Update (1020ET): According to prior projections, the’peak’ in NYC’s coronavirus outbreak was supposed to arrive on Thursday. And in keeping with the optimistic turn in the official projections, NYC Mayor Bill de Blasio said his city now has enough ventilators to “get through this week”, which suggests the city might be able to weather the storm without needing substantially more ventilators.

    While we’d like to take this as good news, the mayor’s history of playing down the dangers of COVID-19 suggests he could be playing down the risks once again.

    Offering a racial breakdown of COVID-19 deaths, de Blasio said 34% of patients who die from the virus are white, 27% black, 28% Hispanic, and 7% Asian, the remaining 4% were a mix of other nationalities.

    In LA, meanwhile, Mayor Garcetti has ordered all still-open (ie “essential”) businesses to enforce social distancing for employees and customers, or face civil fines.

    Meanwhile, over in Europe, the Swiss government has released its latest projections: it now sees GDP contracting by as much as 10.4% this year according to its worst-case scenario.

    *    *    *

    Update (0948ET): As Indonesia becomes the latest East Asian country to report an acceleration in new cases, disturbing new videos purporting to show patients collapsing in public have been shared by the Epoch Times. After resisting a shutdown for weeks, the country’s president, Joko Widodo, has ordered schools shut and other businesses shut in the country’s capital, densely populated Jakarta.

    Indonesia reported another 218 new cases of coronavirus on Wednesday, bringing its total to 2,956 cases. The country has also reported 240 deaths, while 222 patients have recovered.

    The problem with that 218 number is that Indonesian health authorities in Jakarta are only able to run 240 tests a day at max capacity. That means there’s a chance that everybody, or nearly everybody, tested in Indonesia has tested positive. This is not good, as it signals that the outbreak is almost definitely much larger than the government realizes.

    An increase in burials around Jakarta raised alarms in Indonesia, which is the largest Muslim-majority nation in the world, with ~265 million people, as health authorities suddenly realized that the virus had probably been spreading undetected for weeks. This comes after the government has already admitted to lying about positive case numbers, after insisting for weeks that it had zero detected cases.

    And here’s that video:

    *    *    *

    Update (0830ET): With one hand, Germany’s Department of Health is pushing an app that will rely on cellphone location data to track contacts of people who test positive. Meanwhile, the Foreign Ministry is taking action to restrict the use of the conferencing app Zoom over security concerns.

    Meanwhile, Zoom just hired Alex Stamos, the former security chief at Facebook who spoke out against his former employer during that whole Internet privacy debacle, as it tries to rebuild its reputation before everybody

    *    *    *

    Though the coronavirus outbreak figures reported out of Europe yesterday were probably more mixed than health officials would have liked, there was, apparently, enough to keep the resurgence of optimism that has fueled market gains in recent days alive. While China blithely prepares to unleash its second wave on itself and the world in what seems like an almost deliberate act, the Washington Post reported overnight that the main epidemiological model being followed by the federal government has just revised down the need for ventilators, beds and other equipment as the world seems to have convinced itself that a lull is underway.

    Across the US, chatter on social media about the need to get at least some of the shut-down economy back online has intensified in recent days, as political commentary as inspired heated discussions as opponents accuse Republicans and many regular Americans of callously placing the economy and their own self-interest above protecting society’s most vulnerable. Meanwhile, the global case total has surpassed 1.4 million, with 83k+ deaths.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But as JPM projected, and as was the case during SARS and other prior pandemics, even if the novel coronavirus does begin to recede heading into the summer, remember: this is only part one.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At this point, it’s not like anybody is going to snap their fingers and suddenly turn the clock back to Dec. 31, 2019. Many Americans – especially those at high risk – will likely cut down on leisure air travel, as pundits are already talking about the death of the “one-flight meeting”.

    But as we begin to weigh the pros and cons, and the Trump Administration reportedly weighs a plan to reactivate parts of the economy and allowing some people to get back to work if they can demonstrate that they’re healthy, the SCMP late last night highlighted some new scientific evidence that is extremely disturbing.

    As we explained above, by lifting restrictions on Wuhan, China is potentially unleashing hundreds, maybe even thousands, of asymptomatic carriers on the rest of the country. But scientists believe the ‘herd immunity’ that has supposedly been built up during the first wave should blunt the impact of ensuing waves somewhat. Well, unfortunately, it looks like that thesis needs to be reexamined.

    Since the early days of the outbreak, we’ve seen reports about people being reinfected with the virus (though in some cases there were doubts about whether the virus ever really left). Well, now, a team of researchers at Fudan University in Shanghai has discovered that an alarmingly high number of recovered patients whom they’ve tested show low, or no, levels of the virus antibodies in their blood. That means a sizable chunk of those who are infected will be vulnerable to reinfection.

    In other words, if these findings are confirmed, the hoped-for “herd immunity” that is supposed to help us get things back to normal in the time between now and however long it takes researchers to mass produce a vaccine simply isn’t going to materialize: Instead of diluting the density and acting as blockers for spread, many will be reinfected, and go on to spread the virus to others, all over again. It’s just the latest reason to worry that the second wave of the virus could be larger than the first.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some countries are already seeing the first stirrings of a second wave: On Wednesday, Tokyo reported a record 144 new cases on Wednesday as Japanese PM Shinzo Abe’s lockdown (which is legally toothless but has inspired most businesses to close nonetheless) took effect in Tokyo and six other districts across Japan. And now that the Tokyo Games have officially been suspended, the Olympic flame has been taken off public display in Japan. And it’s not clear when it will reappear again or where — or under what conditions.

    But and China and Japan aren’t the only Asian nations fearful of a full-blown second wave: Hong Kong on Wednesday announced plans for an “unprecedented” $18 billion virus stimulus package to support Hong Kong’s rapid;y deteriorating economy, according to Bloomberg.

    As the virus continues its woefully underreported spread across Africa – or so public health experts fear – Ethiopia announced on Wednesday that it’s joining a growing list of African nations – already including Botswana, Congo, Ivory Coast, Senegal, South Africa and others – by declaring a state of emergency over the virus. The country’s 110 million people have been relatively unscathed, reporting just 52 cases so far, though some fear that the country’s close ties to Beijing and commerce between the two nations means many more cases have gone unreported. This comes as the number of confirmed cases across Africa has finally passed 10k.

    Iraq also extended the closure of its main border crossing with Iran as the ‘official’ death toll in that country passes 10k. Much to Trump’s delight, the decision will put added economic pressure on Tehran, as it will disrupt trade between the two nations, something upon which Iran’s sanctions-starved government greatly relies.

    Certain progressive media outlets in the US will likely never forget that certain conservative pundits and even – to a much lesser degree – President Trump, Mitch McConnell and other Republican leaders played down the coronavirus as the first cases were confirmed in the US. While President Trump likes to brag about his decision to shut down travel from China, in reality, that was a half-measure (he should have shut down travel from Europe, as certain senior advisors reportedly urged). And while they’re not wrong, they’re only telling part of the story. A lot of people in positions of power – including, as the Intercept notes, NYC’s Democratic mayor – either underestimated the outbreak, or have changed views on subjects like drugs, whether shutting down schools makes sense, whether a partial shutdown that preserves more of the economy might be a more appropriate response – the list goes on and on.

    Going through this list, it appears to us that nobody is more guilty than the WHO, which is partly why President Trump is insisting that the US reexamine the WHO’s funding, and has mocked the WHO for ‘totally blowing it’.

    Of course, anybody who has only just started paying attention in the past few weeks (ie most of America) probably doesn’t remember the WHO dragging its feet on the global threat and pandemic designations (those were two separate declarations), while also insisting that travel restrictions and border closures weren’t appropriate at a time when those decisions could have gone a long way toward suppressing the spread.

    Because as the White House reportedly prepares a plan to get some healthy people back to work in the not too distant future, the WHO is now urging that countries considering a lifting of their lockdowns should probably reconsider (even as China prepares to send legions of infected Wuhan residents across its own country, and the world).

    The WHO said Wednesday that “we have a long way to go” to defeat the pandemic, said Dr Hans Kluge, the WHO regional director for Europe, adding that now is “not the time to relax [lockdown] measures,” and all countries must “double and triple our collective efforts”. “We still have a long way to go,” he said. “The progress we have made so far in fighting the virus is extremely fragile.” Any relaxation of social distancing measures requires “very careful consideration,” he added. “We need to remain committed.”

    His remarks were clearly directed at the West (after all, he was speaking in English), but would the WHO, which has come under fire for refusing to criticize Beijing, say the same about Wuhan?

    If you, dear reader, happen to be a billionaire like Microsoft founder Bill Gates, or at least wealthy enough to perhaps be insulated from the vicissitudes of the combined economic and public health crises which have caused the economy to literally grind to a halt, then maybe you really do lack the self-awareness to really compare (after all, the stock market has really bounced back over these last few days). For those who still believe most Americans could survive a ten week total economic shutdown, the OECD would just like you to know: Most of the world is already officially in a deep recession. A leading indicator published by the Paris-based NGO showed its biggest drop on record.

    Just in case you weren’t aware, the global economy is a giant dumpster fire right now. And while people with comfortable white collar jobs are shouting at everybody to “stay indoors!!!!”, there are millions of people are this country who are still waking up every day trying to figure out how they’re going to eat, or take care of other essential needs, in the middle of a lockdown. That doesn’t mean people should just flout the lockdown when they feel like it, it’s just a reminder that everybody deserves the benefit of the doubt.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 21:45

  • US Treasury Cash Balance Hits Record $750 Billion After Historic Flood Of Bill Issuance
    US Treasury Cash Balance Hits Record $750 Billion After Historic Flood Of Bill Issuance

    It may not quite be last week’s $563 billion T-bill deluge, but it will do.

    After a tsunami of new T-Bill and Cash Management Bill issuance last week, which saw no less than $85 billion in new short-term debt issued every every day except Friday, sending the Treasury’s cash balance soaring to new all time highs, in the first three days of the current week the Treasury has been just as busy and has continued to flood the market with new short-term debt, in a dramatic reversal of the T-Bill shortage we reported two weeks ago.

    As shown in the chart below, after the $563BN in Bills and CMBs issued last week, this week the Treasury has continued its T-bill firehose and in just the past 3 days has issued, in addition to the regularly scheduled 3-Month and 6-Month Bills, also 154 Day, 119 Day, 69 Day, 43 Day, 103 Day and 40 Days Cash Management Bills, for a total of $369BN in just the first three days of the week as shown in the chart below:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while a portion of this $369BN gross issuance went to offset current maturities, the net effect was massive nonetheless, and nowhere more so than the Treasury’s cash balance (i.e. the Federal Reserve Account).

    As shown in the next chart, the result of the Bill issuance flood from the last two weeks is that the cash balance of the Treasury (i.e. the US government) just hit a record $750 billion, up $235 billion from last week, and the highest on record.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Why this flood of new issuance?

    Because we are now three days since the crisis response officially began as hundreds of billions in small, medium and very large business bailout demands will soon hit the Treasury as up to $2 trillion in funds are handed out across the economy over the coming weeks.

    As such, the three quarters of a trillion dollars held electronically at the US Treasury is just the beginning.

    And here a quick aside: consider the path the money is taking before ending up in Joe Sixpack’s pocket: a desk worker at the Treasury punches a few buttons and sells electronic certificates which mature in a few weeks and are backstopped by the US government and which in turn fund the Treasury’s account with electronic dollars which were paid by some investor who similarly punched a few buttons on his computer and in hopes of parking his cash somewhere safe, handed over his electronic money to the Treasury desk worker. As a result of this transaction, hundreds of millions will receive a small amount of electronic ones and zeros in the next few days, which for countless people will mean the difference between disaster and survival.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 21:40

  • Michigan ER Nurses Ordered To Leave Hospital For Work Stoppage Over 'Unsafe Patient Load'
    Michigan ER Nurses Ordered To Leave Hospital For Work Stoppage Over ‘Unsafe Patient Load’

    Metro Detroit hospitals began to get overwhelmed with a surge of coronavirus patients starting last month. Local media at that time documented an increasingly chaotic situation at the city’s Sinai-grace Hospital where patient rooms were filled with gowns and trash strewn across dirty floors — this as even cleaning crews weren’t allowed in rooms, fearing exposure.

    Already at that point emergency room nurses said they were “exhausted” and feared they and their families would get infected. But this week things came to a head with hospital administration when ER nursing staff demanded more nurses be added to their overrun facilities. They say in some instances only two nurses care for 26 patients, including ten on ventilators.  

    CNN reports that a dramatic standoff endued: The night shift ER nurses at Sinai-Grace Hospital refused to leave the break room until hospital administrators brought in more nurses to help out, a physician at the hospital told CNN.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Treating COVID-19 patients, via The Independent

    “Hospital administrators decided, after four hours of deliberation, they would not be bringing in any more nurses to help and that the nurses could get to work or leave the hospital, the doctor said,” the report continues. Some did depart at that point, though it’s unclear if the hospital will terminate their employment – it’s presumed so.

    One of the nurses later described of the confrontation with their bosses, “Tonight, it was the breaking point for us” — after for three straight weeks the ER had over 110 patients, at max capacity or more every night. 

    “Because we cannot safely take care of your loved ones out here with just six, seven nurses and multiple (ventilators) and multiple people on drips. It’s not right. We had two nurses the other day who had 26 patients with 10 (ventilators),” ER nurse Sal Hadwan said.

    Sinai-Grace hospital leaders fired back, however, saying in a statement:

    “We are disappointed that last night a very small number of nurses at Sinai-Grace Hospital staged a work stoppage in the hospital refusing to care for patients,” Detroit Medical Center Communications Manager Jason Barczy told CNN. “Despite this, our patients continued to receive the care they needed as other dedicated nurses stepped in to provide care.”

    The statement placed the blame on the nurses for “refusing to care for patients,” which is likely to add fuel to the fire.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    DMC Sinai-Grace Hospital. Image source: Detroit Free Press

    The nurses claim that in some instances shift nurses work for a 24-hour period, due to a shortage of necessary personnel for any given day or night crew. Sinai-Grace is located in Detroit’s hardest-hit northwest section of Detroit. 

    The incident prompted the Michigan Nurses Association to weigh in, saying in a statement, “Eventually, a tipping point is reached where the best thing any RN can do for their patients, their families, and their coworkers is to speak out rather than remain silent.”

    Controversy ensued over whether the nurses essentially abandoned their patients or legitimately feared existing dangerous conditions make it impossible to continue.

    Social media video reportedly showing some of the nurses who had walked out after the “sit-in” confrontation:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The largest union for registered nurses in the state continued in its statement: “Until hospitals start taking the concerns of nurses seriously, it’s only a matter of time before more actions like these occur. It is absolutely essential that hospitals start working with nurses and stop silencing our voices.”

    This would indeed be a tipping point, also as hospitals and clinics face an unprecedented shortage in personal protective equipment, making the risk to front line responder even more difficult.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 21:40

  • Pentagon Considers Dreaded 'Stop Loss' To Retain Troop Numbers Amid COVID-19 Crisis
    Pentagon Considers Dreaded ‘Stop Loss’ To Retain Troop Numbers Amid COVID-19 Crisis

    The Pentagon is reportedly considering implementing its controversial “stop-loss” policy amid the coronavirus outbreak, which is impacting defense readiness due to growing numbers of troops in self-isolation and quarantine.

    Coronavirus is also reducing the number of new recruits and incoming personnel, given the Army, Marines, and other branches have begun halting sending new members to boot camps.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image via US Army/FOX

    The US Army announced Monday plans to immediately “stop sending new recruits to basic training in an attempt to slow the spread of the coronavirus in the military – a dramatic decision that Pentagon leaders fear could undermine national security and affect their ability to field forces for months if not years to come.”

    This after the Marines made a similar decision. The pause in the new recruit pipeline is “conditional” based on two weeks at a time followed by a reassessment, the Army said.

    The “stop-loss” goes back to Vietnam, but was last activated during the Bush administration, and was designed to prevent severe strain on DoD-wide troop numbers and force readiness during the so-called ‘war on terror’. Once in effect it forcibly retains enlisted troops beyond their planned departure date; it also delays officers’ retirement dates.

    Defense Department spokeswoman Lisa Lawrence said in a statement:

    “Given the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on the nation as a whole and on the military’s ability to recruit and train new service members, the Department is looking at a wide range of options that will ensure enduring national security mission capability.”

    However, Lawrence added it will “only be considered if absolutely necessary and is an alternative that we will work diligently to avoid.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Currently over 1,500 uniformed service members have tested positive for COVID-19; however, contractors and military dependents have also been infected – making the actual numbers higher DoD-wide.

    The stop-loss came to be so dreaded among US enlisted ranks — as it mandates they stay active duty beyond their contracts — that a 2008 Hollywood movie called Stop-Loss was made, detailing its negative effects on troop morale during the Iraq war.

    * * *

    “You’ve been stop-lossed…”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 21:20

  • While The Masses Panicked Over A Virus: US House Wrote A Bill Will Ban "Assault Weapons"
    While The Masses Panicked Over A Virus: US House Wrote A Bill Will Ban “Assault Weapons”

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    While the majority of the country has been laser-focused on the coronavirus, stocking up on decades worth of toilet paper, and  mass purchasing Clorox wipes, the United States House of Representative wrote a bill that will ban “assault weapons.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Representative Hank Johnson, a Georgia Democrat who sits on the House Judiciary Committee, introduced H.R. 5717 on January 30, which would, among other items, ban the purchasing and possession of assault weapons, according to USA Today. Senator Elizabeth Warren, D-Mass., introduced in February the Senate version of the bill, S.3254 Not long after, the coronavirus hype was all over mainstream media burying the news of this draconian legislation.

    The legislation introduced a variety of reforms with the intent to “end the epidemic of gun violence and build safer communities by strengthening Federal firearms laws and supporting gun violence research, intervention, and prevention initiatives.”

    It would require state law enforcement authorities to be notified when a background check is denied and mandate the attorney general to issue an annual report to Congress detailing the number of background check denials.

    It would also necessitate all firearm owners to obtain a federal firearms owner’s license, although purchases made before the enactment of the bill are exempt.

    And the bill, as correctly stated by the Military Arms Channel, would make it illegal “to import, sell, manufacture, transfer, or possess, in or affecting interstate or foreign commerce, a semiautomatic assault weapon.”

    USA Today

    The bill defines a semiautomatic assault weapon as any firearm with the capability to “accept a detachable magazine” and either a pistol grip, forward grip, grenade launcher, barrel shroud, threaded barrel or a folding, telescoping or detachable stock.

    The government is, of course, exempted from the assault weapons ban. Law-enforcement officers (and other state agents) can possess these firearms as can those who are providing security at nuclear energy facilities. Firearms that are “manually operated by bolt, pump, lever or slide action,” have “been rendered permanently inoperable” or are antique are exempt from the ban as well.

    Neither bill has passed, and it would still be needing President Donald Trump’s signature to become law. However, we thought it important to let you all know what’s going on behind the screens while we direct our attention to a viral outbreak. If you thought things were totalitarian now, just wait…it could get much uglier.

    *  *  *

    GOOGLE Is Doing Whatever It Can To De-Monetize SHTFplan.com And Shadow-Ban us. During these TOUGH financial times, we ASPIRE to stay completely independent and pay our full staff, so we can continue to deliver VALUE to you. It is possible for you to HELP us, by supporting our COVID-19 expert survival report HERE!  Thank You, ShtfPlan.com Staff


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 21:00

  • Calls For Global Debt Jubilee Grow Louder As 'Anything Goes' Policy Mania Takes Over
    Calls For Global Debt Jubilee Grow Louder As ‘Anything Goes’ Policy Mania Takes Over

    About 140 global organizations and charities are calling for a worldwide Debt Jubilee to avoid some of the world’s poorest countries from collapsing into chaos amid the COVID-19 crisis, reported BBC News

    The British-based Jubilee Debt Campaign is leading the movement ahead of the G20 meeting this week.

    “Developing countries are being hit by an unprecedented economic shock, and at the same time face an urgent health emergency,” said Sarah-Jayne Clifton, director of the Jubilee Debt Campaign.

    “The suspension on debt payments called for by the IMF and World Bank saves money now, but kicks the can down the road and avoids actually dealing with the problem of spiraling debts.

    Clifton is urging for the immediate cancellation of 69 of the world’s poorest countries’ debt payments this year, which would free up at least $25 billion for the countries in 2020, and up to $50 billion if the jubilee was extended to the end of 2021.

    “This is the fastest way to keep money in countries to use in responding to Covid-19, and to ensure public money is not wasted bailing out the profits of rich private speculators,” added Clifton.

    The latest call for a Debt Jubilee should come as no surprise to ZeroHedge readers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the last several decades, governments across the world have added insurmountable debts, leadingBill Buckler via The Privateer to say back in 2012 that the world has dived down a deep hole and into a trap that has “ensnared Japan more than two decades ago.”

    And maybe Buckler’s Japanification fears for the rest of the world were right, because eight years later in 2020, central banks across the globe are still trying to print themselves out of a recession and or depression and into prosperity. And look at how it turned out for Japan, quantitative easing has failed and will continue to fail.

    The problem today is that can-kicking yesterday’s problems has reached its limit.

    Over the last several decades, governments across the world have added insurmountable debts. Sprott Money points out that debt-loads exceed 100% of GDP in many countries. The “ever-worsening indebtedness, and ever-larger interest payments on these unpayable debts, the precise definition of Debt Slavery. Throughout virtually the entire Western world, we are now well past this point-of-no-return,” warned Sprott Money. 

    This debt slavery has also become evident in emerging markets where countries are experiencing collapsing currencies, commodity prices, export earnings, and service and tourism revenues threaten to send many governments into default. 

    But calls for a Debt Jubilee are not limited to just emerging markets, but also developed economies. We noted several years ago that over the last 15 years, American consumers have taken out student loan debt, credit card debt, medical debts, personal loan. On a sovereign scale, the national debt is exploding, underfunded pension liabilities are rising, and Medicare costs are soaring. 

    The issue with both emerging and developed markets is how to manage all this debt as the virus has exposed the fragility of the financial system, with possible financial Armageddon nearing as world trade collapses. 

    And after decades of “kicking the can down the road” – it appears the piper finally wants his money. And why the talk of Debt Jubilee is starting to gain traction. 

    For some historical context of a Debt Jubilee, here is The Hutch Report’s take: 

    Historians have counted around thirty episodes of general debt cancellations from 2400 to 1400 BC, noting they were occasions of great festivity which often involved the physical destruction of the tablets on which liabilities were recorded. One of the most famous episodes of debt forgiveness comes from ancient Babylon (modern-day Iraq). In 1792 BC, the self-proclaimed King Hammurabi of Babylon forgave all citizens’ debts owed to the government, high-ranking officials, and dignitaries.”

    “Debt forgiveness was also practiced during the time of the Old Testament. In Jewish Mosaic Law, every seventh Sabbath year saw the wiping away of all debts, where creditors cancelled all the obligations of their fellow Israelites. Every 49th year (seven Sabbath years) was the ‘Year of the Jubilee’ when freedom from all debt and servitude was proclaimed throughout the land.”

    Paul Craig Roberts has routinely pointed out that America is in dire need of a Debt Jubilee as wealth inequality is at extremes and insurmountable debts are mounting, rendering society unstable. In periods of economic collapse, like what is unfolding across the country today, the risk of a “social bomb” could be imminent. 

    To resolve the possibility of a nation imploding, Buckler, in 2012, said a modern Debt Jubilee is characterized as “quantitative easing for the public.” And now that MMT and helicopter money has become de rigueur, why not push the endgame of monetary malarkey – a global debt jubilee. 

    Oh, and remember the trillion-dollar-platinum-coin idea… 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 20:40

  • Morgan Stanley Was One Of The Biggest Margin-Loan Providers To Luckin Coffee's Founder
    Morgan Stanley Was One Of The Biggest Margin-Loan Providers To Luckin Coffee’s Founder

    Among the banks who made margin loans to Luckin Coffee’s founder, one stands out in particular: Morgan Stanley.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Morgan Stanley was part of a consortium of banks that extended loans to Lu Zhengyao across three different funding rounds. Morgan Stanley is said to have put up about $100 million of a total of over $340 million in loans. Credit Suisse Group AG and Haitong International Securities Group were also named as lenders.

    The recent fraud allegations at the company caused the loans to default, according to Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Additionally Goldman Sachs said that an entity controlled by Lu’s trust reneged on $518 million of margin debt and that lenders had seized up to 76.4 million LK shares as a result. It’s unclear whether or not the shares have been sold yet. 

    Goldman and Barclays’ were said to have about $70 million in exposure, each, to the loans. Credit Suisse and other banks that helped the company IPO and subsequently helped it raise convertible debt, have been sued as a result of the stock plunge. 

    Meanwhile, Morgan Stanley is also one of the largest lenders to Elon Musk, with the Tesla CEO taking $50 million from the bank and mortgaging five homes with their help back in early 2019. The bank was also part of a consortium of lenders to Alibaba’s Chairmen back in 2015. 

    Recall, on April 2, we reported that Luckin Coffee had brought to the attention of the board information indicating that COO Jian Liu and several employees engaged in certain misconduct, including fabricating certain transactions, starting in Q2 of last year. It was estimated that total ‘fake’ revenue was around $310 million.

    Shares immediately crashed:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 20:20

  • We Won't Be Getting "Back To Normal"… Not Soon… Not Ever!
    We Won’t Be Getting “Back To Normal”… Not Soon… Not Ever!

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    When will we get back to normal?

    If you yearn for the days before COVID-19 swept across the planet, I regret to inform you that those days are gone.

    This isn’t a warm and fuzzy blog post telling you that everything is going to be all right. If you’re looking for reassurance that “we’ve got this,” I’m afraid I can’t provide it. This article wasn’t written to console or coddle you, so if that’s what you’re seeking, you’re going to want to stop reading right now.

    If, however, you want a reality check on what I believe we’re really facing, I’m not going to hold back. You’ve been warned.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We’re not even halfway through.

    You may have seen some optimistic reports recently that the “worst” is behind us. It would certainly be lovely if that’s the case, but in my opinion, this ordeal is just getting started. I wrote an article previously about how long we could expect our current state of lockdown to last using the timelines of China and Italy as points of comparison, and based on that, we are 17 days in as of the writing of this article on April 8.

    The lockdown of Wuhan is expected to last 77 days. If our own timeline continues to echo that of China, then we’re not even halfway there. We have at least 2 months left and this doesn’t include any new clusters when the lockdowns are totally lifted or any second waves. We’ve barely begun living in our current state of purgatory and this will continue (and most likely worsen) for quite some time.

    So if you’re seeing this as a little break after which you’ll pick up with your life exactly where you left off, you’re going to be extremely disappointed. You need to adapt now because if you don’t, the future is going to be very hard on you mentally.

    Use this time to think about the changes you can make to meet the needs of your family. Learn new skills, practice old ones, and get your head in the game.

    The supply chain may never be the same.

    Nearly every store in America (the ones that are still open, anyway) has glaring bare spots on their inventory. Who would have expected paper products to be the “gold” of our apocalypse? There was an original run on supplies back in early March when the general public realized, “Hey, this is for real!” and razed store shelves bare. Even though preppers already had most of their supplies put back by the time this happened, we were no less vilified by the media as panicked shoppers got into physical altercations over toilet paper and macaroni.

    Government officials told everyone to “calm down” and “just shop for the week.” They promised that if we did, everything would be back in stock in no time. Many of us knew even then that this wasn’t true. The ports in California were empty of shipping containers from China where many of our essential goods are produced. There’s no inventory with which to replenish the inventory.

    It’s been more than a month since that first shopping frenzy and unfortunately, supplies are still limited in most parts of the country. A reasonably-sized package of toilet paper can’t be had for love or money, nor can one easily locate cleaning wipes, paper towels, 20-pound bags of rice, and bottles of bleach. Other supplies are available, but sparsely and often in limited quantities: meat, eggs, butter, dried goods like pasta and rice, and canned goods. Prices have approximately doubled on many items.

    Don’t expect this to clear up any time soon. Abundant inventory may well be a thing of the past. Many of the products sold in American stores are made in China. Even much of our meat that is a “product of the USA” is processed in China. Obviously, China is going to replenish its own inventory before exporting goods to us. Here’s a list of goods that we import from China that we may not be receiving in the same quantities in the future.

    As well, the days of just “running to the store” to replace things or pick up a single ingredient are gone. Now, in many parts of the country, you have to walk through a cordoned off maze to enter a Walmart or Costco store. Only a certain number of people can be there at a time. Shopping means you’re risking your own health if someone else is ill, or you are ill and don’t realize it, you’re risking the health of others. It’s no longer quick, easy, inexpensive, or pleasant in any way.

    And the generous offerings of days gone by are disappearing. In some areas, the store may have things you want but because the government there doesn’t consider them “essential,” you won’t be allowed to buy them. Ordering online may soon be your only option for things like craft supplies, clothing, decorative items, and shoes. And even when you order online, it may take quite some time before the goods arrive. Amazon has said it is prioritizing necessities, leaving people with uncertain shipping times.

    And it could get even worse. What happens if the US Postal Service stops running? A House committee has warned the USPS could actually be forced to cease operations by June. So, if you think it’s hard to get supplies now, just wait.

    The rules will get more restrictive and violence will ensue.

    Every state with some form of movement restriction (lockdown for lack of a better word) has its own set of rules which are handed down by the respective governors in the form of an executive order. Some states are more restrictive than others and a small handful of states have no restrictions whatsoever.

    The other difference between states is the methods of enforcement. Some states have the rules on the books but do little to enforce them. Others are levying fines. One municipality in Louisiana found it amusing to announce the beginning of the curfew with the Purge siren, terrifying people who were already on edge.

    Don’t expect this gentle approach to continue. While I don’t think we’ll go full-Wuhan and weld people into their apartments, our Constitutional rights are already being trampled in numerous ways.

    Texas and Florida have checkpoints where they’re testing travelers for health problems, escorting them to quarantine, or turning them away. Rhode Island police went so far as to go door-to-door with the National Guard, searching for “New Yorkers” who had fled the virus in their home state.

    Most states have closed non-essential businesses and schools for the foreseeable future. Local authorities are beginning to crack down on groups of people and innocent Americans risk being questioned when they leave their homes to walk the dog or go to the store. Last week, thousands of Americans considered essential workers were given “travel papers” to show the authorities if they’re stopped when they are going to work. Travel papers. In the United States of America.

    If you can’t satisfy the requirements laid out by your state or local government, you could face fines and even misdemeanor charges for breaking stay-at-home orders. (source)

    Expect as the rules and enforcement efforts become more stringent for people to balk. As the money being dished out by the government dwindles to a trickle and as promises made by the government get broken, people will become more and more desperate.

    Imagine. Your ability to make a living was suddenly taken away through no fault of your own. You’re all but under house arrest. Your government is threatening you with fines, incarceration, and even possible violence. Your family is hungry and you have nothing to feed them. What would you do in that situation?

    There’s virtually no way this continues without violence ensuing, either out of rebellion or hunger or possibly both. Fewer and fewer police officers are available to respond as more of them get diagnosed with COVID-19. In New York City, nearly ten thousand first responders are ill. When you put all this together, it’s a recipe for violent crime.

    The economy will be devastated.

    We’re already watching our economy get destroyed right in front of our eyes. Never in history – including the Great Depression – have so many Americans been unemployed. And the fact that they all became unemployed at once is even worse. By the end of March, 7.1 million people had filed for unemployment due to COVID-19.

    Many of the people who lost their jobs are the ones who are least able to afford it – hourly workers. Those who work at or around minimum wage are less likely to have a savings account to see them through the rough spot.

    Then there’s the fact that the government appears to have lied. Others who became unemployed were initially told they qualified, but now the application process is proving impossible. Gig workers, such as drivers for Uber, Lyft, and Doordash, are being asked to supply pay stubs, something they just don’t have. It just isn’t how it works.

    Those who have applied are waiting weeks to hear back from state unemployment programs. Their applications will likely be rejected, leaving them without any income for an indefinite amount of time. The advice for these workers?

    A spokesperson for the New York State Department of Labor says the guidance requires workers who are not usually eligible for unemployment benefits to apply to state programs, get rejected, and then apply again for the federally funded pandemic assistance. (source)

    So for all the big talk about making unemployment easy to get and simple to apply for, it isn’t working out that way at all for many people.

    And of course, the economic issues are bigger than that. Small businesses are in big trouble. Those who are not able to find a way to operate during these difficult times still have overhead and bills. They have rent and utilities for their place of business. Many have inventory payments that were due net-30.  Restaurants that can’t make the conversion to takeout and delivery, fitness studios, gyms, clothing stores, and many more independent businesses may never reopen after the government-imposed hiatus.

    One by one, families across America are looking at disappearing income, higher prices, and with shelter-in-place orders nearly everywhere, no real way to seek new employment. Unemployment, if and when it comes, is only a short term solution. If ever there as a chance to usher in Universal Basic Income and see people welcome it with open arms, this crisis would be it. Of course, UBI brings with it many problems, not the least of which is a lord-and-serf relationship and a slippery slope toward the social credit system, also brought to us by China just like the COVID-19 outbreak.

    Right now we’re looking at short-term effects, but we will feel the effects of this situation for a very long time. In fact, it’s likely to change the economy forever.

    As the economy continues to plummet because people are only purchasing the bare necessities, we’ll see other issues arise. How will you pay your rent or mortgage if your job qualifications are in a field that is now considered a luxury? How will you keep your utilities on when you’re not making any money? How will you feed your family, keep a roof over your head, pay for medical care, and maintain a vehicle?

    If you’ve never been through personal financial hardship before, you could be in for a terrible reality check when the cost of your most basic essentials is out of reach. But many of us have been there. We can tell you that it often makes you feel powerless – it’s difficult and humiliating, but you can get through it.

    If you’re a business owner, how will you keep operating if you have no working capital? How can you hire people if you don’t know whether you’ll be able to keep them on board for more than a couple of pay periods? How can you buy more inventory and can you even acquire that inventory anymore?  Will you be able to get the parts you need to repair items if you run a repair service business?

    As you can see, there are more questions than answers. (source)

    We’re just at the beginning of this bumpy ride, and there’s really no place that it leads except to an economic depression even worse than the one that took place in the 1920s.

    We’ll never “get back to normal.”

    For all the people wondering when we’re going to get back to normal, I’m very sorry to say, the answer to that is “never.”

    There are jobs lost that are never coming back. Businesses that were successful may never reopen, and if they do, unless they can pivot to cater to necessities, they won’t last long in an economy with widespread unemployment.

    And medically speaking, we are a long way from “normal” too.

    Dr. Anthony Fauci, the director of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, told a coronavirus press briefing on Monday that the world may never return to the “normal” that was known before the outbreak.

    …”When we get back to normal, we will go back to the point where we can function as a society,” he said.  He continued, “If you want to get back to pre-coronavirus, that might not ever happen in the sense that the threat is there.” (source)

    What’s more, the virus will be back for another wave.

    Fauci said Sunday that people must be prepared for a resurgence next year, which is why officials fighting the pandemic are pushing for a vaccine and clinical trials for therapeutic interventions so “we will have interventions that we did not have” when this started. (source)

    We could be looking at on and off periods of social distancing for eighteen months to two years before this is over. Here’s what the models suggest:

    Under this model, the researchers conclude, social distancing and school closures would need to be in force some two-thirds of the time—roughly two months on and one month off—until a vaccine is available, which will take at least 18 months (if it works at all). They note that the results are “qualitatively similar for the US.”

    Eighteen months!? Surely there must be other solutions. Why not just build more ICUs and treat more people at once, for example?

    Well, in the researchers’ model, that didn’t solve the problem. Without social distancing of the whole population, they found, even the best mitigation strategy—which means isolation or quarantine of the sick, the old, and those who have been exposed, plus school closures—would still lead to a surge of critically ill people eight times bigger than the US or UK system can cope with…

    …How about imposing restrictions for just one batch of five months or so? No good—once measures are lifted, the pandemic breaks out all over again, only this time it’s in winter, the worst time for overstretched health-care systems.

    And what if we decided to be brutal: set the threshold number of ICU admissions for triggering social distancing much higher, accepting that many more patients would die? Turns out it makes little difference. Even in the least restrictive of the Imperial College scenarios, we’re shut in more than half the time.

    This isn’t a temporary disruption. It’s the start of a completely different way of life. (source)

    For the foreseeable future, it appears that this is our life.

    What will the future look like?

    At this point, it’s pretty difficult to imagine what a future filled with waves of a pandemic virus, a devastated economy, and great loss will look like.

    But some of the things we can expect are intermittent periods of social distancing, periods of interaction. Businesses like restaurants, movie theaters, bars, malls, travel experiences, and sports venues will never be the same and if they survive, will only be able to operate intermittently.

    Homeschooling will be a long-term thing – children will not be able to be in a regular school setting during outbreaks.

    We’re going to be looking at an entirely different world, one full of six-foot distances, immunity passports, and dystopian tracking methods using our phones.

    One particularly unsettling possibility is a picture is painted by Technology Review.

    We don’t know exactly what this new future looks like, of course. But one can imagine a world in which, to get on a flight, perhaps you’ll have to be signed up to a service that tracks your movements via your phone. The airline wouldn’t be able to see where you’d gone, but it would get an alert if you’d been close to known infected people or disease hot spots. There’d be similar requirements at the entrance to large venues, government buildings, or public transport hubs. There would be temperature scanners everywhere, and your workplace might demand you wear a monitor that tracks your temperature or other vital signs. Where nightclubs ask for proof of age, in future they might ask for proof of immunity—an identity card or some kind of digital verification via your phone, showing you’ve already recovered from or been vaccinated against the latest virus strains.

    We’ll adapt to and accept such measures, much as we’ve adapted to increasingly stringent airport security screenings in the wake of terrorist attacks. The intrusive surveillance will be considered a small price to pay for the basic freedom to be with other people.

    As usual, however, the true cost will be borne by the poorest and weakest. People with less access to health care, or who live in more disease-prone areas, will now also be more frequently shut out of places and opportunities open to everyone else. Gig workers—from drivers to plumbers to freelance yoga instructors—will see their jobs become even more precarious. (source)

    Never let a good crisis go to waste, right?

    This is necessarily how it’s going to happen – it’s only one possible scenario of the many unpalatable futures that are currently emerging. None of them are scenarios that embrace freedom or the joy of anonymity.

    The life we knew is not coming back. But it’s better to know this and begin to think about how to mitigate these changes. Think about how you can earn a living, how you can teach your children about freedom in an unfree world, and how you can resist being a figure on a screen, constantly monitored for a spike in temperature.

    And who knows? Maybe Americans will return to their independent ways and say, “No more.”  But the changes that took place after 9/11 suggest otherwise. Unless a fearful populace can be convinced that freedom is more important than safety, this will lead to more restrictions and some kind of Pandemic Patriot Act 2.0.

    We don’t know what’s coming, but it will be different.

    Facing uncertainty is always difficult. But by focusing on the things you can do, it can be managed.

    I can’t tell you exactly what the future holds. But I can tell you that the lives we lived prior to COVID-19 are not going to re-emerge like nothing ever happened. And every day the lockdowns continue lessens the possibility of that even more.

    You need to accept that now so you can best figure out how to navigate the post-COVID world that awaits. This doesn’t mean you’ll never be able to be happy again. It doesn’t mean you’ll lose everything. It means that things are going to be different and if you don’t accept that, your acclimation period will be dangerously long. As Selco always says, the sooner you understand the new rules, the better off you’ll be.

    Things will be different.

    We will adjust. We will adapt. We will survive.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 20:00

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 8th April 2020

  • Will COVID-19 Derail The African Century?
    Will COVID-19 Derail The African Century?

    Authored by Michael Wilkerson via Project Syndicate,

    In The Fortunes of Africa, author Martin Meredith describes a Dutch sailing ship that dropped off a load of laundry for the Khoikhoi, the local inhabitants of the southwestern cape of Africa whom Europeans called Hottentots. The year was 1713. The Khoikhoi washed the laundry and were duly paid.

    But the laundry was carrying smallpox. Over the next year, the community was laid to waste. Nine out of ten Khoikhoi died, and the tribe eventually disappeared from the Cape.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Once again, a foreign pathogen is threatening Africa. The full impact of COVID-19 will be felt there later than in the rest of the world, but the financial markets have already exacted their toll. Even before the virus has made much headway on the continent, African currencies, sovereign debt, and public equities have fallen dramatically, in many cases experiencing losses far greater than in developed or other developing and emerging markets. The impact on African equity markets has already been worse than in the depths of the global financial crisis.

    But, if managed properly, the pandemic may prove to be a loud hiccup on the way to realizing the African Century. As an investor and philanthropist in Africa for more than a decade, I have been focused on the unparalleled opportunity that the continent represents. As former South African President Thabo Mbeki put it in his 1999 victory speech, “The people of our country have given an unequivocal directive that we must work together for the African Renaissance, for the emergence of the 21st Century as the African century.” Strong underlying growth, attractive demographic trends, improved governance, stability, and transparency imply enormous opportunity over the long run, with the potential for tens of millions to be lifted out of poverty.

    Africa’s population, growing at 2.5% per year (about twice the pace of India), is expected almost to double within the next 30 years. By the end of this century, Africa will surpass Asia in the number of working-age adults.

    With this growth come challenges. Millions of able-bodied African young people will require education, jobs, housing, health care, and other social goods that their countries today are largely unable to provide. While the coming youth bulge holds great promise, it could jeopardize geopolitical stability if it is mishandled. A generation of under-educated, under-employed, and economically frustrated youth is a powder keg that could disrupt societies not just in Africa, but across the globe.

    COVID-19 will interrupt the African Century in the short term. Lockdown enforcement may cause social unrest. Already, there have been protests and near-riots in Nairobi, Johannesburg, and elsewhere.

    Lockdowns in large African cities are not the same as in China, Italy, or the United States. Housing settlements are informal and population densities are higher. Food and other essentials must be bought and consumed daily – often from open-air markets and kiosks, with cash earned the same day. Social distancing is impossible when five or more household members are sleeping in a single poorly ventilated room. Washing hands frequently is difficult when water has to be fetched from an unprotected community source down the road.

    Hunger speaks louder than government edicts. Most African workers are involved in primary agriculture and must be able to plant, harvest, and process their crops. After all, there is no point in living now only to starve later.

    African leaders will continue to look abroad for support. Many African governments, having tilted easily and early to the Chinese sphere of influence, have begun seeking alternatives elsewhere. But China will seek to capitalize on the crisis. For example, China will offer financial, medical, and other assistance, as it has with Italy. And China’s aggressive and decisive actions to combat the pandemic at home will be seen by many as a paradigm for Africa, given Europe and America’s disjointed and inept responses so far.

    But Africa could emerge from the pandemic with less lasting damage than many fear. Leaders have learned important lessons from epidemics, notably Ebola. Warm climates, a mostly young and rural population, and lower rates of regional travel may slow the spread of the virus and hold down its mortality rate.

    True, African institutions are too frail and under-resourced to cope with the pandemic and its economic fallout, and the continent’s medical systems are woefully unprepared. But financial and institutional support from Europe and the US will help mitigate the harm, particularly if solutions focus on delivering much-needed education, supplies, and infrastructure to where the needs are greatest.

    In order to realize the promise of the African Century in the not-too-distant future, African countries cannot do it alone. As Ken Ofori-Atta, Ghana’s finance minister, recently told the Financial Times, this is “a break the glass moment” for the continent – an emergency in which international actors need to take drastic action if the world’s poorest region is to avoid a human and economic catastrophe. Recognizing Africa’s unique population, circumstances, and geopolitical significance is essential.

    We cannot permit COVID-19 to halt Africa’s progress. The continent’s leaders and its developed-country partners can and must contain the pandemic. The Khoikhoi’s fate is a warning. It must not become a prologue.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 02:45

  • China Forces Italy To Buy Back PPE It 'Donated'
    China Forces Italy To Buy Back PPE It ‘Donated’

    China has distributed nearly 4 billion masks to foreign countries as it ramps up production of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), a move to restore its image as a global leader focused on humanitarian relief amid the COVID-19 pandemic that originated in its country and spread across the world. 

    However, The Spectator provides a new account of how China’s latest diplomacy has turned out to be an absolute ‘disaster,’ in the latest example with Italy and other European countries. 

    China told the world that it would donate tons of PPE to Italy to slow the virus outbreak. Reports now indicate that China actually charged Italy for PPE, instead of donating. It also turns out the PPE China sent over was the same equipment that Italy donated to China earlier in the year. What a mess… 

    “Before the virus hit Europe, Italy sent tons of PPE to China to help China protect its own population. China then has sent Italian PPE back to Italy — some of it, not even all of it … and charged them for it,” a senior Trump administration official told The Spectator.

    Since March 1, China has exported 3.86 billion masks, 37.5 million pieces of PPE, 16,000 ventilators, and 2.84 million test kits across the globe, according to the New York Post

    Many countries who have received masks and other medical equipment from China have complained about the quality does not meet medical standards. China has apologized for quality issues and blamed its defective equipment on others.

    Last week, we noted that the Netherlands was forced to recall 1.3 million face masks produced in China because they did not meet safety standards.

    In Spain, the Ministry of Health on March 26 revealed that 640,000 COVID-19 tests that it had purchased from China were defective.

    On March 28, the French government, which has several weeks of medical supplies left, announced it had ordered one billion face masks from China. It remains to be seen if the masks will be defective 

    “It’s so disingenuous for Chinese officials now to say we are the ones who are helping the Italians or we are the ones who are helping the developing world when, in fact, they are the ones who infected all of us,” the senior administration official said.

     “Of course, they should be helping. They have a special responsibility to help because they are the ones who began the spread of the coronavirus and did not give the information required to the rest of the world to plan accordingly.”

    The official also said China’s disinformation campaign to downplay the severity of the virus delayed the administration’s response to prepare the country for an outbreak by at least a month.

    “The disinformation that China has put out is crippling responses around the world… We’re operating on some level with a hand-tied behind our back.” 

    The revelations surrounding Italy and faulty medical equipment shipments to European countries are fueling distrust among Chinese President Xi Jinping, who is attempting to position himself as the world’s new humanitarian superpower.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 02:10

  • COVID-19 & The Looming Collapse Of Europe's Single Currency
    COVID-19 & The Looming Collapse Of Europe’s Single Currency

    Authored by Soeren Kern via The Gatestone Institute,

    As the coronavirus unleashes economic shockwaves across Europe, the European single currency, the most visible symbol of European unification, is facing collapse.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The eurozone – a monetary union of 19 of the 27 Member States of the European Union that have adopted the euro as their common currency – is being buffeted not only by the prospect of a deep and long-lasting recession. Northern and Southern European countries are also feuding over possible financial support for Italy and Spain, the EU’s third- and fourth-largest economies, which have been especially hard hit by the coronavirus.

    On March 13, European Central Bank (ECB) President Christine Lagarde dismissed calls by Italy for financial assistance to help it cope with the pandemic. After her comments rattled financial markets, Lagarde quickly reversed course and said that the ECB was “fully committed to avoid any fragmentation in a difficult moment for the euro area.” Italian President Sergio Mattarella replied that Italy had a right to expect solidarity from beyond its borders rather than obstacles.

    On March 18, the ECB announced that, in an effort to calm sovereign debt markets, it would spend €750 billion ($810 billion) to purchase bonds issued by national governments. Lagarde tweeted: “Extraordinary times require extraordinary action. There are no limits to our commitment to the euro.” Larry Elliott, Economics Editor of the Guardian newspaper, wrote that the ECB’s announcement was evidence that, without a massive support package, the eurozone was in danger of collapse:

    “The situation is immensely more dangerous — both economically and politically — than it was when spiraling Italian and Spanish bond yields prompted Mario Draghi’s [President of the European Central Bank between 2011 and 2019] “whatever it takes speech” in 2012. With people dying in their thousands, borders closing and activity collapsing, the entire European project is at risk.”

    On March 26, EU leaders, during a virtual summit held by video conference, were unable to agree on an economic response to the coronavirus. A day earlier, nine eurozone countries — Belgium, France, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Portugal, Slovenia and Spain — called for a common debt instrument, called “coronabonds,” to mitigate the damage caused by the coronavirus crisis. “We are all facing a symmetric external shock, for which no country bears responsibility, but whose negative consequences are endured by all,” they said in a letter.

    Austria, Finland, Germany and the Netherlands, dubbed the eurozone’s “frugal four,” rejected the idea of issuing joint debt to finance economic recovery in Southern Europe. Dutch Prime Minister Mark Rutte said that issuing joint debt would be “crossing the Rubicon” because it would turn the eurozone into a “transfer union” in a way that was not foreseen by the Maastricht Treaty, which established the European Union and laid the foundation for the single currency. “I cannot foresee any circumstance under which we will change our position,” he said.

    Dutch Finance Minister Wopke Hoekstra, in a letter to parliament, warned that coronabonds would introduce the threat of “moral hazard” by disincentivizing economic reform in debt-ridden Southern Europe. He also called on the European Commission, the EU’s administrative arm, to investigate why countries such as Italy and Spain have not made adequate economic reforms since the 2008 financial crisis.

    A European diplomat quoted by the Dutch newspaper De Volkskrant described Hoekstra’s comments as a “serious insult” to Southern Europe. Another diplomat said that the comments were a “Dutch middle finger to the south.”

    Southern European countries have the option of tapping funds from the European Stability Mechanism (ESM), the eurozone’s bailout fund, which lends money under strict conditions. Those countries are reluctant to use the ESM because they would be saddled with long term debt that would be hard to repay, and because the conditions would impinge on national sovereignty.

    Writing for the Wall Street Journal, correspondent Marcus Walker explained the dynamic:

    “Northern offers of loans with strings attached strike the south as punitive and inadequate. Southern clamor to issue joint bonds sound to the north like a demand to use its credit card….

    “The specter of a divided eurozone remains. Unless the economic shock of lockdowns is quickly overcome, Italy and Spain are in danger of emerging from the coronavirus crisis as poorer countries. A renewed depression in Southern Europe would also be bad news for northern nations, whose industries and banks profit from the overall health of the region’s economy.”

    In other words, if the coronavirus crisis eventually causes Italy to default on its debt, the reverberations will be felt across Europe — and the globe. Italy, with a GDP of nearly $2 trillion, is said to be “too big to fail, too big to bail.” Desmond Lachlan, a Resident Fellow at the American Enterprise Institute, noted:

    “Unlike Greece, Italy is too big an economy to fail for the euro to survive and too big and costly an economy for its European partners to save….

    “In gauging Italy’s systemic importance to the global economy, one should bear in mind that its economy is approximately 10 times the size of that of Greece and that it is the eurozone’s third-largest economy.

    “Equally important is the fact that after the United States and Japan, Italy has the world’s third-largest sovereign debt market with more than $2.5 trillion in outstanding government debt.

    “It is difficult to conceive of a scenario where an Italian debt default would not trigger a European banking crisis. Were that indeed to occur, it must be expected to have global economic and financial market ramifications.”

    The Associate Editor of the UK-based newspaper Independent, Sean O’Grady, wrote that the coronavirus crisis could catapult Italy into bankruptcy:

    “Italy’s crisis is Europe’s. When Italy catches a cold, Europe will catch pneumonia. The euro cannot permit a major economy (Italy is the eurozone’s third-largest) to collapse in a disorderly mess.”

    In Spain, which recently overtook Italy as the epicenter of the coronavirus in Europe, Prime Minister Pedro Sánchez committed €200 billion ($215 billion) — 20% of the country’s GDP — to alleviate the economic and social consequences of the pandemic. When asked how he would pay for that amount of spending, Sánchez replied that he was counting on financial help from “Europe.”

    Meanwhile, the coronavirus crisis is wreaking havoc across the eurozone, which suffered an unprecedented collapse in business activity in March 2020, according to IHS Markit, a London-based information provider. “Business sentiment about the year ahead has plunged to the gloomiest on record, suggesting policymakers’ efforts to date have failed to brighten the darkening picture,” it wrote. A survey by McKinsey & Company forecast that eurozone GDP will fall by 10.6% in 2020, and will not return to pre-crisis levels until the end of 2024.

    On April 6, French Finance Minister Bruno Le Maire warned that France is likely to see its deepest recession since the end of World War II this year because of the coronavirus crisis. “The worst growth figure in France since 1945 was in 2009, after the great financial crisis of 2008: -2.2%. We will probably be far beyond -2.2% this year,” Le Maire told the Senate Economic Affairs Committee. “This shows the extent of the economic shock we are facing,” he added.

    France, the eurozone’s second-largest economy after Germany, imposed a nationwide stay-at-home order since March 17. The lockdown will last until at least April 15. One month of confinement would cost France around 3 points of GDP over a year, and two months of confinement around 6 points, according to French Statistics Agency INSEE.

    French President Emmanuel Macron warned his fellow EU leaders that the coronavirus outbreak risked undoing the bloc’s central pillars if they failed to show solidarity in this crisis. “What’s at stake is the survival of the European project,” he said.

    Achim Truger, a member of the German Council of Economic Experts, said that he believes that coronabonds are necessary to prevent a collapse of the euro:

    All countries in Europe are being hit by the epidemic — Italy and Spain particularly hard. All countries, including Germany, must therefore be able to make the necessary health expenditures and take measures to bridge the economic crisis. This is only possible through additional government debt, and this must be guaranteed to prevent another euro crisis. If the debt loads of Italy and Spain rise sharply, they will be pushed into budget cuts, thus economic, social and political crises, which would ultimately lead to a sovereign debt crisis and a collapse of the euro and the EU. Therefore, there must now be a joint, solidarity-based solution.”

    Oliver Hartwich, a German economist and prominent commentator on European affairs who is the Executive Director of the Wellington-based think tank The New Zealand Initiative, summed up the European predicament:

    Today, not a single European country is doing well which means there is limited willingness for European countries to come to each other’s aid. They are busy dealing with their own crises. Just witness how Italy has been left alone with its crisis by Europe and now rather gets its medical support from China….

    An almighty economic earthquake is in the making. In a few weeks or months, several large European economies will require bailout and assistance packages. These will be several times larger than anything Europe has seen. Yet no country, central bank or institution will be eager or even able to provide them. Even the gargantuan sums on the table now will not be enough.

    “Incidentally, forget about the International Monetary Fund. It was already stretched when it got involved with Greece last time. It cannot bail out all of Europe when the euro collapses.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 01:35

  • Putin Tested Regularly For COVID-19, Controversially Resumes In-Person Meetings
    Putin Tested Regularly For COVID-19, Controversially Resumes In-Person Meetings

    Russia saw its single biggest one-day spike in COVID-19 cases Monday, at 954 new cases – amid a current total of 7,497 confirmed cases and 59 deaths – most centered in Moscow.

    Despite the Russian capital by far seeing most cases, nearly all of Russia’s 140 million plus citizens are currently in “home isolation” even though some regions have yet to see a single case in the geographically expansive country.

    Meanwhile, Kremlin Spokesman Dmitry Peskov told reporters on Tuesday that President Vladimir Putin is being tested regularly for COVID-19 after previously shaking hands with Moscow doctor Denis Protsenko, himself shortly after confirmed for the virus, which caused Putin to work remotely in isolation since the March 24 encounter. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image via EPA/TASS

    Speaking of Putin, Peskov said, “[He gets tested] as often as his doctor sees fit,” without going into details. “I do not deal with the matters of the president’s medical care,” he added.

    The response arose after Putin appeared to loosen up his self-isolation regimen, given on Monday top officials from the country’s far east traveled to the Kremlin to meet with Putin in person

    According to TASS, “Peskov noted that Putin’s decision to hold a meeting with Presidential Envoy to the Far Eastern Federal District Yuri Trutnev and Minister for the Development of the Far East and Arctic Alexander Kozlov at the Kremlin is not a violation of the self-isolation regime.”

    “Yes, he [Putin] did come to the Kremlin yesterday,” Peskov said, while adding the president “does not visit public places and does not meet a large amount of people.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putin’s visit to a Moscow hospital March 24, via Sputnik.

    Peskov emphasized this includes not only Putin himself being subject to regular tests, but anyone in his presence or who enters his office for a meeting. “All precautionary measures are being taken.”

    In a speech to the public outlining the extension of a national paid work stoppage on Monday, Putin said some less-impacted regions will be able to loosen policies as local conditions see fit. 

    “There are regions where not a single case of the disease has been identified, although there are fewer of them as time goes on,” noted Putin.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moscow hospital director Denis Protsenko, later confirmed for coronavirus, shaking hands with the Russian president in late March, via TASS.

    No doubt, Russian leaders are closely watching the condition of British Prime Minister Boris Johnson, who was moved to intensive care yesterday. Johnson is significantly younger (at 55) than the 67-year old Russian president.

    “I would like to express my sincere support at this difficult moment for you,” Putin was quoted as saying in a Tuesday message to Johnson. “I am sure that your energy, optimism and sense of humor will help to defeat the disease.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 04/08/2020 – 01:00

  • Government To Decide What Items Are Essential Purchases And What Things You're Not Allowed To Buy
    Government To Decide What Items Are Essential Purchases And What Things You’re Not Allowed To Buy

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    Living under lockdown restrictions, prevalent in nearly every state, is about to get a whole lot worse. The government in the United States and Canada has decided to take away the guesswork in the stores that are still open and decide for you what’s “essential” and what’s not.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When I have gone to the store to pick up groceries (I’m still getting fresh produce while I can), I also like to pick up a couple of things that are pleasant diversions: magazines, a crossword puzzle book, coloring pencils, some craft supplies. It’s nice to have some things that are enjoyable on hand to keep lockdown from feeling so grim and torturous. If the store is already open, getting a sunny yellow pillow for the living room is a pick-me-up, not a frivolous jaunt to a place I wasn’t already going. When we had a birthday in the family, we even picked up a few small gifts on our regular trip to the grocery store to provide a sense of normalcy.

    But the days of getting a random item to brighten a family member’s day may be numbered. The government (at least in some places) wants to make this already unpleasant time as dismal as possible for us all.

    Vermont has started a worrisome trend.

    Vermont has decided to choose for you what is essential and what is not, banning the sale of non-essential items at stores like Target, Walmart, and Costco.

    The Agency of Commerce and Community Development (ACCD) is directing large “big box” retailers, such as Walmart, Target and Costco, with in-store sales of food, beverage and pharmacy, as well as electronics, toys, clothing, and the like to cease in-person sales of non-essential items in order to reduce the number of people coming into the stores.

    “Large ‘big box’ retailers generate significant shopping traffic by virtue of their size and the variety of goods offered in a single location,” said Agency of Commerce and Community Development Secretary Lindsay Kurrle.  “This volume of shopping traffic significantly increases the risk of further spread of this dangerous virus to Vermonters and the viability of Vermont’s health care system. We are directing these stores to put public health first and help us reduce the number of shoppers by requiring on-line ordering, delivery and curbside pickup whenever possible, and by stopping the sale of non-essential items.” (source)

    Retailers are asked to close certain areas of the stores, rope them off to deny access, or pull non-essentials from their shelves.

    What’s considered non-essential?

    The Burlington Free Press reports the following items have been deemed non-essential purchases:

    • Arts and crafts items.

    • Beauty supplies.

    • Carpet and flooring.

    • Clothes.

    • Consumer electronics.

    • Entertainment (books, music, movies).

    • Furniture.

    • Home and garden.

    • Jewelry.

    • Paint.

    • Photo services.

    • Sports equipment.

    • Toys.

    So a store you’re already at is telling you that grabbing some hand lotion to soothe your dry, cracked skin from the constant application of hand sanitizer is non-essential? Getting a book to read while you’re locked down is against the rules? You can’t do a home improvement project while you’re stuck at home?

    I fail to see how this is going to stop the spread of a coronavirus if the shopper is already at the store and the employees are also already at the store.

    In fact, it seems to me that this would be helpful to our gasping and dying economy. But what would I know? Dinesh Iyer, Assistant Professor of Management at Rutgers School of Business-Camden, says the stores don’t need our frivolous little purchases.

    “I think the economy can wait,” he said. “Most corporations have access to debt and finances that are not available to the common folk.”

    Corporations can “leverage their assets and tide through difficult times” by borrowing larger sums of money at lower interest rates and more frequently than you or I can,” he said.

    “We have an opportunity to do all the things around the house that we have been putting off, spend time with family, learn a new skill,” Iyer said.

    He even cautions against online shopping.

    “The online shopping can wait,” Iyer said. “But if you must, you can always add the items of interest to your wish-list. And after the crisis, if you still need it, go for it. In the meantime, conserve the resources. You will be saving lives.” (source)

    It’s rather curious how Iyer thinks us “common folk” will be able to do those things around the house and learn new skills without the supplies to do so.

    One of the most alarming things is that garden supplies are considered non-essential.

    Of all the times in the world you need most to plant a garden, now is the time. But in Vermont’s directive, even the sale of garden supplies is non-essential.

    …showrooms and garden sections of large home improvement centers should be closed.  (source)

    And readers shared this photo from a store in Vermont.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The government of Vermont says that it isn’t really accurate.

     Recent pictures circulating on social media appear to be from a box store which has roped off access to “non-essential” areas of the store, per guidance from ACCD, with various seed packets behind the roped-off section.  As stated above, agricultural seeds have been deemed “essential” in Vermont per the Governor’s executive order, however a homeowner’s access to seeds has been modified to meet the Governor’s executive order.

    We’re hoping that retailers and consumers alike restrict in-person shopping to items that need to be purchased in-person and are of a time sensitive nature. While the state recognizes the importance of gardening as a source of food for many Vermonters, the ability to browse for seeds and purchase them in person doesn’t outweigh the risk of spreading the virus. Retailers can continue to make seeds available online, delivery and curbside. (source)

    Okay. You can just buy them online…or can you?

    Buying seeds online isn’t an option either.

    Almost every seed company readers in the preparedness community have tried to make purchases from has said, sorry, but we’re just selling to commercial operations this year.

    Johnny’s Select Seeds has the following announcement on their home page:

    Here’s what you can expect as of March 31st, 2020:

    • At this time, we are accepting new orders only from commercial farmers shipping to the U.S. and Canada and international wholesale customers. We plan to resume taking orders from all customers on April 14th. This restriction applies to all orders placed via our website, phone, and email. This was a difficult decision and we apologize for the inconvenience.

    • Commercial Farmers only: Please login to your website account before placing your order or call our contact center at 1-877-564-6697 for assistance. If you have forgotten your password, you can find information on resetting your password here.

    • Orders placed with our standard shipping option prior to March 31st, 2020 may experience a shipment delay of 5–10 days. Commercial orders placed on or after March 31st, 2020 may experience a shipment delay of 1–2 days.

    • You may experience a longer than usual response time when you phone in your order, call on us to answer growing questions, or email us to make inquiries.

    • We have closed our retail store in Winslow, Maine, and will not be hosting farm tours until further notice.

    We remain honored that you have chosen Johnny’s. Whether you have been buying from Johnny’s for 25 years or this is your first order, please know that we care deeply about helping you through the challenges of this coronavirus outbreak. Call or email us if you need growing advice or help finding products. (source)

    So…you can’t get seeds from your local Walmart garden center if you’re in Vermont and you can’t order seeds from seed stores. Good luck with that garden you were hoping would help see you through this disaster unless you’ve already got seeds put back from previous years.

    What can we expect?

    I think it’s extremely likely that Vermont’s idea will catch on and spread across the country. Just like lockdowns began in a couple of areas then spread state by state, don’t be surprised when this trend does also. The province of Ontario in Canada has just closed all their hardware stores and is limiting purchases only to curbside pick-up. Here’s what you need to be prepared to see:

    • Don’t expect that you’re going to be able to pop over to Lowes or Home Depot to pick up seedlings – or even seeds – for your summer garden.

    • Don’t expect that you’ll be able to replace your children’s flipflops or sandals for the summer regardless of the growth of their feet – this could be considered “non-essential.”

    • Don’t expect to be able to replace clothing for growing children – at least not in person.

    • Don’t expect to get any summer toys for the kids to play with while they’re in the back-yard – non-essential.

    • Don’t expect to be able to buy a bigger size of pants because you ate all your quarantine candy. You’re going to have to squeeze yourself into your old pants.

    • Don’t expect to be able to get the fabric to make masks – remember? Craft supplies are non-essential.

    Really, don’t expect anything. Because for some reason, it seems like governments want to make an already difficult and stressful time even worse by taking away the possibility for any kind of pleasant past-time unless you already have all the supplies you need for that.

    This senseless crackdown not only makes things even more unpleasant, but it takes away even more streams of revenue for struggling businesses. And more than that, it’s limiting our ability to be as self-reliant as possible, leaving people to fight it out at the grocery store for dwindling resources with few options for creating our own food supplies.

    Those living in Vermont have unfortunately missed their window for anything but mail order. For the rest of us, if there are some things you were hoping to get – be it new curtains, paint for the living room, tile for the bathroom, pots for your container garden, or the supplies to make a new chicken coop – you’d better get it now before your state follows the lead of Vermont.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 23:40

  • "Historic Moment" – Robo Van Shuttles COVID-19 Tests At Mayo Clinic In Florida 
    “Historic Moment” – Robo Van Shuttles COVID-19 Tests At Mayo Clinic In Florida 

    At a time when America’s hospital systems are overwhelmed with COVID-19 cases and deaths, one hospital system in Florida is using autonomous vehicles to transport medical supplies and test kits.

    The Mayo Clinic in Jacksonville, Florida, recently announced that self-driving shuttles would transport COVID-19 tests from a drive-in testing clinic to the processing lab.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Autonomous shuttles help transport COVID-19 tests at Mayo Clinic in Jacksonville, Florida

    According to Mayo’s press release, “health care resources and staff are stretched thin,” and the hospital system believes robots can help limit exposure to the virus and free up healthcare workers’ time.

    Mayo says four shuttles have been in operation since March 30. The program is in partnership with the Jacksonville Transportation Authority (JTA), Beep, and NAVYA, all working together to ensure autonomous vehicle safety. 

    “This development is a historic moment for the Jacksonville Transportation Authority,” said Nathaniel P. Ford, Sr., CEO of JTA.

    “Along with our partners, Beep, NAVYA, and Mayo Clinic, we are leveraging our learnings from three years of testing autonomous vehicles through our Ultimate Urban Circulator program. Our innovative team saw this as an opportunity to use technology to respond to this crisis in Northeast Florida and increase the safety of COVID-19 testing.”

    Kent Thielen, MD, CEO of Mayo Clinic in Florida, said, “Using artificial intelligence enables us to protect staff from exposure to this contagious virus by using cutting-edge autonomous vehicle technology and frees up staff time that can be dedicated to direct treatment and care for patients.” 

    The proliferation of autonomous vehicles to transport infectious disease tests and medical supplies suggests that the pandemic could be the trigger for major hospital systems across the US to embrace an age of automation. We’ve noted on several occasions that robots will displace at least 20 million jobs through 2030. However, the virus crisis will likely speed up this transformative period, and instead of happening over ten years, it could come a lot quicker. 

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 23:20

  • Why Did Fauci Cheer Use Of 'Untested' Drug For Coronavirus In 2013… But Now He's Skeptical
    Why Did Fauci Cheer Use Of ‘Untested’ Drug For Coronavirus In 2013… But Now He’s Skeptical

    Authored by Victor Rantala via BizPacReview.com,

    It’s been found that seven years ago, Dr. Anthony Fauci expressed that he was encouraged by lab tests involving a combination of drugs that included hydroxychloroquine in antiviral experiments on a SARS-like coronavirus that had emerged at the time.

    Some observers are seeing that as puzzling…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fauci, NIAID director and current Coronavirus Task Force rock star, has long been widely looked to as the nation’s ultimate authority on infectious diseases. As such, his record and history of public comments are especially subject to scrutiny and critiques at a time such as the current societal upheaval sweeping the globe.

    An ongoing point of contention being amplified by the media is Fauci’s cautious present-day perspective on the use of hydroxychloroquine as a treatment for COVID-19, while so many others are eager to embrace the encouraging indicators of its potential effectiveness against today’s novel coronavirus.

    “We don’t have to start designing new drugs,” a process that takes years, Fauci says. “The next time someone comes into an emergency room in Qatar or Saudi Arabia, you would have drugs that are readily available. And at least you would have some data.”

    “Even though the treatment hasn’t gone through definitive trials, Fauci says, “if I were a physician in a hospital and someone were dying, rather than do nothing, you can see if these work.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    President Trump has repeatedly expressed his hope for hydroxychloroquine (HCQ), even as Fauci has been careful to temper Trump’s enthusiasm for the drug’s prospects.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On Friday, Fauci provided a nuanced explanation of his views on HCQ as a coronavirus treatment when he appeared on “Fox & Friends.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Fox News hosts directed Fauci’s attention to a recent Sermo poll of more than 6000 physicians in 30 countries in which 37 percent rated HCQ as the “most effective therapy” in treating the novel coronavirus.

    “We don’t operate on how you ‘feel,’” Fauci commented, pointing out that the survey measured feelings or opinions.

    “We operate on what evidence is and data is.”

    “Fox & Friends” also played a clip of Dr. Mehmet Cengiz Öz directly asking for Fauci’s thoughts about HCQ’s promise as suggested in a “Chinese study from Wuhan, reflecting statistically significant improvement in recovering from fever, from cough, and from pneumonia as well.”

    “That was not a very robust study,” Fauci replied. “It is still possible that there is a beneficial effect, but the study that was just quoted, on a scale of strength of evidence, that’s not overwhelmingly strong. It’s an indication, a hint of it.”

    He added:

    So although there is some suggestion that there is a benefit there, I think we’ve got to be careful that we don’t make that majestic leap to assume that this is a knockout drug. We still need to do the kinds of studies that definitively prove that any intervention, not just this one, but any intervention is truly safe and effective.”

    “But when you don’t have that information,” the doctor added, “it’s understandable, and I grant that … it’s understandable why people may want to take something anyway, even with the slightest hint of it being effective, and I have no problem with that.

    The 79-year-old Fauci has served as the director of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases (NIAID) since 1984, having served under six U.S. presidents, beginning with Ronald Reagan.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 23:00

  • "I'd Rather Stay Unemployed Than Risk My Life" – Grocery Store Workers Strike As COVID-19 Deaths Soar
    “I’d Rather Stay Unemployed Than Risk My Life” – Grocery Store Workers Strike As COVID-19 Deaths Soar

    As we’ve been warning over the last several weeks, the beginning innings of social unrest in the Western world could be developing. Millions of people have just lost their jobs, the economy has crashed, and suicides and domestic violence are increasing, this is all the characteristics of a recession, if not a depression in the second quarter.

    Last week, Amazon and Instacart workers kicked off strikes to demand safety equipment and better pay amid the virus pandemic that has left some of their colleagues in the hospital, infected with the deadly virus. Amazon employees walked out of a Staten Island warehouse on Monday, the second week in a row. We noted last week how strikes and protests would likely spread “to other businesses.”

    And we were right, now workers at some Massachusetts grocery stores will protest on Tuesday morning to demand medical equipment and the need for hazard pay as their probabilities of contracting the virus are high.  

    Organizers told WCVB Boston that employees from Whole Foods, Stop & Shop, Trader Joes & Shaw are expected to join the rally, scheduled for 1100ET outside the Whole Foods at 348 Harrison Ave in Boston.

    The organizers are requesting that employers provide workers with “hazard pay of time and half for the duration of the COVID-19 crisis.” During the protest, workers are expected to abide by Massachusetts’ social distancing rules and stand 6 feet apart from others. 

    The protest comes as major supermarket chains across the country are starting to report an increase in virus cases and deaths. 

    On Monday, a Trader Joe’s worker in Scarsdale, New York, an employee at a Giant store in Largo, Maryland., and two Walmart employees from the same Chicago-area store have just died in recent days after their exposure to COVID-19, the companies said on Monday. 

    Some experts are saying the rise of virus cases and deaths at supermarkets across the country is because companies did not adequately prepare workers for a public health crisis: 

    “One of the biggest mistakes supermarkets made early on was not allowing employees to wear masks and gloves the way they wanted to,” Supermarket analyst Phil Lempert said. “They’re starting to become proactive now, but it’s still going to be much tougher to hire hundreds of thousands of new workers. We’re going to start seeing people say, ‘I’ll just stay unemployed instead of risking my life for a temporary job.'”

    Strikes and protests aren’t limited to an Amazon warehouse or Instant cart workers and or supermarkets, but now spreading to the fast-food industry.

    McDonald’s workers in Los Angeles staged a strike on Monday, demanding face masks and hand sanitizer after an employee tested positive for the virus. 

    Bartolome Perez, 30, a cook at the McDonald’s, told Fox 11 Los Angeles that a fellow employee tested positive.

     “We’ve been pleading for protective equipment for more than a month now, but McDonald’s is putting profits ahead of our health,” Perez said. 

    Perez claims that McDonald’s has yet to pay for any healthcare costs associated with testing employees. The restaurant has been shut down for sanitation. 

    Amazon and Instacart strikes last week have inspired the beginning innings of protests among low-income/low-wage workers, as it appears employees of Target’s delivery service Shipt will also strike on Tuesday. 

    And here’s some bad news that we outlined about the global COVID-19 infection curve on Monday, it appears the US is still in the exponential rise phase (acceleration), which means more people will get infected and die. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The evolution of the pandemic is social unrest, already developing with strikes and protests at major companies. 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 22:40

  • Here Comes The Second Wave: Wuhan Lockdown Ends And Tens Of Thousands Are About To Flee The City
    Here Comes The Second Wave: Wuhan Lockdown Ends And Tens Of Thousands Are About To Flee The City

    Last week we reported that even as the world’s attention had shifted to the new global coronavirus outbreak epicenters of New York, Italy, Spain and other western nations, China – which rushed to restart its economy at any cost – had put a major county on lockdown after a new cluster of coronavirus infection had emerged. To wit, last Wednesday we learned that in post on its social media account, Jia county – which has a population of about 600,000 – said that no one can travel out of Jia county without proper authorization after one person tested positive.

    This new cluster emerged just days after China once again revised its virus reporting methodology to also include asymptomatic carriers of the disease, which naturally begged the question why China wasn’t reported his subset of infections previously.

    We got the answer yesterday when Mainland China reported 39 new coronavirus cases as of Sunday, up from 30 a day earlier, and the number of asymptomatic cases also surged, as Beijing continued to struggle to extinguish the outbreak despite drastic containment efforts. China’s National Health Commission said in a statement on Monday that 78 new asymptomatic cases had been identified as of the end of the day on Sunday, compared with 47 the day before. Of the new cases showing symptoms, 38 were people who had entered China from abroad, compared with 25 a day earlier, although how China keeps track of this on an instantaneous basis is unclear. Also it’s odd to blame “imports” as China also closed off its borders to foreigners, though according to Beijing most imported cases involve Chinese nationals returning from overseas.

    Worse, an update posted late on Tuesday showed that the number of most asymptomatic cases has nearly doubled since Sunday’s peak:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This means that whether asymptomatic or not, imported or domestic, Hubei-based or not, on April 5, China reported the most new Coronavirus cases in a month as slowly the disease appears to be reestablishing itself in the world’s most populous nation.

    This is a problem because it suggests that despite the now chronic data obfuscation, China may be about to unleash to a second wave of coronavirus infections – both domestically and internationally – something JPMorgan predicted is virtually inevitable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s an even bigger problem because at midnight on Wednesday, China ended its lockdown of Wuhan, the city where the coronavirus first emerged and remains the symbol of a pandemic that has killed tens of thousands of people, shaken the global economy and thrown daily life into upheaval across the planet.

    Alas, as the NYT reports, the city that has reopened after more than 10 weeks is a profoundly damaged one, a place whose recovery will be watched worldwide for lessons on how populations move past pain and calamity of such staggering magnitude. What’s worse, is that judging by the latest reports, a new cluster of cases may be emerging and since Wuhan was ground zero, the risk is that by reopening Wuhan, China may be about to restart a whole new global wave of infections.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A park along the Yangtze River in Wuhan, China, on Monday

    But first, a little background.

    Chinese authorities sealed off Wuhan, an industrial hub of 11 million people, in late January, in a frantic attempt to limit the outbreak’s spread. At the time, many outsiders saw it as an extreme step, one that could be tried only in an authoritarian system like China’s. But as the epidemic has worsened, governments around the world have enacted a variety of stringent restrictions on their citizens’ movements.

    Wuhan was by far the worst-hit part of the country, accounting for 50,008 confirmed coronavirus cases—61% of China’s total—and 2,571 deaths, or 77% of the national toll, according to official figures as of Monday.

    Meanwhile, some 1.4 million infections and 80,000 deaths have been reported worldwide — figures that are rising fast, and that officials say vastly understate the true extent of the pandemic, a pandemic which despite mainstream attempts to shift the topic, most likely emerged as a result of deadly leak (an involuntary one, one assumes) from the Wuhan Institute Of Virology. The contagion has slowed in hard-hit countries like Italy and Spain, but it continues to spread quickly elsewhere around the globe, including in the United States, which is approaching 400,000 known infections.

    News reports are filled with scenes of overflowing hospitals in New York City, uncollected bodies on streets in Ecuador, updates on the condition of Prime Minister Boris Johnson of Britain, who is hospitalized in intensive care, and expert warnings that the epidemic could be exploding, undetected, in the poorest parts of the world. Most of Europe, India, much of the United States and many other places are under orders for businesses to close and most people to stay at home, abruptly crippling economies and throwing millions of people out of work.

    Yet as the world grapples with how to minimize transmission and isolate potential carriers by preaching a culture of “social distancing”, China is doing the opposite, and taking a massive gamble by allowing potential carriers to resume their normal social interactions with countless people.

    To be sure, that’s not how Beijing sees it: Wednesday’s reopening of Wuhan came after only three new coronavirus cases were reported in the city in the previous three weeks, and a day after China reported no new deaths for the first time since January. The report that China is fine sparked ridicule from such Sinophobes as Heyman Capital’s Kyle Bass who did not exactly believe China’s “data” to put it mildly:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, speculation is rife that the real infection numbers for Wuhan could be more than double that, according to two recent studies that estimated that the cumulative total for the city was already higher than 125,000 in February according to the WSJ. One study, by University of Hong Kong researchers, noted that China changed its criteria for diagnosis six times, including on Feb. 4, when it widened the testing pool considerably, leading to a surge in confirmed cases. If testing capabilities were available throughout the outbreak, and the Feb. 4 criteria had been applied throughout China’s crisis, 232,000 cases could have been detected in China by Feb. 20, with 127,000 cases in Wuhan alone, the researchers estimated. Additionally, as the WSJ also notes, experts and residents believe the official death toll excludes those who died at home or couldn’t be tested early on.

    Epidemiologists, US intelligence sources and Wuhan residents suspect that Chinese authorities substantially undercounted infections and deaths over the past several months, especially in Wuhan, in part to boost President Xi Jinping’s image.

    Some of the clearest indications that nothing is fixed comes from Wuhan itself: while some life, and traffic, have returned to Wuhan’s streets in recent days, most shops and restaurants are still closed. Local officials in full protective gear still guard entrances to residential neighborhoods, some of which are barricaded with metal fencing and awning.

    Authorities who had cut back on testing after conditions improved have ramped them back up, testing 12,000 people a day on average the past two weeks—60% more than New York City. Nationwide testing numbers haven’t been made public, and even if they were, the results would show only whatever Beijing wants.

    Until April 1, China didn’t publish figures for asymptomatic cases, which it defines as people who don’t yet show symptoms but have tested positive and could be infectious. Since then, Wuhan authorities have reported 194 new asymptomatic cases. They also said a total of 658 asymptomatic cases were under medical observation as of Monday. Health Times, a publication affiliated with the Communist Party’s official People’s Daily newspaper, quoted a senior doctor in Wuhan saying there could be 10,000 to 20,000 asymptomatic cases there, according to a survey done in the previous three days. The online articles was promptly deleted after it was published.

    Most skeptical that the Wuhan crisis has been solved are the city’s own residents, who say they are skeptical in part because local authorities tried to cover up the scale of the problem early on. Police reprimanded several people who tried to issue warnings via social media and officials warned doctors not to speak publicly about the disease. Restrictions on people retrieving deceased relatives’ ashes from funeral homes ahead of last Saturday’s Tomb Sweeping festival, a day when many Chinese visit ancestors’ graves, also aroused suspicions. Officials banned people from observing Tomb Sweeping rituals until April 30, saying it was to avoid cemetery overcrowding.

    Wuhan’s cemeteries and crematoriums have been heavily manned with police and other officials, with makeshift tents and desks erected outside to process grieving relatives. At the Biandanshan cemetery, Wuhan’s largest, an epidemic control official said there had been dozens of funerals there in recent days, a little more than normal, due to a backlog from the lockdown, when the cemetery was closed. 

    Such doubts, combined with the reports of new asymptomatic cases, are triggering fears of a potential second wave of infections that could undermine Beijing’s claim to have tamed the virus.

    Yet despite the all too real possibility that Wuhan is a ticking timebomb, ready to unleash a second wave of coronavirus infections on the world – and this time with mutations, making any potential immunity from the first wave null and void – China is scrambling to show to the world just how successful it has been in fixing its own crisis, and Chinese authorities lifted the mass quarantine of Hubei province except for Wuhan, its capital, on March 25.

    * * *

    As for Wuhan, after 76 days in quarantine the city’s lockdown – as well as controls on outbound travel – have now been lifted, just after midnight in China with authorities encouraging resumption of business operations for this critical industrial hub.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chinese police walk past high speed trains parked a depot in Wuhan, in central China’s Hubei Province. The central Chinese city of Wuhan, once the epicenter of the novel coronavirus outbreak, will resume outbound operation of passenger trains departing starting April 8, according to the local railway operator

    Which means that despite the mounting skepticism about what the full extent of the disease was in ground zero, and whether it has even been contained, starting Wednesday morning people can now leave after presenting to the authorities a government-sanctioned phone app that indicates — based on their home addresses, recent travels and medical histories — whether they are contagion risks. Of course, since this is a city of 11 million, there is no possible way that the local authorities will be enable to enforce this “filter.”

    The consequences – for China and the world – could be dire. Footage from state-run news outlets early Wednesday showed a rush of cars traveling through toll stations on the outskirts of Wuhan immediately after the restrictions were lifted.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s Global Times took pride in showing that on Wednesday morning an airplane departed from Wuhan Tianhe International Airport to Sanya in South China’s Hainan Province on Wed. It was the first flight leaving the airport after Wuhan’s 76-day lockdown.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But most terrifying is that, according to a state-run broadcaster, China’s national rail operator estimated that more than 55,000 people would leave Wuhan by train on Wednesday alone.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    According to cp24.com, “tickets for trains out of Wuhan to cities across China already were advertised on electronic billboards, with the first train leaving for Beijing at 6:25 a.m. A line designated for passengers headed to the capital already was roped off.”

    In preparation for the end of the lockdown, Party Secretary Wang Zhonglin, the city’s highest-ranking official, inspected the city’s airport and train stations Monday to ensure they were ready. The city must “enforce prevention while opening up, maintain safety and orderliness and the assurance of stability,” Wang said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In other words, the horses are fleeing the barn… and this time thousands of them could be carriers of the deadly coronavirus. What is scarier is that it is as if China wants to spread a new wave of infections around the globe.

    To be sure, the city authorities clarified that while people who are healthy will be able to leave and enter Wuhan after Wednesday, most residential restrictions will remain in place. “Our city’s epidemic prevention and control situation is still grim,” read a notice from the city government published late Friday. Among the threats it cited were asymptomatic cases and people who retested as positive after recovering.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, in this city of 11 million people, isolating and locking down potential carriers, especially if they are asymptomatic, is practically impossible. Consider that in Wuhan’s Meihuachi neighborhood, one local official said four to five asymptomatic cases had been found over the weekend across three residential complexes nearby, all of which were back under lockdown as a result.

    The question, of course, is how many other hundreds if not thousands of asymptomatic cases are there in Wuhan at this moment, and how many of them are about to jump in car, plane or train to unknown destination.

    That question can not be answered, and neither can the question of why China rushed to reopen the coronavirus ground zero without the proper precautions in place. To more accurately assess the number of asymptomatic cases in China, authorities would either need to do tests—ideally blood tests to screen for antibodies—on the whole population, which would be prohibitively expensive, or on large, carefully chosen samples. China has said it had started antibody sampling to better understand infection rates, but even if it is doing what it says it is, this is nothing more than a game of large numbers.

    Unfortunately, the numbers are certainly not in the world’s favor. Lin Xihong, a professor at the Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health, co-wrote a recent study that estimated Wuhan had a cumulative total of 125,959 cases by Feb. 18, and that at least 59% were “unascertained” on any given day, most likely because they had no symptoms or only mild ones.  Even crazier, China’s National Health Commission said 1,033 asymptomatic cases were being monitored as of Monday, but it still hasn’t provided figures or estimates for before April 1.

    Another uncertainty is the total number of people China has tested nationwide. Wuhan has said it has performed 777,000 tests—enough to cover 7% of the city’s population and more than five times the level in Lombardy, Italy’s worst affected area.

    But what about the remaining 93%?

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here epidemiologists rightfully worry that local officials may have deliberately scaled back testing to satisfy political demands to show they have the pandemic under control, and to shift blame for any rebound onto cases imported from abroad, which is ironic because all foreign cases can ultimately be traced back to a source in China… most likely one that at one point or another was located in the Wuhan Institute of Virology.

    In any event, now that potentially millions of infected, asymptomatic Wu Flu carriers are about to leave their containment zone and spread across China first, and then the world, a second wave is virtually assured. The extent of a second wave “will depend on what strategy will be implemented on detecting and isolating those cases without symptoms,” said Harvard professor Lin Xihong. “This is the million-dollar question.”

    If only it were only a million: so far the damage to the global economy and the fiscal and monetary stimulus unleashed because of one Chinese virus has been in the tens of trillions… a number which may soon double or triple, as only one carrier needs to escape Wuhan to start a second wave of infections. Add a mutation that renders any existing coronavirus antibodies obsolete and China’s decision to reopen ground zero would have catastrophic consequences for the world.

    And here is the punchline: as we said yesterday, the $64 trillion (roughly in line with global GDP) question is whether the coming “second reinfection wave” is going to be smaller or bigger, similar to the Spanish Flu pandemic. Why? Because deaths in the second wave of the Spanish Flu, which is closest to the Coronavirus pandemic in its progression dynamics, were 5x greater than those from the first.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which in turn leads to one final question: if the second wave of infections that China is about to unleash on the world results in millions of deaths, at what point will China’s action be viewed as an act of war?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over 80 bullet trains, at all three train stations in Wuhan, Hubei, stand ready to take passengers to unknown destinations on on Wednesday. Source: Tycho Zheng


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 22:21

  • Eyes Wide Open: Will The "Masters Of The Universe" Notice No One Takes Them Seriously Anymore?
    Eyes Wide Open: Will The “Masters Of The Universe” Notice No One Takes Them Seriously Anymore?

    Authored by Alastair Crooke via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    The intrusion of some wholly extraneous event – like a pandemic – into any given status quo doesn’t necessarily break it, in and of itself. But it exposes cruelly the shortcomings and workings of the existing status quo. It shows them, as not just stark naked, but also with its dark backstage of barely legal, dole-outs to business, and Wall Street friends, suddenly spotlighted.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fyodor Dostoevsky sets out in The Brothers Karamazov an allegory that can be applied to our times, but was set in Seville, in the most terrible time of the Inquisition, when fires were lighted every day to the glory of God (rather than today’s ‘glory to Mammon’), and in that splendid auto da fé, when wicked ‘heretics’ were burnt alive. It was published in 1880.

    Into this city an entirely extraneous (shall we say non-human) event occurs, that deeply unsettles society: Citizens are suddenly snatched-up from their humdrum daily slog to see the status quo afresh – but now with eyes wide open.

    The Grand Inquisitor of Seville is outraged. This extraneous occurrence risks spoiling his carefully contrived status quo:

    “Oh, we shall persuade them [the citizenry of Seville] that they will only become free when they renounce their freedom to us, and submit to us. And shall we be right, or shall we be lying? They will be convinced that we are right … Receiving bread from us, they will see clearly that we take the bread made by their hands from them – [only] to give it back to them … In truth they will be more thankful for taking it from our hands – than for the bread itself! Too well, will they know the value of complete submission! We shall show them that they are weak, that they are only pitiful children, but that childlike happiness is the sweetest of all.

    “We will indulge them their sins; allow them to occupy themselves with their vices. We will monitor everything, regulate everything, order and legislate for everything – and be their conscience too – so that they do not have to trouble themselves to think, overly; or, to be obliged to make decisions. They exist only to serve us, the élite who rule over them: The millions, numerous as the sands of the sea, who are weak, must exist only for the élite, who rule over them. In this mystery, says the Grand Inquisitor, “lies the great secret of the world”.

    Well, here we are: We have an extraneous event: Covid-19. It is different, of course. The Inquisitor literally burnt-out the threat (alive), to the existing order in Seville. Similarly, our ‘Elect’ of today, are equally agog to preserve the status quo. And for reasons very similar to those of the Inquisitor.

    Today’s élites face, however, a much more complex paradigm: We are speaking here more of the consequences of Covid-19 on collective human psychology, rather than about the efficacy of any actions taken, or not taken, by the Fed, or G7 Central Banks. The threat in Seville, fundamentally, was about psychological transformation: The Seville ‘event’ induced citizens to question meaning in their lives – and to doubt human agency (and élite ‘agency’, in particular). It didn’t end well in Russia – or for the Inquisitors, ultimately.

    The issue for governments – at bottom – is how to resurrect an economy that has been placed into hibernation. Western leaders are fearful that if it is not awakened – and quickly – there may be permanent damage to the infrastructure of the real economy – and consequently, a series of defaults leading to a possible financial crisis, or implosion (i.e. curtains for the status quo). So, we hear a lot now about the cure being worse than the disease, i.e. a locked-down economy can be more harmful than letting people die of Covid-19.

    But the paradox here is that élites have no agency. This is not the War on Terror. There is no one to blame (though the U.S. would like to pin Covid-19 on China): ‘We didn’t start it’. ‘Death’ came to us – an event from ‘the beyond’. Combatting it has been declared ‘a full war’ nonetheless. There is nothing tangible, no real enemy ‘to fight’ – just a shape-shifting virus, that virologists tell us is not ‘alive’, but represents organisms that lie at the very edge of life. Such entities cannot literally be ‘killed’.

    And how to fight this war? Where is the battle plan? There is none. There can be none (beyond mitigating the reach of death). Dr John Ioannidis, Professor of Medicine and Epidemiology at Stanford University, tells us that the modelling on which government plans for its ‘military’ campaign wholly depend is worthless:

    “The data collected so far on how many people are infected and how the epidemic is evolving are utterly unreliable. Given the limited testing to date, some deaths and probably the vast majority of infections due to SARS-CoV-2 (COVID-19) are being missed. We don’t know if we are failing to capture infections by a factor of three or 300. Three months after the outbreak emerged, most countries, including the U.S., lack the ability to test a large number of people and no countries have reliable data on the prevalence of the virus in a representative random sample of the general population …”.

    Mortality rates, too, are similarly all over the place: As researchers debate what’s causing Italy’s 10%+ mortality rate, one thing is indisputable: mortality rates are climbing. Virtually every nation that has a large number of reported cases has continued to see mortality rates climb. In Spain, the mortality rate now stands at 8.7%. Ten days ago, it stood at 5.4%. In the Netherlands, the mortality rate stands at 8.3%. Ten days ago, it stood at 3.8%. In the United Kingdom, the mortality rate stands at 7.1%. Ten days ago, it stood at 4.6%. In France, the mortality rate stands at 6.7. Ten days ago, it stood at 3.9%.

    Death, in other words, it seems, may be getting the upper hand in this ‘war’.

    And yet, behind the governmental fear for the financial and economic status quolies another ‘demon’: mass hysteria and revolt, by those who, now unemployed, haven’t the money to buy food. Again this – the psychology of a rioting mob – is a figment of collective psyche. It can’t literally by killed by soldiers. This psyche is already beginning in the south of Italy where people, who say they are hungry and have no money, are storming supermarkets, and looting food. (It is only food, for now, but soon, it will be raiding for money).

    Social disorder and riot is likely to spook governments even more than the deflating balloon of their economies. But isn’t this what the ‘War on Death’ paradigm is about? Police on the streets; the army patrolling; martial law; and the criminalisation of unauthorised movement: It is mounted in readiness for the prospect of popular revolt: against the fear that the Paris – mainly immigrant – banlieues, or the Italian Mezzogiorno, will explode.

    The Federation of Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies recently warned that a “social bomb could explode at any moment” over Western cities. That is because the evolution of the pandemic, which has crashed the American economy into a depression, could result in social unravelling in major metros, specifically in low-income areas.

    A governmental desperation – stemming from the risks of social and economic disintegration – is likely to push governments to gamble on either an early-ish lifting of social-distancing, or a partial lifting. But the same dilemma applies: governments will be doing this ‘blind’, or on the basis of empirically flawed modelling.

    And a gamble it is. The Signier Laboratory gives us this illustration of the possible maths behind ‘distancing’:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This, like most current models, is guess-work in terms of the underlying assumptions (such as a rate of infection of 2.5). But its’ message is clear. Going for partial opening or localised opening will invite some sort of Phase Two. China already is experiencing this – and has had to lockdown Jin Province, after it had just opened Hubei.

    Where then does the balance of advantage lie for desperate leaderships? Who knows? A phase II may arrive anyway; the virus might mutate (as happened in August 1918, with Spanish ‘flu), and become more (or less) lethal. What makes Covid-19 infection particularly difficult to manage or predict is that it drops infection from day ‘0’, yet the carrier will not experience any sense of having been infected (or being ill at all) until 5–8 days later. Yet all that time, he or she will be 100% infectious – and potentially spreading a new phase. (There is no general testing for antibodies).

    Governments likely will ease distancing anyway to alleviate the social and economic pressures. They will have their fingers crossed that Covid-19 does not return in a new phase to ‘thumb its nose’ – and make a nonsense of all these measures. It is a gamble – and these governments’ credibility will be on the line – whatever they choose. They are becalmed between Scylla and Charybdis: no good options.

    So, where does this take us? To a (not unexpected) schizophrenia. On the one hand, there are those – so in thrall (in the J B Yeats sense) to the status quo – that anything other than a rapid re-instatement of ‘normality is beyond their reach. Mental retort sealed shut. As one example:

    “One well known set of UK asset managers this morning [yesterday] are blithely predicting a V-Shaped recovery from the third quarter onwards …They think QE Infinity packages have “resolved” the debt bubble, the equity market is now realistically priced for a global recovery, governments have mitigated the damage, and we will see a massive jump in sentiment, activity and repressed demand when the lockdowns end, and economies reopen – with a leap of unfettered joy”.

    This line of thinking holds that what is happening in the U.S. and Europe is not a real recession. The economic fundamentals were great. We shut down the economy only because of Covid-19. So, if we were just to start it back up again – everything will be fine.

    But, just as heavy doses of refined sugar may impact the human brain in a manner similar to addictive drugs by releasing dopamine, the brain’s “reward” chemical. So too, since 2008/9, we have what Dan Amoss calls, a ‘sugar-rush economy’.

    So, the prescription inevitably – to maintain the status quo – is more sugar, more spending and more money printing. And if the effect starts to wane, the reaction is to ‘double the dose’. It is all wishful thinking. It’s a part of the delusion. The economy wasn’t fine. Since 2008, the Fed has fed a sugar-rush economy. It’s a bubble. That’s the problem. And the bubble may have been fatally pricked.

    What happens, when finally, we are released from lockdown: We will walk out – still blinking – into the daylight, but it will be a very different world. We will see that human agency – i.e. our governments – were wholly unable to have wrung a scintilla of victory from this war. Recriminations will multiply. If death has retreated – finally it will be because nature, and biology, willed it. There is, of course, human agency – but there are other forces at work in this Cosmos of ours, that can make human Promethean hubris appear pathetic.

    It was just such insight that so unsettled Seville, in Dostoevsky’s allegory. The extraneous ‘intrusion’ into their city jerked into consciousness half-forgotten memories of what it is to be fully human, and recalled a different mode of human potential. Intimations of mortality, often do that trick (too), of course.

    What follows will be a more hesitant, cautious world. Shocked economically, and at our root we will, I suspect, be much more careful in the future: credit cards will be cut in two; we will try to save more, and we will adapt ‘downwards’. Will we go out and spend liberally? A pent-up ‘jump in sentiment’? No. The experience for all has been chastening. Who now sees the future with any certainty? Every aspect of life is going to be changed. Some of the smaller businesses will open, but many will remain shut. Many of us will continue to work from home. Many of us won’t work at all – and may never work again.

    But what seems to be searing the public consciousness is of a different mode: Empathy during the pandemic – there was none. (Recall the comments how Covid-19 striking down Hubei would be good for America). Solidarity – there was none (at least from the EU, to be sure); Leadership – there was none, yet semi-legal corruption – abundant. Trump has taken charge of the U.S. Treasury, which in turn, now fully controls the dollar printing presses of the Fed. Trump is King Dollar. He can print whatever he likes. Give it to whomsoever he wants (via the Treasury’s secretive Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs)), outsourced to Blackrock Fund. The U.S. Budget now is toast.

    As one banker noted:

    “Would you want to be a Democratic candidate running against [a Trump] spending USD2 trillion on infrastructure in a weak economy? Good luck with that!”

    Eyes wide open: Where is our moral compass – as well as our common humanity?

    The mask is off: Is this the point of inflection for the global order, when the western hyper-financialised system is unable to reform itself, refuses to reform itself – and yet is unable to sustain itself, as it once was?

    Will the system – so busily engaged in looking after itself – even notice that the world doesn’t believe in it anymore, not even one jot?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 22:20

  • "Sickest Part Of A Sick America": The Region Where Health Officials Fear The Worst COVID-19 Devastation
    “Sickest Part Of A Sick America”: The Region Where Health Officials Fear The Worst COVID-19 Devastation

    After New Orleans last month emerged as the United States’ new southern epicenter for the coronavirus pandemic, threatening other states across the region, a review in Bloomberg Law of how the South as already “the sickest part of America” could be hit hardest before the crisis eventually wanes paints a very bleak picture.

    Home to the highest rates of obesity, hypertension, heart attacks, and strokes, combined with expansive rural and impoverished areas that have poor health care access, the South is especially vulnerable for a “virus that is particularly lethal for people with underlying health conditions,” according to the report. 

    “Covid-19 is going to be a disaster in the Southeast,” Aaron Milstone, a Tennessee pulmonologist, told Bloomberg Law. “We’ll see higher morbidity, which is getting sick from the virus, and higher mortality, which is dying from the virus.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rural South file image via Medium.com

    Further, the report reads, “Four of the five states with the highest diabetes rates are in the South. And eight didn’t expand Medicaid under the Affordable Care Act, leaving thousands of families without access to routine care, even as financially troubled rural hospitals wither away.”

    These are factors that might help explain the recent surprise explosion of cases in Louisiana, in addition of course to the fact that Mardis Gras – which ran in total from January 6 to Fat Tuesday on February 25 – witnessed one million plus tourists and revelers from outside states and countries descend on the Big Easy. Concerning Louisiana, Bloomberg Law observes further:

    That prediction is already playing out in Louisiana, which saw Covid-19 infections and deaths soar in New Orleans after weeks of Carnival celebrations ended last month. Of the 239 Covid-19 fatalities there, 40% had diabetes, 25% were obese and 21% had heart problems, according to state figures.

    The Bayou State saw another jump in coronavirus numbers Monday: more than 1,800 cases in a single day, to a total of 16,284 confirmed cases. Over 4,000 of these are in New Orleans.

    “We, in general, have a sicker population, and we are concerned that our outcomes in the Covid-19 pandemic are going to be worse because of that,” Joseph Kanter, an assistant state health officer, described.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Map and data via The Guardian/Johns Hopkins CSSE

    Describing further of what the report dubs “the sickest part of the country,” it profiles the greater general vulnerability further:

    Those conditions run rampant in the South, according to the nonprofit United Health Foundation. For example, Mississippians are 85% more likely to die of cardiovascular disease than Minnesotans, and 41.9% of Arkansans have high blood pressure, compared with 24.5% in Utah, according to the organization’s America’s Health Rankings report. The region also has a large African-American population, which is disproportionately prone to the underlying conditions.

    The authors conclude the southern governors should have acted much faster to declare blanket ‘stay at home’ emergency orders state-wide, which some like Florida were very slow to do, and still with some hold-outs.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 22:00

  • 270 Federal Inmates Infected With COVID-19 As US Prison Bureau Buys Massive Stockpile Of Trump's Favorite Drug: Live Updates
    270 Federal Inmates Infected With COVID-19 As US Prison Bureau Buys Massive Stockpile Of Trump’s Favorite Drug: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Russia reports another concerning jump in cases
    • Downing Street offers update on Johnson’s condition
    • Abe kicks off Japan’s 1-month state of emergency
    • Spain reports jump in deaths following drop over the weekend
    • Wuhan lifts lockdown
    • US death toll tops 11k
    • Italy reports another deceleration in cases + deaths
    • Spanish deaths tick higher
    • NRA lays off 60 employees
    • UK reports deadliest day yet
    • BOP outbreak climbs to nearly 300 inmates infected
    • New York State reports biggest one-day jump in deaths with 731
    • Spain reports nearly 900 deaths
    • Germany reports another jump in deaths
    • France reports massive jump in deaths breaking above 10k; case total breaks above 100k
    • Global deaths pass 80k while recoveries pass 300k
    • Portugal reports, India reports
    • New Jersey also reports highest fatality numbers
    • The NRA lays off 60 employees
    • Italy reports lowest jump in cases in a month
    • ICU admissions, intubations down significantly in New York
    • US cases accelerate faster than Europe’s
    • US to try and block Iran’s IMF loan request
    • Turkey delivers COVID-19 update
    • Wuhan residents crowd train platforms as they’re finally allowed to leave after 10+ weeks
    • De Blasio says ventilator shortage is easing
    • Israel imposes Passover lockdown, Irish asked not to visit holiday homes for Easter
    • 55k expected to leave Wuhan by Wednesday evening (local time)
    • 12 NYPD officers have died of COVID-19
    • Trump admin officials jawbone market higher
    • Peterson poll shows 73% say COVID-19 has hit them in the pocketbook
    • India closes hospitals after cases confirmed
    • China reports no daily deaths for first time
    • German health ministry unveils app to help track COVID-19 patients
    • France prepares to ban jogging as lockdown tightens

    *    *    *

    Update (1930ET): The US is reportedly planning to intervene and block Iran’s request for a $5 billion IMF bailout. This, as Europe has started supplying Iran with aid via a vehicle it designed to try and keep the JCPOA intact by circumventing the US’s reach.

    *    *    *

    Update (1905ET): The US Bureau of Prisons reports that 241 federal inmates and 72 employees have tested positive for coronavirus. 34 prisons and 6 BOP halfway houses have been impacted so far.

    According to the Wayback machine’s archive of the BOP’s COVID-19 page, here’s the trajectory of the outbreak(s) so far:

    • 3/29: 19 inmates/19 staff
    • 4/2: 75 inmates/39 staff
    • 4/5: 138 inmates/59 staff
    • 4/6: 196 inmates/63 staff
    • 4/7: 241 inmates/72 staff

    And a map of the facilities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Louisiana’s FCC Oakdale, the facility where the first outbreak was discovered, and where the most prisoners have tested positive, has 38 inmates who’ve tested positive so far.

    The ACLU has been filing lawsuits and injunctions to try and get more ‘nonviolent’ offenders at these facilities freed to save them from being exposed to the virus. In the suit, filed yesterday, the organization filed a lawsuit against Oakdale arguing that AG Barr’s decision to free some prisoners didn’t go far enough, because of the prison’s horrendous conditions.

    Meanwhile, earlier, we learned that the BOP recently purchased a sizable stockpile of President Trump’s favorite drug for the treatment of COVID-19: Hydroxychloroquine.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Apparently, the administration is trying to avoid repeats of what happened in NYC after Mayor de Blasio released hundreds of nonviolent offenders.

    *    *    *

    Update (1850ET): Gun sales are way, way, way up across the US, but apparently, business is not booming at America’s favorite lobbying organization, the NRA (remember the NRA’s not officially a lobbying organization and doesn’t describe itself that way).

    The layoffs stem from the fact that the NRA was forced to cancel its annual meeting, an event that typically nets it millions of dollars, Politico reports.

    *    *    *

    Update (1835ET): Germany just reported 4,312 new cases of coronavirus, and 210 new deaths, bringing its total to 107,663 cases, and 2,016 deaths. The 210 number is unusually high for Germany, which has consistently boasted one of the lowest mortality rates in Europe, even as deaths have crept upward in recent days.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s just another figure that makes one question the ‘good news’ narrative forming around Europe: Apparently, the market has it’s doubts, too.

    *    *    *

    Update (1800ET): Spain just reported its latest numbers: 6,910 new cases and 876 deaths, for a total of 141,942 and a death toll of 14,045. That’s roughly consistent with the recent “plateau”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, President Trump kept up the optimistic jawboning during his press conference by claiming that the US death toll might be smaller than expected.

    *    *    *

    Update (1750ET): Trump & Co. are delivering Tuesday evening’s press conference. Meanwhile, on the other side of the world, thousands of residents of Wuhan are waking up and getting ready for what might be a dash to the train station as a state rail operator said it expects 55k people to leave Wuhan by end of day Wednesday.

    *    *    *

    Update (1650ET): We have new numbers out of Portugal, India

    Portugal reported 712 new cases, and 34 new deaths, bringing its totals to 12,442 cases and 345 deaths. India reports 573 new cases of coronavirus and 26 new deaths, bringing the countrywide total to 5,351 cases and 160 deaths, minuscule numbers that help feed speculation that the Indian government is covering up the true extent of the outbreak. On Tuesday, the number of cases in Mumbai, home to some densely populated slums, saw a notable jump

    While the global death toll topped 80k on Tuesday, the number of recovered coronavirus patients also reached a new milestone: 300k worldwide.

    *    *    *

    Update (1521ET): Spain just followed up some more encouraging data out of Italy with another disappointment. Spain’s pace of coronavirus deaths ticked up for the first time in five days on Tuesday, with 743 people succumbing overnight, but there was still hope the national lockdown might be eased soon.

    Tuesday’s toll from the health ministry compared to 637 deaths registered during the previous 24 hours, taking the total to 13,798, the second highest in the world after Italy. Still, the proportional daily increase of 5.7% was about half that reported a week ago.

    The government dismissed the jump as a normal “oscillation”, and blamed it on some delayed notifications from over the weekend.

    “It is normal to have some oscillations…What matters is to see the trend and the cumulative data,” Maria Jose Sierra, deputy chief of health emergencies, told Reuters.

    *    *    *

    Update (1500ET): Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin tweeted that he’s working with Nancy Pelosi to try and add another $250 billion to the ‘Paycheck Protection Program’ capital after Bank of America received applications asking for roughly one-tenth of the total amount allotted for all the banks in just a few days.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Congress is also working to prepare a 4th coronavirus bill, which would essentially be the second installment of its massive bailouts for workers, SMEs and select industries.

    *     *      *

    Update (1450ET): As the spring holidays near, millions around the world getting used to the idea of spending it alone, or with immediate family only. Benjamin Netanyahu has imposed a nationwide curfew and lockdown for the Passover holiday, one of the most important holidays of the year, and over in Ireland, Prime Minister Leo Varadkar urged citizens not to visit holiday homes or caravan parks in the coming Easter holiday weekend.

    *    *    *

    Update (1430ET): NJ just followed New York by reporting its largest single-day jump in deaths yet. The state reported more than 200 deaths on Tuesday.

    “We’re in the fight of our lives,” Governor Phil Murphy said at a press briefing.

    The state reported 229 new deaths, bringing the state total to 1,232 deaths and reported 3,326 new cases, bringing the total to 44,416.

    France, meanwhile, has definitively joined the UK in bucking the broader trend in Western Europe by reporting some more alarming data, including its largest one-day jump in deaths. The country reported 1,417 new deaths, bringing the total to 10,328. France reported another 11,059 new cases, bringing its total to 109,069, breaking above 100k, becoming only the third country in Europe with more than 100k cases. The country’s death toll also broke above 10k, a feat that has also only been accomplished by Italy, Spain and the US. Iran is on the cusp of 10k according to its official figures, but most suspect that both Iran and China have seen thousands of deaths that have gone unreported.

    Italy, meanwhile, reported 3,039 new cases and 604 deaths, bringing its totals to 135,586 cases, and 17,127 deaths. It was the largest batch of cases in a month.

    *    *    *

    Update (1245ET): After more than 10 weeks trapped inside their homes, and then trapped inside their city, residents of Wuhan were finally allowed to leave the city on Tuesday. NYT reported that train platforms in the city were packed beyond capacity as residents scrambled to leave.

    Meanwhile, Turkey reported 3,892 new cases, bringing total to 34,109, while its death toll rises to 725 with 76 new fatalities.

    *    *    *

    Update (1210ET): Both the pace of deaths and new cases continued to slow in Italy on Tuesday as the Civil Protection Service reported 604 new deaths, a 3.7% increase, compared to yesterday’s 4% jump. Italy’s death toll is now at 17,127.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Across the country, officials reported just 3,039 new cases, bringing Italy’s total to 135,586.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *    *    *

    Update (1130ET): For the third day in a row, the UK has emerged as a disappointing standout among the European countries with the highest confirmed case totals by reporting another jump in deaths, along with a jump in new cases.

    The UK reported 786 deaths, its deadliest day yet, bringing its death toll to 6,236; the UK has confirmed more than 51K cases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The pace of new cases declined, driving the UK’s mortality rate to 12.1%, a new record. The Health Ministry also reported a drop in testing.

    *    *    *

    Update (1100ET): New York State just reported its biggest one-day jump in COVID-19 deaths, and a modest decline in new cases, quashing the optimistic narrative that President Trump has been pushing. The state also reported more than 8k new cases, bringing its total to 138,836.

    For the second day in a row, Gov. Cuomo said the data appear to show that the state has reached a “plateau”. On Tuesday, New York State reported  731 deaths, bringing its total to 5,489.

    The dynamic – jump in deaths but drop deceleration in new cases – caused the state’s mortality rate to inch higher to ~4%.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hospitalizations have continued to climb, with another big jump on Tuesday…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …but the good news is that ICU admissions and intubations have fallen significantly over the past few days, suggesting that the state won’t need those additional ventilators after all.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    A roundup:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    New York’s ‘peak’ – the point at which the number of daily deaths and reported cases hits its highest level – is supposed to arrive this week.

    And FYI:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *    *    *

    Update (1015ET): During a live press briefing unveiling a program to allow NYC school students and their families to access free food, NYC Mayor Bill de Blasio acknowledged that the city’s shortage of ventilators has eased somewhat in recent days.

    Watch the rest here:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, earlier, deaths n the US topped 11K (11,008 exactly)./

    *    *    *

    Update (1000ET): A recent survey carried out on behalf of the FT and Peter G Peterson Foundation found that 73% of Americans said they’ve lost money as a result of the pandemic.

    Of those, 24% said their household income had fallen “very significantly”.

    While the NYT, WaPo and the Guardian have been harping relentlessly on how the outbreak is overwhelmingly harming America’s most vulnerable, including the poor and minorities, the survey found that higher-earning workers were about as likely to be impacted as workers with relatively low salaries.

    In a sign of how widespread the pandemic’s economic impact has become, almost as many families making more than $100,000 a year reported a hit to their income (71 per cent), as those making less than $50,000 (74 per cent).

    While data has shown that poorer New Yorkers were significantly more likely to be ‘essential’ workers, and more likely to get sick, that dynamic isn’t as prevalent outside New York City, and other massively unequal coastal urban strongholds, and the American middle class and even wealthy Americans have been impacted, sometimes badly, placing them on the cusp of losing homes or other disasters. Remember, a record 10 million Americans filed for unemployment  during the last two weeks of March.

    *    *    *

    Update (0900ET): As senior Trump Administration officials fan out across the major market-news channels to try and keep the market’s fire burning with some well-timed and appropriately un-subtle jawboning, both Treasury Secretary Steven Mnuchin and Larry Kudlow have insisted that President Trump is looking to re-open the US economy “as quickly as possible” – though not before health officials have had their say.

    Kudlow took things a step further by dismissing worries about another drop to new lows by saying the Fed is sitting pretty with “the ultimate bazooka”, alluding to their ability to buy stocks, something we have long warned about, warnings which have occasionally been dismissed as “conspiracy theories.”

    Of course, speculating about CBs buying equities is anything but a ‘conspiracy’, as the BoJ has shown us. And now, some very credible people are talking about the Fed buying stocks after the central bank already took the unprecedented step of buying corporate debt.

    *    *    *

    Update (0845ET): As Austria and Germany edge toward the beginning of the process of reopening their economies, Beijing has offered its 2 cents on their decision via the editor-in-chief of the Global Times, one of their most visible English-language mouthpieces.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hu Xijin also has some ‘thoughts’ on Trump slamming China for allegedly blocking shipments of PPE and other medical supplies, drugs and products.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *    *    *

    Just as we suspected as we watched futures surge out of the gate on Sunday evening, the drop in New York’s reported deaths that filled investors (not to mentioned President Trump) with hope that a week which Surgeon General Jerry Adams had said would be like ‘Pearl Harbor, but across the entire country’ might not be all that devastating.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Unfortunately, those numbers now appear to have simply a blimp, based on a quirk in data collection and presentation, as one medical researcher pointed out yesterday.

    Even after New York reported a promising three-day streak of declines in hospitalizations and intubations related to COVID019, across the US, the outbreak worsened on Monday as more cases were reported in the US than all of Europe. Overall, there were 73,135 cases of COVID-19 confirmed, bringing the global total to roughly 1.35 million as of Tuesday morning. Deaths rose slightly as well on Monday, as 5,227 people lost their lives around the world, bringing the ‘official’ death toll to 74,799. After Sunday’s drop in new cases, the US once again reported more than 30,000 new cases on Monday, with New York State being the hardest hit, adding nearly 9,000 cases and 600 fatalities. 10 other states reported a daily jump of more than 1k cases. While Europe is finally seeing signs that its lockdowns are working, for the US, with roughly a dozen states still with no mandatory stay at home order in place, it’s still too early, according to the FT.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That said, some European states are doing better than others. Spain, which reported a drop in deaths over the weekend, saw them bounce back early Tuesday, reporting 743 deaths for Monday, bringing its total to nearly 14k.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After Germany leaked plans that call for the economy to start reopening later this month, and Austria announced that some shops could reopen as early as next week, the French government is apparently preparing to ban outdoor jogging.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    While US testing has improved remarkably since the failings of early last month, former FDA head Scott Gottlieb, a prominent public expert who has been widely quoted in the press since the outbreak began, warned on Tuesday that Texas and Georgia are still notably under-testing, which needs to be corrected.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As New York struggles, CNN reported that 12 NYPD officers have died from COVID-19, roughly half the number of NYPD officers who died on 9/11.

    Crossing another major milestone off its list, China’s NHC reported a drop in new cases Tuesday morning to 32 from 39 the day before (all of which were travel-related, it said), along with zero new deaths for the first time since Beijing began releasing daily updates in late January. Total case and death toll reported for China have risen to 81,740 and 3,331, respectively, as of April 6.

    Also notable: The first day of zero deaths just happened to coincide with the lifting of Wuhan’s lockdown, which happened on Tuesday, meaning that millions of Wuhan residents are finally free after months under quarantine.

    A BBC correspondent working on the Mainland pointed out that while this milestone is being widely reported in the European press, in China, the state-backed media seem to not be playing it up. Is that because there’s an implicit understanding at this point that the public knows Beijing is lying about the daily numbers, and really doesn’t care? Who knows, but at this point, the total case and death totals reported out of China don’t really matter any more. And the fact remains that, even as Beijing embraces targeted lockdowns in some areas, the overall trend shows China is mostly in the clear – even as the virus will likely persist on some level.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Take from that what you will.

    The government in New Delhi has embraced an increasingly paranoid approach to the outbreak in recent weeks, prompting PM Modi to declare a three-week lockdown that gave India’s 1.3 billion residents with just hours to prepare, leaving many of the country’s poor in the lurch. But as they struggle to prevent outbreaks in some of the country’s most densely packed slums, BBC reports that three hospitals in two of India’s largest cities – the capital, Delhi, and Mumbai – have been shut after staff tested positive. No one is allowed to enter or leave, and staff will only be allowed to return home once they’ve tested negative. In Wockhardt Hospital in Mumbai, more than 50 staff members have tested positive. And in Jaslok Hospital, a well-known private hospital in the city, more than 10 nurses tested positive on Monday.

    Further north, more worrying news emerged out of Moscow Tuesday morning, as Russia’s COVID-19 task force reported 1,154 new coronavirus cases, the largest daily jump yet and the first time the Russian daily total has topped 1k, while another 11 deaths brought the country’s total to 58. Russia’s total of 7,497 cases of Covid-19 is fewer than other major European countries, but the virus has continued to steadily accelerate even after the Kremlin extended Russia’s country-wide “holiday” (a strict lockdown) until the end of April.

    From Beijing, to Singapore, to Silicon Valley, the coronavirus has given governments an excuse to test out new surveillance tactics in the name of ‘contact tracing’ and outbreak suppression. Now, Germany is getting in on the action by promoting a health tracking app released by Germany’s federal health agency that can alert health officials to possible signs of COVID-19.

    Per the FT:

    Germany’s federal health agency has unveiled a coronavirus-tracking app that links to fitness bands and smartwatches, which it says will help map the spread of Covid-19 by monitoring anonymised data for tell-tale signs of infection. The app asks for permission to access users’ approximate location, and data including resting pulse, sleep and activity levels, which tend to change significantly in the case of acute respiratory diseases. The Robert Koch Institute developed the app in conjunction with Thryve, a Berlin start-up. “If the number of symptomatic patients can be recorded in a sufficiently large sample, this could help us to draw conclusions earlier on the occurrence of infection, distribution and also the effectiveness of the measures taken,” said Professor Lothar Wieler, president of the Robert Koch Institute.

    Since the early weeks of the epidemic, the general peer-reviewed medical journal “The Lancet” has become widely known outside of the usual medical circles as a source of the latest research on the novel coronavirus. A study published this week in the magazine found that school closures have a limited impact on the spread of coronavirus and should be more rigorously weighed against their serious economic impact, according to a study by researchers at University College London. Data from 16 studies on the Sars outbreak and other coronaviruses in mainland China, Hong Kong and Singapore suggest that school closures did not contribute to the control of the epidemic, concluded the researchers in a paper published in The Lancet on Tuesday.

    The Iranian military – which is a wholly separate entity from the IRGC – has cancelled a military parade that had been scheduled for later this month, saying it will instead push the soldiers to help with the outbreak.

    Also: After announcing plans to declare a month-long ‘state of emergency’ in 7 provinces (including Tokyo), Japanese PM Abe did just that when he officially announced the plan on Tuesday morning, a move that had been widely telegraphed in advance. Though Japan’s constitution doesn’t allow the government to hand out punishments for violators, it has asked non-essential businesses and schools to close, while ‘essential’ businesses like banks and grocers to remain open. His government has also announced plans for a stimulus package worth nearly $1 trillion.

    Finally, last night, Downing Street shocked the world when it announced that UK PM Boris Johnson had been moved to the ICU “as a precaution” after experiencing some heightened difficulty breathing. After doctors started to speculate that he would very likely be placed on a ventilator, the government decided to re-examine its decision not to provide complete transparency to the press, and instead leaked a report to the London Times offering more details about Johnson’s condition with one critical admission: Doctor’s said Johnson wasn’t in bad enough shape to warrant being admitted to the ICU under normal circumstances, but given the novelty of the virus, and Johnson’s importance, he was moved as a precaution.

    Meanwhile, ministers are demanding to know more about the government’s contingency planning as for who will be responsible for critical national security duties, including the handling of the UK’s nuclear deterrent. So far, Dominic Raab, Johnson’s foreign secretary, has been deputized to step up if Johnson becomes incapacitated.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 21:55

  • Max Keiser: Selling Bitcoin Now For "Fiat Debt-Coupons" Is A Crime
    Max Keiser: Selling Bitcoin Now For “Fiat Debt-Coupons” Is A Crime

    Authored by William Suberg via CoinTelegraph.com,

    Bitcoin will be the only exit from the “global reset” of finance which will allow central banks to even destroy the banking system itself.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    image courtesy of CoinTelegraph

    That was just one conclusion from Simon Dixon, CEO of cryptocurrency funding platform BnkToTheFuture, in the latest episode of financial news program the Keiser Report on April 7. 

    Dixon: “World’s largest regulated Ponzi scheme” is dying

    Discussing the global coronavirus epidemic and its impact on global finance, Dixon warned that the health aspect of the crisis was by no means its worst.

    “I don’t want to be dramatic, but this is a global reset in the financial system,” he told host Max Keiser.

    Coming after, he said, was a massive “scrambling” for power by governments and central banks. Taxpayers and those forced to rely on fiat money will pay the price.

    Dixon continued:

    “I think we’re going to see a real attack from central banks on traditional banks as we inevitably experience the ginormous consequences of essentially the world’s largest regulated Ponzi scheme.”

    After coronavirus: “A horrible, worse version of fiat currency”

    The theory argues that central lending institutions will allow banks to die and instead allow citizens to open digital currency accounts directly with them. 

    As a result, control of money, and hence people who are forced to use it, will become so easy that the world will enter what Keiser describes as “neo-feudalism.” 

    The birth of this dire state of affairs will be helped by coronavirus — banning cash because of concerns over infection is one such example.

    “You’re going to end up with a very, very horrible, worse version of fiat currency to the one we have now, created by banks as debt,” Dixon continued.

    As Cointelegraph reported, Keiser as well is no stranger to warning consumers about the unavoidable collapse of fiat hegemony.

    “I have a moral responsibility to keep my 2011 #BTC HODL’ed,” he tweeted over the weekend. 

    “To legitimize any fiat debt-coupons in any way now… When we are on the edge of victory, would be a crime against humanity.”

    Last week, Keiser likened gold to “toilet paper for the rich” as the industry underwent a severe liquidity squeeze. Bitcoin, he and many others contend, is the “hardest” money that has ever existed.

    Cointelegraph has additionally touched on the characteristics which serve to make Bitcoin a much safer long-term investment than gold.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 21:40

  • Michael 'Big Short' Burry Blasts "Unjustifiable" Lockdowns As "Most Devastating Economic Force In History"
    Michael ‘Big Short’ Burry Blasts “Unjustifiable” Lockdowns As “Most Devastating Economic Force In History”

    Infamous for his painful but ultimately profitable “big short” bet against mortgage-backed securities during the 2008 financial crisis, Michael Burry, the doctor-turned-hedge-fund-manager has been on a multi-day Twitter rant claiming that the lockdowns intended to contain the COVID-19 pandemic are worse than the disease itself.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Echoing the thoughts of many, Burry opined in a series of tweets over the past two weeks that the government-enforced lockdowns and business shutdowns across America may trigger one of the country’s deepest-ever economic contractions, and further still, are not necessary to contain the epidemic (on March 22nd).

    COVID-19 policy cannot be settled by CYA politicians career ID docs. Too much hammer/nail and too little common sense. 

    POTUS must reflect the interests of the working class and small business here – the economy cannot crash 30% to save the 0.2%.

    Set America Free!

    If COVID-19 testing were universal, the fatality rate would be less than 0.2%.

    This is no justication for sweeping government policies, lacking any and all nuance, that destroy the lives, jobs, and businesses of the other 99.8%.

    Furthermore, Burry – who earned his M.D. at the Vanderbilt University School of Medicine – has also dared to say that some controversial treatments for COVID-19, such as the malaria drug hydroxycloroquine, should be made more widely available (on March 24).

    Prudent plan:

    1) Standardize on chloroquine and azithromycin -cheap and available

    2) Sick and elderly voluntarily shelter in place. 

    3) Americans lead their normal lives with extra hand washing and special care if around elderly.

    Saving the economy means life, not murder.

    Additionally, in an email to Bloomberg News, Burry wrote that universal stay-at-home is the most devastating economic force in modern history… And it is man-made. It very suddenly reverses the gains of underprivileged groups, kills and creates drug addicts, beats and terrorizes women and children in violent now-jobless households, and more. It bleeds deep anguish and suicide.

    Additionally, as Bloomberg’s Reed Stevenson reports, Burry responded to questions via email to offer more thoughts on the pandemic and the response to the outbreak…

    How the Pandemic Happened

    This is a new form of coronavirus that emanated from a country, China, that unfortunately covered it up. That was the original sin. It transmits very easily, and within the first month it was likely all over the world. Very poor testing infrastructure created an information vacuum as cases ramped, ventilator shortages were projected. Politicians panicked and media filled the space with their own ignorance and greed. It was a toxic mix that led to the shutdown of the U.S., and hence much of the world economy.”

    “In hindsight, each country should have immediately ramped up rapid field testing of at-risk groups. But as I understand it, the CDC was tasked with some of this, and botched it, and other departments were no better. The bureaucracy failed in a good number of countries. Turf wars and incompetence has ruled the day. So the political cover for that failure on the part of the technocrats and politicians is a very harsh stay-at-home policy.”

    The U.S. Policy Response

    “If there was ever a time for the government to stimulate with fiscal and monetary policy, it is now. Unfortunately, the U.S. has been adding $3 for every $1 of new GDP over a very long time, and interest rates were already near zero. Still, nothing is more important now that loans to small and mid-sized businesses, and the U.S. Treasury, backed by the Fed, is providing that liquidity, which is vital.”

    Potential Treatments

    It’s pretty clear that hydrochloroquine is doing something good for many Covid-19 patients. The standard in medicine is a placebo-controlled double-blind study. But there is no time for that. The technocrats at the top are getting this wrong. Do the studies, make the vaccines, but allow doctors to have what they feel is working now. Don’t take tools or drugs out of the treating doctors’ hands. Trump should use the Defense Production Act more liberally in this area.

    “A more nuanced approach would be for at risk groups — the obese, old and already-sick — to shelter in place, to execute widespread mandatory testing, and to ID and track as necessary while allowing society to function. Again, Trump should get the massive contract manufacturers like Flextronics to make testing machines.”

    Getting Back to Normal

    “I would lift stay-at-home orders except for known risk groups. We already know certain conditions that are predictive of severe disease. Especially since young healthy lungs tend to be resistant, I would let the virus circulate in the population that is not likely to get severe disease from it. This is the only path that comes close to balancing the needs of all groups. Vaccines are not coming anytime soon, so natural immunity is the only way out for now. Every day, every week in the current situation is ruining innumerable lives in a criminally unjust manner.”

    “When it comes to vaccines, coronaviruses are not known for imparting enduring immunity, and this will be one big challenge. It seems the genetic code is relatively conserved, and this will help the development of the vaccine. But we’re still looking at the end of the year. In the meantime, the world is an innovative place, and I expect many effective treatments — both new and repurposed — shortly. The question then will be regulation, expense and availability.”

    “Medically, the new normal will be the old normal. As long as innovation continues, medicine will conquer everything in our way.”

    Japan’s Response

    “I believe Prime Minister Shinzo Abe is trying his best to manage through the situation without shuttering the economy. He sees what it has done to the U.S., and would rather not force a shut in, but instead asks for common sense. Japan has certain features — such as a largely lawful and well-educated society — that make this more possible. As do Taiwan, Singapore, Korea.”

    Business Recovery

    Economically speaking, we have to realize the policy-driven demand shock will be resolved by 2021. But Japan and the U.S. are putting more than 20% of the GDP into new fiscal stimulus, and easy money will be the rule. Those things will all bring stock and debt markets back.”

    Countries will also look to bring supply chains home, and many employees will need retraining with higher cost. When we start working and playing again, inflation may be in store. The other big point is that consumers have learned new behaviors, which will drive business churn.”

    Finally, on the investment side, Burry told Bloomberg News last month that he placed a “significant bearish market bet that is working out for now,” without providing details except to say it was a trade of a “good size” against indexes. He said the pandemic could unwind the passive investment boom, which he has compared to purchases of collateralized debt obligations that fueled the pre-2008 mortgage bubble.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 21:22

  • Yale Students Demand Automatic 'Pass' Due To COVID-19
    Yale Students Demand Automatic ‘Pass’ Due To COVID-19

    Students at Yale are demanding a “universal pass” this semester due to coronavirus, after the college switched to virtual classes. This means no grades, deadlines or benchmarks for the Ivy League students, according to Yale grad Esteban Elizondo in a New York Post Op-Ed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As representatives of one of America’s most important institutions, I assumed Yale students would rise to the occasion and lead their communities during a crisis. Instead, they see an international health disaster as an opportunity to nullify the one meritocratic standard the college has left: grades.

    Their call for a Universal Pass betrays a mindset spreading among too many Yale students: “I should be shielded from every crisis.

    Any trouble in the world is apparently too great an emotional load for my peers to bear. Parkland shooting? Time to walk out of class. Climate change? Let’s have a school-wide “strike.” Coronavirus? Just cancel grades. That’s the only solution.New York Post

    According to Elizondo, Yale – “led by mollycoddler-in-chief Peter Salovey” – is feeding a defeatist mentality which trains students to expect that the university will drop academic standards at the drop of a hat. After President Trump was elected, for example, professors bent the knee when students demanded midterms be canceled due to their mental health.

    Instead of a “universal pass,” Yale administration has offered students the option of a “Pass/Fail” grading system – but the students, including the Yale College Council Senate, are still demanding that every student be given a the no-questions-asked, no-effort-required universal pass where everyone gets a “P.”

    Harvard, meanwhile, has adopted an Emergency Satisfactory/Emergency Unsatisfactory (SEM/UEM) grading system for spring semester.

    Universal Pass, unsurprisingly, has been framed as a fight for low-income students. Infantilizing the disadvantaged is a typical activist behavior at Yale. Whether protestors are “striking” because of climate change’s effect on indigenous communities or pushing for the nullification of grades because a slipping economy will harm low-income students, the demands of elite Yalies always conveniently line up with those of the underprivileged.

    But, in reality, this latest crusade is just an excuse to do less work and abolish academic standards altogether. In my four years at Yale, I was consistently shocked by the creative excuses used by my peers to skip classes and exams. It’s quite brilliant, really — get out of class and virtue signal by arguing it’s a way to “advocate” for low-income students. I wish I had that type of ingenuity in second grade. You can only fake a stomachache so many times. –New York Post

    Elizondo argues that the Universal Pass actually hurts disadvantaged students by “ending their ability to distinguish themselves based on merit,” while helping rich kids with connections pursue postgraduate opportunities, as prestigious employers and top-tier grad schools are more likely to overlook a ‘passing’ grade during a difficult time.

    The author concludes by suggesting that the real motives for easing standards have nothing to do with coronavirus at all.

    “What students really want is to jettison grading permanently so they don’t have to work so hard. It’s nothing but laziness and virtue signaling disguised as activism.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 21:20

  • US Confirms Deployment Of Patriot Missiles In Iraq
    US Confirms Deployment Of Patriot Missiles In Iraq

    Via Southfront.org,

    On April 5, a series of large explosions rocked the village of al-Kastan in southwestern Idlib injuring 8 people, including 3 members of the so-called White Helmets. According to local sources, an ammunition depot located in the civilian area inside the city became the source of the explosion.

    Al-Kastan is located near the town of Jisr al-Shughur, controlled by the Al-Qaeda-linked Turkistan Islamic Party. The exploded weapon depot likely belonged to the terrorist group or persons affiliated with it.

    On the same day, the Turkish military established three new ‘observation posts’ around Jisr al-Shughur. They are located at the villages of Baksariya, al-Z’ainiyah and Furaykah. Idlib militants see Turkish positions as an important defense line that would allow containing possible Russia- and Iran-backed anti-terrorist operations in the area.

    The 46th Regiment Base of the Syrian Army in western Aleppo came under Turkish artillery shelling. In response, Syrian forces struck position of Turkish-backed militants near Kafr Amma. The attack on the 46th Regiment Base became a third incident between the Turkish military and Syrian troops in less than a week. On April 3, two Syrian soldiers were killed in a Turkish artillery strike on their positions near Tell Abyad.

    On April 4, Iraq’s largest resistance groups released a joint statement calling the US military “occupation forces” that “respect the language of force only”. In the statement, Asa’ib Ahl al-Haq, Harakat Hezbollah al-Nujaba, Kata’ib Sayyid al-Shuhada, Kata’ib al-Imam Ali, Harakat al-Awfiy’a, Saraya Ashura, Harakat Jund al-Imam and Saraya al-Khurasani added that recent attacks on US forces and facilities in Iraq were only a “minor response” to the US aggression and the decision to carry out full-scale attacks was not taken then.

    Two days earlier, on April 2, Usbat al-Tha’ireen, the armed group that claimed responsibility for rocket strikes on Camp Taji and other US positions, released a 3-minute long drone footage of the US embassy in Baghdad’s heavily-fortified Green Zone. This is the largest and most expensive embassy in the world, and is nearly as large as Vatican City.

    The US Central Command officially confirmed deployment of Patriot air defense systems in Iraq. However, the US military announced that it will not provide “ status updates as those systems come online” for security reasons. At least two Patriot batteries are now located in at the US military bases of Ayn al-Assad and Erbil. Two more Patriot batteries will reportedly be deployed soon.

    As part of its plan to redeploy forces to larger, more fortified bases, the US evacuated its troops from the al-Taqaddum Air Base in the province of al-Anbar. It became the fourth US military facility abandoned in Iraq within the last few weeks. The previous ones were located in al-Qaim, Kirkuk and al-Qayyarah.

    Iraqi sources say that the US actions demonstrate that Washington is preparing for a new round of military confrontation with Iran and its allies in the region. Recently, President Donald Trump stated that the US was expecting attacks by Iranian-led forces on US troops and facilities, claiming that Iran will ‘pay price’ for this. Following the statement, Iran deployed additional anti-ship missiles and multiple rocket launchers on the Qeshm Island in the Strait of Horumz.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 21:00

  • Millions Of Workers Fired Over Zoom As 'Remote Layoffs' Become Part Of America's 'New Normal'
    Millions Of Workers Fired Over Zoom As ‘Remote Layoffs’ Become Part Of America’s ‘New Normal’

    A movie like the George Clooney-starring, Anna Kendrick-supported “Up In The Air” could have only been made during the depths of an economic crisis. The film focuses on a consulting firm that handles ‘firings’ mostly for large corporate clients. Most of these firings are handled in-person, until Kenrick’s character comes along with an innovation: A new video-conferencing technology that will allow the firm to start handling its ‘firings’ remotely.

    The new technology rankles George Clooney’s character, the firm’s most experienced consultant. Firing someone, as Clooney explains to Kendrick, requires taking them at their most vulnerable and “setting them adrift”. It’s a weighty, emotional and intense experience that should be handled in-person, if for no other reason than as a sign of respect: firing people remotely will simply cement the notion that these corporations truly don’t value their employees as “humans”, but merely as “resources.”

    Unfortunately, more than a decade later, the film’s vision of remote firings’ is finally becoming a reality.

    With roughly 60% of America’s workforce working from home, according to data by a national organization for HR managers, companies facing brutal business losses because of the COVID-19-induced recession have little choice by to deliver the news remotely, since bringing people back into the office just to be told to go home simply isn’t tenable. And paying to have a George Clooney-type consultant travel to their homes and deliver the news personally would just be…weird.

    The problem is that HR departments don’t have widespread protocols for firing by remote. This has resulted in thousands of awkward moments where workers found out about mass layoffs on an all-hands call, or with family members sitting around them.

    Ruthie Townsend didn’t think anything was amiss last week when she logged into her company’s standing staff meeting on Zoom, even though management at Pana, the business-travel-software startup where she worked, had warned the company might face serious challenges. But at the top of the videoconference call, employees at the Denver-based company were told they would soon receive either an email indicating that they were still employed, or an invite to another Zoom call at which severance details would be explained.

    Ms. Townsend, a 25-year-old sales rep, began furiously refreshing her email until the calendar invite appeared in her inbox. “I was already panicking,” she says. “I forgot if this is the one where I get laid off or I’m keeping my job.”

    When she logged into the next Zoom call and realized she was being laid off, she quickly muted herself and shut off her computer’s video camera; she says she was comforted to hear Pana was dedicating resources to help people find other work.

    The Palo Alto-based TripActions grabbed headlines after firing some 300 staff over Zoom.

    TripActions Inc., a corporate-travel startup based in Palo Alto, Calif. grabbed headlines last week as one of the first companies to enact a significant layoff – nearly 300 employees, or 25% of its staff – over Zoom. Ariel Cohen, the co-founder and chief executive, says there is no good way to let people go. He worried that talking to employees individually would create a situation where the sad news spread quickly and created anxiety before management could reach everyone.

    “Whether we do it over Zoom or face-to-face, the actual act is horrible,” Mr. Cohen says of the layoff.

    At this rate, in-person firings might soon become a thing of the past, as companies realize that firing employees remotely is simply easier and less risky. One human resources manager warned that people should be fired individually when possible, and warned in advance that a “difficult conversation” was about to ensue.

    Tracy Cote, chief people officer at human-resources-technology firm Zenefits, says if bad news has to be delivered to somebody working from home, managers should make sure that person understands a difficult conversation is coming so they can find a space that is at least semiprivate.

    “You don’t want to tell them they’re laid off in the middle of the kitchen with the family around,” she says.

    Pretty soon, companies will be handling mass firings by email, or – worse – by text.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 20:40

  • "They Missed The Call" – Trump Plans To Withhold Money From WHO Over 'Botched' Crisis Response
    “They Missed The Call” – Trump Plans To Withhold Money From WHO Over ‘Botched’ Crisis Response

    Update (1810ET): After tweeting his criticism of the WHO earlier, President Trump brought up the NGO giant again during Tuesday night’s briefing, reiterating that there is a plan in place to withhold some American financing for the organization.

    The US is one of the WHO’s biggest backers, along with China.

    President Trump said Tuesday night that “we’re going to put a hold on money spent on the WHO.”

    He added that “they missed the call” on the coronavirus pandemic.

    Journalists swiftly whipped out some memos from January that the WHO issued warning about the potential devastation to be caused by the novel coronavirus, memos published at a time that Trump was still playing down the crisis.

    Of course, these ‘impartial reporters’ are ignoring the many criticisms and legitimate questions that have been raised about the WHOs motivations and objectives, along with the many mistakes it has been accused of making during the early weeks of the global response.

    Remember when the WHO dragged its feet on labeling the novel coronavirus outbreak a global health emergency, before doing the exact same thing before finally admitting that the COVID-19 is officially a major pandemic with no precedents in the last 100 years. Most notoriously, it supported Beijing’s claims that travel restrictions were ‘racist’, and claimed they were unnecessary during the early weeks of the outbreak.

    Here’s a reminder of who holds the purse strings…maybe Dr. Tedros can give it a look:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For many years, the assessed contribution for the US has been set at 22% of all member state assessed contributions, the maximum allowed rate. Over the last eight years, the US voluntary contributions have ranged from a low of $102 million in 2014 to a high of $401 million in 2017.

    Later, during the Q&A, Trump slammed the WHO again for criticizing his decision to stop arrivals from China, which Trump said will help save “hundreds of thousands of lives” which might be just a slight exaggeration.

     

    *    *     *

    In what was by far his harshest criticism of the international agency to date, President Trump slammed the WHO in a tweet, accusing it of doing the bidding of China while taking the US’s money, and hinted that he would be giving American funding to the organization “a good look”, a statement that certainly won’t sit well with Trump’s critics, who will accuse the president of slashing funding to a vital public health institution in the middle of an unprecedented pandemic.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Though the WHO has been helpful in providing tests around the world, the agency has faced plenty of criticism for appearing to kowtow to Beijing and parrot its lies and propaganda.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beijing also provides a solid chunk of the WHO’s funding, as the chart below shows:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump boasted that he did the right thing and ignored the WHO’s advice when he imposed his China travel ban, and as studies have shown in recent weeks, that was perhaps the best decision his administration made during the response so far.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 20:33

  • Collapsing Liquidity During End-Of-Day Rebalancing Has Led In An Unprecedented Mispricing Of Options
    Collapsing Liquidity During End-Of-Day Rebalancing Has Led In An Unprecedented Mispricing Of Options

    For the second time in two weeks, today’s Market on Close rebalance announcement at 350pm ET wreaked havoc on stocks. As we showed earlier, the publication of a notice that there were over $2BN in stocks for sale sending the S&P lower by 40 points in an unprecedented single tick.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This followed a similar but inverse reaction on March 26, when news of a $7BN MOC buy imbalance sent the S&P higher by 40 points in seconds.

    Why is this happening? Simply, there is just no liquidity in the market, something we showed last week when we visualized the record bid-ask spread in the median S&P stock.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, as it turns out, the collapse in equity liquidity which manifests itself in ever more violent moves during the end-of-day rebalancing, is having a far broader impact.

    According to Goldman’s John Marshall, single stock options prices have become overvalued as end-of-day re-balancing in a low liquidity market have exacerbated common measures of realized volatility. As the Goldman derivatives strategist explains, “realized volatility for the average stock appears 32 points higher than it is.” This is how Goldman quantified the impact of what it calls the “end of day realized volatility premium”:

    We calculate the “end-of-day realized volatility premium” to quantify the distortion driven by end-of-day re-balancing activity during the period of low liquidity over the past month. We use the difference between close-to-close volatility and volatility calculated with VWAP as a proxy for the “end-of-day realized volatility premium”. The average stock in the S&P Top 100 has experienced a realized volatility of 120% using close-to-close prices over the past month, but has had a realized volatility of 88% using a daily VWAP over the past month.

    This suggests an “end-of-day realized volatility premium” of 32%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is problematic as many market models, especially vol-targeting, use close-to-close volatility as a key input and are currently overestimating the fundamental volatility of stocks by 32% over this period. This has led to overpriced options across the volatility surface and inflated levels of risk aversion in volatility based risk models. In fact, Goldman finds that the ratio of 6-month implied volatility to 1 month realized volatility is positively correlated with this “end-of-day realized volatility premium” with a 30% R-squared across the names below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One implication of this “rebalancing anomaly” is that typical measures of volatility are likely to decline faster than history would suggest according to Goldman, which expects close-to-close measures of volatility to decline faster than other metrics which incorporate intra-day data.

    This is likely to drive a decline in implied volatility across stocks and indexes that seems more rapid than casual observers of options would have expected. Several factors needed to be present for the “end-of-day realized volatility premium” to develop:

    (1) fundamental driver of uncertainty,

    (2) low liquidity environment, and

    (3) investment products which require end of day re-balancing.

    We believe the liquidity environment is likely to remain challenging; however, we see potential relief from #1 and #3. We believe there has been some reduction in investment products that require daily re-balancing as many of these investors have de-risked following the sell-off. While it is difficult to say exactly when fundamental uncertainty will decline, we know it will pass with time.

    Another implication is that single stock options are pricing moves over the next 6 months that are greater than moves YTD… which also means there is a way to profit from this peculiar arb.

    Straddles on the average S&P 100 stock are pricing a move of 25% over the next 6 months. This is 4% larger than their average absolute return year-to-date. For 67% of the names in this list, 6 month straddle prices are greater than their YTD absolute return. Selling straddles on these stocks implies profit if the stocks are in a 50% range of +/-25% over the next six months.

    Here, Goldman recommends selling straddles on names at the top of this list where the “end-of-day realized volatility premium” is the largest and likely to be inflating options prices. That said there is a risk, namely that straddle sellers risk 1-for-1 losses with stock moves in either direction that are greater than the premium collected.

    Finally, for those readers who are not as versed in the nuances of greeks trading, here is a brief appendix explaining How low liquidity has inflated realized volatility, and why is it important for stock and option investors?

    • Realized volatility is an input to many risk management and option pricing models. We believe low liquidity has had a significant and temporary impact on the end-of-day realized volatility metrics used by most models. We believe this leads investors to avoid buying stocks or selling options on stocks where the distortion is the greatest. This creates increased opportunity for investors.
    • How did the supply/demand of liquidity impact volatility over the past month? Demand for liquidity increased at the same time as the supply of liquidity decreased. Over the past six weeks, equity volatility has increased due to uncertainties related to COVID-19. The increase in fundamental volatility has had two effects; it has (1) increased demand for liquidity from investment products that need to re-balance based on market moves, (2) reduced the liquidity provided by market makers constrained by capital or regulatory rules. The liquidity pain point has been most acute at the close of each day, when many of the investment products demand liquidity as they re-balance (either by construction, due to regulations or by habit). This results in unusually large volatility at the close that is often reversed the next day; We have detailed this effect at the index level.
    • Should daily closing prices affect the value of derivatives more than intra-day price volatility? Daily closing prices explicitly determine the value of some derivatives, such as variance swaps; however, it is less clear whether the rise in end-of-day volatility should lead to significantly higher prices for put and call options. On one hand, market makers typically replicate puts and calls by hedging their delta risk (i.e. stock exposure) at the end of every day, so there is a practical link to the closing price. On the other hand, there is no requirement to hedge at the end of the day and many  investors hedge more frequently. We acknowledge that is likely that these end-of-day effects are important for valuing single stock options with a few days to expiration as they add to hedging risks.
    • Single stock options with more than a month to expiration should see less impact from these end-of-day effects. While the liquidity environment has become more difficult for options market makers that delta hedge each option, the environment has improved for fundamental investors that sell 6-month options for income (and do not delta hedge). The “end-of-day liquidity premium” has inflated options prices, but are unlikely to have a significant effect on the fundamental value of a stock at expiration in 6 months.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 20:20

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 7th April 2020

  • European Union Approves Bugs For Human Consumption
    European Union Approves Bugs For Human Consumption

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    The European Union’s Food Safety Authority has approved the sale of bugs as “novel food,” meaning that they are likely to be mass produced for human consumption throughout the continent by the end of the year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Can’t wait.

    “These have a good chance of being given the green light in the coming few weeks,” the secretary-general of the International Platform of Insects for Food and Feed, Christophe Derrien, told The Guardian.

    Since 1997, the EU has required a “novel food” classification to allow the sale of products that had no history of being consumed by humans, meaning that the sale of bugs has been banned in countries like Spain, France and Italy for over two decades.

    However, with the new approval, mass production of bug-based food is set to ramp up later this year. This means that locusts, crickets, grasshoppers, and mealworms may all appear on supermarket shelves by the autumn.

    Christophe Derrien is looking forward to the sale of bugs as both a stand alone food and incorporated into existing products, arguing that they are a great source of protein and the production of bug food doesn’t harm the planet.

    “The sort of foods ranges from whole insects as an aperitif or as snacks to processed insects in bars or pasta or burgers made out of insects,” he said.

    As we have previously highlighted, eating bugs has been heavily promoted by cultural institutions and the media in recent years because people are being readied to accept drastically lower standards of living under disastrous global ‘Green New Deal’ programs.

    This will be exacerbated by the expected economic recession, or even depression, caused by the coronavirus outbreak.

    This is why globalist publications like the Economist have been promoting the idea of eating bugs despite the fact that the kind of elitists who read it would never consider for a second munching on crickets or mealworms.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 03:00

  • "All The Jobs Are Gone" – Africa Facing 'Complete Economic Collapse' As Virus Spreads
    “All The Jobs Are Gone” – Africa Facing ‘Complete Economic Collapse’ As Virus Spreads

    The COVID-19 pandemic and lockdowns across the African continent could trigger an economic collapse, according to one United Nations (UN) official, who spoke with Associated Press (AP). 

    Ahunna Eziakonwa, the UN Development Program regional director for Africa, warned that the pandemic would likely result in job losses for millions of people, many of whom are already low-income, have no savings, and have no access to proper healthcare. 

    “We’ve been through a lot on the continent. Ebola, yes, African governments took a hit, but we have not seen anything like this before,” Eziakonwa said. “The African labor market is driven by imports and exports and with the lockdown everywhere in the world, it means basically that the economy is frozen in place. And with that, of course, all the jobs are gone.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We’ve warned over the last month that a virus crisis looms in Africa. A little more than half of the continent’s 54 countries have imposed lockdowns, curfews, and or travel bans to mitigate the spread of the virus. 

    Places like South Africa, where the military has enforced “unprecedented” Martial law-style lockdowns through mid-April, is an attempt to thwart social uprisings as 370,000 jobs have likely been lost.  

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    For the 1.3 billion that inhabit the continent, widespread lockdowns are triggering vicious economic downturns, couple that with a public health crisis, and it could be a perfect storm that results in social unrest. 

    Eziakonwa said unless the virus spread can be controlled – then up to 50% of all estimated growth for Africa’s travel, services, mining, agriculture and the informal sectors could be lost. An extended period of subpar economic growth could be seen across the continent in the quarters ahead.  

    “We will see a complete collapse of economies and livelihoods. Livelihoods will be wiped out in a way we have never seen before,” she warned.

    Top oil-exporting countries, such as Nigeria and Angola, could lose up to $65 billion in revenue with collapsed commodity prices – indicating that those governments will struggle to balance budgets, the UN Economic Commission for Africa (UNECA) said. 

    Many countries in the Sub-Saharan region are heavily indebted and could come into severe financial distress with budget constraints in a downturn. That is why the calls for stimulus among some African leaders have already begun: 

    “Ethiopian Prime Minister Abiy Ahmed has spoken of an “existential threat” to Africa’s economies while seeking up to $150 billion from G20 nations. A meeting of African finance ministers agreed that the continent needs a stimulus package of up to $100 billion, including a waiver of up to $44 billion in interest payments.

    South African President Cyril Ramaphosa backed the calls for a stimulus package, saying in a recent speech that the pandemic “will reverse the gains that many countries have made in recent years.” Several African nations have been among the fastest-growing in the world,” Ap notes. 

    The International Monetary Fund (IMF) said last month that 20 African countries had requested financial assistance, with an expected ten more countries to need some form of aid. The IMF has already cleared credit facilities for Guinea and Senegal.

    In the quarters ahead, socio-economic challenges will persist for Africa as the latest lockdowns due to the virus pandemic will contribute to negative economic outlooks for the region. 

    UNECA has said emergency stimulus programs are needed to protect 30 million jobs at risk of evaporating. 

    Ghanaian President Nana Akufo-Addo recently said, “We do know what to do to bring the economy back to life. What we don’t know is how to bring back people to life.” He has created a virus fund that will distribute food and salaries to some citizens for three months. 

    In Kenya, President Uhuru Kenyatta has launched temporary tax relief programs for citizens and created a $94 million fund to protect low-income families. 

    Benin’s President Patrice Talon said the rich African countries are unleashing stimulus to boost their economies. He said for poor African countries, like his, they don’t have the financial capability to stimulate. 

    To sum up, Africa is being swallowed whole by a pandemic that has forced many countries to implement lockdowns to mitigate the spread, which has led to vicious economic downturns. Much of the continent will likely remain in financial distress this year as the global economy has ground to a halt.  


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 02:30

  • China's Fake News : Its "Superior System" Defeats COVID-19
    China’s Fake News : Its “Superior System” Defeats COVID-19

    Authored by Gordon Chang via The Gatestone Institute,

    China has “defeated” the coronavirus and declared “victory,” Communist Party media tells us.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A funny thing happened on the way to victory, however. The virus is hitting China in a second wave. The second wave is claiming victims, including the Party’s propaganda narratives. The most dangerous of these narratives is that ruler Xi Jinping, with heaven’s mandate, has an obligation to dominate the international system.

    China, after reporting no new infections on March 19, said the virus had been contained. Since then, Beijing has been reporting dozens of new cases each day but has maintained that virtually all of them were “imported” — in other words, the infected were individuals arriving from other countries.

    Of the very few in-country transmissions, most, Beijing maintained, were transmissions from the imported cases.

    China’s official numbers of deaths and new infections, however, must be bogus. Chinese officials are taking actions that are, as a practical matter, inconsistent with the no-new-infection reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    For instance, on March 27 Beijing closed all theaters nationwide, after re-opening them just the previous week.

    In Shanghai, tourist attractions that had just resumed operations were shut again. For instance, the municipality re-closed the observation deck of the Shanghai Tower, the tallest building in China, and the nearby Oriental Pearl Tower. The Jin Mao Tower is now shuttered “to further strengthen pandemic prevention and control.” Madame Tussauds, the Shanghai Ocean Aquarium, and the Shanghai Haichang Ocean Park are now dark, along with the indoor portions of another 25 attractions.

    Shanghai Disneyland? “Temporarily Closed Until Further Notice.”

    Shanghai is not the only metropolis turning out the lights. In Chengdu, karaoke bars and internet cafes were also shut just days after Sichuan province opened up all entertainment venues.

    Fuyang in Anhui province ordered the closure of “entertainment spots” and indoor swimming pools. Henan province locked down internet cafes.

    Henan even quarantined an entire area, Jia county, as doctors there tested positive for the bug.

    On March 31, ESPN reported that the Chinese central government had delayed the resumption of team sports.

    The nationwide university-entrance exams, the gaokao, have been postponed a month, to July.

    The regime has also not rescheduled its premier political events, the annual meetings of the National People’s Congress and the Chinese People’s Political Consultative Conference, both originally scheduled for early March.

    Finally, the authorities in Jiangxi province are not allowing people from next-door Hubei to enter, indicating they do not believe the epidemic in that disease-ridden province is over.

    Does any of this matter? It does: Xi Jinping thinks he should rule the planet.

    “China, the country where the virus first appeared and claimed its first several thousand lives, is now using the global spread of the disease to bolster an increasingly vocal, assertive bid for global leadership that is exacerbating a yearslong conflict with the U.S.,” the Wall Street Journal wrote on April 1.

    As the Communist Party’s Global Times on March 30 triumphantly put it, “COVID-19 Blunders Signal End of ‘American Century.'”

    To push America aside and seize global leadership, China got Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, the director-general of the World Health Organization (WHO), to say that China’s response to the coronavirus showed the “superiority of the Chinese system and this experience is worthy of emulation by other countries.” Then Beijing set about making a big show of “donating” medical equipment and diagnostic kits, most notably to stricken Europe.

    Finally, Xi Jinping, beginning around the first week of February, forced China back to work to demonstrate that China had ended the epidemic.

    None of these showy displays will convince anyone, however, if the virus ravages China again. Unfortunately for Xi, that is what is happening: people in China are re-infecting each other. For instance, in industrial Dongguan in southern Guangdong province, workers returning to their jobsites have been carrying the coronavirus, and this has forced health officials to quarantine other workers. China’s leader can jump-start the economy or throttle the coronavirus, but he cannot do both at the same time.

    When the second wave of coronavirus infections hits China hard, Xi Jinping’s boasts about the superiority of Chinese communism will begin to sound hollow, absurd even.

    Xi’s initial policies turned a local outbreak into a pandemic, and now they are making even more people sick and forcing China into another pit of disease. China’s inaccurate diagnostic kits and substandard protective gear donated around the world along with the new infections will show the truth: communism is incompetent if not downright malign.

    Incompetent and malign communism in turn means Xi’s predicted decline of America will again have to be pushed back to another day.

    China can lie with statistics, but the virus gets the last word. “Victory” over both COVID-19 and the United States is still far out of sight.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 02:00

  • Austria Becomes First European State To Start Reopening Its Economy
    Austria Becomes First European State To Start Reopening Its Economy

    American liberals are having a field day right now bashing President Trump for ‘botching’ the federal response to the coronavirus outbreak. But before they get too excited, we’d like to point out a couple of things to keep in mind: first, the outbreak isn’t over yet, and although 300k cases seems like a lot, the projections for both the US and globally are calling for many millions more, in the US, as well as in Europe and Asia.

    Another, is that the Trump Administration and the CDC weren’t the only organizations blinded by “institutional hubris” – as WaPo described the situation at the CDC in its big expose published over the weekend.

    Even WaPo conceded that if there was one indisputably great call made by Trump, it was his decision to seal off the US to most flights from China in February. If anything, he should have sealed off slights from all of Europe, too.

    But in Brussels, bureaucrats with the EU took the China-influenced advice from the WHO claiming that closing borders wasn’t appropriate at face value, and pushed member states to prioritize other methods of combating the virus instead of border closures and travel bans. Unfortunately, epidemiologists now understand that these are among the most effective tactics for combating the pandemic.

    As if to underline that point, Austrian Chancellor Sebastian Kurz and his government on Monday announced plans to reopen their economy as soon as next week.

    Flanked by senior government ministers, Kurz announced on Monday a new timetable to restart the Austrian economy, detailing a series of phased steps to bring life back to normal while minimizing the risk.

    This will make Austria the first major European country to reopen its economy, a gamble that the FT pointed out will be heavily scrutinized by its neighbors.

    But the reason Austria is even in this situation is because it was one of the first major European economies to eschew the advice from Brussels by ordering businesses to close, imposing a strict nationwide ‘lockdown’ and – most importantly – closing the country’s borders to its plague-ridden southern neighbor, Italy.

    The country’s lockdown was in place by March 11.

    The country of 8.8 million has still reported a number of cases and deaths, though with lower totals than its neighbors. The number of active COVID-19 cases fell for a third straight day on Monday, as recoveries once again outnumbered new infections. That ‘total active’ – the key figure for an economy considering reopening – stood at just over 12,000 in a country of 8.8 million. Sixteen people died in the last 24 hours, bringing the total to 220. The number of patients requiring intensive care remained stable over the past four days at around 250.

    During Monday’s speech, Kurz warned Austrians not to engage in Easter celebrations, or he could cancel or alter the plans. The lockdown must continue to be scrupulously adhered to, he said, or the reopening would not happen. Per Kurz’s plan, some shops would start reopening as soon as next week, with others reopening the following week, with reopenings happening gradually by industry until restaurants and bars (expected to be the last on the list) are allowed to reopen by the end of next month (according to the current timeline).

    So far, Kurz’s handling of the pandemic, and the performance of his health minister, the coalition-partner Green party’s Rudolf Anschober, has been incredibly popular at home. Now, if he manages to upstage neighboring Germany by reopening the Austrian economy swiftly and safely, Kurz will likely go down as one of the most celebrated leaders of Austria since WWII.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 01:00

  • As US Consumers Slide Into Depression They Have Never Been More Bullish On Stocks
    As US Consumers Slide Into Depression They Have Never Been More Bullish On Stocks

    Not even in Khruschev’s wildest dreams did central planners ever conceive of anything so absolutely batshit insane as what is taking place in US “markets” right now.

    With the US economy sliding into a depression which will last at least one quarter, and if Evercore’s Ed Hyman is correct  well into the second half if not 2021…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source

    … it is not a surprise that according to the latest New York Fed survey of consumer expectations, virtually every metric having to do with one’s financial well being – income, wealth, debt sustainability and earnings expectations – is cratering.  For example the expected probability of losing one’s job jumped to an all-time high of 18.5%; the probability of missing a minimum debt payment over the next three months surged to 15.1%, and expected earnings growth tumbled to just 2%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the above data may not have been surprising, what was shocking is what the Fed reported was the average consumer expectation for stock prices in the future: according to the NY Fed, the mean probability that US stock prices will be higher one year from now surged to 47.7%, the highest on record.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Right… because with his job gone, his $400 dollars of emergency savings just spent on a roll of toilet paper, his bank preparing to foreclose on his home, all while a deadly virus lurks in every corner, all Joe Sixpack can think of is how to get his “money on the sidelines” into the stock market as it is about to soar to all time highs.

    And so, thanks to the Fed’s now grotesque interventions in all capital markets, including the purchase of over $1 trillion in securities in the past two weeks, the stock market is now perceived by conventional wisdom as a countercyclical indicator, one which surges the worst the economy gets, and with the economy sliding into a depression it is only “logical” – we use the term loosely – that expectations of higher stock prices have never been higher.

    That of course is the absurdist interpretation of the above “data’. There was, naturally, a serious way of looking at this delightfully ridiculous data and lacking a sense of humor, David Rosenberg applied just that, tweeting that “I was so close to turning more bullish (less bearish?) until I see this metric was released by the New York Fed on consumer expectations.  Since when do bear markets end on record optimism?”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Oh David, “since when” do you still think that anything you observe in this economy or market, both stuffed to the gills with trillions and trillions in freshly printed fiatscoes, matters or makes sense. And to answer your question: bear markets end when the Fed says so, and proceeds to do to stocks what it did to IG bonds – and start buying directly.

    And incidentally David, you may want to reasses your nothing can beat deflation thesis. Albert Edwards already has, and has said farewell to his “great ice age” thesis that defined his work for the past 30 years. We wonder how long it will take you to realize that we now live in a time of helicopter money and that markets – by any definition  – no longer exist, and what comes next it a tsunami of debt and money much of which will finally make its way, kicking and screaming into the broader economy.

    Don’t believe us? Just take one look at gold, where the beginning of the end is finally starting to be priced in.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 04/07/2020 – 00:03

  • Whitehead: Civil Liberty Attacks In The Age Of COVID-19 Threaten To Expose The American Police State
    Whitehead: Civil Liberty Attacks In The Age Of COVID-19 Threaten To Expose The American Police State

    In an exclusive for MintPress, constitutional attorney John Whitehead warns that the COVID-19 pandemic threatens to bring the American Police State out into the open on a scale we’ve not seen before.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You can always count on the government to take advantage of a crisis, legitimate or manufactured.

    This coronavirus pandemic is no exception.

    Not only are the federal and state governments unraveling the constitutional fabric of the nation with lockdown mandates that are sending the economy into a tailspin and wreaking havoc with our liberties, but they are also rendering the citizenry fully dependent on the government for financial handouts, medical intervention, protection and sustenance.

    Unless we find some way to rein in the government’s power grabs, the fall-out will be epic.

    Everything I have warned about for years—government overreach, invasive surveillance, martial law, abuse of powers, militarized police, weaponized technology used to track and control the citizenry, and so on—has coalesced into this present moment.

    The government’s shameless exploitation of past national emergencies for its own nefarious purposes pales in comparison to what is presently unfolding.

    Deploying the same strategy it used with 9/11 to acquire greater powers under the USA Patriot Act, the police state—a.k.a. the shadow government, a.k.a. the Deep State—has been anticipating this moment for years, quietly assembling a wish list of lockdown powers that could be trotted out and approved at a moment’s notice.

    It should surprise no one, then, that the Trump Administration has asked Congress to allow it to suspend parts of the Constitution whenever it deems it necessary during this coronavirus pandemic and “other” emergencies.

    It’s that “other” emergencies part that should particularly give you pause, if not spur you to immediate action (by action, I mean a loud and vocal, apolitical, nonpartisan outcry and sustained, apolitical, nonpartisan resistance).

    In fact, the Department of Justice (DOJ) has been quietly trotting out and testing a long laundry list of terrifying powers that override the Constitution.

    We’re talking about lockdown powers (at both the federal and state level): the ability to suspend the Constitution, indefinitely detain American citizens, bypass the courts, quarantine whole communities or segments of the population, override the First Amendment by outlawing religious gatherings and assemblies of more than a few people, shut down entire industries and manipulate the economy, muzzle dissidents, “stop and seize any plane, train or automobile to stymie the spread of contagious disease,” reshape financial markets, create a digital currency (and thus further restrict the use of cash), determine who should live or die…

    You’re getting the picture now, right?

    These are powers the police state would desperately like to make permanent.

    Bear in mind, however, that these powers the Trump Administration, acting on orders from the police state, are officially asking Congress to recognize and authorize barely scratch the surface of the far-reaching powers the government has already unilaterally claimed for itself.

    Unofficially, the police state has been riding roughshod over the rule of law for years now without any pretense of being reined in or restricted in its power grabs by Congress, the courts or the citizenry.

    This current pandemic is a test to see whether the Constitution—and our commitment to the principles enshrined in the Bill of Rights—can survive a national crisis and true state of emergency.

    Here’s what we know: whatever the so-called threat to the nation—whether it’s civil unrest, school shootings, alleged acts of terrorism, or the threat of a global pandemic in the case of COVID-19—the government has a tendency to capitalize on the nation’s heightened emotions, confusion and fear as a means of extending the reach of the police state.

    This coronavirus epidemic, which has brought China’s Orwellian surveillance out of the shadows and caused Italy to declare a nationwide lockdown threatens to bring the American Police State out into the open on a scale we’ve not seen before.

    Every day brings a drastic new set of restrictions by government bodies (most have been delivered by way of executive orders) at the local, state and federal level that are eager to flex their muscles for the so-called “good” of the populace.

    This is where we run the risk of this whole fly-by-night operation going completely off the rails.

    It’s one thing to attempt an experiment in social distancing in order to flatten the curve of this virus because we can’t afford to risk overwhelming the hospitals and exposing the most vulnerable in the nation to unavoidable loss of life scenarios. However, there’s a fine line between strongly worded suggestions for citizens to voluntarily stay at home and strong-armed house arrest orders with penalties in place for non-compliance.

    More than three-quarters of all Americans have now been ordered to stay at home and that number is growing as more states fall in line.

    Schools have canceled physical classes, many for the remainder of the academic year.

    Many of the states have banned gatherings of more than 10 people.

    At least three states (Nevada, North Carolina, and Pennsylvania) have ordered non-essential businesses to close.

    In Washington, DC, residents face 90 days in jail and a $5,000 fine if they leave their homes during the coronavirus outbreak. Residents of Maryland, Hawaii and Washington state also risk severe penalties of up to a year in prison and a $5,000 fine for violating the stay-at-home orders. Violators in Alaska could face jail time and up to $25,000 in fines.

    Kentucky residents are prohibited from traveling outside the state, with a few exceptions.

    New York City, the epicenter of the COVID-19 outbreak in the U.S., is offering its Rikers Island prisoners $6 an hour to help dig mass graves.

    In San Francisco, cannabis dispensaries were included among the essential businesses allowed to keep operating during the city-wide lockdown.

    New Jersey’s governor canceled gatherings of any number, including parties, weddings and religious ceremonies, and warned the restrictions could continue for weeks or months. One city actually threatened to prosecute residents who spread false information about the virus.

    Oregon banned all nonessential social and recreational gatherings, regardless of size.

    Rhode Island has given police the go-ahead to pull over anyone with New York license plates to record their contact information and order them to self-quarantine for 14 days.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rhode Island National Guard Military Police direct a motorist with New York license plates to a checkpoint, March 28, 2020, David Goldman | AP

    South Carolina’s police have been empowered to break up any public gatherings of more than three people.

    Of course, there are exceptions to all of these stay-at-home orders (in more than 30 states and counting), the longest of which runs until June 10. Essential workers (doctors, firefighters, police and grocery store workers) can go to work. Everyone else will have to fit themselves into a variety of exceptions in order to leave their homes: for grocery runs, doctor visits, to get exercise, to visit a family member, etc.

    Throughout the country, more than 14,000 “Citizen-Soldiers” of the National Guard have been mobilized to support the states and the federal government in their fight against the coronavirus.

    Thus far, we have not breached the Constitution’s crisis point: martial law has yet to be overtly imposed (although an argument could be made to the contrary given the militarized nature of the American police state).

    It’s just a matter of time before all hell breaks loose.

    If this is not the defining point at which we cross over into all-out totalitarianism, then it is at a minimum a test to see how easily we will surrender.

    Generally, the government has to show a compelling state interest before it can override certain critical rights such as free speech, assembly, press, search and seizure, etc. Most of the time, it lacks that compelling state interest, but it still manages to violate those rights, setting itself up for legal battles further down the road.

    These lockdown measures—on the right of the people to peaceably assemble, to travel, to engage in commerce, etc.—unquestionably restrict fundamental constitutional rights, which might pass muster for a short period of time, but can it be sustained for longer stretches legally?

    That’s the challenge before us, of course, if these days and weeks potentially stretch into months-long quarantines.

    At the moment, the government believes it has a compelling interest—albeit a temporary one—in restricting gatherings, assemblies and movement in public in order to minimize the spread of this virus.

    The key point is this: while we may tolerate these restrictions on our liberties in the short term, we should never fail to be on guard lest these one-time constraints become a slippery slope to a total lockdown mindset.

    What we must guard against, more than ever before, is the tendency to become so accustomed to our prison walls—these lockdowns, authoritarian dictates, and police state tactics justified as necessary for national security—that we allow the government to keep having its way in all things, without any civic resistance or objections being raised.

    Most of all, don’t be naïve: the government will use this crisis to expand its powers far beyond the reach of the Constitution.

    That’s how it starts.

    Travel too far down that slippery slope, and there will be no turning back.

    As I make clear in my book “Battlefield America: The War on the American People,” if you wait to speak out—stand up—and resist until the government’s lockdowns impact your freedoms personally, it could be too late.

    Just because we’re fighting an unseen enemy in the form of a virus doesn’t mean we have to relinquish every shred of our humanity, our common sense, or our freedoms to a nanny state that thinks it can do a better job of keeping us safe.

    Whatever we give up willingly now—whether it’s basic human decency, the ability to manage our private affairs, the right to have a say in how the government navigates this crisis, or the few rights still left to us that haven’t been disemboweled in recent years by a power-hungry police state—we won’t get back so easily once this crisis is past.

    The government never cedes power willingly.

    Neither should we.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 23:55

  • Pelosi Tells Democrats Next Stimulus To Be At Least $1 Trillion As Goldman Predicts Explosion In US Debt
    Pelosi Tells Democrats Next Stimulus To Be At Least $1 Trillion As Goldman Predicts Explosion In US Debt

    The SBA and the Treasury have yet to figure out how to distribute the hundreds of billions in small and medium-business rescue funds from the recently passed $2.2 trillion Phase 3 coronavirus bailout bill, and the US government is already planning its next, Phase 4 fiscal stimulus.

    Earlier this morning, Goldman’s chief economist Jan Hatzius wrote that after Congress enacted three fiscal relief measures over the last few weeks – which provide aid to unemployed workers and state governments, payments to individuals, and loans and tax benefits to businesses – “further fiscal support for the economy looks likely to be needed“, and Goldman’s fiscal forecast assumes that Congress enacts at least one more fiscal package” because the measures enacted to date, “are not yet equal to the lost income due to COVID-19 that we expect.”

    In further explaining the need for a new stimulus round, Goldman said that “Congress might need to provide further funding for small business loans (and the related loan forgiveness program to subsidize wage payments), unemployment benefits, and fiscal aid to state and local governments” which face a substantial near-term revenue hit, as well as some additional funding for aid to small businesses. Another round of payments to individuals is also a possibility. That said, in most cases Goldman “would expect that many of the “Phase 3” policies that Congress might renew or expand will not be as large the second time around. For example, while there might be additional funding for small business loans, we doubt that Congress would provide as much in “Phase 4” as the $350bn it enacted in “Phase 3.”

    Altogether, Goldman expects this could add another $500bn (2.4% of GDP) to the deficit in the current fiscal year, and as much as $1.5 trillion (7%) more over the next couple of years.”

    The total amount of fiscal relief that has been and will be passed, is summarized on the Goldman table below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps more importantly, Goldman concludes that a new “Phase 4” fiscal stimulus round “is likely to face greater political friction than the recent legislation. Congress enacted the earlier measures on an emergency basis in a very short amount of time—by congressional standards—and without a full estimate of the likely fiscal costs.” As such the bank believes that future legislation “seems likely to take longer and we expect lawmakers to be somewhat more sensitive to further expanding the budget deficit.” That said, according to Goldman it is nevertheless very likely that Congress will pass additional fiscal measures; it would be politically unsustainable, in our view, for lawmakers to stay on the sidelines while the unemployment rate rises dramatically over the next few months. In terms of timing, since Congress will be on recess through late April, so enactment looks unlikely before May, at earliest.

    And while few care about numbers, here is the bottom line: total fiscal stimulus will amount to an unprecedented 18% of GDP in 2020, and another 11% in 2021.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And, after all, why not? Now that the US is officially in helicopter money territory with the Fed monetizing whatever debt the Treasury will issue, trillions will soon become quadrillions.

    And as if hearing Goldman, and its modest $500BN forecast for a Phase 4, on Monday House Speaker Nancy Pelosi told Democrats on a private conference call that  the next stimulus bill will be at least another $1 trillion,

    According to people on the call, the next stimulus package – never mind getting the current package in the hands of Americans – would be to replenish funds for programs established in Congress’s $2.2 trillion virus relief bill. And echoing Goldman, Pelosi said there should be additional direct payments to individuals, extended unemployment insurance, more resources for food stamps and more funds for the Payroll Protection Plan that provides loans to small businesses.

    As Bloomberg report, Pelosi also said the bill will assist state and local governments, with an emphasis on smaller municipalities with fewer than 500,000 residents, one lawmaker said.

    And while Pelosi said she wants the next stimulus bill to be passed this month, this doesn’t seem feasible as the House isn’t scheduled to be back in session until April 20 at the earliest. That said, it is possible to pass legislation with most members out of town, as long as no one objects.

    Other sources such as Fox Business News’ Charlie Gasparino, report that the Phase 4 stimulus would be even bigger, “somewhere in the $1.5 trillion neighborhood.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Meanwhile, confirming that bipartisan support is effectively assured, President Trump said Saturday he’ll ask Congress for more money for small business loans if the $349 billion already designated for the program runs out.

    So who pays for all this generosity? Why future generations of Americans of course. As Goldman concludes, “the substantial increase in the budget deficit resulting from the economic downturn and enacted and expected policy measures will increase federal debt held by the public from 79% of GDP in FY2019 to 99% by the end of FY2020 and to 108% of GDP by 2023, just above the prior peak level reached in 1946.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Said otherwise, when it comes to the US debt, the country is now under war footing as the Treasury will now have to borrow an additional $3 trillion for the remainder of 2020…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … amounts that are only conceivable if the US were currently under a state of war.

    Finally, for those wondering how to trade the fiscal insanity that is currently being unleashed, well…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 23:45

  • Argentina Defaults For Record Ninth Time
    Argentina Defaults For Record Ninth Time

    There is a saying: three things in life are certain: death, taxes and another Argentina default.

    In the annals of sovereign debt there is no country that has defaulted more times on its debt, than the country formerly known as the pearl of South America –  Argentina – which had defaulted exactly 8 times in just under 200 years. As of Monday, make that nine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The first default came in 1827, just 11 years after independence; the most recent one was in 2014. In between, there were six others of varying size and form, according to Carmen Reinhart, a Harvard University economist. Almost all of them were preceded by boom periods as, perhaps most famously, when European migrants transformed Argentina into an agricultural powerhouse and one of the world’s wealthiest countries by the late 19th century. Invariably, however, profligate spending combined with easy access to capital supplied by overzealous foreign creditors, did the nation in.

    Courtesy of Bloomberg here is a brief look back at each of Argentina’s eight defaults:

    • 1827: After declaring independence from Spain in 1816, Argentina’s economy quickly opened itself to foreign trade. Some historians would later refer to the early 1820s as the nation’s “happy experience,” a period of peace, prosperity and fascination with European aristocracy. That soon changed. Argentina had sold bonds in London to help finance its nationhood. That debt came under pressure when the Bank of England raised interest rates in 1825. Argentina defaulted two years later. It took another 30 years for the nation to resume payments on the debt.
    • 1890: In the late 19th century, Argentina went on a borrowing spree to build trains and transform Buenos Aires into the cosmopolitan capital it is today. London’s Barings Bank aggressively invested in the nation’s railroads and other utility projects. The south of Argentina boomed, too, as sheep farming spread across the Patagonian grasslands and gold prospectors rushed to Tierra del Fuego. That euphoria faded when the commodities bubble burst. The nation halted debt payments, spurring a run on Argentine banks and the resignation of President Miguel Juarez Celman. That November, Barings teetered near insolvency. Argentina emerged from default four years later, buoyed by fresh capital from the U.K.
    • 1951: An influx of immigrants and foreign capital fueled Argentina’s rise to one of the world’s most prosperous countries by the early 1900s. But World War I hit the nation’s economy hard, as did the Great Depression that followed a decade later. Unemployment and social unrest soared. In 1930, a coup brought the military into power, ushering in a period of political instability — eight presidents in two decades — and a policy of import substitution, which closed off the economy and helped trigger a default.
    • 1956: The populist strongman Juan Peron rose to power in 1946 and proceeded to nationalize companies, redistribute wealth and assert greater government control over the economy. The policies he and his wife, Evita, carried out would become Argentina’s dominant governing principle for roughly half of the next seven decades. Initially, they stoked growth and expanded the middle class. But in 1955, Peron was ousted in a coup, plunging the economy into turmoil and leaving the country struggling to keep up with debt payments. The next year, the military junta struck a deal with the Paris Club of creditor nations to avert a larger default.
    • 1982: During Argentina’s Dirty War, the military dictatorship borrowed, mainly from U.S. and British banks, to fund infrastructure projects and state industries. The nation’s foreign debt ballooned to $46 billion from $8 billion. Then commodity prices collapsed again when the Federal Reserve, under the leadership of Chairman Paul Volcker, raised U.S. interest rates to as high as 20% to tame inflation, spurring debt crises across Latin America and the rest of the developing world. Argentina became one of 27 nations, including 16 in Latin America, to reschedule its debt.
    • 1989: A series of failures in the late 1980s to curb inflation — which climbed over 3,000% — triggered another default in 1989 and brought Peronist leader Carlos Menem into power. His government reduced inflation, privatized state companies and lured foreign direct investment, steering the nation from recession to double-digit growth by Menem’s second full year in office. Still, Argentina’s foreign debt surged to more than $100 billion, the result of Menem’s inability to rein in spending. By the time he left, the nation had fallen into recession once more amid rising unemployment, constrained exports and an overvalued peso.
    • 2001: As the brutal recession entered its fourth year, wiping out about two-thirds of the nation’s gross domestic product, Argentines rioted around the rallying cry, “All of them must go!” The country had five presidents in two weeks, all while declaring what was at the time the largest default by a country in history. Payments were halted on $95 billion worth of bonds. That led to restructuring deals with creditors in 2005 and 2010 under Nestor Kirchner and his wife, Cristina Fernandez. Most bondholders agreed to take the 30 cents on the dollar offered, but a contingent led by hedge-fund billionaire Paul Singer held out and demanded full repayment.
    • 2014: Haunted by a legal drama with Singer and other holdout creditors, Argentina defaulted once again, albeit on a lesser scale. Fernandez’s administration missed an interest payment after a U.S. judge ruled that Argentina couldn’t distribute the funds unless Singer’s Elliott Management Corp. and other so-called “vulture funds” got paid on their defaulted debt. That dispute was finally resolved in 2016, when the new president, Mauricio Macri, paid the holdouts so Argentina could regain access to international debt markets.

    And now, with the credit-friendly regime of “reformist” Mauricio Macri a distant memory, we can add default number 9 because according to a decree late on Sunday, the government announced that Argentina plans to postpone payments on up to $10 billion of dollar debt that was issued under Argentina-law – and is thus not bound to international default arbitration – until the end of the year in a bid to relieve pressure over looming foreign currency payments.

    The government’s decree of necessity and urgency (DNU), does not affect the roughly $70 billion in foreign currency debt issued under international law that Argentina is currently in talks to restructure with creditors. Argentina’s government has previously said it is looking to restructure $83 billion in foreign currency debt under both international and local law as it looks to avert a sovereign default that would hit its access to global markets.

    The move to delay payments on the local-law debt could give Argentina breathing room and may enable it more easily to make payments on foreign-law bonds. As the debt was issued under local law, any creditors wanting to take legal action would need to do so in local courts. And make no mistake: any change to the payment terns, or rather non-payment, is an instant event of default. The only question is which international creditors, which are better known in the country as “vultures”, are bold enough to sue Argentina in its own court system in demanding payment.

    The default will hardly come as a surprise: President Alberto Fernandez and Economy Minister Martin Guzman have repeatedly said Argentina cannot pay its public debts until it is given time to revive an economy that has been mired in recession for the last two years. The current coronavirus crisis only pushed the decision to the fore.

    Argentina’s major creditor, the International Monetary Fund, which sunk billions into the biggest failed IMF rescue loan in history that is now terminally impaired, has supported the country’s stance saying its debts are unsustainable. It also means that IMF member states will be forced to make the organization whole on its losses.

    And with local-law debt done, next up is the default under foreign law. Guzman is expected to soon make a proposal to private creditors to restructure the country’s foreign law bonds, a process that has been hit by delays amid the global coronavirus pandemic that has led to a nationwide lockdown in Argentina.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 23:35

  • COVID-19 Has Lit The Fuse On China's Economic-Debt Time-Bomb
    COVID-19 Has Lit The Fuse On China’s Economic-Debt Time-Bomb

    Authored by Cary Huang, op-ed via The South China Morning Post,

    Beijing has a tough choice to make: tolerate an unprecedented hit to the economy or go for massive stimulus and risk explosive consequences… It should beware, a financial virus can be every bit as toxic as a biological one

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The coronavirus outbreak has already taken a great toll on the Chinese economy, with all headline readings pointing towards a record slowdown in growth during the first two months of the year.But there is an even greater danger for what was once the world’s fastest-growing major economy: that Covid-19 will become the catalyst that will bring its many long-simmering problems to the boil. At the centre of these problems is a rising systemic risk in its banking and financial systems caused by a high level of debt accrued over the past decade.

    The outbreak could not have occurred at a worse time. The past 10 years have not only seen the economy saddled with this debt, but it has also involved a steady structural slowdown that last year saw the growth rate fall to 6.1 per cent, the lowest in decades. Now, just at the very time the country might consider spending more to prop up that growth rate, a raging pandemic means it will be making much less money than usual.

    The latest data from the Chinese Ministry of Finance shows fiscal revenue plunged by 9.9 per cent in the January-February period, the steepest drop since 2009. Overall tax revenue fell 11.2 per cent, driven by a 19 per cent slump in value-added tax (VAT) revenue, the main source of fiscal income. These drops come just as the government has offered a handsome tax cut in response to the pandemic.

    Meanwhile, the escalation of the pandemic in the rest of the world will only further weigh on China’s economic growth, corporate profits and personal income. In turn, this will inevitably drag down government revenue in months to come.

    Coronavirus: March 2020, the month Covid-19 changed the world

    Beijing’s proposed stimulus spending will only exacerbate China’s already-massive debt pile, which had reached 310 per cent of gross domestic product by the end of last year, according to the Institute of International Finance. Many economies that have experienced such levels of debt have gone on to suffer a financial crash or economic crisis. China now accounts for about 60 per cent of the US$72.5 trillion emerging market debt.

    A deleveraging campaign had reduced Beijing’s debt mountain in 2018. But it has since returned to credit-driven stimulus to support growth and combat the effects of its  trade war with the United States.

    About 80 per cent of China’s debt stock was accumulated over the past decade as the country strived to achieve the politically significant milestone of doubling its economic size from 2010 to 2020. The milestone was a key goal in President  Xi Jinping’s Chinese dream of “national rejuvenation”.

    While the coronavirus threat has receded in China itself, any hope of an early recovery is forlorn as Covid-19 is still ripping through the major developed economies – essentially, China’s customers and  trade partners. Plunging demand from abroad will create a second shock wave that will hit China’s export-oriented economy just as it is recovering from the first shock of having to lock down its cities.

    China’s balance sheet will be hit by both dwindling revenue and a spiralling demand for spending. Rising corporate debt, surging local government borrowings, and soaring non-performing loans for commercial banks are three areas that could wreck its fragile financial and banking systems. The non-financial corporate debt-to-GDP ratio jumped from 93 per cent in 2009 to 153 per cent last year, one of the highest in the world. The Institute of International Finance warned that China was the major driver of global non-financial corporate debt. China’s bond defaults also hit records in 2018 and 2019.

    Coronavirus could cause global food shortages by April as export curbs worsen supply chain problems

    Meanwhile, China’s local government debts will jump as a result of more infrastructure-driven stimulus. This will add to a debt pile already worth up to 40 trillion yuan – about 40 per cent of the country’s 100-trillion-yuan GDP last year. S&P Global Ratings has singled out local government financing vehicles as being chiefly responsible for the accumulation of hidden debt. At issue is that while local governments want to spend more, their income from land sales, the main source of local fiscal revenue, is decreasing. The Ministry of Finance said revenue from land sales, which are off-budget, fell by 16.4 per cent in the first two months of the year.

    China’s commercial banks also face a severe test as bad debts are likely to rise. Even before the outbreak, China’s banking system was a ticking time bomb, with the state having to step in to rescue a string of embattled medium-sized lenders. A Financial Stability Report released by the People’s Bank of China at the end of last year described 586 of the country’s almost 4,400 lenders as “high risk”. Data from the China Banking and Insurance Regulatory Commission shows there has been a steady rise in the non-performing loan balances of commercial banks since the middle of last year, a result of Beijing scaling back itsdeleveraging campaign.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s policymakers face a difficult choice: tolerate an unprecedented slowdown or go for massive stimulus and risk detonating a financial time bomb.

    China’s economic planners have a habit of relying on massive levels of debt-financed stimulus whenever growth slows. The closed nature of its financial system affords policymakers the luxury of complacency, as they have a war chest of US$3.1 trillion in foreign exchange reserves.

    Some China-made coronavirus test kits and face masks rejected as ‘unreliable’ in European countries

    All the signals suggest this is what they will do once more, despite the risk. Leaks suggest Beijing has amended its 2020 budget to raise the deficit to 3.5 per cent of GDP from an original cap of 3 per cent to fund this massive stimulus. Analysts say the actual fiscal deficits could jump much higher than last year’s 4.9 per cent, which included off-budget sheet borrowing and spending. Indeed, a meeting of the politburo, China’s top decision-making body, on March 27 suggested scaling up the stimulus package, with calls to raise the fiscal deficit ratio, increase issuance of Special Treasury bonds, and raise the quota of local government special bond issuance. Policymakers have also directed commercial banks to tolerate a higher threshold for bad loans, hoping to keep thousands of small and medium-sized enterprises from collapsing. The government has already sped up the issuance of bonds. The issuance of special-purpose bonds almost tripled to 950 billion yuan in the first two months of 2020, compared with last year.

    It is to be expected that China’s debt will rise substantively in coming months, as in all previous crises. However, Beijing should beware that this time its fiscal measures will be limited. They will help only the country’s internal issue of supply and do nothing for external demand. China should exercise extreme caution: a financial virus can be as toxic, contagious and lethal as a biological one if it is allowed to spread.

    *  *  *

    Cary Huang is a veteran China affairs columnist, having written on the topic since the early 1990s


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 23:15

  • New Zealand PM Adds "The Easter Bunny" & "The Tooth Fairy" To List Of 'Essential Workers'
    New Zealand PM Adds “The Easter Bunny” & “The Tooth Fairy” To List Of ‘Essential Workers’

    New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern has won global plaudits for her “compassionate” handling of the coronavirus outbreak, the Washington Post reported, and Ardern won even more praise on Monday, when she added two new job categories to the country’s register of “essential” workers.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ardern tweeted that with the Easter holiday coming up, she was officially adding the Easter Bunny, and his pal, the Tooth Fairy, to the country’s list of “essential” workers so they can make it to the homes of all the country’s children.

    “You’ll be pleased to know that we do consider both the tooth fairy and the Easter Bunny to be essential workers,” she said. “But as you can imagine, at this time they’re going to be potentially quite busy at home with their family as well and their own bunnies.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And for those families whose financial situation doesn’t offer enough room for Easter egg hunts, gifts and candy, Ardern assured those children that, because of all the restrictions, it might be a bit difficult for the Easter Bunny to make it to every house this year.

    “I say to the children of New Zealand, if the Easter Bunny doesn’t make it to your household, we have to understand that it’s a bit difficult at the moment for the bunny to perhaps get everywhere,” she said.

    To help accommodate these children, Ardern suggested that neighborhoods set up ‘easter egg hunts’ by placing eggs in their windows, so that children can ‘spot’ them while they stroll through the streets with their parents. We can hear the groans from NZ’s “bad moms” from here.

    On March 25, Ardern announced the most significant restriction on New Zealanders’ movements in the country’s history by declaring a four-week nationwide lockdown, instructing all residents to remain at home except for “essential workers” in health care, retail etc.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 22:55

  • "Horrifying Global Surge In Domestic Violence" Amid COVID-19 Lockdowns: UN
    “Horrifying Global Surge In Domestic Violence” Amid COVID-19 Lockdowns: UN

    Authored by Jessica Corbett via CommonDreams.org,

    As world leaders continue to impose stay-at-home orders and many businesses, schools, and services across the globe remain shut down due to the coronavirus pandemic, United Nations Secretary-General António Guterres is expressing concerns about reports of alarming increases in domestic violence and urging all governments to incorporate protections for abuse survivors into response plans for the public health crisis.

    Guterres called for an immediate global ceasefire amid the virus outbreak last month. “I appealed for an end to violence everywhere, now,” the U.N. chief said Sunday. “But violence is not confined to the battlefield. For many women and girls, the threat looms largest where they should be safest: in their own homes.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty Images

    While domestic violence impacts both males and females, research has shown women and girls are disproportionately victimized. Phumzile Mlambo-Ngcuka, executive director of U.N. Women, noted Monday that “in the previous 12 months, 243 million women and girls (aged 15-49) across the world have been subjected to sexual or physical violence by an intimate partner.”

    “As the COVID-19 pandemic continues,” Mlambo-Ngcuka warned, “this number is likely to grow with multiple impacts on women’s wellbeing, their sexual and reproductive health, their mental health, and their ability to participate and lead in the recovery of our societies and economy.”

    Guterres detailed related developments in a video address Sunday, explaining that “over the past weeks as economic and social pressures and fear have grown, we have seen a horrifying global surge in domestic violence.”

    The secretary-general cited increased calls to domestic violence support centers, overwhelmed healthcare and police services, shuttered shelters, and limited funding for local groups that help survivors. He also urged governments worldwide “to make the prevention and redress of violence against women a key part of their national response plans for COVID-19.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Specifically, Guterres called for:

    • Increasing investment in online services and civil society organizations;
    • Making sure judicial systems continue to prosecute abusers;
    • Setting up emergency warning systems in pharmacies and groceries;
    • Declaring shelters as essential services; and
    • Creating safe ways for women to seek support, without alerting their abusers.

    “Together,” Guterres said, “we can and must prevent violence everywhere, from war zones to people’s homes, as we work to beat COVID-19.”

    According to a U.N. News report from Monday, “Lebanon and Malaysia, for example, have seen the number of calls to helplines double, compared with the same month last year; in China they have tripled; and in Australia, search engines such as Google are seeing the highest magnitude of searches for domestic violence help in the past five years.”

    The New York Times reported Monday on the experience of 26-year-old Lele, a woman in China who said that her husband beat her with a high chair as she held their 11-month-old daughter. Lele said that “during the epidemic, we were unable to go outside, and our conflicts just grew bigger and bigger and more and more frequent.”

    Since the Chinese government began shutting down cities in February, the Beijing-based NGO Equality has seen a spike in calls from abuse survivors seeking support, according to the Times. Some European countries have reported similar surges.

    In Spain, the emergency number for domestic violence received 18% more calls in the first two weeks of lockdown than in the same period a month earlier.

    “We’ve been getting some very distressing calls, showing us clearly just how intense psychological as well as physical mistreatment can get when people are kept 24 hours a day together within a reduced space,” said Ana Bella, who set up a foundation to help other women after surviving domestic violence herself.

    On Thursday, the French police reported a nationwide spike of about 30% in domestic violence. Christophe Castaner, the French interior minister, said he had asked officers to be on the lookout for abuse.

    “The risk increases due to confinement,” he said in an interview on French television.

    USA Today analysis of data from police agencies across the United States, published Saturday, found that although crime rates have generally dropped off in recent weeks, calls for domestic disturbances surged by 10% to 30% among many of the communities during the second half of March compared with the previous weeks.

    For example, “the Montgomery County Police Department, just outside Washington, D.C., recorded 13% fewer call dispatches and more than a third fewer criminal incidents,” the outlet reported. “But cases of domestic violence there spiked, even as most other crimes declined… Data show Montgomery County police saw a 21% increase in such calls over the past two weeks, an average of 39 a day.”

    An NBC News report from Monday contained similar findings, with 18 of 22 law enforcement agencies that responded to the outlet disclosing an increase in domestic violence calls during March. According to NBC:

    Houston police received about 300 more domestic violence calls in March than they did in February, a roughly 20% increase. Charlotte-Mecklenburg, North Carolina, police fielded 517 additional calls about domestic violence in March compared to the same month last year, an 18% jump, while Phoenix police received nearly 200 more calls, an increase of nearly 6%.

    “The financial stress alone creates a ticking time bomb for some families with a history of domestic violence,” said Steve Mueller, sheriff of Cherokee County, South Carolina, which saw a 35% increase in cases in March compared to February. “Unfortunately many of these domestic violence cases occur in front of children and often the children become victims of abuse and assault, as well.”

    Other cities and regions that told NBC they saw an increase in domestic violence cases during March are Boston; Milwaukee; Seattle; San Antonio; Salt Lake City; Utah County, Utah; Fresno County, California; Montgomery County, Texas; East Baton Rouge Parish, Louisiana; Buffalo, New York; Sparks, Nevada; Portland, Oregon; Nassau County, New York; Cherokee County, South Carolina; and Charleston, South Carolina.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 22:35

  • 'Lives In Danger': Canada Lashes Out After US Blocked Export Of Millions Of N95 Masks
    ‘Lives In Danger’: Canada Lashes Out After US Blocked Export Of Millions Of N95 Masks

    Over the weekend Prime Minister Justin Trudeau said Canada will not retaliate against the US for banning exports of crucial medical protective supplies shipments into Canada, after on Friday a major shipment of masks from Minnesota-based 3M to Canada was halted by US authorities as part of the Defense Production Act.

    “We are not looking at retaliatory measures or measures that are punitive,” Trudeau said Saturday at a dire moment the Canadian health care system is feeling the same strain as the US. He did call the move a “mistake” and the Trump administration has since been unmoved.

    Ontario Premier Doug Ford’s words, however, were more aggressive and blunt, explaining in so many words that essentially Washington’s ban on the exports puts lives in danger. This after European leaders likened similar measures and interventions impacting Germany and France to “modern piracy”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “What I understand is we have 3 million masks that were stopped by U.S. officials,” Ford told a Monday press conference. Ford later indicated that some of the masks  up to 500,000  have since been released and that should “buy the province a week” before health workers run out.

    “Our supplies are strained right at this moment… We’re exhausting every avenue available to us,” the Ontario leader said. “The hard truth is our supplies in Ontario are getting very low.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    He continued: “We’re putting pressure on the US government from all sides. It’s absolutely critical that they except Canada from this presidential order.”

    He underscored how dire the situation remains by further saying, “We’re reaching out to everyone in the world right now to make sure that we have enough masks.”

    Canada’s Globe and Mail further quoted Ford as comparing the decision made Trump to someone telling a relative: “you go starve and we’ll feast on the rest of the meal.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Surely missed on Canada’s leaders as they scramble to deal with the fallout of the US ban on crucial medical personal protective equipment for hospital workers, is the fact that they themselves previously willingly joined in Trump’s sanctions on so-called ‘rogue states’ like Iran, Syria, and Venezuela

    Nationwide Canada has seen over 16,500 confirmed COVID-19 cases, including 339 deaths. Ontario province has witnessed the highest number of deaths, at 150, creating alarm within the under-supplied health system there.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 22:15

  • How The Left Is Trying To Blame Capitalism For COVID-19 Deaths
    How The Left Is Trying To Blame Capitalism For COVID-19 Deaths

    Authored by Bradley Thomas via The Mises Institute,

    Not hesitating to exploit a health pandemic to advance their ideological agendaJacobin magazine on March 26 published an article attempting to proactively blame “millions” of coronavirus deaths on “capitalism.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Titled How Capitalism Kills during a Pandemic,” the article advances tired slogans about free markets placing “profits above people,” buttressed by faulty and at times self-contradictory arguments that prove unpersuasive.

    To set the most alarmist tone possible, author Nick French begins by warning the reader that the coronavirus “will likely kill millions of people in the United States alone.”

    This prediction cherry-picks the most ominous of such projections, irresponsibly relying on the report from London’s Imperial College COVID-19 Response Team, who own authors admitted includes projections that are “worst-case,” combined with the incredibly unrealistic caveat that “there are no interventions or changes in people’s behavior.” The report further admitted that “Epidemic timings are approximate given the limitations of surveillance data in both countries,” in essence cautioning that such predictions will be moot once more sufficient data becomes available. (The Jacobin article was published before a leading author of the report altered his predictions based upon the dramatic responses imposed in countries around the world.)

    With the reader sufficiently shocked by the worst-case projection of victims based on partial data and unrealistic assumptions, French quickly assigns the villain:

     “Many of these fatalities could have been avoided if we had a social order that placed the needs of people over profit,” he declares.

    Helping to shape the readers’ cartoonish image of evil capitalism, the article informs us: 

    “capitalists prioritize profits over the welfare of their workers and of humanity as a whole,” and adds, “They will pollute the environment with deadly toxins and planet-destroying greenhouse gases before spending money on safe production processes.”

    Mass death is but an unconsidered side effect in the heartless system of capitalism. Such is the framing that French establishes.

    This leads into his specific critiques:

    “First, pharmaceutical companies could have started to develop a vaccine for the virus years ago. The novel coronavirus that is now ravaging the world is actually one of a family of coronaviruses (including SARS and MERS) with which we have long been familiar,” French notes.

    “It would have been possible to begin research on vaccines and cures for coronaviruses in general, giving us a head start on treatments for the current outbreak. But pharmaceutical companies did not pursue this research, because the prospect of a cure was not sufficiently profitable.”

    Two elephants in the room go unaddressed in this argument.

    • First, if a vaccine for the virus would save millions of lives in the US alone, potentially tens of millions of lives worldwide, why would that product not be profitable? Does the author honestly think that a product that could literally save one’s life would not be in high demand?

    • Secondly, why does the blame for failing to develop a vaccine fall squarely on private pharmaceutical companies? What about all the other developed nations that have some form of single-payer or universal healthcare system that the Jacobin crowd thinks will save us all? Why didn’t any of them develop a vaccine?

    Next, the article addresses concerns about the consequences of the economic shutdown being imposed on the American economy. “Losing a job could result in losing your health-care coverage or being unable to pay your student loans,” French writes. This concern is entirely justifiable.

    But somehow French doesn’t see the irony in lamenting the close tie between one’s job and health insurance coverage – a result of government policy making insurance coverage tax exempt – as somehow the fault of “capitalism.” Without government interference, far more health insurance coverage would be owned by individuals, not supplied by employers.

    Moreover, the student loan debt crisis is largely a government phenomenon as well. Decades of government subsidies and low-interest loans have helped drive up college tuition, and the federal government owns more than 90 percent of all student loan debt.

    French blames “capitalism” for putting individuals in precarious situations that are highly exacerbated by the pandemic crisis, but the roots are to be found in government intervention.

    Next, he blames greedy capitalist owners for forcing workers to go to work and risk their health because doing otherwise would “hurt bosses’ bottom line.”

    In the following paragraph, however, French is forced to concede that the only specific example he cites, Starbucks, despite staying open for a while, “has since shifted to only providing drive-through service because of employee pressure.”

    In a competitive market, employers must treat employees reasonably well, or else they will be bid away by more hospitable workplaces.

    French then points out the shortages of personal protective equipment such as face masks at hospitals across the country, insisting that this too “is the product of a system that puts profit over people.”

    Not so fast. Cumbersome FDA approval processes have been instrumental in slowing the production of much-needed face masks. Moreover, it’s profit-driven private companies such as 3M that are ramping up production of face masks right now in order to bail out the unprepared public health system.

    Undaunted, French insists, “If we adequately invested in public hospitals or used state resources to rapidly produce necessary medical equipment, the unfolding pandemic would not hit our health-care system nearly as hard.”

    What amount of “investment” would be adequate goes unmentioned. Also unmentioned are the certificate of need (CON) laws still in place in thirty-five states, which require healthcare facilities to get permission from a government commission to expand or otherwise invest in additional medical equipment. These commissions are often stacked with representatives from existing hospitals, who have an incentive to restrict new supply and thus limit competition. Imagine if potential rival retail stores needed to get permission from a committee full of Walmart and Target executives in order to open a new location.

    CON laws are one of countless government interventions limiting the supply of medical care in the US. In this the American Medical Association also plays a vital role. As reported by the American Conservative, the AMA “artificially limits the number of doctors, which drives up salaries for doctors and reduces the availability of care.”

    For more than a hundred years, the AMA has successfully lobbied governments to enact laws that restrict the number of new doctors in the country. AMA activities have included dramatically decreasing the number of medical schools across the country and turning the process of becoming a doctor into a monumental feat that “requires navigating a maze of accrediting, licensing, and examining bodies.”

    The only system putting “profits over people” is that of government interference into the healthcare industry.

    French next tries to convince readers that countries with single-payer systems are well equipped to handle the outbreak, unlike the allegedly free market US system.

    But on this attempt he also can’t avoid self-contradiction or a downright obfuscation of facts:

     “Despite the fact that Italy’s health capacity has been overstressed by the particularly brutal explosion of coronavirus there,” he writes, its universal single-payer health-care system is ensuring that every person, no matter their job or income level, can receive the best treatment possible.”

    Well, not every person.

    As Politico reported as early as March 3, weeks before French published his article, “anesthesiologists and doctors are being called on to make increasingly tough calls on who gets access to beds and respirators when there are not enough to go around.”

    Instead of every person receiving treatment, as French would have you believe is happening, doctors in Italy are forced into “prioritizing younger, otherwise healthy patients over older patients or those with pre-existing conditions.”

    French also insists that “Single-payer systems have allowed Denmark and South Korea to quickly institute coronavirus testing on a large scale, which has been essential to their success in slowing the virus’s spread.”

    In the case of South Korea, however, it was a previous decision by the government to get the public sector out of the way and allow private sector companies to come to the rescue in cases of emergency that was responsible.

    Learning from the 2015 MERS outbreak, reports ProPublica, “Korean officials enacted a key reform, allowing the government to give near-instantaneous approval to testing systems in an emergency.”

    The result? “Within weeks of the current outbreak in Wuhan, China, four Korean companies had manufactured tests from a World Health Organization recipe and, as a result, the country quickly had a system that could assess 10,000 people a day.”

    In these unprecedented times, many are scared, mourning, and otherwise looking for a villain to blame. Jacobin wants to convince readers that somehow for-profit capitalism is to blame for an underwhelming preparedness. Their argument, however, amounts to little more than sloganeering and half-truths. If anything, it’s the wealth created by capitalist systems that will save lives during this pandemic.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 21:55

  • Amid 'Mandatory Lockdown,' Baltimore Officials Approve Spy-Plane To "Collect Images Of City"
    Amid ‘Mandatory Lockdown,’ Baltimore Officials Approve Spy-Plane To “Collect Images Of City”

    For years, we’ve been documenting how spy planes have been flying over the Baltimore Metropolitan Area, transforming the region into a surveillance state. 

    To refresh your memory, the federal government used spy planes to monitor the 2015 riots in Baltimore City.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even before the planes, the military was flying massive spy blimps over the region to “detect cruise missiles.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What you’re beginning to understand is that Baltimore has been the testing ground over the last decade of how the surveillance state, now being ushered in by the COVID-19 outbreak, will be built across major metro areas. 

    Aaron Kesel of ActivistPost laid it out beautifully, “coronavirus outbreak is proving to be the Trojan horse that justifies increased digital surveillance.”

    Baltimore is dealing with several public health crises at the moment, one is a murder epidemic, and the other is the COVID-19 outbreak. Blend it all together, and the city is on the verge of turmoil. Hence why the National Guard was called in several weeks ago, not just to assist local area hospitals dealing with an influx of virus cases and deaths, but also to maintain public order. 

    Like Rahm Emanuel has said, “never let a crisis go to waste.” And that is why the Baltimore City’s Board of Estimates approved the contract to resurrect the spy plane program this week, reported The Baltimore Sun.

    Civil liberties advocates were quick to criticize the spy plane program, that would allow up to three planes circling Baltimore with large optical sensors, capturing images of 32 square miles, monitoring everyone and everything that moves in the city. 

    David Rocah, an attorney for the ACLU of Maryland, said it was “absurd” for Baltimore to approve the spy plane program, which includes “the most far-reaching surveillance technology in the country, during the viral outbreak.” 

    Rocah said each spy plane has military technology that was developed for Middle East wars that track objects, such as cars and people around the city. He said the sensors might not be able to identify a face but will be linked up with land-based CCTV networks on the ground that will turn Baltimore into a full-blown surveillance state. 

    Rocah said for Baltimore to approve the spy plane program during a virus crisis when the public wasn’t able to debate it because of social distancing rules is wrong. 

    Police Commissioner Michael Harrison has been pushing for the program, argues that it will deter crime in a city that is engulfed in a murder crisis. 

    We noted last week that Baltimore’s population crashed to a 100-year low in 2019, as residents have been desperately fleeing the region for the suburbs since the riots unfolded in 2015. At the end of December, Baltimore recorded the most homicides ever on record. On a per-capita basis, the area is one of the most dangerous places in the nation.

    So it makes sense why Harrison wants three spy planes circling the skies – that is because the city has already imploded.  

    “I fully appreciate that the opponents of this program … have fundamental and philosophical beliefs against this kind of technology,” Harrison said. “These differing viewpoints are not solely isolated to this claim and extend to many other tools BPD uses every day.”

    Democratic Mayor Bernard C. “Jack” Young said that he has full support in the spy plane program:

     “I stand behind my commissioner.”

    Rocah warned that spy planes and ground-based CCTV networks would allow the government to have even greater control of low-income “black and brown neighborhoods.”  

    And what is there to say that Baltimore officials won’t surveil the population during mass lockdowns. Or even could potentially track coronavirus patients. 

    With spy planes circling above and an extensive CCTV network on the ground, it’s only a matter of time before “pandemic drones” start buzzing overhead, detecting if residents are coughing and sneezing. 

    A full-blown surveillance state, on par to China, is being erected in Baltimore.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 21:35

  • Morton's Parent Scrambles To Reopen Frozen Loan Market With Record-Yielding 15% Secured Paper
    Morton’s Parent Scrambles To Reopen Frozen Loan Market With Record-Yielding 15% Secured Paper

    While investment grade bonds have recouped most of their early March losses thanks to the Fed’s takeover of the IG bond market now that the NY Fed, via Blackrock, is purchasing the LQD ETF as well as bonds in the open market, the junk bond market has yet to rebound although it is the leveraged loan market that is hurting the most, with the S&P/LSTA index trading a 83 cents of par most recently, still a post crisis low.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Worse, for the past month the loan market which despite being secured is even more illiquid than junk, has been frozen without a single issuers coming to market.

    That changed today when Texas billionaire Tilman Fertitta, owner of casinos and such restaurants as Mortons, Mastro’s and hundreds of others, tried to become the first to end the near one-month drought in the U.S. leveraged loan market with a deal to boost liquidity for his hospitality empire ravaged by the coronavirus.

    Landry’s, which is the parent company of Golden Nugget casinos and hundreds of restaurants including Chart House, Saltgrass Steak House, Bubba Gump Shrimp Co., Claim Jumper, Morton’s The Steakhouse, McCormick & Schmick’s, Mastro’s Restaurants, is hoping to crack the leveraged loan ice by offering investors a record interest rate of 14% over Libor for a $250 million loan, Bloomberg reported citing “people familiar with the matter.”

    The deal, which is being underwritten by the B2/B focused, middle-market titan Jefferies, a long-time go to bank for Fertita, is offering a spread which according to Bloomberg would be the highest ever on a leveraged loan excluding companies in bankruptcy.

    Which such an unprecedented yield on paper that is secured? Because the paper is secured by assets that may well be bankrupt in months, if not weeks: Landry’s told investors it is seeking the funds to increase liquidity as it navigates the impact of the Covid-19 outbreak on its business. The pandemic has brought the travel and leisure industry to a near standstill, leaving Fertitta’s businesses shuttered and burning cash with thousands of lay-offs.

    In effect, the $250MM, 14%, non-call 2 term loan is a quasi-priming DIP loan with the option to take over the company in bankruptcy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A lender meeting for the paper which matures in October 2023 took place at 2 pm New York time Monday, somewhere close to Jefferies office on 52nd and Madison. Based on initial discussions with investors, the loan will have a 1% Libor floor (just in case the Fed goes NIRP in the next few years) and may be offered at a discount of about 96 cents on the dollar, which would push the already record yield to an all-in total well above 15%!

    Leveraged loans have been slower to recover from the recent turmoil than than the high-yield bond market, which reopened last week as we reported at the time. Borrowers have sold debt to replenish credit lines that they’ve been forced to draw during a credit freeze and to shore up liquidity. Some, like Landry’s, are effectively pre-selling a DIP should the company have no choice but to file, which also explains the record yield on what is otherwise secured paper.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 21:08

  • China's Tourist Sites Overwhelmed With Crowds After Emerging From Lockdown
    China’s Tourist Sites Overwhelmed With Crowds After Emerging From Lockdown

    A weekend national Chinese holiday called the Qingming Festival witnessed greatly relaxed restrictions across the country even as health authorities fear the coronavirus outbreak isn’t over, and as the potential for a new wave of ‘asymptomatic’ spreaders has health officials worried.

    It comes at a moment Beijing is slowly trying to open the economy back up, especially retail, restaurant and consumer-related businesses — but as citizens especially in previously hard-hit provinces show a reluctance to venture back into markets and streets. The major outdoor and mountain parks, however, appear to be a different story.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Huangshan mountain park scene over the holiday weekend, via CNN.

    Starting two weeks ago the main tourist destinations, including city zoos, botanical gardens, and wilderness parks and preserves began opening on a large scale.

    Over the weekend popular outdoor destinations, including national parks and tourist sites appeared packed with throngs of people grouped together wearing face masks. This triggered national media controversy and even contradictory messages on the degree to which people should congregate at the parks.

    Huangshan mountain park in the Anhui province was one such park that reached its daily capacity of 20,000 people, according to state-run Global Times.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Photographs of the crowds went viral given it could be a sign China is successfully over the Covid-19 hump.

    The Global Times reported that the park went so far as to waive the usually steep entrance fee (equivalent to $26.70) in order to promote tourism.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shanghai Zoo late last month, Getty Images.

    A mere 39 new cases were reported in China Monday, bringing the country total to 82,641 cases including 3,335 deaths. At the peak of the crisis there were thousands of new cases daily.

    Interestingly, Beijing officials may be deeply divided on how quickly to open the country back up, given as CNN describes rare contradictory messages were issued to the public over the weekend

    After pictures of the crowds at Huangshan emerged on social media, the People’s Daily, the official newspaper of the ruling Communist Party, issued a stern reprimand on social media warning tourists: “Do not gather!”

    In a commentary published on the newspaper’s website, one opinion writer said while it was understandable people would want to get out after being shut up in quarantine, now was not the time to stop being “vigilant.”

    “If there are asymptomatic carriers present during large-scale gatherings, the consequences would be severe,” the article said.

    According to the paper, Huangshan has since announced it will stop receiving tourists.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But other bustling scenes of people eager to return to ‘normalcy’ were captured across the country, for example in Shanghai, where the Bund waterfront was filled with shoppers and tourists. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    View of Zhangjiajie National Forest Park, via Shutterstock/aphotostory.

    City parks and public spaces in Beijing were also very busy, however, indoor tight-quarter places like theaters have remained closed after a brief attempt in March to open them back up.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 20:55

  • 'Stay-At-Home' Orders Have Created A "Perfect Storm" For Grifters, Scammers, & Spoofers
    ‘Stay-At-Home’ Orders Have Created A “Perfect Storm” For Grifters, Scammers, & Spoofers

    Authored by John Wasik via RealClearInvestigations.com,

    This tax season, thousands of people may feel the same joy I experienced upon receiving a large and unexpected refund check from Uncle Sam. Unfortunately, they will also experience the dismay and fear when they find out that it was fraudulent refund.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Someone had stolen one of our Social Security numbers – cyber-robbers’ modus operandi of choice these days.

    Then they filed a false return claiming huge deductions against modest income in our names.

    That resulted in the bogus refund check.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    On YouTube, a would-be victim, above, turns the tables on an IRS phone “spoofer.” YouTube/Brandon Cox

    Usually, the way this scam works is that grifters mail the big, fake refund to themselves, but somehow it ended up in our mailbox. After immediately checking with my tax planner, I sent the check back to the IRS and filed an identity theft affidavit so that the tax agency would know the refund was fake.

    To thwart scammers, the agency has improved the algorithms it uses to flag discrepancies. But while effective, it is not foolproof.

    And thieves are not taking a break, especially with the filing deadline moved to July 15 due to the coronavirus crisis. In fact, stay-at-home orders create a perfect storm for scammers. The heightened anxiety surrounding the crisis softens up potential victims. Not only that, the mailing out of federal coronavirus stimulus checks soon is creating new opportunities for fraud.

    In many cases, cheap technology allows thieves to make millions of robocalls to housebound individuals for a few hundred dollars. So beware of “spoofing,” where a fake but official-looking name and number will appear on a caller ID. “Scammers often alter caller ID to make it look like the IRS or another agency is calling,” the IRS reports. “The callers use IRS titles and fake badge numbers to appear legitimate. They may use the victim’s name, address and other personal information to make the call sound official.”

    In a common scenario, robocallers claim they are with the IRS and threaten to sue or arrest the target over unpaid tax bills. And these scams are now more than seasonal; they are happening year-round, the IRS reports.

    Worried that you’ve been scammed? The IRS gives you options to report concerns. You can also file electronically and use a Personal Identification Number. The IRS will send you one for free. After I got mine – they will issue a new one every year – I haven’t had a problem with grifters.

    – John F. Wasik

    The extension of the filing deadline not only gives taxpayers three extra months, but also provides scammers with an extra 90 days of prime-time flim-flam.  In a normal year, some 61% of tax scams are reported between January and April, according to the Better Business Bureau. All told, the IRS has logged more than 736,000 scam “contacts” since 2013, costing taxpayers some $23 million. The number is likely much higher since many cases go unreported.

    In addition to robocalls, scam methods include fake IRS letterheads and addresses, emails and outright demands to pay taxes not owed. In each case, the operators are looking for quick cash or vital personal financial information. They employ “phishing” techniques to get victims to reply with Social Security or bank account numbers. Then can use that information to open up credit cards or sell it to other thieves.

    How do scamsters acquire personal information and what do they do with it once they get their hands on it? Tyler Carbone, chief strategy officer of Terbium Labs, a digital risk protection firm, says one of the most prevalent ways to steal personal information is through W-2s, the basic tax forms employers use.

    “Each consumer W-2 names a business and provides employer information as part of the required documentation,” Carbone notes.

    Once a fraudster finishes executing tax fraud against the consumer, there’s no reason for them to simply stop there. In possession of an employee’s name and employer information (something they can steal from employer system breaches or the dark web), they have a great opportunity to do a little research and develop a phishing campaign or business email compromise scheme to go after the employer as well – or to find ways to exploit other employees and colleagues of the original consumer.”

    Like just about anything to do with fraud these days, the Internet is a thieves’ market whose shelves are well stocked with personal information.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From a site that tracks the “dark web.” DarkReading.com

    On the dark web, where illicit information is openly peddled, full identity kits, called “fullz,” can be purchased for under $40, notes one site tracking the dark web. “A “fullz” for a U.S. consumer contains a person’s full name, birth date, Social Security number, address, phone number, driver’s license number, and mother’s maiden name,” notes DarkReading.com. “For an extra $10 to $25, sellers will add an individual’s credit card data, bank account data, bank security questions and answers, employer, or other critical information.”

    It is, of course, illegal to sell such stolen information, but there is loads of it out there on the black market. Data breaches, unfortunately, are a fact of life these days, according to Identityforce.com, a private company that offers identity theft protection services. Hundreds of millions of records are pilfered, ranging from Dunkin Donuts perks programs to Facebook, which admitted last year it hadn’t secured the passwords for some 600 million users. With all that information out there – i.e. my Social Security number, your credit files – why isn’t the dark web shut down?

    Carbone has found that with dark web sites “it is impossible to know from the hosting alone where they are hosted, or who is hosting them, so many are able to successfully operate anonymously until they are unmasked by other means.”

    “Other sites are hosted on regular, open web sites,” Carbone adds. “In these cases, they are hosted outside the United States – usually in Eastern Europe, where takedown requests from U.S. entities frequently go without response.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A W-2 form, even an old one, can be a ticket to tax fraud. IRS.gov

    There’s even more to it: Some sites offer guidance on how to employ dark web information to set up income tax scams. Carbone found one site offering an instructional manual on how to file fraudulent tax returns for 2019 using fullz for $30.

    “These guides,” Carbone said, “help criminals to monetize the information available on the dark web, turning already low-cost data into high profits.”

    Carbone also found a site that was selling two-year-old W-2s, federal statements of income and tax withheld, which can also be used for income-tax fraud:

    “This listing shows that while tax fraud may be seasonal, identity data is good all year. As long as they aren’t several years out of date, a year-old W-2 is still useful for filing fraudulent tax returns, on the assumption that an employee is still with their current employer and has roughly the same income level year to year. These tax documents go for $20 and provide a lot of flexibility for criminals to carry out tax fraud and broader identity theft.”

    Yes, once your information is out there on the dark web, it can be repurposed for any number of nefarious schemes. That’s why it’s a good idea to freeze your credit files (I did) and to only use encrypted sites when doing online transactions such as banking and purchases (look for third-party certification marques or two-factor authentication). And don’t file your taxes electronically on a public Wi-Fi. These networks are not secure. Secure sites will have some kind of third-party marque indicating that transactions are protected in some way. The larger e-commerce sites now use “two-factor authentication,” where they will send you a code number to your cellphone before greenlighting a purchase. (Whenever I send or receive sensitive financial documents such as tax returns, I or my tax preparer use a third-party encryption tool that can only be opened with a code or specific personal identification number)

    Since the online sites are almost always offshore and can disappear in seconds, they are beyond the reach of overburdened federal investigators probing hundreds of thousands of complaints.  Justin Lavelle, communications director for BeenVerified.com, a consumer background check information company, said many of the scams are based in India. “But some are coming from Africa,” he said. “Among IRS tax scams, the IRS impersonation scam is most prevalent. They are all time-sensitive — ‘pay by a certain date or something bad will happen’ – and demand immediate payment or Social Security numbers.”

    When immediate payment is demanded, though, thieves often tell victims that they need to send them gift cards or single-use debit cards. “Older folks tend to be the biggest targets, especially those on Social Security,” Lavelle said.

    “It’s definitely an ongoing game of cat and mouse,” Carbone concludes.

    “Law-enforcement, both U.S. and international, are constantly trying to identify the hosts of these sites. That’s why we need to take an automated approach to finding and crawling these sites, as existing markets are shut down by law-enforcement, and new ones emerge.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 20:35

  • "Media Extinction Event": Print Newspapers Face COVID-19 Death-Knell
    “Media Extinction Event”: Print Newspapers Face COVID-19 Death-Knell

    Traditional print media was already on the ropes long before the crisis, in competition with exploding alternative forms of digital news and independent platforms, but the coronavirus pandemic and accompanying shutdown of the economy could prove the final death blow.

    Bloomberg reports at a moment newspaper staff in cities and towns across the US are being furloughed in huge numbers and increasingly being issued pay cuts that “Local papers are slashing staff and publishing less frequently as the already-battered businesses try to weather the Covid-19 storm. Many either won’t survive or will have to drastically reduce their operations.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image via AP/Shutterstock 

    In some cases for those newspapers not yet completely shuttered, it’s translating into a rapid transition to digital presence only. Others are going from being daily papers to only delivering print copies twice a week — this also as cash-strapped advertisers and shuttered retail stores are foregoing conventional ads.

    “I’m hearing 40% to 60% drops in revenue over the last 30 days,” Dean Ridings, chief executive officer of the national trade association America’s Newspapers, said. “The advertisers are the local mom and pops, the retailers, the restaurants, who are understandably canceling their advertisements.”

    Some notable developments strongly suggesting the writing is on the wall:

    • Recall that Warren Buffett already abandoned the industry in January, selling all 31 daily papers to Lee Enterprises Inc. for $140 million.
    • Largest American newspaper chain Gannet Co., which owns USA Today along with hundreds of local papers like the the important Des Moines Register, announced this past week it’s been forced to slash jobs and furlough workers amid the outbreak carnage.
    • A recent Buzzfeed headline dubbed the pandemic a “media extinction event.” 
    • BuzzFeed itself announced pay cuts employees through May in order to stave off mass layoffs.
    • Tampa Bay Times furloughed much of its staff and announced that print production would now only go to Sundays and Wednesdays for the time bing. “These extraordinary times call for extraordinary measures,” Tampa Bay Times chairman Paul Tash said.
    • WaPo media columnist Margaret Sullivan has called for urgent stimulus money to be injected into the dying industry: “News-industry experts have been predicting for years that a recession of severe economic downturn would deliver a death blow to these already troubled businesses.”

    Additionally, Local papers which in some instances have been around for almost a century have had to close their doors.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bloomberg writes of one notable instance: “In Oregon, Smith family sells off newspapers after 87-year run The business grew into a chain of publications  chronicling local events through the Depression, Smith becoming Oregon’s governor, and a gas leak in the ’70s that destroyed one of the company’s printing presses  all under the family’s ownership. Until this week.

    Many residents of smaller to mid-sized towns and cities see the local paper as “irreplaceable” — given it’s often the only source for local news and events, and a crucial longtime vehicle of local culture of sorts.

    “Whether it’s the watchdog to cover the city council, or the school board, or even the Little League, the newspaper was the last remaining source for local information,” America’s Newspapers Dean Ridings told Bloomberg further.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 20:15

  • Gold Futures Extend Gains To 8 Year Highs After Pelosi's Trillion-Dollar Promise
    Gold Futures Extend Gains To 8 Year Highs After Pelosi’s Trillion-Dollar Promise

    COVID-19 appears to have impacted the deep fiscally-conservative regions of the brains of politicians more than many suspected possible as left, right, and center seem to be coalescing around the fact that moar spending is better, moar helicopter money is even better-er, and moar zeros in the national debt is better-est!

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Tonight’s latest utterance/demands from Speaker Pelosi – that the next, fourth, round of virus-relief stimulus must be at least $1 trillion – appears to have confirmed one thing (as @hkuppy notes so pointedly):

    ” Glad to see both parties supporting gold $10k…”

    And sure enough, gold is soaring after hours following this headline…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Back to Dec 2012 highs…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And once again futures are decoupling from spot as that physical (geographical) shortage rears its ugly head once again…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One thing is for sure, not only is gold signaling systemic risk is soaring, sovereign credit markets are starting to leak information…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Referring to his institutional market research at Global Macro Investor, we give the last word to Raoul Pal and his most recent thoughts (excerpted) on “A Dollar Standard Crisis” are

    ….

    Don’t forget – the $13tn short dollar positions (foreign dollar debt held mainly by foreign corporation and investment vehicles) is the largest position ever taken in the history of global financial markets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It can only mean a massive, uncontrolled dollar rally.

    QE will not fix this. Swap lines will not fix this. A debt jubilee would fix this or multiple trillions of dollars in write-downs and defaults.

    It is the dollar strength that brings to world to its nadir (just like the 1930s). It is the dollar system that is the really big problem.

    The dollar has eaten all of its competitors and now it is going to eat itself.

    This eventually breaks the dollar after a super-spike as global central banks are forced to find alternatives.

    Remember, nothing lasts forever…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The world’s elite have long wanted to replace the US dollar with a single global super-currency, as The World Bank’s former chief economist said in 2014, it will create a more stable global financial system.

    “The dominance of the greenback is the root cause of global financial and economic crises,” Justin Yifu Lin told Bruegel, a Brussels-based policy-research think tank.

    “The solution to this is to replace the national currency with a global currency.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 20:02

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 6th April 2020

  • India Bans Exports Of Trump's "Game Changer" Anti-COVID-19 Drug
    India Bans Exports Of Trump’s “Game Changer” Anti-COVID-19 Drug

    After initially declaring that he wouldn’t use the DPA because American companies were doing the right thing and accelerating production of ventilators and other critical supplies on their own – Trump said that with a straight face while Elon Musk turned in a batch of Tesla-made “ventilators” that turned out to be CPAP machinesPresident Trump became embroiled in what has become by all accounts a nasty feud with 3M, a Dow constituent and pillar of American industry.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After Trump accused the company for being “unpatriotic” and risking American lives by choosing to honor contracts promising deliveries of critical medical supplies to customers abroad instead of turning them over to hospitals in the US, its CEO appeared on CNBC Friday to try and explain why its decision would save more lives in the long run because it would surely prompt other countries to respond in-kind. And given 3M’s complex, international supply chain, this could jeopardize the company’s ability to continue providing its products to the US.

    Many of Trump’s critics blasted the president for appearing to scapegoat a vital American corporation for the administration’s flat-footed response to the outbreak, and repeated some version of the argument outlined above. And while their arguments are certainly based on a reasonable foundation, they’ve neglected to mention one critical fact: Other countries are already doing the same thing to the US. Many Chinese factories have stopped delivering products from masks and gloves all the way to widely used drugs. And now, after earlier restricting its export to purely “humanitarian” grounds (as if there was any other reason for the use of medicine), New Delhi is banning export of hydroxychloroquine, a malaria drug that Trump once touted as a “game changer”, and which has recently proved effective at combating some of the virus’s deadliest symptoms.

    According to Bloomberg, exports of the drug and its formulations are now being prohibited “without any exceptions” and with immediate effect, according to India’s Directorate General of Foreign Trade. The statement is dated April 4.

    Trump raised the issue of India’s decision to restrict export of the drug up during Saturday’s press conference. He claimed that he had appealed directly to Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi for already-ordered shipments of the drug to be released to the US

    India is giving his request “serious consideration,” the president said.

    Trump says the federal government is stockpiling millions of doses of the drug to make it available for coronavirus patients. And fortunately, it’s not the only drug that has shown to be effective in treating COVID-19. Japanese PM Shinzo Abe recently ordered apanese drugmakers to ramp up production of Avigan, a drug Abe believes to be quite effective. Antivirals like Gilead’s Remdesivir have also shown effectiveness and are also being studied.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 02:30

  • How Generals Fueled 1918 Flu Pandemic To Win Their World War
    How Generals Fueled 1918 Flu Pandemic To Win Their World War

    Authored by Gareth Porter via TheAmericanConservative.com,

    Just like today, brass and bureaucrats ignored warnings, and sent troops overseas despite the consequences.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The U.S. military has been forced by the coronavirus pandemic to make some serious changes in their operations. But the Pentagon, and especially the Navy, have also displayed a revealing resistance to moves to stand down that were clearly needed to protect troops from the raging virus from the start.

    The Army and Marine Corps have shifted from in-person to virtual recruitment meetings. But the Pentagon has reversed an initial Army decision to postpone further training and exercises for at least 30 days, and it has decided to continue sending new recruits from all the services to basic training camps, where they would no doubt be unable to sustain social distancing.

    On Thursday, the captain of the aircraft carrier USS Theodore Roosevelt, on which the virus was reportedly spreading, was relieved of command. He was blamed by his superiors for the leak of a letter he wrote warning the Navy that failure to act rapidly threatened the health of his 5,000 sailors.

    Secretary of Defense Mark Esper justified his decision to continue many military activities as usual by declaring these activities are “critical to national security.” But does anyone truly believe there is a military threat on the horizon that the Pentagon must prepare for right now? It is widely understood outside the Pentagon that the only real threat to that security is the coronavirus itself.

    Esper’s decisions reflect a deeply ingrained Pentagon habit of protecting its parochial military interests at the expense of the health of American troops.

    This pattern of behavior recalls the far worse case of the U.S. service chiefs once managing the war in Europe. They acted with even greater callousness toward the troops being called off to war in Europe during the devastating “Spanish flu” pandemic of 1918, which killed 50 million people worldwide.

    It was called the “Spanish flu” only because, while the United States, Britain and France were all censoring news about the spread of the pandemic in their countries to maintain domestic morale, the press in neutralist Spain was reporting freely on influenza cases there. In fact, the first major wave of infections in the United States came in U.S. training camps set up to serve the war.

    Abundant documentary evidence shows that the 1918 pandemic actually began in Haskell County, Kansas, in early 1918, when many residents came down with an unusually severe type of influenza. Some county residents were then sent to the Army’s Camp Funston at Ft. Riley, Kansas, the military’s largest training facility, training 50,000 recruits at a time for the war. Within two weeks, thousands of soldiers at the camp became sick with the new influenza virus, and 38 died.

    Recruits at 14 of 32 large military training camps set up across the country to feed the U.S. war in Europe soon reported similar influenza outbreaks, apparently because some troops from Camp Funston had been sent there. By May 1918, hundreds of thousands of troops, many of whom were already infected, began boarding troopships bound for Europe, and the crowding onboard the ships created ideal conditions for the virus to explode further.

    In the trenches in France, still more U.S. troops continued to be sickened by the virus, at first with milder illness and relatively few deaths But the war managers simply evacuated the sick and brought in fresh replacements, allowing the virus to adapt and mutate into more virulent and more lethal strains.

    The consequences of that approach to the war became evident after the August 27 arrival in Boston harbor, when visitors brought a much more virulent and lethal strain of the virus; it quickly entered Boston itself and by September 8, had appeared at Camp Devens outside the city. Within ten days, the camp had thousands of soldiers sick with the new strain, and some of those infected at the camp boarded troops ships for Europe.

    Meanwhile the lethal new strain spread from Camp Devens across the United States through September and October, ravaging one city after another. From September onward, the U.S. command in France, led by Gen. John Pershing, and the war managers in the War Department in Washington, were well aware that both U.S. troops already in Europe and the American public were suffering vast numbers of severe illnesses and death from the pandemic.

    Nevertheless, Pershing continued to call for large numbers of the replacements for those stricken at the front lines, as well as for new divisions to launch a major offensive late in the year. In a message to the War Department on September 3, Pershing demanded an additional 179,000 troops.

    The internal debate that followed that request, recounted by historian Carol R. Byerly, documents the chilling indifference of Pershing and the military bureaucracy in Washington to the fate of American troops they planned to send to war. After watching the horror of lethally-infected soldiers dying of pneumonia in the infected camps, acting Army Surgeon General Charles Richard strongly advised Army Chief of Staff Peyton March in late September against sending troops from the infected camps to France until the epidemic had been brought under control in the surrounding region, and March agreed.

    Richard then asked for stopping the draft calls for young men heading for any camp known to be already infected. March wouldn’t go that far, and although the October draft was called off, it was to resume in November. The War Department acknowledged the heavy toll the pandemic was taking on U.S. troops in October 10, informing Pershing that he would get his troops by November 30, “if we are not stopped on account of Influenza, which has now passed the 200,000 mark.”

    Richard then called for troops to be quarantined for a week before being shipped to Europe, and that the troopships carry only half the standard number of troops to reduce crowding. When March rejected those moves, which would have made it impossible for him to meet Pershing’s targets, Richard then recommended that all troop shipments be suspended until the influenza pandemic was brought under control, “except such as are demanded by urgent military necessity.”

    But the chief of staff rejected such a radical shift in policy, and went to the White House to get President Woodrow Wilson’s approval for the decision. Wilson, obviously recognizing the implications of going ahead under the circumstances, asked why he refused to stop troop transport during the epidemic. March argued that Germany would be encouraged to fight on if it knew “the American divisions and replacements were no longer arriving.”Wilson then approved his decision, refusing to disturb Pershing’s war plans.

    But the decision was not carried out fully. The German Supreme Command had already demanded that the Kaiser accept Wilson’s 14 points, and the armistice was signed on November 11.

    The disastrous character of the U.S. elite running the First World War is clearly revealed with the astonishing fact that more American soldiers were killed and hospitalized by influenza (63,114) than in combat (53,402). And an estimated 340,000 American troops were hospitalized with influenza/pneumonia, compared with 227,000 hospitalized by Germans attacks.

    The lack of concern of Washington bureaucrats for the well-being of the troops, as they pursue their own war interests, appears to be a common pattern—seen too, in the U.S. wars in Vietnam, Afghanistan and Iraq. Now it has been revealed once again in the stunningly callous response of the Pentagon to the coronavirus pandemic crisis.

    In the 1918 war, there was no protest against that cold indifference, but there are now indications that the families of soldiers put being at risk are expressing their anger about it openly to representatives of the military. In a time of socio-political upheaval, and vanishing tolerance for the continuation of endless war, it could be a harbinger of accelerated unraveling of political tolerance for the war state’s overweening power.

    *  *  *

    Gareth Porter is an independent journalist and winner of the 2012 Gellhorn Prize for journalism. He is the author of numerous books, including Manufactured Crisis: The Untold Story of the Iran Nuclear Scare (2014), and The CIA Insiders Guide to Iran (2020),  co-written  with John Kiriakou.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 02:00

  • "Meet The Global Robot Army That's Been Deployed To Fight COVID-19
    “Meet The Global Robot Army That’s Been Deployed To Fight COVID-19

    In addition to the selfless human heroes who continue to fight the unprecedented global pandemic on its front-lines, there has also been a lesser covered group of virus-fighters, dutifully going about their daily tasks to help battle the virus.

    We’re referring to the global robot army that has been deployed to fight the virus.

    Robots worldwide are doing everything from bathing surfaces with radiation, sanitizing floors, scanning for fevers, spewing anti-microbial gas and enforcing mask wearing, according to the WSJ. Many of the robots are being put to work in areas where humans haven’t tread yet, especially in areas like hospital cleaning.

    For example, at Cincinnati/Northern Kentucky International Airport, there’s a robot that disinfects and dispensing germ-killing fluid from its tanks. The robot weighs 1,050 pounds and is equipped with AI and a bank of cameras and sensors. Similar robots are already being used en masse at Changi in Singapore.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When the outbreak happened in China, UBTech Robotics, based in Shenzhen, China, developed a program to modify its robots to battle the virus. They attached a disinfectant sprayer to their Atris outdoor robot, which allows it to spray in public places. 

    They have also modified two other models, the Cruzr and Aimbot, to be able to take people’s temperature using thermal cameras. The robot’s object-recognition algorithms allow them to also determine whether or not a person is wearing a mask.

    Other robots are using UV light in indoor spaces to disinfect. UVC lights have long been used in hospitals to disinfect and sanitize rooms. Since the lights are harmful to humans (but also lethal to microbes), no humans can be in the room while disinfecting is taking place.

    UVC lights can clean an entire room in anywhere from 10 minutes to an hour, depending on the strength of the bulb being used. They can also reach surfaces often missed by human cleaners and kill airborne microbes – a feature that could come in hand if the coronavirus is spreading by people breathing in particles in indoor spaces.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Companies like UVD Robots, launched in Denmark in 2014, are working to try and implement these lights in a safe way for humans, on top of robots that can wander public spaces. Demand for UVC disinfecting robots has “exploded” by 2x to 3x since December of last year, CEO Juul Nielsen says. They are being considered for places like warehouses, prisons and offices and are operating in a manner similar to the way robots are used in areas like melted down nuclear power plants.

    Some of the outlook for the industry remains unclear and it is possible that the idea of autonomous robots that clean may lose some of its glimmer after the coronavirus fades. They may also turn out to not be cost effective, compared to traditional manual labor which can easily clean tough to reach surfaces, like door handles.

    But Jenny Lee, a 15-year veteran of venture-capital firm GGV Capital, thinks that the focus on robots now will translate to a broader focus on automation going forward. She hopes companies will continue to work on robots with smaller form factors and more autonomy. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Benjamin Tanner, chief executive of Austin, Texas-based Microchem Laboratory said: “There are manufacturers who have done no testing of their own, and it’s a little bit of buyer beware on the UV market.”

    John Rhee, general manager of UBTech Robotics North America concluded: “We talk about flattening the curve, but the need to be vigilant and have increased monitoring and have measures in place to decrease transmission are things that organizations both public and private will have to take seriously for a very long time.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 04/06/2020 – 01:00

  • UK Rejects Assange Release Request Amid COVID-19 Crisis, But Frees Thousands Of Others
    UK Rejects Assange Release Request Amid COVID-19 Crisis, But Frees Thousands Of Others

    Via ConsortiumNews.com,

    Imprisoned WikiLeaks publisher Julian Assange is not eligible for an early Covid-19 release from prison with other inmates because he is not serving a criminal sentence, the Australian Associated Press has reported.

    British Justice Secretary Robert Buckland said Saturday that some low-risk inmates, weeks from release will be let go with monitoring devices to help avoid a further outbreak of Covid-19 in the nations’ prisons.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Belmarsh Prison in London, file image.

    So far 88 prisoners and 15 staff have tested positive for the virus in British prisons. More than 25 percent of the nations’ prison staff are quarantining themselves. 

    “This government is committed to ensuring that justice is served to those who break the law,” Buckland said in a statement. “But this is an unprecedented situation because if coronavirus takes hold in our prisons, the NHS could be overwhelmed and more lives put at risk.”

    The Ministry of Justice told the AAP that Assange won’t be among those released because he isn’t serving a custodial sentence

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WikiLeaks’ founder Julian Assange leaves Westminster Magistrates Court in London.

    Britain will release about 4,000 nonviolent inmates from their prisons to help curb the spread of the coronavirus, the country’s Ministry of Justice announced Saturday.

    The ministry described prisoners eligible for release as “low-risk offenders,” noting those convicted of violent or sexual offenses will not be considered.

    Inmates will be tracked electronically and required to stay home, officials said. — The Hill

    In other words, because he has not been convicted of a crime, and is instead only being held on remand pending the outcome of the U.S. extradition request, he must remain in Belmarsh prison with high-risk inmates–the most serious and hardened criminals

    WikiLeaks Ambassador Joseph Farrell released this video:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Daily Maverick reported this week that there is one other prisoner on remand in Belmarsh, who would presumably also be left to rot in the jail as the virus spreads throughout the British prison system. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 23:50

  • Peter Navarro Explodes At Fauci In Heated Showdown Over Hydroxychloroquine
    Peter Navarro Explodes At Fauci In Heated Showdown Over Hydroxychloroquine

    White House economic adviser got into a massive argument with the coronavirus task force’s Anthony Fauci over the doctor’s ongoing resistance to the use of hydroxychloroquine to treat COVID-19, despite reports of the drug’s widespread efficacy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Axios:

    • Numerous government officials were at the table, including Fauci, coronavirus response coordinator Deborah Birx, Jared Kushner, acting Homeland Security Secretary Chad Wolf, and Commissioner of Food and Drugs Stephen Hahn.
    • Behind them sat staff, including Peter Navarro, tapped by Trump to compel private companies to meet the government’s coronavirus needs under the Defense Production Act.

    According to the report, towards the end of the meeting Hahn began a discussion of the commonly used malaria drug hydroxychloroquine – which was recently rated the ‘most effective therapy‘ for coronavirus according to a global survey of more than 6,000 doctors.

    After Hahn gave an update on various trials and real-world use of the drug, Navarro got up and dropped a stack of folders on the table to pass around.

    According to Axios‘s source, “the first words out of his [Navarro’s] mouth are that the studies that he’s seen, I believe they’re mostly overseas, show ‘clear therapeutic efficacy,’” adding “Those are the exact words out of his mouth.

    Fauci – who’s not got his own Twitter hashtag, #FireFauci – began pushing back against Navarro, repeating his oft-repeated contention that ‘there’s only anecdotal evidence’ that the drug works against COVID-19.

    Navarro exploded – after Fauci’s mention of anecdotal evidence “just set Peter off.” The economic adviser shot back “That’s the science, not anecdote,” while pointing to the stack of folders on the desk, which included the results of studies from around the world showing its efficacy.

    Here’s what unfolded next, via Axios:

    Navarro started raising his voice, and at one point accused Fauci of objecting to Trump’s travel restrictions, saying, “You were the one who early on objected to the travel restrictions with China,” saying that travel restrictions don’t work. (Navarro was one of the earliest to push the China travel ban.)

    • Fauci looked confused, according to a source in the room. After Trump imposed the travel restrictions, Fauci has publicly praised the president’s restriction on travel from China.
    • Pence was trying to moderate the heated discussion. “It was pretty clear that everyone was just trying to get Peter to sit down and stop being so confrontational,” said one of the sources.
    • Eventually, Kushner turned to Navarro and said, “Peter, take yes for an answer,” because most everyone agreed, by that time, it was important to surge the supply of the drug to hot zones.
    • The principals agreed that the administration’s public stance should be that the decision to use the drug is between doctors and patients.
    • Trump ended up announcing at his press conference that he had 29 million doses of hydroxychloroquine in the Strategic National Stockpile.

    According to a source familiar with the coronavirus task force, “There has never been a confrontation in the task force meetings like the one yesterday,” adding “People speak up and there’s robust debate, but there’s never been a confrontation. Yesterday was the first confrontation.” 

    Meanwhile, 37% of 6,227 doctors across 30 countries felt the drug was the “most effective therapy” out of 15 options in treating coronavirus, according to a poll reported by the Washington Times.

    The drug has been prescribed in 72% of cases in Spain, 49% in Italy, 41% in Brazil, 39% in Mexico, 28% in France, and 23% in the USA. Overall, 19% of physicians have prescribed the drug for high-risk patients, and 8% for low-risk patients.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    More from the Sermo poll (via the Washington Times)

    ***

    Sermo CEO Peter Kirk called the polling results a “treasure trove of global insights for policy makers.”

    “Physicians should have more of a voice in how we deal with this pandemic and be able to quickly share information with one another and the world,” he said. “With censorship of the media and the medical community in some countries, along with biased and poorly designed studies, solutions to the pandemic are being delayed.”

    The survey also found that 63% of U.S. physicians believe restrictions should be lifted in six weeks or more, and that the epidemic’s peak is at least 3-4 weeks away.

    The survey also found that 83% of global physicians anticipate a second global outbreak, including 90% of U.S. doctors but only 50% of physicians in China.

    On average, U.S. coronavirus testing takes 4-5 days, while 10% of cases take longer than seven days. In China, 73% of doctors reported getting rest results back in 24 hours.

    In cases of ventilator shortages, all countries but China said the top criteria should be patients with the best chance of recovery (47%), followed by patients with the highest risk of death (21%), and then first responders (15%).


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 23:25

  • Wall Street's Formerly Biggest Bear Goes All-In Ahead Of The Coming Runaway Inflation
    Wall Street’s Formerly Biggest Bear Goes All-In Ahead Of The Coming Runaway Inflation

    Last week we reported that Morgan Stanley’s Michael Wilson, who for most of 2018 and 2019 had dominated the league tables as the biggest bear among Wall Street’s big banks (this of course excludes such outlier bears as SocGen’s Albert Edwards who has for years been warning about what is coming), turned bullish and last Monday said that he is a “buyer of dips” since “2400-2600 on the S&P 500 will prove to be very good entry points for those with a time horizon of 6-12 months.”

    Over the weekend, Wilson was also the author of Morgan Stanley’s influential Sunday Start weekly which sets the narrative not only for the key bank themes over the rest of the week, but also is a signpost for Morgan Stanley’s clients, and perhaps not surprisingly, Wilson used the podium to expand why on such short notice, he has U-turned from Wall Street’s de facto uber bear to one of the biggest, if not most vocal, bulls. 

    In a nutshell, what follows is his explanation why “Bear Markets END with Recessions“, which in theory is correct, but one wonders what happens if instead of a recession we are looking at a depression. And if so, the real question is when will the bear market end, because as a reminder the recession of 1929, which of course was much more than just a recession, lasted 43 months. If we are indeed entering another D-word phase, are we looking at another 43 months before the market stabilizes?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In any case, here is Wilson with a dose of – rather rare these days – bullishness, and not only that, but a rather somber assessment of what is really coming down the line – runaway inflation and a sharply lower dollar:

    In the past month, we’ve experienced a full bear market, down 20%, and a full bull market, up 20%. Of course, this extreme volatility follows a period of extreme calm that saw some of the lowest volatility readings in history. As the famed economist Hyman Minsky observed, a market collapse can be brought on by the speculative activity that defines an unsustainable bullish period – the Minsky Moment. If you accept that 4Q19 resembled a speculative frenzy driven more by liquidity than fundamentals, the Minsky Moment diagnosis is not only compelling but hard to refute.

    In my Sunday Start last month (Unfinished Business), I suggested the US economy was finally headed toward a recession but, once over, it could usher in the second leg of the secular bull market. Since then, whatever debate remained on the recession has been conclusively resolved, with the discussion quickly shifting to who can come up with the most negative forecasts.

    That’s the bad news. The good news is that crises lead to bailouts, and this time is no different. Since this is a public health crisis, the response has been extreme. There are literally no governors on the amount of monetary or fiscal stimulus that will be used in this fight. As evidence, our economists now estimate a US fiscal deficit of 18% this year, a level last seen during World War II. While the struggle against Covid-19 is a war, the amount of money being thrown at this enemy may be excessive, given that this conflict will be shorter and the outcome more certain – we will win. The destruction of productive assets will undoubtedly be much less severe than in WWII, leaving potential GDP intact once the recession is over even though the recovery path is uncertain.

    Recessions require a trigger, and the conditions must be in place for that trigger to work. Every expansion leads to excessive credit creation, and this time it took place in corporate credit and the shadow banks, among other areas. A recession always creates the most pain where credit and leverage had reached excess. However, given the extreme response from the Fed and Congress, we envision less pain than normal for these bad actors. This is one reason why we have been getting more bullish in the past few weeks, though the economic and earnings data are likely to remain bad and even get worse.

    My longer-term secular bull market view has always assumed a cyclical bear market in the middle punctuated by a recession – like today. I’ve argued further that the next leg of the secular bull would see the long-awaited appearance of inflation, which would require a transition from monetary to fiscal policy dominance. Cue the steepest recession since the 1940s accompanied by a health crisis.

    The old adage of “never let a good crisis go to waste” could not be more apropos today. Not only are we likely to get the largest peacetime fiscal deficit in history, but the stimulus targets the parts of the economy with a higher propensity to spend. The first experiment with QE after the financial crisis was accompanied by fiscal austerity and bank regulation – a deflationary combination. This time, we have a potentially much more inflationary combination of an unprecedented targeted fiscal stimulus and possible deregulation of the banks to get the cash into the hands of lower income individuals and small businesses that are inclined to spend it. Such a dramatic shift in US fiscal and monetary policy relative to other regions should lead to a materially weaker dollar, which is ultimately the easiest path to reflation not only for the US, but also the world.

    Finally, let’s not forget some of the other inflationary developments of the past five years – populism, which has driven minimum wage legislation, and nationalism, which has led to tariffs and a trend toward de-globalization. Now a pandemic will likely further disrupt and permanently add costs to global supply chains.

    To summarize, with the forced liquidation of assets in the past month largely behind us, unprecedented and unbridled monetary and fiscal intervention led by the US, and the most attractive valuation we have seen since 2011, we stick to our recent view that the worst is behind us for this cyclical bear market that began two years ago, not last month.

    Therefore, current levels in equity and credit markets should prove to be good entry points on a 6-12-month horizon. Bear markets end with recessions, they don’t begin with them, making the risk/reward more attractive today than it’s been in years; with the twist that the next leg of the bull market could look much different than the last and the unthinkable – inflation – begins to appear.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 23:04

  • COVID-19 & China's Colossal Cover-Up
    COVID-19 & China’s Colossal Cover-Up

    Authored by Giulio Meotti via The Gatestone Institute,

    We have been paying dearly for China’s lies.

    “This is one of the worst cover-ups in human history, and now the world is facing a global pandemic,” said Rep. Michael T. McCaul, the ranking Republican member of the House Foreign Affairs Committee, before the US intelligence community concluded, in a classified report to the White House, that China has concealed the origin and extent of the catastrophic global coronavirus outbreak.

    The Chinese Communist Party’s “failure has unleashed a global contagion killing thousands”, wrote Cardinal Charles Maung Bo, president of the Federation of Asian Bishops’ Conferences, on April 1. “As we survey the damage done to lives around the world, we must ask who is responsible?”

    “… there is one government that has primary responsibility for what it has done and what it has failed to do, and that is the CCP [Chinese Communist Party] regime in Beijing. Let me be clear — it is the CCP that has been responsible, not the people of China… Lies and propaganda have put millions of lives around the world in danger… In recent years, we have seen an intense crackdown on freedom of expression in China. Lawyers, bloggers, dissidents and civil society activists have been rounded up and have disappeared.”

    One more person has just disappeared: Ai Fen, a Chinese physician who was head of the emergency department at Wuhan Central Hospital, had worked with the late Dr. Li Wenliang. Ai, who claimed that her bosses silenced her early warnings about coronavirus, appears to have vanished. Her whereabouts, according to 60 Minutes Australia, are unknown. The journalists who saw what happened inside Wuhan have also disappearedCaixin Global reported that the laboratories which sequenced the coronavirus in December were ordered by Chinese officials to hand over or destroy the samples and not release their findings.

    “If I had known what was to happen, I would not have cared about the reprimand, I would have fucking talked about it to whoever, where ever I could”, Ai Fen said in an interview in March. Those were her last recorded words.

    There is no record at all, however, about how this pandemic began. Wet market? A cave full of batsPangolins? Or a bio-weapons laboratory? No foreign doctors, journalists, analysts or international observers are present in Wuhan. Why, if the virus came out of a wet market or a cave, did China suppress inquiries to such an extent? Why, in December, did Beijing order Chinese scientists to destroy proof about the virus? Why did Chinese officials claim that US soldiers brought the virus to Wuhan? Why should it be scandalous that a US President calls a virus that began in China a “Chinese virus“?

    Who announced on January 11 that Wuhan’s wet market was the origin of this epidemic? The Chinese regime. It was later discovered that the first known case of coronavirus traced back to November 17, 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The same Chinese regime later claimed that this coronavirus “may not have originated in China”. What respected scientist or institution can now trust anything that comes out of China?

    Many leading scientists have dismissed the claim that the Covid-19 virus was an engineered pathogen. This conclusion was seemingly based on the fact that Wuhan has two major virus research labs: the Wuhan Center for Disease Control and Prevention, which is apparently less than a mile from the market, and the Wuhan Institute of Virology, a biosafety level 4 (BSL-4) laboratory, handling the world’s most deadly pathogens, located just seven miles from the market. The story was immediately and emphatically trashed as a “conspiracy theory“.

    Those scientists claim that the virus likely originated among wildlife before spreading to humans, possibly through a food market in Wuhan. They say that, through genetic sequencing, they have identified the culprit for Covid-19 as a bat coronavirus. End of story? Science, thankfully, begins by asking questions and then seeking answers.

    Bats were not, it seems, sold at Wuhan’s wet market. The Lancet noted in a January study that the first Covid-19 case in Wuhan had no connection to the market. The Lancet‘s paper, written by Chinese researchers from several institutions, detailed that 13 of the 41 first cases had no link to the market. “That’s a big number, 13, with no link,” commented Daniel Lucey, an infectious disease specialist at Georgetown University. So how did the epidemic start?

    “Now it seems clear that [the] seafood market is not the only origin of the virus, but to be honest we still do not know where the virus came from now”, notes Bin Cao, pulmonary specialist at Capital Medical University, and the corresponding author of the Lancet article.

    US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo has said that China’s Communist Party is withholding information about the coronavirus.

    If we do not know, it is necessary be open to all possibilities.

    “Less than 300 yards from the seafood market is the Wuhan branch of the Chinese Center for Disease Control and Prevention” wrote David Ignatius of the Washington Post.

    “Researchers from that facility and the nearby Wuhan Institute of Virology have posted articles about collecting bat coronaviruses from around China, for study to prevent future illness. Did one of those samples leak, or was hazardous waste deposited in a place where it could spread?“.

    “Collecting viruses” presumably does not exclude the possibility of a “leaked virus”. Worse, if China is not able to protect its laboratories, it needs to be held accountable and made to pay for the devastating global damage.

    “Experts know the new coronavirus is not a bioweapon. They disagree on whether it could have leaked from a research lab”, stated The Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists. Professor Richard Ebright of Rutgers University’s Waksman Institute of Microbiology, and a major biosecurity expert, agreed with the Nature Medicine authors’ argument that the coronavirus was not manipulated by humans. But Ebright does think it possible that the Covid-19 started as an accidental leak from a laboratory, such as one of the two in Wuhan, which are known to have been studying bat viruses:

    “Virus collection or animal infection with a virus having the transmission characteristics of the outbreak virus would pose substantial risk of infection of a lab worker, and from the lab worker, the public.”

    Ebright has also claimed that bat coronaviruses are studied in Wuhan at Biosafety Level 2, “which provides only minimal protection” compared with the top BSL-4.

    “We don’t know what happened, but there are a lot of reasons to believe that this indeed was a release of some sort”, China expert Gordon Chang said to Die Weltwoche.

    “No one has been able to study it. How can you say it’s not a release from a lab if you can’t go to the lab? Indeed, we have seen Beijing do its best to prevent virologists and epidemiologists from actually going to Wuhan. The World Health Organization team went to Wuhan for like half a day with only part of the team.”

    That is another major problem. The potential major investigator of the Wuhan coronavirus pandemic’s origin, the World Health Organization (WHO), is now accused of being “China’s coronavirus’ accomplice“. As late as January 14, the WHO quoted Chinese health officials claiming there had been no human transmissions of the coronavirus within the country yet.

    China poses a biosecurity risks for the entire planet. One year before the first coronavirus case was identified in Wuhan, US Customs and Border Protection agents at Detroit Metro Airport stopped a Chinese biologist with three vials labeled “Antibodies” in his luggage. According to an unclassified FBI tactical intelligence report obtained by Yahoo News:

    “Inspection of the writing on the vials and the stated recipient led inspection personnel to believe the materials contained within the vials may be viable Middle East Respiratory Syndrome (MERS) and Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome (SARS) materials.”

    Why is China trafficking in dangerous viruses in the first place?

    According to Yanzhong Huang, a senior fellow for Global Health at the Council on Foreign Relations:

    “A safety breach at a Chinese Center for Disease Control and Prevention lab is believed to have caused four suspected SARS cases, including one death, in Beijing in 2004. A similar accident caused 65 lab workers of Lanzhou Veterinary Research Institute to be infected with brucellosis in December 2019. In January 2020, a renowned Chinese scientist, Li Ning, was sentenced to 12 years in prison for selling experimental animals to local markets”.

    In February, Botao Xiao and Lei Xiao, from Guangzhou’s South China University of Technology, wrote in a research paper:

    “In addition to origins of natural recombination and intermediate host the killer coronavirus probably originated from a laboratory in Wuhan. Safety level [sic] may need to be reinforced in high risk biohazardous laboratories”.

    Xiao later told the Wall Street Journal that he had withdrawn the paper because it “was not supported by direct proofs”.

    Chinese laboratory mistakes have happened before. By 2010, researchers published as fact: “The most famous case of a released laboratory strain is the re-emergent H1N1 influenza-A virus which was first observed in China in May of 1977 and in Russia shortly thereafter”. The virus may have escaped from a lab attempting to prepare a vaccine in response to the U.S. swine flu pandemic alert.

    In 1999 the most senior defector in the US from the Soviet biological warfare program, Ken Alibek, revealed that Soviet officials concluded that China had suffered a serious accident at one of its secret biological plants, causing two major epidemics of fever that had swept China in the late 1980s. “Our analysts”, Alibek stated in his book, Biohazard, “concluded that they were caused by an accident in a lab where Chinese scientists were weaponizing viral diseases”.

    In 2004, the World Health Organization disclosed that the latest outbreak of “severe acute respiratory syndrome” (SARS) in China involved two researchers who were working with the virus in a Beijing research lab. The WHO denounced Chinese breaches of safety procedures, and director of the Center for Disease Control and Prevention, Li Liming, resignedScience magazine also stated that “for the third time in less than a year, an outbreak of SARS seems to have originated from a failure in laboratory containment”.

    Moreover, three years ago, when China opened the laboratory in Wuhan, Tim Trevan, a Maryland biosafety specialist, told Nature that he worried about the safety of the building because “structures where everyone feels free to speak up and openness of information are important.” Free speech and open information: exactly what Chinese regime fought against in December and January.

    A Chinese video about a key researcher in Wuhan, Tian Junhua, which was released a few weeks before the outbreak in Wuhan, shows Chinese researchers handling bats that contained viruses. In the video (produced by China Science Communication, run by the China Association for Science and Technology), Tian says:

    “I am not a doctor, but I work to cure and save people… I am not a soldier, but I work to safeguard an invisible national defense line”.

    Tian is also reported as having said:

    “I can feel the fear: the fear of infections and the fear of getting lost. Because of the fear, I take every step extremely cautiously. The more scared I feel, the more care I take in executing every detail. Because the process of you finding the viruses is also when you can be exposed to them the easiest. I do hope these virus samples will only be preserved for scientific research and will never be used in real life”.

    For a month, the Chinese Communist Party, instead of fighting the contagion, did everything possible to censor all information about the Covid-19 outbreak. After President Xi Jinping declared “a people’s war” on the epidemic on January 20, Chinese security services pursued 5,111 cases of “fabricating and deliberately disseminating false and harmful information”. The Chinese Human Rights Defenders documented several types of punishment, including detention, disappearance, fines, interrogations, forced confessions and “educational reprimand”.

    After that, China lied about the real number of deaths. There are photographs of long lines of stacked urns greeting family members of the dead at funeral homes in Wuhan. Outside one funeral home, trucks shipped in 2,500 urns. According to Chinese official figures, 2,548 people in Wuhan have died of the Covid-19. According to an analysis by Radio Free Asia, seven funeral homes in Wuhan were each handing out 500 funeral urns containing remains for 12 days, from March 23 to the traditional tomb-sweeping festival of April 5, a time that would indicate up to 42,000 urns, or ten times higher than the official figure.

    In February, it was reported that Wuhan crematoriums were working around the clock to cope with the massive influx of infected bodies. Wuhan’s officials are apparently pushing relatives of the victims to bury the dead “quickly and quietly“.

    “Natural virus” does not exclude its fallout from a laboratory where pathogens are collected and studied. The Nature Medicine authors “leave us where we were before: with a basis to rule out [a coronavirus from] a lab construct, but no basis to rule out a lab accident”, Professor Ebright commented.

    Debate may rage over which center it is, but at this point it seems undeniable that a center has been directly involved with research on viruses, although not necessarily on the creation of a virus” wrote Father Renzo Milanese, a longtime Catholic missionary in Hong Kong.

    “In other words, the virus passed from a research center in Wuhan early on. More importantly there is also no question that the authorities were aware of the dangerousness of the virus, that they did not inform anyone and that they tried to keep the facts hidden”.

    US Senator Josh Hawley has introduced a resolution calling for an international investigation into China’s handling of the spread of the virus. According to Hawley:

    “The Chinese Communist Party was aware of the reality of the virus as early as December but ordered laboratories to destroy samples and forced doctors to keep silent. It is time for an international investigation into the role their cover-up played in the spread of this devastating pandemic”.

    Admitting a fault, as the Japanese did after the Fukushima nuclear accident in 2011, might be one way for a country to be accepted again by the international community. Censoring, denying and covering up, as China is doing, will not.

    “China claims that the deadly virus did not escape from its biolab,” said a China specialist with the Population Research Institute, Steven W. Mosher.

    “Fine. Prove it by releasing the research records of the Wuhan lab”.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 23:00

  • "They’ve Left Me High And Dry": Here Is The Real Reason Companies Have Drawn Down A Record $293 Billion In Revolvers
    “They’ve Left Me High And Dry”: Here Is The Real Reason Companies Have Drawn Down A Record $293 Billion In Revolvers

    One week ago, we reported that starting exactly one month ago on March 5, an unprecedented wave of corporate revolver draws was unleashed, resulting in what JPMorgan calculated was a record $208BN in revolving credit facilities being fully drawn (for the full list of companies see here). A few days later, a report from Goldman Sachs observed that, contrary to JPM’s data of exponentially rising revolver draws, “the pace of revolver draws has slowed nearly 50% so far this week relative to last week, with only $40bn over the last 5 business days, relative to an average trailing 5 business days run rate last week of $75bn.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In retrospect, there may be reason to be skeptical about Goldman’s data because in JPM’s latest weekly revolver update, the bank’s tracker of companies that have tapped banks for funding rose to $293 billion to date (remarkably, $125 bil or 43% of total borrowings, are by junk-rated firms) an increase of over $80 billion in just one week, although just like Goldman, JPM notes that “while growth has continued, the pace seems to have slowed in the past three days, both in terms of amounts borrowed and number of borrowers (see Figure 1).”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In total, the nearly $300BN in borrowings represent 77% of their credit facilities, but as JPM notes, “some firms with asset-backed facilities may not have enough borrowing base to borrow the full committed amount.” Another observation: we are still seeing large draws but fewer mega-sized draws, which makes sense as by now most mega companies have already drawn down on their revolver.

    That said, JPM cautions that the actual amount of borrowing is likely significantly greater than $293 bil, as it only reflects publicly disclosed amounts, mostly from larger companies, and likely excludes many middle market firms and privately owned companies.

    Some more details on the ongoing drawdown flurry:

    • $143 bil (49%) of announced borrowings are by investment grade firms, of which $35 bil (12%) are BBB- rated, $125 bil (43%) are by noninvestment grade firms, and $25 bil (9%) did not have available ratings.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    • The $293 bil total excludes $48 bil of ongoing deals, rumored loans, and new facilities that are not clear if drawn for Airbus, AT&T, Daimler, Fiat Chrysler, Honeywell, Mondelez, and Simon Property Group. If these facilities are finalized and/or fully drawn, the known total would be $340 bil.
    • In aggregate, the borrowings represent 77% of their credit facilities, but note that some firms with asset-backed facilities may not have enough borrowing base to borrow the full committed amount.

    So why the continued rush to fully drawdown available facilities? The trivial, politically correct explanation is simply that the Commercial Paper market, where companies have traditionally gone to meet short-term funding needs, remains broken, and even though the Fed has already announced the launch of a Commercial Paper and Money Market backstop facilities, the Commercial Paper 90 Day AA non-fin spread to 3M OIS remains at levels well beyond the wides reached during the financial crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In short, the Fed has much more work to normalize the CP market.

    But rational as it may be, that’s not the reason for the panicked scramble to drain nearly $300BN in liquidity from the banks. Instead, the real reason is also the one that may well result from this drawdown panic as the banks themseleves suddenly find without liquidity and are forced to put themselves in quarantine from future liquidity demands: companies are increasingly worried their banks may shut them down and reneg on revolver contracts, refusing to give them access to facilities they have opened… or worse, banks may shut down period.

    For a very vivid example of just that look no further than online lender Kabbage (backed, predictably, by the god of all catastrophic money-losing startups, Japan’s SoftBank whose implosion will be this bubble’s Enron and Lehman moment combined) which last week unexpectedly and without warning cut off credit to its small-business clients in the past week.

    The borrowers, who range from software consultants to heavy-equipment contractors, told Bloomberg that Kabbage didn’t give them any notice, and that they learned their credit lines had been suspended only upon logging into their accounts. Some said they were counting on the money to get through the tough times ahead.

    “This is very bad business ethics,” said Joydeep Paul, who runs Medserv Healthcare Solutions LLC, an emergency-medical training company in Princeton, New Jersey. He says his line of credit was cut from $22,000 to $0. “You just turn it off without saying a word — not an email, not a phone call, nothing.”

    The irony is that just like countless “genius” investors who rode the biggest fake bull market in history – all on the bank of trillions and trillions in central bank backstops as the latest flurry of Fed actions has confirmed – online lenders spent the past decade touting themselves as the opposite of banks; however as soon as a real downturn hit and the gates came down. As Bloomberg reports, as the coronavirus pandemic ravages cities across the U.S., these nonbank lenders turned to a playbook that banks used during the last financial crisis more than a decade ago: reducing access to credit when the economy is contracting. Other lenders, including On Deck Capital Inc. and Fundbox Inc., have also tightened their underwriting standards or limited lines of credit.

    “They’ve left me high and dry when I needed them the most,” Rob Jacques, co-founder of theCodery, a software consulting company in Petaluma, California told Bloomberg. He said he was particularly galled to be cut off without notice because until recently – when times were good – Kabbage called him every day asking him to borrow more money.

    Oops.

    Atlanta-based Kabbage, which got its start on Shark Tank, said it has loaned more than $9 billion to thousands of small businesses since it was founded in 2009. Ironically, the company now needs to lend money to itself most of all, having furloughed hundreds of its workers this week as it contends with a slowdown in spending at small businesses, which have suffered as consumers nationwide have been ordered to stay inside to slow the spread of the deadly coronavirus pandemic.

    But wait, the idiocy get better: Kabbage – having failed at its primary mission of providing funding in times of need instead of cutting lines of credit – is now pivoting to becoming a middleman that will connect people with loans from the Small Business Administration. It has also started a website to help small businesses sell gift certificates to consumers.

    One can only imagine just how the company will screw that up.

    “Like many other fintechs, we have temporarily adjusted our lines of credit and are focused on supporting the SBA’s Paycheck Protection Program,” Paul Bernardini, a spokesman for Kabbage, said in a statement.  By “adjusting” he meant “cut off.”

    “Just as manufacturers have retooled their processes to build ventilators and masks, we’re doing the same to reallocate our resources to respond to the national emergency and provide financial products that small businesses need most.”

    Rob Frohwein, Kabbage’s chief executive officer, was just a bit more honest in how he defined the company’s “pivot” in an email to employees on Friday, when he said the company would temporarily stop making loans: As of last night, all lending has been turned off,” Frohwein wrote.

    Hey Rob, while you are pivoting, here is an idea for Kabbage’s new motto: “we will give you money when you don’t need it, and cut you off when you need it most.” Catchy, right?

    And then there is the old standby: Kantbage.

    But wait, it gets better, because the company that gave the world the unbelievable pile of shit known as WeWork is also involved in… Kabbage. That’s right, in 2017 this pathetic excuse for a lender raised $250 million from SoftBank.

    And the punchline: other SoftBank Vision Fund portfolio companies – including Indian startup Oyo Hotel, co-working giant WeWork and real estate brokerage Compass – have axed staff in recent weeks.

    * * *

    However none of this supreme irony is any comfort for those companies which naively entrusted this dog turd with their financial future, and as Bloomberg reports, the credit reductions come at a dire time for restaurants and shops across the country. In normal times, small businesses have about a month of cash on hand, according to a 2016 study by JPMorgan. That means they’re particularly vulnerable as major cities across the country continue to expand shelter-in-place orders.

    On Deck began putting holds on customers’ ability to draw on their lines of credit if they hadn’t done so in the last 30 days. Customers affected by the holds have been asked to send the company recent bank statements to have the holds lifted. Jim Larkin, a spokesman for On Deck, said the firm will “continue to serve and support our existing customers and are selectively lending to new customers.”

    Fundbox, a venture-capital backed small-business lender based in San Francisco, has also limited some customers’ ability to draw on their credit lines.

    “Like many companies that serve small businesses, we’ve had to make changes that have affected some of our customers,” Tim Donovan, a spokesman for Fundbox, said in emailed statement. “While these decisions have not been easy, it will allow us to continue to serve the majority of our small-business customers now and in the future.”

    Kabbage customers who called to ask what happened were told that their accounts were under review. An employee at Kabbage, who asked for anonymity to protect their job, said that customer-service agents were instructed not to tell borrowers that the company had suspended credit lines across the board.

    Michael Figueroa, a security contractor in Fort Lauderdale, Florida, said the representative he talked with was apologetic. “Hey, I don’t even know if I’m going to be working here tomorrow,” he recalled the agent saying.

    * * *

    So far it’s only the non-banks that have taken the axe their existing loan commitments. The good news: the banks have so far been resilient and not a single prominent bank has left its clients in the cold. However, with the US economy entering a depression, hundreds of US companies have drawn $300BN just in case it’s only a matter of time before the banks go where the non-banks have so boldly gone in the past few days.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 22:35

  • Japan To Declare State Of Emergency On April 7
    Japan To Declare State Of Emergency On April 7

    Japan’s Prime Minister Shinzo Abe has decided to declare a coronavirus emergency, according to the Nikkei, as new cases in the capital surged at a record pace. And while the Japanese publication notes that the government will hold an unofficial meeting of a panel of experts and start preparing for the declaration, Kyodo reported moments ago that Japan will declare a state of emergency on April 7, which would take effect on April 8.

    An emergency declaration gives governors in the areas covered formal powers, such as issuing requests that people stay home; Tokyo and surrounding areas, as well as Osaka, are expected to be affected by the declaration.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Abe has been criticized for not having already declared an emergency – a hesitance thought by many to stem from a strong desire to hold the Olympics this summer in Tokyo as originally planned. The International Olympic Committee decided in late March to postpone the games to 2021 after consulting with the prime minister and others.

    And yet, a conflict is set to emerge almost instantly because Japan’s constitution does not permit the government to demand that individuals stay home, owing to civil liberties concerns. Is Japan – which already buys billions in stocks just to avoid a market crash and preserve social order – about to also have a constituational crisis?

    In any case, we find it strange that there were almost “no cases” in the weeks leading up to Japan’s reluctant decision to postpone this year’s Olympics, only to see a sudden record surge afterwards as Japan’s cases “mysteriously” soared, demonstrating once again that the coronavirus – or rather the tracking of its case and death toll – is first and foremost a political priority.

    Abe met with parties including Health Minister Katsunobu Kato and Yasutoshi Nishimura, the economic and fiscal policy minister, on Sunday to discuss the spread of infections.
    “If necessary, we will decide [to declare an emergency] without hesitation,” said Nishimura, who heads the government’s coronavirus response, on a show of public broadcaster NHK on Sunday. “We are looking for signs of an overshoot,” he said, referring to an explosion in cases, and noted that the atmosphere has grown extremely tense. On the same program, Tokyo Gov. Yuriko Koike called on the central government to issue an emergency declaration promptly.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 22:13

  • Which US States Have The Most At-Risk Seniors?
    Which US States Have The Most At-Risk Seniors?

    The U.S. now has the largest number of confirmed COVID-19 cases globally, and modelling predicts that the country could see about 100,000 to 200,000 total deaths. Unfortunately, as Visual Capitalist’s Jenna Ross details below, adults aged 65 or older – about 16% of the U.S. population – are at much higher risk of both severe illness and death.

    Today’s chart uses U.S. Census Bureau data to map the percentage of the population that is 65 years or older by state. It also outlines the urban areas that are most heavily skewed towards this older age group.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Proportion of Seniors by State

    Below is the full breakdown of the U.S. senior population by state, using the latest available data from 2018.

    Maine tops the list with 20.6% of its population comprising adults age 65 or older. At the other end of the scale, Utah’s seniors make up only 11.1% of its population.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Notably, Florida has the second highest percentage and number of seniors nationwide. Its governor just announced the state’s stay-at-home order on April 1st, after taking criticism for refusing to do so earlier.

    New York, the current global hot spot of COVID-19, is close to the national average with 16.4% of its population aged 65 or older. However, with over 3.2 million seniors, the sheer volume of individuals needing hospitalization has already put a strain on the state’s healthcare system. Governor Andrew Cuomo says the state will run out of its current supply of ventilators in less than a week.

    The Most Vulnerable Urban Areas

    On a local level, which places have the highest proportion of seniors? Based on all urban areas* with a population of 250,000 or more, here’s how the top 50 looks:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *Urban areas consist of a downtown core and adjacent territories

    With 6 areas in the top 10, Florida is quite vulnerable at the local level as well. Other states with multiple areas on the list include Ohio, Pennsylvania, and New York.

    The Senior Population of Current U.S. Hotspots

    To determine the vulnerability of current COVID-19 hotspots, we compared U.S. counties with a high number of cases per capita against their percentage of seniors.

    Counties at the bottom left have low readings on both metrics. Conversely, counties in the top right have a dangerous combination: a high concentration of cases and vulnerable seniors.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Multiple counties in New York occupy the top right quadrant, with Yonkers being the worst off. Los Angeles county, which has a similar population to all counties in New York City, has fewer cases and a smaller proportion of seniors.

    To date, outbreaks have been mostly focused in urban areas where populations tend to be younger. However, as COVID-19 begins infiltrating rural areas, healthcare systems will need to contend with both older age groups and fewer resources.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 22:10

  • Food Banks Overwhelmed As America's "Working Poor" Starve During Lockdown
    Food Banks Overwhelmed As America’s “Working Poor” Starve During Lockdown

    America is crashing into a depression. In just two weeks, 10 million people have claimed unemployment benefits. This has put unprecedented stress on food bank networks across the country, a new investigation via The Guardian shows

    The US labor market is in free fall – the increasing lockdowns across major US metropolitan areas have forced millions of people out of work and into a hunger crisis. 

    The Guardian shows demand for food aid in some regions of the country has surged eightfold in recent weeks as RealInvestmentAdvice.com’s Lance Roberts warns the unemployment rates in the US could spike to levels not seen since the “Great Depression,” or about 15-20% in the second quarter. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The National Guard has been deployed for a variety of reasons: One is to support local area hospital systems, another is to maintain social order, and now soldiers in Cleveland, Pittsburgh and Phoenix have supported food banks to ensure shortages do not materialize, mostly because that would trigger social unrest among the working poor. 

    “I’ve been in this business over 30 years, and nothing compares to what we’re seeing now. Not even when the steel mills closed down did we see increased demand like this,” said Sheila Christopher, director of Hunger-Free Pennsylvania, which represents 18 food banks across 67 counties.

    The Guardian provides a snapshot of the unprecedented demand hitting food banks: 

    • In Amherst, home to the University of Massachusetts’ largest campus, the pantry distributed 849% more food in March compared with the previous year. The second-largest increase in western Massachusetts was 748% at the Pittsfield Salvation Army pantry.
    • The Grace Klein community food pantry in Jefferson county, which has the largest number of confirmed Covid-19 cases in Alabama, provided 5,076 individuals with food boxes last week – a 90% increase on the previous week.
    • In southern Arizona, demand has doubled, with pantries supplying groceries to 4,000 households every day – double the number supplied in March 2019. “We saw an increase during the federal government shutdown but nothing as rapid, massive or overwhelming as this,” said Michael McDonald, CEO of the Community Food Bank of South Arizona.
    • A helpline set up by the Greater Pittsburgh community food bank has received more than a thousand calls in the past two weeks, 90% of which came from newly unemployed people. Here, pantries ordered 50% to 60% more food for March and April than usual.
    • The Lakeview pantry in Chicago is on track to provide food for as many as 2,000 individuals this week – compared with 1,100 before the coronavirus crisis.
    • The north Florida food bank, which relied heavily on contributions from retailers, has seen donations drop by 85% to 90% as shoppers bulk-buy, leaving shelves empty. But donations from restaurants, golf tournaments and even Disney World have increased, so the food bank is switching to ready meals, paying furloughed chefs to cook for thousands of senior citizens in housing facilities.
    • In Las Vegas, the Three Square food bank has increased weekly food distribution by 30%, from 1m to 1.3m lbs of food. New drive-thru distribution centres have been set up across the valley as 170 of its 180 distribution outlets have been forced to temporarily close due to CDC social distancing guidelines. “Every line at every distribution centre exceeds the amount of food in our trucks,” said chief operating officer Larry Scott.
    • The Kansas City-based Harvesters food bank, which serves 16 counties in north-east Kansas and 10 in north-west Missouri, sent out 12,000 boxes to pantries on Monday 23 March – a 140% rise on the 5,000 boxes typically ordered. “It was the largest distribution day in our 40-year history,” said its communications manager, Gene Hallinan.

    Feeding America spokesperson Zuani Villarreal said the surge in job losses “is a perfect storm impacting food banks.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The evolution of the virus crisis could be social destabilization across low-income areas of inner cities. As we’ve been warning for a while, many adults have no emergency savings and insurmountable debts. Most people don’t have enough funds to bridge their finances for three months, which brings us to our piece from last week that shows cars lined up to receive food from a food bank in Duquesne, Pennsylvania.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “First, we saw people who lived paycheck to paycheck, got laid off and didn’t know where the next meal was coming from, followed by those who had a couple of weeks of savings. Now, people who knew about us because they donated or volunteered are coming in for food,” said Jerry Brown, media spokesman for St Mary’s Food Bank in Phoenix, Arizona. “The 2008 recession doesn’t touch this. It’s a different ballgame.”

    So, what happens when tens of millions of jobless Americans become hangry? Is social unrest next? 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 21:45

  • Futures Surge As Trump Touts "Glimmers Of Hope" In Italy & New York
    Futures Surge As Trump Touts “Glimmers Of Hope” In Italy & New York

    Officials in New York and Italy reported notable declines in new cases and deaths on Sunday, helping to inspire the most positive reaction in futures to kick off a new trading week since the ‘rona rout.

    Futures surged out the gate as President Trump struck an upbeat tone during Sunday evening’s press conference (even as his critics continued to urge the mainstream press to drop coverage of the president’s briefings). Riffing off the data reported out of New York and Italy, Trump and Pence noted what appears to be the first “glimmers of progress.”

    “We are beginning to see the glimmers of progress,” Pence said at a White House news conference on Sunday. “The experts will tell me not to jump to any conclusions, and I’m not, but like your president I’m an optimistic person and I’m hopeful.”

    After three straight days of “pain”, “hell” and more gloom and doom from Trump, his decision to rapidly embrace some of the first encouraging signs of progress in months was apparently exactly what traders needed to hear, considering that they completely ignored another record jump in new cases reported out of Tokyo (Japan’s nationwide death toll just broke above 100) and an NYT report claiming 1000s of deaths in the US may have gone uncounted.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Trump bundled this with the typical rundown of various federal government plans, partnerships and deployments, as expressing that “we hope we’re seeing a leveling off” in the coming days.

    “We’ll see what happens,” he added.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    ES was up more than 3% at one point, and Japan’s benchmarks climbed more than 2%, snapping a five-day losing streak even as PM Shinzo Abe reportedly prepares for an emergency declaration.  The yen dropped along with Treasuries as haven demand receded. Crude oil prices slumped as uncertainty remains over a proposed meeting of supplier nations that is planned for April 9.

    And an old favorite gif made a resurgence on twitter to mark the occasion.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 21:21

  • Why This Crisis Is A Turning Point In History
    Why This Crisis Is A Turning Point In History

    Authored by John Gray via The New Statesman,

    The era of peak globalisation is over. For those of us not on the front line, clearing the mind and thinking how to live in an altered world is the task at hand…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The deserted streets will fill again, and we will leave our screen-lit burrows blinking with relief. But the world will be different from how we imagined it in what we thought were normal times. This is not a temporary rupture in an otherwise stable equilibrium: the crisis through which we are living is a turning point in history. 

    The era of peak globalisation is over. An economic system that relied on worldwide production and long supply chains is morphing into one that will be less interconnected. A way of life driven by unceasing mobility is shuddering to a stop. Our lives are going to be more physically constrained and more virtual than they were. A more fragmented world is coming into being that in some ways may be more resilient. 

    The once formidable British state is being rapidly reinvented, and on a scale not seen before. Acting with emergency powers authorised by parliament, the government has tossed economic orthodoxy to the winds. Savaged by years of imbecilic austerity, the NHS – like the armed forces, police, prisons, fire service, care workers and cleaners – has its back to the wall. But with the noble dedication of its workers, the virus will be held at bay. Our political system will survive intact. Not many countries will be so fortunate. Governments everywhere are struggling through the narrow passage between suppressing the virus and crashing the economy. Many will stumble and fall. 

    In the view of the future to which progressive thinkers cling, the future is an embellished version of the recent past. No doubt this helps them preserve some semblance of sanity. It also undermines what is now our most vital attribute: the ability to adapt and fashion different ways of life. The task ahead is to build economies and societies that are more durable, and more humanly habitable, than those that were exposed to the anarchy of the global market.

    It does not mean a shift to small-scale localism. Human numbers are too large for local self-sufficiency to be viable, and most of humankind is not willing to return to the small, closed communities of a more distant past. But the hyperglobalisation of the last few decades is not coming back either. The virus has exposed fatal weaknesses in the economic system that was patched up after the 2008 financial crisis. Liberal capitalism is bust. 

    With all its talk of freedom and choice, liberalism was in practice the experiment of dissolving traditional sources of social cohesion and political legitimacy and replacing them with the promise of rising material living standards. This experiment has now run its course. Suppressing the virus necessitates an economic shutdown that can only be temporary, but when the economy restarts, it will be in a world where governments act to curb the global market.

    A situation in which so many of the world’s essential medical supplies originate in China – or any other single country – will not be tolerated. Production in these and other sensitive areas will be re-shored as a matter of national security. The notion that a country such as Britain could phase out farming and depend on imports for food will be dismissed as the nonsense it always has been. The airline industry will shrink as people travel less. Harder borders are going to be an enduring feature of the global landscape. A narrow goal of economic efficiency will no longer be practicable for governments.

    The question is, what will replace rising material living standards as the basis of society? One answer green thinkers have given is what John Stuart Mill in his Principles of Political Economy (1848) called a “stationary-state economy”. Expanding production and consumption would no longer be an overriding goal, and the increase in human numbers curbed. Unlike most liberals today, Mill recognised the danger of overpopulation. A world filled with human beings, he wrote, would be one without “flowery wastes” and wildlife. He also understood the dangers of central planning. The stationary state would be a market economy in which competition is encouraged. Technological innovation would continue, along with improvements in the art of living.

    In many ways this is an appealing vision, but it is also unreal. There is no world authority to enforce an end to growth, just as there is none to fight the virus. Contrary to the progressive mantra, recently repeated by Gordon Brown, global problems do not always have global solutions. Geopolitical divisions preclude anything like world government. If one existed, existing states would compete to control it. The belief that this crisis can be solved by an unprecedented outbreak of international cooperation is magical thinking in its purest form.

    Of course economic expansion is not indefinitely sustainable. For one thing, it can only worsen climate change and turn the planet into a garbage dump. But with highly uneven living standards, still rising human numbers and intensifying geopolitical rivalries, zero growth is also unsustainable. If the limits of growth are eventually accepted, it will be because governments make the protection of their citizens their most important objective. Whether democratic or authoritarian, states that do not meet this Hobbesian test will fail. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    The pandemic has abruptly accelerated geopolitical change. Combined with the collapse in oil prices, the uncontrolled spread of the virus in Iran could destabilise its theocratic regime. With revenues plunging, Saudi Arabia is also at risk. No doubt many will wish both of them good riddance. But there can be no assurance that a meltdown in the Gulf will produce anything other than a long period of chaos. Despite years of talk about diversifying, these regimes are still hostages of oil and even if the price recovers somewhat, the economic hit of the global shutdown will be devastating.

    In contrast, the advance of East Asia will surely continue. The most successful responses to the epidemic thus far have been in Taiwan, South Korea and Singapore. It is hard to believe their cultural traditions, which focus on collective well-being more than personal autonomy, have not played a role in their success. They have also resisted the cult of the minimal state. It will not be surprising if they adjust to de-globalisation better than many Western countries.

    China’s position is more complex. Given its record of cover-ups and opaque statistics, its performance during the pandemic is hard to assess. Certainly it is not a model any democracy could or should emulate. As the new NHS Nightingale shows, it is not only authoritarian regimes that can build hospitals in two weeks. No one knows the full human costs of the Chinese shutdown. Even so, Xi Jinping’s regime looks to have benefited from the pandemic. The virus has provided a rationale for expanding the surveillance state and introducing even stronger political control. Instead of wasting the crisis, Xi is using it to expand the country’s influence. China is inserting itself in place of the EU by assisting distressed national governments, such as Italy. Many of the masks and testing kits it has supplied have proved to be faulty, but the fact seems not to have dented Beijing’s propaganda campaign.

    The EU has responded to the crisis by revealing its essential weakness. Few ideas are so scorned by higher minds than sovereignty. In practice it signifies the capacity to execute a comprehensive, coordinated and flexible emergency plan of the kind being implemented in the UK and other countries. The measures that have already been taken are larger than any implemented in the Second World War. In their most important respects they are also the opposite of what was done then, when the British population was mobilised as never before, and unemployment fell dramatically. Today, aside from those in essential services, Britain’s workers have been demobilised. If it goes on for many months, the shutdown will demand an even larger socialisation of the economy.

    Whether the desiccated neoliberal structures of the EU can do anything like this is doubtful. Hitherto sacrosanct rules have been torn up by the European Central Bank’s bond buying programme and relaxing limits on state aid to industry. But the resistance to fiscal burden-sharing of northern European countries such as Germany and the Netherlands may block the way to rescuing Italy – a country too big to be crushed like Greece, but possibly also too costly to save. As the Italian prime minister, Giuseppe Conte said in March:

    “If Europe does not rise to this unprecedented challenge, the whole European structure loses its raison d’être for the people.”

    The Serbian president Aleksandar Vucic has been blunter and more realistic:

    “European solidarity does not exist… that was a fairy tale. The only country that can help us in this hard situation is the People’s Republic of China. To the rest of them, thanks for nothing.” 

    The EU’s fundamental flaw is that it is incapable of discharging the protective functions of a state. The break-up of the eurozone has been predicted so often that it may seem unthinkable. Yet under the stresses they face today, the disintegration of European institutions is not unrealistic. Free movement has already been shut down. Turkish president Recep Tayyip Erdogan’s recent blackmailing of the EU by threatening to allow migrants to pass through his borders, and the endgame in Syria’s Idlib province, could lead to hundreds of thousands, even millions, of refugees fleeing to Europe. (It is hard to see what social distancing might mean in huge, overcrowded and insanitary refugee camps.) Another migrant crisis in conjunction with pressure on the dysfunctional euro could prove fatal.

    If the EU survives, it may be as something like the Holy Roman empire in its later years, a phantom that lingers on for generations while power is exercised elsewhere. Vitally necessary decisions are already being taken by nation states. Since the political centre is no longer a leading force and with much of the left wedded to the failed European project, many governments will be dominated by the far right. 

    An increasing influence on the EU will come from Russia. In the struggle with the Saudis that triggered the oil price collapse in March 2020, Putin has played the stronger hand. Whereas for the Saudis the fiscal break-even level – the price needed to pay for public services and keep the state solvent – is around $80 a barrel, for Russia it may be less than half that. At the same time Putin is consolidating Russia’s position as an energy power. The Nord Stream offshore pipelines that run through the Baltics secure reliable supplies of natural gas to Europe. By the same token they lock Europe into dependency on Russia and enable it to use energy as a political weapon. With Europe balkanised, Russia, too, looks set to expand its sphere of influence. Like China it is stepping in to replace the faltering EU, flying in doctors and equipment to Italy.

    In the US, Donald Trump plainly considers refloating the economy more important than containing the virus. A 1929-style stock market slide and unemployment levels worse than those in the 1930s could pose an existential threat to his presidency. James Bullard, the CEO of the Federal Reserve Bank of St Louis, has suggested the American jobless rate could reach 30 per cent – higher than in the Great Depression. On the other hand, with the US’s decentralised system of government; a ruinously expensive healthcare system and tens of millions uninsured; a colossal prison population, of which many are old and infirm; and cities with sizeable numbers of homeless people and an already large opioid epidemic; curtailing the shutdown could mean the virus spreading uncontrollably, with devastating effects. (Trump is not alone in taking this risk. Sweden has not so far imposed anything like the lockdown in force in other countries.) 

    Unlike the British programme, Trump’s $2trn stimulus plan is mostly another corporate bailout. Yet if polls are to be believed increasing numbers of Americans approve of his handling of the epidemic. What if Trump emerges from this catastrophe with the support of an American majority?

    Whether or not he retains his hold on power, the US’s position in the world has changed irreversibly. What is fast unravelling is not only the hyperglobalisation of recent decades but the global order set in place at the end of the Second World War. Puncturing an imaginary equilibrium, the virus has hastened a process of disintegration that has been under way for many years.

    In his seminal Plagues and Peoples the Chicago historian William H McNeill wrote:

    It is always possible that some hitherto obscure parasitic organism may escape its accustomed ecological niche and expose the dense human populations that have become so conspicuous a feature of the Earth to some fresh and perchance devastating mortality.

    It is not yet known how Covid-19 escaped its niche, though there is a suspicion that Wuhan’s “wet markets”, where wildlife is sold, may have played a role. In 1976, when McNeill’s book was first published, the destruction of the habitats of exotic species was nowhere near as far gone as it is today. As globalisation has advanced, so has the risk of infectious diseases spreading. The Spanish Flu of 1918-20 became a global pandemic in a world without mass air transportation. Commenting on how plagues have been understood by historians, McNeill observed: “For them as for others, occasional disastrous outbreaks of infectious disease remained sudden and unpredictable interruptions of the norm, essentially beyond historical explanation.” Many later studies have come to similar conclusions. 

    Yet the notion persists that pandemics are blips rather than an integral part of history. Lying behind this is the belief that humans are no longer part of the natural world and can create an autonomous ecosystem, separate from the rest of the biosphere. Covid-19 is telling them they cannot. It is only by using science that we can defend ourselves against this pestilence. Mass antibody tests and a vaccine will be crucial. But permanent changes in how we live will have to be made if we are to be less vulnerable in future. 

    The texture of everyday life is already altered. A sense of fragility is everywhere. It is not only society that feels shaky. So does the human position in the world. Viral images reveal human absence in different ways. Wild boars are roaming in the towns of northern Italy, while in Lopburi in Thailand gangs of monkeys no longer fed by tourists are fighting in the streets. Inhuman beauty and a fierce struggle for life have sprung up in cities emptied by the virus.

    As a number of commentators have noted, a post-apocalyptic future of the kind projected in the fiction of JG Ballard has become our present reality. But it is important to understand what this “apocalypse” reveals. For Ballard, human societies were stage props that could be knocked over at any moment. Norms that seemed built into human nature vanished when you left the theatre. The most harrowing of Ballard’s experiences as a child in 1940s Shanghai were not in the prison camp, where many inmates were steadfast and kindly in their treatment of others. A resourceful and venturesome boy, Ballard enjoyed much of his time there. It was when the camp collapsed as the war drew to a close, he told me, that he witnessed the worst examples of ruthless selfishness and motiveless cruelty. 

    The lesson he learnt was that these were not world-ending events. What is commonly described as an apocalypse is the normal course of history. Many are left with lasting traumas. But the human animal is too sturdy and too versatile to be broken by these upheavals. Life goes on, if differently than before. Those who talk of this as a Ballardian moment have not noticed how human beings adjust, and even find fulfilment, in the extreme situations he portrays.

    Technology will help us adapt in our present extremity. Physical mobility can be reduced by shifting many of our activities into cyberspace. Offices, schools, universities, GP surgeries and other work centres are likely to change permanently. Virtual communities set up during the epidemic have enabled people to get to know one another better than they ever did before. 

    There will be celebrations as the pandemic recedes, but there may be no clear point when the threat of infection is over. Many people may migrate to online environments like those in Second Life, a virtual world where people meet, trade and interact in bodies and worlds of their choosing. Other adaptations may be uncomfortable for moralists. Online pornography will likely boom, and much internet dating may consist of erotic exchanges that never end in a meeting of bodies. Augmented reality technology may be used to simulate fleshly encounters and virtual sex could soon be normalised. Whether this is a move towards the good life may not be the most useful question to ask. Cyberspace relies on an infrastructure that can be damaged or destroyed by war or natural disaster. The internet allows us to avoid the isolation that plagues have brought in the past. It cannot enable human beings to escape their mortal flesh, or avoid the ironies of progress. 

    *  *  *

    What the virus is telling us is not only that progress is reversible – a fact even progressives seem to have grasped­ – but that it can be self-undermining. To take the most obvious example, globalisation produced some major benefits – millions have been lifted out of poverty. This achievement is now under threat. Globalisation begat the de-globalisation that is now under way. 

    As the prospect of ever-rising living standards fades, other sources of authority and legitimacy are re-emerging. Liberal or socialist, the progressive mind detests national identity with passionate intensity. There is plenty in history to show how it can be misused. But the nation state is increasingly the most powerful force driving large-scale action. Dealing with the virus requires a collective effort that will not be mobilised for the sake of universal humanity. 

    Altruism has limits just as much as growth. There will be examples of extraordinary selflessness before the worst of the crisis is over. In Britain an over half-million strong volunteer army has signed up to assist the NHS. But it would be unwise to rely on human sympathy alone to get us through. Kindness to strangers is so precious that it must be rationed. 

    This is where the protective state comes in. At its core, the British state has always been Hobbesian. Peace and strong government have been the overriding priorities. At the same time this Hobbesian state has mostly rested on consent, particularly in times of national emergency. Being shielded from danger has trumped freedom from interference by government. 

    How much of their freedom people will want back when the pandemic has peaked is an open question. They show little taste for the enforced solidarity of socialism, but they may happily accept a regime of bio-surveillance for the sake of better protection of their health. Digging ourselves out of the pit will demand more state intervention not less, and of a highly inventive kind. Governments will have to do a lot more in underwriting scientific research and technological innovation. Though the state may not always be larger its influence will be pervasive, and by old-world standards more intrusive. Post-liberal government will be the norm for the foreseeable future.

    It is only by recognising the frailties of liberal societies that their most essential values can be preserved. Along with fairness they include individual liberty, which as well as being worthwhile in itself is a necessary check on government. But those who believe personal autonomy is the innermost human need betray an ignorance of psychology, not least their own. For practically everyone, security and belonging are as important, often more so. Liberalism was, in effect, a systematic denial of this fact.

    An advantage of quarantine is that it can be used to think afresh. Clearing the mind of clutter and thinking how to live in an altered world is the task at hand. For those of us who are not serving on the front line, this should be enough for the duration.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 21:20

  • Despite Soaring Body-Count Across The Nation, Americans Continue To 'Resist' Lockdown Orders
    Despite Soaring Body-Count Across The Nation, Americans Continue To ‘Resist’ Lockdown Orders

    President Trump reiterated warnings from the last several press briefings on Saturday, indicating that the country should brace for the “toughest week” yet, as confirmed cases and deaths continue to rise on an exponential curve.

    And despite the more than 308,000 cases and 8,407 deaths, Americans continue to defy the stay-at-home government enforced orders that cover 90% of the country. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Traffic analytics firm INRIX transportation told The Washington Post that daily traffic nationwide remains around 60% of normal levels. The highways are still filled with vehicles as many resist public health lockdown orders:

    “In California, where a stay-at-home order took effect March 19, daily trips statewide remain at 58% of normal levels, according to Wejo, a British company that collects data from sensors in some passenger vehicles.

    On Wednesday – two days after the District of Columbia, Virginia and Maryland enacted stay-at-home orders – daily car trips in the region remained at 51% of normal in D.C., 53% in Maryland and 59% in Virginia, according to Wejo, which does not include trucks or other commercial vehicles.

    Washington state officials announced a stay-at-home order March 23. More than a week later, distances traveled on Seattle roads remained at about 55% of normal, according to INRIX, a Kirkland, Washington-based traffic analytics firm that crunches data from vehicle navigation systems, cellphones and other devices,” reported The Post. 

    With traffic halved across major metros and along many highways is unprecedented – it’s becoming evident that plenty of Americans are still on the roads despite strict stay-at-home public health orders across the country. 

    “Some of the remaining traffic, experts say, stems from motorists heading to and from the many worksites that have been deemed “essential”: health-care facilities, supermarkets and liquor stores, construction sites, banks, dry cleaners, hardware stores, pet stores, government facilities, and auto and bicycle repair shops, among others. The Washington region’s orders also exempt plumbers, electricians and others needed for home repairs,” said The Post.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The resistance to shutdown states and or even certain geographical regions has been evident by lawmakers in the Southern US and Rust Belt.

    Kay Ivey, the Republican Gov. of Alabama, said now is “not the time to order people to shelter in place.” 

    “Y’all, we are not Louisiana, we are not New York state, we are not California,” Ivey said, suggesting that Alabama would not be a hard-hit area of the country. 

    In Missouri, Republican Gov. Mike Parson has been late to the game in issuing a stay-at-home order, that will go into effect on Monday. Parson was recently heard stating that he will not “make a blanket policy,” adding, “It’s going to come down to individual responsibilities.”

    Florida Republican Gov. Ron DeSantis has also been late in issuing a stay-at-home order, which was finally put forth last week amid rising deaths and cases across the state. 

    Tampa-area megachurch Pastor Rodney Howard-Browne defied a local order on banning of mass gatherings last weekend by holding a church service – was arrested by authorities on Monday. 

    Over the last month, President Trump has shifted his rhetoric on the virus from calling it “hysteria” and a Democratic hoax, to now announcing the outbreak as a national emergency and urging all Americans to work from home and avoid public spaces. However, a large swath of Americans still believes the virus is “fake news,” and are not letting the virus affect their daily lives, which suggests containing the virus might be even more difficult than expected for government agencies, and why stricter lockdowns could be next. 

    As for more stringent lockdowns that could be ahead, take note of what happened in Panama last week, as the government issued a gender-based lockdown limiting male and female from traveling to the supermarket on certain days. There’s even rumor in Mid-Atlantic/ Northeast states, that tighter lockdowns could be ahead as National Guard troops position around major metros. 

    And with many Americans resisting lockdowns, we noted last week that “intermittent” lockdowns and “widespread surveillance” to mitigate the virus spread could be the norm through 2022. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 20:55

  • What Comes After COVID-19, Freedom Or Despotism?
    What Comes After COVID-19, Freedom Or Despotism?

    Authored by Richard Ebeling via The American Institute for Economic Education,

    The coronavirus crisis that has enveloped the world has brought about calls for society and economy-wide action on the part of governments that has been matched by the imposing of radical shutdowns and compulsory mass quarantining as tens of millions of people are told to not to go to work and to stay at home instead.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Governments have also been redirecting essential medical and related supplies in some places. In the United States, direct governmental commands for companies and industries to change what and how they produce has been declared to be in the executive hands of the president of the United States, when it is deemed necessary to meet the needs of the health crisis.

    President Donald Trump’s recent order for the automobile manufacturer, General Motors, to shift its production potentials to the manufacturing of ventilators for those stricken severely by the virus, under the authority of a Korean-war era piece of legislation, is merely an especially high-profile example of the central planning powers that governments have been asserting the right to implement.

    Fundamental to everything that governments have been doing is the presumption that the crisis can only be handled and solved through a comprehensive system of political command and control. The chorus of voices making this case, along with their own proposals as to what should be the ingredients of “the plan,” has been deafening.

    The Deafening Chorus of Voices for Central Planning

    John Cassidy, writing for The New Yorker (March 28, 2020), insists that “the most effective stimulus policy is doing whatever it takes to get some control over the virus’s trajectory.” He praised the bipartisanship of the Democrats and Republicans in successfully passing the $2 trillion spending package to “stabilize” the economy in the face of various levels of government ordering people to stop working and, therefore, to slow down or stop the flow of various goods and services from which come the streams of income dependent upon supplies being produced to meet market demands.

    Over at “Project Syndicate,” Harvard University professor Carmen M. Reinhart says “the lockdown and distancing policies that are saving lives also carry an enormous economic cost,” and insists, “Clearly, this is a ‘whatever-it-takes’ moment for large-scale outside-the-box fiscal and monetary policies.”

    Also writing for “Project Syndicate,” economists Roman Frydman (New York University) and Edmund S. Phelps (Columbia University and Nobel Prize winner) declare that, “the possibility of millions dying as the economy is crippled justifies substantially scaling up the extent and the scope of government action . . . citizens and governments should be prepared to pay what might appear an extravagantly high premium.”

    Among the government actions that Frydman and Phelps propose are the government redirecting the existing productive capacity to meet health care equipment shortages; financially supporting business firms to supply “essential” goods and services; supplying the needed quantities of money so people have the financial means to continue buying the goods and services they need; and a program to cover home and other mortgages of those no longer able to meet their regular financial obligations.

    They want government “helicopter money” to be ongoing rather than a one or two-shot affair to meet the financial requirements of virtually everyone’s buying needs. To meet the needed production requirements to manage health demands from the virus, they say that the private sector cannot be trusted to do the job on its own; thus, the government must determine and direct what firms produce, for which purposes, in what quantities, and with government funding to make sure the job gets done.

    To prevent price gouging for such products and failure to pay reasonable salaries to the workers doing these jobs, they also basically calling for price and wage controls to assure “reasonable wages” and prices for the products at “pre-crisis levels.” If we can get it all just right, the coronavirus will be defeated, they are saying, and the world will be saved from disaster. We just need the right central plan designed in its details just the right way.

    Planning Political Paternalism in the Post-Coronavirus Era

    Of course, others are already looking beyond the coronavirus crisis to what lessons will have been learned for enlightened and “rational” intervention to guide human conduct away from its just-too-human follies and foibles. James Kirkup, the director of the London-based Social Market Foundation, therefore, asks, “Will the Pandemic Kill Off Libertarianism?” (March 25, 2020).

    He criticizes rational choice theory in economics because it assumes that human beings are “rational” calculating machines who dispassionately weigh the implied costs and benefits from their actions, including the knowable and objective probabilities of the risks from following one course of action instead of another. Then each of the social and market agents makes the more or less “correct” decision concerning what to do and in what directions.

    But when James Kirkup looks around, he finds that real human beings operate very far from such a benchmark of rational conduct and decision-making. Every reasonable person, fairly early on once the implications of the coronavirus were publicly known, should have stopped going to pubs or their local gym; they should have no longer socialized in common areas like public parks or in the shoulder-to-shoulder everyday marketplace.

    People just would not do the reasonable and rational things to assure their own health and safety as well as all those around them, including friends and family members. The critics of traditional economic theory were, once more, shown to be right – people are not rational calculators of the reasonable courses of action to follow. They are shortsighted in their thinking, they are illogical estimators of dangers and risks to themselves and others, and, therefore, they follow misguided notions of their self-interest that not only harms themselves but the rest of society as well.

    Or as Kirkup suggests, “If people aren’t rational about a situation that risks tens of thousands of lives and deep damage to our society and economy, how much weight should we put on the idea of rational actors in future? . . . Put it another way: once you’ve closed pubs and banned people from going outside, imposing, say, a tax to deter people from consuming sugary drinks is going to seem like a very small thing indeed.”

    Critics of Personal Choice, Old and New

    So here we have a very interesting intellectual and ideological twist of fate. For more than 150 years, critics of the market disdained the economist’s emphasis on individual choice and pursuit of personal gain, especially reflected in the businessman’s quest for profit.

    These critics insisted that there was more to life than self-interest and material betterment; that man was a social animal connected with others outside of just himself that transcended personal profit and loss. There were the deeper attachments and senses of shared belonging of “blood and soil” and the transcendent community into which one was born. In addition, the “rational economic man” model in economics was also condemned by these earlier critics for assuming such rationality when, “clearly,” man is guided in reality by illogical and irrational views, values, and visions of what is good or bad, and reasonable or reckless.

    Now we find among the latest generation of critics of the free market the argument turned around, with it being said that precisely because humans are not these rational economic calculators of costs and benefits, and of personal and social gains and harms, the government must radically intervene in various and sundry ways to make people’s actions consistent with conduct that would reflect such rational economic calculations, if only human beings could be trusted with the freedom to act in such ways!

    The post-coronavirus world, according to Kirkup, will have to be one of extended and extensive political paternalism to reduce the impact of human imperfection in people’s thinking processes and actions, in both great and small ways, that do not represent the “right choices” for themselves or others in society.

    In other words:

    “I’m with the government, and I am here to make you live your life and act in ways you should and would want to, if only you were as reasonable, rational, and logical as those in government who have been assigned the task of designing policies that will ‘nudge’ you in the directions that you will or should be thankful for, regardless if you realize it right now or in the future.”

    The Hubris of the Political Paternalism

    Herein lies both arrogance and hubris. There is the presumption of having found and distilled the correct and objective standards of judging and weighing alternatives on the basis of which the most rational choice would be made, when properly and accurately considering the relevant costs and benefits and degree and forms of risk facing each and every individual.

    Who knows the logically correct and factually accurate data in the context of which a person should be making his decisions and choices? Clearly, the implied social engineer, the political paternalist, the economic “nudger” who will either directly command by requiring or prohibiting forms of conduct, or who will influence the terms of trade-offs “indirectly” through taxation, subsidy or regulation to move people into the proper courses of action.

    This implies two ideas:

    first, that the planner and nudger knows the optimal or more desirable social outcome as a whole to which all the actions of the particular individuals should be moving the society; and,

    second, that the actions commanded or influenced by such government interventions are really “right” for the individual.

    Behind this type of thinking, whether admitted to or not, is the belief that the social nudger assumes himself to be so far above and superior to others in his theoretical understanding, factual information, and valuational understanding of what is good for mankind and for all the individuals who make up humanity that he freely takes upon himself the authority and power to mold the shape of society and the destinies of all in it into the form that he considers the best.

    Unintended Consequences of Human Action and History

    Over 250 years after the Scottish moral philosopher Adam Ferguson (1723-1816) published his Essay on the History of Civil Society (1767), is it necessary to remind people of the reality of the limits to our knowledge and understanding of ourselves, others, and all the unanticipated and unknowable outcomes from the multitudes of mankind’s members interacting? Or that attempts to direct people in ways that they find undesirable only sets the stage for various forms of social conflict? Said Ferguson:

    Mankind, in following the present sense of their minds, in striving to remove inconveniences, or to gain apparent and contiguous advantages, arrives at ends to which their imagination could not anticipate . . . He who first said, ‘I will appropriate this field: I will leave it to my heirs’; did not perceive, that he was laying the foundation of civil law and political establishments . . .

    Men, in general, are sufficiently disposed to occupy themselves in forming projects and schemes; but he who would scheme and project for others, will find an opponent in every person who is disposed to scheme for himself . . .The crowd of mankind, are directed in their establishments and measures, by the circumstances in which they are placed; and seldom turned from their way, to follow the plan of any single projector.

    Every step and every movement of the multitudes, even in what are termed enlightened ages, are made with equal blindness to the future; and nations stumble upon establishments [institutions], which are indeed the result of human action, but not the execution of any human design . . .It may with more reason be affirmed of communities, that they admit of the greatest revolutions where no change is intended, and that the most refined politicians do not always know whither they are leading the state by their projects. (p. 122)

    Or as Austrian economist, Ludwig von Mises (1881-1973) concisely expressed it in Theory and History (1957):

    The historical process is not designed by individuals. It is the composite outcome of the intentional actions of all the individuals. No man can plan history. All he can plan and try to put into effect is his own actions which, jointly with the actions of other men, constitute the historical process. The Pilgrim Fathers did not plan to found the United States. (p. 196)

    These presumptuous political paternalists, claiming to know what is best for every individual and optimally good for the society as a whole, show an indefensible hubris in asserting that they can step out of the very society and historical processes of which they are a single participant and know with necessary and sufficient certainty how the destiny of humankind should be directed, to be nudged into the best of all worlds?

    This was emphasized by another Austrian economist, Friedrich von Wieser (1851-1926) in Social Economics (1914):

    The economy is full of social institutions which serve the entire economy and are so harmonious in structure as to suggest that they are the creation of an organized social will . . . Such a social institution is illustrated by money, by the economic market, by the division of labor . . . finally by the economy [as a whole] itself, which is the greatest of these institutions, and includes all the others . . .

    How could any general contractual agreement be reached as to institutions whose being is still hidden in the mists of the future, and is only conceived in an incomplete manner by a few far-seeing persons, while the great mass can never clearly appreciate the nature of such an institution until it has actually attained it full form and is generally operative? (p. 162)

    Imperfect Would-be Paternalists are Closet Despots

    Do these would-be nudging paternalists not get up each morning and put on their pants one leg at a time like the rest of us? Do they not sometimes give into everyday temptations and desires that their social scientific objectivity tells them is not always in their best interest? Are they not subject to the same imperfections and limits of knowledge like you and I are in often having retrospective thoughts on the errors and mistakes we have made? In other words, are they demigods to be trusted with the future of each and every one of us and the general society in which we all live? I will go out on a limb and suggest, probably not!

    If they are correct that human foibles are too serious to be left up to the free choices of the individuals who make them, then how can those same imperfect and irrational individuals be trusted with the democratic right to vote for those who will be elected to government office? Not always knowing where their true interests lie, might they not elect wrong-thinking politicians who fail to appoint these very political paternalists to the policy making positions, without whose help society and the individuals in it could be doomed to disastrous consequences?

    Is there, here, the faint scent of ideological and political despotism? Do these paternalists not have an inkling that as would-be government policy nudgers they are really societal noodges, political pests, irritatingly telling people how they should live, when those poor, irrational people – yes, you and me – would rather decide this for themselves?

    And this gets us around to the earlier writers who we mentioned, above, those who consider a free, competitive, decentralized marketplace of supply and demand the wrong place to place trust in to solve the problems of a societal plague such as the coronavirus.

    Comparing the Market to How Government Really Works

    A good number of years ago, UCLA economist Harold Demsetz (1930-2019) pointed out the not infrequent tendency of critics of the market economy to compare markets as they work in the real world with a hypothetical ideal of a perfectly informed and only public interest-minded government, the latter being what he called the “the nirvana viewpoint.” It is then deduced that there are “market failures” all around us in contrast to a world in which that ideal government, manned by all-knowing, and perfectly “rational” politicians and bureaucrats, were put in charge instead.

    Demsetz said that the working of real markets should be compared to how real governments operate. It would soon be seen that the society suffers from an abundant quantity of “government failures” in contrast to a vibrant and highly successful market economy.

    When these critics who doubt the effectiveness of the market economy in a crisis such as the coronavirus suggest turning to the government to manage the problem, they suffer from the nirvana viewpoint that Demsetz challenged. The media has been full of stories about the failures of the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and the Centers for Disease Control (CDC) in both thoughtfully preparing for such a dangerous health risk before it arrived, and then their bureaucratic rigidity and attempts at protecting their monopoly turf in failing to allow developments of private testing techniques for the virus, or the operation of independent labs performing the tests to speed up results, or in not permitting the manufacturing and supplying of essential medical equipment by private producers not completely under their regulatory thumbs.

    What could be better examples of government failure, failures that are inherent in the way bureaucracies operate in top-down central planning structures of regulatory control and command. Information has to be collected and digested at various local points, then passed on up through the bureaucratic control chain to different levels of evaluation and summary until it reaches a high enough level of policy decision-making that an actual plan concerning a course of action may be designed and ordered to be implemented.

    At each level is the “human element,” not just in the sense that people may make mistakes and poor judgments. But, also, in that the people at each level have their own implicit motives and agendas relating to their department’s authority and budget that influences how those responsible for evaluating and passing on information to the next higher level consider what is or is not “important” and relevant and consistent with the procedures and rationales for what each in the bureaucratic hierarchy is doing. This is the real world of government, not some hypothetical utopia of magical, wand-waving government that is ready, willing and able to solve all the problems of the world.

    Allowing People to Use Localized Knowledge of Time and Place

    In the meantime, people “on the ground” often are limited or restricted in their ability to use their own knowledge and judgments, based on their own skills, experiences, and abilities, to solve part of the problem, if they only had the liberty to try.

    To give just one instance, Wales Online recently told the story of a Welshmen who devised a way to design and quickly construct a ventilator that can serve as a highly workable device in place of the more scarce and more costly traditional ventilators used in hospital ICUs. Dr. Rys Thomas designed it in three days drawing upon his military and civilian experience with the use of anesthetics and resuscitation; he began manufacturing in partnership with a small private enterprise. It was allowed to be produced with little red tape, fortunately, by the Welsh government. But if Dr. Thomas had had to submit documentation, proof of testing and trials, and a lengthy approval process according to the usual FDA procedures here in the United States, people might have died that are being helped to breathe right now in Wales.

    This is the type of discovery and adaptation to changing circumstances that Austrian economist Friedrich A. Hayek (1899-1992), had in mind, I would suggest, when in his famous article on “The Use of Knowledge in Society” (1945), he referred to the special and local knowledge of time and place possessed by individuals “on the spot.” By people having the latitude and liberty to not only see an opportunity but the discretion and freedom to try to use it in advantageous ways, we all benefit from what other individuals, whom we know nothing about, may do that will end up benefiting us in ways we could not have originally imagined.

    This all highlights, in my view, why the emphasis upon and calls for the concentration of centralized decision-making and planning by government in meeting the challenge of the coronavirus is completely wrong-headed. It should be exactly the reverse. We should not want to restrict what people are able and could do to one overarching and imposed leadership team meant to guide and coordinate all that is going on in society to overcome the health crisis through which we are all passing.

    The whole purpose of competitive markets and the price system is to have an institutional setting in which each individual in his own corner of society and the social system of division of labor may freely utilize what he comes up with and sees as possible answers to various aspects of the problems constantly popping up in different places, in different ways, with different features and requirements, given the way the virus is spreading and impacting different areas and communities.

    The continuous changeability and adaptability of a competitive price system serves to indicate to any and all interested or potentially relevant fellow members of society where demand is greatest for various items and services, and what supplies are available in which quantities to meet those shifting needs in different parts of the country, and, indeed, around the world. Prices and wages are the best rationing guide for people to economize “here” as best they can, until some supplies relatively more abundant and less urgently needed “there” can be transported and transferred from one part of the country to another.

    Don’t Short-Circuit the Price System with Controls

    That very much ridiculed and condemned profit motive acts as a wonderful incentive mechanism for people to more accurately anticipate the patterns of future market demands for these health-related products and to adjust to changes when they have not had perfect forethought in a world in which the future can never be perfectly known.

    The last thing that should be imposed are price and wage controls, like Roman Frydman and Edmund Phelps and others have been calling for. This short-circuits the institutional mechanism that enables the coordination of more people who know far more than any one or handful of minds can ever know to best utilize what everyone can contribute to solving any one problem and those other problems that are in competition for the scarce resources and labor services of the society.

    Through the price system, we all contribute through our demands and our abilities to supply to compositely determine what should be produced, where and how it should be produced, and for whom at any moment of time and over periods of time in changing circumstances. No other economic and social system of human association and cooperation has ever been found to better improve the condition of humankind, both in sickness and in health, and in “normal times” as well as in serious emergencies and crises, as the competitive, price-guiding market economy. (See my article, “Price Controls Attack the Freedom of Speech”.)

    Finally, this also brings us back to James Kirkup’s presumption on the claimed irrationality of real human beings and the need to paternalistically nudge us all into the direction of choice-making based upon a postulated model of “rational economic man.” It is not a secret that we all, in hindsight, make numerous mistakes and misjudgments in our choices. I know this certainly applies to me; just ask my wife, who never tires of reminding me of my follies and foibles!

    But I would suggest that often what the political paternalist, with his model of supposedly objective, rational behavior, is missing is the fact that much of what is criticized and condemned as illogical or irrational conduct needing “nudged” correction are often reasonable and rational choices, if only looked at in the context of the local knowledge and circumstances that only that individual may possess and fully appreciate concerning the situation, opportunities, and costs as he sees them during and over any given period of time.

    What we need, in general, concerning our fellow human beings is a humility that we do not and cannot really know enough to tell others how they should live and for what purposes. Furthermore, none of us, even the self-appointed social engineers, know enough to plan the direction and destiny of human society.

    As Ferguson and Mises and Wieser reminded us, social and historical processes are far too complex, multifaceted and unknowable to plan the destination of mankind. This all is no less true when needing to call upon and coordinate the knowledge and abilities of millions to confront a health crisis like the coronavirus. Liberty remains the best means of saving and bettering mankind.

    What is the underlying premise behind all of these arguments, whether focused on the immediate coronavirus crisis or looking beyond to the world after the crisis is behind us?

    It is that freedom does not work or does not work as effectively as the critic thinks it should if this health crisis is to be successfully grappled with. It is once again considered to represent a “failure of the market” that can only be compensated and corrected for by turning command and control over to the government and to the guiding judgments and decisions of those holding high political office and the presumed “experts” manning the bureaus, agencies and departments that make up the government.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 20:30

  • This KKR-Backed Healthcare Firm Just Slashed Doctors' Pay In The Middle Of An "Unprecedented" Pandemic
    This KKR-Backed Healthcare Firm Just Slashed Doctors’ Pay In The Middle Of An “Unprecedented” Pandemic

    Even if they aren’t exactly certain how the business model works, Twitter blue checks and the rest of the mainstream media – having been whipped into an anti-banker fervor by Bernie Sanders and the last glowing embers of Occupy – never pass up an opportunity to kick private equity in the nuts.

    And if there’s one industry where private equity has done the most to directly harm American public, it’s health care.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Envision’s Colorado headquarters

    During the latter part of the Democratic primary campaign, Bernie Sanders and Elizabeth Warren primed the pump by extolling the evils of private equity to the public every chance they got, helping impress the term into the memory banks of legions of twentysomethings how the industry had contributed to America’s health-care crisis, along with a multitude of other societal ills. Now, with the world in the grip of an unprecedented crisis, the industry is about to get pilloried once again – but this, much, much bigger than before, we suspect – as private equity-backed health-care companies, loaded down from their LBO debt binges, are forced to make cutbacks including slashing pay for doctors and nurses in the middle of a pandemic that has already killed nearly 9,500 Americans.

    And now the KKR-backed Envision Healthcare Corp., one of the biggest medical providers backed by private equity, is poised to become the poster-child for Wall Street greed as it informs hundreds of doctors in its employ will not be receiving the bonus checks they had been expecting in April. Though we suspect this isn’t a complete surprise, the cuts will deprive hundreds of doctors of roughly one-third of their total comp during an already extremely difficult time for them and their families. The company has promised to repay them at a later date once their financial situation has improved.

    The move risks igniting a blowback that could make KKR one of “the most hated companies in the world. Just ask Martin Shkreli.

    But the reason the company’s financial position is so poor in the first place is because Envision carries more than $7 billion of debt. This debt was amassed during what was, according to data compiled by Bloomberg, the third-largest health-care LBO ever.

    In a statement, Envision said it’s “100% focused” on saving lives during this crisis, even though its business (ambulatory surgical centers and medical staffing) shrank more than 75% in two weeks, Bloomberg said. With so many Americans hiding at home and fearful of entering hospitals and doctor’s offices, people are delaying elective and non-emergency care at unprecedented rates.

    “We are on the front lines caring for patients during this unprecedented public health and economic crisis,” the Nashville, Tennessee-based company said. “Envision Healthcare is 100 percent focused on saving lives and sustaining the nation’s fragile health-care system. The safety net we provide for millions of patients must remain fully intact for when we get to the other side of this national crisis.”

    Like many companies, Envision completely drew down its two credit lines to provide financial flexibility in recent weeks (apparently it didn’t listen to Larry Kudlow and Mnuchin). The company spends about $1.5 billion on compensation for physicians quarterly, an insider reportedly told BBG. The company has about $140 million to $150 million in debt payments due in the next two weeks, according to Mike Holland of Bloomberg Intelligence, and has $650 million of cash on its balance sheet. It has warned investors that it might need to raise more financing if circumstances continue to deteriorate.

    The biggest problem for KKR, is that some of the physician groups are planning to sue the company; litigation could draw unwanted attention to KKR at a time when public anger is dangerously high.

    But as the ‘cockroach’ theory suggests, Envision isn’t alone: The boom in LBOs (part of the binge on corporate debt that also fueled the surge in buybacks) left many companies, especially in the health-care space, where many companies were built via a series of costly mergers and acquisitions.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 20:05

  • On The Precipice Of Martial Law
    On The Precipice Of Martial Law

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    In my recent paper Why Assume There Will Be a 2020 Election?, I took the opportunity of today’s multifaceted crisis in order to revisit an important Wall Street funded coup d’état effort of 1933-34.

    As I explained in that location, this bankers’ coup was luckily exposed by a patriotic general named Smedley Darlington Butler during one of the darkest moments of America and profoundly changed the course of history.

    The Deep State Plot Against JFK

    The danger of World War and a military coup arose again during the short lived administration of John F. Kennedy who found himself locked in a life or death struggle not with Russia, but with the Military Industrial Complex that had become dominated by the many Dr. Strangeloves of the Joint Chief of Staff and CIA who fanatically believed that America could win a nuclear war with Russia.

    Kennedy’s valiant efforts to achieve dialogue with his Soviet counterparts, move towards peace in Vietnam, support of colonial liberation, promotion of space exploration and advocacy of a Nuclear Test Ban treaty made him a target of the Deep State of his time. During this period, this effort was led from the top by JFK’s two most powerful American opponents: Allan Dulles (director of the CIA) and General Lyman Lemnitzer (head of the Joint Chiefs of Staff), both of whom were proponents of pre-emptive nuclear war, architects of the Bay of Pigs regime change trap and advocates of Operation Northwoods (an ultimate “inside job” precursor to 9/11 which JFK subverted).

    As historian Anton Chaitkin recently reported:

    “Lemnitzer had displayed what his faction viewed as his qualifications for this role back in August 1960, when, as Army chief of staff, he announced that the Army was all ready to “restore order” in the United States after a nuclear war with the Soviet Union—to bring back normalcy just as the military does after a flood or a riot”

    This plot was detailed in a quasi-fictional book written by investigative journalists Fletcher Knebel and Charles Bailey published in 1962 entitled Seven Days in May and swiftly made into a famous film with unprecedented support by JFK himself who gave the film crew and director John Frankenheimer full access to the White House, advisors and materials for the film which he believed every American should see.

    In the story, a patriotic lieutenant discovers the plans for the coup which is scheduled to take place during a vast military drill whereby a President who is close to finalizing a de-armament treaty with Russia will be incapacitated in a bunker while a military regime takes over America.

    Tragically, where the lieutenant is able to expose the plot and save the nation in the story, by the time of the film’s 1964 release, JFK had been deposed by other means.

    Now 56 years later, history has begun to repeat itself with distinctly 21st century characteristics… and a viral twist.

     

    The Stage is Again Set for Martial Law

    Another President resistant to regime change and nuclear confrontation with Russia and China finds himself today in the White House in the form of Donald Trump.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As in 1933, today’s financial collapse threatens to rip the social and economic fabric of America to shreds, and just as in 1963 a powerful military industrial complex and private banking system manages a web of power which is devoted to overturning the 2016 election (and 1776 revolution) by any means.

    The biggest difference today is that a global coronavirus pandemic threatens to be the catalyzer used to justify military dictatorship in America and broader nuclear confrontation with Russia and China.

    Instead of names like “Dulles”, or “Lemnitzer”, today’s coup directors feature such names as “Pompeo” and “O’Shawnessy”… both Deep State assets highly positioned in 3rd and 4th place to take over the Presidency at the drop of a hat.

    Terrence O’Shawnessy: The Man Who Could Be President

    Having slipped silently under the radar four weeks ago, the American Government passed a new emergency protocol into law which vastly expands powers and procedures of Martial Law under “Continuity of Government” which must be taken very seriously.

    These new protocols deal at length with the triggering of Martial Law should the nation become ungovernable through a variety of foreseeable scenarios that COVID-19 has unleashed, such as “unwanted violence” caused by “food shortage, financial chaos” or also if the President, Vice President and Secretary of State all become incapacitated for any reason.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even though this act was classified “Above Top Secret” a surprisingly in depth March 18 Newsweek report by William Arkin documented how the “Combat Commander” of U.S. Northern Command (NORTHCOM) will immediately take power as a part of the “Continuity of Government” procedures which took on monstrous dimensions under the control of Dick Cheney in the wake of 9/11. According to Newsweek, the new regulation drafted by the Joint Chiefs states that the military may take control where “duly constituted local authorities are unable to control the situation” even when “authorization by the President is impossible”. Arkin describes the new protocols for “devolving” leadership to second-tier officials in remote and quarantined locations.

    General O’Shawnessy, (former Deputy of UN Command in Korea) currently doubles as the head of the North American Aerospace Defense Command (NORAD) and has devoted his past 14 months to the promotion of a military confrontation over the Arctic which he has described as “the new frontline of our homeland defense” against Russia and China who are “determined to exploit the region’s economic and strategic potential”.

    NORTHCOM went operational on October 1, 2002 as part of the Neocon takeover of America. This neocon coup which came to full fruition with 9/11 was governed by a manifesto entitled the Project for a New American Century  which laid out a Pax Americana of police state measures at home, regime change abroad and containment of a rising China and Russia under a religious belief in a unipolar world order.

    This continental organization interfaces closely with both FEMA and the Department of Homeland Security, and was given a wide jurisdiction embracing not only the USA but also Mexico, Canada, Puerto Rico and the Bahamas, acting as “primary defender of an invasion of America”. NORTHCOM interfaces closely with the deep state by hosting personnel from the FBI, CIA, NSA and Defense Intelligence Agency in its headquarters and is responsible for the protection of the President, Vice President and Secretary of State.

    Most recently, RT has reported on March 28 that O’Shawnessy has ordered teams of “essential staff” deep into vast bunkers 650 meters below the surface in Cheyenne Mountain, Colorado to “wait out the COVID-19 crisis”. Announcing this secretive mission, the General tweeted “Our dedicated professionals of the NORAD and NORTHCOM Command and control watch have left their homes, said goodbye to their families and are isolated from everyone to ensure they can stand watch each and every day to defend our homeland.”

    Other military personnel have been banned from travelling and commanded to stay near their bases ready for action and as of March 30, over 14 600 National Guard forces have been deployed to all 50 states. Although they cannot currently engage in policing due to the 1878 US Posse Comitatus Act, Martial Law would render that provision null and void.

    It is also noteworthy that only one day after the Coronavirus was labelled an “international public health emergency” by the World Health Organization on January 30, Defense Secretary Mark Esper approved nationwide pandemic plans and warned NORTHCOM to “prepare to deploy”.

    This author doesn’t believe it to be a coincidence that patriotic voices who would typically be opposed to such a Martial Law agenda have been taken out of public life due to chaos emerging from the Coronavirus with Senator Ron Paul’s March 22 COVID-19 diagnosis forcing him into quarantine and the politically naive Tulsi Gabbard’s dropping out of the presidential race in order “to be prepared for the national guard duties”. It isn’t very hard to imagine a COVID-19 diagnosis, real or fabricated to take the President and other members of the government out of office at a moment’s notice.

    Time is running out for America and only bold, decisive action taken courageously and swiftly can change the course of self-annihilation upon which the republic now finds itself.

    Presidents Xi Jinping and Putin have opened their arms to welcome America and other western nations into their new multipolar system which is built not upon a worship of money or militarism, but rather cooperation and creative mutual growth. Project Airbridge collaboration between China and the USA has begun as a part of the Health Silk Road bringing millions of medical supplies to America.

    Meanwhile a brilliant coalition of former Latin American heads of State called for the creation of a new just economic order and debt jubilee as a response to the failure of the neoliberal system which shines a principled light out of the current threefold danger of economic collapse, war and Martial Law.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 19:40

  • Surgeon General: Next Week Will Be Our 'Pearl Harbor And 9/11 Moments'
    Surgeon General: Next Week Will Be Our ‘Pearl Harbor And 9/11 Moments’

    Surgeon General Dr. Jerome Adams told NBC‘s “Meet the Press” that next week’s national coronavirus situation would be “our Pearl Harbor moment,” adding “It’s going to be our 9/11 moment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Responding to a question on state-specific stay-at-home orders, Adams said “I talked to many of these governors, and here’s what I say to them. Here’s what I would say to them right now. The next week is going to be our Pearl Harbor moment. It’s going to be our 9/11 moment. It’s going to be the hardest moment for many Americans in their entire lives, and we really need to understand that if we want to flatten that curve and get through to the other side, everyone needs to do their part.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Adams says that “Ninety percent of Americans are doing their part – even on those states where they haven’t had a shelter-in-place.” He then asked governors to give the Trump administration at least a week – if they can’t give them 30-days, “so we don’t overwhelm our health care systems over this next week,” adding that they would reassess at that point.

    “We want everyone to understand; you have to be Rosie the Riveter. You have to do your part.”

    Mask-gate…

    Adams has also been backpedaling bigly on his February 29th recommendation to “STOP BUYING MASKS” – as he claimed they “are NOT effective in preventing general public from catching #Coronavirus.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Wrong.

    To cover his tracks, Adams told MSNBC “Here’s what’s changed. We now know that, uh, about 25% and some studies even more, of COVID-19 is transmitted when you are asymptomatic or pre-symptomatic.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Except we’ve known about asymptomatic transmission since at least January; as we wrote on January 27th: “Incubation is asymptomatic, contagious, and can be as long as 14 days.”

    Meanwhile, several counties around the country are now mandating face coverings in public – and the CDC has considered recommending that people wear face masks all the time.

    More Adams clips:

    Meanwhile, the latest as of this writing:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.jshttps://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 19:15

  • Another Terrible Idea In San Francisco…
    Another Terrible Idea In San Francisco…

    Authored by Erica Sandberg via City-Journal.org,

    As the United States continues its “pause,” shuttering businesses and public spaces in order to prevent transmission of the coronavirus, residents are compelled to shelter inside their homes. Meantime, those who live on the streets remain outside. San Francisco is well known for its persistent homeless population, made up heavily of drug addicts, the mentally ill, or both. For now, individuals congregate in tents and encampments and drug suppliers continue to deal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Before Covid-19 struck, San Francisco officials took no meaningful action to address the squalid conditions under which so many homeless people live. They threw money at the problem, but the problem grew. Homeless activists and some city leaders have argued that living on the street is a right, but today it presents a serious public-health dilemma: how will officials get homeless people to comply with social-distancing requirements, and what should they do with those who’ve contracted the virus?

    The city is working to set up the Moscone Center as a shelter, a sensible idea. An even better one would be to revive the recently closed California Pacific Medical Center hospital campus and erect MASH-style medical units. These would allow for closely monitored and efficient care. In fact, the city could use this as an opportunity to provide intensive integrated treatment, including substance-abuse services.

    Instead, Mayor London Breed and the Human Services Agency came up with the plan to route over 3,000 people currently living in shelters and navigation centers into hotels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The city is planning to put thousands of physically and psychologically sick people into private hotel rooms, in some of the most luxurious hotels in San Francisco—the InterContinental, Mark Hopkins, and The Palace. Occupants would receive three meals per day, hygiene products, and access to nurses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At first glance, the plan appears sensible.

    The shutdown has devastated the hospitality industry, and hotels stand empty. Filling rooms with guests of any kind is attractive for hotel owners, especially since tax dollars will foot nearly all of the bill.

    On closer examination, however, serious problems emerge.

    According to Matt Haney, a city supervisor actively promoting the proposal, occupants would be quarantined to their assigned rooms and be required to follow strict rules. But many of these future luxury hotel guests are hardcore drug addicts. How will the city manage their drug needs in the midst of a pandemic?

    Haney concedes that intravenous drug use presents a major challenge to the city’s plan. It’s likely, for instance, that many guests will overdose in their rooms.

    Others may detox, alone and in agony. Providing addicts with access to maintenance medication such as Suboxone or methadone is a good idea, Haney says, yet these treatments require precise administration. No one has figured out the logistics of providing drug treatment to thousands of addicted residents who may not be interested in receiving it.

    Additionally, if the hotels are quarantined, and drug dealers aren’t allowed in, what will prevent the contagious residents from leaving to score the substances they seek? As cravings intensify, violence may erupt that can put hotel staff and other occupants at risk. Armed security guards patrolling the halls and buildings might be required to keep the right people in and the wrong people out. Could the police be expected to maintain order and prevent antisocial drug addicts from leaving their rooms? Apparently the city will offer some type of case management, but there’s already a dearth of needed homeless services, including high-quality psychiatric care. Treating this service-resistant population is challenging under the best circumstances. “It’s not going to be a perfect system,” says Haney.

    There’s also no exit plan. A four-month contract for the room occupants is being considered, but where all these people will go afterward is undetermined. California law stipulates that a person lodging in a hotel room for longer than 30 days is considered a tenant. Therefore, thousands of homeless people who have stayed in the posh hotels would become legal permanent residents, with protections against eviction.

    Even Haney acknowledges the problem.

    “The city should make it clear that they would not be considered tenants,” he says.

    “It needs to be temporary. Once the emergency is over, they should leave.”

    Yet sending people back onto the streets will surely be met with resistance from homeless-rights activists, some government officials, and the homeless themselves. Who would want to pack up and move from The Palace, after all?

    Few of the city’s decision-makers are looking at the long-term effects of placing sick, drug-addicted homeless people into hotel rooms.

    Once again, San Francisco is ignoring the law of unintended consequences.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 04/05/2020 – 18:50

Digest powered by RSS Digest